JP2017119137A5 - - Google Patents

Description

Gaming machine

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In the conventional game machine, it is performed variable display of symbols in the display device, by design of the type defined Me pre appears stopped, advantageously those or game is awarded to the player. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, and not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be performed to achieve the effect of the effect. It was diversified to improve the interest.

JP 2003-325886 A

  However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can improve the interest in the game of the player.

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured such that an effect executing means for executing an effect and a player is operable , and a first operation position and a second operation position different from the first operation position. An operation position, which can be changed to a plurality of operation positions including at least, and based on that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation unit while the effect is being executed by the effect execution unit. Effect variable setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing device to be changed to one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a predetermined specific effect mode. When, which had the and capable tangible portion that the player touches, a rotating member capable of rotational movement, at least different place than the center of gravity position in the rotating member as a rotation axis A movable unit capable of moving the friendly contact portion of the moving member by rotating operation, the rotating member is movable controlling the movable means to rotate operating at a rotational speed corresponding to the predetermined movable data A movable control means, and as the movable data, one of a plurality of movable data including at least a first movable data capable of moving a first position in the touchable portion by a movable operation different from other positions. Data setting means for setting movable data , wherein the effect variable setting means changes the effect mode of the effect based on the operation means being changed to one of the plurality of operation positions. The data setting means is configured to be changeable to the first operation position so that the operation means can be changed to one of the plurality of effect modes. And the first movable data can be set based on the execution of the effect of the type that can be changed to the specific effect mode determined by the first position. Is a position including at least an intersection of a straight line corresponding to a variable direction when the operation means is changed toward the first operation position and the touchable portion .

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the effect executing means for executing the effect, the player is configured to be operable, the first operation position, and the second operation position different from the first operation position, An operation means that can be changed to a plurality of operation positions including at least the effect execution means based on a predetermined operation being performed on the operation means while the effect is being executed by the effect execution means And the effect variable setting means for setting the effect mode of the effect executed by (1) to be changed to one of a plurality of effect modes including at least a predetermined specific effect mode. A rotatable member that can be touched by a player, a rotatable member that can be rotated, and the rotatable member that rotates about a predetermined position that is at least different from the center of gravity of the rotatable member. motion A movable means capable of moving the touchable portion by causing the movable member to move at a rotational speed corresponding to predetermined movable data, and a movable control means for movably controlling the movable means. As the movable data, one movable data is set from among a plurality of movable data including at least first movable data capable of moving the first position in the touchable portion by a different movable operation from other positions. Data setting means, wherein the effect variable setting means, based on that the operating means is changed to one of the plurality of operation positions, the effect mode of the effect is the plurality of effect modes And the data setting means is configured to be changed to the first operation position by changing the operation means to the first operation position. The first movable data is configured to be able to be set based on the execution of the effect of the type that can be changed into an aspect, and the first position is determined by the operation unit. It is configured of a position including at least an intersection of a straight line corresponding to a variable direction when the variable portion is moved toward the first operation position and the touchable portion .

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device with a La-La cross section, (b) is a cross-sectional view of Lb-Lb, and (c) is a top view of the variable winning device. (A)-(b) is a rear view of a part of the variable winning device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment, (b) is a big hit type selected in each game state in the first embodiment, and a case where a big hit type is selected FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a game state in which a transition is made to FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment, and (b) is a figure of a display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a 1st embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in the probability-change game state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in the probability-change game state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a frame button in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a selection switch in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine according to the first embodiment. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in a 1st embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a ROM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first random number table in the first embodiment; (b) is a diagram schematically showing a small random number table in the first embodiment; FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically illustrating a second random number table in the first embodiment. (A)-(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a general-purpose variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM of the main control device according to the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol big hit determination processing performed by MPU in the main control device in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating special figure 1 deviation variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 6 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol big hit determination processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation changing process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change pattern selection processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 deviation variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 departure stop process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a first prefetching process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a second prefetching process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a through gate passage process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an ending process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a notification process executed by an MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal process executed by the MPU in the main control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a start-up process performed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 4 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 change start process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 change start process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a stop type command reception process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a winning command process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed information lottery processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a status command receiving process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in a normal play state or a latently probable play state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode in the latent probability changing game state or the probability changing game state displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of the front of the game board of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in a 2nd embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the big hit game in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the second embodiment. It is an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the second embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first random number table in the second embodiment, (b) is a diagram schematically showing a small random number table in the second embodiment, (b) FIG. 3C is a diagram schematically illustrating a second random number table in the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to a second embodiment. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table set in a ROM of a main control device according to a second embodiment. (A)-(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a general-purpose variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. (B) is a schematic diagram showing the ROM of the main control device according to the second embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the set special electric auditors product operation table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special design change stop processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot end processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in the 1st modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in the 2nd modification of a 2nd embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd modification of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of display contents of a battle effect in a 3rd embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display contents of a continuous hit effect in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the display content at the time of the continuous hit of a player, and a voice mode in the continuous hit effect in 3rd Embodiment, (b) In the continuous hit effect in 3rd Embodiment, It is the figure which showed the display content at the time of the continuous hit interval of a player long, and the audio | voice aspect. (A) is a figure showing an example of a normal pressing sound output pattern in the continuous hitting effect in the third embodiment, and (b) is an example of a pressing sound output pattern of a chance up pattern in the third embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the content of the continuous striking effect selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is ROM in the sound lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the contents of a set pressing sound selection table. It is a figure showing the contents of the rank up selection table set up in ROM of the sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. 13 is a flowchart illustrating main processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed operation input monitoring and production processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit production control processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed command judgment processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed opening command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a time change of a pressing sound when a continuous hit interval of a player is short in a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a game in a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a time change of a pressing sound when a continuous hit interval of a user is long. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of an audio ramp control device according to a modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents of a RAM. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of an echo interval selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the modification of the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the audio according to the modification of the third embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of data stored in a pressing sound storage area set in a RAM of a lamp control device. It is a flow chart which showed operation input monitoring and production processing 3 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a modification of a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the press sound output processing performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous hit production control processing performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the modification of the third embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a swing operation member in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of a vibration motor in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a front view of a swing operation unit and an eccentric member when a uniform vibration mode is set in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an upward eccentric vibration mode in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a front view of the swing operation unit and the eccentric member when “” is set. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus during execution of an option effect in 4th Embodiment, and an example of the vibration aspect of a swing operation member, (b) is 4th execution. It is the figure which showed an example of the display content at the time of selecting the right option in the option effect in the form. (A) is a figure which showed the display content of the 3rd symbol display device at the time of a rare effect in the option effect in 4th Embodiment, (b) is execution of a reservation notice effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a vibration mode of a swing operation member in the inside, and display contents of a 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a vibration pattern during a small hit notification effect in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a vibration pattern during a large hit notification effect in the fourth embodiment. (C) is a diagram showing an example of a vibration pattern during a hold announcement effect in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a vibration pattern in the case of a small hit notification effect and a reservation notice effect competing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a PWM waveform when the swing operation member is controlled in a biased vibration mode in the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing the contents of a vibration scenario selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) of the vibration scenario selection table according to the fourth embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the content of the table for small hit notification production. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a main process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed operation input monitoring and production processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of operation detection performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed operation production control processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the process at the time of the press of the frame button performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed vibration setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 4 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed various notice setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed winning command processing 4 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a reservation notice setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of an acoustic waveform during a small hit notification effect in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is an example of a time change of the vibration intensity during the small hit notification effect in the fifth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of an acoustic waveform input to each channel in order to cancel voice and vibration of a part of effects when a plurality of effects accompanied by a vibration action compete in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of an audio output device according to a fifth embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a figure which showed the regulation content of the vibration conversion table set to ROM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment, (b) is content of ROM of the audio | voice output apparatus in 5th Embodiment. And (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the audio output device. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the hold | maintenance notice setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the fifth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a command interruption process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio output device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed audio setting processing performed by MPU in an audio output device in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a speech synthesis unit according to a modification of the fifth embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed the display content and audio | voice mode of the suspension notice effect corresponding to a weak notice in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment, (b) is the suspension notice corresponding to a strong notice. It is the figure which showed the display content of an effect, and the audio | voice aspect. (A) is a figure showing an example of an acoustic waveform of a weak notice sound in the first modification of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a strong notice sound in the first modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the acoustic waveform of FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM of an audio output device according to a first modification of the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process performed by the MPU in the audio | voice output device in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sound effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio output device in the 1st modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed strong notice control processing performed by MPU in a voice output device in the 1st modification of a 5th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of an audio output pattern which generates reverberation in a second modification of the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a reverberation in a second modification of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a sound output pattern for generating a sound. FIG. 21 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM of an audio output device according to a second modification of the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process performed by the MPU in the audio | voice output device in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the sound effect setting process 2 performed by the MPU in the audio output device in the second modification of the fifth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the reverberation sound control process performed by MPU in the audio output device in the 2nd modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a transition method of a game state in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a game method selection effect in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a safety mode entry effect in the sixth embodiment. is there. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a challenge mode entry effect in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an ending effect in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a destruction failure effect in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a game method selection effect in the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an ending effect in the sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to the sixth embodiment. (B) is a first random number defined in the ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the table typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a small hit random number table defined in the ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the ROM of the main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the prescribed 2nd random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the big hit type selection table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the main control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a time saving number selection table defined in a ROM of a main control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the time table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the table for V non-passage of the time saving frequency selection table in 6th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing typically the interval selection table prescribed in ROM of the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a time change of the operation of the positive variable solenoid after the third round of the jackpot in the sixth embodiment is completed, and (b) is a diagram in which the third round is completed in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing opening-and-closing operation of the 1st special winning a prize mouth when interval A is set up later, and (c) shows the 1st case when interval B is set up after 3 rounds are completed in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing the opening and closing operation of the special winning opening. FIG. 14 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM of a main control device according to a sixth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment, and (b) shows an electrical configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a batting style selection effect selection table defined in a ROM of a sound lamp control device in a sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special design change stop processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot operation setting processing 6 performed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an interval setup processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 6 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed main processing 6 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed game result information processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a command determination process 6 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device according to the sixth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit related command process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed an interval command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the ending command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed switch passage command processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a figure showing a transition method of a game state in the 1st modification of a 6th embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the table for V non-passage in the 1st modification of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an interval selection table according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure showing a transition method of a game state in a 7th embodiment. FIG. 14A is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM of a main control device according to a seventh embodiment. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram illustrating a first random number table defined in the ROM according to the seventh embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a second random number table defined in the ROM according to the seventh embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the big hit type selection table prescribed | regulated to ROM of the main control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration of a game state selection table defined in a ROM according to a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a probability change setting table according to the seventh embodiment. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time-saving setting table according to the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special figure 1 departure stop processing 7 performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit control processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows interval setting processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing 7 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 7th embodiment. It is a figure showing a transition method of a game state in a 2nd modification of a 6th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is the enlarged view which expanded a part of front part of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of a V winning device in an 8th embodiment. It is a three-view figure of the V winning device in an 8th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the inside of the V winning device in the 8th embodiment from the back. It is the figure which looked at the opening and closing door part of the V winning device in an 8th embodiment from the top. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the door is open. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a third symbol display device in Modification 1 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed by. (A) And (b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display aspect displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the modification 1 of 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in an 8th embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the modification 1 of 8th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the modification 1 of 8th Embodiment. It is a mimetic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in modification 1 of an 8th embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the game in the modification 1 of 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing typically composition of various counters in an 8th embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first random number table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 15C is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a special symbol 2 random number table in the eighth embodiment. (A)-(c) is a figure which showed typically the content of the 1st hit type selection table set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number 2 table set in the ROM of the main controller in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a main controller in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a small hit type selection two table set in a ROM of FIG. (A) is a figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern selection table set in ROM of the main control device in 8th Embodiment, (b) is ROM of main control device in 8th Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal variation pattern table set in FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time saving set in ROM of the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a figure showing typically contents of an opening scenario table set up in ROM of a main control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow figure showing transition of a game state in an 8th embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of RAM of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the display control device in an 8th embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure showing typically an example of a display data table in an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing typically an example of the transfer data table in an 8th embodiment. It is a figure showing typically an example of a drawing list in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an effective period monitoring processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop symbol processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit related process performed by MPU in an audio ramp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in an 8th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process. (A) is a flowchart showing the V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a V valid end command process. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a drawing process performed by MPU in a display control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the ninth embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the pachinko machine in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is a display mode of a 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 9th Embodiment. (A)-(d) is a schematic diagram which shows the score display aspect displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 9th Embodiment, and the expectation degree of each reach effect, (e)-(g) is It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of score display displayed on the third symbol display device in the ninth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a score giving effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a score giving effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a score giving effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a score giving effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a figure showing an example of the starting point of the 2nd reach mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is the figure displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is the figure which showed an example during execution of the 2 reach mode. (A) is a figure showing an example of the end of the 2nd reach mode displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in a 9th embodiment, and (b) is the 2nd reach displayed on the 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure showing an example of a mode result. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display screen which emphasizes right-hand among the small hitting game screens displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in 9th Embodiment, (b) is (a) ) Is a diagram showing an example of a case where a ball has won after displaying). It is a figure showing the outline of various counters in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a ROM in a main control device according to a ninth embodiment. (B) is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a first random number table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a special symbol 1 random number table in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the special symbol 2 random number table in 9th Embodiment typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special figure 1 big hit type selection table in the ninth embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically, (c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special figure 2 big hit type selection table in 9th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit type selection table in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table in the ninth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation pattern table for time saving in 9th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the content of the release scenario table in 9th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the game flow of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (A)-(f) is the timing chart which showed the operation | movement flow of the various apparatuses at the time of the small hit V passage in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the 1st notice selection table in 9th Embodiment typically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second notice selection table in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the awarded score selection table in the ninth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the display control device in a 9th embodiment. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a figure showing typically an example of a display data table in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing typically an example of a transfer data table in a 9th embodiment. It is a figure showing typically an example of a drawing list in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the timer interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special design change start processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit start setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving frequency update process performed by the MPU in the main control device in a ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows small hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows starting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the command judging processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a continuous notice giving score setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a hit related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a stop command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the score provision effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / production process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect correction process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reach mode amendment processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows correction processing for departure performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interruption process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a V interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a stop type command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating error command processing. It is a flow chart which showed a hit related command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process. (A) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hit start command processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a small hit end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a V entrance passage command process. It is a flow chart which showed V production command processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a press command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is a rewrite executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production command processing. It is a flow chart which showed display setting processing performed by MPU in a display in a 9th embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by the MPU in the display control apparatus in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a pointer update processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 9th embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the ninth embodiment. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a resident image transfer setting process. It is a flow chart which showed normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control device in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed a drawing process performed by MPU in a display control device in a 9th embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the flow of the effect in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the tenth embodiment, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the tenth embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the score effect scenario selection table set to ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the specified content of the specific effect execution selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the execution timing selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning information related processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the score effect scenario setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-scoring effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows final score effect setting processing performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final specific effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the effect variable process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 10th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow of an operation announcement effect in the first operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing operation timing and display contents of the operation announcement effect. FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a compound announcement effect displayed on a third symbol display device in a first operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a modification of each embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the frame button is not operated during the first period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in FIG. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a frame button is operated during the first period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. And (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. It is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a frame button is operated during the first period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. And (b) is a diagram showing another example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the first period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. It is. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when a frame button is operated during the second period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. And (b) is a diagram showing another example of a display mode when the frame button is operated during the second period of the composite announcement effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. It is. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice mode setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first operation effect example of each embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a score effect displayed on a 3rd symbol display device in an 11th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a score effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in an 11th embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the eleventh embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the specific fluctuation pattern selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the frequency selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the execution timing selection table set to ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the hit display score selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the departure display score selection table set in ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the score effect scenario setting processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows prior score effect setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in an eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting processing 2 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the audio ramp control device according to the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is an electrical configuration of a RAM in the audio ramp control device according to the twelfth embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the prescribed | regulated content of the score provision scenario selection table set to ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of a scenario variation pattern 1 selection table set in a ROM in a voice lamp control device according to a twelfth embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table set to ROM in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows score effect scenario setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows prior score effect setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows final score effect setting processing 3 performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a twelfth embodiment. (A) is a figure showing the period composition of each variation pattern in the 1st example of production of each embodiment, and (b) is a notice content performed during a notice period in the 1st example of production of each embodiment. FIG. It is the figure which showed the reach content performed during the reach period in the 1st effect example of each embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a sound lamp control device in a first effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a sound lamp control device in a first effect example of each embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the internal memory. It is the figure which showed typically the regulation content of the final fluctuation pattern selection table set in ROM in the sound ramp control device in the 1st production example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final score effect setting process 4 performed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first effect example of each embodiment. (A) and (b) are the figures which showed typically the flow of the production in the 2nd production example of each embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a sound lamp control device in a second effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a sound lamp control device in a second effect example of each embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the internal memory. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the final pre-scoring effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the last score effect setting process 5 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the countdown effect setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second effect example of each embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow of an operation announcement effect in the second operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an operation timing and a display timing of each announcement effect. FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in a sound lamp control device in a second operation effect example of each embodiment, and (b) is a sound lamp in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a RAM in the control device. It is a flowchart which shows the score provision effect setting process 6 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the comment notice setting process performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notice mode setting processing 6 performed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second operation effect example of each embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production update processing 6 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd operation production example of each embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 58. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and starting ports 630, 631, 640, 67 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, and the like, and is provided with a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape that projects forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a by the inclination. On the upper surface of the upper plate 17, a frame button 22 (FIG. 11A) and a selection switch 600 (see FIG. 11B) are provided. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the selection switch 600 includes a decision switch (a) for deciding the selection of an effect or the like, a left switch 600b for instructing a leftward selection, and an instructing upward selection. The upper switch 600c includes a right switch 600d for instructing a rightward selection, and a lower switch 600e for instructing a downward selection.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach, or the like, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right side illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the driving of the ball firing unit 112a is permitted. Sensor 51a, a push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by a change in electric resistance. (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the operation amount. The ball is fired at a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described configuration is used. However, the configuration is not limited thereto, and the main control device 110 and other control devices may detect a game ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a, or the solenoid of the ball firing unit 112a. May be configured to detect that the player has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “dollar box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, and a number of balls and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a first starting port 63 a, The starter 63b, the first variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member on the front surface of the game board 13 (a starting port or the like is provided, and a shot ball flows down). Area). The game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows before passing through the out port 66 or the winning port.

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 6) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated. Between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is formed by a base plate. 60 and fixed.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a first ordinary symbol starting port 67a and a second ordinary symbol starting port 67b below the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a are provided. The first normal symbol starting port 67a and the second normal symbol starting port 67b are formed in the same shape, and are configured as a gate type starting port having a sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball. I have. When the game ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b, a lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the game ball passing through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b, it is determined whether or not the game is a normal symbol.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80, which will be described later. Are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds), and then a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○” or “X”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit). If a ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67 or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of times the ball passes the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a is equal to that of the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a. It is held up to four times in total with the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the ordinary symbol starting port 67 (the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b) remains, the following is performed. Normally, a lottery of a symbol is performed, and a variable display according to the lottery is started.

  When it is determined that a normal symbol has been won, a symbol “○” indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 operates. The first ordinary electric accessory 632 has a left guide member 632a and a right guide member 632b, and is spaced apart from the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b so that one game ball can pass left and right. Normally, it is kept upright. A predetermined angle (in the present embodiment, the left guiding member 632a is 40 degrees counterclockwise and the right guiding member 632b is 40 degrees clockwise) from a state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b stand substantially vertically. When the game ball moves (that is, is changed to the open state) and the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member guide the game ball to the second starting port 640, the game ball enters the second starting port 640. It is in an easy state (special state). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been removed, a symbol “x” indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol has been removed is lit on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, and the next ordinary symbol (second symbol) is changed.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light-emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a seven-segment display 37b, which are light-emitting means, on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs a display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays a game state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a are balls that have won the first starting opening 630, the right starting opening 631, the second starting opening 640, the first normal design starting opening (through gate) 67a, and the second normal design starting opening (through gate) 67b. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variable display has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state. The number of rounds during the big hit and the error display are also indicated by the corresponding lighting states.

  The seven-segment display 37b includes two right and left seven-segment LEDs. In the 7-segment LED on the left side, a first special symbol indicating a determination (lottery) result of a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a first lottery game) based on winning in the first starting port 630 or the right starting port 631 is dynamically displayed (dynamic). Is displayed. Specifically, the variable display (in the present embodiment, the seven-segment display) is performed until the variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning in the first start port 630 or the right first start port 631 elapses. After the center segment blinks), it is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating the determination result. If the determination result is off, a symbol "-" indicating the off state in which one central segment is lit and displayed is displayed. On the other hand, when the result of the determination is a hit, a symbol different from the symbol indicating the deviation such as “3” or “7” corresponding to the hit is displayed.

  A second special symbol (dynamic display) indicating the result of the determination (lottery) of the lottery (second lottery game) based on winning in the second starting port 640 is displayed on the right-hand 7-segment LED (dynamic display). Specifically, it is displayed until the fluctuation time determined based on the winning in the second starting port 640 elapses, and is configured similarly to the first lottery game. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be indicated with a small number of LEDs by a combination of the emitted colors.

  In addition, the first special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the first lottery game and the second special symbol indicating the determination (lottery) result of the second lottery game are a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2) described later. See also). Thus, the third symbol display device 81 can perform various variable displays as compared with the seven-segment display 37b, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  As will be described later, a variation pattern (variation mode or dynamic display mode) in the pachinko machine 10 has a variation time set for each variation mode and corresponds to a dynamic display mode related to time information. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern can be divided into a long-term fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time and a short-time fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, based on a fluctuation pattern that becomes a reach and a fluctuation pattern that becomes a non-reach. In this manner, even when roughly sorted based on a fixed time reference (here, reach, non-reach, or reference time (for example, whether it is longer than 10 seconds)), dynamic information related to time information can be used. This corresponds to the display mode.

  As will be described later, the time information until the change start time corresponds to the time when the accurate change starts, and the time information of the rough change pattern described above (for example, whether the time information is a long time change pattern). No. or the like), information on time information (for example, the number of long-time fluctuation patterns performed before the start of fluctuation) determined on the basis of the above is also applicable.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery (first lottery game, second lottery game) performed for the winning in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, a big hit is made. In addition to performing the success / failure determination of the success (big hit lottery), the big hit type is also determined. The jackpot types determined here are the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), jackpot A (15R jackpot probability variable jackpot), jackpot B (15R ordinary jackpot), jackpot E (15R ordinary jackpot (electric supporter) 16) are set (see FIGS. 16A to 16C). Here, the presence of the electric support of the big hit E indicates that the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set so as to be easily set to the special state (open state). In the big hit E, after the 15 round big hit game, the electric support state is set until the number of times of the first lottery game and the second lottery game reaches 100 in total.

  As the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), two types of jackpot C (15R probability variable jackpot (with electric support)) and jackpot D (15R probability variable jackpot (without electric support)) are set (FIG. 16). (See (a) to (c)).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 is arranged as a winning device that is operated in an open state during the big hit game. The first variable prize device 65 is operated so that the first specific prize port 65a is opened 15 times in a predetermined period or until a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter the jackpots A to E. Is done.

  The configuration of the first variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the first variable winning device 65 is combined with an opening forming member 65b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and a back side of the opening forming member 65b to form a first variable winning device. A base member 65c for screwing the winning device 65 to the game board 13; and a LED disposed on the back side of the base member 65c to turn on the LED from the back side of the base member 65c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. LED board 65d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged, a back cover body 65e for holding the LED board 65d with the base member 65c, and a first special winning opening 65a formed in the opening forming member 65b. An opening / closing unit 65f having an opening / closing door 65f1, a flow path cover body 65g combined with the back side of the back cover body 65e to form a flow path, and a back cover body 65e. A switching member 65h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the road cover body 65g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 65i locked to the switching member 65h, and a rear surface side of the flow path cover body 65g. A rear cover body 65j, a flow path solenoid 65k fixed to the rear side of the rear cover body 65j to operate the link member 65i, and a screw to the rear cover body 65j covering the flow path solenoid 65k from the rear side. And a fixing cover body 65m for fixing by means of.

  FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. FIG. 5C is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65 taken along line Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 5B, the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning opening 65a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The first specific winning opening 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and is formed on the lower left so that the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 5B. An inclined bottom surface is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5 (b), the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a is set to an open state in which game balls can enter by an opening / closing door 65f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism that can come and go from the game board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state where the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 65f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper portion of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 65f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 65c (the interior of the game board 13) to be retracted from the first specific winning opening 65a.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the first variable winning device 65 and moves to the right first starting opening 631 side. It is configured to be guided. Therefore, even during a time-saving game (including during a probability change game), it is possible to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 640 with the right-handed state, and immediately after the jackpot game, the game method is changed to the left-handed. The trouble of changing can be reduced. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the first specific winning opening 65a. Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 5A is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5A, the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c such that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 65e.

  With reference to FIG. 6, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channel of the back cover body 65e are distributed to a normal discharge port 65e1 and a special discharge port 65e2 described later.

  FIG. 6A is a rear view of the back cover body 65e showing a state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 65e2. As shown in FIG. 6A, the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted, and a guiding piece 65h2 for guiding a game ball, and the flow path cover body 65g. Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the passage cover 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 65h2 is rotated into the distribution channel from the back side of the flow path cover 65g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 disposed diagonally below and to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the positive change switch 65e3, which is provided with the special discharge port 65e2 and is configured by a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the high-probability game state (the probability change state) by the passing of the game ball through the above-mentioned probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. (Game state). That is, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning opening for providing a probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to sort the gaming state after the big hit into a low-probability gaming state (normal gaming state ST1) or a certain-variable gaming state.

  As described above, since the game state set after the jackpot game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even during the jackpot game Can be. The minimum time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is at least one second. . The operation timing and operation time of the operation of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D are won, the switching member 65h is operated for 5 seconds at the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Have been. In addition, when the jackpot B and the jackpot E are won, the switching member 65h is configured to operate for 0.5 seconds in synchronization with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

  Therefore, at the big hit A, it is configured that the game ball that has won the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the positive change switch 65e3, but at the big hit B, it is impossible to pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Have been. Therefore, it is possible to control the probability change giving ratio depending on the jackpot type, and it is possible to configure so as not to cause excessive advantage and disadvantage.

  A case where a game ball is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating a state in which the flow path solenoid 65k is inactive and the opening of the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 is blocked by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h.

  The game ball guided to the distribution channel from the detection port 65a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h, and is guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. A ball outlet switch 65e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a game ball is provided at an end of the normal outlet 65e1. Thus, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ball ejection port switch 65e4 and the positive change switch 65e3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the game ball won before the 14th round is won in the 14th round in a state where the game ball has not been ejected, and the jackpot B is won even in the probability change switch 65e3.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the first specific winning opening 65a is detected by the detection switch 65c1 in the first variable winning device 65, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given as a privilege to the player. 15 award balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the probability change switch 65e3, so that it is possible to execute a lottery as to whether or not to give the probability change game state. . Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated winning port for giving a certain-variable gaming state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. FIG. 7B is a diagram showing a jackpot type generated for each special symbol in various game states, and a gaming state to which the game shifts after the jackpot occurs.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7A, the following four game states are set as the game states. The first is a normal game state ST <b> 1 2 in which the special symbol has a low jackpot probability of a low probability (normal) and a gaming state without electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The third one is a gaming state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is low (normal) as in the normal gaming state ST1, but there is an electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). Time saving game state ST1h. Third, the special symbol jackpot probability is a high probability, and there is no electric support (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is unlikely to be in the special state (open state)). The fourth is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high and the electric support is present (the first ordinary electric accessory 632 tends to be in the special state (open state)). A certain probable transformation support game state (so-called probable game state) ST3.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the first special symbol and the change of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously. However, in each game state, one of the special symbols is substantially changed (also referred to as a substantially changed object). Specifically, it is configured such that the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is not substantially the target of fluctuation is longer than the fluctuation time of the special symbol that is the target of the real fluctuation. In addition, a game state where it is difficult for game balls to enter the starting port for performing a lottery of a special symbol that is not substantially fluctuated, or a game ball enters the starting port for performing a lottery of a special pattern that is a fluctuating target. The game state is configured to be easy to play. Thereby, the jackpot of the special symbol which is not substantially changed can be substantially not generated (it is hard to generate), and the big jackpot of the special symbol which is the object of the substantial change can be substantially generated (made easy to generate).

  Note that the method of making any one of the special symbols substantially the subject of fluctuation is not limited to the method described above. For example, a normal electric accessory is provided at each of a starting port which is a lottery trigger of a first special symbol and a starting port which is a lottery trigger of a second special symbol. Then, in each game state, it is conceivable that only the ordinary electric accessory of the starting port corresponding to the special symbol to be substantially fluctuated is movable (or easy to perform). As a result, the game ball enters the starting opening corresponding to the special design which is the subject of substantial variation, and the game ball does not enter the launch opening corresponding to the special design which is not the subject of substantial variation (it is difficult to enter). Can be. In this case, the lottery for moving the ordinary electric accessory provided at each starting port may be separately performed. For example, a lottery for moving one ordinary electric accessory is performed based on entry (passing) to the first ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a first ordinary symbol lottery), and the other ordinary electric accessory is moved. The lottery to be performed may be performed by entering (passing) the ball into the second ordinary symbol starting port (referred to as a second ordinary symbol lottery). Further, the lottery of the first ordinary symbol and the lottery of the second ordinary symbol may be simultaneously executed. In the same manner as the special symbol lottery in the present embodiment, when the lottery of one ordinary symbol is a big hit, Alternatively, the lottery for the other ordinary symbol may be lost. Thereby, the variation of the game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the first special symbol and the jackpot based on the second special symbol have different probabilities of selecting the jackpot that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. That is, there is a difference in the probability that the state can be shifted (looped) to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3). As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 16, the jackpot based on the first special symbol has a low probability of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) ( 34%), that is, a high probability (66%) of shifting (falling) to a low probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h). On the other hand, the jackpot based on the second special symbol has a high probability (100%) of being able to shift (loop) to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 or the probability varying gaming state ST3). In the following, in describing the flow in which various game states are set, for convenience, a jackpot that enables transition to the high-probability game state (a game ball can pass through the positive-change switch 65e3) has been selected (occurred). In this case, the description will be made assuming that the game state shifts to the high-probability game state (the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3).

  In each game state, by setting a special symbol to be substantially changed, it is possible to adjust (set) whether it is easy to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state or to shift (fall) to the low-probability state. Thereby, in each game state, in addition to the two types (high probability and low probability) of the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit, two types (probability) of the ratio (probability) of transition (loop) to the high probability game state after the big hit The transition to the high-probability gaming state can be set to a state of high probability or low probability. Therefore, variations in the game state can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Specifically, in the probable change game state ST3, which is a high-probability game state, the substantial fluctuation target is set in the special figure 1 to make the game state easy to shift (fall) to the low-probability state, which is also the high-probability game state. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, by setting the substantial fluctuation target to the special figure 2, it is possible to make the game state easy to shift (loop) to the high-probability game state. In other words, even if the game state is the same high-probability game state (or low-probability state), by changing the special symbol to be substantially fluctuated, it is possible to change the distribution of the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game, Variations in which the game state shifts can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. First, in a state where the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (a state in which the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on), the normal game state ST1 is set. In the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a substantially variable target. In other words, the game state has a low probability (34%) of the occurrence of the jackpot that shifts to the high-probability game state (probable change rate). Specifically, a variation time of 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) (see FIG. 17). Then, in the first special symbol jackpot, the jackpot A (15R probability change jackpot) which shifts to the high-probability gaming state is selected with a probability of 34% as the jackpot type, and the jackpot B (15R regular jackpot) which remains in the low-probability state. Is selected with a probability of 66% (see FIGS. 7B and 16).

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state ST1, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (special figure 2) which is not substantially the fluctuation target is set to be long. Specifically, when the result of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) is out of order, 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 (see FIG. 17). Therefore, it is possible to execute 2160 to 8200 times of lottery in the first special symbol while the second special symbol deviates and fluctuates once. The jackpot probability in the normal game state ST1 (low-probability state) is 1/400. Therefore, in the case of a normal game, the jackpot in the first special symbol is not changed until the second special symbol that has been removed fluctuates once. Is configured to occur. In addition, the business hours of the game store are mainly about 15 hours from 9:00 in the morning to 11 at night, and thus are set to be longer than that. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the second lottery game is executed, the deviation of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. With such a configuration, in the normal game state ST1, a big hit of the first special symbol (the special figure 1), which is a substantially fluctuating object, is generated (easy).

  If the second lottery game is executed and the result of the success / failure determination does not deviate, but wins, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is selected to be 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (see FIG. 17). This will be described in detail later, but when the change based on the big hit is started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the change based on the other special symbol is out. This is because it is controlled so that If 64800000 ms (18 hours) is selected as the fluctuation time when the result of the determination of the special figure 2 is a hit, the fluctuation based on the big hit of the special figure 2 does not end within the business hours. Therefore, there arises a problem that the fluctuation (first lottery game) based on the special map 1 executed during the business hours is controlled so as to be all out (not a big hit). Therefore, the change based on the jackpot in Tokuzu 2 is set to a time (10 minutes) that can be completed within business hours. Thereby, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

  However, when the fluctuation based on the jackpot in Toku-zu 2 is short (for example, 500 ms (0.5 seconds)), the player can determine the result of determining whether or not the toku-zu 2 is successful in a short time. The act may be performed. For example, a game ball is made to enter the second starting port 640, and it is determined that the result of judging whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order based on the entered ball (the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed for longer than 0.5 seconds). In such a case, there is a possibility that an illegal act of resetting (initializing) the pachinko machine 10 (so-called reset goto) may be executed. As described above, when the RAM clear switch of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed and the power is turned on (reset), the normal game state ST1 is set, and the fluctuation of each special symbol is also initialized (that is, the fluctuation stop). Is done). Therefore, by repeating the above-mentioned misconduct (reset goto), it is possible to generate a jackpot based on Toku-zu 2, which is not substantially a target of change. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation based on the jackpot of the special figure 2 is set to 10 minutes, so that the player cannot determine the result of the determination (lottery) of the special figure 2 in a short time. As a result, a period of at least 10 minutes is required to execute the illegal act (reset goto), so that the executable frequency of the illegal act (reset goto) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to illegally generate the jackpot of the special figure 2 by the above-mentioned misconduct (reset goto).

  It should be noted that the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not limited to the above-described one and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in a gaming machine in which the second lottery game cannot be executed unless the game ball is intentionally fired (for example, a right-handed game), a right-handed game is performed in the normal game state ST1 (the second lottery game is performed). As a penalty, the fluctuation time based on the jackpot in Toku-zu 2 may be set to a time longer than 600,000 ms (10 minutes) (for example, 1 hour). Further, in this case, it may be notified that an improper act (right-handed game in the normal game state ST1) is being executed (or executed).

  In the pachinko machine 10, the second start port 640 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. Therefore, in order to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 640 (perform a second lottery game), it is necessary to perform a game that passes the right side of the variable display device unit 80 (a right-handed game). In the normal gaming state ST1, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 is hardly set to the special state (open state) (that is, the ball enters the right first starting port 631). Hard to do). Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the normal gaming state ST1, the first lottery game according to the special figure 1 which is the target of the substantial variation is difficult to be executed, and the second lottery game according to the special figure 2 which is not the target of the substantial variation is easily executed. become. That is, the right-handed game in the normal game state ST1 is set to be more disadvantageous for the player than playing a game (left-handed game) by passing a game ball on the left side of the variable display unit 80. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, the player performs a left-handed game. When a left-hitting game is performed in the normal gaming state ST1, no game ball enters the second start port 640, and a game ball enters the first start port 630. As a result, the gaming state in which the big hit of the second special symbol does not occur (it is difficult to perform) and the big hit of the first special symbol occurs (it is easy to make the game) (that is, a gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the high-probability gaming state). Can be.

  In the normal game state ST1, the big hit B occurs, and after the big hit game of the big hit B is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted). On the other hand, after the big hit A occurs and the big hit game is executed, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (shifted to) (see FIG. 7B). However, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 after the jackpot game based on the jackpot A is executed, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to).

  The latent probability changing game state ST2 is a game state in which the jackpot probability is set to be ten times higher than the normal game state ST1 (high probability game state), and the second special symbol is a game state in which the second special symbol is substantially changed. That is, the gaming state has a high probability (probable change rate) that a jackpot capable of continuing the high-probability gaming state is high. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thereby, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, by performing the right-handed game, the second lottery game can be efficiently performed. Then, in the second special symbol jackpot, a jackpot C (15R probability changing jackpot) in which the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is continued (looped) is selected as a jackpot type with a probability of 66%, and the jackpot is shifted to the probability changing gaming state ST3. D (15R probable jackpot) is selected with a 34% probability.

  On the other hand, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is not the actual fluctuation target, is set long. More specifically, if the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is incorrect, a variation time of 1800000 ms (30 minutes) is selected (see FIG. 18A). Therefore, it is possible to execute a maximum of 3600 lotteries in the second special symbol while the first special symbol is deviated once. The jackpot probability during the probable change (high-probability gaming state) is 1/40. Therefore, in the case of a normal game, the jackpot is won by the second special symbol until the first special symbol that has been removed fluctuates once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the first special symbol hit / fail determination result is a hit, the variation time is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) (see FIG. 18A). In the latent probability changing game state ST2, if the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the normal game state ST1, so that the above-mentioned misconduct (reset goto) cannot be executed. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol, the fluctuation time is set as short as 500 ms (0.5 seconds). Thereby, even if a big hit occurs in the first special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the gaming machine can continue the game without reducing the game efficiency (rotation rate).

  In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol lottery result is configured to be a small win with a probability of 8/400. In the small hit in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about three game balls can enter the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. Since the number of prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a is 15 balls, about 45 balls are paid out to the player per small hit game. Thereby, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the right-handed game can be executed in an advantageous state (a state in which the consumption of the held ball is suppressed) as compared with the normal game state ST1.

  In the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, when the second special symbol hits and the jackpot D (15R probability changing jackpot) is selected, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again (loop). On the other hand, when the jackpot C (15R certain-change big-hit) is selected, thereafter, a game state with a certain-variable-power-supply support (the certain-change game state ST3) is set.

  The certain change game state ST3 is a game state in which the lottery probability of the special symbol is set to be 10 times higher (set to the high probability game state), and the first special symbol is a game state in which the first special symbol is substantially changed. Further, the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is set to be 40 times higher, and the variation time of the ordinary symbol is also easily selected to be short (see FIG. 19). In addition, the time (opening time) during which the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is maintained in the special state (open state) is set to be longer than the normal game state ST1 and the latent probability changing game state ST2. Therefore, when the player hits right, the player can easily win the right first starting port 631. In this embodiment, 95% of the right-hit game balls are configured to win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, 85% of the remaining 5% of the game balls win the second starting port 640, and the remaining 5% are out balls and consumed. Therefore, in the probable change game state, about 99% of the right-hit game balls will win the right first starting port 631 or the second starting port 640, and 99% of the right-hit game balls will play as prize balls. Is paid out to the person. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease in the ball possessed by the player.

  In the probable change game state ST3, the second special symbol lottery result is a small win with a probability of 5/400. In the small hit in the certain variation game state ST3, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being too advantageous for the player in the probable change game state ST3. The present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball may enter the first specific winning opening 65a (for example, one ball). Thereby, the privilege for the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol that is not substantially changed is set to be long, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that is substantially changed is set to be short. Specifically, the variation time of the second special symbol is selected to be 500 ms (0.5 seconds) regardless of the result of the win / fail determination (lottery) (see FIG. 18B). On the other hand, if the result of the determination (lottery) is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected to be 1800000 ms (30 minutes) (see FIG. 18B). Therefore, it is possible to execute a maximum of 3600 lotteries in the first special symbol while the second special symbol deviates and fluctuates once. The jackpot probability during the probable change (high-probability gaming state) is 1/40, so that in the case of a normal game, the jackpot is won by the first special symbol until the second special symbol that is out of swing changes once. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, if the result of the determination (lottery) of the first special symbol is a hit, 5000 ms (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time (see FIG. 18B). As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is reset (initialized), the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the normal gaming state ST1, so that the above-described misconduct (reset goto) cannot be performed. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol in the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set as short as 5000 ms (5 seconds). Thereby, even if a big hit occurs in the second special symbol in the certain variation game state ST3, the gaming machine can continue the game without reducing the game efficiency (rotation rate).

  Further, as described above, in the probable change game state ST3, 95% of the launched game balls win the right first starting port 631. Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 640 and the second lottery game is not easily executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the jackpot of the second special symbol which is not substantially the target of variation.

  When the jackpot of the first special symbol is reached in the certain variation game state ST3, the jackpot A is selected at a rate of 34%. After the big hit game based on the big hit A, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (shifted). Therefore, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is selected (transferred) with a probability of 34%, and it is possible to play a game with a high probability until winning at least two jackpots again. On the other hand, if the big hit B is selected with a probability of 66%, the normal game state ST1 is set after the big hit game (so-called falling).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set, the game is executed with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice in a state where the consumption of the possessed ball is suppressed and the jackpot is executed twice. Two lottery games (or first lottery games) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the player can execute two jackpot games in a shorter period of time than in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to provide the player with a sense of superiority.

  Further, by displaying so that the player can grasp that the lottery game is executed with a high probability advantageous to the player until the jackpot is executed twice, at least two jackpots are given to the player. There is an effect that the user can be made to feel assured and a sense of security can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, if the jackpot B of the first special symbol is reached in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the normal game state ST1 is set (shifted to). That is, two jackpots cannot be obtained. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, the right lottery game in which the first lottery game is difficult to execute is performed as described above, and the second lottery is performed during the change of the first special symbol, which is a long-term change. The game is executed a plurality of times, and a jackpot of the second special symbol is generated (easily performed) (it does not substantially become a jackpot of the first special symbol). However, there is a case where the first special symbol is hit by a reserved ball or the like of the first special symbol stored in the latent probability changing game state ST2. For example, a case where a jackpot is won in the first second lottery game in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set (1/40 probability). Therefore, in this case, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the jackpot A is selected as the jackpot of the first special symbol with a probability of 34%, and the jackpot E is selected with a probability of 66% ( 7 (b) and 16 (b)). If the jackpot A is selected, the game proceeds to the high probability game state ST2, which is a high probability game state, so that two jackpots can be obtained. On the other hand, when the jackpot E is selected, two jackpots cannot be obtained, and the state is shifted to the low probability state. In this case, 100 time-saving games are provided after the end of the big hit game. As a result, a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is discouraged and the desire to play the game is significantly reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a prize (start prize) at the first start port 630, the right first start port 631, and the second start port 640 as a trigger while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37. , A third symbol display device 81 constituted by a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for performing a variable display of a third symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol).

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114, as shown in FIG. Left (left display area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right showing the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2), which is one of the third symbols, in the area Dm Three symbol rows in the (right display area Dm3) are displayed. The type of the third symbol (whether it is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) displayed in the first display area (Dm) is determined and displayed according to the game state.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1 (low-probability game state) and the game state with the certainty-changing support (the certainty-changing game state), the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the case of the non-playing game state (the latent probability changing game state ST2), the second special symbol is set to be displayed in the first display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the type of the special symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is set so as to be switched. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the same special symbol may always be displayed. Good.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. (Dynamic display).

  The third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of ten types of special symbols numbered from “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over.

  Specifically, the first display area Dm displays three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the activated line in a combination of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols), a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  Further, a second display area Dn and a second sub-display area Dt are formed below the second display area Dn at the upper right of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a symbol row indicating a first special symbol or a second special symbol (depending on a game state) is displayed. In the second sub-display area Dt, a symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (depending on the game state) displayed in the second display area Dn is displayed. Although details will be described later, in the case of the probability change game state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, a treasure box symbol is a second display area as a third symbol indicating a second special symbol. Dn. Then, when the change of the second special symbol is started, a blinking display in which the state of FIG. 9A and the state of FIG. 9B are alternately repeated and displayed in a short cycle (for example, 1 second) is executed. . Then, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of order, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lottery result is a winning, the display is stopped and displayed in the state shown in FIG.

  Further, a third display area Du is formed at the upper left of the first display area Dm. In the third display area Du, two types of symbol rows of “○” and “X” as shown in FIG. 8B are displayed in parallel in two rows, and the left symbol is a lottery of the first special symbol. The result is shown, and the symbol on the right side is configured to show the lottery result of the second special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery results of the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be displayed in other modes. For example, when two types of symbol rows of “O” and “X” are displayed in parallel in two rows, and two “O” symbols are displayed in the left and right columns, a first special symbol or a second special symbol (game (Depending on the state) may be notified. Further, the third display area Du and the second display area Dn may be shared. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, two types of symbol rows of "O" and "X" are displayed in parallel in the second display area in two rows, and in the certain variation gaming state ST3, the symbols are shown in FIGS. ), A treasure box symbol may be displayed in the second display area Dn as a third symbol indicating the second special symbol. In this case, the display area may be switched based on the switching of the game state after the big hit game. Thereby, the display area of the first display area Dm can be enlarged, so that the effect of the effect displayed in the first display area Dm can be enhanced. Further, when the fluctuation based on the second special symbol is not executed (when there is no suspension of the special figure 2), the second display area Dn and the second sub-display area Dt may not be displayed. . Thereby, the display area of the first display area Dm can be widened.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously changed. In the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changing, if one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a large hit (or a small hit), the change of the other special symbol during the change is also forcibly performed. The display is configured to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the deviation.

  Here, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is performed 15 times (referred to as 15 rounds) at the big hit, whereas the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is performed at the small hit. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is executed twice (for example, two rounds). One round of the jackpot game is executed until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 game balls are won in the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, one round of the small hit game in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until the elapse of 1.8 seconds or until 10 game balls win the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the latent probability changing game state ST2, about three game balls can enter. In addition, one round of the small hitting game in the probable change game state ST3 is set until 0.5 seconds elapse or 10 game balls are won in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, in the small hitting game in the probable change game state ST3, the first variable winning device 65 can hardly enter the game ball, and it is difficult to obtain the prize ball.

  As described above, even in the probability changing game state ST3, as described above, when the lottery result indicating the small hit in the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the changing second special symbol is forcibly removed (see FIG. 9). (See (a)). In this case, the deviation change of the second special symbol which is not a substantial fluctuation target, which is a fluctuation of a long time (10 minutes), is stopped, and after the small hitting game of the special figure 1 is completed, the new fluctuation of the special figure 1 At the same time, the second lottery game is executed based on a new hold (next hold) ball of the second special symbol. That is, a jackpot based on the second special symbol may occur. In the present embodiment, in the event that a jackpot has been won in the second lottery game with the second special symbol, the jackpot C (15R sure-change jackpot) that can shift to the high-probability gaming state is always selected (100%). (See FIG. 16 (c)), which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the change is started based on a new hold (next hold) of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn as shown in FIGS. The change of the symbol is displayed, and the change is made so that the change of the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. Similarly, the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt, and the symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. . The variable mode is not limited to this, and the display area of the second display area Dn in which the change of the second special symbol is displayed is enlarged to display the first display in which the change of the first special symbol is displayed. The area Dm may be reduced.

  When the variation of the second special symbol is changed to be displayed in the first display area Dm, a display mode in which the treasure box is opened is executed, and when the result of the determination is incorrect, as shown in FIG. Is displayed in the treasure box, and the player is notified that the lottery result has been lost. On the other hand, if the result is a hit, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), the character "congratulations" is displayed in the treasure box, and the player is notified that the lottery result was a hit. You.

  In this manner, in the probability change game state ST3, when the first special symbol wins the small hit, the change of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the change of the new second special symbol is started. 2 It is possible to increase the chance that the lottery game is executed. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the fluctuation based on the second special symbol is displayed in an emphasized manner, so that the player is expected to win a big hit with the second special symbol. Can be done.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. Decorative display is performed according to the display. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 8B, a reserved symbol “black circle” corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. On the other hand, a second sub-display area Dt is formed below the second display area Dn. As shown in FIG. 9A, a reserved symbol "black triangle" corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second sub-display area Dt. In the present embodiment, since the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to four each, a maximum of four reserved symbols “black circles” are displayed in the sub-table display area Ds. Then, in the second sub-display area Dt, up to four reserved symbols “black triangles” are displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbols of the first special symbol are displayed as "black circles", and the reserved symbols of the second special symbol are displayed as "black triangles". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be the same. By using the same reserved symbol for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the capacity of the symbol data can be reduced. Further, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the sub display area Ds. For example, the reserved symbol of the first special symbol may be displayed in the left area of the sub display area Ds, and the reserved symbol of the second special symbol may be displayed in the right area, or the variation is started from the left side of the display area. The reserved symbols may be displayed in order.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 including the first lottery game and the second lottery game has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and three, four, and more lottery games and corresponding start-up games are provided. Naturally, the mouths may be provided so that the lottery results can be changed and displayed at the same time.

  When a game ball wins in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640, a first starting port switch or a second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. Turns on. In addition, the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 have a common guiding path on the back side of the game board 13 for guiding the entered game ball to the first starting port switch. When the first start port switch and the second start port switch are turned on, the main controller 110 performs a jackpot lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 are also one of the winning ports where one ball is paid out as a prize ball when the ball wins.

  When either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol indicating the big hit, the fluctuation display based on the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. In the present embodiment, when a change in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the special symbol started to change after the other special symbol is forcibly changed as a lottery result. Is configured to be started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a problem that the jackpot game is continuously started or the jackpot game is started at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning lottery game is executed on one special symbol, the other lottery game is configured to be forcibly executed on the other side, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery game according to the lottery result may be executed so that the big hit game can be started continuously. Further, in the case where a big hit occurs in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted in the other special symbol, and the remaining fluctuation display is continued after the big hit. Is also good. In this case, during suspension, the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be blinked and displayed in a predetermined cycle at a predetermined display mode "for example, the letter h". With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted).

  Further, a special symbol for performing the variable display with priority in each game state may be defined, and the variable display of the special symbol may be performed with priority. For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, the change of the first special symbol is preferentially executed. In this case, the change of the second special symbol may be temporarily stopped (or forcibly stopped) based on the start of execution of the change of the first special symbol. As a result, if the first special symbol has not changed, the change of the second special symbol can be executed, but if the change of the first special symbol starts, the change of the second special symbol is temporarily stopped (or Forced stop). Therefore, the change of the first special symbol can be preferentially executed in the normal gaming state ST1.

  At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, sticking spaces K1 and K2 for sticking stamps, identification labels and the like are provided. Through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not win any of the winning ports is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 135 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 135 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 8). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The dispensing control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About configuration>
With reference to FIG. 2, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be further described in detail. In the present embodiment, a left flow path PA1 through which the game ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 and a right flow path PA2 down the right side of the variable display device unit 80 are formed. A first start port 630 is arranged below the center of the variable display unit 80. As described above, the game balls flowing down the right flow path PA2 are configured such that 85% of the game balls flowing down enter the second starting port 640 by the nail groups T2 and T3. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left flow path PA1 is configured to enter the first starting port 630 more easily than the game ball flowing down the right flow path PA2.

  A first ordinary symbol starting port 67a is disposed in the right flow path PA2, a first variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first normal symbol starting port 65a, a right first starting port 631 is disposed below the first variable symbol winning port 631, and a right first starting port 631 is disposed on the right side thereof. 2 A normal symbol start port 67b is arranged. Below the right first starting port 631, a second starting port 640 is arranged. On the game board 13, a plurality of nails T for changing the rolling direction of the game ball are arranged.

  The game ball fired in the right flow path is in a normal state (a state in which the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b are upright) by the nail group T4 (configured with three nails). , So that the game ball does not enter the first start port 631 on the right. When the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is in the normal state, 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel flow down the left side of the right first starting port 631. In addition, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the left side and the right side of the right first starting port 631 can be changed by adjusting the angle (inclination) of the nail T1. By inclining the angle of the nail T1 toward the first variable prize device 65 (the side opposite to the group of nails T4), the width between the nail T1 and the group of nails T4 is increased, and the nail T1 flows down between the group of nails T1 and T4. That is, the rate at which the game balls flow down the right side of the right first starting port 631 increases. On the other hand, by inclining the nail T1 to the right first starting port 631 side (nail group T4 side), the width between the nail T1 and the nail group T4 is reduced, and the game ball flows down the right side of the right first starting port 631. By reducing the ratio of playing balls, the ratio of gaming balls flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 can be increased.

  The game ball flowing down the left side of the right first starting port 631 is configured to be guided to the second starting port 640 by the nail group T3 (formed of five nails). Note that the nail group T3 is arranged such that the width of each nail is narrower than one game ball, and the game balls cannot pass through the width (width) therebetween. The game balls guided to the nail group T3 are prevented from flowing down below the second starting port 640 by the nail group T2 (consisting of three nails), and all enter the second starting port 640. It is configured. The present invention is not limited to this, and some game balls may naturally flow downward from the nail group T3 side (or the nail group T2 side, or both).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the setting is such that when a game ball enters the second starting port 640, one prize ball is paid out to the player. Since 85% of the game balls fired in the right flow path PA2 are configured to win the second starting port 640 (when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is in the normal state), the player fires. It is configured such that 85% of the played game balls are refunded as prize balls. Therefore, the player can suppress the consumption (decrease) of the game ball as a holding ball by firing the game ball to the right flow path PA2 as compared to firing the game ball to the left flow path. In the present embodiment, a game ball that has flowed down the right side of the right first starting port 631 does not win the second starting port 640 due to the nail group T2. Thus, by adjusting the nail T1, it is possible to adjust the ratio of game balls entering the second starting port 640, that is, the ratio of payouts as prize balls in right-handed games.

  Next, when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is in a special state (a state in which the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b are rotated to be substantially horizontal, an open state), the first right start port is opened by the left guide member 632a. The configuration is such that the flow path flowing down the left side of 631 is closed. Thereby, when the electric accessory 632 is in the special state (open state), it is configured such that a game ball flowing down the right flow path is prevented from winning in the second starting port 640. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h or the probability-changing gaming state ST3, winning in the right first starting port 631 increases, winning in the second starting port 640 decreases, and the first lottery game in the first special symbol is performed. The number of executions (execution frequency) is configured to increase. Further, in the time-saving game state ST1h and the probable change game state ST3, the variation time of the second special symbol is set long, so that the number of executions (execution frequency) of the second lottery game can be reduced (lower).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol which is advantageous to the player is set to be short, so that the game is performed such that the game ball is fired in the right channel. As described above, the percentage of game balls that enter the second starting port 640 is set to 85% of the game balls flowing down the right channel, so that the number of balls held by the player decreases. However, in the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol is set high. Further, the small hitting game executed during the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set until the opening time of one round of the first variable winning device 65 is 1.8 seconds or 10 balls are won, and the opening time per round is set. Since it is longer than the small hit in other game states, a prize ball can be obtained by the small hit. In the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit during the change in the probability of latency is set so as to be 15% that is consumed by flowing down the right channel, and is configured to compensate for the decrease in the ball possessed by the player. Have been. Therefore, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease of the possessed ball also in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal game state ST1, it is prohibited to play a game in a right-handed game (a game in which a game ball is fired in the right flow path PA2), and the second start port is set in the normal game state ST1. When the game ball wins at 640, an abnormal process is executed, and the third symbol display device 81 displays an alarm display “Please play with left-handed” and also issues a similar warning by voice. In addition, in the normal game state ST1, when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, the control may be performed so that the jackpot is invalidated, or an abnormal signal is output to a hall computer or the like. You may.

  In the present embodiment, the game method (left-handed game or right-handed game) is changed in each game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that either left-handed game or right-handed game may be performed in all game states, or may be configured to perform either left-handed game or right-handed game in a specific game state. May be. For example, a starting port of the first special symbol and a starting port of the second special symbol are provided at the lower center of the game board 13. Then, a game ball that flows down the left flow path PA1 by performing a left-hit game and a game ball that flows down the right flow path PA2 by performing a right-play game include a starting port of the first special symbol, What is necessary is just to comprise so that a ball can enter the starting opening of a special symbol. This eliminates the need to separate between left-handed and right-handed games in all game states or specific game states, thereby reducing the game burden on the player.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The main control device 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, a counter provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of a display result of the second symbol display device 83. Used in.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and a first hit type counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol are set. And a fluctuation type counter C3 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1. In addition, the random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbols (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and some counters are not included in the main processing (S1600) (see FIG. 45). The updated value is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which each counter value is stored for a winning in the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and a winning in the second starting port 640. And a second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b in which each counter value is stored. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 are provided with a maximum of four reserved balls, and the second starting port 640 is provided with a maximum of four reserved balls. A maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. For this reason, when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, or when the special symbol is not being played in a jackpot game, the game ball is provided to the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 during a period in which the special symbol can be drawn. Wins, each counter value is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and when a game ball wins in the second starting port 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. . Thereafter, the respective counter values stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are moved to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display). Various settings and control processing are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), and various counter values for variably displaying the second special symbol are displayed. Settings and control processing are executed.

  On the other hand, during a period in which a special symbol cannot be selected by lottery, such as during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is set to the first starting port 630 or When the winning first opening 631 and the second opening 640 are won, if the number of reserves for the winning opening is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), acquisition of each counter value is performed. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning opening. When the number of reserves for the winning opening is equal to or more than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment), each counter value and the like are not obtained and a prize ball (one game ball in the present embodiment) is not obtained. ) Is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the number of retained balls is four in total for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631, and four for the second starting port 640, but is not limited thereto. Instead, the number may be four or the upper limit may not be set.

  Each counter shown in FIG. 9 will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. It should be noted that the first random number counter C1 is acquired in common for each ball entering the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 and the second starting port 640.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the ball is set to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port. At the timing when the player wins 640 (start winning), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning starting port in the RAM 203. The value of the random number to be a big hit is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a (in the present embodiment, “7” at the time of low probability, and “0 to 9” at the time of high probability), it is determined to be a jackpot.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, the number of the random numbers (hit value) to be a big hit is 1 at a low probability, its value “7” is 10 at a high probability, and its value “0 to 9” is The first hit is stored in the random number table 202a.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of the big hit in the case of a big hit, and is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (99 in the present embodiment). ), The value is returned to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the ball is moved to the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, the second starting port. At the timing when the mouth 640 is won (start winning), it is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 corresponding to the winning opening. In addition, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C1 is obtained is actually the timing at which a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch (not shown) or the second starting port switch (not shown). That is.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, a random number that is out. If so, the variation pattern in the variation display effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) are those at the time of departure. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b is a large hit, the change pattern in the change display effect, The stop type is the one at the time of the big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the big hit are determined according to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16) stored in the ROM 202.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A, the jackpot B, and the jackpot E are set as the jackpot types dedicated to the first special symbol, and the jackpot C and the jackpot D are set as the jackpot types dedicated to the second special symbol. Have been. Each of the jackpots A to E is composed of 15 rounds of jackpot games. Further, in the big hit A, the big hit C, and the big hit D, at the start of the 14th round, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is rotated for 5 seconds, so that the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3. When a game ball is detected by the probability change switch 65e3, the game state after the jackpot game is set to the probability change game state ST3 or the latent probability change game state ST2, which is a high-probability game state.

  In addition, the method of making the game ball passable to the probability change switch 65e3 is not limited to the method described above. For example, a V-variable winning device 651 in which a game ball that has entered can pass through a probable change switch 65e3 (provided with a probable change switch 65e3), and a game ball that has entered cannot pass through a probable change switch 65e3 (probable change switch 65e3). Is not provided) and a non-V variable winning device 652 is provided. Then, in the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, the V-variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed, and the gaming state after the jackpot game cannot be shifted to the high-probability gaming state. The control is performed so that the V-variable winning device 651 is not opened and closed and the non-V-variable winning device 652 is opened and closed. Further, the V variable winning device 651 may be provided with a switching member 65h as in the present embodiment. When the switching member 65h is moved at a specific timing (for example, at the start of the 14th round), the game ball can be passed to the positive change switch 65e3. Then, in the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to the high-probability gaming state, the V-variable winning device 651 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round, and the gaming state after the jackpot gaming is changed to the high-probability gaming state. In the jackpot where it is impossible to shift to, the non-V variable winning device 652 is controlled to be opened and closed in the 14th round. This eliminates the need to change the control of the probability change switch 65e3 for each jackpot type, thereby reducing design costs and program capacity.

  On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the switching member 65h is rotated only for 0.5 second at the start of the 14th round. It takes at least 0.5 seconds for the game ball that has won the first variable prize device 65 to reach the probability change switch 65e3. Is configured to be impossible to pass, and the gaming state after the big hit is not set to the gaming state with a high probability. In the case of the jackpot B and the jackpot E that are not shifted to the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot game, the switching member 65h may not be rotated. Thereby, at the big hit B and the big hit E, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from passing through the probability changing switch 65e3, and it is not necessary to rotate the switching member 65h, so that the power consumption can be reduced.

  Therefore, even if a jackpot game is started, it is determined whether or not a probability change is given to the player during the subsequent jackpot game, so that the expectation for the probability change can be kept for a long time. Further, since the rate at which the probability change is given is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the player can play the game by changing the degree of expectation at which the probability change is given depending on the difference of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 16A to 16C, the jackpot type selection table 202d is composed of three types of jackpot type selection tables A to C. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table A. The big hit type selection table A is used to determine a big hit type based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state ST1 (including the time saving gaming state ST1h). It is a selection table. As shown in FIG. 16A, as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a jackpot A (15R probability variable jackpot) and a jackpot B (15R normal jackpot) are set. For the jackpot A, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 33” is set as the judgment value, and for the big hit B, the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “34 to 99” is the judgment value. Is set as One type of the big hit C is set as the big hit type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), and the value of the first hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99” is set as the determination value. That is, in the normal game state ST1, the big hit is selected with a probability of 34% when the big hit occurs in the special figure 1, and the big hit B is selected with a probability of 66%. On the other hand, it is configured such that if a big hit occurs in the special figure 2, the big hit C is selected with a probability of 100%.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (a), the big hit A increases the probability of hitting a normal symbol, shortens the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and sets the operating time of the first normal electric accessory 632 to be long. This is a jackpot in which a state (electric support state) is not given and a V winning opening pattern in which an opening pattern in which a game ball can be won is given to the probability changing switch 65e3 of the first variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which the electric support state is not provided and the V winning open pattern is not set. The big hit C is set to a big hit in which an electric support state is given and a V winning open pattern is set.

  As described above, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is assumed that only the big hit C is set as the big hit type of the second special symbol that should not normally be played (fluctuated). Also, it is configured not to give the latent probability changing game state ST2, and to suppress a problem that at least two big hits are illegally given in the high-probability game state.

  Next, FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table B. This jackpot type selection table B is a table for determining the jackpot type when a jackpot is established in the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the jackpot type selection table B, the jackpot A and the jackpot E are set as the jackpot types of the special map 1, and the jackpot C and the jackpot D are set as the jackpot types of the special map 2, respectively.

  The big hit E is a 15-round time-saving big hit, and the electric support state is given until the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to change 100 times after the big hit game ends. The jackpot probability in this case is set to a low probability state. In addition, when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is set longer, so that the big hit is the first change of the first special symbol that shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2. Is generally considered. In this case, the jackpot E, which is not selected in the normal gaming state ST1, is set so as to be selected instead of the jackpot B in order to rescue the player. Accordingly, discouragement of the player can be suppressed, and a problem that the desire to play the game is significantly reduced can be suppressed.

  In the case of the big hit in the special map 2, the big hit C and the big hit D are set respectively. The jackpot D is constituted by a jackpot in which a latent probability change of 15 rounds is set. Here, in the present embodiment, when the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set, there is a high possibility that the lottery probability of the special symbol will be set to the high probability game state until at least two jackpot games are executed. ing. Therefore, for the player, the jackpot D is set to a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot C in which the probability change game state ST3 is set.

  In the big hit type selection table B, the big hit C is set with a judgment value of “0 to 65”, and the big hit D is set with a judgment value of “66 to 99”. Therefore, the jackpot C is set to be selected with a probability of 66% when the second special symbol is hit, and the jackpot D is set to be selected with a probability of 34%. Therefore, the player plays the game expecting that the big hit D is selected when the big hit is made with the second special symbol during the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the big hit type selection table C. The jackpot type selection table C is a selection table used to determine the jackpot type when the gaming state is the probable change gaming state ST3. In the jackpot type selection table C, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are set as the jackpot types of the first special symbol, and only the jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type of the second special symbol. The rate at which the jackpot A is selected is set to 34% (judgment values “0 to 33”), and the rate at which the jackpot B is selected is set to 66% (judgment values “34 to 99”). ).

  In this manner, when the probability changing game state ST3 is set, the jackpot D is always selected when a big hit occurs in the second special symbol, so that the latent certainty changing game state ST2 is set, and the player has at least 2 The high-probability gaming state is configured to be easily set continuously until the jackpot is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, during the probable change game state ST3, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be long, and the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is easily set to be in the special state (open state). (Electric support) is configured so that the number of balls entering the second starting port 640 is suppressed. As will be described later, when the game state changes to the probable change game state ST3, 3000 ms is usually selected at a rate of 191/199 and 30,000 ms is selected at a rate of 8/199 by lottery (see FIG. 19). Therefore, it is configured such that a variation time of 30,000 ms having a long variation time is selected with a low probability.

  Until the variation time of 30000 ms elapses, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated in the special state (open state), and during that time, the game ball can easily win the second starting port 640 ( Since 85% of the right-played game balls enter the ball), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be increased. On the other hand, during the probable change game state ST3, in the case of a deviation, as shown in FIG. 18B, the fluctuation time of 1800000 ms is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. Is configured so that a new lottery is not executed efficiently even when the reserved ball is stored. However, during the probability change game state ST3, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is set to 1/80 (see FIG. 15 (b)), so each time a small hit is won in the first special symbol. The change being executed in the second special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed, and the change of the stored ball stored next is started. In other words, by winning a small hit in the first special symbol, the chance of a lottery in the second special symbol increases, so that a lottery advantageous to the player is easily executed. Therefore, the player can play the game in expectation of winning the small hit in the first special symbol, and can increase the player's expectation other than the big hit. In addition, the lottery probability of the small hit may be appropriately set to an appropriate value.

  Returning to FIG. 9, the description of the various counters will be continued. For example, the variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198).

  The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the ball is placed in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, or the second starting port 640. At the timing of winning (starting winning), it is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired at the timing of starting winning, but the invention is not limited thereto, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 may be acquired at the timing of starting variation. Of course, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 may also be configured to be selected at the start of the change.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18A and 18B, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table A (see FIG. 17) for selecting a variation pattern in the low-probability gaming state, and a latent probability variation game. A variation pattern selection table B for selecting a variation pattern in the state ST2 (see FIG. 18A), and a variation pattern selection table C for selecting a variation pattern in the probable variation game state ST3 or the time saving game state ST1h (see FIG. b)) are respectively set.

  In each variation pattern selection table, the type of the variation pattern is set in accordance with the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1, and the result of the hit / fail determination. The type of the variation pattern determined by the main control device 110 is a rough content of the variation pattern, and the variation time and the rough variation type (non-reach, reach various) are mainly determined. The sound lamp control device 113 is configured to determine more detailed contents of the variation pattern. With this configuration, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal gaming state ST <b> 1, the result of the determination as to whether the second special symbol fluctuates is incorrect, and an extremely long fluctuation time (dynamic display time) is determined regardless of the hit. Have been. Specifically, 64800000 ms is selected and 18 hours are set. The business hours of the game store are generally long even from 9:00 am to 11:00 pm, so the business hours are 15 hours, which are longer fluctuation times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large hit from being played in the second special symbol in the normal game state ST1. In addition, in this embodiment, even in the case of a big hit, a long fluctuation time is set. In this case, by outputting to the hall computer or the like that the game is being played with the second special symbol, the amusement shop can monitor an illegal game and provide guidance on a correct game method.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol has a long fluctuation time in the case of a hit, but may have a short fluctuation time of 500 ms or the like in the case of a hit. With this configuration, an extremely long hit change is executed in the second special symbol, so that it is possible to suppress a problem that the hit change is not executed in the first special symbol during that time.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the variation time of the first special symbol in the case of a deviation is configured to be 180000 ms, and is set to be extremely long. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol, which is one side, is configured to be 500 ms and is set to be short. With such a configuration, even when the first special symbol of the first change becomes the jackpot E after the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is difficult to recognize that the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2 has occurred. it can. Furthermore, the jackpot game can be continuously executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (b), in the certainty-variable gaming state ST3, the variation time of the deviation of the second special symbol is 180000 ms, which is set to be extremely long. On the other hand, the fluctuation time per hit is 5000 ms, and is set in accordance with a period during which a treasure chest effect described later is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display that is a big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is configured not to change at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the case of the configuration, the fluctuation display time that is the big hit of the second special symbol is shorter than the first special symbol (for example, 5 seconds) or extremely short fluctuation time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the first special symbol is changed. The variation time that becomes a symbol jackpot may be configured such that a variation time longer than the second special symbol (for example, 60 seconds) or an extremely long variation time (for example, 5 minutes) is selected. With this configuration, it is possible to postpone the jackpot in the second special symbol in which the jackpot B, which is a disadvantageous type for the player, may be determined, and during the second special symbol, The big hit can be given to the player by making the big hit with the symbol. In this case, when a big hit is started with one special symbol, a lottery game changing in the other special symbol may be invalidated. With such a configuration, the jackpot C, which is a disadvantageous type for the player, is determined immediately after the jackpot C is given and the probability change game state ST3 is set, and the probability change game state ST3 ends in a short period of time. Defects can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described configuration in which the variable display in which the hit / failure determination result is the big hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously fluctuated and displayed, the hit / failure determination result in the first special symbol is out of fluctuation. By setting the display time to be long (for example, 100 seconds) and setting the fluctuation time of hitting the hit / failure determination result in the second special symbol to be short (for example, 1 second), the first special symbol can be displayed during the time-saving game. The number of times the lottery result is displayed can be reduced (the number of times the first special symbol is variably displayed), and the number of lotteries in the second special symbol advantageous to the player can be increased. In the case where the number of time savings is set to be a period until the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuates and displays 100 times, the fluctuating time of the first special symbol is continuously changed 100 times due to the second special symbol coming off. By configuring the second special symbol to be longer than the time when the variable display is performed, it is possible to effectively reduce the number of times the second special symbol is displayed during the time reduction game.

  Returning to FIG. 13, the description of the various counters will be continued. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). The ball is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. Then, the value of the random number which is the big hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (FIG. 15C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set. Is the same as the winning random number set in the second winning random number table 202c (FIG. 15C), it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol.

  Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is performed, and the ball is set to the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a (through gate) or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b ( (Through gate). The number of random numbers to be won is 5 in the normal gaming state ST1, and the range is “5 to 9”. In the high-probability gaming state, the number is 200, and the range is “5 to 204”. That is, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 9”, it is determined that the game has been won. In the high probability gaming state, the acquired second random number counter is acquired. When the value of C4 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and a symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the first normal symbol is displayed. In the normal gaming state ST1, the left guiding member 632a and the right guiding member 632b of the electric accessory 632 perform an opening operation for a predetermined time (1.2s in the present embodiment) once, and in the high-probability gaming state, a predetermined time. The opening operation (1 s in the present embodiment) is performed twice. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is executed once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (S1600) (see FIG. 41).

  When the game ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b, each of the counters based on the retained balls is displayed in the ordinary symbol retaining ball storage area 203c without displaying the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (second symbol). If the value is not stored, a random number value is obtained from the second random number counter C4 in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Also, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or when the random number value corresponding to the reserved ball stored in the ordinary symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is less than the upper limit value (four in the present embodiment). Are stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the number of holdings (ordinary symbol holdings 1 to 4) corresponding to the random number value acquired from the second random number counter C4. When a random number value is stored in each area, a normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol based on the random number value is stopped or the hold is exhausted. If the data has been shifted to the previous holding area, it is set to off. Here, when the data is shifted, the normal symbol flag of the newly shifted and stored reserved area is set to ON. The determination as to whether or not data is stored in the reserved area or whether or not the ordinary symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner is executed based on which reserved area or the ordinary symbol of the execution area is turned on.

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery between the first lottery game and the second lottery game is configured to select various common counter values. However, the first lottery game (first special symbol) and the second lottery game are selected. For the game (second special symbol), various counters dedicated to each are set, and the update timing and the initial value of the various counters for the first lottery game and the second lottery game are changed, so that the values are updated with different values. Of course, it may be constituted by the counter value obtained.

  By configuring in this way, in the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the counter value is obtained at the same opportunity, it is possible to obtain a different counter value, It is possible to suppress a fluctuation pattern selected between the first special symbol and the second special symbol and a problem that the determination result of the correctness is synchronized.

  Further, even if a variation pattern is selected from a common variation pattern table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a problem that the selected variation patterns are synchronized is suppressed, and various effects are provided. It can be performed. Further, data stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be suppressed, and an inexpensive configuration (using a RAM or the like having a small storage area) can be achieved.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. And the like, and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (S1600) (see FIG. 45), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 44). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 43) as the processing at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 includes a first special symbol retaining ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol retaining ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol retaining ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d, and a second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e. , A normal symbol holding ball counter 203f, a probability change flag 203g, a probability change setting flag 203h, a probability change pass counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, a notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, a remaining ball timer 203o, a probability variable flag 203p, discharge number counter 203s, time saving counter 203t, big hit flag 203u, special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v, special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w, pre-reading hold storage area 203x, small hit flag 203y, time reduction flag 203a2, and other memories At least it has a rear 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on winning the first starting port 630 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). is there. Further, the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b stores various counter values acquired based on the gaming balls winning the second starting port 640 up to the upper limit number (four in the present embodiment). Storage area.

  The first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the first special symbol are stored, and when the first special symbol stops the variable display, When various counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the various counter values are shifted and stored. The second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is a storage area in which various counter values for starting the variable display of the second special symbol are stored. For details, the first special symbol holding ball execution area ( (Not shown).

  The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the first special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown), and the second special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) are started. The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) with the detection of the winning are stored. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), the MPU 201 reads the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 from the counter buffer. The value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has won the second starting port 640, the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 are acquired from the counter buffer in the same manner as in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, and the corresponding values are obtained. Each is similarly stored in an area (not shown).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the variable effect, the MPU 201 executes the first process described above in order to execute a process such as a jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81. Of the data (each value of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1) corresponding to each start winning stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b, it corresponds to one start winning. The data is shifted to a first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) and a second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c stores the second random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the detection of the winning start of the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b. This is a storage area to be stored. When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (start winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), The value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained from the counter buffer, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c. Normally, a symbol flag (not shown) is set to ON and stored (stored). The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has four holding areas so that data (the value of the counter C4, a normal symbol flag (not shown)) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (held) up to four times. have. In the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, the data of the holding balls in the order of passing (starting prize) to the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b is used for the digestion of the reserved area where the data is empty. Are stored in order from the reserved area in the earliest order.

  When the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation display effect of the ordinary symbol based on the winning start, each counter value is stored, and the lottery of the ordinary symbol is won. And a memory for storing data (the value of the counter C4) to be referred to in processing such as setting of a display (variation pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the timing to start the execution of the fluctuation display effect of the normal symbol, the MPU 201 executes a process such as a winning lottery or a display setting of the second symbol display device 83 or the second symbol display device 88. Of the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the second random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, data corresponding to one start winning is stored in the normal symbol holding. Shift to the ball execution area (not shown). Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e are first activated detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the winning in the mouth 630 or the second starting port 640, the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) is determined. Each of the counters counts up to four times. The first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 203e are set to zero as initial values by an initial setting process (S1514 in FIG. 44) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed for display is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e are decremented by one each time a variable display effect is executed.

  Further, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d (that is, the number of holding balls) is determined based on the fact that a game ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, and the first special symbol holding ball number is determined. When the counter value is stored in the ball storage area 203a, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the first special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The first special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time a start winning is detected and the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by one. It is.

  In addition, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (that is, the number of reserved balls) is set in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting port 640. Is stored, the sound lamp control device 113 is notified by the second special symbol holding ball number command output from the main control device 110. The second special symbol holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e is incremented by one. It is.

  The MPU 201 stores the values of the counters C1 to C2 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown), respectively. When stored, the data stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is transferred to the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S203) or the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S206), a jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and a change pattern and a stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a variation display effect is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  Further, the determined variation pattern and the stop type are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the first or special figure 2 variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation display effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  The ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is a first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or a second ordinary symbol starting port 67b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (second symbol display device 83 of the third symbol display device 81, second symbol display, These are counters for counting the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display effect performed on the display device 88 up to a maximum of four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of retained balls stored based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. Zero is set as an initial value by an initial setting process (S1514 in FIG. 44) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning is detected and the number of balls to be changed displayed is increased, one is added to the maximum value of four. On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display effect is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 41).

  The normal symbol flag (not shown) is a flag indicating that data of the second random number counter C4 is stored and held, and a flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. is there. When the value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) or the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, it is set to ON. Further, when the value of the second hit counter C4 is shifted to the next holding area (the holding area corresponding to the holding number obtained by reducing the holding number by one), the holding area before the shift is performed. The normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF, while the ordinary symbol flag (not shown) of the shifted and stored holding area is set to ON. Further, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is subjected to the fluctuation stop processing, the normal symbol flag (not shown) is set to OFF.

  The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3). When the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is the high probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3). ). In the present embodiment, when the probability change setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the big hit game, the probability change flag 203g is set to ON (see S11682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, when the big hit game is started, it is set to off (see S607 in FIG. 29 and S1007 in FIG. 36). In the initialized state, the power supply is set to off, and when a normal power-off occurs, the state immediately before the power-off is backed up.

  The probability change setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 or the probability varying gaming state ST3) is determined by the probability varying switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A) during the big hit game. It is determined by whether or not the game ball has passed. Here, when a game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, the probability change setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1682 in FIG. 50). On the other hand, it is turned off based on the fact that the probable change flag 203g is set on. The probability change setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to a state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to off in the initialized state.

  If the probable change setting flag is set to ON when the power is turned on, the probable change switch 65e3 determines whether or not the power has passed before the power is turned off. May be configured to be officially turned on and return. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not the power has passed through the probability change switch 65e3 before the power is turned off, based on whether or not a later-described probability variation passage counter 203i has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the damage on the amusement store side by determining whether or not the power is turned off and the power is turned on again by rewriting only the probable change setting flag 203h while the power is off. it can.

  The probability change passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during the jackpot game (13 rounds in the jackpot A in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all of the gaming balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged, based on the sum of the positive change passage counter 203i and the discharge number counter 203s described later. The probability variable passage counter 203i is updated by being incremented by one each time the probability variable switch 65e3 is passed (S1681 in FIG. 50). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged game balls match, the initial value is reset to “0” (S1711 in FIG. 51). Note that the probability change passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round of the jackpot game. Specifically, based on the detection that the game ball has passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 4) provided in the first variable winning device 65, it is incremented by one and updated (see FIG. 50). S1673). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winning in the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203j) and the number of discharged (the total value of the discharged number counter 203s and the positive variable passing counter 203i) Are determined to match, and then reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. In the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for counting (counting) the time during which the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excitation). In the pachinko machine 10, at the jackpot A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the 14th round, and at the jackpot B and the jackpot E, the flow path solenoid 65k is set at 0.5 based on the start of the 14th round. Set on for seconds. In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the 14th round in the big hit A, and a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set in the big hit B (S1642 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, in the processing of S1679 of the winning processing (S1634 in FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110, the value is decremented by one and updated. Further, based on the determination that the value of the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off. The operation counter 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and in an initialized state, an initial value of 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203k and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to control the winning to the positive change switch 65e3 according to the type of big hit.

  The notification counter 203m is a counter for determining the timing of outputting a notification effect (in this embodiment, a voice saying “look at the liquid crystal”) to attract the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the notification counter 203m corresponding to one second is set at the end timing of the twelfth round (10 balls or 30 seconds have elapsed in the first variable winning device 65). The notification counter 203m is updated by decrementing one by one by the processing of S1664 of the notification processing (S1633 in FIG. 49) of the main control device 110. Based on the notification counter 203m becoming 0, a notification command output to the sound lamp control device 113 is set. Upon receiving this command, the sound ramp control device 113 executes the above-described processing for outputting the sound.

  With such a configuration, the voice "look at the liquid crystal" is output before the start of the 14th round in which the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so that the player can use the third symbol display device corresponding to the liquid crystal. Gaze at 81. Here, in the thirteenth round of the jackpot game, a girl character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the “attention” character, which is a notification that prompts the player to look at the third symbol display device 81, is displayed. Is displayed. In the 14th round, the flow path solenoid 65k operates, and when the operation is watched by the player, the type of the jackpot being executed is determined. The movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6 (a)) is made less visible to the player in order to keep the player expecting that the probability change game state ST3 is provided until the end of the jackpot game. Information announcement is being performed. However, when the thirteenth round is completed, there is a possibility that the player may look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so that the third symbol display device 81 is notified by voice during the interval. Is performed. Thus, after the interval effect has been executed, the player can be attracted to the displayed content displayed, and the player can be distracted from the operation of the switching member 65h.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is notified so as to be shown to distract the player from the switching member 65h. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The movement of the switching member 65h may be notified so as to be hidden by the player's hand by notifying the player of the player with the variable winning device 65. Further, the present invention is not limited to the third symbol display device 81, but may be configured to notify the player of the display lamp 34 or the like so as to look at the player, thereby distracting the player's attention. Furthermore, during the 13th round, a three-dimensional code or the like may be displayed to notify the user of reading with a mobile phone, thereby distracting the player's attention. In the present embodiment, the effect of distracting the attention is set to the longest time (5 seconds from the start of the 14th round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends. Thus, it is possible to suppress a problem in which the jackpot A, the jackpot C, the jackpot D, the jackpot B, and the jackpot E are determined based on the notification time.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203n is a flag indicating that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON, it indicates that the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 has been set from the open state to the closed state in the first round. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, the remaining ball timer 203o described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1632 in FIG. 50). The remaining ball timer 203o is a counter for determining the time since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed, and determines whether or not the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter for doing so.

  The remaining ball timer 203o determines that the game ball that has won the first variable prize device 65 is discharged when the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable prize device 65 is closed after one preset round is completed. Is a counter for determining whether the time necessary for the operation has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game ball winning the first variable winning device 65 is discharged is 2 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance by the remaining ball timer 203o. It is set as the upper limit. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203o (3 seconds in the present embodiment), it is determined whether or not the number of winnings to the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged coins match. (S1707 in FIG. 51). If they do not match, an error command is set and that effect is reported. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are clogged in the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the game balls are left illegally in the first variable winning device 65, and a shock or the like is given at the start timing of the 14th round, so that the game balls reach the switching member 65h earlier than the actual one. Even if it is the jackpot E, it is possible to suppress the illegality of passing the game ball to the probability change switch 65e3.

  If the winning number and the discharge number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON. It may be configured not to be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improper assignment of the probable change game state ST3.

  The probability change enable flag 203p is a flag for determining whether or not the passage is valid when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 after the passage solenoid 65k is set to off. When the certain variation enable flag 203p is set to ON, the game ball that has flowed into the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6A) is switched based on the fact that the flow path solenoid 65k is ON. Is less than the time required to pass through. That is, this indicates that the game ball passes through the certainty changing switch 65e3 during a normal period.

  The probable change valid timer 203r is a counter for counting the time since the above-described probable change valid flag 203p was set to ON. After the probable change valid timer 203r turns off the flow path solenoid 65k, it is possible to determine a period necessary for normally passing the probable change switch 65e3. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball entering the special discharge port 65e2 to pass through the probable change switch 65e3 is one second. The upper limit value of the probable change valid timer 203r is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even after passing through the probable change switch 65e3, it is determined to be illegal and not to be passed.

  Thereby, in a state where the switching member 65h is not illegally guided to the special discharge port 65e2, the player can enter a ball into the special discharge port 65e2 and pass a game ball through the positive change switch 65e3, or play a game with a piano wire or the like from below the positive change switch 65e3. It is possible to suppress damage caused by fraud, such as pushing up a sphere and causing the magnetic sensor to be erroneously detected as passing by a radio wave or the like.

  The discharge number counter 203s is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the ball discharge switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6A) in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203s is reset to the initial value of 0 after the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharges are determined (S1711 in FIG. 51).

  The time-saving counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of times the remaining special symbols change in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. This time-saving counter 203t is set to 100 when the probability change setting flag is off at the end of the big hit game. That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability change game state ST3 is not set after the jackpot game, the game shifts to the 100 time saving game state ST1h.

  The big hit flag 203u indicates that the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained based on winning in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, or the second starting port 640 is a hit at the start of the change. This flag is set to ON when it is determined. In addition, when the big hit game ends, it is set to off. In addition, it is comprised by the flag which can identify which one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit. Specifically, it is composed of 2 bits, and at "10", the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol, and at "01", the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the second special symbol. "00" sets the jackpot flag 203u to off.

  Here, since the big hit flag 203u is used in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, at the start of the change, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to ON first. In this case, even if the other lottery result is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u is not overwritten, and the other lottery result is processed in the same manner as the loss. Thereby, it is possible to perform the processing so that the variable display that is a big hit is not executed at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In other words, when the variable display that becomes a big hit is started in one of the special symbols, the variable display that becomes a big hit is not started on the other hand, and only the out-of-order fluctuation mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured with the common jackpot flag 203u. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and independent large jackpot flags are set for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured to simultaneously perform the variable display of the big hit. With such a configuration, even if the variable display of the big hit B and the big hit E is started in the first special symbol during the probability changing game state ST3, the changing time is set long, and the second special symbol is set. By configuring so that a lottery can be easily selected with a short fluctuation time in the symbol, it is possible to easily configure the second special symbol until the big hit B is started. Therefore, an effect of notifying the player of the time until the jackpot B is started (that is, the period until the probable change game state ST3 ends) is executed, and the player is rushed to win the jackpot in the second special symbol. An effect of playing a game can be executed in an attempt to win. Therefore, a fresh effect can be provided to the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game early.

  The special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is a flag indicating that the big hit game of the second special symbol is started to be executed while the first special symbol is being changed and displayed. In S1004 of a second special symbol change stop process (S207 in FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later, it is set to ON. In the processing of S611 of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (FIG. 29, S204), it is set to OFF.

  The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is a flag indicating that the big hit of the first special symbol is executed while the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is set to ON in S605 of a first special symbol fluctuation stop process (FIG. 29, S204) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, which will be described later. In the process of S1011 of the second special symbol change stop process (FIG. 36, S207), it is set to OFF.

  The look-ahead reserved storage area 203x stores discrimination results such as the hit / failed determination result for the reserved ball stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the jackpot type, the variation type, and the like. Is a storage area to be stored.

  The small hit flag 203y is a flag indicating that the result of determining whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a win is a small hit. The small hit flag is configured to be able to identify which of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be a small hit at the same time (if one is a small hit, the other is lost). Therefore, the small hit flag 203y does not become a value indicating that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are small hits.

  The time-saving flag 203a2 is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special-design time-saving state (electric support state, normal symbol high-probability gaming state). If the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol time saving state (electric support state), and if the value of the time saving flag 203a2 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is normally in the special symbol. Indicates a state (normal symbol low probability state). The time saving flag 203a2 has an initial value set to off, and is set to on at the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot type with the power support in the ending process (see FIG. 48) executed at the end of the jackpot game. (See S1654 in FIG. 48). Then, in the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 41), it is referred to determine whether or not the gaming state is the time saving (electric support) state (see S1208 and S1214 in FIG. 41), and the next big hit game is started. 29 (S607 in FIG. 29, S1007 in FIG. 36) or when the number of special symbol lotteries in the time saving (electric support) state has reached a predetermined number (see S628 in FIG. 30).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  Returning to FIG. 12, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large open-port solenoid for opening and closing the first specific winning opening 65a, and an electric motor. A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid or the like for driving the accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply unit 115. Various processes are executed based on signals output from various switches 208 and a RAM erasure signal SG2 output from a RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (lights 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and performs a fluctuation display effect ( The display control device 114 controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the variable display. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the vibration sensor 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, displays the winning order displayed in the lower display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. The audio output device 226 is controlled and the display control device 114 is instructed so that the held symbol displays are rearranged and displayed in the order of the variable display start.

  Further, a vibration sensor (not shown) is attached to the back surface of the game board 213. In the pachinko machine 10, since the winning in the starting port is an important factor in determining the game state, it is necessary to change the flow of the ball by vibration to prevent the winning in the winning port intentionally. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a player or the like, an error command notifying the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the sound ramp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

<Electrical Configuration of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a.

  The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining detailed content of the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. The variation pattern selection table 222a stores a plurality of types of variation content (for example, variation, One variation is determined from the reach variation patterns of different display contents of reach A to D having the same time and the same determination result.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a special figure 2 change start flag 223e, and a special figure 2 change start flag 223f. , Special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i, effect counter 223j, dependent state setting area 223k, and other memory area 223z.

  The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. To be more specific, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 46) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process is performed. , The command is analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the result of the lottery of the reserved ball and the like can be determined by the sound lamp control device 113 before the start of the change.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, like the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, performs a variable effect (fluctuation) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). Display), which is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the reserved ball number in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. It has become.

  Specifically, in main control device 110, when the number of retained balls of the variable display is added by entering the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, the main control device 110 uses special symbols in special symbols. When the fluctuation display is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 obtains the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203d.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to the reception of the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, and also stores the first special symbol retained after storage. In order to notify the value of the ball number counter 223 c to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved value corresponding to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of the reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is configured to output the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110. The only difference is that they are stored in the memory.

  The special figure 1 change start flag 223e is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 1 change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the first special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a special figure 2 change pattern command for notifying the change pattern of the second special symbol output from the main controller 110 is received. Is set to On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON when a first stop type command for notifying the variable stop type of the first special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON when a second stop type command for notifying the change stop type of the second special symbol output from the main control device 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  The effect counter 223j is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Each time the main process is executed, it is incremented by one and updated.

  In the slave state setting area 223k, data corresponding to a state command output from the main controller 110 is set. Based on the data set in the slave state setting area 223h, the current game state can also be determined by the sound lamp control device 113. The state setting command is output from the main controller 110 even when the power is turned on, and the backed up game state can be determined by the sound lamp controller 113.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch (FIGS. 3 and 122) (see FIG. 3). And a RAM erasing switch (122 in FIG. 3) circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

  The RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122) circuit 253 is depressed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 3, 122)) (see FIG. 3). This is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 in the event that the error occurs. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  The MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes control processing such as detection of winning of a special symbol or a normal symbol and various lotteries such as selection of a winning or a variation pattern for the winning. Therefore, the control load of the MPU 201 is large, and in order to stably control the pachinko machine 10, as in the present embodiment, a lottery to determine whether or not to set the game operation suggestion setting is performed by sub-control. The control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by performing the control by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 corresponding to the device.

  The control boards of the main control unit 110 and the sound lamp control unit 113 are covered with a box called a board box, which is made up of a transparent plastic base member and a lid member. The substrate box is caulked by a member called a “sealing member” for preventing fraud so that the base member and the lid member cannot be easily separated from each other. Generally, when the base member and the lid member are fitted together, the sealing member inserts a pin-shaped sealing member into a through hole provided through a part of the base member and the lid member (or By closing the base member and the lid member, it is difficult to separate the base member and the lid member unless a method of leaving an opening mark such as destroying the member forming the through hole or destroying the sealing member is performed. I have.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a ROM 234, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. An output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Note that the pachinko machine 10 is a model having the same design as the design displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having different jackpot lottery probabilities and different numbers of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot. Therefore, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the ROM 234, and the image controller 237 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described. First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, various processes are executed in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 234.

  As described above, the ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and executes the control program stored in the ROM 234. The ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the ROM 234 to the work RAM 233. The MPU 231 outputs the image data transferred to the work RAM 233 to the third symbol display device 81 as needed, and controls the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are configured to be able to simultaneously perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37, of the seven seven-segment LEDs of the seven-segment display 37b, the left seven-segment LED performs a variable display corresponding to the first special symbol, and the right seven-segment LED is displayed. In the segment LED, a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol is executed.

<Control process of main controller in first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, When they reach 299, 99, 99, 239, respectively, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the third symbol display device 81 is executed while performing the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process (S104) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the first normal symbol start opening 67a or the second normal symbol start opening 67b. Then, a through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball in is executed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) and the through gate passage process (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the execution of the through gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and fires the ball on condition that the hitting switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining ON / OFF of the data. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, a special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S104). The special symbol variation process (FIG. 23, S104) performs various determinations and determinations on the first special symbol and the second special symbol based on the acquired counter values, and displays the determined variation by predetermined control. In this manner, control is performed so that the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 can simultaneously perform variable display or stop display in a display mode indicating the determination result. Hereinafter, the special symbol change process (FIG. 23, S104) will be described.

  In the special symbol change process (FIG. 23, S104), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being played (S201). When it is determined that the big hit is being made (S201: Yes), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit is not being performed (S201: No), it is determined whether the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S202). When it is determined that the first special symbol change display is being performed (S202: Yes), the first special symbol change stop process is executed (S204). In the first special symbol change stop process (S204), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed, the process of stopping the change display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Is done. In the first special symbol change stop process (S204), the second special symbol is stopped and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed. In this case, a process of forcibly stopping the first special symbol during the variable display is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is changed and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the change of the first special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the first special symbol change stop processing (S204) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (S202: No), the first special symbol variation start process is executed (S203). In the first special symbol change start process (S203), if hold data (various counter values) is stored in the first special symbol hold ball storage area 203a, a jackpot determination and a change pattern selection process based on the hold data are performed. Is executed. In the first special symbol change start process (S203), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thereby, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or the small hit) of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be a variable display. The first special symbol change start process (S203) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when the second special symbol is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the first special symbol during the variation display when the variation is stopped with the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the interruption ( What is necessary is just to comprise so that the process which restarts the variable display of the 1st special symbol (temporarily stopped) may be performed.

  After the first special symbol change start process (S203) is executed, it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is being changed and displayed (S205). When it is determined that the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (S205: Yes), a second special symbol change stop process (S207) is executed. The second special symbol change stop process (S207) will be described later in detail, but, like the first special symbol change stop process (S204), when the specified change time of the second special symbol during the change display has elapsed. Then, a process of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is changed and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit) and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the first lottery game is executed, the second special symbol in the variable display is displayed. A process for forcibly stopping is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped). Details of the second special symbol change stop processing (S207) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the second special symbol is not in the variable display (S205: No), the second special symbol change start process is executed (S206). In the second special symbol change start process (S206), if hold data (various counter values) is stored in the second special symbol hold ball storage area 203b, a jackpot determination and a change pattern selection process based on the hold data are performed. Is executed. In the second special symbol change start process (S206), if the lottery result is a big hit (or a small hit), the big hit flag 203u (or the small hit flag 203y) is set to ON. Thus, during the execution of the variable display based on the big hit (or the small hit) of the second special symbol, control is performed so that the variable display of the first special symbol is changed to a variable display. The second special symbol change start process (S206) will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. In addition, when the first special symbol is configured to suspend (temporarily stop) the variation of the second special symbol during the variation display when the variation is stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit), the interruption ( What is necessary is just to perform the process which restarts the fluctuation | variation display of the 2nd special symbol (temporarily stopped).

  Next, the first special symbol change start process (S203), which is one of the special symbol change processes (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change start process (S203).

  In the first special symbol change start process (S203 in FIG. 24), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 203d is decremented by one (1). S303). The data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side (S304). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: holding area 1 → execution area, holding area 2 → holding area 1, holding area 3 → holding area 2, holding area 4 → holding area 3.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S305). The first special symbol big hit determination process (S305 in FIG. 24) will be described later in detail, but based on the value of the first random number counter C1 shifted to the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). A jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot is based on the set gaming state.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S306). The first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which will be described in detail later, is a result of the hit determination based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). Is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the counter value based on each counter value.

  Next, a first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process (S203 in FIG. 23), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305).

  In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305 in FIG. 25), first, each counter value stored in the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S401). It is determined whether or not the gaming state is the probable changing game state ST3 (probable changing) (S402). The determination as to whether or not the gaming state is the certainty-variable gaming state ST3 is made based on whether or not the certainty-variable flag 203g is set to ON. When it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is ON (that is, the game state is the probability change game state ST3 (probable change)) (S402: Yes), the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 15A) is displayed. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for high probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S403). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probable change flag 203g is off (that is, the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state (not probable) (S402: No), the first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) ), It is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the jackpot determination value for low probability, and the lottery result is obtained (S404).

  When the process of S403 or S404 is completed, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on (S405). Here, when the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is set to ON, it indicates that a change to a big hit or a small hit has started in the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, by using the big hit flag 203u (and the small hit flag 203y) in common for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be used at the same time. It is configured so that some variation is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that a large hit (or a small hit) occurs continuously in a short time and the loss on the game store side becomes excessively large. In the case where the change to be a big hit or a small hit has been started in the second special symbol, the lottery of the first special symbol is not performed (the processing from S402 to S404 is skipped), and the first special symbol is skipped. Variation display based on deviation (special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410)) may be executed. As a result, the lottery process (the processes from S402 to S404) can be skipped, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off, that is, when it is determined that the change to the big hit or the small hit has not started in the second special symbol (S405: No) ), It is determined whether or not the lottery result executed in the processing of S403 or S404 is a big hit (S406). When it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S406: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is set on for the first special symbol (S407). After that, the lottery result of the first special symbol (special figure 1 lottery result) is set to a big hit (S408), and the big hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to the value of the big hit type counter C1. It is set based on the gaming state (S409). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S405, when it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y for the second special symbol is on (S405: Yes), or in the process of S406, it is determined that the lottery result is out of order. In this case (S406: No), special figure 1 deviation variation processing is executed (S410). The special figure 1 departure variation process (S410) will be described with reference to FIG. 26. However, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is deviated, setting of a deviated symbol is performed.

  As described above, even if the lottery result based on the value of the first random number C1 actually obtained is a big hit, the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is already set to ON, that is, When the change to be a big hit or a small hit is started by the 2 special symbols, the setting of forcibly removing is executed in the first special symbol. As a result, in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the change of the big hit (or the small hit) is not executed at the same time, and the big hit (or the small hit) is continuously made in a short period. It is possible to suppress a problem that the fluctuation is started and the damage on the game store side is excessively increased. In addition, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player is confused by executing the big hit (or the small hit) simultaneously or continuously.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the change that causes a big hit is not performed at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the changes are performed simultaneously. In this case, a special jackpot flag may be set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, if the big hit game is executed with the other special symbol, the fluctuation of one special symbol temporarily stops the measurement of the fluctuation time, and the special symbol fluctuates in a pseudo manner. It is conceivable that a temporary stop is provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special figure 1 deviation change processing (S410) which is one processing of the first special symbol change start processing (FIG. 24, S203) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (S410). In the special figure 1 deviation variation process (S410 in FIG. 26), first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is on for the second special symbol (S412). If it is determined that the big hit flag 203u or the small hit flag 203y is ON (S412: Yes), the first symbol display device 37 is set to a symbol that is out of the first special symbol (S416). After that, this processing ends. As described above, when the big hit or the small hit is set in the second special symbol, the first special symbol is forcibly set to the off symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously subjected to a large hit or a small hit.

  On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the big hit flag 203u and the small hit flag 203y are off for the second special symbol (S411: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit. (S412) based on the gaming state and the small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15B). In the process of S412, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S412: No), since the lottery result is out of order, the process of S416 is executed, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S412 that the small hit is made (S412: Yes), the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S413). The lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small hit (S414), and a small hit symbol of the first special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S415). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, a first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306).

  In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306 in FIG. 27), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S305 in FIG. 25), it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit, It is determined whether or not the first special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, the determination as to whether or not a big hit is made based on whether or not the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol. The big hit flag 203u is set to ON in the processing of S407 in the first special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 25).

  In the processing of S501, when it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the current game state (the normal game state ST1, the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability changing game state ST3, A variation pattern selection table 202e corresponding to one of the time-saving gaming states ST1h) is set (S502). The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 16A to 16C) corresponding to the set gaming state and the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2. (S503). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern selection table 202e set in the process of S502 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S504). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern selected in the processing of S504 (S505). After that, the process of S507 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place (that is, the jackpot flag 203u for the first special symbol is off) (S501: No), the special figure 1 is out. A variation pattern selection process is performed (S506).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506). In the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection process (FIG. 28, S506), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit (S511). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S511). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is ON (S511: Yes), a small hit variation pattern is set (S512). In the case of a small hit, one type of variation pattern is set in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Specifically, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3000 ms (3 seconds) is set. When the process of S512 is completed, a special figure 1 variation pattern command indicating a small hit is set (S513). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, it is out of place) (S511: No), the variation pattern selection table (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18) are set (S514). From the set fluctuation pattern selection table, a deviation pattern is selected based on the result of determination (out) or the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 (S515). A special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (S516). After that, this processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. After executing the processing of S505 or the special figure 1 deviation variation pattern selection processing (S506 in FIG. 28), the processing of S507 is executed. In the process of S507, a status command indicating the current gaming status is set (S507). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the first special symbol variation stop process (S204), which is one of the special symbol variation processes (FIG. 22, S104), will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing (S204).

  In the first special symbol change stop process (FIG. 29, S204), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol being executed (S601). In the process of S601, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: Yes), the big hit flag 203u is turned on for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Is determined (S602). When it is determined that the big hit flag 203u is set to ON for the first special symbol (S602: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S603). Although illustration is omitted, when the process of S603 is executed, a special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is turned on is set.

  When the processing of S603 is completed, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (S604). Then, the start of the big hit game based on the selected big hit type is set (S605). Thereafter, the time saving counter 203t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S606), and the probability variable flag 203g and the time saving flag 203a2 are set to off (S607). Next, a special figure 1 determination command for instructing the sound lamp control device 113 to determine and stop the first special symbol is set (S608). The process of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol, which is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37, is executed (S609), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S601, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the variation based on the first special symbol being executed (S601: No), then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation stop flag 203v is on. It is determined (S610). If it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is off (S610: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S610 that the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is ON (S610 in FIG. 29), it means that the second special symbol has been stopped at the big hit or the small hit, and In order to stop the fluctuation based on the first special symbol, the processing of S611 and S612 is executed. In the process of S611, the special figure 1 change stop flag 203v is set to off, and the process shifts to the process of S612.

  In S612, special figure 1 departure stop processing for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in a deviated manner is executed. In the processing of S602 described above, when it is determined that the big hit flag is off for the special figure 1 (S602: No), similarly, the special figure for stopping and displaying the first special symbol in an out-of-position manner. A one-off stop process is executed (S612). When the processing of S612 ends, the present processing ends.

  As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S204), when the specified variation time of the first special symbol during the variation display has elapsed (S601: Yes), the symbol showing the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed. The process of stopping the variable display (S603 to S609 or S612) is executed. In addition, when the second special symbol is stopped and changed at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit) and the big hit game (or the small hit game) of the second lottery game is executed (S610: Yes), the variable display is displayed. A process (S612) of forcibly stopping the first special symbol is executed. In addition, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped at the symbol indicating the big hit (or the small hit) (S610: Yes), the change of the second special symbol during the change display is interrupted (temporarily stopped). May be.

  Here, the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S612) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S612). In the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S612), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag 203y is set to ON for the first special symbol (S621). The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (S622). Then, a special 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON (indicating that the special figure 2 is forcibly stopped) is set (S623). The start of the small hit game is set (S624). After that, the process of S625 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S621, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203y is off for the first special symbol (S621: No), it is a case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is out of order, and thus S622. The processing of S624 is skipped from and processing shifts to the processing of S625. In the process of S625, it is determined whether or not the time-saving counter 203t has a value larger than 0 (S625). In the process of S625, when it is determined that the time-saving counter 203t is larger than 0 (S625: Yes), the time-saving counter 203t is updated by subtracting 1 (S626), and whether the time-saving counter 203t after the subtraction is 0 or not. It is determined whether or not it is (S627). In the process of S627, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203t is 0 (S627: Yes), the time-saving gaming state ST1h ends, so the time-saving flag 203a2 is turned off (S628), and S629 is performed. Move to the processing of.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S627 that the time-saving counter 203t after the subtraction is not 0 (greater than 0) (S627: No), the processing of the step S628 is skipped because the time-saving gaming state ST1h continues. Then, the process proceeds to S629.

  In the process of S629, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S629). A process of stopping the change of the first special symbol, which is dynamically displayed (dynamically displayed) on the first symbol display device 37, is executed (S630). After that, this process is executed. Here, returning to FIG. 29, after executing the special figure 1 departure stop processing (S608), this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously displayed in a fluctuating manner. However, when the first special symbol is fluctuated and stopped according to the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the second special symbol is displayed. The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203w is set to ON so as to execute the processing for forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. On the other hand, as will be described later, when the second special symbol is fluctuated and stopped according to the lottery result of the big hit or the small hit, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag 203v is set to ON to stop the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Forced execution. Thereby, the simultaneous fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be efficiently executed.

  In addition, in the case where a change to be a big hit or a small hit has already started in one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly deviated as a result of the right or wrong determination. The variable display is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the big hit and the small hit, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the gambling property becomes too high.

  Next, a second special symbol change start process (S206), which is a process of the special symbol change process (FIG. 22, S104), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change start process (S206).

  In the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 31, S206), the number of first special symbol reserved balls of each process from S301 to S306 is different from the first special symbol change start process (FIG. 24, S203). The counter 203d, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter (N1), the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the first special symbol big hit determination process (S305), and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S306). In each of the processes from S701 to S706, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter (N2), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706) are the same except for the point that they are respectively changed, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S705), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (S206 in FIG. 23), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol big hit determination process (S705).

  The second special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 32, S705) differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (FIG. 25, S305) in the following points. In the processing of S801 corresponding to the processing of S401, the first special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is changed to the second special symbol holding ball execution area (not shown). The point that the special figure 1 (first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 (second special symbol) in the corresponding processing of S808 and the processing of S809 and S810 corresponding to the processing of S409 and S410 are the first. They differ from each other in that the special symbol is changed to the second special symbol. Since other points are the same, the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 deviation variation processing (S810 in FIG. 32, FIG. 33) executed in the second special symbol big hit determination processing (see FIG. 32) is the same as the special figure 1 deviation variation processing (see FIG. 26) described above. Is performed on the second special symbol, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the second special symbol change pattern selection process (S706), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process (FIG. 23, S206), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S706).

  The second special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 34, S706) differs from the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 27, S306) in the following points. In the processing of S901 corresponding to the processing of S501, the special figure 1 lottery result (lottery result of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 lottery result (lottery result of the second special symbol), and S506 to S507. In each of the processes of S906 to S907 corresponding to the processes up to this point, the special figure 1 variation pattern command (the variation pattern command of the first special symbol) is changed to the special figure 2 variation pattern command. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a description will be given of a second special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 22, S104). FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol change stop processing (S207). The second special symbol change stop process (S207) differs from the first special symbol change stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the following points. In the process of S1002 corresponding to the process of S602, the point that “for special figure 1” is changed to “for the special figure 2”, and in the process of S1003 corresponding to the process of S603, the special figure 2 The point that the fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag, the point that the special figure 1 stop type command is changed to the special figure 2 stop type command in the processing of S1004 corresponding to the processing of S604, In the processing of S1009 and S1010 corresponding to the processing of S610, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop flag is changed to the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag, and in the processing of S1011 corresponding to S611, the special figure 1 departure stop processing is specially described. 2 in that it is changed to the departure stop processing. Since other points are the same, detailed description is omitted.

  Also, the special figure 2 departure stop processing (S1011 in FIG. 36, FIG. 37) executed in the second special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 36) is the same as the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see FIG. 30). Is performed on the second special symbol, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is simultaneously performed. Can be done. Therefore, a lottery game of more special symbols can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a big hit is given to the player within the predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

  In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner at the same time and a lottery game is executed, if a jackpot game occurs in one of the first or second special symbols, the other one is used. Since the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped, the player can concentrate on the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to stop display of a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the other special symbol may be variably displayed while being temporarily stopped or the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. In such a case, since the special symbol that has been temporarily stopped is stopped in a display mode or a notification mode in which the player can know that the temporary stop is being performed, the player loses the lottery game in the middle of the variable display. Can be grasped that it is not, you can play a jackpot game with confidence.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a description will be given of the start winning process (S105), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (FIG. 38, S105) determines whether the game ball has won any of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640. The acquired counter values are stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol up to the upper limit number (the maximum number of each of the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, and the second starting port 640 is four). This is a process of storing each in the reserved ball storage area 203b. When the respective counter values obtained based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Alternatively, based on each counter value stored in each of the second special symbol holding ball storage areas 203b, a process of predicting a hit / failed determination result, a selected variation pattern, or the like is performed in advance. Hereinafter, the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 38) will be described.

  In the start winning processing (S105 in FIG. 38), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start win) the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631, which is the first starting port (S1101). Here, a winning in the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631 (the start winning has been achieved) (S1101: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is set. It is acquired (S1102). It is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103). It is determined whether this is less than the upper limit value of four for the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631 (that is, whether the reserved number is not stored up to the upper limit value). When it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (1104). A suspended ball count command for notifying the suspended number to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1105). The respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read. (S1106).

  Next, a first prefetching process is executed (S1107). The first look-ahead process (S1107) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 39. However, the result of the hit / fail determination and the variation pattern determined from each counter value newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. , A process of determining a stop type and the like is executed.

  Next, with respect to each of the processes from S1108 to S1114, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port (the first starting port 630 and the right first starting port 631) executed in each of the processes from S1101 to S1107 is performed. The only difference is that the same processing as the processing performed in the second starting port 640 is different from the processing performed in the second starting port 640, and thus the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a description will be given of the first prefetching process (S1107), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first prefetching process (S1107).

  In the first look-ahead process (FIG. 39, S1107), first, the first random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter, which are various counter values from the storage area newly stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. C2, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is read (S1121). The read data is stored in the empty area of the prefetch pending storage area 203x in the area having the smallest winning order (S1122).

  Based on the data stored in the read-ahead pre-pending storage area 203x, the result of the rejection determination is determined. It should be noted that the result of the determination of success or failure determined here is determined in a case where a hit is made in the normal game state ST1. Since the fluctuation time is set by being variable depending on the number of holdings, the timing at which the fluctuation starts cannot be determined between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the game state at the start of the fluctuation cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, the determination result of the success / failure determination can be accurately determined only when the value of the first random number counter C1 having the common jackpot determination value is “7” in both the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state. Therefore, in the process of S1123, it is determined whether or not it is determined as a hit during the normal game state ST1.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the hit determination result is a big hit (S1123: Yes), the first special symbol is a big hit, and a first winning command indicating the big hit type is set. After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1123 that the winning / failing determination result is out (S1123: No), a first winning command indicating that the prefetch lottery result of the first special symbol is out of place is set (S1125). . After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port (the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631) and is newly held and stored, the information stored and held is Based on this, the result of the determination is determined before the start of the change, and is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from the normal color) based on the result of the determination of whether the ball is reserved or stored, An effect of displaying a notice symbol or the like and suggesting a result of the determination to the player can be executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of pre-reading, the hit / fail determination is determined as the normal gaming state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is accurately determined, and the hit / fail determination is performed based on the gaming state. It may be configured to execute. In this case, the selection of the variation pattern is not made variable depending on the number of reserved balls, but can be determined by selecting a fixed variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation. When performing the pre-reading, the game state at the start of the change can be determined by determining the order of the change until the reserved ball starts to change based on the information stored and stored.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a second prefetching process (S1114), which is one process of the start winning process (FIG. 38, S105). FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the second prefetching process (S1114).

  The second prefetching process (FIG. 40, S1114) is based on the fact that the first prefetching process (FIG. 39, S1107) has won the first starting port (the first starting port 630 or the right first starting port 631). In contrast to the process of pre-reading the pending data and performing various determinations, the process of pre-reading the pending data based on the winning of the second starting port 640 and performing various determinations is performed. Since the same processing is executed only for the difference, the detailed description is omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed. When one of the special symbols is subjected to a variable display of a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is forcibly displayed with a variable display of a missing. Therefore, in the first prefetching process or the second prefetching process described above, when prefetching the lottery result, it may be configured to determine whether the lottery result is forcibly removed. To do so, for example, when prefetching the lottery result of the first special symbol, a period (time) during which the dynamic display of the prefetched lottery result is executed is calculated. Then, during the period in which the dynamic display is executed, it is sufficient to determine whether or not a change to be a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol is executed. If the lottery result is out of order, the lottery will be out of the state of execution of the second special symbol, so that the determination may not be made. Thereby, the processing load caused by performing the above-described determination can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a normal symbol variation process (S106), which is one process of a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). The normal symbol variation process (S106) is a process for controlling the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 88, the opening time of the first ordinary electric accessory 632, and the like.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 41, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting the ordinary symbol (second symbol). (S1201). The hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes a period from when the display indicating the hit is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 to when the opening and closing control of the first normal electric accessory 632 is being performed. When it is determined that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S1201: Yes), the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether the normal symbol of the second symbol display device 83 is being displayed in a variable manner (S1202). If it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S1220). . Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S1219 described later before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device 88.

  In the processing of S1220, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S1220: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S1220, when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol that has been fluctuation displayed has elapsed (S1220: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S1221). In the process of S1221, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S1213, the symbol “○” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the second symbol (lighting display). ) To be set. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode at the time of the departure is set by the processing of S1218, an “X” symbol is displayed as a second symbol on the second symbol display device 83, and a stop display (lighting) is performed. Display). When the stop display is set by the process of S1221, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is changed to the second symbol in the display mode set by the processes of S1213 and S1218. A stop display (lighting display) is displayed on the display device 83.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol this time is a win (S1222). If it is determined that the current lottery result of the ordinary symbol is a win (S1222: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set (S1223). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbols is out of this time (S1222: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1202 that the ordinary symbol is not in the variable display mode (S1202: No), the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable symbol is suspended in the ordinary symbol M) is acquired. (S1203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S1204). When it is determined that the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S1204: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S1205).

  Next, the data stored in the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). In the process of S1206, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the ordinary symbol hold 1 to the ordinary symbol hold 4 in the ordinary symbol hold ball storage area 203c to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, in each area, such as normal symbol hold 1 → execution area, normal symbol hold 2 → normal symbol hold 1, normal symbol hold 3 → normal symbol hold 2, normal symbol hold 4 → normal symbol hold 4. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (not shown) is acquired (S1207).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203a2 is turned on, that is, whether or not the time saving game state ST1h or the probable change game state ST3 is established (S1208). In the process of S1208, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1208: No), based on the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for low probability time (FIG. 15C). A success / failure determination result is obtained (S1211). On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is on (S1208: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1209). When it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit (S1209: Yes), the process of S1211 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is not in the big hit (S1209: No), the hit determination value of the second random number table 202c for high probability time (FIG. 15C). Is obtained based on the result (S1210).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is a win (S1212). When it is determined that the lottery result of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is not a hit (that is, the symbol is off) (S1212: No), a display mode of “X” which is a display mode at the time of off is set. (S1218). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the second symbol (normal symbol) is determined to be a win (that is, a win) (S1212: Yes), the display mode of “○” which is the display mode at the time of the hit is determined. This is set (S1213).

  It is determined whether or not the time-saving flag 203a2 is on, that is, whether or not the time-saving game state ST1h or the probable change game state ST3 (S1214). In the process of S1214, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203a2 is off (S1214: No), the process of S1217 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time reduction flag 203a2 is on (S1214: Yes), it is determined whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in a big hit (S1215). If it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is being hit, the process of S1216 is executed.

  In the process of S1216, the opening time of the guide members (the left guide member 632a and the right guide member 632b) of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set to 1 s, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S1216). On the other hand, in the process of S1215, if it is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is in the jackpot game (that is, the game is in the low-probability game state) (S1215: Yes), the first normal electric winning combination The opening time of the blade of the object 632 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to one (S1217).

  When any of S1216 to S1218 is completed, next, the variation time of the ordinary symbol corresponding to the value of the ordinary figure variation type counter CS2 is determined from the ordinary figure variation pattern table 202f (S1219), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the general figure is determined based on the value of the general figure variation type counter CS2 from the general figure variation pattern table 202f (see FIG. 19). As shown in FIG. 19, in the ordinary figure variation pattern table 202f, a variation pattern of a normal symbol is set corresponding to each game state. Except for the probability variation game state ST3 (probability variation: with power support), there is only one variation pattern, and the same variation time is always determined regardless of the value of the selected general-purpose variation type counter CS2. On the other hand, when the game state is the probable change game state ST3, the determination value “0 to 190” determines the variation time of 3000 ms, and the determination value “191 to 198” determines the variation time of 30,000 ms.

  As a result, in the probable change game state ST3, a fluctuation time longer than other cases is selected with a probability of 8/199. When the long fluctuation time is selected, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated until the fluctuation time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the second starting port 640 is disposed below the first ordinary electric accessory 632, and when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is operated, the second starting member 632 a is used to perform the second starting operation. The flow path that can enter the opening 640 is closed. Therefore, during that time, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 640 is configured to be restricted.

  Here, as described above, when the long variation time (30000 ms) is selected as the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 does not operate during that time, so right-handing during that time Approximately 85% of the played game balls win the second starting port 640. Therefore, by selecting a long variation time as the variation time of the ordinary symbol in the certain variation game state ST3, it is possible to increase the number of winnings to the second starting port 640.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (c), during the probability change game state ST3, the big hit D is always selected when a win is made with the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the big hit with the first special symbol. Is selected. Therefore, in the probability change game state ST3, it can be more advantageous to the player when a lottery is made with the second special symbol than when the lottery is made with the first special symbol when a big hit is made. Therefore, by increasing the winning in the second starting port 640 during the certainty-variable game state ST3, it is possible to provide a period that is advantageous to the player.

  Next, a through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 22), and determines whether the game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 when a game ball has passed.

  In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (S1301). Here, the fact that the game ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the first normal symbol starting port 67a or the second normal symbol starting port 67b (S1301: Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302). . In the processing of S1302, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state (S1302: Yes), the right-handed game is executed in spite of the normal gaming state. The notification command shown is set, and the flow shifts to the process of S1304. When a notification command indicating a firing abnormality is set, the present process may be terminated as it is, and the normal symbol lottery may not be performed.

  On the other hand, if the gaming state is not the normal gaming state (S1302: No), the process of S1303 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1304. In the process of S1304, the value (M) of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f is obtained (S1304). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1305).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (S1301: No), or the ball has passed through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b. If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S1305: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the first ordinary symbol starting port 67a or the second ordinary symbol starting port 67b (S1301: Yes), and the value (M) of the ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1305). : Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1306). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S106 of the above-described timer interrupt processing is stored in the free symbol storage area 203c of the RAM 203 in the first free space area (normal symbol hold 1 to normal symbol hold 4). It is stored in the area (S1307). In the process of S1307, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the area of the normal symbol holding 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the area of the normal symbol hold 2 is set, if the value is 2, the area of the normal symbol hold 3 is set, and if the value is 3, the area of the normal symbol hold 4 is set first. Area.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 suspends the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing (S1401). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, a description will be given of a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main control device 110 when power is applied to main control device 110. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the start-up process.

  This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process (FIG. 44), first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1501). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1502). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1503).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1504). If it is turned on (S1504: Yes), the process proceeds to S1512. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505). (S1505: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, so in this case also, the process proceeds to S1512.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1505: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1506). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1507: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S1512 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1512, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1512). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1513, S1514).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1513, S1514) is executed.

  Similarly, the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S1513, S1514) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1513, S1514), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1513), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1514). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1510.

  On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (122 in FIG. 3) is not turned on (S1504: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S1505: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) If it is normal (S1507: Yes), the power-off information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S1508). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1509), and the process proceeds to S1510. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  Next, an effect permission command for permitting execution of various effects is output to the sound lamp control device 113 (S1510). After that, the interruption is permitted (S1511). Then, the process proceeds to a main process (S1600) described later.

  Next, the main processing (S1600) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-described startup processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing (S1600). In this main process (S1600), roughly, a counter updating process and a power-off process are executed.

  In the main process (S1600 in FIG. 45), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 is transmitted to each of the sub-sides. An external output process to be transmitted to the control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601).

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball count signal and the payout abnormal signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). After the processing of S1253 is performed, a probable change setting processing is performed (S1254). The probability change setting process (S1254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. However, when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is executed, a game ball enters the second specific entrance (not shown). If it is determined that the game has been hit and a ball has been hit, a process of setting data indicating that the game state after the big hit game is set to the surely changing game state ST3 in the post-big hit state setting area is executed.

  When the probability change setting process (S1254) is executed, a jackpot control process is executed (S1255). The details of the jackpot control process (S1255) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. However, a process of setting the operation of the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

  After the jackpot game process (S1255) is executed, the electric accessory opening / closing process is executed (S1256). In this electric auditors product opening and closing process (S1256), the opening and closing process of the first ordinary electric auditors product 632 is executed. Thereafter, the display control process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1257).

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “○” or “X”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1258). In brief, on condition that the ball has passed through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of passing the ball, and the second symbol display device 83 Thus, the variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is executed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol hits, the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1260). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1260: Yes), the process proceeds to S1251, and the above-described processes after S1251 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1260: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1261, S1262).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1261). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1252 (S1262).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1251 to S1258 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1256, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1259: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 40 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1263 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1263), and a power-off command indicating that the power is turned off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1264). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1265), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1266), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1259 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1251 to S1258 or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1261 and S1262 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1251. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1251 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1251. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (S1600 in FIG. 45), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1601). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is determined. Send a prize ball command. In addition, the command for transmitting the reserved ball number set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 23) and the start winning process (see FIG. 38) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1602). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1603). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1604). In the jackpot control process, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and the maximum opening time of the first specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a predetermined number of balls have been won in the first specific winning opening 65a. Is determined. When any of these conditions is satisfied, the first specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 associated with the right first starting port 631 is executed (S1605). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S1225 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 41). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S1216, the processing of S1217, and the processing of S1220 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1606). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the first special symbol variation start process (FIG. 24, S203) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31, S206), the first symbol variation update process is performed according to the variation pattern. The changed display is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 24) or the second special symbol variation start process (FIG. 31) ends. The variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 65) in steps S306 and S310. ) Is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1607). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S1220 of the ordinary symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S1223 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 41), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S1212 or the process of S1223 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 41). ).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1609). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1609: Yes), the process proceeds to S1601, and the processes from S1601 onward are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1609: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1610, S1611).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1610). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1602 (S1611).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1601 to S1607 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1608, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1608: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 43 has been executed, the processing at the time of power-off after S1612 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1612), and a power-off command indicating that power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1613). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1614), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1615), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The process of S1608 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1601 to S1607, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1610 and S1611 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the information of the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can be started from the processing of S1601. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1601 as in the case where the processing is initialized in the startup processing. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1501). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1601. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1604) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1604). The jackpot control process (S1604) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 45). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

  In the big hit control process, first, it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1621). Specifically, S606 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 29) or S1006 of the second special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 36) or S624 of the special figure 1 departure stop process (see FIG. 30). The processing of S1024 of the special figure 2 departure stop processing (see FIG. 37) is executed, and if the start of the special pattern big hit or small hit is set, the special pattern big hit or small hit is started. judge. In the process of S1621, when a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is started (S1621: Yes), an opening command is set (S1622), and the process ends.

  Note that the opening command may be configured to be transmitted with a delay (variable) according to the gaming state or the jackpot type. Specifically, an opening counter that is updated periodically (every 4 ms) is provided. Then, when the special symbol big hit or small hit is started, the opening counter is initialized to 0, and thereafter, the opening counter is set to a predetermined value (for example, 2500 for big hit A, 5000 for big hit B). When this happens, an opening command may be transmitted. By doing so, for example, if a big hit in the left-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is lengthened, and if a big hit in the right-handed game, the time until the start of the big hit is increased Can be shortened. In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs during a left hit game, it is necessary to switch to a right hit game as a big hit game. According to the above configuration, when a big hit occurs in a left-handed game, a sufficient time for switching to a right-handed game (big hit game) can be secured. Thereby, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1621, if the special symbol big hit or small hit is not started (S1621: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is in the middle of the big hit or the small hit (S1623). During the special symbol jackpot or small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol jackpot game. In the process of S1623, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1623: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the special symbol is during the big hit or the small hit, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1624). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the big hit operation setting process is executed (S1625). The big hit operation setting process (S1625) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 47. However, the opening setting to the first variable winning device 65 and the positive variable solenoid in each round corresponding to the big hit type is executed.

  With reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot operation setting process (S1625), which is one of the processes of the jackpot control process (FIG. 46, S1604), will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot operation setting process (S1625). In the jackpot operation setting process (FIG. 47, S1625), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is set is read (S1641). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable variable solenoid) 65k (see FIG. 4) is set based on the data read in S1641 (S1642). The opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 4) of the first variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of S1641. After that, this processing ends.

  As described above, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power-off occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends in the middle. Such defects can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the small hitting game, the operation of the positive change solenoid 65k is not set, and only the opening operation of the opening / closing door 65f1 is set. The small hit is composed of two rounds, and in each round, the opening / closing door 65f1 is opened for one second.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1624, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1624: No), it is determined whether it is the operation timing of the opening / closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (positive change solenoid) 65k (S1626). If it is determined that it is the operation timing (S1626: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (S1627). Thereafter, the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (S1628). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1626 that it is not the timing of the opening operation (S1626: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of starting the ending effect (S1629). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed, and the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined. If it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1629: Yes), an ending command indicating the start of the ending is set (S1630), and the process ends.

  In the process of S1629, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1629: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S1631). Note that the jackpot end timing is specifically the end timing of the set ending effect. In the process of S1631, when it is determined that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (end timing of the ending effect) (S1631: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the end of the jackpot is executed (S1632), and this process is performed. To end.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the details of the jackpot end processing (S1632) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S1632 in FIG. 48). In the ending process (FIG. 48, S1632), first, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is ON (S1651). In the process of S1651, if it is determined that the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1651: Yes), the probable change flag 203g is set on (S1652), and the process proceeds to S1653. Although not shown, the probable variable setting flag 203h is configured to be set to off based on the probable variable flag 203g being set to on.

  In the process of S1653, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the type with power support (jackpot C) (S1653). In the process of S1653, when it is determined that the jackpot type is the type with the electric power support (S1653: Yes), the time reduction flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1654), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1653, when it is determined that the jackpot type is not the type with the electric support (jackpot C) (S1653: No), the process of S1654 is skipped, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S1651 that the probability change setting flag 203h is off (S1651: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is the jackpot E (S1655). If it is determined that the jackpot type is the jackpot E in the process of S1655 (S1655: Yes), 100 is set to the time-saving counter 203t (S1656), the process of S1654 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1655 that the jackpot type is not the jackpot E, the processes of S1656 and S1654 are skipped, and this process ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit game, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probable change flag 203g is set on. Therefore, at the end of the big hit game, it is possible to determine whether or not a game ball has passed through the probability change switch 65e3, and to set a high-probability game state. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting the transition to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) until the jackpot game ends. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, a high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is given after the jackpot game, so even during the jackpot game. It is possible to play a game with an interest in whether or not a game ball passes through the certainty change switch 65e3.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. In the process of S1631, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending effect (S1631: No), the notification process is performed (S1633). Here, details of the notification processing (S1633) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notification processing (S1633).

  In the notification processing (S1633), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m is a value larger than 0 (S1661). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1661: No), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the thirteenth round (S1662). The determination of the end timing of the thirteenth round is made in the thirteenth round depending on whether 10 balls have been won or when 30 seconds have elapsed. If it is determined that the end timing of the thirteenth round has been reached (S1662: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203m (S1663), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1662, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the 13th round (S1662: No), the process ends. Here, by setting the counter of 2 seconds in the process of S1663, the notification counter 203m becomes 0 during 3 seconds of the interval time, which is the ball elapse time after the 13th round is completed, and it is determined that the liquid crystal is to be seen. Sound is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the 14th round, but the player is attracted to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the 13th round, and the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified. Thus, it is possible to prevent the jackpot type from being identified by the player. Therefore, the player can play the game until the end of the big hit game, expecting the certain change game state ST3 to be given.

  In the present embodiment, by providing the notification counter 203m, the effect of attracting attention to the liquid crystal is performed over the 14th round from 1 second before the end of the interval time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed continuously.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1661, when it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is greater than 0 (S1661: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S1664). It is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203m after the update is 0 (S1665). When it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203m is 0 (S1665: Yes), a notification command is set (S1666). After that, this processing ends. In response to this notification command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets the output of the sound “look at the liquid crystal”.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the notification process (FIG. 49, S1633) ends, a winning process is executed (S1634). Here, the winning process (S1634) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning process (S1634).

  In the winning process (FIG. 50, S1634), it is first determined whether or not the round is valid (S1671). The round valid period is a period during which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the open / close door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the round validity period (S1671: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1671: Yes), it is determined whether the vehicle has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the first specific winning opening 65a. If it is determined that the detection switch 65c1 of the first specific winning opening 65a has passed (S1672: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is updated by adding 1 (S1673). After that, the process of S1674 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed through the detection switch 65c1 (S1672: No), the process of S1674 is executed.

  In the process of S1674, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1674: Yes), the closing of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first specific winning opening 65a is set (S1676). Thereafter, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to ON (S1677). After that, the process of S1678 is executed. By setting the remaining ball timer flag 203n to ON, it is possible to determine that the ball has been thrown since the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1674, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1675). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1675: Yes), the process of S1676 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1675: No), the processing of S1678 is executed.

  In the process of S1678, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203k is a value larger than 0 (S1678). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1678: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203k is updated by subtracting -1 (S1679). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the certainty change switch 65e3 (S1680). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the certainty change switch 65e3 (S1680: Yes), the value of the certainty change passage counter 203i is incremented by one and updated (S1681). The probable change setting flag 203h is set on (S1682). After that, the process of S1683 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1680 that the game ball has not passed through the probable change switch 65e3 (S1680: No), the processing of S1683 is executed. In the process of S1683, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1683). If it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off (S1684). The probable change valid flag 203p is set on (S1685). After that, this processing ends. Here, by setting the probability change valid flag 203p to ON, if the game ball remaining in the special discharge port 65e2 passes through the probability change switch 65e3 even after the switching member 65h is switched, the probability change game is performed. Can be controlled to be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1678, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1678: No), it is determined whether or not the probable change valid flag 203p is on (S1686). If the certainty change valid flag 203p is off (S1686: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change enable flag 203p is ON (S1686: Yes), 1 is added to the probability change enable timer 203r and updated (S1687). It is determined whether the value of the probable change valid timer is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1688). If it is determined that the probable change valid timer 203r is at the upper limit (S1688: Yes), the probable change valid flag 203p is set to off (S1689). The probable change valid timer 203r is reset to the initial value of 0 (S1690). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1688 that the probability change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1688: No), the processing of S1680 is executed.

  Thus, if the probability change valid timer 203r is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state ST3 can be set in consideration of the ball elapse time. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the possibility that the game ball is passed through the probable change switch 65e3 and the probable change game state ST3 is given.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1634 in FIG. 50) ends, then an abnormal process is executed (S1635) and the process ends. Here, the abnormality processing (S1635) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormal processing (S1635). This abnormal process (S1635) is a process for monitoring whether the probable change switch 65e3 is illegally passed.

  In the abnormality process (FIG. 51, S1635), first, it is determined whether or not a round is valid (S1701). If it is out of the round validity period (S1701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is within the round validity period (S1701: Yes), it is determined whether the game ball has passed the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702). When it is determined that the game ball has passed the ball discharge port switch 65e4 (S1702: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203s is added and updated (S1703). After that, the processing of S1704 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball does not pass through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (S1702: No), the process of S1704 is executed.

  In the processing of S1704, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (S1704). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is off (S1704: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203n is ON (S1704: Yes), since the ball is being thrown, the remaining ball timer 203o is updated by adding 1 (S1705). The remaining ball timer 203o determines whether the upper limit value (3 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed (S1706). If it is determined that the value is not the upper limit value (S1706: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S1706: Yes), the number of discharges (the total value of the positive variable passage counter 203i and the number of discharges counter 203s) matches the number of winnings (the value of the winning number counter 203j). It is determined whether it is (S1707).

  If it is determined that they match (S1707: Yes), the process of S1709 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that they do not match (S1707: No), an error command is set (S1708). After that, the process of S1709 is executed. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game balls to remain illegally in the first variable winning device 65, and to suppress the illegality of passing the game balls to the certainty change switch 65e3 even in the case of the big hit B.

  In the processing of S1709, the remaining ball timer flag 203n is set to off (S1709), and the remaining ball timer 203o is reset to 0, which is the initial value (S1710). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharge number counter 203s, and the probability change counter 203i are reset to the initial values, respectively (S1711), and thereafter, this processing is ended.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. 61, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 52, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed when the power is turned on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”), and the power-off processing of S2116 (see FIG. 53). ) Are determined to be started during the execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, upon receiving the power-off occurrence information from main controller 110 (see S2113 in FIG. 53), sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2116. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2116 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S2116 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2004. On the other hand, this start-up processing is started after an instantaneous power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2116 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the current startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S2116, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so that the process proceeds to S2004, and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2006). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S2116 (see S2115 in FIG. 53). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2116 is executed, so that the process of S2008 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio ramp control device 113 (S2009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). The permission is set (S2011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S2008 is reached when the power-off flag is turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, and the process of step S2008 is performed via the processes from S2004 to S2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010).

  The reason why the clearing process in S2009 is skipped is that when the process from S2004 to S2008 is performed via the process in S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2004. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the previous processing of S2101 was executed (S2101). If the above has not elapsed (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2111 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2110. In the processing of S2101, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is determined in S2102 to S2110, which is processing relating to display (production). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination processing in S2111 and the variable display setting processing in S2112 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the process of S2111 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. , The setting relating to the variable display effect can be performed without delay.

  If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S2102). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is performed as a command by the display control device. Sent to 114.

  Thereafter, the operation input monitoring and effect processing is executed (S2107). In this operation input monitoring / production process, an input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the production effect is monitored, and the production corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to perform. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the operation input monitoring / production process ends, next, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). After that, the processing shifts to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, a command determination process (S2111) for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed, and the process proceeds to S2112. Details of this command determination processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S2112, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 so as to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process set for transmitting to the user, is executed. Details of the variable display setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S2112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2113 (S2113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2115), and the power-off processing is executed (S2116). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2117), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off information is not stored in the process of S2113 (S2113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2114: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2114: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S2111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2111). This command determination processing (S2111) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Hereinafter, the details of the command determination processing (S2111) will be described.

  In the command determination process (S2111 in FIG. 54), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S2201). Here, the special figure 1 change pattern command is a command for changing and displaying the first special symbol. If it is determined that the special figure 1 change pattern command has been received (S2201: Yes), a special figure 1 change start process is executed to change and display the first special symbol (S2202). The special figure 1 change start processing (S2202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 55. However, the setting required to change and display the special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is described. Is executed.

  Here, the special figure 1 change start processing (S2202) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 change start process (S2202). In the special figure 1 change start process (FIG. 55, S2202), first, the special figure 1 change start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2241), and the change pattern (change ) Is extracted (S2242). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a (S2243). The detailed display mode of the selected variation pattern is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so as to be identifiable as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. In the case of setting the first special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the first special symbol and the variation pattern type of the first special symbol. .

  When the process of S2243 is completed, next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (a gaming state without a certain power transformation support) (S2244). If it is determined that the game state is other than the latent probability changing game state ST2 (S2244: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2244, when it is determined that the game is in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (S2244: Yes), the lottery result of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to start the fluctuation is a jackpot E (15R normal jackpot: Densapo 100). Times) (S2245). If it is determined that the fluctuation does not result in the jackpot E (S2245: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation is a jackpot E (S2245: Yes), a character indicating the chance zone (see FIGS. 63A and 63B) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2246). ). After that, this processing ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time is set to be long and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol disadvantageous to the player is set to be short. On the other hand, in the normal game state ST1, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol that mainly executes the game is set to be long. As a result, when the player shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the player strikes right and plays a game such that the game ball wins the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously started to change. Here, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, in the second special symbol, a high probability game (probable change) is always given when a big hit occurs, but in the first special symbol, when a large hit occurs, a normal probability game (low probability game). May be provided by lottery. Therefore, in the normal gaming state ST1, even if the first special symbol is a big hit and the big hit A (15R sure change big hit: no electric support) is given, the change started in the first special symbol after the big hit game is the big hit E. Then, the game immediately shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  As described above, normally, the third symbol display is performed based on the fact that the change to the big hit E is started in the first special symbol after the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the game is mainly performed in the second special symbol. The device 81 displays a chance zone (a notification mode indicating the time-saving gaming state ST1h or the probable changing gaming state ST3). As shown in FIG. 62 (b), the player displays the heaven zone (notification mode indicating that the game is in the latently variable game state ST2) on the third symbol display device 81, and thereafter, performs the big hit game twice. Until is executed, it is recognized that the high-probability gaming state (probable change) is maintained (highly likely). However, in the chance zone, the player cannot be convinced (high expectation) that the probability change game state ST3 will be given even after the next big hit, and may be in the time saving game state ST1h (low probability state). The game will be played while recognizing.

  Therefore, for example, the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, and if the first change of the first special symbol is a change that causes the jackpot E, the heaven zone is normally displayed, but the chance zone is displayed. The Rukoto. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the process of the special figure 1 change start process (FIG. 55, S2202) is executed, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110. (S2203). Here, the special figure 2 change pattern command is a special symbol indicating a change display mode for changing and displaying the second special symbol. When it is determined that the special figure 2 change pattern command has been received (S2203: Yes), the special figure 2 change start process (S2204) is executed. Details of the special figure 2 change start processing (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, the details of the special figure 2 change start process (S2204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 change start process (S2204). In the special figure 2 change start process (S2204), first, a special figure 2 change start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the change pattern type is extracted from the received special figure 2 change pattern command (S2301). S2302). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a. The detailed display mode of the variation pattern selected here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 so that the variation pattern type of the second special symbol can be identified, and a variation display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) described later. ) Is used to set a second special symbol display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation display effect of the second special symbol and the variation pattern type of the second special symbol. Can be

  When the processing of S2303 ends, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a certain-variable gaming state ST3 (a gaming state with a reliable power-supply support) (S2204). If it is a gaming state other than the certainty-variable gaming state ST3 (S2304: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the probable changing gaming state ST3 (S2304: Yes), it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol to start changing is a big hit (S2305). Here, the discrimination is executed by discriminating whether or not the received special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is a big hit fluctuation pattern.

  In the process of S2305, when it is determined that the result of determining whether the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate is a big hit (S2305: Yes), a treasure box-based notice effect command is set to the display control device 114 (S2306). . On the other hand, when the result of determination is incorrect, a treasure box departure notice effect command is set to the display control device 114 (S2307).

  Here, the treasure box winning announcement effect command is a command for instructing the display mode shown in FIG. 10A to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the probable change game state ST3, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Here, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the second display area Dn is a symbol of a treasure box, and is a display mode shown in FIG. 9 (a) and a display mode shown in FIG. 9 (b). Is repeatedly displayed in a short period (for example, every 0.5 seconds), so that it can be displayed as if blinking.

  Here, when the certain variation game state ST3 is set, if the result of the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol is out, the long out variation pattern C (1800000 ms) is selected. Therefore, the frequency at which the change of the second special symbol is started becomes extremely small. However, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, the change of the changing second special symbol is also forcibly stopped and displayed based on the stop of the change, and is newly stored after the small hit game. The fluctuation of the second special symbol with respect to the reserved ball is started. In this case, the player expects that the change to be a big hit is started in the second special symbol in which a bigger jackpot more advantageous than the first special symbol is easily selected.

  When the second special symbol starts to change, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the treasure chest representing the change of the second special symbol is enlarged and displayed in the first display area Dm. . On the other hand, a variable display of the first special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. After that, after the treasure box is displayed in a display mode in which the treasure box vibrates for about 2 seconds, if the treasure box is opened and the result of the success / failure judgment is a big hit, as shown in FIG. Is displayed, and it is notified that a big hit has occurred in the second special symbol. Then, a notification mode indicating that the probability change game state ST3 of “Continuation of chance!” Is continuously executed is displayed.

  In the case where the jackpot D is selected when the jackpot of the special figure 2 is reached in the probability change game state ST3 (that is, when the system shifts to the latent probability change game state ST2), the latency probability change is performed. It is only necessary to display a notification mode (for example, a character "entering heaven zone!") Indicating that the game state shifts to the gaming state ST2. In this case, a notification mode for instructing to stop firing of the game ball, such as "Please stop firing!", Should be displayed. Here, the instruction to stop firing is mainly executed in the first special symbol in the certain odd game state ST3, but is mainly executed in the second special symbol in the latent certain odd game state ST2. Is set to Accordingly, since the game ball enters the right first starting port 631 and the reserved ball of the first special symbol is stored, it is a trigger for performing a lottery disadvantageous to the player, so that the stopping of the firing is performed. By giving an instruction, the problem can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination is incorrect, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), a display in which the treasure chest is opened is executed in the same manner as in the case where the result of determination is a jackpot. "Sorry" characters indicating that the determination result is out of order are displayed. Thereafter, when 5 seconds elapse after the start of the fluctuation, the display mode is switched to the display mode shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, and the blinking display is executed until the fluctuation time set in the second special symbol elapses. Is done.

  Thereby, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed, the player pays attention to the second special symbol only for a certain period at the start of the change of the second special symbol, and thereafter, Can pay attention to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Therefore, the game can be easily understood, and the player can play the game in a comfortable manner.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the special figure 2 change start process (S2204), the process is terminated. When it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 stop type command is received from the main control device 110 (S2205). If it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S2205: Yes), a stop type command receiving process is executed (S2206). This stop type command reception processing (S2206) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop type command reception processing (S2206). In the stop type command receiving process (S2206), first, when a special figure 1 stop type command is received according to the received command, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON. When the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON. (S2311). From the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command, the stop type (big hit A to big hit E, miss, reach miss, etc.) is extracted (S2312). The extracted stop type is stored in the sound lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. The stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the second special symbol. The type of stop is stored so as to be identifiable.

  It is determined whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313). If the gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal gaming state ST1, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 (S2313: Yes), it is determined whether or not the stop type is the jackpot A (15R sure-change jackpot: no power support) (S2314). If it is determined that the stop type is other than the jackpot A (S2314: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type is the jackpot A (S2314: Yes), the first special symbol (special symbol 1) holding 1 (the earliest digestion area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a). ) Is determined to be a jackpot E (15 rounds regular jackpot: 100 times of electric support) (S2315). Here, the big hit random number value of the corresponding reserved ball notified by the winning command is read from the winning information storage area 223b and determined. Although not shown, the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a first random number table 202a (FIG. 15A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 and a big hit type selection table 202d (FIG. 15A). 16 (a) to 16 (c)), and based on the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 added to the winning command output from the main control device 110. The sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the determination as to whether or not the vehicle is in the probable change state.

  In the process of S2315, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is a determination result other than the jackpot E (S2315: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the big hit E (S2315: Yes), the character "Chance Zone Entry" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the big hit game. The display command to be instructed is set in the display control device 114 (S2316). On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is not the jackpot E (S2315: No), as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the game goes to the heaven zone (the latent probability changing game state ST2) at the end of the jackpot game. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character of “entering the heaven zone!” Indicating the shift is output to the display control device 114 (S2317). After that, this processing ends.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability changing game is likely to be continuously set until the jackpot game is executed at least twice. Therefore, the player can recognize that the jackpot of at least two times has been guaranteed when the character of the heaven zone is displayed. In addition, since it is configured to be displayed at the end of the jackpot game, the player can play the game until the end of the jackpot game, expecting the transition to the latent probability changing game state ST2, thereby improving the interest of the game. it can.

  In addition, even if the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if it is determined that the jackpot E is won in the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 in the hold 1 of the first special symbol, the ending of the jackpot A causes the time-saving gaming state ST1h or Since the character of "chance zone rush!" Indicating that the game is in the sure-change game state ST3 is displayed, the player does not recognize that the jackpot game has occurred at least twice, and the time-saving game state ST1h. The game can be played by recognizing that the game state is the certain change game state ST3. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the game state has shifted to the latent probability changing game state ST2, and it is possible to suppress discouragement of shifting to the time saving game state ST1h in a short time.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After the stop type command reception processing (FIG. 57, S2206) is executed, this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, when it is determined that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command has not been received (S2305: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main control device 110. (S2207). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S2207: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball of the main control device 110 included in the received reserved ball number command. The value of the number counter e (i.e., the number of balls retained in the variable display effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol retained in the main control device 110) is extracted, and the number of retained balls of the first special symbol is determined by an audio ramp. The number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the control device 113, and the number of retained balls of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S2208).

  Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins (starts winning) in the first starting port 630, the right first starting port 631, or the second starting port 640. Every time there is a winning start, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S2207 to the first special symbol of the main control device 110. The value can be adjusted to the value of the symbol holding ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203e. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol holding ball counter 223c or the second special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol holding ball counter 203d of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second special symbol retaining ball counter 203e, the value of the first special symbol retaining ball number counter 223c or the second special symbol retaining ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected. Then, it can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110.

  If it is determined that the pending ball number command has not been received (S2207: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received (S2209). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), a winning command process is executed (S2210). Details of the winning command processing (S2210) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the winning command processing (S2210). In the winning command processing (S2210), first, the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S2401). Here, the winning information command is configured to be able to identify the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is configured to be able to determine the holding order (the number of balls to be held) and the result of the win / fail determination in the normal game state ST1. ing. Further, it is constituted by a command that can also determine the values of various counters acquired at the time of the start winning.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (S2402). In the process of S2402, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the low-probability gaming state (S2402: No), the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is the low-probability gaming state (that is, the probability is not being changed) (S2402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning information storage area 223b provided in the RAM 223 has the information on the winning jackpot. Is determined (S2403). In the process of S2403, if it is determined that there is no information of the winning jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: No), the process of S2403 and S2404 is not executed, and the process directly proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is information on the probability change jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S2403: Yes), the information lottery process (S2404) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2405. The notification lottery process in S2404 will be described with reference to FIG. In the processing of S2405, other processing is executed (S2405), and the winning command processing ends.

  Next, the notification lottery process (S2404) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the notification lottery process (S2404). In the notification lottery process (S2405), first, the value of the effect counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 is obtained (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the effect counter 223j is a determination value (S2502). In the process of S2502, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j is not the determination value (S2502: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect counter 223j (the counter in the range of 0 to 198) is the determination value (any of “0 to 50” in the present embodiment) (S2502: Yes), the third A stop display mode command for displaying characters "Please stop firing!" For notifying the symbol display device 81 to stop firing the game ball is set to the display control device 114 (S2503), and this processing is performed. To end.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state ST1, upon receiving the winning information that is the probability change jackpot, that is, the jackpot A, the lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify the player of stopping the firing. Here, when shifting from the normal gaming state ST1 to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be short, and the game in the second special symbol is the main game method (the second special symbol is a substantial variation target). ). However, when the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state ST1, if the reserved ball for the first special symbol is stored, a lottery disadvantageous to the player is executed in the first special symbol during the latent probability changing gaming state ST2. Will be done. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, when the hold of winning the jackpot A in the normal game state ST1 is stored, the notification for stopping the launch of the game ball is executed by lottery, so that the player can play the game ball at an early timing. Can be stopped, and winning in the first starting port 630 can be suppressed. In addition, the player can be notified of the jackpot A at an early stage by being notified that the shooting has been stopped, and can diversify the production of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the notification of the stoppage of the game ball is executed by lottery, but it may be configured to always notify when the holding ball of the jackpot A is stored.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the winning command processing (FIG. 58, S2210), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether a status command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S2211: Yes), a status command reception process (S2212) is executed. Details of the status command reception processing (S2212) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the state command receiving process (S2212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the status command receiving process (S2212).

  In the state command receiving process (S2212), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state has been changed based on the state command received from the main control device 110 (S2601). The determination as to whether the gaming state has been changed is made by comparing the information on the gaming state set in the slave state setting area 223k with the received gaming state. When it is determined that there is a change in the gaming state (S2601: Yes), the process proceeds to S2602. In the process of S2602, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the time reduction gaming state ST1h) (S2602). When it is determined that the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1 (ie, the time-saving gaming state ST1h) (S2602: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the normal gaming state ST1 is set (S2603). Here, a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm, and a third symbol (“○ ×” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the second display area Dn. The display command instructing the display control device 114 is set as described above. A display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the character of the “lower bound zone” indicating the normal gaming state ST1 is set to the display control device 114 (S2604). After that, the process of S2612 is executed.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to a state other than the normal gaming state ST1 (S2602: No), the gaming state is changed to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 (a gaming state without a certain power transformation support). Is determined (S2605). In the process of S2605, when it is determined that the gaming state has been changed to the latently variable game state ST2 (S2605: Yes), a main display area setting command corresponding to the latently variable game state ST2 is set (S2606). Here, the display control device 114 is instructed to display a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol in the first display area Dm and a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol in the second display area Dn. Is set. Also, a setting is made such that a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, and a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the second sub display area Dt. You.

  Next, the hold 1 of the first special symbol determines from the winning information storage area 223b whether the hold information for determining the jackpot E is stored (S2607). If the hold information indicating that the hold 1 of the special map 1 is other than the jackpot E is stored (S2607: No), the character indicating the heaven zone (see FIG. 62 (b)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display command to be set is set (S2608). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold 1 of the first special symbol is the jackpot E (S2607: Yes), a display command for displaying the character indicating the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2609). . After that, the process of S2612 is executed. By the processing of S2607 and S2609, a big hit E occurs immediately after the transition to the latent probability change state ST2, and when the transition to the time saving game state ST1h, the display indicating the heaven zone can be prevented from being performed. Excessive discouragement can be prevented (suppressed).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2605 that the game state has been shifted to a game state other than the latent probability change game state ST2 (that is, the probability change game state ST3) (S2605: No), the probability change game state ST3 (game with a probability change support) The main display area setting command corresponding to (state) is set in the display control device 114 (S2610). Here, the first display area Dm has a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and the second display area Dn has a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (in the present embodiment, a treasure box symbol (FIG. 9A) (See (b))), a display command instructing the display control device 114 to be displayed is set.

  Then, a display command for displaying the characters of the chance zone on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S2611). After that, the process of S2612 is executed. In the processing of S2612, the state of the gaming state indicated by the received state command is set in the slave state setting area 223k (S2612). After that, this processing ends.

  Meanwhile, returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. After executing the status command receiving process (S2212), it is determined whether a notification command has been received (S2213). In the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has been received (S2213: Yes), the voice / lamp notification mode indicated by the received command is set (S2214), and the display corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the received command is set. The command is set (S2215), and the process ends. By the processing of S2214, for example, based on the notification command indicating the emission abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through gate passage processing (see FIG. 42), the notification sound indicating the emission abnormality ("Please hit left!"). Is output). In addition, in the process of S2215, for example, a display indicating a firing abnormality (“Please left-click!”) Based on the notification command indicating the firing abnormality set and transmitted in the above-described through gate passing process (see FIG. 42). Is output to the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2213, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), a process according to another command is executed (S2219), and this process ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2112). The variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (FIG. 61, S2112) includes the first or special figure 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display the variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of generating a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop types (big hit A to big hit E), a process of setting a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

  In the variation display setting process (FIG. 59, S2112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). If it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the special figure 1 change pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the processing of S2705 is performed. Move to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 change start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the special figure 1 change start flag 223e is set to off (S2702).

  Next, in the process of S2703, the variation pattern in the variation display effect of the first special symbol extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111) is stored in the other memory area of the RAM 223. The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol is generated by acquiring from 223z (S2703). In addition, the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is the display variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol or the variation pattern command of the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper 2 bits of the upper byte of the display variable pattern command having a 2-byte configuration are “10”, it indicates that the command corresponds to the first special symbol, and if “01”, it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to show that

  The display variation pattern command of the first special symbol set in the process of S2703 is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Sent to control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and receives the special symbol corresponding to the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern of the first special symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special symbol). The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is decremented by one (S2704).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 change start flag 223f provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2705). If it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S2705: No), a state in which no special figure 2 change pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Therefore, the process of S2709 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is on (S2705: Yes), the special figure 2 change start flag 223f is set to off (S2706). In the process of S2302 of the special figure 2 change start process (FIG. 55, S2205), the change pattern in the change display effect of the second special symbol extracted from the special figure 2 change pattern command is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223. Then, a display variation pattern command for the second special symbol is generated (S2707).

  The display variation pattern command of the second special symbol set in the process of S2707 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 53). Sent to control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the second special symbol display variation pattern command and receives the second special symbol display variation pattern command. The second special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command corresponds to the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variable display effect is started so that the variable display of the symbol is performed.

  With the setting of the display variation pattern command for the first special symbol, the reserved ball of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command is consumed (that is, the variation corresponding to the reserved ball of the second special symbol). In response to the setting of the display, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decreased by 1 (S2708).

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to ON (S2709). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i are not set to on (that is, are off) (S2709: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on (S2709: Yes), the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is on. The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223g is set to off, and if the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is on, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223i is set to off (S2710). ).

  In the process of S2206 of the command determination process (FIG. 54, S2111), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command is set (S2711). When the set stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, the stop type (either the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R regular jackpot) is displayed to the display control device 114 based on the stop type. A display special figure 1 stop type command for notification is generated. Further, when the set stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, the display control device 114 informs the display control device 114 of the stop type (either the 15R probability variable hit or the 15R normal hit) based on the stop type. ) Is generated (S2712). It should be noted that the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command notified from the main control device 110 is to notify the type of the big hit when a big hit occurs, and to notify even if the determination result is out. Is done. If the determination result is a miss, the stop type is set without referring to the stop type.

  With this configuration, the sound lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114 so that both the first special symbol and the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are simultaneously changed and displayed. Can be.

  As described above, in this embodiment, based on the transition of the game state, the player switches the special symbol for setting a long variation time with the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so that the player can play the game. It is configured to control the special symbols that can be used. Then, in the latent probability change state ST2, only the jackpot that is in the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is set so as to be drawn by the second special symbol given at the time of the jackpot. Even after the jackpot is executed, the high-probability gaming state (the latent probability varying gaming state ST2 or the probability varying gaming state ST3) is set again. Therefore, for the player, when the game proceeds to the latent probability change game state ST2, it can be set so that the probability change state is set until at least two big hits are executed. Therefore, the player can recognize that two big hits are guaranteed in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is not operated, 85% of the right-hitting game balls are configured to win the second starting port 640. Further, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is set so as to win a small hit in the second special symbol, and the lottery probability is that about 15% of the right-hitting game balls are given to the player as small prize balls as prize balls. Is set with the probability of being paid out at Therefore, the operation frequency of the first ordinary electric accessory 632 is set to be low (non-electric support state), and even if it is a latent probability change game, a decrease in the number of balls held by the player in the case of right-handed game is suppressed. Games can be played.

  Further, when the second special symbol wins from the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game shifts to the probability changing game state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, in the probable change game state ST3, the change time of the second special symbol is set to be long and the change time of the first special symbol is set to be short. Then, when the first special symbol is a big hit, either a big hit which is shifted to the certain change game state ST3 again or a big hit which is shifted to the normal game state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, the player can play the game in expectation of being able to obtain two big hits again. Further, by providing a case where the game state is shifted from the probable change game state ST3 to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from becoming too high. In the probability changing game state ST3, a transition to either the latent probability changing game state ST2 or the normal game state ST1 may be made by a jackpot based on the first special symbol. This allows the player to play the game with the expectation that the player will shift from the probability changing game state ST3 to the latent probability changing game state ST2 where two big hits can be obtained again, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the normal gaming state ST1, when the big win is made with the first special symbol mainly for playing a game, the lottery rate of the big hit A to which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is given is set lower than the lottery rate of the big hit B. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty of shifting to the latent probability changing game state ST2, thereby suppressing an increase in gambling.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit game is executed, the game state is configured to be switched. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the game state may be switched according to the small hit type even when the small hit game is won. May be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the gaming state is switched by configuring the small hits to be more easily drawn than the large hits. Therefore, even if the game state is set to be disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to switch to the advantageous game state by the small win, and it is possible to expect the player to win the small win. In addition, even when an advantageous game state is set, it is possible to switch to a game state disadvantageous to the player by making a small hit, thereby suppressing gambling.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 65 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 in an enlarged manner.

  The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a second variable winning device 650 is provided on the upper right side of the game board 13 in a front view, and the ball guiding path forming member 70 is located in a right area of the game board 13 in a front view. , The lower right decorative member 71 is provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the second starting port 640 is accompanied by a second ordinary electric accessory 640a. Side, the point where the first variable winning device 65 is attached to the lower right decorative member 71, and the first ordinary symbol opening 67a and the second ordinary symbol opening 67b instead of the ordinary symbol opening (through). (A gate) 670 is provided below the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and the point that the right first starting port 631 is deleted is different. The same portions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the game board 13 is configured by assembling a ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71, and the like in addition to the first embodiment. The first starting port 630, the second starting port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. The game board 13 is fixed from the front side with wood screws or the like. Further, the central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. In the following, mainly with reference to FIG. 64, a description will be given of a configuration of the game board 13 added to the first embodiment.

  On the right side of the game board 13, a through gate 670 is provided. The through gate 670 is a gate-type starting port having a sensor that can detect the passage of a game ball. When a game ball passes through the through gate 670, a lottery of a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery performed for the passing of the game ball to the through gate 670, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a normal symbol hit.

  When the lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variable symbol of the ordinary symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83 provided in the variable display device unit 80 (see FIG. 2). After the symbols “X” are alternately lit for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), a normal symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “○” or “X”) indicating the lottery result is stopped (lit).

  When it is determined that a normal symbol has been won, a symbol “○” indicating that the normal symbol has been won is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. When the winning symbol is displayed, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a associated with the second starting port 640 operates for a predetermined period (for example, three seconds). The second ordinary electric combination 640a is maintained in an upright state so as to regulate the entry of game balls into the second starting port 640 in a normal state (non-operating state), while the second ordinary electric combination is provided. By operating the object 640a, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle (40 degrees in the present embodiment) to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 640 (special state). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been removed, a symbol “x” indicating that the lottery of the normal symbol has been removed is lit on the second symbol display device 83. At this time, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is not operated, and the next ordinary symbol (second symbol) is changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for the ball entering the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640, a win / non-judgment determination (big hit lottery) as to whether or not a big hit is made, and a big hit type determination is made. Also do. The details of the jackpot type will be described later with reference to FIG. 74. As the jackpot type determined here, there are eight types of jackpots A to H as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special figure 1). It is set (see FIG. 74). These eight types of jackpots are used to determine whether the interval time is short or long (1 second or 4 seconds), whether or not the V operation is possible, and whether or not there is an electric support after the end of the jackpot game. Are set in combination with each other.

  Here, the length of the interval time means that the game ball is sent to the first variable winning device 65 provided with the special discharge port (specific area) 65e2 (see FIG. 6) having the certainty changing switch 65e3 at a predetermined timing (the certainty changing switch). This is the length of the interval time set to change whether or not it is possible (easy or difficult) to guide at the timing that can pass through 65e3.

  Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 80, in the present embodiment, an interval time between specific rounds during a jackpot game (a round in which the second variable winning device 650 performs an opening / closing operation (a round in this embodiment) 4R) and a timing at which a game ball reaches the first variable prize device 65 by changing a round (interval time provided between the first variable prize device 65 and the round in which the first variable prize device 65 performs the opening / closing operation (5R in this embodiment)). And whether or not the game ball can pass through the probable change switch 65e3 provided in the first variable winning device 65 according to the timing at which the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 (easy or difficult). ) Can be set.

  Whether or not the V operation is possible is determined as to whether or not the game ball won in the first variable winning device 65 can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6) provided in the special discharge port 65e2 (see FIG. 6) (easy or difficult) If the V operation is allowed, the game ball set in the first variable prize device 65 is set so as to be able to pass through the probable change switch 65e3. On the other hand, the V operation is disabled. In this case, the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 are set to be impossible (difficult) to pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. The detailed contents are the same as in the above-described first embodiment, and therefore description thereof is omitted. In the present embodiment, the operation of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 6) provided in the first variable winning device 65. Is controlled so that whether or not the V operation can be performed can be set.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the V operation is possible is set by controlling the driving of the switching member 65h. However, any device that can set whether or not the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3 may be used. On the upstream side of the passage having the positive change switch 65e3, there is provided a lid member which is constantly driven to open and close at regular intervals, and further upstream of the lid member there is provided a stopper member for retaining game balls. Then, a configuration may be used in which the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3 only when the timing at which the stopper member is released coincides with the timing at which the lid member is opened. By using such a configuration, it is possible for the player to know that the lid member is periodically opened, and the player is allowed to win a game ball in the first variable winning device 65. If so, it can be assumed that there is a possibility of passing through the probability change switch 65e3, and there is an effect that the willingness to play can be increased.

  Further, the opening time (opening timing) of the lower attacker (opening / closing door) 65f1 for opening the first specific winning opening 65a is changed to make it difficult for the game balls to win in the first variable winning device 65, so that a game is played. It may be possible to set whether or not the ball can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3.

  The presence or absence of the electric support sets whether or not the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a shifts to a state (electric support state) in which the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a is easily operated in the special state after the big hit game is over.

  Further, in the present embodiment, eight types of jackpots A to H are set as the jackpot types of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) in the same manner as the first special symbol (see FIG. 74).

  Here, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650 are arranged as variable prize devices that are operated in the open state during the jackpot game. The first variable winning device 65 is provided below the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and in a specific round (fifth round in the present embodiment) during a jackpot game, the first specific winning opening 65a is set for a predetermined period ( It is operated so as to be released until a predetermined number (10 balls in the present embodiment) of game balls enter (see FIG. 80 (b)).

  On the other hand, the second variable winning device 650 is provided above the game board 13 (see FIG. 64), and rounds other than the specific round during the jackpot game (first to fourth rounds and sixth to seventh rounds in the present embodiment). In, the second specific winning opening 650b is operated so as to be opened until a predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment) or a predetermined number (10 balls in this embodiment) of game balls enter.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. On the right side of the game board 13, a ball guiding path forming member 70 for guiding a game ball fired by a right-handed game is assembled to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The ball guiding path forming member 70 has an opening 70a which is an opening through which a game ball fired by a right-handed game can pass, and a plurality of guides for guiding the game ball passing through the opening 70a to meander and flow down. Members (first guide member (first guide surface) 70b, second guide member (second guide surface) 70c, third guide member (third guide surface) 70d), and game balls flowing down third guide member 70d And a discharge unit 70e from which the is discharged is assembled as one unit.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a problem that a positional relationship between a position where the game ball passes (a position of the opening 70a and the discharge unit 70e) and a member (each guide member) for guiding the game ball is shifted. In addition to the above, it is possible to suppress a problem that the positional relationship between the guide members is deviated, and it is possible to increase a manufacturing efficiency in a process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  Below the ball guiding path forming member 70, a lower right decorative member 71 including a first variable winning device 65 is attached to the surface of the game board 13 with screws. The lower right decorative member 71 includes a fourth guiding member (fourth guiding surface) 71a for receiving a game ball rolled on the third guiding member 70d of the ball guiding path forming member 70, a first variable winning device 65, The decorative portion 71b is assembled as one unit.

  In addition, the decoration part 71b is provided with a decoration lamp (light emitting means) (not shown) so that it is possible to emphasize that the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is open during the jackpot game. Have been. Specifically, the surface of the decorative portion 71b (the surface visible to the player) is formed by a half mirror, and when the decorative lamp is turned off, the inside of the first variable winning device becomes difficult to recognize, and the first identification is performed. When the winning opening 65a is opened, the decorative lamp is turned on so that the inside of the first variable winning device can be visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the player is in the gaming state aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a, and not playing the game or the normal gaming state (during the big hit game). In a non-playing state, the player cannot see (difficult) the structure in the first variable prize device 65. Is inserted, and the switching member 65h is deformed.

  Returning to FIG. 64, the description will be continued. In the right area of the game board 13, a ball guiding path 72 is formed by the above-described ball guiding path forming member 70 and the fourth guiding member 71a. The ball guiding path 72 is configured so that a game ball meanders, and a specific configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is an enlarged front view of the right region of the game board 13. Here, the flow of the game ball in the ball guiding path 72 will be described. First, the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a is received by the first guide member 70b. The first guide member 70b is assembled so as to be inclined downward and to the right when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) downward on the first guide member 70b. The lower end of the first guide member 70b is assembled so as to face the second guide member 70c, and the game ball that has flowed down the first guide member 70b falls onto the second guide member 70c.

  The second guiding member 70c is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when viewed from the front of the game board 13, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the second guiding member 70c in the lower left direction. The lower end of the second guide member 70c is assembled so as to face the third guide member 70d, and the game ball flowing down the second guide member 70c falls on the third guide member 70d.

  The third guide member 70d is assembled so as to be inclined toward the lower right direction when the game board 13 is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the third guide member 70d in the lower right direction. The lower end of the third guiding member 70d is assembled so as to face the fourth guiding member 71a, and the game ball that has flowed down the third guiding member 70d passes through the discharging portion 70e and is placed on the fourth guiding member 71a. Fall.

  The fourth guide member 71a is attached to the game board 13 so as to be inclined toward the lower left direction when the game board is viewed from the front, and the game ball flows down (rolls) on the fourth guide member 71a in the lower left direction. ). The downstream end of the fourth guiding member 71a is configured to communicate with the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) of the first variable winning device 65, and when the first specific winning opening 65a is in the closed state, the fourth guiding is performed. The game ball flowing down the member 71a flows down (rolls) on the opening / closing door 65f1, and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13 (the area where the through gate 670 and the second starting port 640 are arranged). Be composed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the game balls meander. Therefore, the time required for the game balls to pass through the ball guiding path 72 (guidance path passing time) is determined by the meandering. It can be set longer than in the case where it is not performed.

  Further, each guiding member constituting the ball guiding path 72 is configured so that the inclination angle is gradually reduced from the upstream side. Specifically, the first guide member 70b and the second guide member 70c are set at about 20 degrees, the third guide member 70d is set at about 10 degrees, and the fourth guide member 71a is set at about 5 degrees.

  With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball on the downstream side of the ball guiding path 72, and to open and close the fourth guiding member 71a, and thus the rolling surface of the fourth guiding member 71a. A plurality of game balls can be simultaneously retained (rolled) on the door 65f1.

  Therefore, when the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, a plurality of game balls can be won in a short period of time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, between each guide member, since the game ball is configured to fall on an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction, it is possible to efficiently reduce the flow-down speed of the game ball. It is possible.

  In the present embodiment, in order to allow a plurality of game balls to simultaneously stay (roll) on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72, the inclination angle of the guide member is reduced and the flow speed of the game balls is reduced. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a material (urethane or the like) having a high coefficient of friction may be attached to the rolling surface of the game ball of the guide member to reduce the flow speed of the game ball. The guide member (fourth guide member 71a) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path 72 and the game ball rolling surface of the opening / closing door 65f1 meander in the depth direction (horizontal direction) when the game board 13 is viewed from the front. May be. Even if such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, in order to prevent a step from being generated between the guide surface of the fourth guide member 71a and the surface (guide surface) of the opening / closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the fourth guide is provided. The member 71a is provided on the lower right decorative member 71 formed separately from the ball guiding path forming member 70. With this configuration, for example, when the ball guiding path configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 is adopted for the pachinko machine 10 in which the shape of the first variable winning device 65 is slightly changed, the fourth guiding member 71a Only by changing the shape corresponding to the shape of the first variable winning device 65, the ball guiding path forming member 70 can be used. That is, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the opening 70a of the ball guiding path 72 described above is located below the second variable winning device 650, and the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is open (the upper attacker 650b is in the state). In the opening state), the game ball cannot pass through the opening 70a (difficult).

  Although detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, in the present embodiment, a period (opening period, interval period) for closing the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the jackpot game is set. By changing the length, the game ball that has passed through the ball guiding path 72 can be moved to the first variable prize device at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 by the operation of the switching member 65h of the first variable prize device 65. It is configured to be able to control whether or not to win 65.

  In the present embodiment, the two variable winning devices are arranged vertically apart from each other, and the ball guiding path 72 is provided between them (between the paths along which the game balls flow), whereby the upper variable winning device (the second variable winning device) is provided. The configuration is such that the time required for a game ball that has passed without winning the prize device 650) to reach the lower variable prize device (first variable prize device 65) is delayed, but the arrangement of the two variable prize devices is Other configurations may be used. For example, a plurality of variable winning devices may be provided in the left-right direction, and the ball guiding path 72 may be provided therebetween.

  Further, a plurality of variable winning devices and the ball guiding path 72 therebetween may be assembled as one unit. With such a configuration, the assembling work to the game board 13 can be facilitated, and the production efficiency can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the game balls meander in the left and right direction of the game board is used as the ball guidance route 72, but if the configuration is such that the time during which the game balls pass through the ball guidance route 72 is equal to or longer than a predetermined time, Other configurations may be used. For example, a configuration in which the path is meandering in the depth direction (horizontal direction) of the game board 13 in a front view, or a configuration in which the game ball is three-dimensionally meandered using both the left-right direction and the depth direction may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the time that the game ball passes through the right area of the game board 13 (the time that the ball flows from the second variable prize device 650 to the first variable prize device 65) is the distance that the game ball flows. Is extended to a predetermined time or longer by using a configuration for extending the game ball or a configuration for delaying the speed at which the game ball flows down, but other methods may be used. For example, a regulation member that regulates the flow of a game ball is provided in the ball guidance path 72, and the regulation member is constantly or electrically driven at regular intervals to reduce the time that the game ball passes through the ball guidance path 72. It may be configured to be longer than a predetermined time. By using the electrically driven restricting member as described above, it is possible to more reliably make the time to pass through the ball guiding path equal to or longer than the predetermined time.

  Although the second embodiment has a configuration in which a game ball is difficult to win in the first starting port 630 during a right-handed game, the first starting port is provided in the right region of the game board 13 as in the above-described first embodiment. 631 may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, a flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the above-described pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment in that the number of times the electric support is provided in the probable game state ST3 is limited (100 times), and a flow in which various game states are set. Are different. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the transition rate of the high-probability game state or the low-probability state after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the special symbol type (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the gaming state (the normal gaming state). The first embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a total of eight types can be set by a combination of ST1, time-saving game state ST1h, latent probability changing game state ST2, and probability changing game state ST3. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, the flow of setting various game states in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the normal game state ST1, first, a left-handed game is aimed at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided at the lower center of the game board 13. During the normal gaming state ST1, the first special symbol is a substantial variation target. Specifically, in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the first special symbol game varies from 8000 ms (8 seconds) to 30,000 ms (30 seconds). The time is selected, and 600000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 76). With this configuration, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol start to change at the same time in the normal game state ST1, the first special symbol is not changed until the second special symbol ends one change. Since the symbol can be changed a plurality of times (at least 20 times in the present embodiment), the first special symbol can be substantially changed.

  Then, during the normal gaming state ST1, when the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) becomes a big hit, a big hit B (7R normal big hit: no electric support) and a big hit D (7R normal big hit: electric support available) ), Jackpot E (7R probability variable jackpot: with electricity support) and jackpot H (7R regular hit: no electricity support) are selected.

  Here, in the case where the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1, the probability of shifting to the high-probability game state (the latent probability changing game state ST2 or the probability changing game state ST3) after the jackpot is set to 50%. The probability of shifting to the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h) is set to 50%, and if the first lottery game wins the big hits B, D, and H, after the big hit game ends. In the case where the normal gaming state ST1 is set again and the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, the probability changing gaming state ST3 is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  As described above in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the jackpot probability does not shift to the high probability unless the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game. Even if the jackpot E is won in the lottery game, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the probability change game state ST3 is not set, and the probability change game state ST3 (high probability: with electric support) is a jackpot. It shifts to the time-saving gaming state ST1h (low probability: with electricity support) in which the probability is low.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, even if the same jackpot type is won, the jackpot game is performed based on the result of the game during the jackpot game (the result of whether or not the probability change switch 65e3 is passed during the jackpot game). The game state to be shifted after the end may be different, but when describing the flow of setting the various game states, the game state that can be shifted by the jackpot type (the game state is shifted by performing the game normally) (Game state) will be described as a transition destination after the end of the big hit game.

  In the normal game state ST1, if the second lottery game is performed, it is set so that the game does not shift to the high-probability game state after the jackpot game ends, but shifts to the 100% low-probability state (see FIG. 74). ). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the second lottery game from being illegally performed during the normal game state ST1.

  Next, a description will be given of a probable change game state ST3 in which a transition is made at a probability of 50% when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the normal game state ST1. In the certain change game state ST3, a right-handed game aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is performed. During the probable change game state ST3, the second special symbol is a substantial fluctuation target. Specifically, in the probable change game state ST3, a fluctuation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the fluctuation time of the first special symbol game, It is configured such that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). In this way, by making the fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it becomes possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. .

  Then, during the probability change game state ST3, when a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electric support) and a jackpot F (7R: high probability: Either "No electricity support" or "Big hit G" (7R: Low probability: With electricity support) is selected.

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability change game state ST3, the probability of transition to the high-probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is set to 70% after the end of the jackpot. The probability of shifting to the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h) is set to 30%, and if the jackpot E is won in the second lottery game, the probability changing gaming state is set after the big jackpot game ends. When ST3 is set again and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set after the end of the jackpot game. Then, when the big hit G is won in the second lottery game, the time-saving game state ST1h is set.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the electric support is ended when the total number of changes in the first lottery game and the second lottery game in the probability change game state ST3 reaches 100. Therefore, when the special symbol change exceeds 100 times in the probability changing game state ST3, the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  In addition, if the first lottery game is performed in the probability changing game state ST3, the rate of transition to the high probability game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to 10%, and the rate of transition to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot game. Is set to 90% (see FIG. 74).

  Next, a description will be given of the latent probability changing game state ST2 which shifts at 10% of the time when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game in the probability changing game state ST3. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, a right-handed game aiming at the second starting port 640 (see FIG. 64) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is performed. During the latent probability changing game state ST2, the second special symbol is a substantial variation target. Specifically, in the latent probability varying game state ST2, a variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol game. It is configured such that 500 ms (0.5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol game (see FIG. 78). In this way, by making the fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. .

  Then, during the latent probability changing game state ST2, if a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a jackpot E (7R: high probability: electric support) and a jackpot F (7R: high probability) : No power support).

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the second lottery game during the probability change game state ST3, the probability of transition to the high probability game state (the latent probability change game state ST2 or the probability change game state ST3) is set to 100% after the end of the jackpot. It is set so that it does not shift to the low probability state (the normal gaming state ST1 or the time-saving gaming state ST1h), and if the big lottery E is won in the second lottery game, after the big hitting game is over, the certain changing game state is set. When ST3 is set and the jackpot F is won in the second lottery game, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the end of the jackpot game.

  Next, the time-saving gaming state ST1h will be described. In the time-saving gaming state ST1h, a left-hitting game aiming at the first starting port 630 (see FIG. 64) provided at the center of the gaming board 13 is performed. During the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is substantially changed. In the time saving game state ST1h, a variation time of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is selected as the variation time of the second special symbol game. It is configured that 1000 ms (1 second) to 30000 ms (30 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time of one special symbol (see FIG. 77). In this way, by making the fluctuation time of the first special symbol longer and making the fluctuation time of the second special symbol shorter than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, it is possible to make the second special symbol a substantial fluctuation target. .

  Then, during the time-saving gaming state ST1h, when a jackpot is won in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1), a jackpot A (7R: low probability: no electric support) and a jackpot C (7R: low probability: One of the jackpot E (7R: high probability: with electricity support) and the jackpot F (7R: high probability: without electricity support) is selected (see FIG. 75).

  Here, when the jackpot is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1h, the probability of transition to the high-probability game state (the latent probability changing game state ST2 or the probability changing game state ST3) is set to 95% after the end of the jackpot. The probability of shifting to the low-probability state (normal gaming state ST1 or time-saving gaming state ST1h) is set to 5%, and if the first lottery game wins the big hits A and C, after the big hit game ends, the normal When the gaming state ST1 is set and the big lottery E is won in the first lottery game, the probability change game state ST3 is set after the big lottery game ends, and when the big lottery F is won in the first lottery game, after the big lottery game ends. , The latent probability changing game state ST2 is set.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the electric support is provided, and in the gaming state in which the second ordinary electric auditors accessory 640a attached to the second starting port 640 tends to be in the special state. However, as described above, during the time saving game state ST1h, the first special symbol is a substantial variation target, and since the variation of the second special symbol is a long variation, the second start opening is performed during the time saving game state ST1h. A game aiming at 640 is a very inefficient game. Further, since the second starting port 640 has one prize ball of the game ball set, even if the right starting game is performed during the time saving game state ST1h, the second starting port 640 receives a game ball. The number of payouts does not increase. Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the same game as the normal gaming state ST1 (left-handed gaming) is performed.

  The flow of setting various game states of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has been described above. Here, main game characteristics (transition of various game states) of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. I do.

  First, in the normal gaming state ST1, the jackpot E is won in the first lottery game, and the game is aimed at the certain-variable gaming state ST3 (allocation 50%). Next, in the probability changing game state ST3, the player wins the jackpot F and aims at the latent game state ST2 (distribution 10%) while performing the second lottery game. Alternatively, a special symbol game is performed 100 times without causing a big hit, and the electronic support is ended to shift to the latent game state ST2.

  In the probability changing game state ST3, the jackpot in which the probability changing game state ST3 is set again after the end of the jackpot game occupies 60% of the entire jackpot, so that the latent probability changing game state ST2 is obtained while acquiring the payout by the jackpot. The goal is to move.

  In addition, the probability changing game state ST3 is configured such that a small hit is won as a result of the lottery of the second lottery game, and the small hit game is performed so that the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the big hit in which the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the big hit game occupies 90% of the entire big hit. This latent probability changing game state ST2 is a game state in which the present pachinko machine 10 can expect the most payouts. Although a detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 80, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is configured to be able to acquire more payouts than the probability changing game state ST3 by repeatedly performing the small hitting game. . That is, during the latent probability changing game state ST2, it is possible to increase the number of payouts in the small hitting game and the big hitting game, and to repeat (loop) the same mode with a probability of 90% after the end of the big hitting game. It is configured.

  In the latent probability changing game state ST2, the high probability gaming state transition rate of the second lottery game is 100%, and even if the remaining probability 10% is won instead of 90% looping the latent probability changing game state ST2, the probability is changed. It only moves to the gaming state ST3. That is, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, at least two times (ST2 → ST3, ST3 → ST1h) are configured to be able to win the jackpot in the high-probability game state.

  Finally, the time-saving gaming state ST1h is a gaming state set when the state transitions (falls) from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the number of times the special symbol fluctuates is a predetermined number of times (100 in the present embodiment). ) Is a gaming state in which electric support is provided. In this time-saving game state ST1, the rate of transition to the high-probability game state after the end of the big hit is set higher than in the normal game state, and when the first lottery game is won in the first lottery game during the time-saving game state ST1, the high The rate of transition to the stochastic game state is set to 95% (the probability change game state ST3 is 70% and the latent game state ST2 is 25%). Then, when the number of times of the change of the special symbol exceeds 100, the process shifts to the normal game state ST1.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the gaming state (normal gaming state ST1, time-saving gaming state ST1h, latent probability changing gaming state ST2, probability variation gaming state ST3). Since it is configured such that a plurality of ratios to shift to the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game can be set, and furthermore, it is configured such that a special symbol to be substantially fluctuated according to the gaming state can be changed, the normal gaming state ST1 When the second lottery game that is not substantially the target of variation is performed, the rate of transition to the high-probability gaming state can be extremely reduced (0% in the present embodiment). With such a configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the game does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high-probability game state). There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  Further, the substantially variable target of the latent probability changing game state ST2 which is a high probability gaming state is a second lottery game in which the second special symbol fluctuates, and the lottery result of the second lottery game is a big hit only during the latent probability changing game state ST2. In such a case, the game is shifted to the high-probability gaming state by 100%. Therefore, in a part of the high-probability gaming state, it is possible to attain a jackpot at least twice in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with rich gaming properties, and it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a flow of control of various devices during the jackpot of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the flow of various devices executed from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game. Of the operation control of various devices, the description of the same operation control as that of the first embodiment is omitted, and the other operation control will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, when a jackpot game is started, various devices (the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650) related to the jackpot game are operated a predetermined number of times at a predetermined timing by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 80). Then, based on the various commands output from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game.

  First, when the jackpot game is started, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is opened (turned on) to open the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 after a predetermined period t1 (opening period) has elapsed. ). Then, the attacker (upper attacker) 650b is closed when a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed or when a predetermined number of prizes (10 in this embodiment) is satisfied. The period t2 in which the second specific winning opening 650b is in the open state is defined as one open period (round), and is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (seven times in the present embodiment) in one big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650b is always in the open state during the opening period t2. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The upper attacker 650b may be operated to repeat the state. Even in the case of using such a configuration, the opening period t2 is set when either a predetermined period elapses after the second specific winning opening is first opened or a predetermined number of winning conditions are satisfied. It will end.

  Then, after the end of one round, the next round is started after a lapse of a predetermined period t3 (interval period). As shown in FIG. 80, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes a game in which the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device is opened from the first round to the fourth round, and five rounds are performed. In the eyes, a game is executed in which the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened.

  Next, the flow between the fourth and fifth rounds in which the specific winning opening that is opened during the jackpot game is switched from the second specific winning opening 650b to the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a predetermined period t4, which is a specific interval period between the fourth round and the fifth round, can be changed according to the game state (see FIG. 80). For example, the jackpots A to D have an interval period set to 1 second, and the jackpots E to H have an interval period set to 4 seconds.

  Here, the effect on the game by changing the specific interval period will be described. First, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball fired by the right-handed game aiming at the right side of the game board 13 passes through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, By passing through the guidance route 72, it is possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 64). The ball guiding path 72 is designed such that the ball guiding path passage time is 3 to 4 seconds.

  Further, the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 operates such that the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3 at the same time as the first specific winning opening 65a is opened (V opening operation is on). The mode (state in which the V release operation is ON) is continued for a predetermined period t5 (2 seconds in the present embodiment), and after a predetermined period (V release period) t5 has elapsed, the game ball switches the positive change switch 65e3. It is controlled so as to operate in such a manner that passage is impossible (difficult) (V opening operation is off).

  That is, during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in order to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, V is obtained by adding the specific interval period t4 and the period (2 seconds) t5 during which the V opening operation is on. The validity period t6 needs to be longer than the ball guide route passage period (in this embodiment, the maximum is 4 seconds). Specifically, by setting the specific interval period t4 to 4 seconds, the V effective period t6 obtained by adding the specific interval period t4 (4 seconds) and the V release period t5 (2 seconds) is set to 6 seconds, and the ball guidance is performed. Make it longer than the route passage period (up to 4 seconds). With this configuration, after the upper attacker 650b in the fourth round is turned off (after the game ball can pass through the ball guide route 72), the game ball that has passed through the ball guide route 72 becomes V valid. It is possible to win the first specific winning opening 65a within the period t6 and pass through the probability change switch 65e3.

  On the other hand, if the V effective period t6 is set shorter than the ball guidance route passage period, it becomes impossible (difficult) for the game ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a within the V effective period t6. .

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by changing the length of the specific interval period t4 according to the game state, the jackpot game that can substantially pass through V without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. It is possible to provide a jackpot game in which V passing is impossible (difficult). Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that is not possible (difficult) are set), and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. It is configured to be set.

  In the present embodiment, by changing the operation content of the switching member 65h as described in the above-described first embodiment, an operation pattern in which the game ball can pass (easily) the probability change switch 65e3 and an operation pattern that does not allow the game ball to pass. Although it is configured to set a possible (difficult) operation pattern, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65, the game ball can pass through the positive change switch 65e3. It may be configured to set an (easy) operation pattern and an unpassable (difficult) operation pattern.

  Specifically, first, when a round (five rounds in the present embodiment) in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened is started, the switching member 65h is turned on for two seconds. That is, when a game ball wins at the timing when the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, the switching member 65h is set so that the game ball can pass (easily) pass through the positive change switch 65e3. Drive. Then, the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 is set to the first specific winning opening 65a. An opening / closing door opening pattern in which a game ball cannot be won (difficult) (for example, an opening pattern in which opening of 0.4 seconds is repeated five times from the start of the fifth round, and then continuously opened for 27 seconds) can be changed.

  With this configuration, it is possible to change the operation pattern in which the game ball can pass (easily) pass the probability changing switch 65e3 by simply changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1 without changing the operation content of the switching member 65h. Possible (difficult) operation patterns can be set. Therefore, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of ratios of the jackpot game that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, and to provide a variety of playability to the player and to improve the interest of the game. .

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state in which game balls can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a case where game balls cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). When the configuration that allows the setting of the state of the pachinko machine 10 is set, not only the timing of starting the driving of the switching member 65h but also the timing of starting the driving of the first variable winning device 65, for example, The operation may be controlled such that a constant operation is repeated at the timing when the power is turned on.

  Further, by changing the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 65f1, a state where a game ball can enter the first specific winning opening 65a (easy) and a game ball cannot enter the first specific winning opening 65a (difficult). By using a configuration that allows setting of the switching member 65h, it is possible to set the period during which the switching member 65h is turned on longer than 2 seconds. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the first specific winning opening 65a can more reliably pass through the probable change switch 65e3.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not a game ball can enter the first variable prize device 65 within the V validity period. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball guiding path passing time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72, is switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game is shown, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the first specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, a period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1.

  With such a configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guidance route passage time, the right of the big hit game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball wins the first variable prize device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance route passage time, the right-hitting game ball at the start of the jackpot game becomes the first ball within the V valid period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  As a specific configuration, the opening / closing door 65f1 (see FIG. 6) that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to operate multiple times in one round. (The first specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly switched between the open state and the closed state within one round.) When the first specific winning opening 65a first becomes the open state, the game ball that wins is set to the probable change switch. 65e3 may be passed. Further, the opening / closing door 65f1 that operates to open the first specific winning opening 65a is constituted by a plurality of members each performing a predetermined movement different from each other, and the specific winning is performed only when the plurality of members perform a specific operation. The mouth may be configured to be open.

  By using the above-described specific configuration, even when a jackpot game in which the opening period t1 is short (a jackpot game in which a game ball cannot pass (is difficult) a passing game through the probability change switch 65e3) is set to the open state (within one round). Since the game ball wins the specific winning opening in the (second open state), there is an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  Returning to FIG. 67, the description will be continued. When the opening / closing door (lower attacker) 65f1 (not shown) is turned off (fifth round is completed) and the first specific winning opening 65a is closed, the upper attacker 650b is turned on after the elapse of the interval period t3 (second time). The specific winning opening 650b is open). Thereafter, the operation of the upper attacker 650b is repeated until the final round (7 rounds) is completed, and after the second specific winning opening 650b of the final round (7 rounds) is closed, the ending period t7 elapses and the big hit game is played. finish.

  While the big hit game is being played, the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display corresponding to the big hit game. Specifically, at the beginning of the jackpot game, an effect display (effect A) is performed to congratulate that the jackpot game has become a jackpot game, and after that, it is notified that the specific winning opening to be opened in the next round is switched, and the jackpot is played. After the end of the game, an effect display (effect B) for notifying (suggesting) that a game for determining whether to shift to the high-probability game state is performed is executed. Then, an effect display (effect C) is performed to inspire whether or not to shift to the high-probability game state, and at the end of the jackpot game, a game state provided after the end of the jackpot game (high or low of the jackpot probability, presence or absence of electric support). Is effected (effect D) for informing (suggesting).

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched is different from (delayed) the timing at which the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing at which the fourth round ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent various processes executed by the pachinko machine 10 from being concentrated.

  Further, the timing at which the effect B and the effect C are switched between the timing at which the upper attacker 650b closes (the timing at which the fourth round ends) and the timing at which the lower attacker 65f1 opens (the timing at which the fifth round starts). Is set in the interval period (specific interval period t4), the game ball is set to the probability change switch 65e3 in the current jackpot game based on the timing at which the player switches the effect display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make it difficult to determine whether or not it is a jackpot that can be passed, and it is possible to suppress the tiredness of the game due to grasping the result of the jackpot game at an early stage.

  A plurality of timings at which the effect display is switched are prepared within the specific interval period t4, and a means for randomly setting the timing at which the effect display is switched is provided. This can make it difficult to grasp the result.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, although the description on the display screen or the description thereof is omitted for the same portions as the contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 described in the above-described first embodiment, the same applies to the present embodiment. It has a display.

  First, in the present embodiment, during the normal gaming state ST1, a stage where the hero is walking outdoors is displayed on the display screen (not shown). Then, when the jackpot is won and the game state shifts to the certainty-changing game state ST3, a display screen illustrated in FIG. 68A is displayed. FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the probable change game state ST3.

  In the display screen of FIG. 68 (a), the change of the first special symbol is displayed at the upper left of the screen, and the change of the second special symbol is displayed at the upper right of the screen. On the lower side of the screen, a game state display area is provided in which a "tower search mode (probable change game state ST3)" which is the current game mode (game state) and "right-handed" for informing the game method are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, a situation display area is provided in which an object imitating a tower currently being searched by the hero is displayed. In this state display area, "1F" which is the lowest floor of the object, "100F" which is the uppermost floor, "rooftop" above the uppermost floor, and "30F" which indicates the current floor number are displayed. Have been.

  During the probable change game state ST3, the display is updated for each change so that the tower goes up one floor each time the special symbol changes once, and reaches the rooftop when the special symbol changes 100 times without winning the big hit. That is, the number of floors ("30F" in this figure) displayed with a cursor as "current floor" is the same value as the current number of special symbol changes after the end of the big hit. By displaying the status display area, the special symbol is fluctuated 100 times without winning the jackpot during the probability change game state ST3, and the state of shifting to the latent probability change game state ST2 is described by the hero ascending the tower and finally the rooftop. Is configured to be displayed as an effect that reaches.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68 (b), the display contents when a jackpot is won during the probability change game state ST3 will be described. FIG. 68B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen indicating that a jackpot has been won during the probability change game state ST3. In FIG. 68 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as "555", indicating that the lottery result is a big hit. In addition, the first special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed at "246" indicating that it has come off. In the status display area, “50F” is shown as the current floor number (the number of special symbol changes since the end of the previous big hit).

  In the certainty-changing game state ST3, when a jackpot is won, a display (elevator) notifying that the jackpot has been won is displayed on the display screen. During the jackpot game, an effect is performed in which the user gets into the elevator and fuels the destination of the elevator (not shown). The destinations of the elevators are "outdoors" when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the normal gaming state ST1 or the time reduction gaming state ST1h, and "tower search mode (tower) when the gaming state is set to the probable changing gaming state ST3. 1F) ", and" roof mode "(see FIG. 69) when set to the latent probability changing game state ST2, each of which is configured to indicate the destination by an effect executed during the jackpot game. I have.

  In the present embodiment, since the game state set after the end of the jackpot is changed depending on whether the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot game, the jackpot game is started before the jackpot game starts or in the early stage of the jackpot game. The game state set after the game is over has not been determined.

  Therefore, based on the won jackpot types (A to H), it is determined whether the gaming state shifts when the game ball passes the probability changing switch 65e3 and the game state shifts when the game ball does not pass (for example, the jackpot type is In the case of the jackpot E, the gaming state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is the probable change gaming state ST3 or the time-saving gaming state ST1h), and the effect common to the discrimination result is used as the effect of the early stage of the jackpot game (for example, the effect A in FIG. 67). Then, it may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has passed the probability change switch 65e3, and to set an effect at the end of the game (for example, effect D in FIG. 67) based on the determination result. With such a configuration, the effect on the display screen can be displayed without discomfort with respect to the game result during the jackpot game (the result as to whether or not the game ball has passed the positive change switch 65e3).

  FIG. 69 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability changing game state ST2. On the display screen of FIG. 69, it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the game state display area displays the right-handed display and the current game mode (game state). A certain “roof mode (latent probability changing game state ST2)” is displayed. Further, in the situation display area, the display of “rooftop” is highlighted to notify that the hero has reached the rooftop.

  This "rooftop mode" is a mode for notifying (suggesting) the latent probability changing game state ST2. In the present pachinko machine 10, various values are set such that the gaming state in which the player is most likely to obtain a payout is the latently variable gaming state ST2. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 (a) to 80, but in the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the substantial variation target is the second special symbol, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set short. In addition, the small hitting game time (the opening period and the ending time during which the game ball does not win the specific winning opening in the small hitting game time) is also set to be short (shorter than the probable change game state ST3). That is, the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 is set to the gaming state in which the time during which the first specific winning opening 65a is open in the small hitting game per unit time is the longest among all gaming states. Furthermore, the jackpot probability is set to a high probability.

  To the “roof mode” that indicates the latent probability changing game state ST2, the jackpot F is won during the probability changing game state ST3 (10% of the entire jackpot), or the jackpot is not won during the probability changing game state ST3. It is designed to shift by changing the special symbol 100 times.

  At this time, as an effect display performed by the third symbol display device 81, for example, a jackpot is won during the probable change game state ST3 (see FIG. 68 (b)), and an effect (not shown) to get into the elevator starts. Then, during the jackpot game, does the elevator rise to the upper floor or descend to the lower floor? After informing the player of which mode to shift to after the big hit game is finished, the effect display in which the elevator reaches the roof is executed.

  Also, in the case of shifting to the latent stochastic game state ST2 without winning a jackpot during the stochastic game state ST3, the effect shown in FIG. 68 (a) is continuously displayed until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times. The current floor number shown in the status display area increases by one floor for each change. Then, when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times and shifts to the “rooftop mode”, the cursor shown in the status display area shifts from “100F” to “rooftop” and shifts to the “rooftop mode”.

  Next, a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the “roof mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect in the latent probability changing game state ST2. FIG. 70 (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when a small hit is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70 (a), it is displayed that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are changing, and the rightward display and the current game mode (game mode) are displayed in the game state display area. ), Which is a “roof mode (latent probability changing game state ST2)”. Further, in the situation display area, the display of “rooftop” is highlighted to notify that the hero has reached the rooftop.

  On the upper side of the display screen, “G possession (acquisition medium display)” is displayed as a value corresponding to the game ball acquired by the player. In the center of the display screen, a plurality of treasure chests are displayed on the roof of the tower. This treasure box is produced and displayed so as to be opened when the result of the special symbol game is a big hit or a small hit.

  On the acquisition medium display displayed on the upper side of the display screen, a display corresponding to the game ball acquired in the flow of a series of games in the pachinko machine 10 (flow from initial jackpot to transition to the normal game state ST1) is performed. Things.

  In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the total number of media acquired during a series of games is displayed as an acquisition medium display. For example, during a series of games, a value corresponding to a medium acquired in a big hit game is displayed. The value and the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hitting game may be displayed in a display mode in which the player can identify the value. With this configuration, it is possible to easily understand how the player has acquired the medium in a series of games. When such a display is executed, if the value corresponding to the medium obtained in the small hit game satisfies a predetermined condition (the value corresponding to the medium obtainable in one big hit game), another The display mode may be displayed. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the player can easily grasp that a medium equivalent to the big hit game has been obtained as a result of the plurality of small hit games.

  On the display screen of FIG. 70 (b), the second special symbol is stopped and displayed at "123" indicating a small hit. Then, the first special symbol, which has been changing at the same timing as the stop of the change of the second special symbol, is forcibly stopped and displayed at an outlier. At the center of the display screen, the selected treasure box opens, and an effect in which a treasure indicating a small hit appears from inside is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing an effect when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol in the latent probability changing game state ST2. When a big hit is won in the second special symbol, one of the treasure chests displayed on the display screen of FIG. 70A is opened during the change, and an effect in which a monster appears from the treasure chest is displayed. Then, a battle with the monster starts during the big hit, and an effect is displayed (not shown) so that the game state after the big hit game is notified (suggested) according to the result of the battle. For example, if a battle is won, the player reaches the rooftop and shifts to the “rooftop mode”. In addition, when fleeing from the battle, a transition is made to the “tower search mode (1F)”, and when the battle is lost, an effect is displayed so as to proceed to the “outdoor” stage (not shown).

  As described above, in the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment, an effect in which the story progresses for each mode corresponding to the game state is displayed, and the story is displayed in accordance with the special symbol lottery result (big hit, small hit). The result is configured to change. Then, since the player can grasp whether or not the present state is advantageous for the player only by looking at the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the playability (which is more complicated than the conventional pachinko machine 10) Even if it adopts a game property that can obtain many game balls other than the jackpot game, there is an effect that the player can play the game without being confused.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those in the first control example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. Other points are the same as those in the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors (the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650) operate. The difference is that the table 202h and the jackpot scenario 202i are added, and that the values of various counter values referred to in the various tables are changed, and the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment. , And a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first hit random number table 202a differs from the first embodiment in that the value set as the big hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The small hit random number table 202b is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit determination condition is changed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The second hit random number table 202c is different in that the value set as the hit determination value is different. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is different from the first embodiment in that the jackpot types are increased so that jackpots having different specific interval periods during the jackpot can be selected, and the jackpot type selection used in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. The difference is that a table D is newly provided. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202e and the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern table differ from the first embodiment in that the set fluctuation time is changed. The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The small hit type selection table 202g is a table used when small hits are stabilized in the small hit random number table 202b, and is a table in which a small hit type corresponding to each game state is selected. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special electric auditors product operation table 202h is a table in which the operation contents of the special electric auditors product corresponding to the set big hit type or small hit type are stored. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The jackpot scenario 202i is an area for storing a scenario selected in the event of a jackpot, and stores the timing and the number of the accessory operation during each jackpot. The jackpot scenario 202i is updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 of FIG. 85) and reset by the jackpot end process 2 (S1732 of FIG. 86).

  FIG. 72B is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the small hit type selection table 202g and the special electric auditors' (first variable winning device 65 and second variable winning device 650) operation table The difference is that 202h has been added and that the values of various counter values referred to in various tables have been changed. Other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. I do.

  The jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is an area for setting (storing) the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot control process 2 (S1720 in FIG. 85). In the first special symbol change stop process 2 (S254 in FIG. 82). , A jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set.

  If the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 in the big hit control processing 2 (S1720 in FIG. 87), the scenario counter 203c2 is updated by adding 1 to the big hit end processing 2 (S1732 in FIG. 86). Cleared at the same time as resetting the jackpot scenario.

  The other memory area 203z includes other memory areas set in the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and includes at least the winning number counter 203j, the operation counter 203k, and the winning counter 203j described in the first embodiment. A notification counter 203m, a remaining ball timer flag 203n, and a remaining ball timer 203o are included, and are used in the same control as in the above-described first embodiment.

  Next, the contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. The first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. In the low-probability gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "7", In the gaming state, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7 to 9”, it is determined that the first winning (big hit) is. That is, the probability of a big hit in the low-probability gaming state is “1/200”, and the probability of a big hit in the high-probability gaming state is “3/200”. In addition, in the first lottery game using the first special symbol and the second lottery game using the second special symbol used in the present embodiment, the hit determination is performed using the first random number table 202a.

  With reference to FIG. 73 (b), the contents of the small hit random number table 202b will be described. FIG. 73 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table 202b. In the present embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol (special figure 1) does not win a small hit. On the other hand, in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the value of the first random number counter C1 is “10” in the low-probability game state (low accuracy: no power support, low accuracy: power support). If it is "-20", it is determined to be a small hit, and in the high-probability gaming state (high accuracy: no power support, high accuracy: power support), the value of the first random number counter C1 is "10-199". If there is, it is determined that it is a small hit. That is, the small hit probability by the first lottery game is “0/200”, the small hit probability by the second lottery game in the low probability game state is “11/200”, and the second lottery game in the high probability game state. Is "190/200".

  Thereby, in the high-probability game state in which the second lottery game is performed (the latent probability change game state ST2 and the probability change game state ST3), the small hit game is frequently given. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 (b), in the latent probability changing game state ST2 and the probability changing game state ST3, the time when the second specific winning opening 650b is open as the small hit game is the same, The opening time and the ending time set as the small hitting game are different, and the opening time and the ending time are set shorter in the small hitting game in the latent probability changing game state ST2. That is, the opening time of the second specific winning opening 650b per unit time is longer in the latently-variable gaming state ST2 than in the probability-variable gaming state ST3. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player as a small hit game can be increased in the latent probability changing game state ST2 than in the probability changing game state ST3, and the player can acquire game balls other than the big hit game. It is possible to provide a game machine with unexpected surprises, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the probability of winning a small hit in the first lottery game is set to 0%, but may be set to, for example, about 10%, or the second lottery in the low-probability game state. Although the probability of winning a small hit in a game is set to “11/200”, it may be set to, for example, the same probability as the second lottery game in the high-probability game state.

  The contents of the second hit random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202c. In the present embodiment, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in a range of 0 to 99, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to “0 to 98” in the low-probability game state. In the high-probability gaming state, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0 to 99", it is determined that the second win (per ordinary drawing). That is, the probability of winning in the low-probability gaming state is “99/100”, and the probability of winning in the high-probability gaming state is “100/100”. Note that, when a winning is made per ordinary figure, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is activated, and a state where a game ball easily enters the second starting port 640 (special state) is established. In the present embodiment, the probability of the second hit is slightly different between the high probability and the low probability, but may be the same probability.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot type selection table A202d referred to in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 74 (b) is a jackpot type referred to in the probability change game state ST3. It is the schematic diagram which showed the selection table B202d typically. FIG. 75 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability changing game state ST2, and FIG. 75 (b) is a jackpot referred to in the time reduction game state ST1h. It is a type selection table D202d.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d is referred to when a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery of each special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol). Based on the 1 special symbol (special figure 1) or the 2nd special symbol (special figure 2) and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot type is determined using the counter value obtained from the first hit type counter C2. A is selected from any of A to H.

  The jackpot type selection table 202d used in the present embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time-saving gaming state ST1h is added, and the selected jackpot type is It is different in that it has increased, that the interval time of the jackpot game can be set according to the jackpot type, and that the ratio of the first hit type counter value distributed to each jackpot type has been changed. Are the same. The description of the same portions will be omitted, and differences will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 74 (a), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state ST1, the ratio of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming to the high-probability gaming state (high accuracy) is determined. The interval time (specific interval time t4 in FIG. 67) and the V operation (operation of the switching member 65h) are set for each jackpot type so that the probability of being in the low probability state (low probability) is 50% at 50%. , The presence or absence of the electric support after the big hit game is set. More specifically, an open pattern (V possible) for controlling the operation of the switching member 65h so that the game ball can pass (enter) a V-action as the V-motion according to the game state, and the game ball is switched to the probability-change switch 65e3. Any of the open patterns (V impossible) for controlling the operation of the switching member 65h is set to impossible (difficult) passing (entering the ball).

  Furthermore, if the V operation is V possible according to the game state as the interval time, the game ball is passed to the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game ball can pass (enter) the probability changing switch 65e3. Even if "4 seconds (V is possible)" in which the specific winning opening 65a can be won, and even if the V operation is "V", the game ball is passed through the probable change switch 65e3 during the period in which the game ball can pass (enter). In the first specific winning opening 65a of the one variable winning device 65, any one of "1 second (V impossible)" which cannot be won (difficult) is set.

  Then, it is set whether or not the electric support (100 times) is given after the end of the big hit game. It should be noted that the electric support is provided regardless of whether the game ball passes (enters) or does not pass (enters) the probability changing switch 65e3. When the jackpot type in which "Yes" is set is selected, when the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, the game proceeds to the probability change game state (ST3) after the end of the jackpot game, and the game ball temporarily switches the probability change switch 65e3. If the ball does not pass (enter the ball), the game shifts to the time-saving game state (ST1h) after the end of the big hit game.

  As described above, the current big hit type is selected from the big hit types set with different contents by the first hit type counter value acquired from the first hit type counter C2. For example, when the big hit is won in the special map 1 during the normal gaming state ST1 and 50 is acquired as the first hit type counter value, the big hit type E is selected. During the jackpot game provided by the jackpot type E, the game ball passes (enters) the probability change switch 65e3, so that the probability change game state ST3 is provided after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, a jackpot B, a jackpot D, and a jackpot H are set as the jackpot types in which the normal gaming state ST is selected after the jackpot game ends. This is because even if “1 second” or “4 seconds” is selected as the interval time and “V possible” or “V impossible” is selected as the V operation, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the big hit game. It indicates that there is a possibility. With this configuration, it is not possible to grasp the game state after the end of the big hit game (it becomes difficult) only by grasping the contents of the interval time and the V operation. Therefore, the player pays attention to the notification (suggestion) of the game state after the end of the jackpot game, which is performed during the jackpot game (or the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot game). There is an effect that it is possible to make the user interested in the effect display and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  In addition, the assignments in which the V operation is “V possible” and “V impossible” differ only depending on the type of the special symbol, and are set so as not to be changed according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the first special symbol, the ratio of the V operation being “V OK” is set to 90% and the ratio of being “V impossible” is set to 10%, and in the second special symbol, the V operation is set to “V OK”. Is set to 100%, and the ratio of "V impossible" is set to 0%. With this configuration, it is not necessary to change the V operation (the operation of the switching member 65h) depending on the game state, so that the capacity for storing the operation instruction content for the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) is reduced. (There can be two types). This has the effect.

  Next, the selection of the jackpot type when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal game state ST1, a game aiming at the first special symbol (left-handed game) is an appropriate game method advantageous to the player, but when an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the normal game state is set. A game using the second special symbol is performed during ST1. As an inappropriate game, during the normal game state ST1, the RAM of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 is reset so as to shorten the fluctuation of the second special symbol in which the long fluctuation (10 minutes) is set. By receiving a plurality of lotteries in a shorter time than the normally required fluctuation time, the game shifts to the most probable latent probability changing game state ST2 for the player without going through an appropriate game flow (see FIG. 66). Action is possible. Assuming a case where such a game is performed, if a big hit is won in the second special symbol during the normal game state ST1, the big hit H is selected. The big hit H is a big hit type that shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the big hit game ends.

  Therefore, it is possible to give a penalty (penalty) to a player who performs an inappropriate game during the normal game state ST1. It should be noted that the penalty (penal rule) to be performed on the inappropriate player may be other than the above-described content. For example, during the normal game state ST1, the small hit is won in the second special symbol which is not substantially the target of variation. In this case, the variation pattern of the special symbol after the end of the small hitting game may be set as a special variation pattern, and a variation pattern in which at least the first special symbol has a long variation may be forcibly selected. With such a configuration, it is substantially difficult to continue the game, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which an inappropriate game is continuously executed.

  In addition, if a jackpot is won as a result of an inappropriate game, the operation contents of the special electric auditorium during the jackpot game will be changed to the special operation contents (a game ball that cannot enter the specific winning opening (difficult). The contents may be stored in advance in the ROM of the main control device 110 in advance.

  In addition, for example, when a jackpot is won in a state where the second special symbol is retained and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 after the jackpot game ends, the inappropriate game described above is executed without the player's intention. In some cases, the game may be executed only after a predetermined number of times (upper limit storage number of the second special symbol (four)) after the end of the jackpot game, or the second start port 640 during the normal game state ST1. May be executed only when winning. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate (suppress) a penalty (penal rule) for an inappropriate game from being given to a player who is playing a normal game, and to give a player dissatisfaction. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 (b), the jackpot type selection table B202d referred to in the probability change game state ST3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the probable change game state ST3, the ratio of the game state after the jackpot game ends to the high-probability game state (high accuracy) is determined. At 10%, the probability of a low probability state (low probability) is set to 90%. This is because a penalty is imposed on the player because the game of the special figure 1 in the probable change game state ST3 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the special map 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game is changed to the high probability game state (high accuracy) is 70%, and the rate of the low probability state (low accuracy) is 30%. It is set to be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75 (a), the jackpot type selection table C202d referred to in the latent probability changing game state ST2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the present embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high probability game state (high accuracy). Is set to 30%, and the ratio of low probability state (low probability) is set to 70%. This is because the game of the special figure 1 in the latent probability changing game state ST2 is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, so that a penalty (penal rule) is given to the player. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the special map 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game is high probability game state (high accuracy) is 90%, and the rate of low probability state (low accuracy) is 10%. It is set to be.

  Next, the jackpot type selection table D202d referred to in the time-saving gaming state ST1h will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (b). As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the ratio of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming to the high-probability gaming state (high accuracy) is determined. At 95%, the ratio of the low probability state (low probability) is set to 5%. On the other hand, when the big hit is won in the special map 2, the rate of the game state after the big hit game ends is high probability game state (high accuracy) is 5%, and the rate of low probability state (low accuracy) is 95%. It is set to be. This is because the game of the special figure 2 in the time-saving game state ST1h is an inappropriate game like the special figure 2 game in the normal game state ST1, and therefore, a penalty (penal rule) is given to the player.

  As described above, when the big hit is won in the special figure 1 during the time-saving gaming state ST1h, even if the low probability state is the same, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game has a higher probability than the normal gaming state ST1. It is set so that it can shift to the gaming state. With this configuration, even if the player shifts to the low-probability state (falls down), it is possible to provide a chance (return chance) to shift to the high-probability game state for a predetermined period. There is an effect that the motivation of the player to play the game can be increased.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the transition ratio to the high-probability gaming state can be set according to the gaming state and the type of the special symbol, respectively. This makes it possible to suppress the situation in which the player gets tired early. It is also possible to give an appropriate penalty to a player who has performed an inappropriate game.

  Next, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern in each game state will be described with reference to FIGS. This embodiment is the same as the first embodiment except that the variation time set in each variation pattern is different. The description of the same portions will be omitted, and only different points will be described.

  FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table A referred to in the normal gaming state ST1. In the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600000 ms (10 minutes), which is different from the first embodiment described above. In the present embodiment, as described above, a penalty can be given to an inappropriate game, so that the fluctuation time is set short.

  FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table B referred to in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. In the time-saving gaming state ST1h, as in the normal gaming state ST1, the variation time of the special figure 2 is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the variation time of various out-of-position variation patterns of the special figure 1 is shortened. This is different from the first embodiment.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection table C referred to in the latent probability variation game state ST2. In the latent probability changing game state ST2, unlike the first embodiment, since the special figure 2 is substantially changed, the change time of the special figure 1 is changed to 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the change time of the special figure 2 is set to 500 ms. It differs from the above-described first embodiment in that it has been changed.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern selection table D referred to in the certain variation game state ST3. The certain variation game state ST3 is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the variation time when the special figure 1 is off is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a general figure fluctuation pattern table for selecting a fluctuation time of a normal symbol. This embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that the number of types of ordinary symbols is one, and is different in that there is only one type of ordinary symbols referring to this table.

  FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the small hit type selection table 202g. FIG. 80 (a) is a small hit type selection table 202g used when a small hit is determined as a result of the special symbol game winning / failing determination, and a predetermined small hit is selected according to the game state. Is set. When the small game is won in the small game state during the normal game state ST1 or the time saving game state ST1h, the small game 1 is selected. When the small game is won in the game state ST3, the small game 2 is selected. If the small hit is won during the gaming state ST2, the small hit 3 is selected. The small hits 1, the small hits 2, and the small hits 3 are different in the operation of the special electric auditors during the small hitting game. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80 (b), the operation details of the special electric auditors (the first variable prize device 65 and the second variable prize device 650) activated during the big hit game or the small hit game will be described. FIG. 80 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the special electric auditors product operation table 202h. The contents of operation of the special electric accessory corresponding to the big hit type are set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h.

  First, the operation contents of the special electric accessory based on each jackpot type will be described. The same operation is set from the jackpot type A to the jackpot E, the opening time is 5 seconds, the number of rounds is 7, the opening operation during the round is the second variable prize device from the first round (R) to the fourth round. 650 (upper) is opened for 29 seconds, and in the fifth round, the first variable winning device 65 (lower) is opened for 29 seconds. Then, from the sixth round to the seventh round, the second variable winning device 650 (upper) is set to be opened again for 29 seconds. Note that the opening operation time during the round is set to 29 seconds, and during this time, the specific winning opening is set to be closed when 10 game balls win in the specific winning opening of each variable winning device. Then, 2 seconds are set as the interval between rounds, 1 second is set as the specific interval between rounds (t4 in FIG. 67), and 5 seconds are set as the ending time.

  The jackpot types E to H differ from the jackpots A to E in that the time of the specific interval between rounds is increased from 1 second to 4 seconds, and the same values are set for other items. . In this way, by making the specific intervals between rounds different from each other, it is possible to set whether or not (easy or difficult) whether the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3 as described with reference to FIG. I have. As described above, between the specific rounds (the round in which the game ball is won in the second specific winning opening 650b of the second variable winning device 650 and the round in which the game ball is won in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65) By simply changing the interval time between the two, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of jackpot games that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, thereby providing the player with various playability, There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed so that it is possible to change whether or not a game ball can enter the first variable winning device 65 within the V valid period t6 (see FIG. 67). However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball guiding path passing time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72, is switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the one specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, a period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guidance route passage time, the right of the big hit game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball wins the first variable prize device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance route passage time, the right-hitting game ball at the start of the jackpot game becomes the first ball within the V valid period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  In the present embodiment, the operation content of the special electric accessory set by the special electric accessory operation table 202h and the operation content of the switching member 65h corresponding to each jackpot type are set as the jackpot scenario. Alternatively, other configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation contents of the switching member 65h can be set by using the special electric auditors product operation table 202h.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 having the probability change switch 65e3 is opened only once in the fifth round in one big hit game. The variable winning device 65 may be configured to be opened a plurality of times. Specifically, for example, the first variable winning device 65 may be configured to be in the open state in the third, fifth, and seventh rounds.

  With this configuration, the round before the first variable winning device 65 is opened can be changed to the round where the second variable winning device 650 is opened. It is possible to have a plurality (three) of specific interval periods. Therefore, for each specific interval period, it is possible to set whether or not the game ball can reach the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3. There is an effect that the expectation can be given to the player a plurality of times during one big hit game.

  When the above-described configuration is adopted, if the V operation is V-possible (FIG. 74), that is, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened and the switching member 65h is turned on for 2 seconds. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the game ball has been fired at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probable change switch 65e3. If the game ball has not been fired at a timing at which the game ball can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, an appropriate game method is determined. It is good to inform.

  Specifically, a detecting means for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the ball guiding route 72, it is determined that the passage of the game ball is detected within the specific interval period, and the third determination is performed based on the determination result. As the display for notifying the game method on the symbol display device 81, it is preferable to display a content explaining the game method such as "Do not stop right-handing!" Or "If you keep firing, there is a chance of changing!" By performing such a display, next, when the first variable winning device 65 is opened (the fifth round or the seventh round), it is possible to support the game so that the player can perform an appropriate game. It is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the playability.

  Note that the method of determining whether or not an appropriate game is being played during the jackpot game is not limited to the above-described content, and another method may be used. For example, a method of determining that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball during the big hit game has been operated, or a method of detecting the amount of rotation of the steering wheel and determining that the right-hand game has not been performed is used. You may.

  Furthermore, the display content of the display for notifying (guidance) the game method may be changed based on the content of the winning jackpot. For example, if an appropriate game is played, the display may be emphasized in the case of a jackpot in which the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3.

  In addition, a big hit scenario in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in successive rounds may be settable. By using such a configuration, even if the interval time is short, it is possible to allow the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, further increase the variation, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

  Next, the operation content of the special electric auditors product based on the small hit type will be described. There are small hit types from small hits 1 to small hits 3. The small hit 1 is a small hit selected when the gaming state is the normal gaming state ST1 or the time saving gaming state ST1h, and the small hit 2 is a gaming state that changes reliably. The small hit selected in the gaming state ST3. And the small hit 3 is a small hit selected when the game state is the latently variable game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)).

  Each small hit is set so that the opening time, the opening operation during the round, and the ending time are different. Specifically, the opening time and the ending time of the small hit 1 are set to 7.5 seconds, and the opening of 0.3 seconds is set to be repeated six times as the opening operation during the round. That is, the small hit 1 is set as a small hit in which the high-speed opening is repeated, and the game ball hardly wins the specific winning opening during the small hit game (difficult).

  Next, the opening time and the ending time of the small hit 2 are set to 7.5 seconds as in the case of the small hit 1, but the opening operation during the round is performed once for 1.8 seconds. Is set. That is, at the small hit 2, the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening.

  Specifically, in the probability change game state ST3 in which the small hit 2 is selected (see FIG. 80 (a)), the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit game of the small hit 2 is set. The time is set to 16.8 seconds (about 17 seconds) by adding the opening time (7.5 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (7.5 seconds). If the number of game balls that win the special winning opening during the small hit game is 2, and the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is 10, it is possible to obtain about 60 to 70 winning balls per minute. Becomes

  Finally, for small hit 3, the opening operation during the round is the same as small hit 2, but the opening time and ending time are set to 0.3 seconds. In other words, the period in which the specific winning opening is in the closed state is set to be 10 times or more shorter than the small win 2.

  Specifically, in the latent probability changing game state ST2 (see FIG. 80 (a)) in which the small hit 3 is selected, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 0.5 seconds, and the small hit 3 is a small hit. The game time is set to 2.4 seconds (about 2.5 seconds) by adding the opening time (0.3 seconds), the opening time (1.8 seconds), and the ending time (0.3 seconds). Assuming that the number of game balls winning the special winning opening during the small hitting game is two and the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening is ten, about 480 winning balls can be obtained in one minute. .

  That is, in the small hit 3, the operation of the special electric accessory is set so that the game ball can win the specific winning opening, and further, it is a time when the specific winning opening is not opened in the small hit game. By shortening the opening time and the ending time, the open state of the specific winning opening due to the small hit game can appear more frequently than the small hit 2. Therefore, it is possible for the player to acquire many game balls, and there is an effect that the interest of the game is improved. Further, by adding another game property (a game property of waiting for the game state to shift to the latent probability change game state ST2) to the game property of waiting for the jackpot game to be executed as in the conventional game, It is possible to provide various effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, details of the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 81B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  Since the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that an advantageous period flag 223m and an advantageous information storage area 223n are added. Is the same as in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The advantageous period flag 223m is a flag that is set to ON while the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability gaming state, and is set to ON when the gaming state becomes the high-probability gaming state. It is set to off when the low probability game state is entered.

  The advantageous information storage area 223n is an area for storing game information while the advantageous period flag 223m is set to ON (during an advantageous state). As the game information, the number of game balls acquired during the advantageous period and the number of big hits and small hits won during the advantageous period are stored. The information stored in the advantage information storage area 223n is cleared when the advantage period flag 223m is set to off.

  Using the above-mentioned advantageous period flag 223m and the advantageous information storage area 223n, the number of game balls acquired by the player during the high-probability game continuation is temporarily stored, so that the acquired medium is displayed on the display screen in the latent probability changing game state ST2. (See FIG. 70) can be displayed.

<Regarding the control processing of the main control device in the second embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

  With reference to FIG. 82, the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S254). The first special symbol change stop process 2 (FIG. 82, S254) is different from the first special symbol change stop process (FIG. 29, S204) in the first embodiment in that the process of S651 is added. . As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S609, after the first symbol display device 37 is stopped changing the first special symbol, the process of S651 is executed. In the process of S651, the jackpot scenario 202i (determined by the special electric auditors operation table) specified for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2. Is performed (S651).

  Next, the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol change stop processing 2 (S257). The second special symbol change stop process 2 (FIG. 83, S257) is different from the second special symbol change stop process (FIG. 36, S207) in the first embodiment in that the process of S1051 is added. . As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the process of S1009, after the change stop of the second special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the process of S1051 is executed. In the process of S1051, the jackpot scenario 202i defined for the operation of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined jackpot type is selected from the ROM 202 and set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 (S651).

  Here, in the big hit scenario, an operation for each time in the big hit game is set. When the start of the jackpot game is set, the specific winning port set in the jackpot scenario is opened and set after the opening period set in the jackpot scenario elapses. After that, when a closing condition (for example, winning 10 balls or opening time of 30 seconds elapses) is satisfied, the specific winning opening is closed, and after the interval period set in the jackpot scenario elapses, the next winning opening is closed. The jackpot round is started, and the opening of the specific winning opening is set.

  In the second embodiment, a jackpot scenario is stored in the ROM 202 in correspondence with the gaming state and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, and the corresponding jackpot scenario is selected. Here, even if the jackpot type is set in an open pattern in which a game ball can enter the probability changing switch 65e3, the opening period or the interval period is set to be variable so that the game ball can be set on the probability changing switch 65e3. It can be set as a jackpot that can enter the ball and a jackpot that cannot enter the ball. Thereby, it is possible to variably set the probability change rate for each game state by regulating the type of the big hit that can enter the probability change switch 65e3 according to the opening time or the interval time depending on the big hit game state.

  In a normal game state ST1 in which a normal game method is set in which a game ball is caused to flow down to the left flow path PA1 and a game ball is made to enter the first starting port 630 to perform a game, the flow path is set to the right flow path PA2. When the game is played by causing the game ball to flow down, the second ordinary electric accessory 640a is easily opened. Therefore, when the game ball is caused to flow down to the left flow path PA1 and the game is played, the first start port 630 is used. A game ball can be easily entered into the second starting port 640 rather than a game ball being entered. Even if the player is in the normal game state, it is more advantageous for the player to play a game by causing a game ball to flow down to the right flow path PA2 because a lottery chance in the second special symbol can be obtained. However, in the second embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal game state with the second special symbol, even if the big hit type is opened in the open pattern in which the probability change switch 65e3 can enter the ball, the big hit scenario is set. Since the opening period of the first specific winning opening 65a ends before the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 by the interval period, the game ball is passed through the positive change switch 65e3. No probability change is given to the player, that is, the probability change rate of the second special symbol is set to 0%. Therefore, even if an illegal operation of playing a game by causing a game ball to flow down to the right flow path PA2 in the normal game state ST1 is performed, the disadvantage of the game store can be suppressed.

  Similarly, in each game state, even if the flow paths (left flow path PA1 and right flow path PA2) for performing the game are set by design, the probability of the probability variation in the winning opening entering the ball in different flow paths is disadvantageous for the player. Can be set according to the jackpot scenario.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a description will be given of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S156) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S156). This ordinary symbol variation process 2 (S156) is different from the ordinary symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 41) in that the processes of S1214 to S1215 are deleted. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, since the processes of S1214 to S1215 in the first embodiment are deleted, in the present embodiment, regardless of the game state, the opening time and the number of times of the second ordinary electric auditors product 640a are two times per second. The release pattern is set. Therefore, the opening pattern of the support state in which it is easy to always win the second starting port 640 is provided, and it is configured such that it can be set so as to easily win when the second starting port 640 is opened.

  Thereby, in the gaming state in which a game ball is caused to flow down to the right flow path PA2 to play a game (a time saving game state ST1h, a latent probability variation game state ST2, a probability variation game state ST3), the game ball is transmitted to the second starting port 640. Many prizes can be won. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is caused to flow down the right flow path PA2, it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the first starting port 630 than when the game ball is caused to flow down the left flow path PA1. Therefore, it is possible to perform the game by changing the second special symbol with priority, and it is possible to set the second special symbol so that the big hit is easily given to the player.

  Next, a jackpot control process 2 (S1720) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot control process 2 (S1720). The jackpot control process 2 (S1720) is different from the jackpot control process (S1604 in FIG. 46) in that the processes from S1621 to S1623 are changed to the processes of S1721 to S1724. For other processes, the same processes as in the first embodiment are executed.

  In the process of S1721, it is determined whether the big hit scenario is set in the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 (S1721). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has been set (S1721: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter d2 and updated (S1722). After that, the process of S1723 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1721 that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S1721: No), this process ends. Note that data corresponding to the scenario counter is set in the jackpot scenario, and operation data corresponding to the current scenario counter is read and controlled.

  In the process of S1723, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the current scenario counter is data indicating the start of the opening (S1723). If the data indicates the start of the opening (S1723: Yes), an opening command is set (S1724). After that, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1723 that the opening has not been started (S1723: No), the processing of S1624 is executed.

  In the big hit control process 2 (see FIG. 85) of the second embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1631 that the big hit end timing (ending timing of the ending effect) is reached (S1631: Yes), the first hit is performed. Instead of the jackpot ending process (see FIG. 48) in the embodiment, a jackpot ending process 2 is executed (S1732), and this process ends. The big hit end process 2 (S1732) is a process for setting the big hit end time, like the big hit end process (see FIG. 48). The details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1732) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, since the start of the opening and the start timing of a new round can be determined based on the big hit scenario, the opening time and the interval time can be easily changed for each big hit type. Can be controlled.

  Next, a jackpot end process 2 (S1732) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the content of the jackpot end process 2 (S1732). The big hit end process 2 (FIG. 86, S1732) is different from the ending process (S1632 in FIG. 48) in that the processes of S1655 and S1656 are changed to the processes of S1731 to S1733. In the second embodiment, even in the case of the jackpot to which the probable changing game state is given, the jackpot type in which the upper limit of the number of times the ordinary symbol is reduced to the time saving state is set, so the process of S1731 (the time saving counter 203t) Is changed and the timing is set. Furthermore, the jackpot scenario set in the jackpot scenario setting area 203b2 is cleared to 0 and reset in the final process of the jackpot termination process 2 (S1730) for setting the jackpot termination process. Thereby, it can be determined from the big hit scenario setting area 203b2 whether or not a big hit game is being played.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, the types of the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and the game state (the normal game state ST1, the time-saving game state ST1h, the latent probability changing game state) (ST2, probable change game state ST3) Based on the configuration in which a plurality of ratios to shift to the high-probability game state after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the probability change game state ST3, when the second lottery game that is not substantially the target of the fluctuation in the normal game state ST1 Extremely low (0% in the present embodiment). With such a configuration, even if an inappropriate game (illegal game) is performed, the game does not shift to a state advantageous to the player (high-probability game state). There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In the second embodiment, the jackpot type is selected based on the special symbol type and the game state using the jackpot type selection table 202d. For example, the jackpot type based on the special symbol type is selected. The selection of the interval time based on the game state may be performed using another table. Specifically, in the jackpot type selection table 202d, a jackpot type is selected based on the type of the special symbol, and a different table (for example, an interval time type selection table) is used to select an interval time corresponding to the gaming state. Select And you may make it perform big hit control using the selected big hit type and interval time. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the types of jackpot types, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the main control device 110.

  In the above-described interval time type selection table, the game state is associated with the interval time (in the case of a certain game state, a specific interval time is always selected). A plurality of interval times may be selected based on the counter value of the time type counter. With this configuration, it is possible to make the playability more complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The second embodiment has been described using a pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed, but the present invention is applied to other types of gaming machines. You may. As other types of gaming machines, for example, a gaming machine of a type in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they have won the starting opening, or a change in one special symbol changes the other special symbol There are gaming machines of the type which are executed prior to the fluctuation of the game machine.

  Furthermore, a winning lottery is performed by a game ball winning at the first starting port, and when the lottery result is the first result, the first winning port is activated to be able to win. A first bonus game, a second bonus game in which the second winning opening is activated to enable winning when the result of the lottery is a second result, and a second bonus game during the second bonus game. Used as a gaming machine (1st and 2nd blender) having a third bonus game in which a first winning opening is activated so that a first winning opening can be activated by passing a game ball through a specific area provided in the winning opening. You may.

  In the second embodiment, the game ball passes through the ball guiding path 72 only when the second variable prize device 650 is in the closed state. However, the second variable prize device 650 is in the open state. Alternatively, the game ball that has passed through a specific route may pass through the ball guiding route 72. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and to have an effect that the player can be entertained.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a game ball that has passed a specific route other than the ball guiding route 72 wins the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65. With such a configuration, it is possible to complicate the ball flow of the game balls on the game board 13 and to have an effect that the player can be entertained.

  According to the second embodiment, two specific winning ports are provided in the flow path of the game balls, and the game balls that have passed through the upper (upstream) specific winning ports in the closed state are specified on the lower (downstream) side. A game configured to be able to reach the winning opening, and further provided with a delay guiding path for delaying the time for the game ball to flow between the specific winning opening on the upper side (upstream side) and the specific winning opening on the lower side (downstream side). By changing the length of the specific interval period t4 (see FIG. 67) according to the gaming state (normal, probability change, latency, time saving), the timing at which the game ball reaches the specific winning opening on the downstream side is changed. Configure as possible.

  With this configuration, it is changed whether or not the game ball that has won the specific winning opening on the downstream side passes through the specific area (probable change switch 65e3) provided in the specific winning opening. The mode of the game state to be shifted (set) after the end of the big hit game can be changed. It is possible to provide a jackpot game that can substantially pass through V and a jackpot game that cannot pass through V (difficult) without changing the operation control of the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load on the main control device 110 during the jackpot game can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, the operation control of the first variable winning device 65 (the switching member 65h) according to the type of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (Operation control that allows the game ball to pass through the probability change switch 65e3 and operation control that is not possible (difficult) are set), and the length of the specific interval period t4 is set according to the game state when the jackpot is won. With such a configuration, it is possible to substantially set a plurality of jackpot games that can pass through the probable change switch 65e3, thereby providing a variety of playability to the player and improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the present embodiment, the specific interval period t4 is changed to change whether or not a game ball can enter the first variable prize device 65 within the V validity period. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the ball guiding path passing time, which is the time required for a game ball to pass through the ball guiding path 72, is switched. Further, the value of the V valid period t6 may be changed by changing the value of the V open period t5. Even if such a configuration is used, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device is opened in the fifth round during the jackpot game, for example, the first variable winning device 65 of the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the first round. In the case of a jackpot game in which the one specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, a period changed according to the game state may be set as the opening period t1. With such a configuration, for example, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 longer than the ball guidance route passage time, the right of the big hit game starts (start of the opening period t1). The hit game ball wins the first variable prize device 65 within the V valid period t6, and can pass through the variable probability switch 65e3. On the other hand, by setting the total time of the opening period t1 and the V opening period t5 to be shorter than the ball guidance route passage time, the right-hitting game ball at the start of the jackpot game becomes the first ball within the V valid period t6. It is impossible (difficult) to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

  Furthermore, when a different time can be set as the specific interval time, during a jackpot game, the time of a predetermined interval period after the specific interval period is set so as to cancel the difference of the specific interval time, It is preferable to make the total of the interval times in the same. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to unify the time used for each process performed using the interval period in which the information processing amount is small during the big hit game, and to execute a stable process. It has the effect of becoming.

  In the present embodiment, the ball guiding path 72 (delayed guiding path) is provided so that the ball guiding path passage time becomes a predetermined time (delayed). However, the entrance (opening 70a) and the exit (discharge part 70e) of the path are provided. ) May be provided with a detecting means (sensor) for detecting the passage of the game ball, and a means for determining (monitoring) that the game ball has passed within a predetermined time. By using such a configuration, it is possible to easily find a clogged ball that has occurred in the ball guiding route 72 or an illegal act that intentionally causes the game ball to stay in the guiding route using a magnet or a ball with a thread. There is an effect that it becomes possible.

  The first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 (see FIG. 65) used in the second embodiment may be used for the following gaming machines. . That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game includes a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and a variable prize provided on the upper side of the game board 13 from the first round to the twelfth round. The jackpot game in which the device (the second variable winning device 650) is opened and the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65) provided on the lower side of the game board 13 is opened from the 13th round to the 15th round is executed. You may use it for a game machine.

  By using the first variable prize device 65, the second variable prize device 650, and the ball guiding path 72 used in the second embodiment for such a gaming machine, the launched game balls are wasted. In addition, the effect during the jackpot game can be enjoyed using a specific interval time between specific rounds (between the 12th round and the 13th round).

  Specifically, at the end of the twelfth round, the second variable winning device 650 is closed, and the game ball flows down to the ball guiding path 72. Since the time required for the game ball to pass through the ball guidance route 72 is set to 3 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 65), the game ball that has passed through the opening 70a of the ball guidance route 72 is placed in the first variable winning device. It takes at least 3 seconds to reach 65.

  An effect between rounds using the time required for the game ball to reach the first variable prize device 65 (arrival time) (an effect that stimulates whether the current jackpot game is a 12 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot). By performing, the effect that even if the right-handed game is continued, useless game balls (game balls that do not win the specific winning opening of the variable winning device even during the big hit) can be eliminated (reduced). is there.

  In other words, if the above-described performance during the jackpot game is executed on a gaming machine having one variable prize device, it passes through the variable prize device during a specific interval time (the specific prize port of the variable prize device is closed). The game ball cannot be awarded to the specific winning opening even during the jackpot game, resulting in a useless game ball. In addition, if the specific interval time is shortened in order to reduce useless game balls, the effect performed between specific rounds (the effect that stimulates whether the current jackpot game is a 12 round jackpot or a 15 round jackpot) There is a problem that the effect is weakened.

  On the other hand, when the above-described effect during the jackpot game is executed by the gaming machine using the configuration of the present embodiment, when the second variable winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball guiding path 72 through which the game ball can flow down is set. Since the effect is performed during the specific interval time using the time (3 to 4 seconds) that the game ball flows down, the useless ball generated during the big hit can be suppressed, and the effect performed during the specific round (this big hit) There is an effect that the effect of inducing whether the game is a 12 round hit or a 15 round hit) can be enhanced.

  If the interval time between the specific rounds is set shorter than the time during which the game balls flow down the ball guiding path 72, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 reach the first variable winning device 65 before they reach the first variable winning device 65. Since the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of useless game balls.

  In this case, as an effect in this case, it is conceivable to divert display data displayed in the ending period of the 12 round jackpot and display the data at a specific interval time of the 15 round jackpot. By adopting such an effect, it is possible to reduce the amount of display data, and to make the player think that the 12th round is a big hit. When the 13th round starts, the player This has the effect of providing surprise and joy.

  Further, a detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing down in the ball guidance route 72 is provided, and when the detecting means detects a game ball during a specific interval period, the current big hit is a 15-round big hit (the big hit is still The following may be notified. With such a configuration, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the act of stopping the launch of the game ball during the interval period during the jackpot game.

  Further, the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be combined, and the following may be performed. For example, a first variable prize device 65 and a second variable prize device 650 are arranged in parallel, and meanwhile, a game ball is meandered horizontally from the second variable prize device 650 toward the first variable prize device 65. A configuration provided with a guidance route for guiding the user to perform the following may be used for the following gaming machines. That is, the number of rounds of the jackpot game includes a first round number (for example, 12 rounds) and a second round number (for example, 15 rounds), and a variable prize winning device provided on the upstream side from the first round to the twelfth round ( The second variable prize device 650) is opened, and from the 13th round to the 15th round, the variable prize device (first variable prize device 65) provided on the downstream side is used for a gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed. Is also good.

  In this configuration, when the variable winning device provided on the upstream side is in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the guidance path and is guided to the variable winning device on the downstream side. This guidance route is configured to meander in the horizontal direction so that a predetermined time (time longer than the interval period, for example, 3 seconds) is required for the game ball to pass. The upstream variable winning device and the downstream variable winning device have a plurality of opening patterns set to be opened in a predetermined order during a single jackpot game, and the opening patterns are set according to the type of jackpot. Is set.

  The open / close status of each variable winning device is configured to be displayed on the display means. That is, the player is configured to be able to grasp the state in which the variable winning device is closed by checking the display means. However, it is displayed so that it cannot be determined whether the closed state is an interval period (during a big hit) or an ending period (a big hit end).

  By using such a configuration, for example, in the interval period when the upstream variable winning device closes and then the downstream variable winning device opens, the display means indicates that the variable winning device has closed. By displaying the effect (closing effect) on the display means, the player plays the game while expecting the jackpot game to be completed or to be continued. Then, when the interval period ends, the variable winning device on the downstream side is opened, and at the same time, an effect (opening effect) indicating that the variable winning device has been opened is displayed on the display means. At the timing when this opening effect is displayed on the display means, the game ball rolling on the guidance route has not reached the variable winning device on the downstream side (the time required for passing the guidance route rather than the interval time). Is longer), while the closing effect is being executed (while the upstream variable winning device is closed), the game balls rolling on the guidance path are reliably won on the downstream variable winning device. It becomes possible. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the waste of the game ball while performing the effect indicating that the variable winning device is closed in the big hit game. When such a configuration is used, a plurality of types of opening patterns of the variable winning devices in the jackpot game may be prepared.

  Hereinafter, Modification Example 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Modification 1 of Second Embodiment>
In the first modification, the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is different from that of the above-described second embodiment, thereby providing a different game from that of the above-described second embodiment. As will be described in detail later, in the present modification, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game mode shifts to the probable change game state ST3, the high level is set only for a predetermined period (during 100 rotations) after the end of the jackpot game. The game is provided with a gaming property (a so-called two-time loop) of winning a jackpot at least twice while maintaining the probability gaming state.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states are set in this modification. The first modification differs from the above-described second embodiment in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal gaming state ST1, the distribution is the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of the jackpot in the probability change game state ST3 will be described.

  During the probable change game state ST3, the real fluctuation target is set in the special figure 2, and if a big hit is won in the special figure 2, a 100% probability of a high probability game state (probable change game state ST3 or latent sure change game state ST2) Move to. In addition, if the probability of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot in the probability changing game state ST3, the game is shifted to the latent probability variation game state ST2 by ending the electric support. While staying in the probability-variation gaming state ST3 (until the electric support ends), the player plays a game while paying attention to winning the next big hit.

  Next, in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the distribution is set such that the return jackpot to shift to the probability changing game state ST3 is 34% and the jackpot to shift (fall) to the time saving game state ST1h is 66%.

  Next, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the distribution is set such that the pullback big hit that shifts to the certainty changing gaming state ST3 becomes 75%, and the big hit that shifts (falls) to the normal game state ST1 becomes 25%. In this time-saving gaming state ST1h, if a special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot, the electric support is terminated and the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. The distribution is set such that the winning rate of the jackpot during this time increases the ratio of shifting to the probable game state ST3, which is the high-probability game state, compared to the normal game state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the first modification, once the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) shifts to the high-probability game state (probable change game state ST3), the special symbol change 100 after the big hit occurs within a predetermined period. ), And then two jackpots are guaranteed while maintaining the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and then has the purpose of winning a jackpot within a predetermined period in a special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state. The game can be continued. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, Modification 2 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Modification 2 of Second Embodiment>
In this modified example 2, the upper limit number (110 times) is provided for the number of games (the number of times of change) in the high-probability game state and the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d is made different from the second embodiment described above. The present invention provides a different game from the second embodiment. As will be described in detail later, in the present modification, when the jackpot is won in the normal game state ST1 and the game mode shifts to the probable change game state ST3, after the jackpot game ends, a specific period after a predetermined period has elapsed (high probability game Only when the game is in the state and during the latent probability changing game state ST2 in which the electric support is completed), the gaming property (so-called two-time loop) of winning a jackpot at least twice while maintaining the high-probability game state is maintained. It is equipped. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a flow in which various game states in this modification are set. The second modification is different from the above-described second embodiment in the distribution value of the jackpot type selection table 202d. The other configurations are the same, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, during the normal gaming state ST1, the distribution is the same as in the above-described second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted. Next, the distribution of the jackpot in the probability change game state ST3 will be described.

  In the second modification, the high-probability gaming state is set to shift (fall) to the low-probability state when the special symbol changes 110 times without winning a jackpot. In this probable change game state ST3, the target of the substantial change is set in Toku-zu 2. When a big hit is won in Toku-zu 2, the probable change game state ST3 is set again with a probability of 70% and low with a probability of 30%. Transition to probability state. If the change of the special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning the jackpot in the probability changing game state ST3, the electronic support is ended, and the game shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2.

  Next, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is a period from the end of the big hit until the 110th rotation when the number of times of the change of the special symbol is started from the 101st rotation and the high-probability game state shifts (falls) to the low-probability state. Is a game state executed. If a jackpot is won during the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state shifts to the high-probability gaming state (probable varying game state ST3 or latent probability varying game state ST2) with a probability of 100%.

  Next, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the distribution is set such that the return jackpot to shift to the certain-change game state ST3 is 90% and the jackpot to shift (fall) to the normal game state ST1 is 10%. In this time-saving gaming state ST1h, if a special symbol exceeds 100 times without winning a jackpot, the electric support is terminated and the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. The distribution is set such that the winning rate of the jackpot during this time increases the ratio of shifting to the probable game state ST3, which is the high-probability game state, compared to the normal game state ST1, which is the same low-probability state.

  As described above, in the second modification, the low-probability state (normal game state ST1) temporarily shifts to the high-probability game state (probable change game state ST3), and thereafter, the number of fluctuations becomes a predetermined number (after the big hit). Only during a specific period (the latent probability changing game state ST2) after the elapse of the special symbol change (100 times), two big hits are guaranteed thereafter while maintaining the high-probability game state. Therefore, the player is not satisfied only with the transition from the low-probability state to the high-probability game state, and thereafter, does not win within a predetermined period in a special symbol game performed in the high-probability game state, and after a predetermined period elapses The game can be continued while having the purpose of winning the jackpot during the specified period. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Hereinafter, Modification 3 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

<Modification 3 of Second Embodiment>
In the third modification, a point that a shortened path 75 is provided as another path to the ball guiding path 72 provided in the right side area of the gaming board 13 of the second embodiment as viewed from the front as another path, and the flowing ball is guided by the ball A distributing mechanism 75a for distributing the route 72 to the shortened route 75, a route for guiding the game balls flowing down the shortened route 75 to the first variable winning device 65, and a route for guiding the game ball to the lower area in front view of the game board 13. And a distributing mechanism 75b for distributing the data. The other configuration is the same as that of the second embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 is an enlarged view of the right side area of the game board 13 of the third modification in a front view. In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state are alternately distributed to the ball guiding path 72 and the shortened path 75 by the distribution mechanism 75a. Here, the distribution mechanism 75a is configured to be able to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise, and is configured such that the rotation range (rotation angle) is restricted by the rotation restriction member. Since the game balls distributed to the ball guiding route 72 flow down the same route as in the above-described second embodiment, the description is omitted.

  On the other hand, the shortened path 75 is configured such that the trajectory of the ball is more linear than the ball guiding path 72, and at least the game balls distributed to the ball guiding path 72 reach the discharging unit 70e. In order to quickly discharge the game ball from the shortened route 75, the time required for the game ball to pass the shortened route is set to 2 seconds. By providing the flow paths of the game balls having different shapes in this way and distributing the game balls to any of the paths by the distribution mechanism, the flow order of the game balls on the game board 13 can be intentionally made different. (It becomes possible to cause the game board 13 to flow down in an order different from the firing order).

  By using such a configuration, for example, in a specific interval period, when a game ball that first passes through the second variable winning device 650 is distributed to the shortened path 75, the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3. If the first specific prize port 65a of the first variable prize device 65 can be awarded within the period, while the game ball that first passes through the second variable prize device 650 is distributed to the ball guiding path 72, the probability change switch It becomes impossible (difficult) to allow the game ball to win the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 within a period in which the game ball can pass through 65e3.

  Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball passes through the probable change switch 65e3 depending on which path the game ball flows down, thereby providing the player with the ability to pass the probable change switch 65e3 by himself / herself. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

  Further, in the present modification, a distribution mechanism 75b for distributing a game ball flowing down the shortened path 75 to a path for guiding the first variable winning device 65 to the first variable winning device 65 and a path for guiding the game ball to a lower area in front view of the game board 13 is provided. ing. This makes it possible to sort out whether or not the game ball flowing down the shortened route 75 is guided to the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the flow path of the game balls on the game board 13 can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game balls.

  Further, even if a distribution mechanism in which the distribution destination is determined according to a predetermined order is used as in the present modification, a plurality of distributions are required until the game ball reaches the first variable winning device 65 having the positive change switch 65e3. Since it is distributed to a plurality of flow-down routes by the mechanism, it is possible to make it difficult to set the state of each distribution mechanism using the shot game balls so as to be a predetermined distribution destination in advance.

  Further, when the first variable winning device 65 is in the closed state, the game balls flowing down the ball guiding path 72 flow down on the first variable winning device 65, come into contact with the distribution mechanism 75b, and rotate the distribution mechanism 75b. It flows down toward the bottom of the game board while changing the state. As a result, the rotation state of the distribution mechanism 75b always changes.

  Note that, in the present modified example, the configuration has been described in which only the game balls flowing down the shortened route 75 reach the distribution mechanism 75b, but the game balls flowing down the ball guidance route 72 may also reach the distribution mechanism 75b. Further, a distribution mechanism 75c (not shown) for distributing only the game balls flowing down the ball guidance path 72 may be separately provided. With this configuration, the flow path of the game ball can be further complicated, and the player can enjoy the flow of the game ball, and can pass through the second variable winning device 650 in the closed state, for example. By using a pachinko machine in which it is determined whether or not a given game ball wins in the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 during a period in which the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, to which path is the game ball distributed? Thus, the possibility of entering the probable change game state can be changed.

  Also, since a plurality of distribution mechanisms are provided on the path where the game balls flow down during a right-handed game other than during the jackpot game, the distribution of each of the distribution mechanisms is performed when a game in which the game balls pass through the certainty change switch 65e3 is performed. It becomes difficult to adjust the position in advance, and the game result can be randomized.

  In this modification, a distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls in two directions is used, but a distribution mechanism for distributing the game balls in three or more directions may be used. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ball flow of the game ball more complicated, and there is an effect that the player can be entertained.

  In this modification, a mechanism for physically distributing game balls is used as a distributing mechanism. However, other configurations may be used, for example, a lottery is performed based on passing through a predetermined area, and the lottery result is obtained. Means for determining the distribution direction may be provided.

  In this modification, the game balls that have passed through the second variable prize device 650 in the closed state reach the distribution mechanism 75a, but are located upstream of the second variable prize device 650 (when the game ball is the second variable prize device 650). (The area before reaching the variable winning device 650) may be configured to reach the distributing mechanism 75a. In this case, the game balls distributed in a predetermined direction by the distributing mechanism 75a are arranged in the second variable winning device. The game sphere that has flowed down toward and is distributed in a direction other than the predetermined direction separately passes through a specific flow-down route (for example, the shortened route 75 or the ball guidance route 72), and the game ball that has passed through the specific flow-down route is The distribution mechanism 75b may be configured to distribute the game ball route to the first variable winning device and the other routes. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed by the distribution mechanism 75a in directions other than the direction of the second variable prize device 650 to reach the first variable prize device 65 side by the distribution mechanism 75b. .

  With this configuration, game balls that have not won the second variable winning device 650 in the open state may be distributed to the first variable winning device 65 in the open state so as to be able to win. There is an effect that unexpected games can be provided.

  In addition, during the big hit game, by configuring so that the timing at which the first variable prize device 65 or the second variable prize device 650 is opened is not notified to the player, the movement of the game ball on the game board by the player Thus, there is an effect that the user can enjoy the game while watching the opening / closing status of each variable winning device.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described second embodiment, a configuration is provided in which four game states having different degrees of advantage are provided, and a configuration in which each game state is switched back and forth upon a jackpot or the like. Then, in the most advantageous latent probability changing game state ST2, it is configured to shift to another game state only when a big hit occurs, and even if a big hit occurs, the latency is again increased after the big hit at a rate of 90%. The probable change game state ST2 is set (loops the latency probable change game state ST2). Further, when shifting from the latent probability changing game state ST2 to another game state, basically, a transition is made to the probability changing game state ST3 which is relatively advantageous for the player. As a result, once it is possible to shift to the latent probability changing game state ST2, when a small win is made by a special symbol lottery, a small win 3 where it is easy to obtain many prize balls is set, and a large number of small wins are set. The jackpot that can acquire a prize ball is repeated at a rate of 90%, which is extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, the game can be performed with one goal of shifting to the advantageous latent probability change state ST2, and the interest of the player can be improved. Further, in the case of transition to the latent probability changing game state ST3, it is possible to give the player greater satisfaction.

  In the second embodiment described above, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the display mode of the roof mode (see FIGS. 70 and 71) when the latent probability changing game state ST2, which is the most advantageous for the player, is set. ), And the lottery result is notified by the contents of the treasure box installed on the roof. That is, if the content of the treasure box is a treasure, the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, and if the content of the treasure box is a monster, the special symbol lottery result is a large hit. As a result, it was possible to provide a player with an easy-to-understand effect.

  In addition to this, in the third embodiment, when a monster appears from the treasure chest in the rooftop mode, during the performance of a battle with the monster, as a type of entertainment effect for indicating the degree of expectation of the battle, An effect that prompts the user to continuously press the button 22 (continuous effect) is configured to be executable. In the continuous hitting effect, an effect of changing the display mode according to the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 is executed. The control is performed such that the display mode is more easily changed as the degree of expectation to win the monster is higher. With this configuration, it is possible for a player who wants to know the degree of expectation of the continuous hitting effect to positively operate the frame button 22.

  Further, in the continuous hitting effect in the present embodiment, the interval at which the player presses the frame button 22 is monitored, and the pressing sound when the frame button 22 is pressed is made different according to the pressing interval. With this configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect variations without changing the display mode.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. And a point that a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 90 and FIG. 91, a continuous-stroke effect in the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the continuous-hit effect is an effect that may be executed during a battle with the appearing monster when a monster appears from the treasure chest in the rooftop mode and the jackpot is hit (see FIG. 71).

  FIG. 90A is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the battle with the monster is started. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), when the jackpot is started and the battle is started, a mode in which the male character holding the sword and the shield and the monster are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. You. In addition, above the male character and the monster, a character “Win the enemy !!” is displayed, and below the character, “If you win, the rooftop mode will continue!” Is displayed. . With these characters, if the monster is won, the player can easily understand that the “roof mode” (the latent probability changing game state ST2) is set again after the big hit. Therefore, the player can be more interested in the battle.

  In the battle effect, various effects such as an effect in which a male character attacks a monster, and conversely, an effect in which a monster attacks a male are performed. In this battle, if the male character can finally defeat the monster, it indicates that it will re-enter the “roof mode” after the jackpot, and if it succumbs to the monster's attack and escapes, Mode (1F) ". Also, when the player makes a left hit during the rooftop mode and wins the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol, and the player wins the jackpot in which the V operation of “V impossible” is set, or the player launches a ball during the jackpot. When the ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, such as when there is no hit, an effect in which the male character is defeated by the monster is executed. With these effects, the player can clearly understand the game state (mode) after the end of the big hit.

  FIG. 90 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the continuous hitting effect is executed. Whether or not to perform a continuous hit production during the battle performance is determined at the start of the jackpot in the “roof mode”. Although the details will be described later, the rate of execution of the continuous tapping performance is higher when the “roof mode” is reset than when the “tower search mode (1F)” is set after the end of the jackpot. It is configured to be. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the “roof mode” will be reset when a repeated hit effect occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (b), when the continuous hitting production is started, the sword of the male character changes to a form wearing an aura. In addition, above the man, a character “Get motivated by repeated hits !!” appears, and an image simulating the frame button 22 is displayed below the display area where the character is displayed. With these characters and images, the player can easily understand that the frame button 22 should be hit repeatedly. In addition, below the image imitating the frame button 22, a display area with the letters “spirit Lv1” appears. Although the details will be described later, the value of the spirit Lv may increase in accordance with the number of times the player repeatedly hits (operates) the frame button 22. In addition, an effect is performed in which the spirit Lv rises and the amount of aura of the matter that the character has also increases. This allows the player to easily recognize that the attack power of the character increases in accordance with the number of consecutive hits. Therefore, the frame button 22 can be more continuously hit (operated).

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b), of an effect mode according to the interval between successive hits performed by the player. FIG. 91 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the spirit Lv rises in a state where the interval between successive hits is detected to be short (5 times or more in 2 seconds). is there. As shown in FIG. 91 (a), when the spirit Lv rises from Lv1 to Lv2, the aura covered by the male sword increases as a whole, and the characters in the display area displayed on the right side of the male character are displayed. , Is updated to “spirit Lv2”. In addition, when shifting to a higher Lv in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the player, an effect is performed in which the amount of aura increases in proportion to Lv.

  Also, when the interval between successive hits is relatively short, a relatively short pressing sound (sound effect) of “da” is output every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, as shown in FIG. You. As a result, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the sound is output as "dadadada ...". By outputting a relatively short sound as a pressing sound when the continuous hit interval is short, the possibility that a new operation of the frame button 22 is detected before the output of the pressing sound is completed is reduced, and the player Each time the button 22 is pressed (operated), a pressing sound can be output.

  FIG. 91 (b) shows a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the spirit Lv rises in a state where the pressing interval of the frame button 22 is detected to be relatively long (two times or less in two seconds). FIG. As shown in FIG. 91 (b), if the spirit Lv rises while the interval between successive hits is relatively long, the aura concentrates on the point of the sword, and the character in the display area displayed on the right side of the male character is changed to " "Lv2". In addition, when shifting to a higher Lv in accordance with the number of consecutive hits of the player, an effect is performed in which the amount of aura concentrated on the sword tip increases in proportion to Lv.

  When the interval between successive hits is relatively long, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), a relatively long pressing sound "Don" is output every time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. As a result, when the player repeatedly hits the frame button 22, the sound is output as "don't don't do ...". If the interval between successive hits is long, the possibility of detecting a new operation during the output of the press sound is low even if the long press sound is set. Therefore, it is possible to set a pressing sound of a length corresponding to the continuous hit interval of the player, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the continuous striking effect ends, an attack is performed on the monster according to the aura mode (spirit Lv) at the end of the effect. The higher the spirit Lv, the greater the damage to the monster when the monster is hit, and the easier it is to defeat the monster. Therefore, in the case where a continuous-hit effect has occurred, the player can actively operate the frame button 22 in order to raise the spirit Lv.

  Further, in the third embodiment, two types of sounds, ie, a normal voice output pattern and a chance-up pattern, are provided for the pressing sound in response to the pressing of the frame button 22 at the time of the continuous hit effect. The normal voice output pattern is output without a time lag when the press on the frame button 22 is detected, whereas the chance up pattern is a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) after the press on the frame button 22 is detected. A pressing sound is output with a delay of (seconds). Thus, the timing of the pressing operation and the timing of outputting the pressing sound can be shifted, so that the player can easily recognize that an effect different from the normal effect is being performed.

  The normal pattern and the chance up pattern will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a time change between a player's pressing timing and a pressing sound output period in a continuous hitting effect in which a normal pressing sound pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), when a normal voice output pattern is set, when a press is detected, a press sound having a volume of 70% is immediately output. Thus, the pressing sound can be output in conjunction with the pressing of the frame button 22, so that the effect can be enhanced. Further, when a press is detected during the output of the press sound, a new press sound is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the repeated output of the pressing sound.

  FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing a time change between a player's pressing timing and a pressing sound output period in a continuous-stroke effect in which a chance-up pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 92 (b), when the continuous-stroke effect of the chance-up pattern is set, when a press is detected, a press sound is output after a 0.1-second time lag. Thus, the timing of the pressing operation and the timing of outputting the pressing sound can be shifted, so that the player can easily recognize that an effect different from the normal effect is being performed. Further, similarly to the normal pattern, when a press is detected during output of a press sound, a new press sound is not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the repeated output of the pressing sound.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222.

  As shown in FIG. 93A, the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first and second embodiments described above (see FIG. 21A). The difference is that a continuous-hit effect selection table 222b, a pressing sound selection table 222c, and a rank-up number selection table 222d are added.

  The continuous-stroke effect selection table 222b is a data table used to determine whether or not to perform the continuous-stroke effect, and to determine the effect type of the continuous-stroke effect when performing the continuous-stroke effect. Details of the continuous-hit effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (a), in the continuous-stroke effect selection table 222b, the effect type of the continuous-stroke effect is defined in association with each value range of the effect counter 223j. In addition, the continuous-hit effect selection table 222b includes a table for the jackpot type of jackpot E (after the jackpot is “tower search mode (1F)”) and a table for the jackpot type of jackpot F (after the jackpot is “rooftop mode”). Are provided.

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot E, the effect counter value 223j is set in the range of “0 to 49” with the effect type “no continuous hit effect”. For this reason, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 49” in the determination of the possibility of the execution of the continuous hitting effect executed at the start of the big hit E, the continuous hitting is performed in the battle effect executed at the big hit E. Direction is not executed. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, 50 random numbers (counter values) for which "no continuous hitting effect" is selected are set, so the "roof mode" has a big hit. In the case of E, the rate at which the consecutive hit effect is not executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 50% (50/100).

  In addition, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “50 to 79”, “normal A” is defined in association with the effect type. Here, “normal A” is a continuous-stroke effect in which the prescribed number of times (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) until the Lv is increased is the largest (the Lv is unlikely to increase) among the continuous-stroke effects in the normal mode. Also, no matter how many times the player hits continuously, the player only rises to Lv4 (Lv does not reach MAX). As described above, as the Lv increases, the attack power of the male character increases, and the degree of expectation of defeating the monster increases. Therefore, “normal A”, in which Lv is unlikely to increase, is the production with the lowest degree of expectation of defeating the monster. . Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, 30 random numbers (counter values) for which “normal A” is selected are set. In this case, the rate at which the "normal A" continuous hit effect is executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 30% (30/100).

  In addition, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “80 to 94”, “normal B” is defined in association with the effect type. Here, “Normal B” has a smaller specified number of times (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) until the Lv is increased in the continuous striking effect in the normal mode (“Normal A”). Is also expected to beat the monster). Further, similarly to “normal A”, Lv does not reach MAX. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, 15 random number values (counter values) for which "normal B" is selected are set. In this case, the ratio of the “normal B” continuous hit effect in the battle effect during the jackpot is 15% (15/100).

  In addition, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “95 to 99”, “chance up A” is defined in association with the effect type. Here, the “chance up A” is such that the number of times (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed) until the Lv is increased in the continuous striking effect in which the chance up pattern is set is compared with “chance up B” described later. It is a lot of continuous hit production. In addition, similar to the “normal A” and the “normal B”, the Lv does not reach the MAX, and is a continuous striking effect. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, five random numbers (counter values) for which "chance up A" is selected are set. In the case of E, the rate at which the continuous hit effect of “chance up A” is executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 5% (5/100).

  When the jackpot type is the jackpot F, the effect counter value 223j is set in the range of “0 to 24” to the effect type “no continuous hit effect”. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, 25 random numbers (counter values) for which “no continuous hit effect” is selected are set, so the “roof mode” has a big hit. In the case of F, the rate at which the continuous hit effect is not executed in the battle effect during the jackpot is 25% (25/100).

  In addition, for the range of the effect counter 223j in the range of “25 to 39”, “normal A” is defined in association with the effect type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, fifteen random values (counter values) for which “normal A” is selected are set. In this case, the ratio of the “normal A” continuous hit effect in the battle effect during the jackpot is 15% (15/100).

  Further, for the range of the effect counter 223j in the range of “40 to 74”, “normal B” is defined in association with the effect type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, 35 random numbers (counter values) for which “Normal B” is selected are set. In this case, the rate at which the "normal B" continuous hit effect is executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 35% (35/100).

  In addition, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “75 to 79”, “normal C” is defined in association with the effect type. This “normal C” is a continuous-stroke effect in which the easiness of increasing Lv is equal to “normal B” in Lv1 to Lv3, and there is a possibility of increasing from Lv4 to the maximum Lv (MAX). The only possibility that Lv will be MAX in the continuous hit production is "Normal C" and "Chance Up B" selected in the case of the jackpot F. Therefore, when the spirit Lv rises to MAX in the continuous hit production Thus, before confirming the result of the battle, the player can be notified that the current jackpot is the jackpot F. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the “roof mode” will be continued earlier than when the result of the battle is obtained, so that the player can confirm the remaining battle effects with confidence. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, five random numbers (counter values) for which "normal C" is selected are set, so the big hit F in the "roof mode" is set. In this case, the rate at which the “normal C” continuous hit effect is executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 5% (5/100).

  In addition, for the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “80 to 97”, “chance up A” is defined in association with the effect type. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, 13 random numbers (counter values) for which "chance up A" is selected are set. In the case of F, the rate at which the continuous hit effect of “chance up A” is executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 13% (13/100).

  For the range of the effect counter 223j in the range of “98, 99”, “chance up B” is defined in association with the effect type. This “chance up B” is a continuous hit production in which Lv1 to Lv3 have the same ease of increasing Lv as “chance up A” and may rise from Lv4 to the maximum Lv (MAX). . Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be taken by the value of the effect counter 223j, two random values (counter values) for selecting “CHANCE UP B” are set, so the “roof mode” has a big hit. In the case of F, the rate at which the continuous hit effect of “chance up A” is executed in the battle effect during the big hit is 2% (2/100).

  As described above, in the case of the jackpot F, the selection ratio of “no continuous hit effect” is lower than that of the jackpot E (from 50% to 25%). Therefore, at the time when the repeated hitting effect occurs, the player can have a sense of expectation of the jackpot F (the roof mode is continued). In addition, the jackpot F has a lower selection rate of “Normal A” and a higher selection rate of “Normal B” and “Chance Up A”, so it is felt that Lv tends to increase. If the user feels that the pressing sound is delayed with respect to the pressing of the frame button 22, it can be determined that the possibility is not "normal A", and the player is expected to continue the "roof mode". You can hug me.

  When the jackpot F is reached, “normal C” or “chance up B”, which is not selected in the jackpot E, may be selected. Only when these “normal C” or “chance up B” is selected, there is a possibility that the enthusiasm Lv may rise to MAX in the continuous-stroke effect. Therefore, if the spirit Lv rises to MAX as a result of repeated hits by the player, it is determined at that time that the jackpot F is reached (reentry to the “rooftop mode” after the jackpot), and the player is pleased. Can be made. As described above, the distribution of the effect types selected according to whether the jackpot is the jackpot E or the jackpot F is made different. Can be predicted. Therefore, the player can be made to think that he or she wants to perform a continuous hit during the continuous hit effect, and thus the player's willingness to participate can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 93 (a), the description will be continued. The pressing sound selection table 222c is a data table used to select a pressing sound to be output when the frame button 22 is pressed. Details of the pressing sound selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the pressing sound selection table 222c.

  As shown in FIG. 94B, the press sound selection table 222c defines the type of press sound in association with the effect type of the continuous hit effect and each continuous hit interval. Here, although details will be described later, the continuous hit interval means an interval at which the player presses the frame button 22 during the continuous hit effect, and is indicated by data (01H to 03H) stored in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p. It is. “01H” is data corresponding to the shortest continuous hit interval, and 03H is data corresponding to the longest continuous hit interval.

  In the case where the continuous striking effect of a normal pattern (usually one of A to C) is being executed, if the continuous striking interval is “01H” (the shortest continuous striking interval), “no short interval delay” ( FIG. 91 (a)) is selected. When the continuous hitting interval is “02H” (intermediate continuous hitting interval), “no normal interval delay” is selected as the pressing sound, and when the continuous hitting interval is “03H” (longest continuous hitting interval), the pressing sound is selected. "No long interval delay" (see FIG. 91 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the continuous-stroke effect (either chance-up A or C) of the chance-up pattern is being executed, if the continuous-stroke interval is “01H” (the shortest continuous-stroke interval), “short interval delay” is used as a pressing sound. When "Yes" is selected and the continuous hitting interval is "02H" (intermediate continuous hitting interval), "Normal interval delay is selected" as the pressing sound and the continuous hitting interval is "03H" (longest continuous hitting interval) "Long interval delay" is selected as the pressing sound. Thus, in the case of the chance up pattern, the pressing of the frame button 22 and the timing of generation of the pressing sound can be shifted, so that the player can easily recognize the chance up pattern.

  Returning to FIG. 93 (a), the description will be continued. The rank-up number selection table 222d is a data table that defines the number of presses until the next Lv is raised during the execution of the continuous-stroke effect for each effect type and continuous-stroke interval. Details of this rank-up number selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the rank-up number selection table 222d.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in this rank-up number selection table 222d, the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed until the rank is upgraded from each Lv to the next Lv is defined for each effect type and continuous hit interval. . Specifically, when the effect type is “normal A” and the continuous hit interval is “01H” (the shortest interval), 10 consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other. The number of consecutive hits for ranking from Lv3 to Lv3 is defined in association with 20 times, and the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is defined in association with 20 times. On the other hand, the number of times of ranking up from Lv4 to MAX Lv is not defined. Therefore, no matter how many times the player presses the frame button 22 in Lv4, no rank-up occurs.

  Further, when the effect type is “normal A” and the continuous hit interval is “02H” (intermediate interval), eight consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3. Fifteen consecutive hits for ranking are defined in association with each other, and fifteen consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, as in the case where the continuous hit interval is “01H”, the number of times of rank up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not specified.

  When the effect type is “normal A” and the continuous hit interval is “03H” (the longest interval), five consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3. Ten consecutive hits for ranking are defined in association with each other, and ten consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, as in the case where the continuous hit interval is “01H, 02H”, the number of times of rank up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not specified.

  In this way, even for the same effect type, the number of consecutive hits until rank-up occurs varies according to the consecutive strike interval, and the shorter the consecutive strike interval, the greater the number of consecutive strikes required for rank-up. With such a configuration, a player who is not good at repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 at a high speed can rank up with a small number of continuous hits, and a player who is good at continuous hitting can increase the rank with a large number of continuous hits. Since the rank can be raised, the development degree of the performance (rank up) can be adjusted to the skill of the player. Therefore, it is possible to impart a fair opportunity to rank up regardless of the player.

  When the effect type is “Normal B” and the continuous hit interval is “01H” (the shortest interval), 10 consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association and ranked from Lv2 to Lv3. 15 times are associated with each other, and 15 times are associated with each other as the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not defined.

  When the effect type is “Normal B” and the continuous hit interval is “02H” (intermediate interval), eight consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3. Ten consecutive hits for ranking are defined in association with each other, and ten consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not defined.

  When the effect type is “Normal B” and the continuous hit interval is “03H” (longest interval), five consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3. Eight times are associated and defined as the number of consecutive hits for ranking, and eight times are associated and defined as the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not defined.

  As described above, when the effect type is “Normal B”, the number of consecutive hits for ranking up is set to be smaller than that in “Normal A”, so that the rank is easily upgraded. This makes it possible to predict the effect type of the continuous hit effect from the ease of rank-up. As described above, since “Normal B” is more likely to be selected in the jackpot F than “Normal A”, if the number of rank-ups is small, the expectation that the “roof mode” will continue is increased. Can be.

  When the effect type is “normal C” and the continuous hit interval is “01H” (the shortest interval), 10 consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and rank from Lv2 to Lv3. 15 times as the number of consecutive hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4, and 30 as the number of consecutive hits to rank up from Lv4 to MAX Lv. The times are prescribed.

  When the effect type is “normal C” and the continuous hit interval is “02H” (intermediate interval), eight consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3. The number of consecutive hits for ranking is defined as 10 times in association with each other, the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is defined in association with 10 times, and the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX. Is defined as 20 times.

  When the effect type is “Normal C” and the continuous hit interval is “03H” (the longest interval), five consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3. Eight times are associated and defined as the number of consecutive hits for ranking, eight times are associated and defined as the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4, and the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX Is defined 15 times.

  In this manner, when the effect type of the continuous hit effect is “normal C”, the rank can be raised to Lv of MAX according to the number of continuous hits. As described above, Lv may rank up to MAX only in the case of the jackpot F. Therefore, when Lv ranks up to MAX, it is determined that the jackpot is F. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm the remaining battle effects with peace of mind.

  When the effect type is “chance up A” and the continuous hit interval is “01H” (the shortest interval), eight consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and ranked from Lv2 to Lv3. Twelve times are defined in association with each other as the number of consecutive hits, and twelve times are defined in association with the number of consecutive hits to rank up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times for ranking up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not specified.

  Further, when the effect type is “chance up A” and the continuous hit interval is “02H” (intermediate interval), six consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with Lv2 to Lv3. 8 are associated with each other as the number of consecutive hits for ranking No., and eight times are associated and defined as the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times for ranking up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX is not specified.

  Further, when the effect type is “chance up A” and the consecutive hit interval is “03H” (longest interval), four consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3 6 are associated with each other as the number of consecutive hits for ranking No. 6, and six times are associated and defined as the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4. On the other hand, the number of times to rank up from Lv4 to MAX is not specified.

  As described above, in the chance up A, the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed and the output timing of the pressing sound are shifted, and the number of continuous hits required for rank up is set to be smaller than that of the normal A to C. Thus, it is possible to predict whether or not the chance is up based on the number of times of pressing until the rank is increased, the generation timing of the pressing sound, and the like.

  When the effect type is “chance up B” and the consecutive hit interval is “01H” (the shortest interval), eight consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and ranked from Lv2 to Lv3. The number of consecutive hits for performing the consecutive hits is defined as 12 times, the number of consecutive hits for increasing the rank from Lv3 to Lv4 is defined as 12 times, and the number of consecutive hits for increasing the rank from Lv4 to MAX is 20 times. Is stipulated.

  When the effect type is “chance up B” and the continuous hit interval is “02H” (intermediate interval), six consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3 The number of consecutive hits for ranking up is set to eight times, the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is set to eight, and the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv4 to MAX Fifteen times are prescribed.

  Further, when the effect type is “chance up B” and the continuous hit interval is “03H” (longest interval), four consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv1 to Lv2 are defined in association with each other, and Lv2 to Lv3 The number of consecutive hits for ranking up is defined as six times, the number of consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv3 to Lv4 is defined as six times, and the consecutive hits for ranking up from Lv4 to Lv of MAX. Ten times are defined as the number of times.

  In this manner, when the effect type of the repeated hitting effect is “chance up B”, the rank can be raised up to Lv of MAX according to the number of hitting times. As described above, Lv may rank up to MAX only in the case of the jackpot F. Therefore, when Lv ranks up to MAX, it is determined that the jackpot is F. Therefore, it is possible for the player to confirm the remaining battle effects with peace of mind.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 93B, the RAM 223 according to the third embodiment is different from the RAM 223 according to the first and second embodiments in that a continuous hitting interval storage area 223p, a pressing number counter 223q, and a reference number of times. The difference is that a storage area 223r, a level counter 223s, a sound output flag 223t, and a back type counter 223y are provided.

  The continuous hit interval storage area 223p is, as described above, a storage area for storing data corresponding to the interval between successive hits performed by the player in the continuous hit effect. More specifically, if the data stored in the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p is "01H", it indicates that the continuous hitting interval is short (five or more hits in 2 seconds), and if the data is "02H". It indicates that the continuous hit interval is normal (three or four continuous hits in two seconds). If "03H", the continuous hit interval is long (the number of continuous hits per two seconds is two or less). There is). The type of pressing sound and the number of rank-ups are selected based on the data stored in the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p. Each time two seconds elapse in the continuous hitting effect, the data in the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p is updated according to the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 during the two seconds (see S2911 in FIG. 98).

  The number-of-presses counter 223q is a counter for counting the number of times the player has pressed down (operated) the frame button 22 in one continuous hit effect. The initial value of the number-of-presses counter 223q is set to 0, and is reset to 0 even at the start of the continuous-stroke effect (see S2903 in FIG. 98). Then, every time the press of the frame button 22 is detected during the continuous hitting effect, 1 is added to the value (see S2806 in FIG. 97). Based on the value of the number-of-presses counter 223q and the reference number stored in a reference number storage area 223r, which will be described later, it is determined whether rank up is possible in each Lv.

  The reference number storage area 223r is a storage area for storing the number of times serving as a reference for determining whether or not to rank up. The reference count storage area 223r is set to 0 as an initial value, and is reset to 0 at the start of the continuous-stroke effect (see S2903 in FIG. 98). Then, every time a rank-up occurs, the value of the number-of-presses counter 223q at that time is stored. When determining whether or not to rank up, the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed since the current Lv is reached, based on the difference between the value of the number-of-presses counter 223q and the reference number stored in the reference number storage area 223r. Is determined, and whether or not the rank can be increased is determined by comparison with the rank increase number selection table 222d.

  The level counter 223s is a counter whose value is updated according to the current spirit Lv. The initial value of the level counter 223s is set to 0, and the value is incremented by 1 each time a rank-up occurs in a continuous striking effect (see S2812 in FIG. 97). The current Lv can be determined from the value of the level counter 223s.

  The sound output flag 223t is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing sound is being output in the continuous hitting effect. While the sound output flag 223t is on, the pressing sound is not output even if the frame button 22 is pressed. Thereby, even if the pressing interval of the frame button 22 is short, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the conflict of the pressing sounds, so that the pressing sounds can always be output normally.

  The back type counter 223y is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the back type. In the present embodiment, each time an operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the back image displayed on the back of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. The back type counter 223y is used to identify the changed back type when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected. The value of the back type counter 223y is updated by one each time an operation on the frame button 22 is detected during a period in which the back type can be changed. When the value of the back type counter 223y is further updated in the state of the maximum value (for example, 3), the value returns to 0. Thereby, the predetermined number of back types can be sequentially switched each time the frame button 22 is pressed by the player.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The illustration and description of the same processes as those of the first and second embodiments are omitted, and only different control processes are illustrated and explained.

  First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The main process 3 (see FIG. 96) is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 53). FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 3. The main process 3 (see FIG. 96) in this embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S2121 to S2123 are added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the first embodiment are executed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In the main process 3 (see FIG. 96), in the process of S2106, after the held number display update process is executed, the operation on the frame button 22 is monitored instead of the operation input monitoring / effect process (S2107 in FIG. 53). Then, the operation input monitoring and effect processing 3 for setting the effect corresponding to the pressing timing is executed (S2121). The details of the operation input monitoring / production process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, similar to the above-described main process (see FIG. 53), after performing the processes of S2108 to S2110, a continuous hit effect control process for performing various controls related to the continuous hit effect is executed (S2122). The details of this continuous hit production control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the continuous-stroke effect control process (S2122) is completed, or if it is determined in the process of S2101 that 1 millisecond has not elapsed since the previous process of S2101 (S2101: No), the command determination in the main process is performed. Command determination processing 3 is executed instead of the processing (see S2111 in FIG. 53) (S2123). The details of the command determination process 3 will be described later with reference to FIG. After the end of the command determination process 3 (S2123), the process proceeds to S2112 and subsequent processes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, a description will be given of the operation input monitoring / production process 3 (S2121), which is one of the main processes 3 (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation input monitoring / production process 3.

  When the operation input monitoring / production process 3 (S2121) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 is detected (S2801), and if it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 is not detected ( S2801: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2801 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S2801: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current time is the back type change inhibition period (S2802). Here, the change prohibition period of the back type is a period during which the change of the back image is prohibited even when the frame button 22 is pressed, and includes, for example, a state of a big hit or a continuous hit effect. In the processing of S2802, if it is determined that the current time is not the change prohibition period of the back type (S2802: No), the value of the back type counter 223y is updated (S2803), and the back type corresponding to the updated counter value is changed. This is set (S2804), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2802, when it is determined that the current time is the change prohibition period of the back type (S2802: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is the execution period of the continuous striking effect (S2805). Here, it is determined whether or not the execution period of the continuous hit effect is based on the timer value of the continuous hit period timer. At the start of the continuous-stroke effect, a timer value corresponding to the effect period is set in the continuous-stroke period timer, and is updated periodically until the timer value becomes zero. If the value of the continuous-stroke period timer is 1 or more, it indicates that the continuous-stroke effect is being executed, and if it is 0, it indicates that it is outside the continuous-stroke effect execution period. In the process of S2805, the value of the continuous-stroke period timer is read, and it is determined whether or not the continuous-stroke effect is in the execution period based on whether or not the value is 1 or more.

  In the process of S2805, if it is determined that the current time is outside the execution period of the continuous striking effect (S2805: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the continuous hitting period (S2805: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the press frequency counter 223q (S2806), and the value of the press frequency counter 223q after the addition and the reference frequency storage area 223r. The difference from the value stored in is calculated (S2807). Next, among the rank-up times defined in the rank-up number selection table 222d, the rank up corresponding to the effect type of the current continuous hit effect, the current Lv, and the continuous hit interval of the player (data of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p). The number of times is compared with the difference calculated in the processing of S2807, and it is determined whether or not the difference is equal to or more than the number of rank-ups (S2808).

  In the process of S2808, if it is determined that the difference between the value of the number-of-presses counter 223q and the value stored in the reference number storage area 223r is less than the number of rank-ups (S2808: No), this pressing operation is performed. Since Lv does not increase, processing of S2809 to S2811 for setting a pressing sound for pressing the frame button 22 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the sound output flag 223t is on (S2809). If it is determined that the sound output flag 223t is off (S2809: No), the pressing sound is output. Next, the pressing sound corresponding to the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is selected from the pressing sound selection table 222c (see FIG. 94B) (S2810), and the selected pressing sound is determined. Is set (S2811), and this process ends.

  As described above, different press sounds are selected from the press sound selection table 222c (see FIG. 94 (b)) according to the continuous hit interval of the player (the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p). That is, a pressing sound with a short output period is selected for a player with a short continuous hit interval, and a pressing sound with a long output period is selected for a player with a long continuous hit interval. As a result, it is possible to output the pressing sound of the maximum length in the continuous striking interval different for each player. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2809, if it is determined that the sound output flag 223t is on (S2809: Yes), the processes of S2810 and S2811 are skipped, and the process ends. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the repeated output of the pressing sound, and thus it is possible to prevent (suppress) an unnatural pressing sound.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2808, the difference between the value of the number-of-presses counter 223q and the value stored in the reference number storage area 223r is equal to or greater than the number of rank-ups corresponding to the current effect type, current Lv, and continuous hit interval. If it is determined that there is (S2808: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the level counter 223s (S2812), and a level-up effect and a level-up sound corresponding to the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p are set (S2813). The sound output flag 223t is set on (S2814), and the value of the number-of-times-of-press counter 223q is overwritten on the reference number storage area 223r (S2815). After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a description will be given of the continuous hit effect control process (S2122), which is one of the main processes 3 (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the content of the continuous-hit effect control process.

  In the continuous-stroke effect control process (see FIG. 98, S2122), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the continuous-stroke effect (S2901). If it is determined that the current time is the start timing of the continuous striking effect (S2901: Yes), a value corresponding to the current continuous striking effect is set to the value of the continuous striking period timer for measuring the execution period of the continuous striking effect (S2902). ), The value of the number-of-presses counter 223q and the number of times stored in the reference number storage area 223r are each reset to 0 (S2903), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2901 that the current time is not the start timing of the continuous striking effect (S2901: No), then it is determined whether or not the sound output flag 223t is on (S2904). If it is determined in the processing of S2904 that the sound output flag 223t is ON (S2904: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is the sound output end timing (S2905). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the sound output (S2905: Yes), the sound output flag 223t is set to off (S2906), and the process shifts to S2907.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2904 that the sound output flag 223t is off (S2904: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S2905 that it is not the sound output end timing (S2905: No), the processing of S2906 is stopped. The processing shifts to S2907 without executing the processing.

  In the process of S2907, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous-stroke period timer is greater than 0 (whether or not the continuous-stroke effect is being executed) (S2907). If it is determined that the value of the continuous beating period timer is 0 (S2907: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2907, when it is determined that the value of the continuous-stroke period timer is larger than 0 (S2907: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous-stroke period timer (S2908). It is determined whether it is a multiple of seconds (S2909). When it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the effect is not a multiple of 2 seconds (S2909: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2909, if it is determined that the elapsed time from the start of the effect is a multiple of 2 seconds (S2909: Yes), a process for determining the pressing interval of the player is performed. Specifically, the number of presses for two seconds is specified based on the value of the press counter 223q (S2910), and the data in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is updated according to the specified press count (S2911). Then, the present process ends. In the process of S2911, if the player has pressed the frame button 22 five or more times in two seconds, “01H” is set in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p, and the number of times of pressing (the number of continuous hits) in two seconds is three. If the number is four or four, "02H" is set in the continuous-hit interval storage area 223p, and if the number of presses for two seconds (the number of consecutive hits) is two or less, "02H" is set in the continuous-hit interval storage area 223p. 03H ”is stored. According to the value set in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p, the number of rank-ups and the type of pressing sound can be switched. Thereby, a pressing sound with a short output period is selected for a player with a short continuous hit interval, and a pressing sound with a long output period is selected for a player with a long continuous hit interval. As a result, it is possible to output the pressing sound of the maximum length in the continuous striking interval different for each player. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced. In addition, by increasing the number of consecutive hits required for rank increase as the consecutive hit interval is shorter, a player who is not good at repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 at a high speed can rank up with a small number of consecutive strikes. A player who is good at repeated hits can be ranked up with a large number of repeated hits. Therefore, the degree of development (ranking up) of the effect can be adjusted to the skill of the player, so that a rank-up opportunity can be imparted irrespective of the skill of the player.

  Next, a command determination process 3 (S2123), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 3 (S2123). The command determination process 3 (see S2123 in FIG. 99) according to the present embodiment is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see S2111 in FIG. 54) in the first and second embodiments, and the main control device 110 This is a process for determining the command received from the CPU and executing the corresponding control.

  In the command determination processing 3 (see FIG. 99) in the third embodiment, in each of steps S2201 to S2216, the same processing as the command determination processing (see FIG. 54) in the first and second embodiments is executed, respectively. Is done. In the command determination process 3 (S2123) of the third embodiment, in the process of S2213, when it is determined that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), it is determined whether the opening command has been received. (S2221). In the process of S2221, if it is determined that the opening command has been received (S2221: Yes), an opening command process for setting a jackpot opening is executed (S2222), and thereafter, the present process ends. Details of the opening command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2221 that the opening command has not been received (S2221: No), the processing of S2216 is executed in the same manner as the command determination processing of the first embodiment (see S2111 in FIG. 54). This processing ends.

  Next, an opening command process (S2222), which is one of the command determination processes 3 (see S2123 in FIG. 99) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the opening command processing (S2222).

  In the opening command process (S2222), first, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a jackpot that has been won in the “roof mode” (the latent probability changing game state ST2) (S3001). In the process of S3001, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot in the “rooftop mode” (S3001: No), the process proceeds to S3006.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3001 that the current jackpot is a jackpot that has been won in the “roof mode” (S3001: Yes), the continuous-hit effect selection table 222b is read (S3002), and the battle executed during the jackpot The effect type of the effect is selected (S3003).

  As described above, when the jackpot type is the jackpot E, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 49”, “No continuous impact effect” is selected as the effect type from the continuous impact effect selection table 222b, and “ If it is within the range of "50-79", select "Normal A" as the effect type, if "80-94", select "Normal B" as the effect type, and if it is "95-99", It is configured to select “chance up A” as the effect type. In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot F, if the value of the effect counter 223j is in the range of “0 to 24”, “no continuous hit effect” is selected as the effect type, and the effect type is in the range of “25 to 39”. If so, select "Normal A" as the effect type, if "40-74", select "Normal B" as the effect type, and if it is within the range of "75-79", select "Normal A" as the effect type. "Normal C" is selected, and if it is within the range of "80 to 97", "chance up A" is selected as the effect type. If "99, 98", "chance up B" is selected as the effect type. It is configured to be.

  Next, it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous-stroke effect (whether or not a process other than “no continuous-stroke effect” is selected in the process of S3003) (S3004). When it is determined that the continuous hit effect is not to be executed (S3004: No), the process proceeds to S3006. On the other hand, in the process of S3004, if it is determined that the continuous-stroke effect is to be executed (either “normal A to C” or “chance up A, B” has been selected as the effect type) (S3004: Yes), In the battle effect, the timing to start the continuous hit effect is set (S3005), and the process proceeds to S3006. The start timing set here is referred to in the process of S2901 in the above-described continuous-stroke effect control process (see FIG. 98). If it is determined that the start timing of the continuous-stroke effect has been reached (S2901: Yes), the continuous-stroke effect is started. The processing of S2902 and S2903 is executed.

  In the processing of S3006, an opening command for display is set according to the effect type of the big hit (S3006), and then this processing ends. In the processing of S3006, the opening effect in which the effect indicating the start of the battle effect is executed is set in the “roof mode” (the latent probability changing game state ST2), and the normal (big hit) is set in another game state. Opening production (of a mode to congratulate the child). This makes it possible to execute an opening effect in an appropriate mode according to the gaming state (mode) at the time of the jackpot.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured to be able to execute an effect (continuous hit effect) that prompts the user to continuously press the frame button 22 as a kind of entertainment effect. In the continuous hitting effect, an effect of changing the display mode according to the number of times the player has pressed the frame button 22 is executed. The control is performed such that the display mode is more easily changed as the degree of expectation to win the monster is higher. With this configuration, it is possible for a player who wants to know the degree of expectation of the continuous hitting effect to positively operate the frame button 22.

  Further, in the continuous hitting effect in the present embodiment, the interval at which the player presses the frame button 22 is monitored, and the pressing sound (effect mode) for pressing the frame button 22 is varied according to the pressing interval. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the effect variations.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number of presses until the effect mode (Lv) is increased is made variable in accordance with the continuous hit interval of the continuous impact effect. That is, when a player with a long interval between successive hits is playing a game, the specified number of times until the Lv-up is reduced is reduced. Conversely, when a player with a short interval between successive hits is playing a game, the Lv-up is increased Is increased. Thus, the degree of development can be made uniform according to the time of performing the continuous hitting operation, regardless of the skill of the player. Therefore, even a player with low skill in continuous hitting can view the advanced effect, so that he can actively participate in the continuous hit effect regardless of the skill of continuous hitting.

  In the third embodiment, different sound data such as a sound of “da” and a sound of “don” is output as a pressing sound in accordance with the continuous hit interval of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the pressing sound may be made different by using only the sound “da” having a relatively short output period and changing the number of times the pressing sound is output each time the pressing is detected once. Specifically, for example, when the continuous hitting interval is “01H”, the sound “da” is output only once, and when it is “02H”, the sound “da” is output two consecutive times ( In the case of "03H", the sound of "da" may be output three consecutive times (the pressing sound of "dada" may be set). With such a configuration, all of the sound effects can be generated from the audio data for outputting the sound “da”, so that the audio data can be reduced.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment described above, the interval between successive hits (the number of consecutive hits per two seconds) executed by the player in the continuous hit effect is monitored, and the pressing sound when the frame button 22 is pressed is made different according to the continuous hitting interval. And had

  On the other hand, in the present modification, the same data (voice file) is used as the pressing sound, and the length of the echo generated in response to the pressing sound is made variable. That is, the echo is made longer if the continuous hit interval is longer, and the echo is shorter if the continuous hit interval is shorter. As a result, the player can be made to hear even the echo of the pressing sound regardless of the continuous hit interval.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in the configuration in that the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. , And a part of the process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 101, a pressing sound in the present modification will be described. FIG. 101 (a) is a diagram showing the time change of the audio output when the continuous hit interval is short (when the data stored in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is "01H"). As shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the continuous hit interval is short, every time the press of the frame button 22 is detected, the sound “bashi” is output at a volume of 70%, and then 0.01 seconds. A sound of “bashi” having a volume of 40% is output as an echo sound after an interval, and a sound of “bashi” having a volume of 20% is output as an echo sound after an interval of 0.01 seconds. The pressing sound in the modification of the third embodiment is composed of a sound of “bashi” having a volume of 70% and two types of echo sounds (volume of 40% and 20%). By outputting the echo sound, the pressing sound can be given a depth.

  Next, referring to FIG. 101 (b), it is a diagram showing a time change of the audio output when the continuous hit interval is long (when the data stored in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is “03H”). As shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the continuous hit interval is long, a sound of “bashi” is output at a volume of 70% every time the press of the frame button 22 is detected, and thereafter, for 0.1 second. A sound of "bashi" having a volume of 40% is output as an echo sound after an interval, and a sound of "bashi" having a volume of 20% is output as an echo sound after an interval of 0.1 second.

  As described above, in the present modification, the interval between echo sounds set with respect to the press sound is made variable in accordance with the continuous hit interval of the player. That is, if the continuous hit interval is short, the interval at which the echo sound is output is shortened, and if the continuous hit interval is long, the interval at which the echo sound is output is lengthened. With this configuration, even when the continuous tapping interval is short, all the pressing sounds including the echo sound can be output from the detection of one pressing to the detection of the next pressing.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, an electrical configuration in the present modified example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 102 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 102A is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 222 according to the present modification.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (a), the ROM 222 according to the present modification differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 according to the third embodiment described above (see FIG. 93 (a)) in that an echo interval selection table 222ab is added. The difference is that the pressing sound selection table 222c is deleted.

  The echo interval selection table 222ab is a data table that defines data corresponding to intervals at which echo sounds are output. In this modification, every time two seconds elapse, a pressing sound is generated based on the data specified in the echo interval selection table 222ab and stored in a pressing sound storage area 223ab described later provided in the RAM 223. . Then, each time a press on the frame button 22 is detected, the press sound stored in the press sound storage area 223ab is read and output.

  The details of the echo interval selection table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the echo interval selection table 222ab. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the echo interval selection table 222ab stores the echo sound (40%, 20%) to be set for each value of the data corresponding to the continuous interval stored in the continuous interval storage area 223p. The output interval of the sound of “Bashi” of the volume of the sound is defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103A, 10 ms is defined as the echo interval in association with the data “01H” in the continuous hit interval storage area 223p. Accordingly, when the continuous beating interval is short, the interval for outputting the three sounds “Bashi” is set to the shortest 10 ms, so that all the sounds including the echo sound after the start of the output of the pressing sound are started. The period until the output of the pressing sound is completed can be shortened. Therefore, the output of the pressing sound can be surely completed between the time when one pressing is detected and the time when the next pressing is detected.

  Also, 50 ms is defined as the echo interval in association with “02H”, and 100 ms is defined in association with “03H”. That is, the interval at which the echo sound is output is set to be longer as the continuous hit interval becomes longer. This makes it possible to arrange the length of the pressing sound to be completed within the continuous beating interval in accordance with the continuous beating interval of the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 102 (b), a configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 102 (b) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), the RAM 223 in this modification is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the third embodiment (see FIG. 93 (b)) in that a pressing sound storage area 223ab and a pressing sound pointer 223ac are provided. , A pressed sound generation completed flag 223ad. Also, the sound output flag 223t has been deleted.

  The pressing sound storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing a pressing sound generated according to a continuous hit interval of the player. In the press sound storage area 223ab, a data table is defined in which the form of the press sound for setting the output is associated with each value of the press sound pointer 223ac that is periodically updated. Every time the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated, an operation corresponding to the pointer value is read from the pressing sound storage area 223ab and set. The details of the press sound storage area 223ab will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the pressing sound storage area 223ab. As shown in FIG. 103B, the sound output operation is stored in the press sound storage area 223ab for each value of the press sound pointer 223ac. The example of FIG. 103B shows a state in which data for outputting a pressing sound when the continuous hit interval is “02H” is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 0001H, the content "output a pressing sound of 70% volume" is stored as the sound output operation, and the pressing sound pointer is output. When the value of 223ac is in the range of 0002H to 0096H, the content "no output" is stored. When the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 0097H, the content of “outputting a pressing sound of 40% volume” is stored as an audio output operation, and the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 0098H to 012CH. In the range, the content of “no output” is stored. When the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is 012DH, the content of “output a pressing sound of 20% volume” is stored as a sound output operation. The content of “no output” is stored in the range of the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac after 012EH.

  Since the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated every 1 ms, when the output of the pressing sound is set, the pressing sound of “bang” having a volume of 70% is output 50 ms after the pressing sound of “van” is output, and the volume of the sound of 40% is output 50 ms later. An echo sound of "bang" is output, and after 50 ms, an echo sound of "bang" having a volume of 20% is output. By generating the pressing sound in advance and storing it in the pressing sound storage area 223ab, the processing load when outputting the pressing sound can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 102 (b), the description will be continued. The pressing sound pointer 223ac is a pointer whose value is updated by 1 every 1 ms when the output of the pressing sound is set during the execution of the continuous hitting effect (see S2923 in FIG. 106). Each time the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated, the corresponding operation content is read from the pressing sound storage area 223ab and set.

  The pressing sound generation completed flag 223ad is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing sound has been generated (stored in the pressing sound storage area 223ab) based on the data corresponding to the continuous hitting interval stored in the continuous hitting interval storage area 223p. It is. If the press sound generation completed flag 223ad is on, it means that the press sound has been generated, and if it is off, it means that the press sound has not been generated.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106, a description will be given of a control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 according to a modification of the above-described third embodiment. The illustration and description of the same processes as those in the third embodiment are omitted, and only different control processes are illustrated and described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 104, a description will be given of the operation input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S2121) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation input monitoring / production process 3 (S2121). In the operation input monitoring / production process 3 (FIG. 104, S2121) in this modification, in the process of S2808, the difference between the value of the number-of-presses counter 223q and the value stored in the reference number-of-times storage area 223r is less than the number of rank-ups. (S2808: No), instead of the processing of S2809 to S2811 of the operation input monitoring / production consideration 3 (see FIG. 97) in the third embodiment, a pressing sound corresponding to the continuous hit interval is output. The only difference is that a pressing sound output process (S2831) is performed to perform the pressing sound output process. Details of the pressing sound output processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, referring to FIG. 105, in this modified example, a pressing sound output process (S2831), which is one process in the operation input monitoring / producing process 3 (FIG. 104, S2121) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. ) Will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the content of the pressing sound output processing (S2831).

  In the pressing sound output process (S2831 in FIG. 105) in the present modification, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing sound generation completion flag 223ad is on (S2851). If it is determined that the press sound generation completion flag 223ad is off (S2851: No), an echo interval corresponding to the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is selected from the echo interval selection table 222ab (see FIG. 103A). (S2852).

  That is, as described above, if the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p is “01H”, the echo interval of 10 ms (006DH) is selected from the echo interval selection table 222ab (see FIG. 103A), and “02H” is selected. If there is, an echo interval of 50 ms (0095H) is selected, and if "03H", an echo interval of 100 ms (00C7H) is selected.

  When the process of S2852 is completed, next, a depression sound at the read echo interval is generated and stored in the depression sound storage area 223ab (see FIG. 103B) (S2853). Next, by setting the pressing sound generation completed flag 223ad to ON, it is indicated that the pressing sound has already been generated (S2854), and the flow shifts to the process of S2855.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2851 that the pressed sound generation completion flag 223ad is on (S2851: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2855 without executing the processes of S2852 to S2854.

  In the process of S2855, the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated to “01H” (S2855), and the sound output operation corresponding to the updated value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is performed in the pressing sound storage area 223ab (FIG. 103 (b)). ))) (S2856). Next, the sound output operation read out from the pressing sound storage area 223ab (see FIG. 103B) is set (S2857), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  By executing the pressing sound output process (see FIG. 105), each time the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected, the pressing sound generated according to the continuous hit interval can be output.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a description will be given of a continuous hitting effect control process (S2122) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification. Of the continuous hitting effect control processing, the processing of S2901-S2903 and S2907-S2911 are the same as the processing of S2901-S2903 and S2907-S2911 of the continuous hit control processing (see FIG. 98) in the third embodiment, respectively. Is performed.

  In the continuous hit production control process (see FIG. 106, S2122) in the present modification, 01H is set to the value of the continuous hit interval storage area 223p after the process of S2903 (S2921), and thereafter, the present process ends. By executing the processing of S2921, "01H" corresponding to the shortest continuous hit interval can be set at the start of the continuous hit effect, so that at the start of the continuous hit effect, regardless of the skill of the player. It is possible to output the pressing sound within the continuous hit interval.

  Further, in the continuous hit control process (see FIG. 106) in this modification, after the process of S2908, it is determined whether or not the press sound generation flag 223ad is on (S2922), and the press sound generation flag 223ad is on. If it is determined that there is (S2922: Yes), the value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is updated (S2922), and the sound output operation corresponding to the updated value of the pressing sound pointer 223ac is performed in the pressing sound storage area 223ab (FIG. 103 (b)) (S2924). Next, the read voice output operation is set (S2925), and the flow shifts to the process of S2909.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2922, when it is determined that the pressed sound generation flag 223ad is off (S2922: No), the processing of S2923 to S2925 is skipped, and the processing of S2909 and thereafter is executed.

  By executing the processing of S2922 to S2925, the pressing sound stored in the pressing sound storage area 223223ab can be accurately output.

  In the continuous hit production control process (see FIG. 106) according to the present modification, when the process of S2911 is completed, a pressing sound corresponding to the continuous hit interval updated in the process of S2911 is generated, and the generated pressing sound is generated. The sound is overwritten on the pressing sound storage area 223ab (S2926), and this processing ends. By executing the process of S2926, it is possible to update the pressing sound corresponding to the continuous hit interval every two seconds for determining the continuous hit interval.

  In this modification, the value stored in the continuous-stroke interval storage area 223p at the start of the continuous-stroke effect is “01H”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. Further, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the value set in the processing of S2911 last executed in the previous continuous-stroke effect is held without updating the value of the continuous-stroke interval storage area 223p. As a result, if the player who played the game in the previous continuous hit production and the current player are the same, the continuous hitting interval updated in accordance with the continuous hitting interval of the player in the previous continuous hitting performance is continuously used. Therefore, immediately after the start of the continuous-stroke effect, it is possible to set a pressing sound corresponding to the continuous-stroke interval of the player.

  As described above, in the present modified example, only one type of press sound (executed effect) output based on detection of operation of the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous hit effect is provided. Then, the output interval of the echo sound output along with the pressing sound is made variable according to the continuous hit interval of the player. More specifically, the longer the continuous hit interval (the smaller the number of continuous hits per unit time), the longer the interval at which the echo sound is output, and the shorter the continuous hit interval (the more the continuous hits per unit time), The interval at which echo sounds are output has been shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to more reliably output the pressing sound including the echo sound between the pressing operation of the frame button 22 and the next pressing operation, regardless of the continuous hit interval of the player. Can be. Also, by changing the output interval of the echo sound in accordance with the continuous hit interval of the player, a variation can be provided in the pressing sound. Therefore, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game becomes monotonous. Further, in the third embodiment, the data of different pressing sounds are separately provided for each successive hitting interval. However, in the present modification, a plurality of variations having different echo intervals are provided using a single pressing sound. It has a configuration. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity of data for outputting a pressing sound.

  In the modification of the third embodiment, the number of echo sounds is set to two, and a sound of “bashi” is output a total of three times for one press, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the number of echo sounds may be arbitrarily determined. In addition, the output of the echo sound is set to 40% and 20% of the sound pressure of the pressing sound. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and may be set arbitrarily. In addition, the number of echo sounds and the sound pressure of each echo sound may be varied according to the continuous hit interval of the player. Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

  In the third embodiment and its modifications, the effect type is not changed in the middle of the continuous hit effect of 1, but may be changed in the middle. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to change the effect type at the timing when Lv increases or the timing at which the continuous hit interval is determined. That is, a data table having the same configuration as that of the continuous-stroke production selection table 222b for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to change is prepared, and when the lottery timing comes, the table is compared with the value of the production counter. Thus, it may be configured to determine whether or not to change the effect type of the continuous hit effect. Thus, when the continuous-stroke effect is started in the effect type with a low degree of expectation, it is possible to perform continuous tapping in expectation of being changed to the effect type with a high degree of expectation in the middle. Further, in this case, it may be configured such that the effect type is prevented from being changed to the effect type having a low degree of expectation during the continuous hit effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the effect type from being changed from the effect type having a high degree of expectation to the effect type having a low degree of expectation and impairing the player's expectation of the continuous hit effect.

  In the third embodiment and its modification, the pressing sound when the frame button 22 is pressed in one continuous hit effect is made variable in accordance with the continuous hitting interval of the player. The variable is not limited to the pressing sound. For example, in the continuous hitting effect, a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 each time the frame button 22 is pressed, and the type or display period of the character is changed according to the interval of the continuous hitting. It may be. More specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a predetermined character jumps on the spot in response to the pressing of the frame button 22 during the continuous hitting effect, and the longer the continuous hitting interval, the higher the jump (the longer the flight time). It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the press of the frame button 22 has been received during the effect period that is in accordance with the continuous hit interval. In addition, in the case of displaying a jumping character, in the case of setting an effect of a jump with a relatively short flight time, the effect may be displayed using a part of the image data of the jump with a long flight time. . For example, of the image data of each frame used for the production with the longest flight time, each image data from the start of the jump until reaching the height of 50%, the image data falling past the top of the jump, and 50% It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an effect in which the flight time is short (jump height is half) is executed by connecting the image data from when the image reaches the height until landing. With this configuration, it is not necessary to separately prepare different image data for each jump height, so that the data amount of the image data can be reduced. In addition, various LEDs provided on the front frame 14 may be configured to blink or emit light intensely in accordance with the continuous tapping period of the player, and the blinking cycle or the light emitting period may be varied according to the continuous tapping interval. .

  In the third embodiment and its modification, the continuous hitting interval of the player is determined by the number of presses per 2 seconds. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The frequency of determining the continuous hitting interval is arbitrarily determined. You may. Further, the method of determining the continuous hit interval is not limited to the method of determining based on the number of presses within a predetermined time (2 seconds). For example, the time from the detection of one operation on the frame button 22 to the detection of the next operation is measured, and each time the operation on the frame button 22 is detected, the time corresponding to the elapsed time from the previous operation is calculated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a pressed sound is set. Specifically, for example, if the elapsed time is 1 second or longer, a pressing sound having the longest output period is set, and if the elapsed time is 0.4 second or longer and shorter than 1 second, an intermediate-length output sound is set. The pressing sound for the period may be set, and if the elapsed time is less than 0.4 seconds, the pressing sound for the shortest output period may be set.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described second embodiment, the operation means such as the frame button 22 for detecting the operation of the player and executing the corresponding control is provided. As a result, the player's willingness to participate can be improved by operating the operation means.

  In addition to this, in the fourth embodiment, the operating means is configured to be able to execute a vibration operation, and in addition to accepting an operation by a player, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation and assist the operation according to the mode of the vibration operation. It is composed.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 is a kind of operating means that can be operated by the player, and is a swing operation that can be operated left and right and back and forth. The point that the member 310 is provided, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed. That is the point. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107, in the fourth embodiment, a substantially spherical swing operation member 310 is provided below the center in front view. The swing operation member 310 is configured to be capable of being tilted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction, respectively, along the substantially cross-shaped groove of the root portion. In the option effect described later, the configuration is such that it develops into an effect in a different mode according to the operation direction of the swing operation member 310. Thereby, it is possible to give a variety to the production. In addition, the swinging operation member 310 has a built-in vibration motor 380, and by driving the vibration motor 380, the swinging operation member 310 can be vibrated. A plurality of patterns are provided in the vibration operation, and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of the effect and the like according to the strength of the vibration and the direction of the vibration.

  The internal structure of the swing operation member 310 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108A is an exploded perspective view of the swing operation member 310. As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the swing operation member 310 includes a substantially hemispherical dome member 317 and a ring-shaped ring member provided for facilitating the operation of the player by hooking a finger. 312 and a base 318 containing a vibration motor 380.

  FIG. 108B is a perspective view of the vibration motor 380 provided on the base 318. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), the vibration motor 380 includes a motor portion 381, an eccentric member 382 obtained by cutting a cylinder into substantially half, and a shaft portion 381a that supports the eccentric member 382. ing. The eccentric member 382 is fixed to the shaft portion 381a, and when the shaft portion 381a is rotated by the driving of the motor portion 381, the eccentric member 382 also performs a rotating operation in conjunction with the shaft portion 381a.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 108, the shaft portion 381a is fixed at a position shifted from the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382. Therefore, when the motor 381 rotates, the center of the rotation of the eccentric member 382 does not coincide with the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382, so that a centrifugal force is generated in different directions depending on the arrangement of the eccentric member 382. As a result of the centrifugal force being generated in different directions depending on the rotational position, the entire motor for vibration 380 vibrates because it performs a fine variable operation in various directions. Since the vibration motor 380 is fixed to the base 318 of the swing operation member 310, vibration is transmitted to the base 318 and the cover fixed to the base 318. Therefore, when the player touches the swing operation member 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand. Thereby, in addition to the visual display effect and the auditory sound effect, the effect by the vibration can be performed, so that the variation of the effect can be further diversified. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the vibration motor 380, the magnitude of the vibration (vibration intensity) increases as the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 increases. This is because the centrifugal force is proportional to the square of the rotation speed (angular speed). The rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 is controlled by a motor control IC (not shown) provided on the swing operation member 310 to drive the motor unit 381. The motor control IC drives the motor unit 381 with a drive voltage (drive power) corresponding to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113. More specifically, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a command for specifying a rotation speed to the motor control IC. The motor control IC oscillates a pulse signal having a fixed duty ratio (for example, 5 volts) at a predetermined frequency (for example, 1 kHz) at a duty ratio according to a command received from the audio lamp control device 113. Is applied as a drive voltage to the motor 380. Since the vibration motor 380 is constituted by a known DC motor, the rotation operation is performed during the period when the drive voltage is on, and the rotation operation is stopped during the period when the drive voltage is off. Speed increases. Thereby, the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 fixed to the shaft portion 381a can also be changed. The command output from the sound lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC specifies the DUTY ratio of the drive voltage output from the motor control IC to the vibration motor as data corresponding to the rotation speed. At least information for performing the operation. The motor control IC continuously outputs a drive voltage waveform having the same DUTY ratio until a new command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, by employing the motor control IC, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the vibration intensity by simply outputting the information corresponding to the DUTY ratio once. The processing load on the device 113 can be reduced.

  Next, a mode of the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, a uniform vibration mode in which the swinging operation member 310 is evenly vibrated in all directions, and a vibration intensity in one of the four directions becomes stronger than those in the other directions ( Or vibrating operation in a biased vibration mode.

  FIG. 109A is a diagram showing the operation of the swing operation member 310 when the swing operation member 310 performs a uniform vibration operation and the operation of the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 therein. As shown in FIG. 109 (a), when the swinging operation member 310 is vibrating at a constant vibration intensity in all directions (in a uniform vibration mode), the vibration motor 380 is driven at a constant speed. The eccentric member 382 rotates at a constant speed. Thus, every time the eccentric member 382 makes one rotation, the same centrifugal force is generated according to the rotational position. This is because the centrifugal force is proportional to the square of the rotation speed (angular speed). As a result of the direction of the centrifugal force being changed in conjunction with the rotation position, vibration is uniformly generated in all directions.

  FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing the operation of the swing operation member 310 when the swing operation member 310 performs the eccentric vibration operation and the operation of the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 therein. The example of FIG. 109 (b) is an example in which the upper side of the swing operation member 310 is vibrated more strongly than in other directions. By vibrating the upper side strongly, it is possible to suggest to the player who is touching the swing operation member 310 that the swing operation member 310 is to be operated to the rear side in the front view.

  As shown on the right side of FIG. 109 (b), in the case where the vibration is performed while being biased above the swing operation member 310, the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 is changed according to the rotation position. . Specifically, the rotation speed becomes high while the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382 passes above, and decreases when the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382 passes in a direction other than above. By controlling the rotation speed (angular speed) of the vibration motor 380 in this manner, the magnitude of the centrifugal force can be varied according to the position where the eccentric member 382 passes. Specifically, the centrifugal force increases while passing through an upward direction in which the rotation speed is set to a high speed, and decreases while passing through another direction in which the rotation speed is low. As a result, the upward vibration in which the centrifugal force is large is larger than the other directions in which the centrifugal force is small. It can make you feel like you are. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the swing operation member 310 should be operated to the back side in the front view. Similarly, in the case of eccentrically vibrating in the right direction, the eccentric member 382 is controlled so that the rotation speed becomes high while passing in the right direction. When the 382 is controlled to increase the rotation speed while passing in the left direction, and when the eccentric member 382 is vibrated while being deviated downward, the rotation speed is controlled to increase when the eccentric member 382 passes in the downward direction. do it.

  Next, various display effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 110 and FIG. 111 (a), an option effect performed in the fourth embodiment will be described. This option effect is an effect that may be executed in the rooftop mode, and selects one target as a player from the options displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by operating the swing operation member 310. It is a production to make.

  More specifically, this option effect may occur in the rooftop mode, and is an effect of selecting one treasure chest to be opened by a male character from among four treasure chests. Different effects may be executed depending on the treasure chest selected by the player. Specifically, this option production may be executed when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is out of place or in the case of a jackpot. In the case of out of place (gase), no matter which treasure box is selected, the treasure box is empty. It is.

  On the other hand, if the selection effect is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, different types of monsters (normal monsters or rare monsters) may appear depending on the treasure chest selected by the player. In the case of the jackpot E, a normal monster appears regardless of which option is selected. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot F, an option in which a rare monster appears in a part of the options is set. In other words, the jackpot F is determined when a rare monster appears, so that it is possible to recognize that the rooftop mode will be continued before confirming the result of the battle effect. Therefore, the player can positively operate the swing operation member 310 in expectation of seeing a rare monster.

  FIG. 110 (a) shows the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the option effect is set based on the special symbol lottery result being the jackpot F, the vibration mode of the swing operation member 310, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the option effect is started, a display area in which the character “Select a box with a lever!” Is displayed in the center of the third symbol display device 81, and Treasure chests having different shapes are displayed on the top, bottom, left and right, respectively. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the treasure box can be selected by operating the swing operation member 310 left and right or back and forth.

  FIG. 110A illustrates a case where a normal monster appears when the treasure chest on the top, bottom, and left is selected, and a rare monster appears when the treasure chest on the right is selected. In this case, the swinging operation member 310 is set so as to be deviated rightward to perform a vibration operation in order to suggest a rare monster to the player. This allows the player who has swung the swing operation member 310 to easily understand that there is a possibility that a rare monster may appear by operating to the right.

  FIG. 110B shows the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the swing operation member 310 is operated to the right in accordance with the vibration mode in which the swing operation member 310 is vibrating while being biased to the right, and the state of the swing operation member 310. FIG. As shown in FIG. 110 (b), when the player tilts the swing operation member 310 to the right, the treasure chest displayed on the right side in front view blinks to indicate that the treasure chest has been selected, and the other treasure chests are black. Out. This allows the player to recognize that the selection operation of the player has been received.

  When the player operates the swinging operation member 310 in accordance with the vibration mode, a monster in an unusual (rare) mode appears from the treasure chest as shown in FIG. More specifically, as compared with a normal monster (see FIG. 71), a monster having no fangs, spines of the head, and fingernails of the forefoot, and having a look that does not depend on the expression (a weak look) appears. The production in which this rare monster appears is a special (premium) production in which the victory is confirmed at the time of appearance (entering the roof mode again after the jackpot). Therefore, a player who wants to view the premium effect can be positively touched with the swing operation member 310 when the option effect appears. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the option production.

  In the case of the jackpot F, rare monsters do not always appear due to the biased vibration mode. Whether the rare monsters are included in the options, and when the rare monsters are included in the options, the rare Whether or not suggests an appearing option is determined by lottery. Thereby, even if the swing operation member 310 does not perform the biased vibration in the option effect, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the expectation of the jackpot F from being impaired, and to confirm the battle effect with the expectation until the end. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111 (b), an example of a hold announcement effect in the fourth embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, a hold announcement effect is provided in which a hold symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a mode different from a normal state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), among the reserved symbols, the effect that the reserved symbol HY1 corresponding to the newest start winning prize is changed to a special symbol imitating a treasure box is executed, and at the same time, the neck is changed. An effect is performed in which the swing operation member 310 performs uniform vibration. The higher the jackpot expectation degree of the hold ball corresponding to the hold symbol, the higher the expected rate of execution of the hold notice effect, so the player who recognizes that the hold advance notice effect has been executed is expected to be a jackpot. I can make you feel. Note that, in the uniform vibration mode in the suspension notice effect, the vibration motor 380 is basically driven at the maximum rotation speed, and the vibration intensity becomes maximum (see FIG. 112 (c)). This is because the hold announcement effect is likely to be executed in a state where the player does not touch the swinging operation member 310, so that the hold announcement effect was executed without touching the hand. This is for recognizing. That is, by setting the maximum vibration intensity, the vibration of the swing operation member 310 can be visually recognized, and the vibration sound generated by the vibration can be heard by the player. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the hand is touching the swing operation member 310, it is possible to easily recognize that the hold announcement effect has been executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the execution of the suspension notice effect is determined to be during the execution of the fluctuation display effect (vibration effect) accompanied by the vibration of the swing operation member 310, the vibration effect is out of the execution period. The following vibration intensity is set when the execution of the hold notice effect is determined. This is because the player is likely to have already touched the swinging operation member 310 during the execution of the vibration effect, and if the player outputs too strong vibration, the player may be surprised. is there. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, when the suspension notice effect is determined to be performed for the vibration effect, the vibration intensity is uniformly added to the vibration intensity of the vibration corresponding to the vibration effect by 30%. This makes it possible to tactilely distinguish whether or not the vibration is based on the vibration effect, and to prevent (suppress) the vibration intensity from becoming too strong.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, a description will be given of a time-based change (vibration pattern) of the vibration intensity of the vibration set in the swinging operation member 310 when the vibration effect or the suspension notice effect is being executed. I do. First, FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a time change of the vibration intensity during the execution of the variable effect (small hit notification effect) for notifying the small hit.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), when the small hit notification effect is started, the vibration intensity is kept at 0 (the vibration motor 380 is inactive) for 1.5 seconds. Thereafter, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect of finding a plurality of treasure chests is executed, and when the back music (song) flowing during the effect rises (sound pressure increases), a swing operation is performed according to the song. The member 310 vibrates at a vibration intensity of 40% for one second. Thus, the vibration is generated in accordance with the excitement of the music and the development of the display effect, so that it is possible to provide an effect appealing to the sense of touch in addition to the sense of sight and hearing.

  When the vibration operation for one second is completed, the vibration is stopped for two seconds. Two seconds after the stop of the vibration operation, an effect of determining one treasure chest to be opened this time from a plurality of treasure chests found is executed, and music is excited. Therefore, the vibration operation is executed again in accordance with these. Specifically, the vibration operation is performed at a vibration intensity of 50% for one second. After one second has elapsed, a two-second vibration stop state is set. During these two seconds, an effect of opening a treasure chest is executed. When the vibration stop state ends, an effect of finding treasure from the opened treasure chest (see FIG. 70 (b)) develops, and the music becomes the largest climax in the fluctuation display effect. In accordance with this, a vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 70% is set for 2.5 seconds. Then, when the vibration operation for 2.5 seconds is completed, a small hit is started.

  In this way, by setting the vibration action in accordance with the display mode of the variable effect and the mode of the music, a tactile effect can be executed in combination with a visual and auditory effect. Therefore, the effect operation can be diversified, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  FIG. 112 (b) shows a jackpot notification effect in which an option effect is set among the variable effects (big hit notification effects) executed based on the special symbol lottery result being a big hit in the “roof mode”. It is the figure which showed the time change (vibration pattern) of the vibration intensity inside. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), when the variable effect corresponding to the big hit is started, similarly to the small hit notification effect, first, a vibration stop state for 1.5 seconds is set, and then a plurality of treasure chests are found. As a result, a vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 40% is set for one second. When the vibration operation for one second is completed, it develops into an option effect (see FIG. 110A). In this option effect, as described above, one of the four treasure boxes displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the swing operation member 310. The option effect is performed for a maximum of 3 seconds, and during the 3 seconds, for example, the vibration operation is performed at an average vibration intensity of 50%. In the case of the uniform vibration mode, a fixed vibration intensity of 50% is set, and in the case of the eccentric vibration mode, the average of the high-speed operation location and the low-speed operation location is set to 50%. After the end of the option effect, similarly to the small hit notification effect, an effect of opening the selected one treasure box is executed, and the vibration is set to be stopped. Two seconds later, the monster corresponding to the option (normal An effect in which a monster or a rare monster appears is executed, and a vibration operation in a uniform vibration mode with a vibration intensity of 70% is set for 2.5 seconds. After 2.5 seconds, the jackpot starts.

  Further, FIG. 112 (c) is a diagram illustrating a time-based change (vibration pattern) of the vibration intensity when the suspension notice effect is executed. The hold announcement effect is an effect set when an effect execution determination executed based on detecting a new start winning is won, and a new hold symbol displayed based on the new start winning is This is an effect that is displayed in a mode different from normal (see FIG. 111B). With this reservation notice effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the reservation ball corresponding to the new reservation symbol will be a big hit. When a new start winning is detected and the winning of the holding announcement effect is determined, once the holding symbol of the normal mode is newly displayed, the new holding symbol imitates a treasure chest when one second elapses from the starting winning. An effect changed to a special symbol is executed. In accordance with this, a vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 100% is executed for 0.2 seconds. By setting the vibration operation with a vibration intensity of 100% (maximum vibration intensity), the vibration of the swinging operation member 310 can be visually recognized, and the vibration sound generated by the vibration can be heard by the player. It becomes possible. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the hand is touching the swing operation member 310, it is possible to easily recognize that the hold announcement effect has been executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a description will be given of a time-based change in vibration intensity when a plurality of effects accompanied by a vibration operation compete. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating a vibration pattern in the case where the hold announcement effect is executed during the execution of the small hit notification effect. As shown in the figure, during the execution of the fluctuation effect (vibration effect) accompanied by the vibration operation, when the execution timing of the hold notice effect is reached, the vibration intensity of the already determined vibration effect is 30%. After performing the vibration operation for 0.2 seconds at the vibration intensity obtained by adding the vibration intensity of the above, the vibration intensity is switched again to the vibration intensity corresponding to the vibration effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 113, when the execution timing of the hold notice effect is performed while the vibration operation with the vibration intensity of 40% is being performed, 30% is added to the vibration intensity of 40% and 70% Is set. Further, when the execution timing of the hold notice effect is performed during the execution of the vibration operation with the vibration intensity of 70%, the vibration operation with the vibration intensity of 100% is performed by adding 100% to the vibration intensity of 70%. Is set. As described above, when the start timing of the hold notice effect is reached during the execution of the vibration effect, the vibration intensity is set by adding 30% to the vibration intensity as the vibration effect, so that the swing operation member 310 is touched. A player can easily recognize that the vibration intensity has been switched. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of overlooking the execution of the reserved announcement effect, so that it is possible to more surely give a sense of expectation to the reserved announcement effect.

  In addition, during the execution of the vibration effect, by suppressing the addition of the vibration intensity corresponding to the hold notice effect to 30%, it is possible to suppress the swing operation member 310 from excessively vibrating. That is, the reason why the vibration operation with the vibration intensity of 100% is set when the hold notice effect is executed in a single shot is that there is a high possibility that the player does not touch the swing operation member 310 as described above. The vibrating appearance and the vibrating sound are used to more reliably recognize that the vibrating operation has been executed (the hold notice effect has been set). On the other hand, during the setting of the vibration effect, there is a high possibility that the player has already touched the swing operation member 310, so if the vibration intensity is suddenly maximized with the start of the hold notice effect, The player may be surprised. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, the increase width of the vibration intensity is suppressed to 30% from the originally set vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and the excessive vibration is suppressed. This can prevent (suppress) the player from being surprised by excessively strong vibration.

  Next, a pulse waveform (PWM waveform) output from the motor control IC based on the command received from the audio ramp control device 113 when the unbalanced vibration operation is set will be described with reference to FIG. . FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a time change of the PWM waveform (drive voltage waveform) in a state where the weighted vibration operation is performed while being deviated upward. At the start timing of the vibration operation, a command designating a duty ratio of 40% is output from the sound lamp control device 113, and a pulse signal having a duty ratio of 40% is repeatedly output at a frequency of 1 kHz by the motor control IC. The vibration motor 380 to which the pulse waveform is applied rotates at a rotation speed based on the applied voltage. Accordingly, the rotation operation starts clockwise as viewed from the front, from the arrangement in which the eccentric member 382 is arranged on the left side (the origin position of the rotation operation). Also, if 10 ms elapse after the rotation of the eccentric member 382 is started and the eccentric member 382 is arranged in the upper left diagonal direction, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a command specifying a duty ratio of 80%. The duty ratio of the drive voltage output from the motor control IC is switched to 80%. Accordingly, the on-period of the drive voltage applied to the vibration motor 380 becomes twice as long as before the DUTY ratio is switched, so that the eccentric member 382 moves from the upper left diagonal direction to the upper right diagonal direction. The rotation is performed at twice the rotation speed for 25 ms before the rotation. Thus, before and after the eccentric member 382 passes upward, the centrifugal force acting outward with respect to the center of gravity of the eccentric member 382 as viewed from the rotation axis increases.

  When 25 ms elapses after the DUTY ratio is set to 80%, a command specifying the DUTY ratio of 40% is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the motor control IC. Upon receiving this command, the motor control IC switches the duty ratio of the output drive voltage to 40% again. Thereby, the rotation speed of the eccentric member 382 is returned to the same rotation speed as when the rotation operation was started. By performing the rotation operation for 65 ms in this state, the eccentric member 382 makes one round and returns to the origin position. By repeating the switching of the duty ratio, the centrifugal force can be increased when the eccentric member 382 passes back and forth in the upward direction, and the centrifugal force can be reduced when the eccentric member 382 passes another position. As a result, a stronger vibration can be generated in the upward direction in which the centrifugal force increases, so that a player touching the swinging operation member 310 is suggested in the form of vibration in the form of vibration. can do. Therefore, a novel operation direction can be suggested. Further, it is difficult for the player to recognize the direction suggested by the vibration unless the hand is touching the swinging operation member 310. The hand can touch the swing operation member 310. If the swing operation member 310 can be touched with the hand, the possibility that the player operates the swing operation member 310 is increased, so that the player's willingness to participate in the choice effect can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, an origin sensor (not shown) that can detect whether the eccentric member 382 is located at the origin position (arranged on the left side) is provided. At the time of producing the eccentric vibration, the output of the origin sensor is detected every 100 ms when the rotation operation of one rotation is completed, and it is determined whether or not one rotation has been completed as set. If the origin sensor is not at the origin position, the additional rotation operation is performed until the origin sensor is turned on. Then, when the origin sensor is turned on, the setting of the eccentric vibration shown in FIG. 114 is performed again. Is started. Thus, even if the rotational position is shifted, the rotational position can be corrected for each rotation, so that the direction of the biased vibration can be set more accurately.

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 115 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 115, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments in that the input / output port 225 of the sound lamp control device 113 is necked. The difference is that the swing operation member 310 is electrically connected.

  The swinging operation member 310 is provided with at least the tilt sensor 385 that detects the operation direction of the player (the direction in which the swinging operation member 310 is tilted) and the above-described vibration motor 380. The tilt sensor 385 is configured with four detection sensors corresponding to each of four directions (left and right, and front and rear directions). When the swing operation member 310 is operated in any direction, the tilt sensor 385 corresponds to the operation direction. The output of the sensor is turned on (H). Since the output of each sensor is input to the input / output port 225, the MPU 221 can sequentially grasp the state of the swing operation member 310.

  The vibration motor 380 is provided for causing the swing operation member 310 to vibrate, as described above. The rotation speed of the vibration motor 380 is controlled by the duty ratio of the pulse output from the sound lamp control device 113. Although not shown, an origin sensor capable of detecting whether the eccentric member 382 of the vibration motor 380 is located at the origin position is also electrically connected to the input / output port 225. The output of the origin sensor is turned on when the eccentric member 382 is located at the origin position, and turned off when the eccentric member 382 is displaced from the origin position. By monitoring this output, the sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp whether the eccentric member 382 is located at the origin position.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 116A, the ROM 222 in the fourth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 21A) in that a vibration scenario selection table 222e and The difference is that an advanced effect selection table 222f is added.

  In the vibration scenario selection table 222e, the setting of the vibration operation (DUTY ratio of the drive voltage to be output to the motor control IC) during the execution of the effect accompanied by the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is periodically updated. It is a data table defined for each value of the vibration pointer 223v. When the vibration effect is set, one vibration scenario corresponding to the vibration effect to be executed this time is selected from the vibration scenario selection table 222e and stored in a vibration scenario storage area 223u described later provided in the RAM 223. You. During the execution of the vibration effect, each time the vibration pointer 223v is updated, the vibration scenario stored in the vibration scenario storage area 223u is read, and the vibration operation corresponding to the pointer value is set. Thereby, in each vibration effect, the same vibration operation can be accurately executed at the same timing.

  Details of the vibration scenario selection table 222e will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b). FIG. 117A is a block diagram showing a configuration of the vibration scenario selection table 222e. As shown in FIG. 117A, different scenarios are defined in the vibration scenario selection table 222e for each effect type. Specifically, in the “rooftop mode”, a small hit notification effect table 222 e 1, which is set when the small hit notification effect (see FIG. 70B) is selected as the display mode of the variable effect, includes an option effect. The jackpot notification effect table 222e2 set when no jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 71) is selected, the hold notification effect table 222e3 set when the hold notification effect is determined, the option effect is executed. In addition, an upper-weighted vibration effect table 222e4 in which an upwardly biased vibration operation is set, and an upper-weighted vibration-effect table 222e5 in which an option effect is performed and a rightwardly-weighted vibration operation is set, are accompanied. Scenarios corresponding to all production modes are defined.

  Next, a description will be given of the specified contents of each vibration scenario defined in the vibration scenario selection table 222e, with reference to FIG. 117 (b), taking the small hit notification effect table 222e1 as an example. FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small hit notification effect production table 222e1.

  As shown in FIG. 117B, in the small hit notification effect presentation table 222e1, the duty ratio of the drive voltage to be output to the motor control IC is defined in association with the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Specifically, START information indicating the start of the effect is defined in association with the value of 0000H of the vibration pointer 223v. Since the duty ratio of 0% is defined in association with the value of the vibration pointer 223v in the range of 0001H to 05DBH, the vibration is stopped in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Further, a duty ratio of 40% is defined in association with the range of the vibration pointer 223v of 05DCH to 0DABH. Accordingly, in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v, a command for designating a 40% duty ratio is input to the motor control IC, and as a result, a voltage waveform having a 40% duty ratio is input to the vibration motor 380. Thus, the vibration intensity is set to 40%.

  Since the duty ratio of 0% is defined in association with the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v from 0DACH to 1193H, the vibration is stopped in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v. Also, a duty ratio of 50% is defined in association with a range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v from 1194H to 157BH. Therefore, in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v, a duty ratio of 50% is set for the motor control IC, and a drive voltage having a duty ratio of 50% is output from the motor control IC. The vibration intensity is set to 50%.

  A duty ratio of 0% is defined in association with the range of the vibration pointer 223v of 157CH to 1D4BH, so that the vibration is stopped in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v. A DUTY ratio of 70% is defined in association with a value of the vibration pointer 223v ranging from 1D4CH to 270FH. Therefore, in the range of the value of the vibration pointer 223v, a duty ratio of 70% is set for the motor control IC, and a drive voltage having a duty ratio of 70% is output from the motor control IC. The vibration intensity is set to 70%.

  Further, END information is defined in association with the value 2710H of the vibration pointer 223v. This END information is used to determine whether or not the vibration operation specified in the vibration scenario has been set. The vibration pattern shown in FIG. 112A can be realized by setting the small hit notification effect table 222e1.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, vibration scenarios corresponding to various effects are specified in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in advance, and one scenario is read from the vibration scenario selection table 222e and set at the start of the effect. It has a configuration. During the execution of the vibration effect, a vibration operation (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the value of the vibration pointer 223v updated periodically (every 1 ms) is specified from the vibration scenario, and the specified vibration operation is set. It has a configuration. Accordingly, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 does not need to specify the sequential vibration operation sequentially from the progress of the vibration effect, and only needs to perform a simple process of reading out the corresponding vibration operation from the vibration scenario. The load can be reduced.

  Returning to FIG. 116 (a), the description will be continued. The development effect selection table 222f is a data table that is referred to for selecting the development contents according to the direction in which the player has operated in the option effect. The operation direction of the swing operation member 310 and the effect mode are defined for each effect mode. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of tables having different development patterns are set in the development effect selection table 222f, and one of the tables is selected according to the value of the effect counter 223j. . Thereby, the correspondence between the operation direction and the content of the development effect can be made random.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116B is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 116B, in the fourth embodiment, the vibration scenario storage area 223u and the vibration pointer are different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 21B). 223v, a scenario type flag 223w, a validity period timer 223x, and a back type counter 223y.

  The vibration scenario storage area 223u is a storage area for storing the vibration scenario corresponding to the present vibration performance, which is read from the vibration scenario selection table 222e when the execution of the vibration performance is determined. During the execution of the vibration effect, the vibration scenario stored in the vibration scenario storage area 223u is referred to, and the corresponding vibration setting is read and set every 1 ms when the vibration pointer 223v is updated (see FIG. 123). See S3404).

  The vibration pointer 223v is a pointer that is updated one by one in the vibration setting process during the execution of the vibration effect (see S3403 in FIG. 123). Since the vibration setting process (see FIG. 123) is executed every 1 ms in the main process 4 (see FIG. 118), the vibration pointer 223v is periodically updated every 1 ms. During the execution of the vibration effect, each time the value of the vibration pointer 223v is updated, the vibration operation (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the pointer value is read from the vibration scenario storage area 223u, and the read DUTY ratio is read. Is notified to the motor control IC (see S3408 in FIG. 123).

  The scenario type flag 223w is a flag for identifying the type of the set vibration scenario (the type of the vibration effect). With the scenario type flag 223w, the type of the current vibration scenario can be easily specified.

  The validity period timer 223x is a timer for measuring a validity period in which the player's operation on the swing operation member 310 is valid in the option effect. When the start timing of the option effect is reached, an effective period corresponding to the current option effect is set in the effective period timer 223x (see S3202 in FIG. 121). The value of the effective period timer 223x is decremented by one in the effect control processing until the operation of the swing operation member 310 by the player is detected (S3204 in FIG. 121). Then, if the timer value becomes 0 before the player operates the swing operation member 310, it is determined that the validity period has elapsed, and an effect in which a normal monster appears from the treasure chest as an advanced effect is executed. (See S3206 in FIG. 121).

  The back type counter 223y has the same function as the back type counter 223y provided in the RAM 223 in the third embodiment described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The illustration and description of the same processes as those of the first and second embodiments are omitted, and only different control processes are illustrated and explained.

  First, the main process 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing 4. The main process 4 (see FIG. 118) in the present embodiment is different from the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first and second embodiments in that processes of S2131 to S2133 are added. As for the other processes, the same processes as those of the main process (see FIG. 53) are executed, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In the main process 4 (see FIG. 118), after executing the held number display updating process in the process of S2106, the operation input monitoring and effecting process (S2107) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is replaced with the operation input monitoring and production process. The effect processing 4 is executed (S2131). Details of the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the main process 4 (see FIG. 53) in the fourth embodiment, when the process of 2110 ends, a vibration setting process (S2132) for setting the vibration intensity of the vibration motor 380 is executed. Details of the vibration setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the processing of S2132, or in the processing of S2101, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has not elapsed since the main processing was started or the processing of S2101 was last executed (S2101 : No), and proceeds to the command determination process 4 in S2133. Details of the command determination processing 4 will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the processes of S2112 to S2117 are executed similarly to the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first and second embodiments.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119, a description will be given of the operation input monitoring / production process 4 (S2131), which is one of the main processes 4 (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation input monitoring / production process 4.

  In the operation input monitoring and effect processing 4 (S2131), first, an operation on the swing operation member 310 is detected (whether or not the output of one of the tilt sensors 385 corresponding to any direction becomes H). Is determined (S2821). If an operation on the swing operation member 310 is detected (S2821: Yes), an operation detection process for performing control according to the operation direction of the swing operation member 310 is executed (S2822). Details of the operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the operation on the swing operation member is not detected (S2821: No), an operation effect control process for updating the execution period of the continuous hit effect is executed (S2823). Details of the operation effect control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In the processing of S2824 performed after the processing of S2822 or S2823, the pressing of the frame button 22 is monitored, a processing for pressing the frame button for performing the corresponding control is performed (S2824), and this processing ends. Details of the processing when the frame button is pressed (S2824) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the operation detection process (S2822), which is one of the operation input monitoring and presentation processes 4 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the contents of the operation detection process.

  In the operation detection process (S2822), first, it is determined whether or not the value of a valid period timer 223x for measuring the valid period (execution period) of the continuous hit period is greater than 0 (S3101). If the value of the valid period timer 223x is 0 (S3101: No), it means that the present time is outside the valid period of the continuous striking effect (out of the execution period), and thus this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the valid period timer 223x is 1 or more (S3101: Yes), the tilt direction (the direction corresponding to the sensor whose output is H) is specified from the output of each sensor constituting the tilt sensor 385 (S3102). . Next, the direction in which the rare effect (see FIG. 111) is set in the current option effect (see FIG. 110) is compared with the tilt direction of the swing operation member 310 (S3103), and the tilt direction of the swing operation member 310 is determined. Is determined to match the direction in which the rare effect is set (S3104). In addition, the direction in which the rare effect is set is determined by a lottery at the start of the change when the variable effect in the mode with the option effect is determined in the variable effect performed when the special symbol lottery result is the jackpot F. It is determined and stored in the RAM 223.

  In the process of S3104, when it is determined that the tilting direction (operation direction) of the swing operation member 310 matches the direction in which the rare effect is set (S3104: Yes), the special effect table is changed from the advanced effect selection table 222f. Reading (S3105), the process proceeds to S3107. Thereby, in the option effect, an effect in which a monster in a rare mode appears can be executed, and thus the player can be pleased. On the other hand, if the comparison result does not match in the process of S3104 (S3104: No), the normal effect table is read from the advanced effect selection table 222f (S3106), and the process proceeds to S3107. When the normal effect table is read, an effect in which a monster in a normal mode appears from the treasure chest (see FIG. 71) is executed. Therefore, it is unclear whether or not the “roof mode” continues after the jackpot. is there. Therefore, in this case, a game can be performed in the expectation that a male character will defeat a monster in a battle effect during a jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game during the big hit can be improved.

  In the process of S3107, the development effect is set based on the read table and the value of the effect counter 223j (3108), and the value of the vibration pointer 223v is updated to the pointer value at the time when the option effect ends (S3109). Next, the value of the valid period timer 223x is reset to 0 (S3110), and this processing ends.

  Next, the operation effect control process (S2823) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the operation effect control processing (S2823). The operation effect control process (S2823) is executed in the operation input monitoring / effect process 4 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, details of the operation effect control processing (S2823) will be described.

  In the operation effect control process (FIG. 121, S2823), first, it is determined whether or not it is a start timing of an effective period in which the operation of the swing operation member 310 is effective (S3201). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the validity period (S3201: Yes), the validity period corresponding to the current fluctuation effect is set in the validity period timer 223x (S3202), and the process returns to the operation input monitoring / production process 4. .

  On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the timing is not the start timing of the valid period (S3201: No), it is determined whether the value of the valid period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3203). When it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223x is larger than 0 (S3203: Yes), the value of the valid period timer 223x is updated by subtracting 1 (S3204), and the value of the valid period timer 223x after the subtraction is set to 0. Is determined (S3205). In the process of S3205, when it is determined that the value of the validity period timer 223x is 0 (S3205: Yes), the normal effect table (not shown) is converted from the advanced effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 110A). It is read (S3206). Next, an advanced effect is set based on the read-out normal effect table (not shown) and the value of the effect counter 223j (S3207), and the process returns to the operation input monitoring / effect process 4 (see FIG. 119). Thereby, when the player does not operate the swing operation member 310 in the option effect, a normal effect can be set.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3203, when it is determined that the value of the valid period timer 223x is 0 (S3203: No), the value of the subtracted valid period timer 223x is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S3205. If it is determined (S3205: No), the process directly returns to the operation input monitoring / production process 4 (see FIG. 119) without executing the processes of S3206 and S3207.

  In the fourth embodiment, the normal effect is set at the end of the effective operation period of the swing operation member 310 set in the option effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an option corresponding to a rare effect is included, a configuration in which a rare effect is executed may be adopted. In addition, for example, when the option corresponding to the rare effect is included and the vibration mode of the swinging operation member 310 is the weighted vibration mode, the operation direction suggested by the weighted vibration mode is determined, and the effective period is determined. The same control as that operated in the operation direction suggested by the vibration mode at the elapse of time may be executed (a special effect table is read from the advanced effect selection table 222f to set an advanced effect). With such a configuration, even a player who does not want to perform the operation of the swing operation member 310 can be given a chance to execute a rare effect, thereby improving the interest of the player in the game. Can be done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the process when the frame button is pressed (S2824) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the processing when the frame button is pressed (S2824). This processing at the time of pressing the frame button (S2824) is executed in the operation input monitoring / effect processing 4 (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, This is a process of monitoring the press and setting an effect corresponding to a case where the press of the frame button 22 is detected.

  In the processing when the frame button is pressed (FIG. 122, S2824), first, it is determined whether or not the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether or not the back type change prohibition period is set (S3302). When it is determined that the period is not the change prohibition period of the back type (S3205: No), the value of the back type counter 223y is updated (S3303), and the back type corresponding to the updated value of the back type counter 223y is set (S3304). ). After that, the process returns to the operation input monitoring and effect processing 4.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3301, it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3301: No), and in the processing of S3302, it is determined that it is the back type change inhibition period (S3302: Yes). ), And returns to the operation input monitoring and effect processing 4.

  Next, the vibration setting process (S2132) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the vibration setting process (S2132). This vibration setting process (S2132) is executed in the main process 4 (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. Hereinafter, the details of the vibration setting process (S2132) will be described.

  In the vibration setting process (FIG. 123, S2132), first, the scenario type flag 223w is read (S3401), and it is determined whether or not a vibration scenario is set (S3402). In the processing of S3402, when it is determined that the vibration scenario is set (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the vibration pointer 223v (S3403). Next, the duty ratio corresponding to the value of the vibration pointer 223v after the addition is read from the vibration scenario storage area 223u (S3405). Then, in the process of S3405, it is determined whether or not END information is read instead of the DUTY ratio (S3405).

  If it is determined in the process of S3405 that the END information has been read (S3405: Yes), the stop of the vibration motor 380 is set (S3406), and the process returns to the main process 4 (see FIG. 118). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3405 that the END information has not been read (DUTY ratio has been read) (S3405: No), then it is determined whether or not to change from the currently set DUTY ratio ( S3407). If it is determined in the process of S3407 that the duty ratio is to be changed (S3407: Yes), an operation command is set based on the read duty ratio (S3408), and the process returns to the main process 4.

  Next, the command determination process 4 (S2133), which is one of the main processes 4 (see FIG. 118) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination processing 4 (S2133). Of the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 124, S2133) in the present embodiment, in the processing of S2201 to S2209 and S2211 to S2216, the command determination processing in the first and second embodiments (see FIG. 54, S2111), respectively. ), The same processes as those of S2201 to S2209 and S2211 to S2216 are executed.

  In the command determination process 4 (S2133) according to the fourth embodiment, after executing the processes of S2202 and S2204, various announcement setting processes (S2231) for setting an announcement effect such as an option effect and a vibration operation are performed. Execute. Details of the various notice setting processes (S2231) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 124) in the fourth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S2209 that a winning command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning in the first and second embodiments is performed. Instead of the command processing (see FIG. 58), the winning command processing 4 is executed (S2232), and then the present processing ends. Details of the winning command processing 4 (S2232) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, various notice setting processes (S2231), which are one of the command determination processes 4 (see S2133 in FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the various notice setting processes (S2231).

  In the various notice setting processing (S2231), first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by an option effect (S3501). The information as to whether or not it involves an option effect is selected based on the fluctuation pattern command in the special figure 1 change start processing (see FIG. 55) or the special figure 2 change start processing (see FIG. 56). When the mode with the option effect is set as the mode of the detailed variation pattern, it is stored in the RAM 223.

  In the process of S3501, if it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern does not involve the option effect (S3501: No), the process proceeds to S3503 without executing the process of S3502. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3501 that the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by an option effect (S3501: Yes), the start timing of the effective period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (S3502), and the processing of S3503 is performed. Move to.

  In the processing of S3503, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a vibration effect (S3503). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern does not involve a vibration effect (S3503: No), the processing is terminated without performing the processing of S3504 to S3506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that the current fluctuation pattern is accompanied by a vibration effect (S3503: Yes), the vibration scenario corresponding to the current vibration effect is stored in the vibration scenario selection table 222e (FIG. 117 (a)). )) (S3504), and stores the read scenario in the vibration scenario storage area 223u (S3505), resets the value of the vibration pointer 223v (S3506), and thereafter ends this processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, a winning command process 4 (S2232), which is one of the command determination processes 4 (see S2133 in FIG. 124) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the content of the winning command processing 4 (S2232). The winning command process 4 (see FIG. 126, S2232) in the present embodiment is a process executed instead of the winning command process (see FIG. 58, S2210) in the first and second embodiments, and is notified by a winning command. This is a process for performing control corresponding to the performed lottery result.

  In the winning command processing 4 (S2232) of the fourth embodiment, the processing of S2401 to S2405 includes the processing of S2401 to S2405 of the winning command processing (see FIG. 58) of the first and second embodiments, respectively. The same processing is performed. Further, in the winning command processing 4 (see FIG. 126) in the fourth embodiment, before executing the processing of S2405, S2411, S2412 for determining whether or not to execute the hold announcement effect (see FIG. 111 (b)). Is performed. In other words, it is determined whether or not the hold notice effect is currently being executed (S2411), and if the hold notice effect is not being executed (S2411: No), it is determined whether to set the hold notice effect. Is executed (S2412), and then the process proceeds to S2405. Details of the hold notice setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2411, when it is determined that the hold announcement effect is being executed (S2411: Yes), the process of S2412 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2405.

  Next, the hold notice setting process (S2412), which is one of the winning command processes 4 (see S2322 in FIG. 126) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the content of the hold notice setting process (S2412).

  In the hold notice setting process (S2412), first, the value of the effect counter 223j is obtained (S3601), and the obtained value of the effect counter 223j is compared with a hold notice determination table (not shown) provided in the ROM 222. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the suspension notice for the new winning information (S3602). Although not shown in the drawings, the reservation notice determination table defines a lottery result of the special symbol notified by the winning command and a determination value for determining that the reservation notice effect is to be executed for each type of variation pattern in association with each other. I have. In the suspension notice determination table, when the lottery result is a big hit, the ratio of determining to execute the suspension notice is set to be high. In addition, in the case of deviation, the mode in which the fluctuation pattern is accompanied by super reach is set to be higher than that in which the fluctuation pattern is completely deviated or normal reach, and the rate of determining to execute the suspension notice is higher.

  Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the suspension notice in the determination of S3602 (S3603). If it is determined that the suspension notice is not to be executed (S3603: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the hold notice is to be executed (S3603: Yes), a hold notice command for displaying a type of the hold notice is set (S3604), and a sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is generated. The vibration pattern scenario corresponding to the reservation notice is set (S3605) and read (S3606).

  After the process of S3606, it is determined whether or not another scenario has already been set (S3607). If it is determined that another scenario has not been set (S3607: No), the read scenario is stored in the vibration scenario. The area is set to the area 223u (S3608), and thereafter, the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3607 that another vibration scenario has already been set (S3607: Yes), the duty ratio corresponding to the pointer value of each pointer of the vibration scenario corresponding to the read pending announcement effect is set to 0. Multiply by 3 (S3609). Next, the value of the current vibration pointer 223v is added to the value of each vibration pointer 223v specified in the read vibration scenario (S3610). Then, the DUTY ratio multiplied in the processing of S3609 is added to the DUTY ratio of each pointer value in the vibration scenario storage area 223u for each value of the same vibration pointer 223v (S3611), and thereafter, the present processing ends. .

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, the swing operation member 310 that the player can operate in four directions (left, right, back, and front) is provided. As an effect using the swing operation member 310, an option effect is provided. In this option effect, one option can be selected from the four options displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the operation direction of the swing operation member 310. Then, different development effects (normal effects or rare effects) can be set according to the direction selected by the player. With such a configuration, when the option effect is executed, the swing operation member 310 can be positively operated in expectation of the appearance of the rare effect.

  In the fourth embodiment, a vibration motor 380 is provided inside the swing operation member 310, and the vibration operation can be performed by driving the vibration motor 380. The vibration motor 380 is configured to be controllable in a uniform vibration mode in which the motor 380 vibrates evenly in all directions, and in a biased vibration mode in which the motor 380 vibrates in one direction. The biased vibration mode may be set in the “roof mode” when an option effect is selected as an effect for notifying the jackpot F advantageous to the player. That is, an effect is executed in which the swing operation member 310 vibrates while being biased in the direction of the option developing into a rare effect. This allows the player touching the swing operation member 310 to be notified of the direction in which the rare effect appears, so that the player who wants to view the rare effect can be notified of the swing operation member 310. Can be positively touched. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the option production.

  In the fourth embodiment, the biased vibration mode is set as one type of the notification mode indicating the direction of the rare effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be used to notify the launch direction of a ball. That is, in the normal game state ST1 which is a game state in which a left-handed game is to be performed, or in the time reduction game state ST1h, the swinging operation member 310 is configured to be deviated leftward and vibrated, and the right-handed game is to be performed. In a certain probability changing game state ST3 or a latent probability changing game state ST2, the swinging operation member 310 may be biased rightward and vibrated. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player hardly mistakes the launch direction.

  In the fourth embodiment, at the start of a fluctuation effect accompanied by a vibration operation, one vibration scenario is selected from the vibration scenario selection table 222e, and the swing operation member 310 is moved in a vibration pattern defined by the selected vibration scenario. Although it was configured to vibrate, it is not limited to this. For example, only the execution timing and the execution period of the vibration operation may be set for each type of variation effect, and the vibration intensity may be determined by lottery every execution period. Then, a normal vibration intensity and a vibration intensity with a high degree of expectation are provided. If the lottery result is a result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit F or a small hit in the rooftop mode), the degree of expectation is increased. A configuration in which a high vibration intensity is easily selected may be adopted. With this configuration, it is possible to play a game by paying attention to the vibration intensity, so that the player's willingness to participate in the vibration effect can be improved.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the option effect is executed, the operation direction that evolves into the rare effect in the option effect is notified to the player in the form of vibration. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 is configured to vibrate, and the third symbol display device 81 is applied to a gaming machine capable of executing a press effect in which a different effect mode is displayed according to a timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed. You may. That is, in the press effect, the frame button 22 may be configured to vibrate during the period determined to be the best timing. With such a configuration, the operation timing can be easily determined just by touching the frame button 22, so that even a player who is not good at the press effect can be actively involved in the press effect. be able to.

  In the fourth embodiment, the configuration in which the option for performing the rare effect is indicated in the form of the vibration (the position where the vibration intensity is strong) is indicated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the option effect, after the cursor is set to the option by the swing operation member 310, the option is selected by performing a determination operation using a predetermined operation button (for example, the frame button 22), and then the option is selected. The vibration intensity may be made different depending on whether the option combined with is a rare effect option. In other words, the configuration may be such that the strong vibration intensity is set while the cursor is set on the rare effect option, and the weak vibration intensity is set while the cursor is set on the normal effect option. With this configuration, the player can positively operate the swing operation member 310 in order to confirm the vibration intensity of each option.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the game state after the jackpot becomes the latently variable game state ST2, there is a possibility that the biased vibration mode is set in the option effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the uneven vibration mode is executed in a jackpot fluctuation effect during the fluctuation effect, and in an effect notifying the jackpot.

  In the fourth embodiment, the direction of the rare effect is notified by the weighted vibration mode. Alternatively or additionally, when the vibration operation is started, the swing operation member 310 is moved to the player's position. It may be configured to operate in the direction where the hand is likely to be (front side in front view). This allows the player to more positively touch the swing operation member 310.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described fourth embodiment, when it is determined that an effect accompanied by the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is to be performed, a vibration scenario in which the time change of the vibration operation corresponding to the effect is defined is set, thereby setting the vibration scenario in advance. The predetermined vibration operation is performed at a predetermined timing.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the vibration operation is determined according to the sound pressure (the loudness of the sound felt by the player) specified from the sound data for outputting the sound such as the music and the pressing sound. And Thus, the vibration can be output in accordance with the loudness of the sound felt by the player, so that a more realistic effect can be provided.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in configuration in that the audio ramp control device 113 and the audio output device 226 are configured to be able to communicate with each other. The configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the lamp control device 113 is partially changed, and the process performed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, the correspondence between the acoustic waveform and the vibration intensity in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 (a) is a diagram illustrating an acoustic waveform (voltage waveform) of a music piece output to the amplifier unit 307 (see FIG. 130) of the audio output device 226 during execution of the small hit notification effect. FIG. 128 (b) is a diagram showing a time change of the vibration operation output based on the audio data of the music. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), when the small hit notification effect is executed and the music corresponding to the effect is reproduced, an acoustic waveform (voltage waveform) whose amplitude varies every moment is transmitted to the amplifier unit 307. Is output. The output acoustic waveform is amplified by the amplifier section and output from the speaker section 308 as sound. Although details will be described later, data (audio file) for outputting the acoustic waveform (voltage waveform) is stored in the ROM 302 (see FIG. 130) provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. By reading (reproducing) the data of the audio file, a music piece is output.

  FIG. 128 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a time change of the vibration action output in accordance with the music output in the small hit notification effect. Here, the present embodiment is configured to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of sound pressure data based on sound data output to the amplifier unit 307. The sound lamp control device 113 controls the swinging operation member 310 to vibrate at a vibration intensity according to the received sound pressure data. Thus, the vibration intensity can be changed in synchronization with the change in the sound pressure.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (b), when the small hit drop effect is executed and the music having the sound pressure waveform illustrated in FIG. 128 (a) is output, the swinging operation member 310 causes the sound waveform of the music to change. Vibrates at a vibration intensity corresponding to the amplitude. Specifically, for example, when the amplitude peak is 40%, 40% is set as the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio), and when it is 50%, 50% is set as the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio). %, 70% is set as the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio). This allows the loudness of the sound felt by the player to be linked with the strength of the vibration, so that a more realistic effect can be provided.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a plurality of music pieces or sound effects may be simultaneously output in combination. More specifically, for example, when a jackpot is reached and a song for the jackpot is output, a winning in the first specific winning opening 65a is detected and a winning sound is output. Although details will be described later, when a plurality of different voices are output simultaneously, a plurality of voices are synthesized by a voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 130) provided in the voice output device 226, and new one voice data is output. Is output to the amplifier unit 307. For this reason, the voice synthesizing unit 306 is provided with a plurality of channels for receiving a plurality of types of voice data to be synthesized. The voice synthesis unit 306 can synthesize voice data input to each channel and output the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. Thereby, a plurality of different audio data can be output simultaneously.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, a description will be given of a case where a plurality of pieces of audio data are output and a case where some audio data is prevented from being output as sounds. In the present embodiment, during the execution of the fluctuation effect (vibration effect) accompanied by the vibration operation, if a new start winning is detected, it is possible to determine whether or not the suspension notice effect can be executed. Therefore, if the player wins the determination, a hold announcement effect may be executed during the vibration effect. However, during the vibration effect, it is usual to play a game while paying attention to the fluctuation effect, and there is a case where the player does not notice that the mode of the reserved symbol has been changed. In such a case, if the vibration and the sound corresponding to the hold announcement effect are output, the player may be misunderstood that a special (rare) effect has been executed in the vibration effect. There is a fear. Then, if the misunderstanding is not solved and the game is finally displaced by the vibration effect being executed, there is a possibility that the player may be distrusted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the suspension notice effect is determined, no sound or vibration is output while the vibration effect is being executed. That is, only the change of the display mode of the reserved symbol in the sub display area Ds is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from confusing the music or vibration based on the vibration effect with the sound effect or vibration based on the hold notice effect.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram illustrating a sound output method for canceling the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold announcement effect when the hold announcement effect is determined. As shown in FIG. 129, when a hold announcement effect is determined during output (playback) of a music for which a vibration effect is to be produced for channel 1, audio data (audio file) corresponding to the sound effect is transmitted to channel 2. It is output (reproduced). At the same time as outputting the sound effect corresponding to the hold announcement effect, sound data (cancel data) for canceling the sound effect is output to the channel 3.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the sound data corresponding to the sound effect and the cancel data of the sound effect are data having phases opposite to each other, so that when they are synthesized by the sound synthesis unit 306, they cancel each other. Therefore, the set sound effect for the suspension notice does not actually reach the player as a sound. Further, as described above, since the vibration operation of the swinging operation member 310 is set based on the synthesized voice data, the sound effect for the hold notice effect canceled after the synthesis by the cancel data is set to the vibration operation. There is no reflection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sound or a vibration corresponding to a different effect from being output during the execution of the vibration effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from erroneously recognizing a sound or vibration based on another effect as a part of the sound or vibration operation of the vibration effect.

<Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 130 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device 226 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 130, the audio output device 226 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 so that data can be transmitted and received.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the audio output device 226 has an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 301 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 302. A certain RAM 203 is built in.

  The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input / output port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio ramp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input / output port 305. The audio data specified by the audio ramp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 corresponding to the audio type.

  The voice synthesis unit 306 is configured by a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes voice data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized voice data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthesized voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. Thus, various sounds specified by the sound lamp control device 113 can be output from the speaker unit 308. In the present embodiment, the synthesized voice data generated by the voice synthesizer 306 is input not only to the amplifier 307 but also to the ADC 309 including a known AC-DC converter. The ADC 309 is configured to convert synthesized speech data, which is analog data, into digital data and output the digital data to the MPU 301.

  More specifically, the ADC 309 has at least comparators 309a1 to 309a15 and a decoding unit 309b. Each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 can determine whether the amplitude (voltage) of the received analog data is greater than the voltage corresponding to each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15. Note that the voltage corresponding to each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 is set in a range of 7 volts to -7 volts by 1 volt. Each of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15 outputs L when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is larger than the corresponding voltage value, and outputs H when the synthesized voice data is smaller.

  The decoding unit 309b specifies the range of the voltage value of the current synthesized audio data from the combination of the outputs of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15, and converts it into a 4-bit digital value. That is, the digital values are converted into digital values from "0000B" to "1111B" in the order of the voltage having the lowest voltage. Specifically, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is larger than 7 volts, “1111B” is output as a digital value. Further, for example, when the voltage value of the synthesized voice data is greater than 3 volts and less than or equal to 4 volts, “1011B” is output as a digital value.

  The MPU 301 samples the synthesized audio data output from the ADC 309 over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), and outputs the average value (average amplitude) to the audio lamp control device 113. It has a configuration. The sound ramp control device 113 specifies a corresponding vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) from the received average amplitude. Then, an operation command for driving the vibration motor 380 at the specified vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is set to the motor control IC. Thus, the vibration intensity of the swing operation member 310 can be changed in accordance with the sound output from the speaker unit 308, so that a realistic effect can be provided.

  In the fifth embodiment, the digital value output from the ADC 309 is output to the MPU 301. However, the digital value is output directly to the input / output port 305 so that the digital value is directly transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. It is also possible to adopt a configuration for outputting the data. Then, in the case of performing a fluctuation effect accompanied by a vibration effect, the sound lamp control device 113 calculates an average amplitude by sampling a digital value over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second). It may be. The vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) according to the calculated average amplitude may be notified to the motor control IC by an operation command. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 301 can be reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the synthesized voice data is converted into an average value of the absolute value of the amplitude, and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is specified based on the average value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the maximum value of the absolute value during a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) during which sampling is performed may be output from the audio output device 226 to the audio ramp control device 113, or the effective value (maximum amplitude). A value obtained by dividing the value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the sound output device 226 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 131A, the ROM 222 of the fifth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116A) in that a vibration conversion table 222g is provided. The difference is that the vibration scenario selection table 222e is deleted.

  The vibration conversion table 222g is referenced to specify the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio of the pulse signal (drive voltage) to be output to the motor control IC) from the data indicating the amplitude of the synthesized voice data received from the voice output device 226. It is a data table to be performed. Details of the vibration conversion table 222g will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the vibration conversion table 222g. As shown in FIG. 132A, the vibration conversion table 222g has a DUTY to be notified to the motor control IC for each range of the amplitude (A) value of the synthesized voice data received from the voice output device 226. The ratio is defined in association.

  Specifically, in the range where the amplitude A of the synthesized voice data is 0% or more and less than 5%, 5% is defined as the duty ratio in association with the range. For the range where the amplitude A is 5% or more and less than 15%, the duty ratio is defined as 10%, and for the range where the amplitude A is 15% or more and less than 25%, the DUTY ratio is set. Is defined in association with 20%, and for the range where the amplitude A is equal to or greater than 25% and less than 35%, 30% is defined in association with the DUTY ratio. Similarly, every time the amplitude A increases by 10%, the associated DUTY ratio also increases by 10%. In the range where the amplitude A is 95% or more and 100% or less, 100% is defined as the duty ratio in association with the range. The vibration conversion table 222g is referred to when the synthesized sound data synthesized by the sound synthesis unit 306 of the sound output device 226 is notified to the sound ramp control device 113, and the DUTY ratio corresponding to the amplitude is used for motor control. It is controlled to set an operation command for notifying the IC. Thereby, the vibration intensity of the swing operation member 310 can be changed in conjunction with the synthesized voice data, so that a more realistic effect can be provided for a player touching the swing operation member 310. can do.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 131 (b), the RAM 223 according to the fifth embodiment has a vibration effect flag 223ba added to the configuration of the RAM 223 according to the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 116 (b)). The vibration scenario storage area 223u, the vibration pointer 223v, and the scenario type flag 223w have been deleted.

  The vibration effect flag 223ba is a flag indicating whether or not the effect accompanied by the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is being performed. While the vibration effect flag 223ba is on, the swing operation member 310 is caused to vibrate based on the synthesized voice data output from the voice output device 226. On the other hand, when the vibration effect flag 223ba is off, the vibration operation is not performed regardless of whether or not the synthesized voice data has been received. The vibration effect flag 223ba is set to ON when a fluctuation effect accompanied by a vibration operation is started or when a hold notice effect is started.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 302. As shown in FIG. 132B, the ROM 302 has at least an audio file storage area 302a.

  The sound file storage area 302a is a storage area in which sound files (sound data) used to output music, sound effects, and the like in various effects performed by the pachinko machine 10 are stored. When the execution of various effects is notified by the sound lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from the sound file storage area 302a and output to a corresponding channel of the sound synthesis unit 306.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the sound output device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 (c) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 132C, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a command storage area 303a, a music output flag 303b, and an antiphase output flag 303c.

  The command storage area 303a is an area in which various commands output from the audio ramp control device 113 to the audio output device 226 are temporarily stored until processing for the command is executed. To be more specific, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 136) of the audio output device 226 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 303a is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The music output flag 303b is a flag indicating whether or not a variable display effect or the like has been executed and a music based on the audio file is being output. When the music output flag 303b is on, it means that the music is being output, and when it is off, it means that the music is not being output. When the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is notified while the music output flag 303b is on, in addition to playing the sound file of the sound effect, the sound data for cancellation (the sound effect ) Is output to a dedicated channel. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being repeatedly generated during execution of the music.

  The anti-phase output flag 303c is a flag indicating whether or not the output of the audio data of the anti-phase for canceling the sound effect of the hold announcement effect is set. If the opposite phase output flag 303c is on, it means that the output of the audio data of the opposite phase is set, and if it is off, it means that the output of the audio data of the opposite phase is not set. . In the case where the sound effect corresponding to the hold announcement effect is set (the audio file is reproduced) while the anti-phase output flag 303c is on, data of the opposite phase for cancellation is reproduced at the same time. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being repeatedly generated during execution of the music.

<Regarding the control processing of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. The illustration and description of the same processes as those in the third embodiment are omitted, and only different control processes are illustrated and described.

  First, the command determination process 5 (S2141) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process 5 (S2141). This command determination process 5 (see FIG. 133, S2141) is executed in place of the command determination process 4 (see FIG. 124) in the fourth embodiment, and is for performing control according to the command received from the main control device 110. Processing.

  Of the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 124), in the processing of S2201 to S2209, S2211 to S2216, S2231, and S2322, S2201 to S2209 of the command determination processing 4 (see FIG. 124) in the fourth embodiment, respectively. The same processes as those of S2211 to S2216, S2231, and S2322 are executed. In the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 133) in the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), then the synthesized voice command is received. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S2241). This synthesized voice command is a command output from the voice output device 226 and output by the MPU 301 to notify the average amplitude of the synthesized voice data during a predetermined period (0.1 second).

  In the process of S2241, if it is determined that the synthesized voice command has not been received (S2241: No), the process proceeds to S2216. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2241 that the synthesized voice command has been received (S2241: Yes), it is determined whether the vibration effect flag 223ba is on (S2242). If the vibration effect flag 223ba is off (S2242: No), the vibration process is not being executed, and there is no need to set the vibration in conjunction with the voice, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the vibration effect flag 223ba is on (S2242: Yes), the average amplitude of the synthesized voice data specified by the received command is converted into a vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) (S2243), and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) ) Is set in the motor control IC to set the vibration operation of the vibration motor 380 (S2244), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134, a description will be given of the suspension notice setting process 5 (S2421) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The hold notice setting process 5 (see FIG. 134) is a process executed in place of the hold notice setting process (see FIG. 127) in the fourth embodiment, and is a process for determining whether or not the hold notice effect can be executed. is there.

  Of the suspension notice setting processing 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, the processing of S3601 to S3605 respectively corresponds to the processing of S3601 to S3605 of the suspension notice setting processing (see FIG. 127) of the fourth embodiment. The same processing is performed.

  In the hold notice setting process 5 (see FIG. 134) in the fifth embodiment, after the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect is set in the process of S3605, the vibration effect flag 223ba is set to ON (S3621). ), End this processing. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the effect accompanied by the vibration is being executed, so that it is possible to set the vibration operation of the vibration intensity corresponding to the suspension notice effect to the vibration motor 380 based on the synthesized voice command. it can.

<Regarding control processing of audio output device in fifth embodiment>
Next, an output process executed by the audio output device 226 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135A is a flowchart showing the contents of the main processing.

  When the main processing of the audio output device 226 is performed, first, based on the average amplitude obtained by sampling the synthesized audio data for a predetermined period (0.1 second) in the command determination processing (S6002). A command output process for transmitting the generated synthesized voice command to the voice ramp control device 113 is executed (S6001). Next, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the ADC 309 is executed (S6002). Details of the command determination processing (S6002) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S6002, a voice setting process for reproducing voice data (voice file) according to the effect is executed (S6003). Details of the audio setting process (S6003) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S6003 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 303 (S6004). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S6004 (S6004: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S6006), and the power-off processing is executed (S6007). After the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S6008), and then the processing is in an infinite loop.

  On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S6004 (S6004: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 (S6005), and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S6005: No), the process returns to S6001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 has been destroyed (S6005: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Next, a command interruption process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the command interruption processing.

  This command interruption process (see FIG. 135 (b)) is a process executed each time a command is received from the audio ramp control device 113.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S6501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, a command determination process (S6002), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination processing (S6002).

  In the command determination process (S6002), first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6101). If there is no unprocessed new command (S6101: No), the command determination process ends. And returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6101: Yes), a new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S6102), and then the new command flag stored in the command buffer area is set. The type of the command is analyzed for all the commands in the processing (S6103).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a voice variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6104). The voice fluctuation pattern command is used to display a detailed display mode of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 55) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 56) of the voice lamp control device 113. At the selected timing (see S2243 in FIG. 55 and S2303 in FIG. 56), it is set to notify the type of audio to be reproduced and the output timing corresponding to the display mode.

  In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the voice variation pattern command (S6104: Yes), the music and sound effect used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S6105). ), The output channel and output timing of the specified music and sound effect are set (S6106), and the process returns to S6101.

  In the process of S6104, if it is determined that there is no voice fluctuation pattern command (S6104: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a voice pending advance command among the unprocessed commands (S6107). The audio hold notice command is generated in the processing of S3605 for setting the sound effect corresponding to the hold notice effect in the hold notice setting process 5 (see FIG. 134) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device The command is output to the audio output device 226 by the command output process (S2102) of the main process 4 of 113 (see FIG. 118).

  In the process of S6104, if it is determined that the unprocessed command includes the voice hold advance notice command (S6107: Yes), the sound effect corresponding to the notified type of the hold advance notice is specified (S6108), and the specification is performed. The output timing of the effect sound is set (S6109), and it is determined whether the music output flag 303b is on (S6110). If the music output flag 303b is off (S6110: No), the process returns to S6101. On the other hand, if the music output flag 303b is on (S6110: Yes), the opposite phase sound output flag 303c is set on (S6111), and the process returns to S6101. Here, by turning on the opposite phase sound output flag 303c, the sound file corresponding to the sound effect and the sound having the opposite phase to the sound effect are separately separated at the timing of outputting the sound effect corresponding to the hold announcement effect. Can be simultaneously output (reproduced) to the channels of. This makes it possible to cancel the output of the sound effect corresponding to the hold announcement effect and the vibration operation executed in conjunction with the sound effect when another music is already being reproduced.

  In the processing of S6107, if it is determined that there is no voice pending advance command among the unprocessed commands (S6107: No), it is determined whether or not the synthesized voice has been received (S6112). If it is determined that the digital value of the synthesized voice has been received by the ADC 309 (S6112: Yes), the synthesized voice is sampled over a predetermined period (0.1 second), and the predetermined period (0. The average value of the amplitude (for one second) is specified (S6113), a synthesized voice command for notifying the specified average value of the amplitude is set (S6114), and the process returns to S6101. With this synthesized voice command, the vibration intensity (DUTY) ratio corresponding to the synthesized voice data is specified (converted) by the process of S2253 of the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. You.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6112, when it is determined that the synthesized voice has not been received (S6112: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S6115), and the process proceeds to S6101. Return.

  Next, the details of the audio setting process (S6003), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the content of the audio setting process (S6003).

  In the audio setting process (S6003), first, it is determined whether it is the output (reproduction) timing of the music (S6201). If it is determined in the process of S6201 that it is the music output timing (S6201: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S6202), and the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (6203). ), The music output flag 303b is set to ON (S6204), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6205. Note that a channel for outputting an audio file is determined in advance for each file. For example, it is set in advance that an audio file of a music piece used for a fluctuation effect is output to channel 1.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6201 that it is not the music output timing (S6201: No), the processing skips S6202 to S6204 and proceeds to the processing of S6205.

  In the processing of S6205, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the sound effect (S6205). If it is not the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: Yes), the sound file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (S6206), the read sound file is output to the corresponding channel (6207), and the opposite phase output is performed. It is determined whether the flag 303c is on (S6208). In the process of S6208, when it is determined that the opposite phase output flag 303c is off (S6208: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6208 that the opposite phase output flag 303c is ON (S6208: Yes), the audio file having the opposite phase to the current sound effect is read (S6209), and the read audio file is canceled. (6210), and terminates the present process. As a result, the sound effects can be canceled by the voices having the opposite phase, so that the sound effects of different effects are prevented from being output repeatedly during the execution of the variable effect (when other music is being played) ( Can be suppressed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) a player who plays a game by paying attention to the fluctuation effect from erroneously recognizing the sound effect or the vibration corresponding to the hold notice effect as the sound effect or the vibration based on the fluctuation effect, It is possible to give an accurate sense of expectation to the fluctuation performance.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the corresponding vibration intensity is sequentially calculated from the synthesized voice data obtained by synthesizing the music and the sound effect, and the vibration operation of the swing operation member 310 is set. It has a configuration. Thereby, the player touching the swing operation member 310 is made to recognize that the sound output from the speaker unit 308 and the mode of the vibration transmitted from the swing operation member 310 are interlockingly changing. Therefore, it is possible to provide a more realistic effect.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the execution of the hold notice effect is determined during the execution of the variable effect accompanied by the vibration operation, the sound corresponding to the hold notice effect can be canceled. I have. More specifically, by setting the sound effect data for the hold notice effect and the sound data having the opposite phase to the sound effect data at the same time, the sound effects are canceled out by combining them. By synthesizing the voice, by configuring so that a part of the data can be canceled, the influence of the part of the data can be eliminated even in the vibration operation specified based on the synthesized voice data. With such a configuration, a player who pays attention to the variable effect and plays the game may mistakenly recognize the sound effect or vibration corresponding to the hold notice effect as the sound effect or vibration based on the variable effect. By preventing (suppressing), it is possible to give an accurate sense of expectation to the fluctuation effect.

  In the fifth embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which, when a fluctuating effect accompanied by a vibrating operation and a hold announcement effect compete with each other, the sound (sound effect) corresponding to the hold announcement effect is canceled by the opposite-phase sound data. However, the type of sound to be canceled and the condition for canceling are not limited to these, and may be arbitrarily determined. Further, the target for canceling the sound is not limited to the sound of the effect accompanied by the vibration operation, and may be arbitrarily determined. Thereby, the degree of freedom of design can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the synthesized voice data is converted into the vibration intensity. However, the object to be converted into the vibration intensity is not limited to the voice. For example, the configuration may be such that the vibration intensity is varied in conjunction with the brightness of various LEDs (light emitting members) provided on the front frame 14 and the like. That is, the driving power for various LEDs may be determined, and the vibration intensity may be changed in proportion to the driving power. Generally, as the driving power of an LED increases, the brightness of the output light increases, so that the vibration intensity can be varied in conjunction with the apparent brightness. Therefore, a more realistic effect can be provided. Further, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the accessory is provided on the board surface, the vibration intensity may be changed in conjunction with the operation of the accessory. More specifically, the vibration intensity may be varied in proportion to the operation speed set for a driver IC for controlling the operation of a motor means such as a stepping motor for varying the accessory. By varying the vibration intensity in conjunction with the operating speed of the accessory, it is possible to provide a stunning effect operation. Further, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be determined to vary the vibration intensity. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a histogram of an image drawn in each frame is acquired from the display control device 114, and the vibration intensity increases as the number of high-gradation pixels increases. Further, the configuration may be such that the vibration intensity increases as the number of pixels of a specific color (for example, red) increases. With this configuration, the vibration intensity can be changed in conjunction with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, so that a more realistic effect can be provided.

  In the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the synthesized voice data is output to the MPU 301. However, the synthesized voice data is directly output to the input / output port 305, so that the synthesized voice data is directly output to the voice ramp control device 113. It may be. Then, in the case of executing the fluctuation effect accompanied by the vibration effect, the sound ramp control device 113 samples the absolute value of the amplitude of the synthesized sound data over a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), thereby averaging the amplitude. May be obtained. The motor control IC may be notified of the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) according to the specified average amplitude. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 301 can be reduced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the synthesized voice data is converted into an average value of the absolute value of the amplitude, and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is specified based on the average value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the maximum value of the absolute value during a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) during which sampling is performed may be output from the audio output device 226 to the audio ramp control device 113, or the effective value (maximum amplitude). A value obtained by dividing the value by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the sound output device 226 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the fifth embodiment, the vibration motor 380 for setting the vibration operation based on the synthesized voice data is provided. However, a different type may be provided as the vibration motor. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a vibration motor that vibrates in accordance with the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 or a vibration motor that vibrates in accordance with the operation of the accessory is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize various vibration operations.

  In the fifth embodiment, the audio output device 226 outputs the synthesized audio data synthesized by the audio synthesis unit 306 to the amplifier unit 307 and the ADC 309. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only audio data output to some channels is combined and output to the ADC 309. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which channels are divided into channels (for example, channel 1 and channel 2) that generate vibration in conjunction with voice, and channels that independently output voice without generating vibration. This prevents a sound output (reproduced) based on an effect (for example, a hold announcement effect) executed independently of the fluctuation effect from being synthesized with the sound of the fluctuation effect and reflected on the vibration intensity. it can. Therefore, in a fluctuating effect accompanied by a vibrating operation, only the sound corresponding to the fluctuating effect can be converted into vibration intensity. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fluctuation effect accompanied by vibration from competing with another effect, to output a large sound effect sound in another effect, and to vary the vibration intensity. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate vibration intensity according to the type of the fluctuation effect. This modification will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 138 is a block diagram illustrating a voice synthesis unit 306 of the voice output device 226 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 138, in the present modification, the voice synthesizer 306 includes a first synthesizer 306 a that synthesizes voice data input to channel 1 and voice data input to channel 2, A second synthesizing unit 306b for synthesizing the audio synthesized by the synthesizing unit 306a and the audios respectively input to the channels 3 and thereafter (channels 3 to n) is provided.

  Channel 1 receives voice data of a music piece played in the fluctuating effect, and channel 2 receives sound data of a sound effect output during the fluctuating effect. On the other hand, from channel 3 onward, audio data of audio output in an effect different from the variable effect is input. That is, after the first synthesis unit 306a synthesizes only the voice related to the fluctuation effect, the synthesized voice (first synthesized voice) is output to the second synthesis unit 306b and the ADC 309.

  As described above, the audio signal input to the ADC 309 is converted into a digital value and output to the MPU 301. Then, the digital value is sampled for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second), and the average value is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 as the sound amplitude. The sound ramp control device 113 specifies the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) based on the notified amplitude, and sets a command for changing the DUTY ratio to the motor control IC. Thus, even when a fluctuating effect accompanied by vibration (vibration effect) and another effect compete, it is possible to reflect only the sound data of the vibration effect on the vibration intensity. Therefore, an appropriate vibration intensity can be set according to only the type of the fluctuation effect. Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, when a vibration effect and another effect compete with each other, another effect (for example, a hold announcement effect) is canceled for each sound, but in this modified example, a sound is output. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more surely recognize that another effect is also executed during the vibration effect.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the swing operation member 310 is configured to be able to vibrate, but the configuration for performing the vibration operation is not limited to the swing operation member 310. Any configuration may be used as long as it is provided at a position where the player can touch it. For example, the configuration may be such that the lower plate unit 15 and the operation handle 51 are vibrated in accordance with display effects, sound effects, and the like. Since the lower plate unit 15 and the operation handle 51 are always in contact with the hands or feet of the player during the game, when a vibration effect occurs, the player can easily recognize the vibration effect. it can.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the configuration is such that the vibration motor 380 is controlled by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control may be performed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, or control may be performed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. Further, a configuration in which control is performed by the display control device 114 may be adopted. As a result, the processing load on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

<Modification 1 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 144. In the fifth embodiment described above, the audio output device 226 outputs (reproduces) a different type of audio file for each channel of the audio synthesizer 306.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, the same type of sound effect is input to a plurality of channels at different timings. That is, in a case where an effect of continuously outputting a sound effect in a period shorter than the output period of the sound effect is performed, the same sound effect is reproduced for a plurality of channels at slightly different timings. And In the case where the sound effect is continuously reproduced only for a single channel, the effect sound being output is canceled and a new sound effect is output each time a new sound effect is output. Therefore, only the beginning of the sound effect can be output. On the other hand, in the first modified example, since the effect sound is reproduced with the timing shifted for a plurality of channels, even if the reproduction of the effect sound is newly started, the sound effect is reproduced on another channel. The sound effect being reproduced can be continuously reproduced. Therefore, the effect effect of the sound effect can be further enhanced.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in that the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. And a point that a part of the processing performed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 139, a description will be given of a mode of a reserved announcement effect in the first modified example. In the first modified example, a plurality of modes (weak notice, strong notice) with different degrees of expectation are provided in the reserved notice effect. The strong notice is a mode in which the jackpot is more expected than the weak notice. More specifically, the forewarning is configured so that the percentage set for a new reserve ball in the case of a jackpot or super-reach is increased, and the percentage set in the case of a non-normal reach is reduced. ing. In addition, when the stop type is completely off, the stop type is not selected. On the other hand, in the case of the weak notice, the ratio set in the case of the jackpot or the super-reach is lower than in the case of the strong notice, whereas the ratio set in the case of the normal-reach is higher. Also, there is a possibility that the setting is made even in the case of complete loss (for example, 5% of the reserved symbol corresponding to complete loss). For this reason, it is configured that the strong notice production is more likely to lead to a jackpot.

  FIG. 139 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and a mode of a sound effect when a hold preview effect corresponding to a weak preview is executed, and FIG. 139 (b) It is the figure which showed the display mode of 3rd symbol display device 81, and the mode of a sound effect when the hold | maintenance notice effect corresponding to strong notice is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 139 (a), when a hold announcement effect in a mode of a weak notice is set for a new start winning, a new start winning corresponds to the newest start winning among the held symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds. The effect of changing the held symbol HY1a to a special symbol imitating a treasure chest is executed. In addition, a sound effect of “Shakin” is output as a sound effect corresponding to the weak notice (weak notice sound). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 139 (b), when a hold notice effect in a mode of strong notice is set for a new start winning, among the hold symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds, An effect is executed in which the reserved symbol HY1b corresponding to the new winning start is changed to a symbol that looks more luxurious than the weak notice. In addition, as a notice sound corresponding to the strong notice (strong notice sound), a sound effect in which the beginning part of the weak notice sound (voice “shaki”) is repeatedly output is output. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the effect having a higher degree of expectation than the weak notice effect has been executed. Further, by outputting the strong notice sound using the beginning part (part) of the weak notice sound, common voice data can be used for the weak notice sound and the strong notice sound. Therefore, the number of audio files can be reduced.

  Next, the acoustic waveforms of the weak notice sound and the strong notice sound will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 (a) is a diagram showing an acoustic waveform of a weak notice sound. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), when the weak notice sound is set, the sound data (sound file) corresponding to the effect ON called “Shakin” is output only once to channel 2. As shown in FIG. 140 (a), the amplitude of the weak notice sound is greater in the sound waveform corresponding to the sound “ki” than in the sound waveform corresponding to the sound “sha”. For this reason, the sound "" is pronounced as the loudest sound.

  On the other hand, FIG. 140 (b) is a diagram showing an acoustic waveform of a strong warning sound. As shown in FIG. 140 (b), when the strong notice sound is set, the beginning “shaki” of the weak notice sound is repeatedly output to CH2 and CH3. Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (b), the output timing to CH2 and the output timing to CH3 are shifted. Thereby, it is configured that the sound of “g” having the peak of the acoustic waveform among the sound effects (that is, the most characteristic) can be continuously output in a short period. This makes it possible for the player to easily determine whether the weak notice sound is being output or the strong notice sound is being output.

  Here, if an attempt is made to output a strong notice sound only on channel 1, it is necessary to wait until the sound of “K” is output and then output the next sound effect. The output interval becomes longer. Therefore, the strong notice sound may be prolonged, and the effect of the production may be reduced. On the other hand, if the output period of the sound effect is shortened and the sound is output continuously, only the sound “sha” at the beginning is continuously output, and the characteristic sound “ki” is not output. There is a fear. Therefore, it may be difficult to determine whether the sound effect is output continuously or only once. Further, if the sound data in which the sound of the most distinctive "g" among the sound effects is continuously output is provided separately from the weak notice sound, the weak notice sound and the strong notice sound are respectively provided. Since data must be prepared, the capacity of the ROM 302 of the audio output device 226 increases.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, when outputting the advance notice sound, the audio data corresponding to the weak notice sound is continuously output to a plurality of channels at different timings. Thereby, even when the sound data having a long period from the start of the sound output to the output of the characteristic sound is used as the sound effect, the characteristic sound portion is continuously output at a short interval. be able to. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the same sound data can be used for the weak notice sound and the strong notice sound, the capacity of the ROM 302 can be reduced.

<Electrical Configuration in Modification Example 1 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 141, the RAM 303 in the first modification is different from the configuration of the RMA 303 in the above-described fifth embodiment (see FIG. 132 (c)) in that a first discontinuation timer 303d and a second discontinuation timer 303e, a strong notice flag 303f, and an output counter 303g.

  The first discontinuation timer 303d and the second discontinuation timer 303e start outputting the first notice sound for the channels 2 and 3 when the strong notice sound is set, respectively, and then output the notice sound. Is a timer for counting a period until the output of the notification sound is terminated and a new output of the notice sound is started. Each time a new notice sound is output for each channel during execution of the strong notice sound, the value of the timer (one of the first cut-off timer 303d and the second cut-off timer 303e) corresponding to the channel is changed. Then, a timer value corresponding to a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) until the sound “shaki” is output is set. The values of the first timeout timer 303d and the second timeout timer 303e are periodically reduced, and each time the value becomes 0, a new notice output start is set for the corresponding channel.

  The strong notice flag 303f is a flag indicating whether or not the strong notice sound is being output. When the strong notice flag 303f is on, it indicates that the strong notice sound is being output, and when it is off, it indicates that the strong notice sound is not being output. During the strong notice flag 303f, a notice sound is repeatedly output to a plurality of channels (channel 2 and channel 3) at different timings.

  The output number counter 303g is a counter for counting the number of times the notice sound is output during the output of the strong notice sound. As described above, in the first modification, when the strong notice sound is set, the beginning portion (the sound of “shaki”) of the weak notice sound is continuously output. From the value of the output number counter 303g, it is determined whether the number of times of outputting the weak notice sound has reached the upper limit number (for example, four times), and when the number of times has reached the upper limit number, the output of the notice sound ends. Thus, the same continuous number of weak notice sounds can be output for each strong notice sound.

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Output Device in Modification Example 1 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 according to the first modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the audio setting process (see FIG. 142) executed in the main process (see FIG. 135) in the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG.

  Of the voice setting process (see FIG. 142) in the first modification, in each of the processes S6201 to S6205 and S6208 to S6210, S6201 to S6205 of the voice setting process (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment are respectively performed. Also, the same processes as those in S6208 to S6210 are executed.

  In the sound setting process (see FIG. 142) in the first modified example, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that the output timing of the sound effect is determined (S6205: Yes), the effect for setting the sound effect is set. The sound setting process is executed (S6211), and the process proceeds to S6208. Details of the sound effect setting process (S6211) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the audio setting process (see FIG. 142) in the first modification, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that it is not the output timing of the sound effect (S6205: No), the opposite phase flag 303c is turned off in the process of S6208. Is determined (S6208: No), or when the process of S6210 ends, a strong notice control process for controlling the sound output of the strong notice sound is executed (S6212), and this process ends. . The details of the strong notice control process (S6212) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, details of the above-described sound effect setting processing (S6211) will be described with reference to FIG. This sound effect setting process (S6211) is a process for setting a sound effect, as described above.

  In this sound effect setting process (see FIG. 143), first, it is determined whether or not the effect sound to be output this time is a strong notice sound (S6301). The audio file is read (S6302). Next, the read audio file (audio data) is output to the channel corresponding to the sound effect (S6303), and this processing ends. For example, when outputting a low preview sound, an audio file corresponding to the low preview sound is output to channel 2.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the sound effect to be output this time is the strong notice sound (S6301: Yes), the sound file (sound data) corresponding to the sound effect of the hold notice effect (ie, the weak notice sound) ) Is read (S6304), and the read audio file is output to channel 2 (S6305). Next, the value of the number-of-outputs counter 303g is set to 1 (S6306), and the output period for the strong warning sound is set to the first discontinuation timer 303d (S6307). Next, by setting the strong notice flag 303f to ON, it is indicated that the strong notice sound is being output (S6308), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the above-described strong notice control processing (S6212) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 144. The strong notice control process (S6212) is a process for controlling the sound output of the strong notice sound as described above.

  In the strong notice control process (see FIG. 144), first, it is determined whether or not the strong notice flag 303f is on (the strong notice sound is being output) (S6401), and if the strong notice flag 303f is off. If this is the case (S6401: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S6401, if it is determined that the strong notice flag 303f is ON (S6401: Yes), the strong notice sound is being output, and therefore, first, is the value of the output number counter 303g the upper limit value? It is determined whether or not it is (S6402). In the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the output number counter 303g is the upper limit value (S6402: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing for terminating the sound effect (S6403). Here, the first modified example is configured to output the weak notice sound four times (two times each for channel 2 and channel 3). Then, the output start timing for channel 3 is later than the output start timing for channel 2. Therefore, since the last audio output of the strong warning sound is performed for channel 3, it is determined in step S6403 whether the timer value of the second discontinuation timer 303e corresponding to channel 3 has become 0.

  In the process of S6403, when it is determined that the timing of stopping the sound effect (the weak notice sound set for channel 3) is not the stop timing (the timer value of the second stop timer 303e is not 0) (S6403: No), the sound is output. Since this is not the output timing, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that it is the timing for terminating the sound effect (S6403: Yes), an audio file (audio data) corresponding to the sound effect (weak advance sound) of the hold announcement effect is read out (S6404). ), And outputs the read audio file to channel 3 (S6405). Next, the strong notice flag 303f and the output number counter 303g are reset to the initial values (S6406), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6402, when it is determined that the value of the output number counter 303g is less than the upper limit (S6402: No), it is determined whether the value of the output number counter 303g is 1 next. It is determined (S6407). In the process of S6407, when it is determined that the value of the output counter 303g is 1 (S6407), the first weak notice sound is output to the channel 2 and then the weak notice sound is output to the channel 3. Means the period between Therefore, in this case, first, it is determined whether or not the delay period before the output of the weak notice sound to the channel 3 has started (S6408). In the process of S6408, when it is determined that the delay period has elapsed (S6408), the process shifts to the process of S6409. Also, in the process of S6407, if it is determined that the value of the output counter 303g is not 1, the process of S6408 is skipped and the process proceeds to S6409.

  In the processing of S6409, it is determined from the values of the first discontinuation timer 303d and the second discontinuation timer 303e whether or not it is time to terminate the sound effect (S6409). In this determination, when either the first discontinuation timer 303d or the second discontinuation timer 303e becomes 0 and it is not a delay period, it is determined that it is the termination timing. If it is determined in the processing of S6409 that it is not the cutoff timing (S6409: No), there is no need to set a new sound effect, and thus this processing ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to stop the sound effect (S6409: Yes), and when it is determined that the delay period has elapsed in the process of S6408 (S6408), S6410 for outputting a new weak notice sound is newly performed. The processing in S6416 is executed. Specifically, an audio file (audio data) corresponding to the sound effect (weak announcement sound) for the hold announcement effect is read out (S6410), and it is determined whether or not the current value of the output counter 303g is an even number. (S6411). If the value of the output counter 303g is an even number (S6411: Yes), the read audio file is output to the channel 2 (S6412), and the output period for the strong notice sound is set for the first discontinuation timer 303d. (S6413), the process proceeds to S6416. On the other hand, if the value of the output counter 303g is an odd number (S6411: No), the read audio file is output to the channel 3 (S6414), and the output period for the strong warning sound is set for the second discontinuation timer 303e. Then (S6415), the process proceeds to S6416.

  In the process of S6416 performed after the process of S6413 or S6415, 1 is added to the value of the output counter 303g, and the process ends. By executing the strong notice control process (refer to FIG. 144), it is possible to continuously output the sound “shaki” to a plurality of channels at different timings while outputting the strong notice sound.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modified example of the fifth embodiment, one of a plurality of types of notice sounds (weak notice sound, strong notice sound) is output as the notice sound output in the hold notice effect. It is configured to output sound effects. Further, a part of the notice sound (strong notice sound) is generated using audio data of another notice sound (weak notice sound). More specifically, in the case of outputting the strong notice sound, the beginning part of the weak notice sound is continuously output to a plurality of channels at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to continuously output the sound of “g”, which is a characteristic sound of the weak notice sound, so that the difference between the weak notice sound and the strong notice sound is given to the player. It can be easily heard.

  Here, as in the first modification, the sound pressure (amplitude) is small immediately after the start of output, and peaks after a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds) from the start of output. When the sound effect is adopted as the weak notice sound, there is a possibility that the staging effect may be reduced even if the strong notice sound is realized by a single channel. More specifically, when the weak notice sound is output continuously for a short period (every 0.2 seconds) on a single channel as the strong notice sound, only the portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) is small repeats It will be reproduced (output). Therefore, even if the beginning part of the weak notice sound is continuously output, the notice sound may be hard to be heard by the player, and the effect may be reduced. On the other hand, if a weak notice sound is to be output continuously while outputting to a portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) is large using a single channel, the sound pressure (amplitude) will reach the portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) is large. Until then, a new weak notice sound cannot be output, so the output interval of the weak notice sound needs to be increased. In other words, there is a possibility that the effect is prolonged due to an increase in the period from when the output of the first weak notice sound is started to when the output of the next weak notice sound is started, and the effect of the effect is reduced. is there.

  On the other hand, in the first modified example, in the strong notice effect in which the weak notice sound is output continuously at short intervals, the channel for outputting the notice sound is switched every time, so that a plurality of channels are output. The weak notice sounds with different timings input to the channel of the second channel can be synthesized by the voice synthesizer 306 and output as synthesized voice data. Thus, it is possible to output the weak notice sound up to the portion where the sound pressure (amplitude) reaches a peak (the characteristic sound portion) while keeping the output interval of the weak notice sound short.

  Note that this control is not limited to the application to the fifth embodiment, and may be combined with the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment. In particular, by applying to the third embodiment and its modification, even if the continuous hitting interval of the player is shorter than the sound effect of the shortest output period, the pressing sound for each pressing operation can be completely output. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to preferably output the pressing sound in accordance with the continuous hit interval of the player.

  In the first modified example, the control of outputting the sound effects at a plurality of channels at different timings is applied to the notice sound of the hold notice effect. However, the application range of the control is the hold notice effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to sound effects of any effect. Thereby, the storage capacity of the audio output device 226 can be further reduced.

  In the first modified example, the same notice sound (weak notice sound) is output as a strong notice sound continuously to a plurality of channels at different output start timings. Is not limited to the same notice sound. For example, a different notice sound may be continuously output for each channel while shifting the output start timing. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the presentation mode can be further increased. In this case, the effect can be further enhanced by adjusting the output timing of the characteristic sound in each notice sound so as to be shifted.

  In the first modified example, as the strong notice sound, one notice sound (weak notice sound) is configured to be continuously output to each of the plurality of channels by shifting the output start timing. Is not limited to the mode constituted by only one notice sound (weak notice sound). For example, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of different announcement sounds are output in a predetermined order to each channel at different timings. In addition, the order of each preview sound output to each channel may be the same or different. Thereby, the degree of freedom of the strong warning sound can be further increased.

  In the first modified example, the output start timing is shifted with respect to the two channels to output the weak notice sound continuously. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the weak notice sound is continuously output to four channels by shifting the output start timing. As a result, the output start timing for each channel can be further shortened, so that there is an effect that a staging effect can be enhanced.

  In the second modification, the voice "K", which is the most characteristic voice, is continuously output at short intervals. However, not only the voice "K" is conspicuous but also the voice "K" The sound “sha” output before the sound may be configured to be audible to the player. That is, during the period in which the sound of “sha” is output in the other channel during the period in which the sound of “ki” is output in one channel, the volume of the sound of “ki” is reduced (sound pressure May be reduced). With this configuration, the sound of “sha” can be more clearly heard by the player, so that the effect of the strong notice sound can be enhanced. Further, instead of reducing the volume of the sound of “K”, the sound of “K” may be faded out earlier in the case of the strong notice effect than in the case of the weak notice effect. With this configuration, the player can more clearly hear the sound of “sha” output during the fade-out. Further, in place of or in addition to reducing or fading out the sound of “K”, in the case of a strong notice sound, the volume of the sound of “SHA” is increased (the sound pressure is increased). It may be configured. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player hear the relatively hard-to-hear sound “sha” more clearly.

<Modification 2 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth embodiment described above, different audio data (audio files) are provided in the audio file storage area 302a for each type of sound effect used in the effect. The sound data of the corresponding sound effect is output to a channel (channel 2) corresponding to the sound effect at a predetermined timing for each effect.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, sound data (reference sound data) of a reference sound and sound data (reference sound data) of the reference sound And effect audio data (effect audio data) to be provided separately. When outputting a sound effect, the reference sound data and the effect sound data are selected one by one, and are output simultaneously to different channels (or at different timings). With this configuration, when sound having the same reference sound and different effects is set as the sound effect, separate sound data are not separately provided. Only the audio data needs to be switched and set. Therefore, audio data can be reduced.

  The difference of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modification of the fifth embodiment from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment described above is that the configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 is partially changed. And some processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 has been changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the fifth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of an acoustic waveform in the case of outputting a sound in a mode in which reverberation components are stronger than normal and a sound in a mode in which reverberation components are stronger than normal, as announcement sounds for a hold announcement effect. . Here, in the second modified example, a plurality of channels (channel 2 and channel 3) are set as input channels to the voice synthesis unit 306 for outputting a sound effect. , And output to a predetermined channel. Specifically, channel 2 is set as a channel for outputting reference sound data corresponding to the reference sound which is the first component of the sound effect. On the other hand, the channel 3 is set as a channel for outputting effect sound data corresponding to the effect which is the second component of the sound effect.

  FIG. 145 (a) is a diagram showing an audio output pattern in the case where a reverberation sound is generated with respect to a reference notice sound (effect sound “Shakin”). The sound effect (notification sound “Shakin”) is configured to be output at the time of execution of the hold notice effect, as in the first modification. In the second modification, different effect audio data is set according to the degree of expectation. In addition, it is also possible to select a case where the effect audio data is not set and only the reference audio data is set. When only the reference audio data is used, it means a hold announcement effect with a low degree of expectation, and when effect sound data is set, it means a hold announcement effect with a relatively high degree of expectation. Although illustration is omitted, the degree of expectation to be a big hit varies according to the type of effect.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (a), when an effect of a pattern for generating a reverberation sound with respect to the preview sound is selected, the channel 2 for outputting the reference component corresponds to the reference audio component. The audio file is reproduced (output), and audio data corresponding to the effect emphasizing the reverberation component is output to channel 3 for outputting the effect component. As a result, the audio data input to channel 2 and channel 3 are synthesized by the audio synthesis unit 306, and a preview sound in a mode in which the reverberant sound is emphasized (extended mode) is output.

  On the other hand, FIG. 145 (b) is a diagram showing a sound output pattern in the case where a reverberation sound is generated with respect to a reference notice sound. As shown in FIG. 145 (b), when the production of the pattern for generating the reverberation sound is selected, after the audio file corresponding to the reference audio component is reproduced (output) with respect to the channel 2, the predetermined sound is reproduced. After a delay period (e.g., 0.1 second), audio data corresponding to the reverberation is output as an effect component. As a result, the audio data input to channel 2 and channel 3 are synthesized by the audio synthesis unit 306, and a preview sound in a mode in which the reverberant sound is emphasized (an echo is effective) is output.

  As described above, in the second modification, the sound effect (preliminary sound) is divided into a plurality of components, and a separate audio file is stored for each component. When sound effects (notification sounds) are output, audio files corresponding to the components are output to separate channels. With this configuration, when sound having the same reference sound and different effects is set as the sound effect, separate sound data are not separately provided. Only the audio data needs to be switched and set. Therefore, audio data can be reduced.

  In the second control example, a plurality of different reference sounds and a plurality of effect components corresponding to the respective reference sounds are provided in addition to the reference sound and the effect components shown in FIGS. 145A and 145B. Is provided. Further, in the second modified example, even when the same effect component is synthesized with the same reference sound, a different impression sound effect can be output by amplifying or attenuating the effect component. .

<Electrical Configuration in Modification 2 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 146, a configuration of the RAM 303 of the audio output device 226 according to the second modification will be described. FIG. 146 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 146, the RAM 303 in the second modified example is different from the configuration of the RAM 303 in the above-described fifth embodiment (see FIG. 132 (c)) in that a reverberation standby flag 303h is provided. Is different.

  The reverberation standby flag 303h is used to set the output of the reference sound component to the output of the effect component corresponding to the reverberation when setting the reverberation sound as the effect component of the sound effect (reverberation sound). This is a flag indicating whether or not a period (delay period) is in progress. If the echo standby flag 303h is on, it means that the delay period is in progress. If it is off, it means that the delay period is not in progress. This reverberation standby flag 303h is set to ON when a delay period until the reverberation is output is set (see S6317 in FIG. 148). On the other hand, when the delay period has elapsed and the output of the effect component corresponding to the reverberation sound has been set, the output is turned off (see S6505 in FIG. 149).

<Regarding Control Process of Audio Output Device in Modification Example 2 of Fifth Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the audio setting process (S6003) in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the voice setting process.

  Of the audio setting processing (see FIG. 147), in the processing of S6201 to S6205 and S6208 to S6210, the processing of S6201 to S6205 and S6208 to S6210 of the audio setting processing (see FIG. 137) in the fifth embodiment, respectively. The same processing as the processing is performed.

  In the sound setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first modification, in the process of S6205, when it is determined that the output timing of the sound effect has been reached (S6205: Yes), the effect for setting the sound effect is set. The sound setting process 2 is executed (S6221), and the process shifts to S6208. Details of the sound effect setting process 2 (S6221) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the sound setting process (see FIG. 147) in the first modification, when it is determined in the process of S6205 that the output timing of the sound effect is not reached (S6205: No), the opposite phase flag 303c is turned off in the process of S6208. (S6208: No), or when the process of S6210 ends, a reverberation sound for controlling the sound output when a sound effect (preliminary sound) in which the reverberation component is emphasized is set. The control process is executed (S6222), and this process ends. Details of the reverberation control process (S6222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described sound effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 148) will be described with reference to FIG. The sound effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 148) is a process executed to set the output of the sound effect, similarly to the sound effect setting process (see FIG. 143) in the above-described first modification. Of the sound effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 148) in the second modification, the processing in S6302 is the same as the processing in S6302 in the sound effect setting processing (see FIG. 143) in the first modification described above. Is executed.

  In the sound effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 148) in the second modified example, when the process of S6302 ends, the audio file (reference audio component) read out in the process of S6302 is output to channel 2 (see FIG. 148). S6311). Then, it is determined whether or not the current output is set to a type of sound effect (preliminary sound) with an effect (S6312). If it is determined that the output is not a type of sound effect with an effect (S6312). : No), this process ends as it is. That is, the sound effect of only the reference sound component is output.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6312, if it is determined that the currently set effect type is the sound effect (notification sound) accompanied by the effect (S6312: Yes), then the current effect corresponds to the reverberation sound. It is determined whether or not the effect is a sound effect (S6313). If it is determined that the effect is not an effect corresponding to a reverberation sound (an effect corresponding to reverberation on) (S6313: No), then the present sound effect is performed. Is read out (S6314), and the read out audio file is output to channel 3 (S6315), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6313 that the current effect is an effect corresponding to the reverberation sound (S6313: Yes), a delay period until the sound data of the reverberation sound is output is set (S6316). By setting the echo standby flag 303h to ON, it indicates that the delay period is in progress (S6317), and the process ends.

  Next, details of the above-described reverberation sound control processing (S6222) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing this reverberation control process.

  In this reverberation control process (see FIG. 149), first, it is determined whether or not the reverberation standby flag 303h is ON (that is, it is a delay period until an effect component corresponding to the reverberation is output). (S6501), if the echo standby flag 303h is off (S6501: No), the processing is terminated as it is not during the delay period (that is, there is no possibility of setting an effect component corresponding to the echo). I do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that the echo standby flag 303h is ON, it is determined whether or not the delay period has elapsed (S6502), and it is determined that the delay period has not elapsed. In this case (S6502: No), it means that it is not the output start timing of the effect component corresponding to the reverberation sound, and thus this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6502 that the delay period has elapsed (S6502: Yes), the sound file of the reverberation sound corresponding to the current sound effect is read (S6503), and the read sound file is stored in the channel 3. The data is output (S6504). Next, the reverberation sound waiting flag 303h is set to off (S6505), and the process ends.

  By executing the reverberation sound control processing (see FIG. 149), the reverberation sound as the effect component of the sound effect (notification sound) can be output at an appropriate timing.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second modification of the fifth embodiment has a configuration in which the sound effect (notification sound) is divided into a plurality of components, and a separate audio file is stored for each component. When sound effects (notification sounds) are output, audio files corresponding to the components are output to separate channels. With this configuration, when sound having the same reference sound and different effects is set as the sound effect, separate sound data are not separately provided. Only the audio data needs to be switched and set. Therefore, audio data can be reduced.

  Note that the control of the second modification (the control of outputting audio data to separate channels for each component) is not limited to the application to the fifth embodiment, but may be applied to the third and fourth embodiments. May be applied.

  In the second modification, audio data is provided for each component of audio, and when audio is output, the audio is output to a channel determined for each component. However, the present invention is limited to this. is not. For example, audio data may be divided for each output period, and data for each output period may be output to a different channel. For example, if there is a sound effect for an output period of 0.5 seconds, the audio data for the first 0.2 seconds is output to channel 2 and the audio data for the second 0.3 seconds is output to channel 3. May be output.

  In the second modification, two types of components, that is, a reference audio component and an effect component, are output to separate channels as components of audio. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect component may be further subdivided (for example, it may be subdivided into a reverberation component and a reverberation component). Then, each of the redifferentiated components may be output to a different channel. Similarly, the reference voice component may be further subdivided. Specifically, for example, a configuration may be employed in which the sound is divided into high-frequency components and low-frequency components, and the components are output to different channels. With this configuration, it is possible to further diversify the voice that can be expressed, and thus it is possible to improve the effect of rendering.

  In the second modification, audio data is output to a channel determined for each component. That is, the reference audio component is output to the channel 2 and the effect component is output to the channel 3. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, each time audio data is output, a channel that is vacant (no audio data is output) at that time may be determined, and audio data of each component may be output. With such a configuration, even when one sound effect is being output, another sound effect can be output to another channel of the voice synthesis unit 306, so that the output periods of the sound effects overlap. In this case, it is possible to prevent the output of some of the sound effects from being stopped or the effect sound output later to be cut off halfway by the effect sound output later.

  In the second modification, the effect component of the sound effect is configured to be variable according to the degree of expectation of the pending announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration in which an effect component that is most audible to the player is selected based on a balance with audio data other than the sound effect (for example, music data of back music flowing during the fluctuation effect), and is synthesized with the reference audio component and output. It may be. More specifically, for example, when the output of the preview sound (sound effect) is determined in accordance with the determination of the hold preview effect, the sound data of the music currently being output (played) is used to generate the preview sound (sound effect). A configuration may be adopted in which the information of the music during the output period is determined, and if it is determined that the music sound is a part having a low sound pressure (volume), only the reference sound component is output. On the other hand, if it is determined that the portion where the sound pressure (volume) of the song is large overlaps with the output period and that the sound pressure (volume) of the song decreases in the latter half of the output period of the preview sound, the reverberant component is used as the effect component. May be output to extend the output period of the notice sound. This makes it possible to extend the output period of the notice sound in a period in which the sound pressure (volume) of the music is low, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from missing the notice sound. In addition, instead of or in addition to these controls, if it is determined that the sound pressure (volume) of the music is large during the output period of the preview sound, the output period of the preview sound is changed to the sound pressure (volume) of the music. ) May be output until the period becomes smaller. Even in the case of such a configuration, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from missing the notice sound.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, when the game mode shifts to the latent probability changing game state ST2, the game state is the most advantageous game state in which the probability changing state continues until at least two big hits are made. In addition, the configuration is such that when a large hit occurs with the second special symbol from the latent probability changing game state ST2, the state shifts to the probability changing game state ST3 with a probability of 66%. Here, when a big hit occurs in the certainty changing game state ST3, either a big hit that shifts to the latent certainty changing game state ST2 again or a big hit that shifts to the normal game state ST1 is given by lottery. Therefore, even if the game is shifted (ranked down) from the latent probability changing game state ST2 to the probability changing game state ST3, there is a possibility of returning to the more advantageous latent probability changing game state ST2, so that the player is discouraged. In this configuration, the game can be performed with the expectation that the game will be shifted to the latent probability changing game state ST2 again. In addition, by providing a case where the game state is shifted from the probable changing game state ST3 to the normal game state ST1, it is possible to suppress the gambling property from being too high.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is the most advantageous game state, and the probability varying game state ST3 is the second most advantageous gaming state after the latent probability varying game state. State. Specifically, when a big hit occurs in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the latent probability changing game state ST2 is set again after the big hit (looping the latent probability changing game state ST2) or the time saving game state ST1h is set. In addition to the above, the ratio of looping the game state of the game with the latent probability change is set to be 80%. On the other hand, when a jackpot is reached in the probability change game state ST3, the probability change game state ST3 is set again after the jackpot (looping the probability change game state ST3) or the time saving game state ST1h is set. It is configured such that the rate of looping in the certainty changing game state ST3 is 25%. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h which is disadvantageous for the player, it is switched depending on the selection (game method) of the player whether it is easy to shift to the latent probability changing gaming state ST2 or to the probability changing gaming state ST3. With the configuration, a novel playability in which the degree of advantage is changed by the selection of the player is realized.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 is partially modified from the pachinko machine 10 and is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Of the present invention, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The change is that the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 is changed. . Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 150, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the sixth embodiment will be described. As illustrated in FIG. 150, in the sixth embodiment, the second starting port 640 is disposed below the first starting port 630 in a front view. Further, the structure of the second start port 640 in the sixth embodiment is the same as the structure of the right first start port 631 in the first embodiment, and the right first start port 631 is omitted. That is, a left guide member 640a and a right guide member 640b are provided in the second starting port 640. The left guiding member 640a and the right guiding member 640b normally prevent game balls from entering the second starting port 640. On the other hand, in the case of a normal symbol hit, the left guiding member 640a and the right guiding member 640b are set to the open state, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 640. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 150, in the sixth embodiment, the through gate 67a and the through gate 67b are respectively arranged in the left and right direction of the variable display device unit 80. Thus, even if the game ball is launched into either the flow path formed on the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (left flow path PA1) or the flow path formed on the right direction (right flow path PA2). In addition, the rate at which game balls enter the first starting port 630 can be made equal, and the frequency of lottery of ordinary symbols can be made equal. Therefore, since the ball entry rates for both the first starting port 630 and the second starting port 640 can be made equal regardless of the flow path, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in a desired flow path. Can be.

  In the sixth embodiment, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a hit of a normal symbol when the time of the normal symbol is reduced is only one more than the normal status of the normal symbol. Yes, it is configured so that it is difficult to hit a normal symbol even when the normal symbol is shortened. In other words, since the second starting port 640 is unlikely to be in the open state, even when the time of the normal symbol is reduced, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 630. It is a great opportunity. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the time-saving game state ST1h (non-probable variable time-saving state) is set to the most disadvantageous (longest stay in the game) game state, and the normal game state ST1 (non-probable variable non-time-saving state) is set. , Is set as a gaming state having aspects more advantageous than the time-saving gaming state ST1h. Specifically, the time saving game state ST1h is unlikely to shift to the most advantageous latent probability changing game state ST4 even when a big hit occurs, whereas if the normal game state ST1 becomes a big hit, the latent probability changing game state ST4 is set. It is configured to make it easy to move. For this reason, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous in the time-saving gaming state ST1h in which the player stays the longest in the game, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol is set. Set to low probability (equivalent to the normal state of ordinary symbols). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the most disadvantageous time-saving game state ST1h is “normal mode”, the normal game state ST1 is “preparation mode”, the probable changing game state ST3 is “rensou mode A”, and the latent probable changing game state ST4 is “serial mode”. The mode is referred to as “villa mode B”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, a method of transition of the mode (game state) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the sixth embodiment, four modes (game states) are configured to be able to move back and forth. Specifically, there are provided two types of modes, an extended mode A (probable change game state ST3) and an extended mode B (latency sure change game state ST2), as modes that are advantageous to the player. In these extended play modes A and B, the probability of a small hit in the special symbol lottery is set high. Therefore, while holding the ball by the prize ball obtained during the small hit, wait for the next big hit. Can be. In addition, in the extended game modes A and B, the probability of winning a special symbol is set to be high (to 1/40), so that it is easy to win the jackpot continuously at short intervals. Thus, in the extended game modes A and B, it is advantageous for the player. Note that, as described above, the rate of looping the same mode is higher when the consecutive mode B is a bigger hit than the consecutive mode A (the rate of falling to the disadvantageous normal mode is lower). ing). Therefore, the extended mode B is more advantageous to the player than the extended mode A.

  In the sixth embodiment, two modes, a normal mode (time-saving gaming state ST1h) and a preparation mode (normal gaming state ST1), are provided as disadvantageous modes for the player. In the normal mode and the preparation mode, the small hits are not drawn in the special symbol lottery, and the probability of a big hit is set low (to 1/50), so the interval until the next big hit is won is set. Is easy to be long, and the holding ball is easy to decrease. Therefore, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  First, with reference to the upper part of FIG. 151, a method of shifting the gaming state in the normal mode (the time-saving gaming state ST1h) will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 151, in the normal mode, if a big hit occurs, or if a special symbol lottery for a number of time savings set after the previous big hit results in a continuous loss, the mode is changed to another mode. There is a possibility of transition.

  Specifically, at the timing when the game ball can pass through the probability change switch 65e3, the first specific winning opening 65a becomes a big hit (big hit C to G) which is set to the open state, and the game ball is turned into the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit. Is passed (V winning), the game shifts to either the extended game mode A (probably changed game state ST3) or the extended game mode B (latency changed game state ST2) after the end of the big hit. In other words, the jackpot becomes one of the jackpots C to F which is won at 35% of the jackpot, and when the game ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3 during the jackpot (V wins), the game state after the jackpot ends is continuously. The mode is set to Zhuang mode A. In addition, when the jackpot G is won at 5% of the jackpot, the game ball passes through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the jackpot (V wins), and the game state after the jackpot is set to the extended game mode B. Is done. In addition, if the number of time savings can be passed (if the number of special symbols for the number of time savings is lost consecutively), the normal symbol is changed from the time saving state to the normal state of the normal symbol, and the preparation mode is set. (Normal game state ST1).

  On the other hand, even if a special jackpot results in a jackpot, if the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the jackpot, a normal mode or a preparation mode which is disadvantageous to the player is set after the jackpot is over. That is, only during the period in which the game ball cannot pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (difficult), the first specific winning opening 65a becomes a big hit (big hit A, B) set to the open state, or the big hit C to F. In the case where the player cannot make the game ball enter the first specific winning opening 65a during a period in which the game ball can pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (the ball is not intentionally made to enter), The normal mode is set as the game state after the end of the big hit. In addition, the player could not allow the game ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a during the period in which the jackpot G was reached and the game ball could pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 (the ball was not intentionally entered). ), The preparation mode is set as the game state after the end of the big hit.

  As described above, in the normal mode, the same mode (normal mode) is looped at a high rate of 60% or more of the case of the jackpot, and even when the mode is shifted to another mode, the most advantageous retreat. Since the mode is shifted to the mode B only at a rate of 5%, it is disadvantageous for the player.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, in the present embodiment, regardless of the jackpot type and the game state, the switching member 65h is switched at the timing when three seconds have elapsed from the end of the third round of the jackpot. Is activated (the probable variable solenoid 65k is set to ON), and the game ball is set to the state of being distributed to the special discharge port 65e2 for 3 seconds (see FIG. 6A). On the other hand, the timing at which the first specific winning opening 65a is set to the open state differs depending on the type of the big hit and the gaming state. That is, the interval period from the end of the third round to the start of the fourth round is switched according to the jackpot type and the game state, so that the start timing of the fourth round (the first specific winning opening) 65a is set to the open state). Thus, by setting an interval period (interval A) in which the fourth round is started after a three-second period in which the probability variable solenoid 65k is set to ON, a jackpot in which V winning is impossible (difficult) is set. Can be formed. In addition, by setting an interval period (interval B) at which the fourth round is started at a timing when the probable variable solenoid 65k is set to ON, it is possible to form a big win in which a V prize is possible (easy).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the on / off operation of the probable variable solenoid 65k and the opening / closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a are set to be the same regardless of the jackpot, and only the interval period after three rounds is completed is a jackpot. It is configured to switch according to the type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. This makes it possible to change the ratio of the jackpot in which the V prize is possible (easy) for each game state in accordance with the game state. Therefore, for each game state, a jackpot type advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous jackpot type disadvantageous to the player. Can be different. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 160, in a case where the normal mode is set again after the big hit in the normal mode, the number of time savings of 10 to 100 times is set according to the big hit type. The smaller the number of time savings, the easier it is for the number of time savings to elapse, so that it is easier to shift to the preparation mode. If the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode, the mode can be easily shifted to the most advantageous extended mode B, which is more advantageous than the normal mode. In addition, the jackpot (the jackpots A and B) in which it is impossible (difficult) to win the V is a jackpot (the jackpots C to G) in which the V winning is possible (easily) as compared with the case where the normal mode is set again after the jackpot. When the normal mode is set again after the big hit, a smaller (10 to 40 times) number of time savings is more likely to be set. Therefore, in the case of a big hit in the normal mode, it is easy to shift to the preparation mode by intentionally stopping the launch of the game ball in the fourth round in which the V prize may be possible (the number of times The player can be given an option to set the normal mode. In other words, the loop rate is low (25%), but the player can set the extended-villa mode A which is advantageous for the player, or is disadvantageous for the player, but easily transitions to the preparation mode (the normal mode in which the number of times saved is small). Whether the setting is to be made can be selected depending on the game method of the player in the fourth round (whether or not to launch a game ball aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a). Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, in FIG. 151, a method of shifting the mode (game state) in the extended-play mode A (probable change game state ST3) illustrated on the lower left side of the normal mode will be described. As shown in FIG. 151, in the extended-villa mode A, there is a possibility that the mode will shift to another mode only when a big hit occurs. More specifically, in the extended-villa mode A, it is possible to win the jackpots A to D (total 75% of the distribution) in which an interval period (interval A) in which the V winning is impossible (difficult) is set, or the V winning is possible. (Easy) Wins the jackpots E to G (distribution 25%) in which the interval period (interval B) is set, and the player wins the game ball in the first specific prize during the four rounds in which the V prize is possible. If the ball cannot be entered into the mouth 65a (the ball is not intentionally entered), the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal mode because no V winning occurs.

  On the other hand, during the four rounds in which the jackpots E to G (distribution 25%) are won and the V prize is possible, the player allows the game ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a to change the game ball to the positive change switch. When passing through 65e3, the extended play mode A is set again after the big hit (the extended play mode A is looped). Further, when the mode is shifted from the extended-villa mode A to the normal mode, a relatively large number (75 to 100 times) of time savings is given. In other words, it is difficult to shift to the preparation mode (the possibility of winning a jackpot before the number of working hours has elapsed increases). For this reason, in the extended play mode A, it is basically more advantageous for the player to make the hits E to G than to make the hits A to D.

  Next, a description will be given of a method of shifting the mode (game state) in the preparation mode (normal game state ST1) illustrated on the lower right side of the normal mode in FIG. As shown in FIG. 151, in the preparation mode, there is a possibility that the mode will shift to another mode only when a big hit occurs. More specifically, in the preparation mode, the big wins C to G (40% of the total allocation) in which the interval period (interval B) in which the V prize is possible (easy) are set, and the probability change switch is set during the big hit. When the game ball passes through 65e3, the game shifts to the most probable latent probability changing game state for the player. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 during the big hit, the preparation mode is set again after the big hit. For this reason, in the preparation mode, it becomes more advantageous for the player when the big hits C to G than in the big hits A and B.

  Next, in FIG. 151, a description will be given of a method of shifting the mode (game state) in the extended play mode B (latent probability changing game state ST2) illustrated below the preparation mode. As shown in FIG. 151, in the extended game mode B, like the extended mode A and the preparation mode, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, in the extended-villa mode B, a big hit B (distribution 20%) in which an interval at which the V winning is impossible (difficult) is set, and the game ball does not pass through the positive change switch 65e3 during the big hit. In this case, the mode (game state) after the big hit is set to the normal mode.

  On the other hand, if the big hits A, C to G (distribution 80%) in which the interval at which the V prize is possible (easy) are set and the game ball is not passed to the positive change switch 65e3 during the big hit, The game state after the big hit is set to the preparation mode. If the game ball does not pass through the probable change switch 65e3 due to a mistake in the game method during the jackpot despite the fact that the jackpots A and C to G have been won in the extended play mode B, the mode ( This is because if the player falls down to the normal mode at a stretch, the player's motivation to play the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpots A and C to G are won in the extended game mode B, the configuration is such that the preparation mode is set to the minimum, thereby relieving the player from mistakes. Thereby, the motivation of the player for the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the extended game mode B, the same mode is looped at a rate of 80% by continuously launching the game ball in each round of the jackpot. In other words, the jackpot in which a large amount of prize balls are given and the extended play mode B in which the player can wait for the jackpot while maintaining the ball held are in an extremely advantageous state in which they are repeated at a rate of 80%. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game in the pachinko machine 10 with one goal of shifting to the extended-villa mode B. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, although there is a great merit for the player in the extended game mode B, the preparation mode, which is a stage before the extended game mode, is disadvantageous to the player (a state in which the number of balls tends to decrease and the jackpot probability is low). ). Therefore, even if it is possible to shift from the normal mode to the preparation mode, it is necessary to play the game in a disadvantageous state for the player until the jackpot is reached, as in the normal mode. In addition, even if a jackpot is won in the preparation mode, a jackpot in which the V prize is impossible (difficult) is won at a rate of 60%, so that the preparation mode and the jackpot in which the V prize is impossible may be repeated. is there. That is, the disadvantageous state may endlessly continue. For this reason, the game method aiming at shifting to the preparation mode by avoiding the V winning when there is a big hit in which the V winning is possible in the normal mode has various disadvantages for the player. That is, there is a demerit that a big hit occurs before shifting to the preparation mode, and there is a possibility that the normal mode is looped (a disadvantageous state is looped), and a disadvantageous state is caused by being unable to win the big hit in the preparation mode. May be continued for a long time, or a disadvantage that the disadvantageous state may be continued for a long time by looping the preparation mode. Therefore, a game method that avoids the V winning despite having won the jackpot in which the V winning can be achieved in the normal mode can be said to be a high-risk, high-return game method (a gaming method with high gambling).

  On the other hand, in the normal mode, when a jackpot in which a V prize can be won is won, and when a game is performed aiming at the V prize, it is possible to almost certainly make a transition to the extended play mode A, so that it can be obtained. Although there are few prize balls, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the fourth round of the jackpot won in the normal mode, a game method in which the player wins the V (passing the game ball to the positive change switch 65e3) and a game method in which the game ball is not selected are selected. Can be done. Then, different playability can be provided according to the game method selected by the player. That is, in the extended play mode A in which the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained is small, there is a gaming ability in which the prize balls can be stably increased, and a chance to shift to the continuous play mode B in which the expected value of the obtainable prize balls is large. Although it is given, it is possible to switch between the gaming ability and the demerit having a great disadvantage for the player when the transfer is not possible. This allows the player to select the game characteristics according to the taste of the player, the mood of the player for each big hit, and the like, so that it is possible to provide game characteristics that can receive more players.

  Next, a display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. More specifically, a description will be given of a game method selection effect that is executed after the third round of the jackpot won in the normal mode ends. This game method selection effect is an effect that is executed from an interval of three rounds to four rounds, and launches a game ball toward a first specific winning opening 65a for a player (entering a retreat mode A). An effect of selecting one of a game method and a game method in which a game ball is not intentionally made to enter the first specific winning opening 65a (it aims to set a short number of times and facilitate transition to the preparation mode). It is.

  As described above, if the game ball can be allowed to enter the first specific winning opening 65a during a period in which the game ball can flow to the special discharge port 65e2, the game ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3, and the game after the jackpot The state is set to the extended mode A (in the case of the big hit G, the extended mode B). That is, since the advantageous state is started immediately after the jackpot, the player can be given a sense of security. For this reason, in the game method selection effect, the extended play mode A set after the end of the jackpot won in the normal mode is referred to as the “safety mode”.

  If the game ball does not enter the special discharge port 65e2 during the jackpot won in the normal mode, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot, but the number of times saved is 10 times according to the jackpot type. The number of times in the range of １００100 is set. The smaller the number of time savings that is set, the more likely it is that the number of time savings will elapse before the jackpot and the mode will shift to the preparation mode. A chance to shift to the extended-villa mode B can be obtained. For this reason, in the game method selection effect, the normal mode set after the end of the jackpot won in the normal mode is called “challenge mode”.

  FIG. 152 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when a game method selection effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), when the game method selection effect is executed, a gunman-like character (gunman 811) wearing a hat and a cloak is placed in a box (in the example of FIG. 152 (a), tattered). The effect of finding the box 812) is executed. In the game method selection effect, the configuration of the box that the gunman 811 has found suggests the number of hours to be reduced when the game ball does not pass through the probable change switch 65e3 (the V winning does not occur). That is, three types of boxes are provided: a tattered box, an iron box, and a golden box. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 165, the tattered box is easily selected when the number of time savings is large (when the number of time savings is 80 or 100), and the golden box is when the number of time savings is small. (When the number of time savings is 10), it is easy to select. The iron box is positioned intermediate between the tattered box and the golden box, and is easily selected when the number of times saved is 30 or 40. When the game method selection effect is executed, the game mode (the game ball is inserted into the first specific winning opening 65a) is given to the player using the form of the box displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one guide. (Or not) to make a selection (judgment).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 152 (a), above the gunman 811, a character "Discover tattered box on the right side!" And a character "Character hit right if broken!" (Character Dd1a) A display area Dd1 is displayed in which the words "If open, ask me how!" Are displayed. In addition, a display area Dd2a formed in an arrow shape pointing to the character Dd1a is formed on the right side of the character Dd1a saying “If it breaks, hit right!”. In this display area Dd2a, the characters "safe mode" are displayed. Therefore, from the display contents of these characters Dd1a and the display area Dd2a, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility that the game mode may shift to the “safe mode” (the extended mode A) by hitting the game ball to the right. it can. Each time the player makes a right-handed hit and detects a ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a, an effect is performed in which the gunman 811 shoots at the tattered box 812.

  On the other hand, a display area Dd2b formed in the shape of an arrow pointing in the direction of the character Ds1b is formed on the right side of the character Dd1b saying "If you open it, ask me!" In this display area Dd2b, characters "challenge mode" are displayed. Therefore, from the display contents of these characters Dd1b and the display area Dd2b, it is possible to make the player recognize that there is a possibility of shifting to the “challenge mode” (normal mode) by waiting without hitting the game ball. Can be.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the character Dd1a is displayed more emphasized than the character Dd1b. The difference in the character form is switched in accordance with the number of hours saved when the game ball is not passed through the probability change switch 65e3. Specifically, if it is determined from the jackpot type that the number of time savings given when the probability change switch 65e3 is not passed is large (100 or 80 times), the character Dd1a corresponding to the relief mode is displayed. Highlighted. That is, the display mode is set to recommend the safe mode. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of time savings is small (10 times), the character Dd1b corresponding to the challenge mode is highlighted. That is, the challenge mode is set to a recommended display mode (see FIG. 155 (a)).

  Also, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 152 (a), an image of an arrow pointing rightward indicating a right-handed game is displayed even during the execution of the game method selection effect. However, since the display area Dd1, the gunman 811, and the image of the box found by the gunman are displayed in a more prominent manner, the player is given a game method (right-handed) based on a display mode other than the arrow image. Playing a game or waiting without launching a game ball). During the execution period of the game method selection effect in the jackpot, the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 may be hidden. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that the player should select the game method.

  FIG. 152 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in a case where the player makes a right-handed operation in accordance with the display contents of the character Dd1a and the display area Dd2a with the aim of shifting to the safe mode. As shown in FIG. 152 (b), when the player makes a right-hand during the period in which the special discharge port 65e2 can flow down, and the game ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3 inside the first variable winning device 65, the gunman By shooting the tattered box 812 with the gun possessed by 811, an effect of destroying the tattered box 812 (the tattered box 812 explodes) is executed. In addition, the character displayed in the display area Dd1 above the gunman 811 is changed to the character “Successful destruction! Entering the safe mode!” (These display modes are collectively referred to as a safe mode notification effect). By executing the relief mode notification effect, the player can easily understand that the player has entered the relief mode (rensou mode A).

  FIG. 153 (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the player stands by without hitting a game ball in accordance with the display contents of the characters Dd1b and the display area Dd2b with the aim of shifting to the normal mode. It is. As shown in FIG. 153 (a), the player stands by without hitting right during the big hit and waits for a predetermined period from the start of the fourth round (for example, the player enters the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a). When 3.5 seconds have passed since the probable change switch 65e3 cannot pass, the guiding piece 65h2 is moved and the flow path leading to the probable change switch 65e3 is closed, and the rusting inside the tattered box 812 occurs. Key 813 appears. In addition, in the display area Dd1 formed above the gunman 811, the characters “rusted key GET! Challenge mode entry!” Are displayed (these display modes are collectively referred to as challenge mode notification effects). . By executing the challenge mode notification effect, the player can easily understand that the challenge mode (normal mode) is set after the big hit. Note that there are three types of keys that appear from the box: rusted keys, iron keys, and golden keys. As in the case of the box, the rusted key is easy to be selected when the number of times saved is large, the golden key is easy to be selected when the number of times reduced is small, and the iron key is selected when the number of time saved is halfway between the two. It's easier. In the game method selection effect, the number of times of the challenge mode (normal mode) set after the big hit can be predicted based on the mode of the box and the mode of the key.

  In the ending of the jackpot in which the challenge mode (normal mode) is notified, an effect of entering a tower corresponding to the key mode is executed. FIG. 153 (b) shows the display contents when the effect of entering the “old tower” corresponding to the rusted key 813 is set. In the ending effect shown in FIG. 153 (b), an effect is performed in which the gunman 811 finds the old tower 814 and enters the inside of the old tower 814 using the rusted key 813 obtained from the box. In addition, the text "old tower rush" is displayed in the display area Dd1. This allows the player to more clearly understand that the transition to the challenge mode (normal mode) has been made. There are three types of towers: old towers that can be entered with rusted keys, ordinary towers that can be entered with iron keys, and luxurious towers that can be entered with golden keys. .

  Although illustration is omitted, the gunman 811 proceeds to one of the towers, and after the challenge mode (normal mode) is started, each time a special symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner, the number of the tower that has entered is reduced by one. Direction to climb each floor is performed. The tower has the same floor number as the number of hours saved in the normal mode, and when the gunman 811 has climbed the tower before the big hit, the transition to the preparation mode is notified. By adopting such an effect form, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which a player can be caused to play a game in expectation of consecutive continuation in a lottery of a special symbol. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the effect of climbing the tower is restarted from the display contents (floor number of the tower) before the power was shut off even when the power was temporarily shut down due to a so-called momentary stop or the like and the power was again supplied. It has a configuration. The contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are backed up, but the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 are not backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on, a process of notifying the stored contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command is executed. That is, a status command for notifying the gaming state at power-on (the values of the probability-change flag 203g, the time-saving counter 203t, and the time-saving flag 203a2) is notified from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, whether or not the mode is the normal mode, and if the mode is the normal mode, the number of times saved can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Can be restored to the floor number of the tower at the time when was shut off.

  In FIG. 154, it is detected that the game method selection effect has been executed and the player has made a right strike (at least one ball has entered the first specific winning opening 65a). FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the flow path following the probable change switch 65e3 is closed without passing through. In this case, the effect of the gunman 811 dropping the gun and being discouraged is executed, and the characters “destruction failure...” Are displayed (these display modes are collectively referred to as destruction failure effects). By executing the destruction failure effect, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the mode has not been shifted to the safe mode. As a case where the destruction failure effect is executed, a case where a game method selection effect is executed mainly as a jackpot type in which an interval period (interval A) in which a V prize is impossible is set is exemplified. If an interval period in which a V prize is impossible is set, even if a game ball can be made to enter the first specific prize opening 65a by a right-handed game, all the game spheres are discharged from the ball outlet. This is because the game ball cannot be passed through the positive change switch 65e3 because the game ball is distributed to the flow path on the side where the switch 65e4 is provided. After executing the destruction failure effect, the challenge mode notification effect (see FIG. 153 (a)) is executed as in the case where the player is on standby without launching the game ball.

  Next, referring to FIG. 155, a game method selection in a mode that is easily selected when it is determined that the number of time savings given when the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3 is small (10 times). An example of the effect will be described. In this case, as shown in FIG. 155 (a), a golden box 815 is displayed as a box discovered by the gunman 811. In the display area Dd1, the character Dd1b is displayed more emphasized than the character Dd1a. This makes it seem that it is better to aim for the challenge mode without launching a game ball.

  In addition, when the player waits for the challenge mode without launching a game ball and finds a golden key in the golden box 815, the ending effect of the jackpot is shown in FIG. 155 (b). As described above, the effect that the gunman 811 enters the gorgeous looking tower 816 is executed. Then, in the display area Dd1, the characters "luxurious tower rush" are displayed. Thus, it is possible to suggest to the player that a small number of time savings is likely to be set, so that it is possible to recognize that it is a chance to shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, the player's motivation for the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, when a jackpot has been won in the normal mode, the number of times (time advantage) when the V prize has not occurred during the jackpot is determined in advance at the end of the third round. In advance, according to the determination result, the interval period after the third round and the mode of the game method selection effect executed in the fourth round are switched. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to infer the number of times (time advantage) when the V prize is not generated from the production mode of the game method selection production. That is, it is possible to estimate the ease of transition to the preparation mode of the normal mode, which transitions when no V winning is generated. This allows the player to select whether to make a V prize or not to make a V prize in consideration of the ease of shifting to the preparation mode estimated from the display mode.

  In the sixth embodiment, the game method selection effect is executed during the jackpot even when the jackpot becomes impossible (difficult) in the normal mode when the V prize is impossible, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the configuration may be such that the game method selection effect is executed only during execution of a jackpot in which a V prize is possible (easy).

<Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 165. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 (a) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (a), the ROM 202 according to the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 according to the first embodiment (see FIG. 14) in that a time reduction frequency selection table 202j and an interval selection table 202k are provided. It is different in that it is. Further, the contents of the first random number table 202a, the small random number table 202b, the second random number table 202c, and the large hit type selection table 202d are also partially changed.

  The time saving number selection table 202j is a data table that is referred to in order to select the number of time savings to be given as an added value after the end of the jackpot, when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, the time saving number selection table 202j specifies the number of time savings given after the end of the big hit for each of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. Have been. The time-saving number selection table 202j is referred to when setting the number of time savings after the end of the big hit in the big hit end processing 6 (S1762, S1761 in FIG. 170).

  The interval selection table 202k is a data table referred to for selecting an interval period after the third round of the jackpot. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161, the interval selection table 202 k defines the type of the jackpot type and the interval period type set after the end of the three rounds of the jackpot for each game state at the time of winning the jackpot. Have been. That is, one of the interval A in which the V winning is impossible (difficult) and the interval B in which the V winning is possible (easy) are defined. The interval selection table 202k is referred to in the interval setting process to set an interval period when the end timing of the third round is reached (S1803 in FIG. 169).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 156 (b), the first random number table 202a according to the sixth embodiment will be described in detail. In the first random number table 202a, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a big hit is defined as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 156 (b), in the sixth embodiment, eight random number values (counter values) determined to be a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, preparation mode) of the special symbol are set, Its value is "0-7". Of the 400 possible values of 0 to 399 that the first random number counter C1 can take, there are eight counter values (random values) determined to be big hits, so the big hit probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/50 ( 8/400).

  On the other hand, ten random numbers (counter values) of “0 to 9” are determined as the jackpot in the special symbol probable change state (the extended mode A or B). Of the 400 possible values of 0 to 399 that the first random number counter C1 can take, the counter value (random value) determined to be a big hit is 10, so the big hit probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/40 ( 10/400).

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers changes only two in the low probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the special symbol. For this reason, even if the special symbol is in a low probability state, there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be won relatively early (it is hard to get hooked). This is because, in particular, if the configuration is such that it is difficult to win a jackpot in the normal mode, it is possible to easily reduce the time-saving period. In other words, it is easy to shift to the preparation mode, so that it is easy to shift to the most advantageous extended play mode B, which is excessively advantageous for the player. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is not much different from the jackpot probability in the probable change state of the special symbol. This increases the possibility of winning a jackpot before the number of times saved has elapsed, and makes it difficult to shift to the preparation mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress (prevent) an excessive advantage for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 (a), details of the small hit random number table 202b in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 (a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157 (a), in the low probability state of the special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 determined to be a small hit is not defined regardless of the type of the special symbol. That is, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the small winning is not won.

  On the other hand, in the special symbol probable change state, 132 random numbers (counter values) determined to be small hits in the special symbol lottery are defined as "268 to 399". Of the 400 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit random number counter C1, 132 are random numbers determined to be small hits, so that the probability of a small win in a special symbol lottery is about 1 /. 3 (132/400).

  In the sixth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which game balls launched by a player enter the first starting port 630 at an average ratio of approximately one ball to every 15 balls. Then, a small hit is made at a rate of about 1/3 of a case where the ball enters the first starting port 630, so on average, the small hit is won every time about 45 balls are fired. In the sixth embodiment, when a small hit occurs, an open period (for example, 5 seconds) in which about 4 to 5 game balls enter is set for the first specific winning opening 65a. . In the present embodiment, during the open period of the small hit (and the big hit), every time a game ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, ten prize balls are awarded. Thereby, the game balls consumed to enter the first starting port 630 can be covered by the prize balls given by the small hits. Since it is hard to decrease, it is advantageous for the player.

  Next, the details of the second random number table 202c in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 157 (b). FIG. 157 (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), in the low probability state of the normal symbol, only one counter value (random value) of the second random number counter C4 determined to be a hit of the normal symbol is defined as "0". ing. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, two counter values “1, 2” are defined as the counter values of the second random number counter C4 determined to be an ordinary symbol hit.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be hits of the ordinary symbol when the ordinary symbol is in the time saving state is one more than the ordinary state of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, it is difficult to hit a normal symbol even in a time-saving state of the ordinary symbol. This is to make the normal mode disadvantageous to the player. In other words, if the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal symbol time saving state is too high, the number of balls held in the normal mode (time saving gaming state STh1), which should be the most disadvantageous, is unlikely to decrease. Even if it loops, there is a possibility that the number of holding balls will increase. That is, there is a possibility that the holes may be excessively damaged. Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal symbol time-saving state is set low, so that the player is more reliably disadvantageous in the normal mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage from being given to the hole. In addition, the advantage can be added to the extended modes A and B, so that when the mode is switched to either the extended modes A or B, the player has a greater sense of achievement. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 158, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in the sixth embodiment, seven types of jackpot types (jackpots A1 to G1) that can be selected when a jackpot has been won by lottery of the first special symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol. Seven types of big hits (big hits A2 to G2) that can be selected in the case of a big hit are defined. The jackpots A1 to G1 are jackpots with four rounds, and the jackpots A2 to G2 are jackpots with eight rounds. Except for the number of rounds, the jackpot types corresponding to the same alphabet in the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol have the same performance. That is, the number of time savings given after the big hit, the type of the interval period set after the three rounds of the big hit, and the value of the first hit type counter associated with the big hit type in the big hit type selection table 202d. Are all the same. In the following description, the jackpot A1 and the jackpot A2 are collectively referred to as "jackpot A". The same applies to jackpot types corresponding to other alphabets, and these are collectively referred to as jackpots BG.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the jackpot A (the jackpot A1 and the jackpot A2) is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 39”. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random number values) that is the big hit A is 40, so if the big hit occurs, the big hit A is selected. The rate at which it is performed is 40% (40/100). In other words, the rate at which the jackpot A1 is selected when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and the rate at which the jackpot A2 is selected when the jackpot is selected in the second special symbol lottery are both 40. %.

  The jackpot B is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “40 to 59”, and the big hit in the range of “60 to 64” in the value of the first hit type counter C2. C is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 74”, and the big hit D is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “75 to 84”. Is defined in association with the jackpot E, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 94". Is defined in association with the jackpot G in the range of “95 to 99”.

  As a result, when a special symbol lottery wins, the rate at which the jackpot B is determined is 20% (20/100), and the rate at which the jackpot C is determined is 5% (5/100). , The rate at which the jackpot D is determined is 10% (10/100), the rate at which the jackpot E is determined is 10% (10/100), the rate at which the jackpot F is determined is 10%, The rate at which the jackpot G is determined is 5% (5/100).

  As described above, whether the interval B in which the V prize is possible is set as the interval period after the third round of each jackpot type is determined according to the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Is different. Also, the number of times of savings given after the end of the jackpot differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. This makes it possible to change the rate at which the jackpot that enables the V prize to be executed and the rate of the game state after the jackpot is completed can be different for each game state, so that a complicated mode as shown in FIG. A transition can be realized. Thereby, it can be prevented (suppressed) that the game becomes monotonous.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 159 and FIG. 160, the details of the number-of-times-saving-time selection table 202j will be described. FIG. 159 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the time saving number selection table 202j. As shown in FIG. 159 (a), as the time reduction number selection table 202j, a V passing time table 202j1 which is referred to when the game ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 during the big hit (V winning), A non-V-passing table 202j2 which is referred to when no game ball has passed the probability changing switch 65e3 (no V winning) is defined.

  First, the V passing time table 202j1 will be described with reference to FIG. 159 (b). FIG. 159 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the V passing time table 202j1. As shown in FIG. 159 (b), the V-passing time table 202j1 defines the number of hours reduced after the end of the jackpot for each combination of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Have been.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159 (b), for the jackpots A to F, the game state “normal mode” at the time of the jackpot winning is associated with “until next time” as the number of times saved. Have been. For this reason, in the normal mode, one of the jackpots A to F is won, and a V prize occurs during the jackpot (the game ball passes the positive change switch 65e3). Until then, the time saving state of the ordinary design continues. Further, as described above, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3, a special symbol probability change state is given after the big hit, and as a result, the extended game mode A continues until the next big hit. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 161, the big hits A to F include those in which an interval period during which the V prize cannot be set is set (big hits A and B). If these jackpot types are determined in the normal mode, it is difficult to make a V prize, so there is almost no possibility that this V passing time table 202j1 will be referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 159, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpots A to F is “preparation mode”, “0 times” is set as the number of working hours, and if “gaming mode A”, “Until next time” is set as the number of time savings, and “0” is set as the number of time savings in the case of “rensou mode B”.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 159, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot G is any of the normal mode, the preparation mode, and the extended play mode B, “0 times” is set as the number of time savings. . On the other hand, when the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot G is the extended play mode A, “until next time” is set as the number of times for saving time.

  Next, the details of the V non-passing time table 202j2 of the time saving number selection table 202j will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the V non-passing time table 202j2.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the number of time savings “100” is defined in association with the jackpot A in the normal mode. That is, the maximum number of time savings that can be set is defined. For this reason, a jackpot is won in the normal mode, and it is most difficult to shift to the preparation mode when the V prize cannot be generated. In other words, there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be won before the number of times saved has elapsed. When the big hit A occurs in the normal mode, an interval period (interval A) in which the V prize cannot be set is set. Therefore, when the jackpot A is reached, the normal mode in which the number of times saved is 100 is almost certainly set, and the jackpot A becomes the most disadvantageous jackpot in the normal mode.

  Also, for the big hits B and C in the normal mode, “80 times” is associated and defined as the number of time savings. Therefore, when the big hits B and C occur in the normal mode and no V prize occurs, a relatively large number of time savings is set, which is relatively disadvantageous for the player. In the normal mode, the big hit B is set with an interval where a V prize is not possible, and the big hit C is set with an interval where a V prize is possible. For this reason, in the case of the jackpot C, when the game method selection effect is executed, it is easy for the player to launch the game ball aiming at the first specific winning opening 65a.

  In addition, "40 times" is defined as the number of time savings for the jackpot D in the normal mode, while "30" is defined as the number of time savings for the jackpot E. ing. In other words, when no V prize occurs at these jackpots, the normal mode with a relatively small number of time savings is set. Therefore, compared to the case where no V prize occurs at the jackpots A to C, the preparation mode is set. It becomes easy to shift to. Further, when the jackpot D or E is reached in the normal mode, an interval period (interval B) in which a V prize is possible is set, so that whether or not a V prize is generated differs depending on the player's playing method. Becomes When the player stands by without hitting a game ball during execution of the game method selection effect, a relatively small number of times (30 or 40 times) is set. On the other hand, when the player launches a game ball and the game ball passes through the certainty change switch 65e3, the game state after the big hit is set to the extended game mode A. Therefore, it is possible to make the player select whether to wait for the transition to the preparation mode or to launch the game ball for the extended play mode A in which the prize ball can be reliably obtained. Can be improved.

  For the jackpot F in the normal mode, “10 times” is defined as the number of times saved. In other words, the least number of times saved during the transition to the normal mode is set. In the low probability state of the special symbol, since the probability of being lost by the special symbol lottery is 1/50, the mode shifts to the preparation mode when the number of time savings is set to ten (the number of consecutive misses is ten after the big hit). ) Ratio is about 82% (49/50 to the 10th power). Therefore, since the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode with a high probability, it is a great chance to shift from the preparation mode to the linked mode. In this case, the expected value of the obtained prize ball becomes higher when the player waits without launching the game ball during execution of the game method selection effect.

  The ratio of shifting to the preparation mode when the number of time reductions is 30 is about 55% (49/50 to the 30th power), and the ratio of shifting to the preparation mode when the number of time reductions is 40 is about 55%. 45% (49/50 to the 40th power). When the number of time savings is 80, the ratio of shifting to the preparation mode is about 20% (49/50 to the 80th power), and when the number of time savings is 100, the ratio of shifting to the preparation mode is: It is about 13% (49/50 to the 100th power). Even if the number of time savings is set to 100, which is the largest, it is possible to shift to the preparation mode at a rate of at least once every eight times on average. Therefore, even if the normal mode is set after the jackpot despite the player's desire to make a transition to the extended-shelf mode A due to a jackpot in which the V prize is impossible, Then, the user can change his / her feeling and expect to shift to the preparation mode.

  For the jackpot G in the normal mode, “0 times” is defined in association with the number of times saved. That is, when no V winning has occurred, the preparation mode is set after the big hit. For the big hit G, an interval B at which a V prize can be set is set, and when a V prize is made, the mode shifts to the extended play mode B. For this reason, as long as the player does not make a mistake in the game method, the extended game mode B is basically set by the player continuing to launch the game ball. The reason why the jackpot G is set and the number of time savings is set to 0 when no V prize has occurred is to relieve the player from erroneous playing method. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation of the player who has performed the wrong game method for the game.

  As shown in FIG. 160, for the preparation mode, regardless of the jackpot type, zero time savings after the jackpot is set. Therefore, even if the V winning does not occur, the preparation mode is set again after the big hit. Therefore, once the mode is shifted to the preparation mode, the gaming state after the jackpot is only the two modes of the preparation mode and the extended mode, and the game mode does not fall to the normal mode. The game can be continued until shifting to mode B. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160, in the extended-villa mode A, any one of 75 times, 80 times, or 100 times is set according to the jackpot type. Therefore, if the jackpot is a jackpot in the extended-villa mode A and no V prize is generated at the jackpot, a relatively large (or upper limit) number of time savings is set, making it difficult to shift to the preparation mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 160, in the extended play mode B, the jackpot B is set, and only when no V prize occurs during the jackpot, 50 times are set as the number of time savings. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type other than the jackpot B, 0 is set. In the case of the jackpot other than the jackpot B, the interval B in which the V prize is possible is set, and when the V prize is won, the extended-villa mode B is set again after the jackpot. For this reason, as long as the player does not make a mistake in the game method, the extended game mode B is basically set by the player continuing to launch the game ball. The jackpot type other than the jackpot B is set, and if no V prize is generated, the number of time savings is set to 0 (prepare mode is set). This is for planning. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the motivation of the player who has performed the wrong game method for the game.

  In addition, when the jackpot B is won in the extended play mode B, an interval A in which the V prize is impossible is set. For this reason, in the extended-villa mode B, when the jackpot B is basically reached, the vehicle falls to the normal mode. The reason why the number of times saved after the jackpot B is set to 50 is that the player wants to shift to the preparation mode again and aim for the extended mode B after the extended mode B is completed. It is to make it. If the number of time savings given after the end of the extended-villa mode B is set to a large number (for example, 80 or 100 times), the possibility of shifting to the preparation mode is low, and the motivation of the player for the game is reduced. There is a possibility that it will be done. In particular, once in the extended game mode B, the jackpot and the extended mode B are likely to be repeated. Therefore, when the mode is switched from the extended mode B to the normal mode, the player obtains sufficient prize balls and is satisfied. Likely to be. In this situation, if the player recognizes that the possibility of shifting to the preparation mode is low, the player may immediately quit the game without performing the game in the normal mode. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of times of saving after the end of the extended-villa mode B is set to 50 times, which makes the transition to the preparation mode realistic. Thereby, the game can be continued even after the extended-villa mode B is completed, with the expectation of reentering the preparation mode, so that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  Next, details of the interval selection table 202k will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the interval selection table 202k. As shown in FIG. 161, the interval selection table 202k defines the type of the interval set after the end of three rounds for each combination of the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161, an interval A in which a V prize cannot be won is defined in association with a jackpot A and a jackpot B won in the normal mode and the preparation mode. In addition, for the big hits C to G, an interval B in which a V prize is possible is defined in association with each other. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is 60%, and the rate at which any of the jackpots C to G is determined is 40%. Therefore, in the normal mode and the preparation mode, An interval B in which a V prize can be won is set at a rate of 40%.

  In addition, for jackpots A to D which have been won in the extended game mode A, an interval A in which a V prize is impossible is associated with each other and defined. On the other hand, for the big hits E to G, an interval B in which a V prize is possible is defined in association with each other. Since the rate at which any of the jackpots E to G is determined is 25% in total, the interval B in which the V prize is possible is set at the rate of 25% when the jackpot is won in the extended mode A. In other words, the extended mode A is looped at a rate of 25%.

  In addition, a jackpot A that cannot win a V is defined in association with a jackpot B that has been won in the extended-villa mode B. On the other hand, for the big hits A and C to G, an interval B in which a V prize can be won is defined in association with each other. Since the ratio of the jackpots A and C to G is 80%, in the extended-villa mode B, the interval B in which the V prize can be won is set at a ratio of 80% when the jackpot is achieved. That is, the extended mode B is looped at a rate of 80%.

  Here, the interval A and the interval B in the sixth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a diagram comparing the time change of the ON / OFF setting of the positive change solenoid 65k and the time change of the opening / closing setting of the first specific winning opening 65a from the third round to the fourth round of the jackpot. .

  As shown in FIG. 162 (a), the probability variable solenoid 65k switches from off to on at a timing when three seconds have elapsed after the third round of the jackpot. Note that, as described above, when the probable variable solenoid 65k is off, the upper portion of the normal discharge port 65e1 is open, and the game ball can flow down the ball discharge switch 65e4 (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, when the probable change solenoid 65k is on, the upper part of the special discharge port 65e2 is opened, and the game ball can flow down the probable change switch 65e3 (see FIG. 6A).

  The on state of the probable change solenoid 65k continues for 3 seconds, and is switched to the off state again when a feeling of 3 seconds has elapsed. After that, the off state is maintained until the jackpot ends. This off state is the next big hit, and is maintained until three seconds have passed since the end of the third round.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), the opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning opening 65a when the interval A is set is set to the closed state for 6.5 seconds from the end of the third round, and 6.5. When the second elapses, it is set to the open state. That is, the length of the interval set after the completion of three rounds is 6.5 seconds. In the present embodiment, in four rounds of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a is switched to the closed state when ten game balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or when 5 seconds have elapsed. . FIG. 162 illustrates a case where five seconds elapse before ten balls enter the ball. As shown in FIGS. 162 (a) and 162 (b), when the interval A of 6.5 seconds is set, the positive solenoid is set before the interval period elapses (the first specific winning opening 65a is opened). Since the 65k ON period ends, all game balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a in the fourth round flow down to the normal outlet 65e1 (cannot pass through the probability change switch 65e3). Therefore, when the interval A is set, it is impossible (difficult) to generate the V winning.

  On the other hand, when the interval B is set, as shown in FIG. 162 (b), the first specific winning opening 65a is kept closed for 3 seconds from the end of the 3rd round (interval period of 3 seconds). Is set), and when three seconds have elapsed, the first specific winning opening 65a is switched to the open state. That is, four rounds are started. Since the timing at which the positive variable solenoid 65k is turned on coincides with the timing at which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened, the game ball is first specified within about 3 seconds after the first specific winning opening 65a is opened. If the ball can be entered into the winning opening 65a, the game ball can be passed through the positive change switch 65e3.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, two types of the interval A, in which the V winning is impossible (difficult), and the interval B, in which the V winning is possible (easy), are provided. Which interval period is selected is defined in the above-described interval selection table 202k. By referring to the interval selection table 202k, the interval period is switched according to the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the rate of winning the jackpot in which the V prize is possible can be determined for each gaming state. Can be variable. Specifically, in the normal mode and the preparation mode, the ratio of winning a jackpot that can win a V prize is set to 40%, and the ratio of winning a jackpot that can win a V prize in a consecutive mode A is set to 25%. By setting, in the extended-villa mode B, the rate of winning a jackpot in which a V prize can be won can be set to 80%. This makes it possible to set the extended mode A as a mode in which the same state is difficult to loop and to set the extended mode B as a mode in which the same mode is easily looped. You can give priority. Thereby, in order to shift to the consecutive game mode A with a low advantage, a right-handed game is performed in the fourth round of the jackpot, or a large hit is determined based on the possibility of shifting to the consecutive game mode B with a high advantage. In the fourth round, a novel game property that allows the player to select whether to wait without hitting a game ball or not can be realized.

  Next, a configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 163, the ROM 203 of the sixth embodiment is different from the ROM 203 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 20) in that a winning information storage area 203aa is added. . The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The winning information storage area 203aa is a storage area for storing information corresponding to a game state or the like (game state, big hit type) at the time of winning a big hit. In the sixth embodiment, the probability change flag 203g that indicates whether or not the jackpot is in the probability change state at the start of the jackpot, the time reduction counter 203t that indicates the number of remaining time savings, and the time reduction flag 203a2 that indicates that the time reduction of the ordinary symbol is being performed are set to the initial values. Reset. For this reason, at the end of the third round for selecting the interval period or at the end of the jackpot where the number of time savings is newly set, the state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined by the probability change flag 203g, the time saving counter 203t, and the time saving flag 203a2. Cannot be determined from the value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, at the time of the jackpot winning, the information necessary for specifying the interval period and the number of shortened times is stored in the winning time information storage area 203aa in advance, and then the reset processing of each value is executed. (See S662 in FIG. 166). At the end timing of the three rounds, the interval period to be set is specified based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 203aa and the contents specified in the interval selection table 202k (see FIG. 161) ( (See S1804 in FIG. 169). At the end of the big hit, the gaming state at the time of the big hit is determined based on the information in the winning time information storage area 203aa, and the number of times saved is selected from the time savings number selection table 202j (see FIGS. 159 and 160). (See S1761 and S1762 in FIG. 170). With this configuration, the interval period and the number of working hours can be accurately set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 164 (a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 164 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. 164 (a), in the sixth embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21), a batting style selection effect selection table 222ca and a non-V hour count table 222cb are provided. Is provided. The other configuration is the same as that of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The batting method selection effect selection table 222ca is used to select a mode of a game method selection effect (see FIGS. 152 to 155) executed from the interval period after the third round of the jackpot to the fourth round of the jackpot. Is a data table referred to in FIG. When the jackpot is won in the normal mode and the third round of the jackpot is completed, the effect mode of the game method selection effect is selected with reference to the hitting method selection effect selection table 222ca.

  The non-V hour frequency table 222cb has the same configuration as the V non-passing time table 202j2 of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 160). In other words, the number of time reductions set when the game ball does not pass through the probability changing switch 65e3 during the big hit (the V winning does not occur) is defined. When the opening command indicating the start of the jackpot is received from the main control device 110, the non-V hour count table 222cb is referred to, and the number of time reductions when no V prize has occurred in the current jackpot is specified. . At the end of three rounds, the effect mode of the game method selection effect is determined based on the specified number of times saved.

  Next, the details of the above-described batting style selection effect selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 165 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the hitting selection effect selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 165, the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca, as shown in FIG. 165, corresponds to the combination of the value of the effect counter 223j and the number of hours saved when no V prize has occurred. In addition, an effect mode of a game method selection effect is defined.

  As shown in FIG. 165, at least six types of effect types, that is, weak effect A, weak effect B, medium effect A, medium effect B, strong effect, and right strike information effect, are specified in the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca. Have been. In the weak effect A, an effect is performed in which the gunman 811 finds a tattered box, and when the player stands by without launching a game ball, an effect of finding a tattered key from the box is performed. In the weak effect B, an effect is performed in which the gunman 811 finds a tattered box, and when the player stands by without launching a game ball, an effect of finding an iron key in the box is performed. . Although the details will be described later, the effect of finding these tattered boxes is configured to be easily selected when the number of times saved is large (80 or 100 times).

  In the middle effect A, an effect is performed in which the gunman 811 finds an iron box, and when the player stands by without launching a game ball, an effect of finding an iron key from the box is performed. In the middle effect B, an effect is performed in which the gunman 811 finds an iron box, and when the player stands by without launching a game ball, an effect of finding a golden key from the box is performed. . The effect of finding these iron boxes is configured to be easily selected when the number of time reductions is medium (30 or 40 times).

  In the strong performance, a performance in which the gunman 811 finds a golden box is performed, and a performance in which a golden key is found in a box when the player stands by without launching a game ball is performed. This strong production is the production with the highest degree of expectation for a small number of working hours (10 times). In the right-handed notification effect, an effect in which the gunman 811 finds a box is not performed and a right-handed game is recommended. This right-handed notification effect is executed only when the jackpot becomes a jackpot in which there is no possibility that the normal mode is set after the jackpot. That is, when a V winning occurs during the big hit, the consecutive play mode B is set after the big hit, and when no V winning occurs during the big hit, the execution is performed only when the big hit G in which the preparation mode is set is performed. Is done. This is because, in the case of the jackpot G, the case where the V prize occurs is more advantageous than the case where the V prize does not occur.

  As shown in FIG. 165, when the number of time savings is 80 or 100, the weak effect A is defined as the effect type in association with the effect counter 223 j in the range of “0 to 59”. I have. Of the 100 counter values (random value) of “0 to 99” that can be taken by the effect counter 223j, the counter value (random value) corresponding to the weak effect A is 60, so the number of time savings is 80 or 100. In this case, the rate at which the weak effect A is selected is 60% (60/100).

  In addition, for the range of the effect counter 223j in the range of “60 to 94”, the weak effect B is defined in association with the effect type, and for the range of the effect counter 223j in the range of “95 to 99”. In addition, a medium effect A is defined in association with the effect type. On the other hand, since the value of the effect counter 223j is not distributed to the medium effect B, the strong effect, and the right-handed notification effect, these effect types are not selected. Thus, in the case of 80 or 100 time savings, the weak effect B is selected at a rate of 35%, and the medium effect A is selected at a rate of 5%.

  In other words, when the number of times saved is 80 or 100, the effect that the gunman 811 finds a tattered box is executed at a rate of 95%, and an iron box is found with a low probability (5%). Is performed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, when the number of time reductions is 30 or 40, the weak effect A is defined as the effect type in association with the effect counter 223j in the range of “0 to 4”. In the range of the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “5 to 24”, the weak effect B is defined in association with the effect type. In addition, the intermediate effect A is defined as the effect type in association with the value of the effect counter 223j in the range of “25 to 74”, and the value of the effect counter 223j is in the value range of “75 to 94”. In addition, the medium effect B is defined in association with the effect type, and the strong effect is defined as the effect type in association with the value range of the effect counter 223j of “95 to 99”.

  In other words, when the number of working hours is 30 or 40, the rate at which the gunman 811 executes the effect of finding a tattered box (weak effect A or B) is 25% in total, and the effect of finding the iron box is 25%. The ratio of executing (medium effect A or B) is 70% in total, and the ratio of executing an effect (strong effect) for finding a golden box is 5%.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 165, when the number of times of working hours is 10, the value of the effect counter 223j is set in the range of “0 to 9”, and the medium effect A is defined as the effect type in association with the effect type. For the range of the value of the counter 223j of "10 to 29", the medium effect B is defined as the effect type in association with the effect type. The effects are defined in association with each other. On the other hand, since the value of the effect counter 223j is not distributed to the weak effect A, the weak effect B, and the right-handed notification effect, these effect types are not selected.

  In other words, when the number of working hours is 10, the effect that the gunman 811 performs the effect of finding the tattered box (weak effect A or B) is not executed, and the effect of finding the iron box (medium) The ratio of executing the effect A or B) is 30% in total, and the ratio of executing the effect (strong effect) for finding the golden box is 70%.

  On the other hand, when the number of time savings is 0, the right-handed notification effect is executed as the effect type regardless of the value of the effect counter 223j (all values from 0 to 99).

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the ratio of the production mode selected as the game method selection production is changed according to the number of time savings (degree of advantage) set when it is assumed that no V winning has occurred. It has a configuration. In other words, the weak effects A and B are configured to be easily selected when the number of time reductions is large and difficult to be selected when the number is small, and the medium effects A and B are selected when the number of time reductions is intermediate (30 or 40). The strong effect is easily selected when the number of time reductions is small, and hard to be selected when the number of time reductions is large. With such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to estimate the number of time savings in the case where no V winning has occurred from the mode of the game method selection effect. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to generate the V prize in consideration of the effect form, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 164 (b) is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 164 (b), the RAM 223 of the sixth embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) in that a stop type storage area 223ca and a non-V hour count storage area 223cb are provided. 223 cc, a shooting effect flag 223 cd, a notified flag 223 ce, and a V passing number counter 223 cf.

  The stop type storage area 223ca is a storage area for storing information indicating the stop type extracted from the stop type command received from the main control device 110. In the stop type storage area 223ca, information indicating the stop type of the first special symbol and information indicating the stop type of the second special symbol can be separately stored. When a big hit occurs during the normal mode, the big hit type is specified from the information indicating the stop type stored in the stop type storage area 223ca, and it is assumed that no V winning has occurred during the big hit. The number of times saved is read from the non-V hour number table 222cb. In accordance with the read time saving times, the effect mode of the game method selection effect executed during the big hit is determined from the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca.

  The non-V hour count storage area 223cb stores the number of hour savings read from the non-V hour count table 222cb when a big hit is won (the number of time savings set when it is assumed that no V winning has occurred at the big hit). Is a storage area for storing. Based on the number of times saved in the non-V hour number table 222cb, the display mode of the game method selection effect to be executed during the jackpot won in the normal mode is selected from the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca (see FIG. 165). Is done.

  The selection effect flag 223cc is a flag indicating whether or not the game method selection effect is being executed. If the selected effect flag 223cc is on, it means that the game method selection effect is being executed. If it is off, it means that the game method selection effect is not being executed. The selected effect flag 223cc is set to ON when an interval period after the third round is set in the interval command processing (see S3907 in FIG. 175). On the other hand, in the ending command process executed while the selected effect flag 223cc is on, the flag is set to off (see S4002 in FIG. 176).

  The shooting effect flag 223cd is a flag indicating whether or not a shooting effect in which a gunman 811 shoots at a box found by the gunman 811 is being executed in the game method selection effect. If the shooting effect flag 223cd is on, it means that the shooting effect is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the shooting effect is not being executed. This shooting effect flag 223cd is set to ON when a ball is first detected in the first specific winning opening 65a during execution of the game method selection effect (see S4104 in FIG. 177).

  The notified flag 223ce is a flag indicating whether or not the entry into the safe mode (see FIG. 152 (b)) has been executed (the entry into the safe mode has been notified). If the notified flag 223ce is on, it means that the safe mode entry effect has been executed, and if it is off, it means that the safe mode entry effect has not been executed. In the present embodiment, in the game method selection effect, five game balls have passed through the probability change switch 65e3, or 3.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the fourth round, and at least one game ball has been switched to the probability change switch 65e3. , The security mode entry effect is executed when passing through. The notified flag 223ce is set to ON when one of the conditions is satisfied and the execution of the safe mode entry effect is set (see S3705 in FIG. 172 and S4110 in FIG. 177). If the notified flag 223ce is on, the effect that the gunman 811 shoots is not executed thereafter, even if the game ball is detected to enter the first specific winning opening 65a.

  The V passing number counter 223cf is a counter for counting the number of times that the main control device 110 has notified the sound ramp control device 113 that passing of the probability change switch 65e3 has been detected in a big hit of 1. That is, it is a counter for counting the number of times that the V winning has occurred. During the execution of the game method selection effect, based on the counter value of the V passing number counter 223cf, when the value of the V passing number counter 223cf becomes 5 before 3.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fourth round, , A security mode entry effect is executed (see S4109 in FIG. 177). In addition, as the big hit ending effect in which the game method selection effect is executed, an ending effect of a different mode is executed depending on whether the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is 0 or not.

<Control Process of Main Controller in Sixth Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The illustration and description of the same processing as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 166, details of the first special symbol change stop processing 6 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol change stop processing 6. This first special symbol change stop processing 6 is, like the first special symbol change stop processing (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, performed when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed. This is a process of stopping the variable display with a symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game.

  In the first special symbol variation stop process 6 (see FIG. 166), in each of the processes of S601 to S606 and S608 to S612, S601 of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment is respectively performed. To S606 and S608 to S612. In the first special symbol change stop process 6 (see FIG. 166) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S605 is completed, the jackpot is then determined based on the values of the probability change flag 203g, the time-saving counter 203t, and the time-saving flag 203a2. The game state at the time of winning is specified (S661), and information corresponding to the specified game state is stored in the winning information storage area 203aa (S662).

  In the first special symbol variation stop process 6 (see FIG. 166) in the sixth embodiment, after the process of S606 ends, the probable change flag 203g and the time saving flag 203a2 are set to off (S663), The process shifts to S608.

  By executing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 6 (see FIG. 166), the information necessary for specifying the interval period and the number of shortened times in the winning time information storage area 203aa at the time of the jackpot winning is determined. After storing in advance, reset processing of each value can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to accurately set the interval period and the number of time savings from the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the sixth embodiment, the second special symbol variation stop processing 6 is executed in place of the second special symbol variation stop processing (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. I have. In the second special symbol change stop process 6, processes similar to S661 to S663 of the above-described first special symbol change stop process 6 (see FIG. 166) are added.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 167, a jackpot control process 6 (S1750) executed in place of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 46) in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S1750).

  Among the jackpot control processes 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, in the respective processes of S1621 to S1624, S1626, S1629 to S1631, and S1633 to S1635, the respective jackpot control processes in the first embodiment (see FIG. 46). ), The same processes as those of S1621 to S1624, S1626, S1629 to S1631, and S1633 to S1635 are executed.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1624 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1624: Yes), the jackpot operation in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of the setting process (see FIG. 47), a jackpot operation setting process 6 is executed (S1751), and this process ends. The details of the jackpot operation setting process 6 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1626 that the round end timing has been reached (S1626), an interval setting process for setting an interval period is performed. The process is executed (S1752), and the process ends. The details of the interval setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is the jackpot ending timing (S1631: Yes), then the jackpot ending in the first embodiment is performed. Instead of the process (see FIG. 48), a jackpot end process 6 is executed (S1753), and this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 168, details of the above-described jackpot operation setting process 6 (S1751) will be described. In the big hit operation setting process 6, in each of the processes of S1641 and S1643, the same processes as the respective processes of S1641 and S1643 of the big hit operation setting process (see FIG. 47) in the first embodiment are respectively executed. In the jackpot operation setting process 6 (see FIG. 168) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1643 is completed, the round number command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the newly started round number is next. Is set (S1754), and this processing ends.

  Next, the details of the above-described interval setting processing (S1752) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the interval setting processing (S1752).

  In this interval setting process (see FIG. 169), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the third round of the jackpot (S1801), and if it is not the end timing of the third round (S1801: No). Then, an interval period of 3 seconds is set (S1802), and the process shifts to S1807.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1801 that it is the end timing of the third round (S1801: Yes), the interval selection table 202k is read (S1803), and the data in the winning information storage area 203aa is read from the read table. Is read (S1804), and the read interval period is set as an interval period after the completion of three rounds (S1805). Next, the operation pattern of the probable change solenoid 65k is set (S1806), and the process proceeds to S1807. In the processing of S1807 executed after the processing of S1802 or S1806, an interval command for notifying the start of the interval to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S1807), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the details of the above-described big hit end processing 6 (S1753) will be described. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 6 (S1753).

  In the big hit end processing 6 (see FIG. 170), in each of the processing of S1651 and S1652, the same processing as each of the big hit end processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 48) of S1651 and S1652 is executed. Is done. In the jackpot end process 6 (see FIG. 170) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1651 that the probable change setting flag 203h is off (S1651: No), then the time saving number selection table 202j Is read from the V non-passing time table 202j2 (S1761), and the process proceeds to S1763.

  In the big hit end process 6 (see FIG. 170) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S1652 ends, the V passing time table 202j1 is read from the time saving number selection table 202j (S1762), and the process proceeds to S1763. Transition. In the processing of S1763 executed after the processing of S1761 or S1762, the time saving type corresponding to the data of the winning information storage area 203aa is read from the table read in each of these processing (S1763).

  Next, it is determined whether the read time-saving type is a time-saving type that continues until the next big hit (S1764). If it is determined that the time-saving type is continued until the next big hit (S1764: Yes), the process proceeds to S1767. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1764 that the type does not continue until the next big hit (S1764: No), the number of time savings read out in the processing of S1763 is set in the time saving counter 203t (S1765). Next, it is determined whether the counter value set in the time reduction counter 203t is 0 (S1766). If it is 0 (S1766: Yes), the process proceeds to S1768.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1766, if it is determined that the counter value set in the time reduction counter 203t is not 0 (S1766: No), the process proceeds to S1767. In the process of S1767, the time reduction flag 203a2 is set to ON (S1767), and the process proceeds to S1768. In the processing of S1768, the probability change setting flag 203h and the winning information storage area 203aa are reset (S1768), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 171, main processing 6 (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing details of the main processing (see FIG. 171). The main process 6 (see FIG. 171) is a process executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment.

  In the main processing 6 (see FIG. 171), in each processing of S2101 to S2117, the same processing as the processing of S2101 to S2117 of the main processing (see FIG. 53) in the first embodiment is respectively executed. In the main process 6 (see FIG. 171) in the sixth embodiment, when the process of S2110 is completed, next, after the big hit according to the selection result of the player in the game method selection effect and the presence or absence of the V prize, A game result notification process (S2151) for indicating a game state is executed, and the process proceeds to S2111. Details of the game result notification processing (S2151) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the game result notification process (S2151). In this game result notifying process (S2151), first, it is determined whether or not the selected effect flag 223cc is on (S3701), and if it is determined that the flag is off (S3701: No), the process ends as it is. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the selected effect flag 223cc is on (S3701: Yes), it is next determined whether or not it is a game result notification timing (S3702), and it is determined that the game result notification timing is not reached. If this has been done (S3702: No), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3702, when it is determined that it is the notification timing of the game result (S3702: Yes), first, it is determined whether the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S3703), and the shooting effect flag 223cd is not on. (That is, the player is standing by without entering any game ball in the first specific winning opening 65a in the fourth round) (S3703: No), this game method selection effect The key discovery effect (see FIG. 153 (a)) corresponding to the effect type is set (S3704), and the process ends.

  Also, in the processing of S3703, if it is determined that the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S3703: Yes), first, the notified flag 223ce is set on (S3705). Next, it is determined whether the V passing number counter 223cg is a value larger than 0 (1 or more) (S3706). If it is larger than 0 (S3706: Yes), the safety mode entry effect (FIG. b) is set (S3708), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3706, when it is determined that the value of the V passing number counter 223cg is 0 (S3706: Yes), it is determined that the player has inserted the game ball into the first specific winning opening 65a. This means that no V prize has occurred, so a destruction failure effect (see FIG. 154) is set (S3707), and this process ends.

  By executing the game result notification process (see FIG. 172), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the game state after the big hit in a mode according to the game method selected by the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 173, a description is given of a command determination process 6 (S2111) executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing 6 (S2111).

  In the command determination processing 6 (see FIG. 173), in each processing of S2201 to S2216, the same processing as the processing of each of S2201 to S2216 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 54) in the first embodiment is executed. .

  In the command determination process 6 (see FIG. 173) in the sixth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S2213 that the notification command has not been received (S2213: No), then the command related to the jackpot is determined. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2261). If it is determined that the command related to the jackpot has not been received (S2261: No), the process proceeds to S2216. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2261 that a command related to the jackpot has been received (S2261: Yes), a jackpot-related command process for performing control according to the command related to the jackpot is executed (S2262). ), End this processing. Details of the jackpot-related command processing (S2262) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related command processing (S2262). In the jackpot-related command processing (see FIG. 174), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (S3801). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S3801: Yes), the stop type storage area 223ca Based on the information on the type of stop stored in, the current jackpot type is specified (S3802). Next, the number of time savings corresponding to the jackpot type is read from the non-V hour number table 222cb, and the read number of time savings is stored in the non-V hour number storage area 223cb (S3803). Next, a display opening command is set (S3804), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3801 that no opening command has been received (S3801: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S3805) and it is determined that a round number command has been received. If it has been performed (S3805: Yes), a display round number command for supporting the display control device 114 to display the number of rounds corresponding to the command on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S3806). Then, the present process ends.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3805 that the round number command has not been received (S3805: No), it is determined whether or not an interval command has been received (S3807), and if it has been determined that the interval command has been received. (S3807: Yes), executes an interval command process for executing control corresponding to the interval notified by the interval command (S3808), and ends this process. Details of this interval command processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3807 that no interval command has been received (S3807: No), it is next determined whether an ending command has been received (S3809) and it is determined that an ending command has been received. If it has been done (S3809: Yes), an ending command process for determining the ending effect mode is executed (S3810), and this process ends. Details of the ending command processing (S3810) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the processing of S3809 that the ending command has not been received (S3809: No), then it is determined whether or not a large open mouth winning command has been received (S3811). Each time the main control unit 110 detects the entry of a game ball to the first specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, the main opening control unit 110 sends the entering ball to the sound lamp control unit 113. This command is output for notification. In the process of S3811, when it is determined that the large open mouth winning command has been received (S3811: Yes), a switch passage command process for performing control according to winning in the first specific winning opening 65a is executed ( In step S3812, the process ends. Details of the switch passage command processing (S3812) will be described later with reference to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S3812 that the large opening winning command has not been received (S3812: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

  Next, details of the above-described interval command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this interval command processing (see FIG. 175). In the interval command processing (see FIG. 175), first, it is determined whether or not the command indicates an interval after the third round is completed. If it is determined that the command is not an interval set after the third round is completed (S3901: No), the process moves to S3908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3901 that the interval is set after the end of the third round (S3901: Yes), the information stored in the slave state setting area 223k is read (S3902), and the read information is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot has been won during the normal mode (S3903).

  In the processing of S3903, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in the normal mode (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3903 that the hit is a jackpot in the normal mode (S3903: Yes), then the batting style selection effect selection table 222ca is read (S3904), and the non-V An effect type corresponding to the number of times saved in the number-of-times storage area 223cb and each value of the effect counter 223j is determined (S3905).

  Next, a display interval command for notifying the display control device 114 of an interval effect of the determined effect type is set (S3906), and the selected effect flag 223cc is set to ON (S3907). finish. On the other hand, in the processing of S3908 executed when it is determined that it is not the third round in the processing of S3901 (S3901: No), and when it is determined that the normal mode is not in the processing of S3903 (S3903: No) A display interval command for notifying the display control device 114 of the interval effect of (1) is set (S3908), and this processing ends.

  By executing this interval command processing (see FIG. 175), in the third round of the jackpot that has been won in the normal mode, a game in a mode according to the number of hours saved, which will be set when no V winning has occurred. A method selection effect can be set. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to generate the V prize from the effect mode.

  Next, the details of the above-mentioned ending command processing (S3810) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ending command process (S3810), first, it is determined whether or not the selected effect flag 223cc is on (S4001). If the flag is off (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, in the process of S4001, if it is determined that the selected effect flag 223cc is on (S4001: Yes), the selected effect flag 223cc, the shooting effect flag 223cd, and the notified flag 223ce are all turned off ( S4002).

  Upon completion of the process in S4002, it is next determined whether or not the value of the V passage number counter 223cf is 0 (whether or not a V winning has occurred in the current big hit) (S4003), and the counter value is set to 1 If it is determined that this is the case (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4005. On the other hand, in the processing of S4003, when it is determined that the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is 0 (S4003: Yes), a game method selection effect is executed, and whether or not the player waits without hitting a game ball, This means that, despite the player launching a game ball, the game ball did not pass through the probable change switch 65e3. That is, since the gaming state after the big hit means the normal mode, in this case, the ending type corresponding to the rendering type of the current game method selection rendering is specified, and the identified ending type is notified. The display ending command is set (S4004), and the process ends.

  Further, in the processing of S4001, it is determined that the selected effect flag 223cc is off (S4001: No), and in the processing of S4003, it is determined that the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is 1 or more (S4003: In the process of S4005 executed in No), a display ending command for notifying a normal ending effect is set (S4005), the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is reset to 0 (S4006), and this process is performed. To end.

  Next, the details of the above-described switch passage command processing (S3812) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the switch passage command processing (S3812).

  In this switch passage command processing (see FIG. 177), first, it is determined whether or not the selected effect flag 223cc is on (S4101), and if it is determined to be off (S4101: No), this processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, in the process of S4101, when it is determined that the selected effect flag 223cc is on (S4101: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the notified flag 223ce is on (S4102). If this is the case (S4102: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4102, when it is determined that the notified flag 223ce is off (S4102: No), it is determined whether the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S4103). (S4103: No) Since this command is output based on the fact that a game ball has first entered the first specific winning opening 65a in the game method selection effect, the shooting effect flag 223cd is set. It is set to ON (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105. On the other hand, in the process of S4103, if it is determined that the shooting effect flag 223cd is on (S4103: Yes), the process of S4104 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4105.

  In the process of S4105, execution of the shooting effect is set (S4105), and it is determined whether the command received this time is output based on the passage of the probability change switch 65e3 (S4106). In the process of S4106, if it is determined that the command is not a command based on the passage of the probable change switch 65e3 (S4106: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4106 that the command is based on the passage of the variable probability switch 65e3 (S4106: Yes), then 1 is added to the value of the V passage number counter 223cf (S4107), and It is determined whether the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is 5 or more (S4108).

  In the process of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the V passage number counter 223cf is smaller than 5 (S4108: No), the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4108, when it is determined that the value of the V passing number counter 223cf is 5 or more (S4108: Yes), the safety mode entry effect (see FIG. 152 (b)) is set (S4109), and the notification is made. The completion flag 223ce is set to ON (S4110), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, in the normal mode (the time saving gaming state ST1h), when a jackpot capable of winning a V is won, the player is made to select whether to win the V or not. be able to. When the game method of winning the V prize is selected, the game is shifted to the extended game mode A immediately after the jackpot, so that the winning ball can be stably acquired. On the other hand, when a game method that does not allow the V prize is selected, it is easy to shift to the preparation mode. If the mode can be shifted to the preparation mode, the mode can easily be shifted to the extended mode B having a higher degree of advantage (loop rate) than the extended mode A, which is extremely advantageous for the player. However, if the mode cannot be shifted to the preparation mode, the disadvantageous normal mode is looped, so that it is unstable (high-risk high-return) whether or not a prize ball can be obtained. Depending on the gaming method during the jackpot, the subsequent gaming ability (the gaming ability to stably acquire the prize ball and the high-risk, high-return gaming ability) can be changed. Can be given. In addition, since different game properties can be selected according to the preferences of each player, it is possible to match the preferences of a wide range of players.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the normal mode, the number of times of saving (degree of advantage) in the case where no V winning occurs during the big hit is previously determined at the end of the third round. According to the determination result, the interval period after the third round and the mode of the game method selection effect performed in the fourth round are switched. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to infer the number of times (time advantage) when the V prize is not generated from the production mode of the game method selection production. That is, it is possible to estimate the ease of transition to the preparation mode of the normal mode, which transitions when no V winning is generated. This allows the player to select whether to make a V prize or not to make a V prize in consideration of the ease of shifting to the preparation mode estimated from the display mode.

  In the sixth embodiment, the loop rate of the extended mode A is set to 25%, and the loop rate of the extended mode B is set to 80%. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the loop rate in the extended mode A is increased, the merit of performing a game method aiming at the safe mode (a game method of generating a V winning during a big hit in the normal mode) can be improved. Further, if the loop rate of the extended mode B is increased, the merit of performing a game method aimed at the challenge mode (a game method in which a standby is performed without generating a V winning during a big hit in the normal mode) can be improved. On the other hand, if the loop rate of the extended game mode A is reduced, the merit of performing the game method aiming at the safe mode can be reduced. Also, if the loop rate in the extended mode B is reduced, the merit of performing the game method aimed at the challenge mode can be reduced. As described above, by adjusting the loop rates of the extended modes A and B, the advantage of each mode can be adjusted, so that the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 10 that meets the policy of the hall.

  In the sixth embodiment, in a jackpot where a V prize is possible, a game method selection effect of a mode according to the degree of advantage when the V prize is not performed is executed, and a V prize is given to the player in consideration of the effect mode. Although it was configured to select whether or not to aim, it is not limited to this. A gaming machine of a type in which a big hit is started when a game ball can be inserted into a specific area (V area) provided on a game board (so-called blade mono type or one type and two types mixed type). May be applied.

  More specifically, for example, in a one-type and two-type mixing type provided with two types of gaming states of a normal gaming state ST1 and a time-saving gaming state ST1h, in the normal gaming state ST1, a game ball enters the V region. A configuration that makes it difficult for the ball to play. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, a configuration is adopted in which game balls easily enter the V region. Then, in a part (for example, 80%) of a case where a game ball enters the V region, a jackpot that shifts to the time-saving gaming state ST1h after the jackpot is won, and when another jackpot occurs, the game is usually performed after the jackpot. It is configured to win a jackpot that shifts to the gaming state ST1. In the V region, an openable / closable plate is provided that can be changed between a closed position where game balls are difficult to enter (impossible) and an open position where game balls are easy (possible) to enter. . This opening / closing plate is set to an open state, for example, when a lottery result of a special symbol is a small hit. In addition, when a small win is won, a big hit type (whether or not a time saving state is given) to be given when passing through the V region is determined. In this case, at the time of the fluctuation effect during the time reduction state, the effect indicating whether it is better to pass through the V region (whether or not the jackpot type to which the time reduction state is given) is executed during the fluctuation effect. The configuration may be such that With this configuration, the continuation rate of the time saving state can be improved as compared with the actual jackpot classification. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification Example 1 of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a first modification of the above-described sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the above-described sixth embodiment, in the preparation mode (normal game state ST1) where the number of times saved can be passed in the normal mode (time reduction game state ST1h), if a big hit occurs, As the game state, the preparation mode or the extended mode B is set. That is, there is no possibility of falling into the normal mode at the time of shifting to the preparation mode. However, since the preparation mode (normal gaming state ST1) is a gaming state set when the gaming machine is initialized, there is a problem in that the mode easily shifts to the extended mode B at the time of initialization. That is, in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is highly likely to be initialized, such as when a hall is opened, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 will be excessively advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, in the present modified example, in the preparation mode, when a big win in which the V prize is impossible (difficult) is obtained, the game falls to the normal mode after the big hit. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from being excessively advantageous for the player. Further, when a big hit occurs in the preparation mode, the game state set after the big hit is a normal mode which is the most disadvantageous for the player or a connected mode B which is the most advantageous for the player. In addition, when the mode is shifted to the extended-villa mode B, when the type of the jackpot is such that the V prize is impossible, the mode is shifted to the preparation mode instead of the mode after the jackpot. As a result, instead of reducing the advantage of the preparation mode, the superiority of the extended-play mode B is improved, so that a high-risk, high-return gameplay can be realized when no V winning is generated. Can be.

  First, with reference to FIG. 178, a description will be given of a mode (game state) transition method of the pachinko machine 10 according to a first modification of the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, in the first modified example of the sixth embodiment, the four modes (game states) can be moved back and forth as in the above-described sixth embodiment. Of these, the transition method of the game state in the normal mode and the extended game mode A is the same as the transition method in the sixth embodiment described above (see FIG. 151), and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in the preparation mode in the first modified example, as shown in FIG. 178, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode (game state) only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, when a big win is determined to be 70% when a big win is made, and no big win is possible (big hits A, B, and D), no V-win is generated, so that after the big win, The game state is set to the normal mode. That is, it falls to the most disadvantageous mode (game state) at a rate of 70%. On the other hand, if a big win is determined, which is determined at a rate of 30% of the big hit, and a big win is possible (big hits C and E to G, and if a big win occurs during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is continuously changed. The mode is set to Zhuang mode B. If a V prize cannot be generated in spite of a jackpot in which a V prize is possible, the preparation mode is looped as a remedy as in the sixth embodiment. Thereby, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained.

  In addition, in the extended play mode B in the first modified example, as shown in FIG. 178, there is a possibility that the mode is shifted to another mode (game state) only when a big hit occurs. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot that is determined to be 20% when the jackpot is won, and in the case of a jackpot in which a V prize is impossible (jackpot B), no V prize is generated, so that the game after the jackpot The state is set to ready mode. In addition, a jackpot (jackpots A and C to G) in which a V prize is possible is obtained (distribution 80%), and the mode after the jackpot (game state) is also used when the player cannot generate the V prize. Is set to the preparation mode.

  On the other hand, if a big win that allows a V winning is achieved and the player is able to generate a V winning, the extended game mode B is set again after the big hit. In the case of a jackpot in which a V prize is possible, a V prize can be generated simply by continuing to play a right-handed game during the jackpot. Occurs. That is, the extended mode B is looped at a rate of 80%.

  As described above, in the first modified example, when a big hit occurs in the preparation mode, the vehicle falls to the normal mode at a rate of about 70%. That is, the degree of advantage of the preparation mode is lower than that of the above-described sixth embodiment. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from being excessively advantageous and giving a disadvantage to the hole. Further, in the present modified example, even in the case of a jackpot in which the V prize cannot be achieved in the extended mode B, the mode is shifted to the preparation mode without falling down to the normal mode at a stretch. In other words, when the big win in which the V prize can be achieved in the preparation mode is achieved, it is possible to return to the extended play mode B again. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the extended mode B is improved as compared with the above-described sixth embodiment. This makes it possible to make the gaming ability in the case of waiting in the normal mode without generating a V winning a higher gaming ability with a higher risk and return.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the V non-passing time table 202j2 of the time saving number selection table 202j in the first modification of the sixth embodiment will be described. Of the non-V passing table 202j2, the definition contents corresponding to the normal mode and the extended mode A are the same as the V non-passing table 202j2 (see FIG. 160) in the sixth embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

  Further, in the V non-passing time table 202j2 in the first modified example, the jackpot A that has been won in the preparation mode is defined in association with 100 times as the number of time savings. Similarly, the jackpot B that has been won in the preparation mode is defined as being associated with 80 times as the number of times saved, and the jackpot D that has been won in the preparation mode is defined as being associated with 40 times as the number of times saved. . As a result, the jackpots A, B, and D occur, and if no V prize has occurred, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the normal mode. Note that, as in the sixth embodiment, 0 is associated with the other jackpot types in the preparation mode as the number of times saved.

  Further, in the V non-passing time table 202j2 in the first modified example, 0 is set as the number of time savings in association with all the jackpot types won in the extended-villa mode B. Therefore, if a jackpot occurs in the extended game mode B and a V prize cannot be generated during the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the preparation mode.

  Next, an interval selection table 202k according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the interval selection table 202k. Of the interval selection table 202k, the definition contents corresponding to the normal mode, the extended mode A, and the extended mode B are the same as those of the interval selection table 202k (see FIG. 161) in the sixth embodiment. Detailed description is omitted.

  In the interval selection table 202k according to the first modification, for the big hits A, B, and D in the preparation mode, the interval periods during which the V prize cannot be won are set, and the big hits C and E in the preparation mode are set. For G, an interval period in which a V prize is possible is set.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first modification of the sixth embodiment, the degree of advantage of the preparation mode is lower than that of the above-described sixth embodiment. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is possible to suppress (prevent) the player from being excessively advantageous and giving a disadvantage to the hole. Further, in the present modified example, even in the case of a jackpot in which the V prize cannot be achieved in the extended mode B, the mode is shifted to the preparation mode without falling down to the normal mode at a stretch. In other words, when the big win in which the V prize can be achieved in the preparation mode is achieved, it is possible to return to the extended play mode B again. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage of the extended mode B is improved as compared with the above-described sixth embodiment. This makes it possible to make the gaming ability in the case of waiting in the normal mode without generating a V winning a higher gaming ability with a higher risk and return.

<Modification 2 of Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the above-described sixth embodiment and the first modification thereof, the time-saving game state ST1h is set to the most disadvantageous normal mode, and the normal game state ST1 which is shifted by lapse of the number of time savings is shifted to the extended-villa mode B. It was configured as an easy preparation mode. In other words, the gaming property is such that a chance to shift to the extended-villa mode B is given by elapse of the number of working hours.

  On the other hand, in the second modified example, the normal gaming state ST1 is set to the most disadvantageous gaming state, and from the normal gaming state ST1, a relatively advantageous latent probability changing gaming state ST2 and more advantageous than the normal gaming state ST1. It is configured that there is a possibility of shifting to two types of game states of the time-saving game state ST1h. And it is comprised so that it can shift to the most advantageous probable change game state ST3 by becoming a big hit in the time saving game state ST1h.

  With reference to FIG. 189, details of the mode transition in the second modification will be described. As shown in FIG. 189, in the present second modification, the most disadvantageous normal gaming state ST1, the time-saving gaming state ST1h which shifts to the most probable changing gaming state ST3 when the jackpot probability is low but the jackpot is low, and the jackpot. The probability is high, but there are a lot of balls to be consumed during the game (equivalent to the normal game state ST1). The probable change game state ST2 and the number of the balls hardly decrease and the probability of hit is high (the most advantageous) probability change game state ST3. Four game states are provided.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 189, in the normal gaming state ST1, when a big hit occurs, there is a possibility that the game mode shifts to another gaming state. Specifically, when a big win that can win a win with 40% of the big hit (interval B is set) becomes a big hit and a V-win occurs at the big hit (the game ball passes through the positive change switch 65e3), The gaming state after the big hit is set to the latently variable gaming state ST2. On the other hand, if a V-prize does not occur in a jackpot where a V-prize is possible because the player waits without hitting a game ball in the fourth round, etc., the time-saving gaming state ST1h is set as the gaming state after the jackpot. Is done. In this case, the number of times of saving set in this case is, for example, one of three times of 10, 30, and 50 depending on the type of jackpot.

  In addition, if the V prize becomes impossible (difficult), the big win (distribution 60%) is reached, and the V prize does not occur during the big win, the game state after the big win is set to the normal game state ST1 again. For this reason, in the normal gaming state ST1, it is disadvantageous for the player if a jackpot that makes it impossible (difficult) to win a V is.

  In FIG. 189, in the latent probability changing game state ST2 shown on the lower left side of the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that the game may shift to another game state when a big hit occurs. In other words, a big win that can be distributed at 50% of the big win is a big win that can be distributed, and if no V win occurs during the big win, the gaming state after the big win is set to the time-saving gaming state ST1h. In this case, for example, 50 times or 70 times is set as the number of times saved. In addition, if a big win with 50% of the big win cannot be won, and no V win occurs during the big win, the gaming state after the big win is set to the normal gaming state ST1. That is, it is most disadvantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when a V prize occurs during the jackpot won in the latent probability changing game state ST2, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the latent probability changing game state ST2 again. That is, an advantageous state in which the number of possessed balls is easily reduced but the jackpot probability is high is looped.

  In FIG. 189, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h shown on the lower right side of the normal gaming state ST1, there is a possibility that the gaming state is changed when a jackpot is hit or the number of time savings has elapsed. That is, when the number of times saved has elapsed, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, when a big hit occurs in the time saving game state and a V prize occurs during the big hit, the game state after the big hit is set to the certain change game state ST3. On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the time-saving game state ST1h and no V-prize during the big hit occurs, the game state after the big hit is set to the time-saving game state ST1h again.

  In addition, in FIG. 189, in the probability-change gaming state ST3 shown below the time-saving gaming state ST1h, there is a possibility that the game may shift to another gaming state when a big hit occurs. Specifically, when a big win that cannot be won at 50% of the big hit becomes impossible, and no V-win occurs during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, when a big win that can be won by 50% of the big win is a big win, and no V win occurs during the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit is set to the time-saving gaming state ST1h. In this case, for example, 100 times are set as the number of time savings. This is for the purpose of relieving a case where a V winning cannot be generated due to a player's mistake or the like despite a chance to loop through the most advantageous probable changing game state ST3.

  On the other hand, when a big win that can win a V win and a V win can be generated during the big win, the probability change game state ST3 is set again after the big win.

  As described above, in the second modified example, in the normal gaming state ST1, by generating the V winning during the big hit, the game shifts to the relatively advantageous latent probability changing gaming state ST2, while the V winning during the big hit. Does not occur, the game shifts to the time-saving game state ST1h, which is a chance to shift to the probable change game state ST3. For this reason, a stable-oriented player who wants to shift to the advantageous latent probability changing game state ST2 immediately can select a method of passing the game ball through the probability changing switch 65e3. On the other hand, a gambling-oriented player who is uncertain but wants to aim for the most advantageous probable game state ST3 can play a game while avoiding the V winning. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel game property in which the game property can be selected for each player.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example, by executing the game method selection effect, it is determined whether or not it is more advantageous to generate the V winning during the big hit for the player. Although the configuration was suggested, it is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the notification of a right-handed game or the notification of a standby is switched from the number of hours saved by avoiding the V winning. That is, instead of highlighting the recommended game method as in the above-described option effect, a configuration may be adopted in which only one predetermined game method is notified for each number of working hours. For example, if the number of time reductions is 40 or less, a notification (navigation) is performed so as not to launch a game ball in the fourth round, while if the number of time reductions is 50 or more, a right-handed game is performed in the fourth round. It may be configured to notify (navigate). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is more easily understood. Further, if the navigation is followed, it is possible to enter the challenge mode only when the number of time savings is small, so that it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the player hardly loses. In addition, as a notification method for notifying the game ball not to be launched, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect of touching a portion other than the operation handle 51 with the right hand (the hand on the side on which the operation handle 51 is operated) is executed. That is, an effect may be performed in which the hand can be released from the operation handle 51 by following the effect. Specifically, for example, a configuration is provided in which a touch sensor is provided on the right side surface of the pachinko machine 10, and an effect of performing an effect (navigating) to perform notification (navigation) so that the touch sensor keeps touching the hand until four rounds are completed. It may be. With such a configuration, the V winning can be avoided only by the player participating in the effect.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modified example, the game method selection effect is executed during the big hit even if the big win becomes impossible (difficult) in the normal mode. It is not limited. For example, the configuration may be such that the game method selection effect is executed only during execution of a jackpot in which a V prize is possible (easy).

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, the image of the arrow indicating the right-handed game is displayed in the upper right direction of the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit, but is not limited thereto. is not. For example, during the execution period of the game method selection effect, the image of the arrow displayed on the upper right side of the third symbol display device 81 may be hidden. With such a configuration, when the game method selection effect is executed, the player can more easily understand that the player should select the game method by himself.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, if the power is turned on in the normal mode (the time saving game state ST1h), the gunman 811 displays the screen staying on the floor of the tower according to the remaining number of times of saving. Although it was configured to return, it is not limited to this. For example, when the power is turned on, a configuration may be adopted in which the stage shifts to a dedicated stage (for example, a stage on which a back image of a gunman 811 traveling on a horse is displayed) regardless of the game state. Then, the stage dedicated to the insertion may be configured to be continued, for example, until the next jackpot is won. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the game state at the time of power-on from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, for example, when the hall is opened or the like, the RAM erase switch 122 is operated and initialized, and as a result, whether the pachinko machine 10 is staying in the preparation mode (normal game state ST1) or simply turning on / off the power supply Is performed and it is difficult to determine from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 whether or not the user is staying in the normal mode. Thus, when the hall is opened or the like, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 in the preparation mode from being distinguished from the appearance of the third symbol display device 81 and starting the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which only a player who can start a game when the hall is opened becomes excessively advantageous.

  In this case, it is not always necessary to shift to the dedicated stage when the power is turned off when the power is turned off, and a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are initialized at the time of opening a hall or the like (when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed). (The power is turned on in the state). Specifically, for example, a well-known RTC (Real Time Clock) is electrically connected to the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10, and the hall is opened before and after the opening time of the hall (for example, at 10:00 AM). If it is a hole to be turned on, only when it is determined that the power is turned on at AM 9:30 to AM 10:30), the stage may be set to a stage exclusively for turning on regardless of the game state at the time of turning on the power. On the other hand, in other time zones, the corresponding back type may be set according to the game state notified by the state command output from main controller 110. With such a configuration, for example, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily shut off during a game due to a so-called instantaneous blackout or the like, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a stage dedicated to insertion, and the current game It is possible to prevent the state from being unclear for the player. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 is temporarily shut down due to a power failure or the like while staying in the extended mode A or the extended mode B, a stage dedicated to power-on after the power is restored. If the state shifts to, there is a possibility that the player may be suspicious that the advantageous state (the extended mode A or the extended mode B) has ended. On the other hand, in a configuration other than the time period before and after the store opening time, if the back type is set according to the game state at the time of turning on the power, the game state is not changed even if the power is cut off. People can easily understand. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with more security.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modified example, when the jackpot is won in the normal mode, the game executed during the jackpot by referring to the number of time savings set when it is assumed that no V winning has occurred. Although the configuration is such that the effect mode of the method selection effect is determined, the method of determining the effect mode of the game method selection effect is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, instead of the number of times saved, the effect type may be determined from the current jackpot type. In other words, as the prescribed content of the batting method selection effect selection table 222ca, a data table that specifies the effect type executed during the big hit for each combination of the jackpot type and the value of the effect counter 223j may be used. This is because, when the gaming state is limited to the normal mode, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the jackpot type and the number of times of saving set when no V prize occurs during the jackpot. With this configuration, when determining the effect type, the jackpot type may be specified from the stop types stored in the stop type storage area 223ca, and the effect type corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223j may be specified. Therefore, the non-V hour count table 222cb can be omitted. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 222 can be reduced.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modification, the game mode selection effect is executed during the jackpot that has been won in the normal mode, and the number of time savings when the V winning does not occur is indicated from the effect mode. However, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 may predict the jackpot type. That is, the number of time savings set when no V prize is generated from the jackpot type is predicted by the player, and the effect of the game method selection effect may be reduced. As a measure corresponding to this, even in the case of the same jackpot type, the display mode of the first symbol may be changed according to the gaming state. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the jackpot type from the display mode of the first symbol, so that it is also difficult for the player to predict the number of time savings. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the game method selection effect.

  In the above-described sixth embodiment and its modified example, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be difficult to be executed even in the normal symbol time saving state. That is, the number of random numbers that can hit a normal symbol is configured to differ only by one between the high probability state (time saving state) and the low probability state of the ordinary symbol. It was configured so that the winning probability of the symbol was low. In the advantageous consecutive play mode A or consecutive play mode B, the game is configured such that it is easy to win a small hit (the first specific winning opening 65a is easily opened even if it does not become a big hit). In this configuration, the game balls consumed in the game can be covered by the prize balls paid out based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is set to be significantly higher than the winning probability in the low probability state (for example, 1 / 1.2 as in the above-described first embodiment). By doing so, the game efficiency in the extended play mode A (probable change game state ST3) may be improved. Further, in this case, in order to prevent the game efficiency in the normal mode (time saving gaming state ST1h) from becoming too high, in the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be long (for example, to 600 seconds). In addition, in the extended-villa mode A, a configuration may be adopted in which the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set short (for example, to 3 seconds). With such a configuration, in the normal mode, the frequency at which the second starting port 640 is opened can be set to at least once every 600 seconds, so that the normal mode can be disadvantageous.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 188. The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described sixth embodiment has a configuration in which different gaming properties are realized depending on whether or not a V prize is made during the jackpot won in the normal mode. In other words, the player is allowed to select a game that can stably acquire a prize ball by winning a V, and can select a high-risk, high-return game by avoiding the V winning.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the gaming state is set to three types of the normal gaming state ST1, the time-saving gaming state ST1h, and the probable changing gaming state ST3. The structure in which the V winning does not occur is advantageous to the player. In other words, a configuration is provided in which a time saving state set when no V winning occurs becomes more advantageous than a probable change state set when a V winning occurs.

  The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment is different from that of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment in that the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 is partially changed. The point is that some processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been changed. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the sixth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 181, a transition method of a game state in the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 181, in the seventh embodiment, three types of gaming states are provided: a normal gaming state ST1, a time-saving gaming state ST1h, and a certainty varying gaming state ST3.

  The normal game state ST1 is the most disadvantageous game state for the player because the special symbol big hit probability (1/80) and the normal symbol hit probability (1/240) are set low. In the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the probability of hitting a symbol is usually high (1 / 1.2), so that the player is more advantageous than the normal gaming state ST1. In addition, in the probability changing game state ST3, the winning probability (1/40) of the special symbol and the winning probability (1 / 1.2) of the ordinary symbol both increase, so that the player is most advantageous during the stay.

  As shown in FIG. 181, in the normal game state ST1, there is a possibility that the game will shift to another game state only when a special symbol hits. Specifically, when a big hit occurs and a V prize is generated during the big hit, the game state shifts to a certain-variable game state ST3. On the other hand, when the V prize does not occur during the big hit, the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state ST1h.

  In addition, in the time-saving game state ST1h, the game state is changed not only in the case of a big hit but also in a case where a special symbol is continuously lost for a set number of time savings after the previous big hit. That is, when the number of times of saving has elapsed, the state shifts (falls) to the most disadvantageous normal game state ST1. As described above, in the time-saving gaming state ST1h, the probability of hitting the symbol usually increases, so that the game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held. Therefore, in the time-saving game state ST1h, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of a big hit before the number of time-saving times elapses. Note that the method of shifting the gaming state in the event of a jackpot is the same as that in the normal gaming state ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, in the probability changing game state ST3, the game state is changed not only when the big hit occurs but also when the special symbol is continuously removed for the number of times of the probability change set after the previous big hit. That is, when the number of times of the probability change has elapsed, the state shifts (falls) to the normal game state ST1. As described above, in the probable change game state ST3, the probability of a special symbol jackpot and a normal symbol hit increases, so that the game can be continued without reducing the number of balls held and the jackpot is won. Easier to do. Therefore, in the probable change game state ST3, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of a big hit before the probable change number elapses. Note that the method of shifting the gaming state in the event of a jackpot is the same as that in the normal gaming state ST1, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the probable change game state ST3, there is a possibility that five or ten probable change times are set. On the other hand, the time-saving game state ST1h has a configuration in which the number of time-saving times is set to at least 50 times. Even if the special symbol hit probability is increased (1/40), the probability of returning to the normal game state ST1 without a big hit becomes higher when the probability of change is 5 or 10 times. In the case of a jackpot type in which the number of probable changes is set to 5 or 10 when a V prize is won, it is better to definitely set the number of time savings to 50 or more without intentionally generating a V prize. This is advantageous for the player. That is, the possibility of winning a jackpot within the number of time savings set by avoiding the V winning is higher than the possibility of winning a jackpot within the set number of times of change set by winning the V. Therefore, the player is made to select whether to set the probability change game state ST3 in which there is a risk of setting a small probability change number, or to set the time reduction game state ST1h in which the number of time reductions is set to 50 or more. It is possible to realize a novel game that can be performed.

  In the seventh embodiment, an effect similar to the above-described game method selection effect in the sixth embodiment is executed during the jackpot that has been won in all game states. In the game method selection effect according to the sixth embodiment, the effect mode is switched according to the number of time savings set when it is assumed that no V winning has occurred. However, in the game method selection effect according to the seventh embodiment, , The effect mode is switched in accordance with the number of probable changes set in the case of winning a V. That is, when the number of probable changes set at the time of winning a V is five or ten, the ratio at which the weak effects A and B are set increases, and when the number of probable changes is set at 50, the medium effect is performed. When A and B are set at a high rate, and when the number of set probabilities is 100, the rate at which a strong effect is set increases. Note that the effects and the like are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, and therefore are not shown.

<Electrical Configuration of Seventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 to 184. First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 182 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the ROM 202. The ROM 202 according to the seventh embodiment is different from the ROM 202 according to the above-described sixth embodiment in that a gaming state selection table 202m is provided, a small hit random number table 202b, a time savings number selection table 202j, and an interval selection table 202k. Has been removed. Also, the difference is that the specified contents of the first random number table 202a, the second random number table 202c, and the big hit type selection table 202d are partially changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the sixth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the first random number table 202a according to the seventh embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 182 (b). FIG. 182 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the first random number table 202a in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 182 (b), in the seventh embodiment, five random number values (counter values) determined to be big hits in the low probability state of the special symbol (the normal game state ST1 and the time saving game state ST1h) are set. And its value is “0-4”. Of the 400 possible values of 0 to 399 that the first random number counter C1 can take, the counter value (random number value) determined to be a big hit is 8, so the big hit probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/80 ( 5/400).

  On the other hand, the random number (counter value) determined to be the big hit in the special symbol probable change state (probable change game state ST3) is set to ten “0 to 9”. Of the 400 possible values of 0 to 399 that the first random number counter C1 can take, the counter value (random value) determined to be a big hit is 10, so the big hit probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/40 ( 10/400). Thus, in the seventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the special symbol time saving state is twice the jackpot probability in the low symbol state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to select whether or not to make a V prize during the big hit in consideration of the big hit probability.

  Next, the second hit random number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 182 (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 182 (c), in the seventh embodiment, in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the counter value (random value) of the second random number counter C4 determined to be the ordinary symbol hit is “0”. Only one is specified. That is, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol is 1/240. On the other hand, in the high probability state of the ordinary symbol, 200 counter values “5 to 204” are defined as the counter values of the second random number counter C4 determined to be an ordinary symbol hit. That is, in the high probability state (time saving state) of the ordinary symbol, the probability of winning the ordinary symbol is 1 / 1.2 (200/240).

  For this reason, in the seventh embodiment, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is greatly increased in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 640. As a result, compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, the number of holding balls is hardly reduced in the time reduction state of the normal symbol, so that the game can be played efficiently. In other words, it is an advantageous state in which a large hit can be aimed at with almost no decrease in the possessed ball.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 183 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 183, in the seventh embodiment, four types of jackpot types (jackpots H1 to K1) that can be selected when a jackpot has been won by the lottery of the first special symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol. Four types of big hits (big hits H2 to K2) that can be selected in the case of a big hit are defined. The jackpots H1 to K1 are jackpots with four rounds, and the jackpots H2 to K2 are jackpots with eight rounds. As in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot types corresponding to the same alphabet in the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot of the second special symbol have the same performance except for the number of rounds. . In the following description, the jackpot types assigned the same alphabet are collectively referred to as jackpots H to K.

  As shown in FIG. 183, the jackpot H (the jackpot H1 and the jackpot H2) is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “0 to 29”. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that can be taken by the value of the first hit type counter C2, the number of counter values (random number values) that becomes the big hit H is 30, so if the big hit occurs, the big hit A is selected. The rate at which it is performed is 30% (30/100). As will be described in detail later, in the jackpot A, when the V prize occurs, the number of times of change is set to 5 as the number of positive changes, and when the V prize does not occur, the number of times saved is set to 100. You. For this reason, it is more likely that the player does not generate a V prize during the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol and wins the next jackpot (which is advantageous to the player). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the option of waiting without hitting the game ball in order to reduce the time.

  The jackpot I is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “30 to 69”, and the big hit is set in the range of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “70 to 89”. J is defined in association with the value, and the jackpot K is defined in association with the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the range of “90 to 99”. Therefore, the ratio of the jackpot I is 40% (40/100), the ratio of the jackpot J is 20%, and the ratio of the jackpot K is 10%.

  The jackpot I is set to 10 as the probability change count when the V prize occurs, while 50 is set as the number of time savings when the V prize does not occur. For this reason, it is more likely that the player does not generate a V prize during the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol and wins the next jackpot (which is advantageous to the player). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the option of waiting without hitting the game ball in order to reduce the time.

  For the jackpot J, when the V prize occurs, 50 is set as the certainty change number, while when the V prize does not occur, 70 is set as the number of time savings. The jackpot K is set to 100 as the probability change count when the V prize occurs, while 100 is set as the number of time savings when the V prize does not occur. In the case of these jackpots J and K, taking into account the fact that the jackpot probability is doubled in the probable change state, it is more likely that the winner of the V prize will win the next jackpot in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. (Advantageous for the player).

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, it is easier for the player to avoid the V prize (it is likely to be a big hit during the time saving state of the symbol). It is configured to win. Therefore, the player can be made to select whether or not to win the V, taking into account the number of times of change that is set when the V is won. Note that, as described above, the standard of the number of probable changes set when it is assumed that a V prize is won is suggested by a game method selection effect, as in the sixth embodiment.

  Next, the game state selection table 202m will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The gaming state selection table 202m is a data table that is referred to at the end of the jackpot to set the gaming state after the jackpot. First, FIG. 184 (a) is a block diagram showing a configuration of the gaming state selection table 202m.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the gaming state selection table 202m of the seventh embodiment sets the number of probable changes when a V prize occurs during the big hit (the game ball passes the probable change switch 65e3). Change setting table 202m1 that is referred to in order to determine the number of time savings when the V winning does not occur during the jackpot (the game ball does not pass through the probability change switch 65e3). 202m2.

  First, the details of the probability change setting table 202m1 will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (b). FIG. 184 (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the probability change setting table 202m1. As shown in FIG. 184 (b), the probability change setting table 202m1 defines the number of probability changes to be set at the end of the jackpot in which the V prize has occurred in association with the jackpot type.

  Specifically, the jackpot H is defined as “5 times” as the number of probability changes, the jackpot I is defined as “10 times” as the number of probability changes, and the jackpot J is defined as In addition, “50 times” is defined in association with the number of probable changes, and “100 times” is defined in association with the jackpot K as the number of probable changes.

  Next, the details of the time saving setting table 202m2 will be described with reference to FIG. 184 (c). FIG. 184 (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the time saving setting table 202m2. As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the time saving setting table 202m2 defines the number of time savings to be set at the end of the big hit where no V winning has occurred, in association with the big hit type.

  Specifically, "100 times" is defined as the number of time savings for the jackpot H, "50" is defined as the number of time savings for the jackpot I, and In addition, “70 times” is defined as the number of time savings, and “100 times” is defined as the number of time savings for the jackpot K.

  From the probability change setting table 202m1 and the time-saving setting table 202m2, the jackpots H and I indicate the degree of advantage (probability change) when a V prize is won, even if the jackpot probability increases in the case of the probability change state. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage (the possibility of a big hit within the number of working hours) when the V prize is not made is higher than the possibility of a big hit within the number of times. On the other hand, the jackpots J and K are more advantageous when the player does not win the V (there is a possibility to win the jackpot within the number of working hours) than the advantage when the player wins the V (the possibility of the jackpot within the number of probable changes). ) Is lower.

  More specifically, in the jackpot H, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again is about 11.9% (probable change) within the range of the number of times of change of five set when the V prize is generated. Within the range of 100 time savings set when no V prize has occurred, while the probability of missing five times in succession (39/40 to the fifth power) is reduced from 1). Then, the probability of winning the jackpot again (expected value) is about 71.6% (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability (79/80 raised to the 100th power) of 100 consecutive misses during the time saving state). Therefore, in the case of the jackpot H, it is better to set the time saving state to the jackpot while the time saving state of the ordinary design is set (while the ball is hard to decrease) than to set the probability changing state. Since the expected value of winning is greatly increased, the result is likely to be advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the jackpot I, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again within a range of the 10 times of change in probability set when the V prize is generated is about 22.4% (10 times during the change of probability). While the probability of consecutive misses (the value of 39/40 raised to the 10th power) is subtracted from 1), the jackpot again occurs within the range of 50 time reductions set when no V prize occurs. The probability (expected value) of winning is about 46.7% (a value obtained by subtracting from 1 the probability (79/80 to the 50th power) of 50 consecutive misses during the time saving state). Therefore, even in the case of the jackpot I, setting the time saving state is more effective than setting the probable change state, while the time saving state of the ordinary design is set (while the holding ball is hard to decrease). Since the expected value of winning again increases, the result is likely to be advantageous for the player.

  Also, in the jackpot J, within the range of the number of times of probability change of 50 times set when the V prize is generated, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again is about 71.8% (50 times during the probability change). While the probability of consecutive misses (a value obtained by subtracting 39/40 to the 50th power from 1) becomes 1), the big hit again within the range of 70 time reductions set when no V winning occurs. Is about 58.5% (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability (79/80 to the 70th power) that the player will miss 70 consecutive times during the time saving state). Therefore, in the case of the jackpot J, it is better to set the time saving state than to set the probable change state, while the time reduction state of the ordinary symbol is set (while the ball is hard to decrease) Since the expected value of winning again becomes low, the result is likely to be disadvantageous for the player. In other words, in the case of the jackpot J, it is easy for the player to generate the V prize to be advantageous to the player.

  Also, in the jackpot K, the probability (expected value) of winning the jackpot again within the range of 100 times of probability change set when the V prize is generated is about 92.0% (100 times during probability change). While the probability of consecutive misses (a value obtained by subtracting 39/40 to the 100th power from 1) becomes 1), the big hit again within the range of 100 time savings set when no V winning occurs. The probability (expected value) of winning is about 71.6% (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability (79/80 raised to the 100th power) of 100 consecutive misses during the time saving state). Therefore, in the case of the jackpot K, it is better to set the probable change state than to set the time saving state. Since the expected value of winning again increases, it is likely to be advantageous for the player.

  Thus, in the seventh embodiment, a jackpot type is provided in which it is more advantageous for a player not to win a V than to win a V. This makes it possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the player can select whether or not to win the V prize.

<Control Process of Main Control Device in Seventh Embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the special figure 1 departure stop processing 7 (S670) will be described with reference to FIG. The special figure 1 departure stop processing 7 (S670) is a processing executed in place of the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see FIG. 30) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is a first special symbol. This is a process for stopping the fluctuation display of the symbol with a symbol.

  In the special figure 1 departure stop processing 7 (see FIG. 185) in the seventh embodiment, in each processing of S625 to S630, the special figure 1 departure stop processing (see FIG. 185) in the sixth embodiment (and the first embodiment) is respectively performed. 30) is performed.

  When the special figure 1 departure stop processing 7 (see FIG. 185) in the seventh embodiment is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability change counter is larger than 0 (S671). This probability change counter is a counter for counting the number of times of the probability change, and when the counter value is in a range of 1 or more, a special symbol lottery is executed as a status of the special symbol variation. On the other hand, if the counter value is 0, a special symbol lottery is executed as a low probability state of the special symbol.

  In the process of S671, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter is 0 (S671: No), the process proceeds to S625. On the other hand, in the process of S671, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter is 1 or more (S671: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S672), and the value of the probability variation counter after the subtraction is set to 0. It is determined whether or not it has become (S673). In the process of S673, when it is determined that the value of the probability change counter after the subtraction is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S673: No), the process proceeds to S625. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S673 that the value of the probability change counter has become 0 (S673: Yes), the time saving flag is set to off (S674), and the process proceeds to S625.

  By executing the special figure 1 departure stop process 7 (see FIG. 185), when the number of probable changes is set after the big hit, the number of probable changes is accurately subtracted every time the change display of the special symbol is executed. I can go. Although illustration is omitted, in the seventh embodiment, the same processes as S671 to S674 are also executed in the special figure 2 departure stop process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 186, details of the jackpot control process 7 (S1760) executed in the seventh embodiment in place of the jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 167) in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 (S1760).

  Of the jackpot control processes 7 (see FIG. 186) in the seventh embodiment, in the respective processes of S1621 to S1624, S1726, S1629 to S1631, S1633 to S1635, and S1751, the jackpot control process 6 ( The same processes as those of S1621 to S1624, S1726, S1629 to S1631, S1633 to S1635, and S1751 of FIG. 167 are executed.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 186) in the seventh embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1626 that the round end timing is reached (S1626: Yes), the interval setting process in the sixth embodiment is performed. 6 (see FIG. 169), an interval setting process 7 is executed (S1761), and this process ends. The details of the interval setting process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the big hit control process 7 (see FIG. 186) in the seventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S1631 that it is the big hit end timing (S1631: Yes), the big hit end process 6 in the sixth embodiment will be described. Instead of (see FIG. 170), the big hit end process 7 is executed (S1762), and this process ends. Details of the big hit end processing 7 (S1762) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the details of the above-described interval setting processing 7 (S1761) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interval setting process 7 (S1761), first, it is determined whether the timing is the end timing of the third round (S1801). Is set (S1811), and the process moves to S1802. This operation pattern is the same pattern (see FIG. 162 (a)) as the interval setting processing 6 (see FIG. 169) in the sixth embodiment.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1801 that it is not the end timing of the third round (S1801: No), the processing of S1811 is skipped and the processing shifts to S1802. In the process of S1802, an interval period of 3 seconds is set (S1802). Next, an interval command is set (S1807), and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, 3 seconds (interval period in which a V winning is possible) is set irrespective of the type of the big hit, and therefore, the player is made to win or not to win the V in each big hit. Can be selected.

  Note that the interval period does not necessarily need to be uniform. As in the sixth embodiment, a configuration in which the interval A in which the V prize cannot be performed and the interval B in which the V prize can be performed may be switched according to the jackpot type or the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 188, details of the above-described big hit end processing 7 (S1762) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process 7 (S1762).

  When the jackpot end process 7 (see FIG. 188) is executed, it is determined whether or not the probable change setting flag 203h is on (S1651), and the probable change setting flag 203h is on (that is, during the current big hit). If it is determined that a V prize has occurred (S1651: Yes), then the probable change setting table 202m1 is read out of the gaming state selection table 202m (S1771), and the readout table corresponds to the current jackpot type. The number of probable changes to be performed is specified (S1772). Next, the specified probability change count is set in the probability change counter provided in the RAM 203, and the process proceeds to S1777.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1651 that the probability change setting flag 203h is off (that is, no V winning has occurred during the current big hit) (S1651: No), the gaming state selection table 202m Among them, the time saving setting table 202m2 is read (S1774), and the number of time savings corresponding to the current jackpot type is specified from the read table (S1775). Then, the specified number of time savings is set in the time saving counter 203t of the RAM 203 (S1776), and the process proceeds to S1777. In the processing of S1777 executed after the processing of S1773 or S1776, the probable change setting flag 203h is set to off, and the processing ends.

  By executing the big hit end process 7 (see FIG. 188), it is possible to set an appropriate number of probable changes or a number of time savings according to the type of the big hit and whether or not the V winning has occurred.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, in some of the big hits (big hits H and I), it is configured such that it is more advantageous for the player not to generate the V winning than to generate the V winning. I have. In other words, the possibility of the jackpot again within the number of time savings set when the V winning does not occur rather than the possibility of the jackpot again within the number of probable changes set when the V winning is generated. The jackpot type is set to be higher. Thereby, it is possible to provide a novel gaming ability in which a player can select whether it is better to make a V prize during the big hit or not to make a V prize according to the big hit type. .

  Note that, in the seventh embodiment, four types of probable changes are provided: 5, 10, 50, and 100. However, the number of probable changes may be arbitrarily determined. Also, the number of working hours is not limited to the three types of 50 times, 70 times, and 100 times, and may be arbitrarily determined.

  In the seventh embodiment, a system (a so-called ST type) in which the probability change game state ST3 is ended when the number of special symbol lotteries becomes a specific number and falls to the normal game state ST1, It is not limited to this. Similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, a configuration may be applied to a system (a so-called loop type) in which the surely changing game state ST3 continues until the next big hit. In this case, in a part of the jackpot, a probability change state in which the number of time savings is not given when a V prize is given is set, and the type of jackpot where a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) are given when a V prize is not given is determined. May be adopted. In the case of a probable change state where the number of time savings is not given, the probability of winning a jackpot is high, but the ball to be consumed before winning the jackpot increases, while the probability of winning the jackpot in the time saving state where the number of time savings is large is large Although it is low, if the jackpot is won again within the number of working hours, the prize ball can be obtained again with almost no reduction in the number of possessed balls. Therefore, in particular, as in the seventh embodiment, when the jackpot probability differs only twice between the low-probability state and the high-probability state of the special symbol, it is better not to win V (set a large number of time reductions). Is more likely to be beneficial to the individual. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel playability that allows the player to select whether or not to win the V prize according to the jackpot type.

  In the seventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the probable change state of the special symbol is configured to be twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this. At least a portion of the jackpot is an expected value which becomes a big hit within the number of time reductions set when no V winning is set, compared to an expected value which becomes a big hit within the number of probable changes set when the V winning is generated. May be arbitrarily determined as long as the value is higher. Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be increased. As a specific example, for example, a configuration in which the big hit probability in the probable change state of the special symbol is set to three times the big hit probability in the low probability state of the special symbol may be adopted. That is, the jackpot probability in the probable change state may be set to 3/80. Even with such a configuration, in the case of the jackpot H, 100 time savings are set to avoid the V prize, rather than to set the number of times of probable change of 5 by generating the V prize. This is more advantageous for the player because the expected value of the jackpot becomes higher within the number of working hours. That is, when the number of times of probability change is set to five, the probability (expected value) of a jackpot within the number of times of probability change is about 17.4% (the probability (77/80) of five consecutive misses in the probability change state. 5) is subtracted from 1). On the other hand, when the number of time savings is set to 100, the probability (expected value) of a jackpot within the number of time savings is about 71.6% (probability (79) that the number of misses is 100 consecutive times in the low probability state. / 80 raised to the 100th power) from 1). Therefore, even if the jackpot probability in the probable change state is tripled, when the jackpot becomes H, it is possible to provide a novel gaming property that is advantageous to the player by avoiding the V winning.

  In the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot types (big hits H and I), which are more advantageous when avoiding the V-win than the V-win, is defined in the gaming state selection table 202m. The content is not limited to the above, and may be arbitrarily determined within a range where it is more advantageous to avoid the V winning. Thereby, the degree of freedom in design can be further improved.

  In the seventh embodiment, the time saving game state ST1h is the same as the probability change game state ST3 except that the probability of a special symbol jackpot is different. That is, in each game state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the game efficiency (easiness of holding balls) is the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the game efficiency is higher in the time-saving gaming state ST1h. Specifically, for example, in the time-saving game state ST1h, a configuration may be adopted in which a small hit is won in a part of a case where the lottery is lost by a special symbol lottery. In other words, the first specific winning opening 65a may be opened at a part of the departure to obtain a prize ball. With such a configuration, the advantage of the time-saving gaming state ST1h can be further improved, so that the player wants to set the time-saving gaming state ST1h by avoiding the V winning during the big hit. Can be.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above is configured with a new playability by changing the configuration, the electrical configuration, and the control process of the game board 10.

  Specifically, when the jackpot in which the time-saving game is given by the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed, the special symbol is changed and stopped until a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once). Until the time-saving gaming state (the normal symbol fluctuation time is short (normally 30 seconds is 0.2 seconds in the time-saving gaming state), the operating time of the normal electric accessory 640a is long (0.2 seconds is normal 2 seconds in the gaming state), and the number of times of operation is large (one time in normal times is twice in the time-saving gaming state).

  In the time-saving gaming state, the game ball is easily entered into the second entrance 640a by the operation of the normal electric accessory 640a, and the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In the lottery of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a high probability (397/399), so that the small hit game is set to be easily executed. In the small hit game, the V winning device 650 is opened a predetermined number of times, so that it is easy to win the V detection switch (V switch 650e3). A jackpot game that is opened a predetermined number of times is started.

  When a game ball enters the V-switch 650e3, a jackpot game corresponding to a predetermined jackpot type is executed, and if the jackpot type is such that a time-saving game state is given after the jackpot game, it is set again. During the number of times of change, a time-saving gaming state is provided. With this, the time-saving game state is set again, so that the lottery in the second special symbol is easily executed, and the big hit game is shortened by entering the game ball from the small hit game to the V switch 650e3. It is configured to be executed continuously. Note that, when the ball is hit into the V switch 650e3, if the jackpot type to which the time-saving game state is not given after the jackpot game is determined, the normal game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the game enters the first entrance 64. The ball is entered, and the game state is shifted to a game state in which a game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is mainly performed.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the jackpot game in which the time-saving gaming state is provided by the lottery of the first special symbol is won, the jackpot game is easily executed continuously in a short period of time. It is configured to be transitioned to a state. Therefore, the player can expect the setting of the time-saving game state and can play the game, thereby suppressing the player from getting tired of the game early. Further, in the normal game state and the time reduction game state, since the playability such as the small hit is variable, the player can execute a game with freshness.

  Hereinafter, the eighth embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. Illustration and detailed description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment will be omitted. FIG. 190 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 191 is an enlarged view of a lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and FIGS. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the V winning device 650 provided in the game board 13. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled. The peripheral portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, a configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 190.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13, and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails on the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). (Area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 203) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 190) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 190) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side in FIG. 190). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 9), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, during a time saving operation, or during a normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. The jackpot type determined here is a special jackpot type that is executed when a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and is a jackpot A (4R time-saving one-time jackpot (second special symbol) A big hit where the time saving game state is given (set) after a big hit until it fluctuates once or the first special symbol fluctuates 100 times (the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 100 times) and stops. )), And the big hit B (big hit without 4R time saving). As a special jackpot type that is executed when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), a jackpot C (4R timeless jackpot) determined in a normal game state (game state without low probability time saving) ), A jackpot D (4R one time jackpot once) determined in the time saving game state is set.

  In addition, in a part of the case where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery, the bonus given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). The privilege to make small hits is set. This small hit is set only for the lottery of the second special symbol, and the type of the small hit is a small hit A (15R at the time of passing V, once in a short time (in the small hit game, the V switch 650e3 is set to the game ball). Is passed, the big hit game that continues to 15R (the small hit game is the first R) is executed after the execution of the small hit game, and the time-saving game state is set after the big hit game (the second special symbol is 1). If the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the small hitting game (until the first special symbol fluctuates 100 times)), small hitting B (4R short time once when passing V) and small hitting C (small hitting game) Big hit game that continues to 4R (small hit game is the 1R) is executed after execution of the small hit game, and the normal game state is set after the big hit game. The small hits A to C are configured so that the game ball can pass through the V switch 650e3, and are configured such that the game ball can easily pass through the V switch 650e3 in the small hit game. In the above, the configuration is such that the game ball easily passes through the V switch 650e3 in all the small hit types. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a small hit type in which the game ball hardly passes through the V switch 650e3 may be set. In this configuration, the flow path solenoid 650k is operated in the same opening pattern (same operation timing) from the start of the small hitting game in all the small hitting types to open the opening / closing door 650f1 (opening timing). Are different from each other, and a small hit type that allows the game ball to easily pass to the V switch 650e3 and the V switch 650e3 And the small hit type in which the game ball hardly passes (does not pass), it is possible to switch between the small hit in which the big hit game is executed by the operation content of the fair flow path solenoid 650k. effective.

  Specifically, the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on for a certain period from the start of the small hitting game, and is operated so that the game ball passes through the normal discharge flow path 650e1. Here, in the small hit game of the small hit type that can pass through the V switch 650e3, an opening pattern in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened at the timing when the period in which the flow path solenoid 650k is in the on state is started, In the small hitting game of the small hitting type in which the game ball does not easily pass through the switch 650e3, a period in which the opening pattern in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is opened from the start timing of the small hitting game is executed, and the flow path solenoid 650k is turned on. Is configured to end the opening operation before the end of the operation, it is possible to easily switch the passage to the V switch 650e3 according to the small hit type. Furthermore, by setting the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 650f1 to be the same for the small hit type and differing only in the opening start timing, it is possible to suppress the small hit type from being determined from the open pattern. Furthermore, by adjusting the stop timing of the third symbol, the opening effect, and the like, the start effect of the small hit game is executed from the opening start timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, and the small hit type is determined from the effect to the player. Can be suppressed.

  The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit (whether or not it is a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the change. Symbols according to the big hit type and the small hit type are shown.

  In addition, the “time saving gaming state” is a gaming state in which a ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640 although the jackpot probability is the same as the normal state as an added value after the end of the jackpot. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in this case is set so that the period in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which a ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and only a part of the above-described setting contents may be used, or the above-described contents may be used. In addition to the above, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning probability of the second symbol is set higher than in the normal state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the "time reduction gaming state" reaches the first predetermined number (100 times) in which the number of times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol changes (total number of times of fluctuation) or the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Until the first special period, or the period until the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches the second predetermined number (one time) (second period). When either the first period or the second period described above ends, the end condition is satisfied, and the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state. It should be noted that the total number of times of the change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100 times and the set number of the time-saving game state is shown, because the time-saving game state is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. This is for the purpose of making the configuration that the combined number of changes does not exceed 100 in any state, and unlike the present embodiment, for example, the setting condition of the time-saving game state is that the number of changes of the second special symbol is twice. When the setting condition is set as 100 times as the number of times of change of the first special symbol, the number of times of change of the second special symbol is 1 and the number of times of change of the first special symbol is changed up to 100 times. This is because it is possible that the total number of times becomes 101 times.

  In this manner, a plurality of end conditions for shifting the gaming state from the time-saving gaming state to the normal state are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied, the time-saving gaming state is changed to the normal state. By shifting to the state, it is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time-saving gaming state ends, while allowing the player to be excited about how long the time-saving gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues A game can be played.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time-saving game state are set for the number of times of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). The condition may be set, for example, a predetermined number (for example, once) of the number of times of winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery and the number of times of operating the V winning device 650 that is activated when a small hit game is executed. May be used as the termination condition. Also, only some of the above-mentioned many termination conditions may be used, or each of them may be appropriately combined.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing symbol variation display, and a second symbol triggered by passage of a ball to a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 to display, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right. Is done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 203) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas the The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed.

  That is, the third symbol display device 81 variably displays the third symbol (corresponding to a period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b ( The third symbol is specially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the symbol lottery result.

  It should be noted that the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only needs to be in a display mode according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The display mode may be a display mode corresponding to the result (only the result), or a display mode corresponding to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, a big hit, a small hit, and a miss) as the special symbol lottery results, the special symbol lottery results are the three types of lotteries described above as the third symbol display mode. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, a big hit or a small hit) may be used.

  Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like, or a plurality of display devices may be provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is turned off. It is configured to be activated (projected) for a predetermined time. Although details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time-saving state (the high-probability state of the ordinary figure) than in the normal state of the gaming state. Accordingly, during the time reduction state, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the time saving state, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the time reduction state, the ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 in the time reduction state by using other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. If the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the time reduction than during the normal time, the winning probability may be constant irrespective of the gaming state, or the electric winning for one hit may be achieved. The opening time and the number of times the object 640a is opened may be constant regardless of the game state.

  Further, in the case where the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set game state and the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the timing of the second symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the hit is displayed (the hit of the second symbol) The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be determined according to the game state set in the game, that is, at the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a. With such a configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state during the normal state is displayed. It can be operated in an operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

  The relationship between the gaming state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be other than the above-described contents. For example, the change start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a If it is determined that the time reduction state is set as the gaming state at any one of the start timings, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is an operation pattern advantageous to the player (executed during the time reduction state). (Operation pattern) may be set.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and flows down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. Part (most) of the sphere is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed on the second symbol retaining lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display 37a, 37b and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Further, the number of the normal symbol start-up ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 203), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 190, the game (so-called left-handed game) in which the first entrance 64 is made so that the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 is located on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter than a game in which the ball flows down (a so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which a ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64. You.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view, a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 203), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

  Each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls (privileges) when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 may be set to five.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a switch (first entrance switch, second entrance switch) for detecting a ball serving as a special symbol lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the entrance. Although it is configured to be able to acquire a prize ball while acquiring a lottery opportunity of a special symbol, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which a ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is provided. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a passing ball detects the passing of the ball, a special symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the ball that has passed through the area (gate) that can be a chance to win a special symbol lottery can be entered, and when the ball is entered, a predetermined number (for example, five) of prize balls are paid out. It is good to provide a ball entrance. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of times of winning a special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of times of winning a prize ball different, so that it is possible to provide various game characteristics.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (permissible state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the near side (front side from the viewpoint of FIG. 190) and a retracted state (restricted state) retracted toward the game board 13 side. Normally (when the winning is not achieved at the second symbol), the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state (restricted state), and the ball is hard to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, that is, When a winning is achieved in the two symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissible state), so that the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  Here, the ball flow to the second entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 190, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is located on the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. It is sectioned on the right side (right-handed area), and the destination of the fired ball can be divided into a right-handed area or a left-handed area by adjusting the operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the player. It is composed. Hereinafter, a game in which a player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball to a left-hit area of the game area is referred to as a left-hit game, and a game in which a ball is shot to a right-hit area is referred to as a right-hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 190, the second entrance 640, the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, and a lottery trigger for determining whether to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is disposed in the right-handed area, and when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, a right-handed game is performed.

  On the left side of the second entrance 640, a nail is implanted for inhibiting (suppressing) the ball fired by the left-handed game from entering the second entrance 640, and is left-handed. It is configured such that a ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the game. With such a configuration, in a left-hitting game, a game is performed in which a ball enters the first entrance 64 to change the first special symbol, and in a right-hitting game, the second special symbol is changed. For this reason, a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 can be performed, and different game properties can be appropriately provided depending on the game method.

  Above the second entrance 640, a nail for regulating the flow of the ball fired by the right-handed game is planted. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the 2 entrance 640. Here, a configuration of the game board 13 near the second entrance 640 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 191, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes through the area where the electric accessory 640a is provided, and is directed to a V winning device 650 described later. It is configured to flow down. The second entrance 640 is located 30 mm vertically below the ball discharge position 67 a of the through gate 67 and 70 mm leftward in the horizontal direction, so that a ball that has flowed down the through gate 67 directly downward can flow down. Area a (see FIG. 191).

  An electric accessory 640a is provided below the through gate 67. The electric accessory 640a has a guiding state (protruding state) in which a ball passing through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second entrance 640, and a non-guiding state in which the ball does not contact the ball passing through the through gate 67 (evacuation). State).

  As shown in FIG. 191, the electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the second entrance 640 side (the lower left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 191), and the electric accessory 640a is in the guiding state ( The ball that has passed through gate 67 during the period of protruding state is received on the upper surface of electric accessory 640a, and then flows down toward second entrance 640. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 227, in the present embodiment, the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates in the gaming state is configured to be different.

  Specifically, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be 2 seconds during the time reduction state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured such that the falling period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 191 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (in the present embodiment, 0.4 seconds). With such a configuration, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, a normal symbol is won, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

  In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. In addition, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guiding state (projecting state) can easily reach the second entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set, and when the electric accessory 640a operates, the ball is surely made to enter the second entrance 640, but other than that, for example, The operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the state is a period (for example, 0) that is slightly longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. .7 seconds). With this configuration, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the time saving state, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated, the launch of the ball is started again ( Since the so-called stop hit) can be suppressed, the right-handed game can be continuously performed during the time saving state, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 190, the description will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 191, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to the second ball entrance 640 or the V prize device 650 according to the operation state of the electric accessory 640a. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described.

  The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which the ball is difficult to win. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can be won at a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  In addition, although details will be described later, a part of the special symbol "big hit" (big hit D) is the same as the case where the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is won in the above-mentioned "small hit". It is configured to operate. This makes it difficult to determine whether the special symbol "big hit" or "small hit" has been won when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

  Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 191, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, the ball can flow down the upper surface thereof. The ball that has reached the V prize device 650 while the V prize device 650 is in the closed state flows down on the open / close door 650f1 toward the lower left side (see FIG. 191), and flows out toward the variable prize device 65. On the other hand, when the V prize device 650 is in the open state (ie, during the small hitting game), the ball wins inside the V prize device 650.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V prize device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 second × 12 times, and the V prize device 650 flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 at the timing of opening. The ball that is present wins the V prize device 650. The ball that has won the V-prize device 650 is configured to flow down the first restricting member 651 or the second restricting member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 194 (a)). I have. With this configuration, even if the ball flowing on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V-winning device 650 from any position of the opening / closing door 650f1, the ball is smoothly moved. Can flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the open / close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 second. Another period may be set as long as the ball in which the ball is present can enter the V-prize device 650. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 in one small hitting game is set to 12, but any other number may be set.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the small hitting game, a period from the time when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is once opened to the time when the opening and closing is next opened (opening interval period) is 5 during the small hitting game. After the first and tenth opening operations, 5 seconds are set, and at other times, 0.5 seconds are set. This is to make it easier for the V prize device 650 to win a ball while the small hit game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hitting game, during the opening interval period after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, a game guidance display that prompts the player to emphasize right-handed games is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between the opening times can be set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650. Is set longer than usual. Similar control processing is also performed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball when the tenth opening operation during the small hitting game is completed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not playing an appropriate game during the small hitting game (a player who is not playing a right-handed game) to execute an appropriate game. In this manner, during a specific game (small hitting game) in which a plurality of opening operations are performed, when a part of the opening interval period is set longer than the other, and it is determined that an appropriate game is not performed, By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting appropriate game contents, a player who is playing an incorrect game can play a game with peace of mind.

  In this embodiment, after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hitting game, a longer special opening interval period is set. By providing the timing for displaying the game guidance display to the player a plurality of times during one small hitting game as described above, it is possible to make the player more appropriately play the game. In the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, the notification timing of at least the second transition may be set to a timing at which a player who normally plays the game cannot reach. That is, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by performing a right-handed game continuously during the small hitting game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured to be able to play a ball, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the winning number (10 pieces) serving as a termination condition of the small hitting game during the tenth opening operation is set. Reaching, the small hit game will be terminated.

  That is, the opening interval period executed after the tenth opening operation during the small hitting game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing at which the game guidance display is displayed using this timing, an unnecessary long special opening interval period is provided to the player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It is not executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

  In the case where the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) in which the first special opening interval period is reached even when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed as in the present embodiment. The timing at which the first special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing) or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first special opening interval period started (fifth opening operation) It is determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at a timing when a period required for the ball that has entered the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and that the V switch 650e3 has detected the ball. When it is determined, a notification effect for notifying that is displayed during the first special opening interval, and the V switch 650e3 detects a ball. If the Most is determined, it may be configured to display the game information display as described above. As a result, the special opening interval period set during the small hit game can be used effectively according to the game content.

  Further, in the second special opening interval, the game guidance display may be displayed even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the small hitting game ends without causing the V winning device 650 to win a predetermined number (10) of balls during the small hitting game.

  Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 192 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 192, the V winning device 650 is combined with the opening forming member 650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The disposed LED board 650d, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed on the opening forming member 650b. An opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1 and a flow path cover for forming a flow path in combination with the back side of the back cover body 650e. A switching member 650h that protrudes into a flow path formed by the body 650g, the back cover body 650e, and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball; and a link member 650i locked with the switching member 650h. A rear cover body 650j disposed on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the rear side of the rear cover body 650j and operating the link member 650i, and a rear face of the flow path solenoid 650k A fixing cover body 650m for covering from the side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws.

  FIG. 193 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 193 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 193 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 193 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10 so that a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 193 (b). A bottom surface inclined downward and to the left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball passing through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 193 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 193 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is provided by an opening / closing door 650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can be protruded and retracted from the gaming board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state where the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 650f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll over the upper part of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 650c (the interior of the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the V winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and moves toward the second ball entrance 640 side. It is configured to be guided, and also during a time-saving game (including during a certainty-changing game), it is possible to allow a game ball to enter the second entrance 640 while right-hitting, and immediately after the jackpot game It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to left-handed. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. . Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 193 (a) is a La-La sectional view shown in FIG. 193 (b). As shown in FIG. 193 (a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 194, a configuration will be described in which the game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2, which will be described later.

  FIG. 194 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state where the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted, and a guide piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover 650g. Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 194 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of a guide piece 650h2 disposed diagonally below left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is provided with a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge port 650e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by passing the game ball through the above-described V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big hit game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow that cannot pass through (difficult) the V switch 650e3. The flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) is for communication with any one of the paths, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. (See FIG. 194 (b)).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during a normal game, so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is composed. Then, when an unauthorized state is detected (for example, when a state in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is open despite the fact that the small hit has not been won) is set, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON and an illegal prize is won. It is configured to prevent (suppress) the passed ball from passing through the V switch 650e3. As described above, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 maintains the state for a long period of time, that is, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. By providing a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 194 (a)), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As described above, since the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game, the interest of the player is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge opening 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is configured. With such a configuration, even if the opening / closing door 650f1 is detected to be opened even though the small hit has not been won, even if the ball flowing route is switched by the switching member 650h, the ball can be reliably discharged. The situation of flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 can be suppressed.

  At the end of the normal discharge channel 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 650e4 and the positive change switch 650e3. The end timing of the small hitting game (the condition for ending the small hitting game (when a predetermined number (10) of prizes are won in the V prize device 650 or when the opening scenario of the V prize device 650 ends) is satisfied) At the timing when the small hit ending period executed after the game has elapsed, if all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, It may be configured to notify an abnormality or stop the game so that the big hit game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game progresses in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality occurs.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 10 award balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the V switch 650e3, so that it is possible to sort whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed. Can be. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a special prize port (specific area) for giving a jackpot game separately from the V prize device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 195, a description will be given of the structure of the spherical bottom surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. 195 (a) is a schematic plan view of a state where the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment, the ball reaching the upper surface of the V prize device 650 moves along the inclination of the upper surface of the V prize device 650 (see FIG. 190). It is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 to the left upper surface 650y2 via the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1, and flow out toward the variable winning device 65.

  A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the ball. Is configured to have a flow-down period of 0.6 seconds. This falling period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closed period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened a plurality of times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to reliably win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

  When the small hit game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 195 (a) and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 195 (b). FIG. 195 (b) is a schematic plan view of a state where the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 195 (b), when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves so as to be evacuated inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 becomes the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that a winning is possible. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the retreat position.

  In addition, the V winning device 650 includes a second ball for smoothing the ball flow after the winning, regardless of the position where the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. A first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 190), and a ball that has won a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a upstream of the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 is the first regulating member 651, After being aligned in a row via the two regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down to the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this manner, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first restricting member, the ball that vigorously wins from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected by the detection port 650a1. Can be prevented from colliding with, so that the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 can be prevented from breaking down. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first and second regulating members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball is clogged in the V winning device 650 and hinders the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the present embodiment operates in the privilege game (small hit game) given when the judgment result (special symbol lottery result) of the judgment means is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). With such a configuration, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval during the small hitting game (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the closed state) is reliably made to win the V prize device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

  In addition, a small number of balls (10 pieces) can be won during the small hitting game by merely causing the V prize device 650 to win only the ball flowing down on the variable member during the small hitting game. Since the number of open operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be greater than the number of winning conditions for the small hit game (10), even if one open period (0.1 second) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting a single open period to be long, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are made to win the V prize device 650 during the small hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 203). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 203). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also inputs from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, referred to as the frame button 22 when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are shown). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device is configured to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 203). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are formed. Is displayed. The third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of ten types of main symbols simulating the numbers “0” to “9”. . Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the activated line in combination of the big hit symbols (in the first embodiment, the same combination of the main symbols), the big hit video is displayed as the big hit.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). ), But the display style and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. A small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm in a front view. In the small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is fired (game direction) is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guidance display area. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired simply by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  A small display area Dm1 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. The small display area Dm1 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the case where the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1 means that, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the user presses the frame button 22 is executed. If you are. During the execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, during the execution of the display effect, the variation display of the third symbol is simply displayed in the small display area Dm1, so that it is easy for the player that the variation display of the third symbol is continued. Can understand.

  Further, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, if a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times. The same number of suspended symbols displayed as the number of suspended balls displayed on the sub display area Ds is displayed. In the first embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is set to four, and the second special symbol is set so that the reserved balls cannot be secured. Displays a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in accordance with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is displayed by a number. Alternatively, the player may be visually notified of the magnitude of the number of reserved balls by changing the character mode in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are described. In the sub display area Ds, the effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button related display mode for displaying the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the hit related information display mode for displaying information about the big hit game are displayed. The main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set so that the ratio of the display area differs depending on the content displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is rarely a situation in which neither the first entrance 64 nor the second entrance 640 has an entrance. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player has quit the game. caused by.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance The corresponding variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first entrance port 64 and the second entrance port 640, the ball that has not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of retained balls. Although the details will be described later, the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the first display area Ds1, the second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player, and the reserved ball display area. The pending symbol is shifted and is divided into an active area Ds3 that is displayed as an active pending symbol Dsa corresponding to the variation currently being executed.

  In the case of the suspended symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds, when the currently-executing variation display ends and the next variation is started, the reserved symbol corresponding to the next variation (the reserved symbol displayed on the leftmost side). The symbol Dsb) is deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted leftward and displayed. Then, the deleted pending symbol Dsb is displayed as the pending symbol Dsa in the active display area Ds3. This allows the player to be notified of the pending symbol corresponding to the variable display that is being executed, so that, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed to display a special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol. In the case of performing an effect that increases the degree of expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called pre-reading effect), the player easily recognizes that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed by the pre-reading effect is being executed. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, only up to four balls can be held up to the first entrance 64, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to four, and three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be configured such that the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 can be held up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, or the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball entrance 640 may be made different, and the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 is entered to the second entrance 640. May be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls with respect to, or may be smaller. Also, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, a color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the third symbol, the variable display is performed in common with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, as an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a special symbol lottery, a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations can be set. This continuous production is performed when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first entrance hole 64 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation) This is an effect for suggesting to the player using the period during which the game is executed.

  In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect for the player is provided. Can be provided to enhance the production effect. In addition, since it is possible to execute a continuous effect without highlighting a lottery result of a special symbol (for example, a miss) at each variation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player's willingness to play is reduced. it can.

<About the production of the third design>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 196 to 202, a description will be given of an effect of the third symbol in the eighth embodiment and a modification of the eighth embodiment. First, the effect of the third symbol in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 (a) and 198.

  In FIG. 196 (a), after the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that has won the small hit in the time saving game state is executed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol ends, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a figure showing an example of an effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of FIG. In the third symbol display device 81, a decorative symbol display area Du corresponding to the third symbol is set at the upper left of the main symbol display area Dm, and is configured such that a decorative symbol composed of two columns is displayed. ing. This decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after being fluctuated (dynamically displayed) in synchronization with the first symbol. The decorative pattern is composed of three types of "black circle" symbol, "black triangle" symbol, and "x" symbol, and each symbol row is composed of three types. After the two symbols are switched and displayed, the first symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol at the timing when the variation time (variation period), which is the timing when the first symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, when the "black circle" symbol is displayed in two columns, it is notified that the lottery result is a big hit, and when the "black triangle" symbol is displayed in two columns, the lottery is displayed. Announces that the result is a small hit. Note that, when the stop display is performed in another combination, the mode is set to notify that the lottery result is out of order.

  In FIG. 196 (a), it is reported that a small symbol is a small hit. In the main symbol display area Dm, the third symbol “7” is stopped and displayed in each symbol row. In addition, in the upper right corner, the character “RIGHT RIGHT” indicating to the player to execute a right-handed game in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball passes through the right area of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. .

  Here, in the present embodiment, the third symbol is configured to be displayed as a combination of numbers in the case of a big hit or a small hit in the time saving game state, and among them, “777” is displayed. When displayed in a symbol combination, it is possible to pass the game ball to the V switch 650e3 in the small hit game, and to execute after the small hit game by passing (detecting) the game ball to the V switch 650e3. It is configured to notify early that the time saving game state is set again after the big hit game. With this configuration, the player is notified that the small hit game that can be passed to the V switch 650e3 is executed before the small hit game is executed, and the small hit game is performed. It is configured so that the player can be prepared to enter the game ball into the V winning device 650 while the player does not miss an opportunity to pass the game ball to the V switch 650e3.

  As shown in FIG. 198, when the small hit is determined by the main control device 110 and the fluctuation display (dynamic display) of the special symbol is started, the third symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation in the first symbol, and the third symbol is changed. In the symbol display device 81, the variation of the decoration symbol (special symbol variation (third symbol)) and the variation of the effect symbol (third symbol) are started. As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed at a high speed in the decorative symbol display area Du (variable display at a speed at which the type of the symbol being displayed is difficult to recognize), and the main display area. The third symbol (effect symbol) displayed by Dm is displayed by scrolling at a high speed at which the symbol type becomes difficult to recognize after starting scroll display from the upper direction to the lower direction at a low speed. After the fluctuation time (variation period) determined by the main control device 110 has elapsed and the first symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol and the effect symbol are also stopped and displayed. In this case, the type of the effect symbol stopped based on the determined small hit type is determined. If the small hit type is the small hit A and the small hit B, the symbol of "777" is determined by lottery. On the other hand, in the case of the small hit C, a random pattern other than "777" is determined and stopped and displayed. Thereby, by passing (detecting) the game ball to the V switch 650e3 during the small hitting game, the big hitting game in which the time saving game state is given is executed (that is, the time saving game state is continuously performed). Is a small hit set after the big hit game) by stopping and displaying the third symbol of “777” so that the player can know before the small hit game is executed.

  In addition, even when the third symbol of “777” is not stopped and displayed, in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B, the third symbol other than “777” may be stopped by lottery at the same line. The player is expected to execute a small hit game in which a big hit game in which a time saving game state is given when the game ball is passed to the V switch 650e3 is executed. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 198, when the small hitting game is started, after the opening time (t1) elapses, the V winning opening solenoid 650f2 is operated, and after being operated for 0.1 second (t2), it is turned off. , 0.5 seconds later (t3), the operation is again performed for the period of t2, and the operation is repeated 12 times. Note that, as described above, after the fifth and tenth opening operations, 5 seconds are set as the interval time of t3. With this configuration, in the opening time of 0.1 second, the small hitting game period becomes short, but since the fifth and tenth interval periods become long, it is possible to lengthen the small hitting game period accordingly. It is possible to make the V switch 650 win by making it easy for a player who is playing a game without noticing the start of the small hitting game or the like to stop the launch of the game ball and perform the game by playing the small hitting game. The system is configured so that a problem of missing an opportunity can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 198 (d), the flow path solenoid 650k is maintained in the off state when the small hit A, the small hit B and the small hit C, and the V is discharged to the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is configured such that the winning game ball flows into the winning device 650. With such a configuration, in one of the 12 opening operations in the small hitting game, even if one game ball enters the V winning device 650, the game ball can be passed to the V switch 650e3. Thereby, the inconvenience that the big hit game is not continuously executed after the small hit game can be suppressed.

  FIG. 198 (e) shows an example in which a game ball enters the V winning device 650 and the V switch 650e3 detects the game ball. In addition, as the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3, as shown in FIG. 198 (f), after the execution of the small hitting game, the opening effect of 2 seconds (t6) is performed as the second round (2R). A jackpot game is executed in which the specific winning port 65a is opened when it is executed.

  Next, a first modification of the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 (b) to 197 and FIG. 199. FIG. 196 (b) is an example of an effect example in the time saving gaming state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the first modification. In the effect example shown in FIG. 196 (b), in the time-saving gaming state, the small hit A or the small hit B is won in the second special symbol, and the variable display period of the second special symbol corresponding to the determination result ends. It is a figure showing an example of an effect of timing given (timing of d0 in FIG. 199). FIG. 199 is a timing chart corresponding to FIG. 196 (b) in the first modification of the eighth control example, in which the first symbol display device 37 controlled by the main control device 110 and the display control device 114 control. 3 shows the display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, the control of the V winning device 650, and the control timing of the first variable winning device 65.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (b), when the variable display period of the second special symbol ends, a “black triangle” indicating that the decorative symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area Du is a small hit as a determination result. It is stopped and displayed at the eyes of the symbol. On the other hand, in the third symbol (effect symbol) displayed in the main display area Dm, the same symbol type (for example, “4” symbol) is displayed in the left symbol column and the right symbol column in the stop display or the temporary stop display (for example, Reaching to display a swing fluctuation in which the pattern is slightly shaken and stopped, or to stop the pattern but to flash the surface of the pattern or to gradually change the color of the pattern, etc.) It is displayed in a display mode. The period displayed in the reach display mode is a period in which the small hit game has already been started. In this way, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the variable time determined by the main control device 110, and is stopped by changing the display. If the player wants to know the actual variable time, the third symbol is used. It is configured so that it can be known from the display mode of the display device 81.

  On the other hand, the third symbol (staging symbol) displayed in the main display area Dm is constituted by a numerical symbol that is larger than the decorative symbol and is easy to understand (conspicuous), and for a player who plays the game while watching the third symbol. Can make it seem as if the content displayed in the third symbol (effect symbol) is a variable display period determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10. This allows the third symbol to be displayed at a time corresponding to the effect to be displayed, without being bound by the fluctuation time set by the main control device 110, and notifies the player of the lottery result at a timing that matches the effect. In this way, it is possible to suppress a bad production in between and a problem that the meaning of the production is difficult to be transmitted to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 196 (b), when the third symbol (directing symbol) is displayed in the reach display mode, the character "Gunman" is displayed in the main display area, and V is determined by the pattern of the "Gunman" cape. An effect indicating the type of the jackpot game executed when the switch 650e3 is passed is executed. As shown in FIG. 196 (b), a "fish school" design in which a school of fish is scroll-displayed in the horizontal direction is displayed as a cloak design. The "fish school" symbol is configured to be selectable by lot when the small hit game of the small hit A or small hit B type is executed, and is selected when the small hit C is executed. It is configured so as not to be. With this configuration, the “fish school” symbol is displayed, thereby promptly informing (suggesting) the player that the small hit game in which the time saving game state is set after the big hit game is being executed. Can be.

  The timing of d1 in FIG. 199 is the timing at which the operation of the V winning opening solenoid 650f2 is started in the small hitting game and the first opening operation of the 12 opening operations in the small hitting game is started. When the game ball enters the V winning device 650 during the period in which the opening operation is being performed, it indicates that the game ball has passed the V switch 650e3 for the first time in the small hitting game at the timing indicated by d2. At the timing of d2, the middle symbol row of the effect symbol (third symbol) displayed in the reach display mode as shown in FIG. 199 (a) is the same symbol as the reach type (FIG. 196 (b)). In the example shown, the display is stopped at "4" symbol) and the display shown in FIG. 197 (a) is executed. With such a configuration, it can be confirmed by the display of the third symbol that the game ball has passed the V switch 650e3. In addition, the letter “V” is also displayed in the main display area Dm, and the fact that the game ball has passed to the V switch 650e3 is notified by a symbol different from the third symbol, so that the player can be more easily understood. are doing.

  In the first modification, the “fish school” symbol is displayed on the cape to indicate that the time-saving game state is set again after the executed big hit game. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. At the timing when the game ball passes through 650e3, the symbol of the cape is changed to a symbol of “777” and displayed, or the character “Time saving game mode continuation is determined” is displayed, and the time saving game state is continuously set. It may be configured to notify that. Further, after the reach display mode is stopped (temporary stop display) in the form of the hitting display (four-sided pattern) shown in FIG. 197 (a) at the timing of passing through the V switch 650e3, "777" (7-segment pattern) "to notify that the time saving game state is set continuously.

  In the first modification, when the “fish group” symbol is not selected by lottery with the small hit A or the small hit B, or when the small hit C is drawn by lot, when the V switch 650e3 is passed, The symbol displayed in the reach display mode is stopped and displayed with a double eye, and the symbol "fish school" is not displayed on the cape. Thereby, while passing through the V switch 650e3, it is notified to the player that the big hit game is executed after the small hit game, but it is not notified whether the time-saving game state is set after the big hit game. However, even when the small hit A and the small hit B are executed, the effect shown in FIG. 197 (b) is selected (executed), so that the player is set to the time-saving gaming state after the big hit game. You can have expectations for things. It should be noted that, in addition to the "fish school" design, the color of the cloak (for example, blue, red, rainbow, etc.) is changed, and characters such as "chance!" Have been. Note that the selected colors and characters are configured to indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot type for which the time-saving gaming state is set. For example, if the color is rainbow, it is determined that the time-saving game state is set in the same way as a school of fish, and if it is red, the time-saving game state is set with a higher probability than the blue when the jackpot game is set. Is reported to be executed. The control process is configured to set a selection table in which the probability of selecting a red or rainbow color is higher in the case of the small hit A or the small hit B than in the case of the small hit C.

  In the above first modification, the small hit game is executed, the third symbol (effect symbol) is displayed in the reach display mode, and if the game ball does not enter the V switch 650e3 during the small hit game (is not detected), A symbol different from the reach display symbol (in the example of FIG. 196 (b), the middle symbol row is stopped at a symbol other than 4). The stop display timing (see FIG. 200) is a timing (a timing d3 in FIG. 199) at which the V valid period in which it is determined that the detection that the game ball has passed the V switch 650e3 is valid. With this configuration, if the small hit game is executed and the big hit game is not executed thereafter, the third symbol (effect symbol) is displayed as being out of reach (out of reach). The problem which gives a person an excessive expectation can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to easily notify that the big hit game is not executed, and to execute the game easily. In the first modified example, the player can understand that the game is shifted from the right-handed game to the left-handed game in which the game ball is passed to the left side of the third symbol display device 81 and the game is played. .

  In the first modification, even if the small hitting game is started, the third symbol (effect symbol) continues to fluctuate, and the big hitting game type executed when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 during that period. By executing the notification that can be identified, the player can be motivated to cause the V switch 650e3 to pass (detect) the game ball. Thus, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player does not notice the start of the small hitting game and loses the opportunity to pass the game ball to the V switch 650e3 while keeping the launch of the game ball stopped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 201 to FIG. 202, a description will be given of a jackpot game effect in the first modification of the eighth control example. In the first modification, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small hit but a big hit, an effect is executed such that the big hit game is executed through the small hit game.

  FIG. 201 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at a timing when the big hit game is started after the fluctuation time of the second special symbol determined as the big hit in the time saving game state has elapsed. Further, FIG. 202 shows a variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 controlled by the main controller 110 corresponding to the variation display shown in FIG. 201 (a), and a third symbol display device. It is a timing chart in control of the variable display of the 3rd symbol displayed on 81 and the V winning device 650. The display mode shown in FIG. 201A is a view showing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing d0 in FIG.

  When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol determined by the main control device 110 elapses, the second special symbol variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the second special symbol. Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (in the present embodiment, a set of black circle symbols) indicating that the decorative symbol displayed in a variable is also a big hit. The third symbol (effect symbol) displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed in the reach display mode, as in the case of the small hit, the character "Gunman" is also displayed, and the symbol "Fish School" is displayed on the cape. It is notified that the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the V winning device 650 is opened on the 1Rth of the jackpot game, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened after the 2R. With such a configuration, even when the big hit is won, the player is made to think as if he / she has won the small hit game, and the game is made to pass the game ball to the V switch 650e3. It is possible to suppress the problem of getting tired of the game during the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 202, the third symbol displayed in the reach display mode based on the timing at which the V switch 650e3 first detects the game ball (the timing of d2 in FIG. 202) at the first R in the jackpot game. (Direction symbol) is stopped and displayed at the same time, and it is notified that the second and subsequent rounds will be executed (see FIG. 201 (b)). Further, a “fish school” symbol is displayed on the cloak, and it is confirmed that the time-saving game state is set after the big hit game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it seem as if no large hit is set in the second special symbol and all the lottery results are small hits. Therefore, in the normal game state, the small hit is not set, and the game is performed with the expectation of the big hit, and it is possible to make the player think that the game will always win only the small hit when shifting to the time saving game state. Depending on the game state, the player can be made to think that the player has different playability, and the interest can be improved. Also, in the case of a second special symbol big hit in the time saving game state, the big hit type in which the time saving game state is set after the big hit game is always determined, so the small hit A and the small hit B in the actual small hit game Can be made to seem to the player as if the small hit A or the small hit B has been determined than the ratio at which the is determined.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select a small hit type of a special symbol. And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern. The second random number counter C4 is used for the normal symbol lottery, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 232). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da corresponding to a ball entering the first entrance 64 composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Each of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Each value is stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area. The special symbol change based on the stored various values is started. Although the present embodiment does not have a configuration in which the ball entering the second entrance 640 is held and stored, and a configuration in which the ball having passed through the through gate 67 is held and stored is not provided. Also, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area may be provided.

  Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 398). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 398, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 398. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 232).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da of the RAM 203 and the special symbol holding ball execution area. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol.

  The first random number table 202a has two types of special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 for the first special symbol and special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of small random numbers is set differently (see FIG. 206 (c)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are small hits different, the degree of expectation for giving a bonus (big hit or small hit) to the player is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 206 (a) to (c). FIG. 206A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 206B is a diagram showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1. FIG. 206C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2. In the first random number table 202da, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery. It is a table.

  Specifically, when performing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1, “0 to 4” among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (ie, It is defined as a judgment value of "outside." Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the big hit.

  When performing the lottery of the second special symbol, the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2, among the values of the random number counter C1, “0 to 1” is defined as a large hit determination value, and “2 to 398” is a small hit determination value. It is defined as Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of “0 to 1”, it is determined that the big hit is detected, and the value is determined to be one of “2 to 398”. In some cases, it is determined that the small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the first special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203da. Further, in a state in which a lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game), the ball is the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol. That is, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37 is used. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da or the special symbol holding ball execution area. .

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 398. In the first random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. Are stored in a special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 and a special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 of the first random number table 202da. Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the total number of random numbers is 399, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 5, so the probability of a big hit of a special symbol is “5/399”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202db is referenced to determine the big hit type when the big hit is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202db will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 207 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first hit type selection table 202db. As shown in FIG. 207 (a), in the present embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit type used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1). It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 at the time of drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2). . Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpots is selected. To provide the player with different game characteristics between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (b). FIG. 207 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 207 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, when the random value is any one of “0 to 49”, the big hit type becomes “big hit A” and any of “50 to 51” The jackpot type in the case of the hit is “Big hit A revival”, and the hit type in the case of any of “52 to 99” is “Big hit B”.

  “Big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state (one time saving time). Since the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state that is advantageous for the player, “big hit A” is a big hit type that is advantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 random numbers from which the "big hit A" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 50%.

  The “big hit A revival” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 4 as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to the time saving state (one time saving time). The third symbol display device 81 performs a resurrection effect in which the time reduction gaming state is given during the jackpot game or at the end of the jackpot game, with a sound effect and a ramp effect. It is a jackpot type. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the per-type counter C2, there are two random values for which "big hit A revival" is selected. In this case, the rate at which the "big hit B" is selected is 2%.

  “Big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a normal game state (non-time saving state). Since the normal gaming state is set after the jackpot, the "big hit B" is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 48 random numbers for which "big hit B" is selected. When it becomes, the ratio at which "big hit B" is selected is 48%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the rate of 52% of the case of winning the jackpot is four rounds of the jackpot game, and the time is reduced after the jackpot game. A jackpot type in which the gaming state is set is selected, and a jackpot in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is shifted to the normal gaming state in which the gaming state is a non-time saving state is selected at a rate of 48%.

  Next, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 207 (c). FIG. 207 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 207 (c), when the normal gaming state is set, the big hit type when the random value is any of “0 to 99” is “1” in the first hit type counter C2. Jackpot C ". When the time saving game state is set, the big hit type is “big hit D” when the random number value is any of “0 to 99” in the first hit type counter C2.

  Here, the "big hit C" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit end is set to a normal game state (non-time saving state). Since the normal gaming state is set after the jackpot, the "jackpot C" is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 100 random numbers from which the "big hit C" is selected. In this case, the rate at which the "big hit C" is selected is 100%.

  "Big hit D" is a big hit type dedicated to the second special symbol, and is a big hit type determined to be a big hit of the second special symbol in the time saving game state. The "big hit D" is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a time reduction state (one time reduction). Since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state that is advantageous to the player, the “big hit D” is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 100 random numbers from which the "big hit D" is selected. If it becomes, the ratio of selecting the "big hit D" is 100%.

  As described above, the lottery of the second special symbol is configured such that the big hit type determined in the case where the normal game state is set and the case where the time saving game state is set are different. In the normal game state, in a normal game, it is set that it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second entrance 640, so that there is a high possibility that the game is executed by an illegal game method. However, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot type of the jackpot C in which the time-saving gaming state is not set even when the jackpot is drawn in the second special symbol is determined, so that the problem that the profit of the gaming store is excessively impaired is suppressed. it can.

  In the present embodiment, there are five types of jackpots, but the number is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or six or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different big hit types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type in which the number of rounds is executed more, the hit in the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot is constant regardless of the game state, but is not limited thereto. The game state may be configured to be set. Further, the high-probability gaming state may be configured to be set until the change is executed and stopped at a predetermined number of changes (the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).

  In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The small hit type counter C5 determines a small hit type and determines a display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a small hit, and has a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). 99), the values are sequentially added one by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the first special value of the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64. The ball is stored in the symbol holding ball storage area 203da, and the ball is the first entrance in a state where the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) can be executed (that is, the special symbol is not being changed and the big hit game and the small hit game are not being played). 64 or in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the second entrance 640.

  The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202de (see FIG. 208 (b)) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is included in the main control device 110. Is set in the ROM 202.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202de will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection table 202de. As shown in FIG. 208 (b), in the small hit type selection table 202de, three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. Stipulated. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of “0 to 19”, the small hit type is “small hit A (15R at time of V passage, one time big hit)”. , "20-89", the small hit type is "small hit B (4R, 1 hour big hit when passing V)", and small hit if any of "90-99". The hit type is “small hit C (5R short pass without V when passing V)”.

  Here, in each of the small hit types (small hit A to small hit C), when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, the game is executed after the small hit game ends. The type of the jackpot game is set. In the case of the small hit A, the big hit is set in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state (small hit game is the first round) after the small hit A is executed. After that, one time saving game (a period from when the change of the special symbol is 100 times or the change of the second special symbol is executed once and the stop is displayed) is set as the time saving state. . Further, in the case of the small hit B, a big hit is set in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 4R open state (the small hit is the first R) after the small hit B is executed. After that, one time saving game (a period from the time when the change of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the time when the change of the second special symbol is executed once and the stop is displayed) is set as the time saving state. I have. In the case of the small hit C, a 4R time-saving no-big hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, a big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 4R open state (the small hit is the first R) is executed. After the big hit game, the time saving state is not set, and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game ends and the game state set after the big hit game can be varied depending on the selected small hit type. Specifically, the small hit A is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is set. The small hit B is set as a small hit, and the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (4R), and is set to be disadvantageous compared to the small hit A described above. However, the time reduction state is set after the big hit game. You. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (4R) and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one (first end condition) or the number of times of change of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) are set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one or more, and when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first special symbol (special figure 1) Even if the change of ()) is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-described second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. (Special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

  In the present embodiment, when the big hit is executed by entering the V switch 650e3 via the small hit, the first round (round) is executed as the small hit game and the second and subsequent rounds are executed as the big hit game. In the small hitting A, the game is configured to execute a total of 15 rounds of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If so, the big hit game of 15R) may be executed.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 232) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table 202dd (see FIG. 209 (a)) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202dd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 209 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 209 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal fluctuation pattern table 202dd1 used when a normal state is set as a game state, and a fluctuation pattern table 202dd1 used when a time reduction state is set. A time-saving variation pattern table 202dd2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  FIG. 209 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dd1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202dd. As shown in FIG. 209 (b), in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202dd1, a symbol type, a lottery result, and a value range of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are associated with the fluctuation pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 209 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special 1), the lottery result is "out", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". A variation time of 7 seconds is defined as being associated with the range, and a range of “140 to 149” is defined as having a variation of 20 seconds, and a variation time of “150 to 179” is defined as the range. Is defined in association with various normal reach of 40 seconds, a range of “180 to 187” is defined in association with a super reach a having a variation time of 80 seconds, and a range of “188 to 194” has a variation time of 100 seconds. Are set in association with each other, and a super reach c having a variation time of 120 seconds is associated with a range of “195 to 198”.

  In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". A super reach a with a variation time of 80 seconds is associated with a range of “30 to 79”, and a super reach b with a variation time of 100 seconds is associated with a range of “80 to 129”. A super reach c having a variation time of 120 seconds is defined in association with a range of “130 to 189”, and various special reach types having a variation time of 140 seconds are defined in association with a range of “190 to 198”. ing.

  Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special 2) and the lottery result is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 180 in the entire range. If a long departure of seconds is specified and the lottery result is “big hit or small hit”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the long range with the variation time of 180 seconds is in the entire range. Departure is specified.

  In this manner, one of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is not inserted into the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, the game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, that is, the game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the normal state configured as described above is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and thus the normal state is performed. In the variation of the second special symbol in, a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the second special symbol is randomly selected in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (change) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the result of the lottery is displayed. The fact that (fluctuation) has been executed may be notified to the outside. In addition, when the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed fraudulently, the lottery (variation) result of the second special symbol is forcibly set as the result of the lottery (change) of the illegally executed second special symbol. It may be configured to create and display.

  As shown in FIG. 209 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202dd1 is 7 seconds (when the selection ratio is About 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 4%), 100 seconds (selection rate is about 3.5%) , 120 seconds (selection rate is about 2%) in that order. If the lottery result is a big hit, 120 seconds (selection rate is about 30%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 25%), 100 seconds (selection rate is about 25%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 25%) 15%) and 140 seconds (selection ratio is about 5%) in that order.

  As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol and the variation pattern (variation time) to be selected are related, and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the special The ratio of the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the symbol lottery result is out of order can be configured to indicate the jackpot expectation degree when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not a big hit has been won based on the selected change time (change pattern).

  In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of the winning jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (eg, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A configuration in which different variation pattern tables are used depending on whether the type is the jackpot type or the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B and jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the other big hits is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the big hit (the big hit A) is won. It is preferable that the time fluctuation pattern is configured to be easily selected. This makes it possible to expect a game result that is more advantageous to the player as the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern to be executed is longer, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern table used when a large hit type indicating a normal jackpot is won is easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than a fluctuation pattern table used when a big hit type indicating a probable big hit is won. It is also possible to provide a game result that is surprising to the player when a jackpot is won with a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. You can have expectations to the end.

  Next, the contents of the variation pattern table 202dd2 for time saving provided in the variation pattern table 202dd will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 210 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202dd2. As shown in FIG. 210, in the variation pattern table 202dd2 for time saving, a symbol type, a lottery result, and a value range of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern and defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 210, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “out”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”. That is, when the fluctuation time is set to be ultra-short of 0.5 seconds in the entire range and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, An ultrashort deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified in the range. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out of range", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 0 in the entire range. .5 seconds is specified, and if the lottery result is "small hit", a short / small hit of 1 second is specified, and if the lottery result is "big hit", the change type counter CS1 is set. The range of "0 to 149" defines a small and large jackpot with a variation time of 1 second, and the range of "150 to 198" defines a medium and large jackpot with a variation time of 30 seconds.

  Returning to FIG. 204, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is a hit for the ordinary symbol is set by the second random number table 202dc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202dc. Is determined to be a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit.

  When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed on the second symbol display device 83 for 30 seconds. If the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained as shown in FIG. 208 (a) is in the range of “0 to 238”, it is determined that there is a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed. As a stop symbol (second symbol), a symbol of “」 ”is illuminated and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state, the second entrance 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when a normal symbol is hit. And the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 by three. Run for seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 238” (see FIG. 208A), it is determined that a winning has been achieved, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed. Later, a symbol “O” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the second entrance 640 is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only for “2 seconds × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "1 second x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 220). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 232).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 204, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 204, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (see FIG. 232), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 231). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the input is made, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 43) as the processing at the time of the power failure is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 205 (b), the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 203db, a time saving total counter 203dc, a big hit start flag 203dd, and a big hit flag 203de. , A small hitting start flag 203df, a small hitting flag 203dg, a V passing big hit type storage area 203dh, a V flag 203di, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj, a V passing flag 203dk, and a memory area 203z.

  The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da has four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) as shown in FIG. 204, and each of these areas has a first entrance. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired based on the entry into the ball 64 is stored. .

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four values. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when the lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da are: It is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

  Then, when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, each of the counters C1 to C3 at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (start winning). , C5, and CS1 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area as it is.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function of holding a normal symbol (second symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 is set at the timing when the ball passes the normal starting port 67. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area as it is.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 203db is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering the first entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db has an initial value set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of retained balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4 Is incremented by 1 (see S644 in FIG. 225). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203db is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S215 in FIG. 221).

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db (the number of times N in which the variable display is retained in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command (S216 in FIG. 221, FIG. 225). S645). The special figure 1 reserved ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203db is changed.

  Each time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 is suspended in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of retained balls in the variable display itself. As a result, the number of balls for the variable display, which is managed by the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113, is changed to the value for the actual variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number of balls has deviated from the number of balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The time reduction total counter 203dc is a counter for adding up the number of times of change of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time reduction state and counting up to 100 times. In this case, the time saving total counter 203dc is set to 0, which is the initial value, when the big hit is won (see S227 in FIG. 221), and is set to 100 when the big hit ends (see S1534 in FIG. 233). Then, 1 is subtracted each time the change of the special symbol is completed during the time saving state (see S522 in FIG. 224). The value of the time-saving and medium-time total counter 203dc is referred to when it is determined whether or not the time-saving state end condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the counter value has been reduced to 0 (S527 in FIG. 224). : Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S528 in FIG. 224).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. The time-saving state is configured to end when any one of the conditions that the number of times the symbol changes reaches one (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the first end condition is satisfied is determined. In order to judge, the sum total counter 203dc is used. It should be noted that the value of the total time reduction counter 203dc is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a remaining time reduction command (see S525 in FIG. 224). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the value of the total number of hours reduction counter 203dc is changed.

  Each time the value of the total time reduction counter 203dc is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the remaining time reduction command transmitted from the main control device 110 to output the remaining fluctuation count until the first end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining working hours managed by the gaming state storage area 223i of the sound ramp control device 113 is shifted from the actual number of remaining fluctuations counted by the total saving time counter 203dc of the main control device 110 due to noise and the like. Even if it has, the shift can be corrected by the remaining time reduction command received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned total number of time reduction counters 203dc, that is, the first time reduction state, The information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time-saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second time-saving state second ending condition. The situation in which the second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the condition is satisfied is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the time-saving state ends is suppressed.

  The jackpot start flag 203dd is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol in which the lottery result is determined to be the big hit stops, the big hit start flag 203dd is set to ON (S226 in FIG. 221). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203dd is ON and it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to OFF (S1523 in FIG. 233). The jackpot start flag 203dd is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to maintain the state immediately before the power is turned off in the event of a power cut or the like.

  The big hit flag 203de is a flag indicating that a big hit game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is the big hit is stopped (S226 in FIG. 221). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is set to OFF (S1527 in FIG. 233). The big hit flag 203de is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear state. When a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured to:

  The small hit start flag 203df is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S424 in FIG. 223). It is determined that the small hit start flag 203df is on, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game, it is set to off (S1543 in FIG. 234). The small hit start flag 203df is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up. It is configured to be.

  The small hitting flag 203dg is a flag indicating that a small hitting game is being performed. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S424 in FIG. 223). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has been ended), it is set to OFF (S1557 in FIG. 234). The small hit flag 203dg is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear state. When a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be.

  The V passing jackpot type storage area 203dh stores data for determining the jackpot type set when the ball that has won the V prize device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hit game is being executed. This is a storage area to be stored. The V passing jackpot type storage area 203dh stores the data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit stops (FIG. 223). S422). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203dh. 203di is configured to be turned on. At the end of the small hitting game, the data value stored in the V-passing big hit type storage area 203dh is cleared. This V-passage jackpot type storage area 203dh is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and in the event of a power failure or the like, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up. It is configured to be held by.

  The V flag 203di corresponds to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the hit jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small hitting game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203di is on (S1552 in FIG. 234). If it is determined that the V flag 203di is on (S1552 in FIG. 234: Yes), it is set to on. The type of the jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1553 in FIG. 234). This V flag 203di is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured as follows.

  The time-saving special 2 counter 203dj is a counter for counting the number of times of the change of the second special symbol executed during the time-saving state up to once. In this case, the time saving medium / low special 2 counter 203dj is set to 0 which is an initial value when a big hit is won (see S227 in FIG. 221), and is set to 1 at the end of the big hit (see S1534 in FIG. 233). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S524 in FIG. 224). The value of the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203dj is referred to when it is determined whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined that the counter value has been reduced to 0 (see FIG. 224). S526: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S528 in FIG. 224).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. The time-saving state is configured to end when one of the conditions that the number of times the symbol changes reaches one (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the second end condition is satisfied is satisfied. In order to judge the time, the special time counter 2 dj 203dj is used. It should be noted that the value of the time reduction medium time special counter 203dj is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a remaining time reduction command (see S525 in FIG. 224). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the value of the total number of hours reduction counter 203dc is changed.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining working hours based on the remaining working hours command, however, the remaining working hours command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time saving medium 2 counter 203dj, that is, (2) Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state when the second end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. This is for displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81 to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  The V passage flag 203dk is a flag used to determine a state where the V flag 203di is set to ON during the small hitting game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203di is set to ON. Is done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, and correspond to the ball that first wins the special discharge channel 650e2. In the V passage process (see FIG. 230), it is turned on (S1147 in FIG. 230).

  Then, in the V passage processing (see FIG. 230), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203dk is set to ON (S1141 in FIG. 230), and when it is determined that the V passage flag 203dk is set to ON (S1141: Yes in FIG. 230). ) And V passage processing (see FIG. 230) are configured to skip the processing of S1142 to S1148. Thus, even if the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hitting game, only the V passage process corresponding to the ball detected first is executed. Therefore, the processing executed during the small hit game can be simplified, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice ramp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 205, the description will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 includes at least the first random number table 202da described above and the first random number table 202da. A release scenario table 202df is stored in addition to the type selection table 202db, the second random number table 202dc, the variation pattern table 202dd, and the small hit type selection table 202de.

  Here, the contents of the release scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 211 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the release scenario table 202f. The open scenario table 202f indicates a prize device (variable prize device 65) in which a ball can enter in a bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) according to the winning type (open scenario).

  As described above, the prize device (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650) and the opening operation content (open scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type). ) Makes it possible to set the benefit game in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible for the player to enjoy the type of hit that has been won. it can.

  In the opening scenario table 202df, a start interval period during the hit game (a period from the start of the hit game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) that has been won. Opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of the winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (round number)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games) And the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change) )) And are defined respectively.

  Specifically, the winning type corresponding to the big hit A is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, and "variable winning device 65" is "15 rounds" and one round as the opening operation mode of the winning device. An opening operation mode in which a game is continuously opened for "29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as an interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as an end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot of jackpot A, the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game in which many prize balls are paid out to the player. . Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which the time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, is set. It is a jackpot.

  Next, corresponding to the hit types B and C, "2 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and "variable prize device 65" is set as "5 rounds" as the opening operation mode of the prize device as one round game. In the opening operation mode in which “continuously 29 seconds” is opened, “1 second” is defined as the interval period between rounds, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for five rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A to the player is executed. This is a jackpot game where about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, a time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is set, and in the case of the jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. Because of the configuration, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which a privilege which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

  In response to the hit type of the big hit D, "1 second" is started as the start interval period, "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and "variable winning device 65" is opened. Is released in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round is released "12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds between opening the opening of 0.1 seconds" and 2nd opening. In the fifteenth round, the opening operation mode of “continuously opening for 29 seconds” is “10 seconds” after the first round as an inter-round interval period, and “1 second” in other cases, and “4 seconds” as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

  In other words, although details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game contents (opening / closing operation mode) of the first round, and the inter-round interval after the end of the first lined) The content specified in (period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. With this configuration, it is determined whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game until the timing when the first round ends (if the small hit game is, the small hit game ends). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected hit game to a player who has recognized that the small hit game has been executed by winning the small hit.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol almost wins the small jackpot. (See FIG. 206 (c)). Therefore, the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and during a period in which the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a certain win game is started. In this case, in order to execute the winning game started from the same opening operation, whether the player has won the jackpot or the small jackpot, which of the jackpot (small jackpot or small jackpot) has been won by the player? Can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than the case of winning a small hit, and after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D is completed. The time saving state is set to be given. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot is not provided with a disadvantage that is more disadvantageous than when the player wins the small hit, so that a surprising game (the jackpot game corresponding to the big hit D) is performed by the player. Since the game can be made more advantageous, the player can be more excited.

  It should be noted that in the case where the big hit D is won and the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variable display (variable effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol stop display timing and the special symbol lottery display are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display timing of the third symbol is made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol is synchronized with the stop display timing of the third symbol, but the display of the third symbol is not displayed during the stop display timing or the period before and after the stop display timing. In order to make it harder for the player to identify than in periods other than the above, the display mode and the display area are changed, and the third symbol display is performed at the special symbol stop display timing. May or switch on the main display of the symbol for demonstration that is displayed in the area Dm third effect for normal symbol made to correspond to the variable display of normal symbol from symbol of location 81.

  In addition, a prize device (V prize device 650) that opens when a win game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are disposed separately, and a special symbol stop display timing (any one of the win symbols) is displayed. At the timing of notifying the player of the winning), the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display for causing the player to pay attention to the V-prize device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, It is preferable that the display area of 37b be smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is less visible than the third symbol. This makes it difficult for the first symbol display device 37a, 37b to determine whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode. Can be expected to win.

  Returning to FIG. 211, the description will be continued. The contents defined in accordance with the hit types corresponding to the small hits A to C include a small hit game (a round game) and a small hit game by the V switch 650e3 detecting a ball during the small hit game. An opening scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) which is continuously executed after the end is also defined. Thereby, the small hit game content of the winning small hit type can be reliably associated with the big hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game ends, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

  Specifically, for the small hit A, the start interval period “1 second” is set as the small hit game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device “V winning device 650” is set to “1 round”. Round games "0.1 seconds open 12 times", open interval period "0.5 seconds after the end of the 5th and 10th open (interval 1 between open), 5th and 10th open end Later, 5 seconds (interval 2 between opening) "is defined.

  Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is over, the “variable prize device 65” is opened in the “2nd to 15th rounds”, and one round game “continuously open for 29 seconds” is executed during the round interval period. After the end of the first round, “10 seconds” is set, otherwise “1 second” is specified, a start interval is “2 seconds”, and an end interval period is “8 seconds”.

  For the small hits B and C, the start interval period “1 second” and the opening operation mode of the winning device “V winning device 650” “1 round” open once for the small hit game. Round game "0.1 second release 12 times", interval time between opening "0.5 seconds after opening of 5th and 10th opening (interval 1 between opening), after 5th and 10th opening of opening 5 seconds (opening interval 2). "

  Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game ends, the “variable winning device 65” is opened in the “2nd to 5th rounds”, and one round game “continuously open for 29 seconds” is executed during the round interval period. After the end of the first round, “10 seconds” is set, otherwise “1 second” is specified, a start interval is “2 seconds”, and an end interval period is “8 seconds”.

  That is, the big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big hit game corresponding to the small hit A described above. In addition, when the small hit type is the small hit B, a time-saving state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the corresponding big hit game is set, and in the case of the small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game ends. Since it is configured so that the time saving state is not set, the small hit B is smaller than the small hit A and is a small hit in which a privilege more advantageous than the small hit C is given.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening drive, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. 209a including a flow path solenoid 209a for driving an electric accessory (other solenoid 209z) and the like, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. I do.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 or the frame button 23, and changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22; The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a, and various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outside, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a variation value selection counter value (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 213, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a winning information storage area 223da, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db, a change start flag 223dc, a stop type selection flag 223dd, an effect counter 223de, and other memories At least an area 223z is provided.

  The winning information storage area 223da has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223da, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball or the like before the start of the change.

  The first special symbol holding ball number counter 223db is a variable effect (the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203db of the main controller 110. (Variation display), and is a counter that counts up to four times the number of suspended balls (the number of times of standby) of the variation effect that is suspended in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203db stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db holds the first special symbol. It manages the number of balls.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203db of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command. Is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db (see S2277 in FIG. 238). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the first special symbol of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the reserved ball number counter 203db.

  The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the sound lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223db, and stores the first special symbol retained after the storage. In order to notify the value of the ball number counter 223 db to the display control device 114, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the value of the retained ball count indicated by the command, that is, the reserved value of the value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113, is retained. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The information included in the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual reserved ball count, that is, information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball count counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added by 1 or subtracted by 1 may be used. When information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 is transmitted as the reserved ball number command, the information is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. It is sufficient to provide a calculating means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information.

  The fluctuation start flag 223dc is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2272 in FIG. 238), and turned off when fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2512 in FIG. 241). When the variation start flag 223dc is turned on, a variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S2162 in FIG. 237) of the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223dd is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2321 in FIG. 239), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2517 in FIG. 241). When the stop type selection flag 223dd is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223de is a counter used for score effects and various lotteries. Although not shown, the effect counter 223de is incremented by one every time the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. It is updated every time. In the present embodiment, an effect lottery counter 223f1 used when determining at least whether or not a score effect is performed as the effect counter 223de, and a score distribution effect counter used when selecting a total score to be given during the score effect. (Not shown) and an award used when selecting a score to be displayed in one variation display (total of scores awarded in a plurality of score awarding effects executed in one variation display) A score effect counter (not shown) is provided, and each counter is configured to be updated within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 238) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 43).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left hitting game is performed and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Is done. Here, when the big hit of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the big hit is finished depending on the big hit type won.

  Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is the jackpot C (50% of the whole), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state later.

  In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed. If a big hit is won, the normal gaming state is always set after the big hit is completed. are doing. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 190, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a right-handed game during the normal game state, the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 (it is difficult). In such a configuration, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is regarded as an illegal act, and a countermeasure for preventing a player who has committed the illegal act from performing an advantageous game is performed. It is. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, it is configured such that the lottery (game) of the second special symbol can be performed more advantageously by the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, there is a possibility that a lottery of the second special symbol may be performed by performing wrongdoing. Therefore, by taking the above-described countermeasures, it is possible to suppress the random selection of the second special symbol from being performed.

  When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. As a result, a right-handed game is performed, and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

  Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V prize device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V prize device 650 detects a ball, thereby obtaining a big hit. The game is started. Here, the game state changes to a different game state after the end of the big hit depending on the winning type of the winning. More specifically, if the winning type of the small hit is the small hit A or the small hit B (90% of the total), the time saving state is set again after the end of the big hit, and the small hit type is the small hit C. In some cases, it is configured to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big hit.

  In other words, once shifting to the time saving game state, the time saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot with a probability of about 90%, so that it is easy to continue the gaming state advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can. In addition, when the big hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving game state, the time saving game state is always set after the end of the big hit. In addition, even when a big hit is won by lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving game state, the time saving game state is always set after the end of the big hit.

  For example, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, a jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is the upper limit, and the time-saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot, During the state, a lottery of the first special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball of the special figure 1 may be executed. In this way, when the winning ball is won according to the reserved ball of the special figure 1 (winning is a normal gaming state, but the timing at which the lottery is actually executed is a time-saving gaming state), the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. If a configuration that can be used is used, there is a problem in that the player who has moved to the time-saving gaming state with difficulty has a feeling of dissatisfaction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the first special symbol jackpot is won during the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since “the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one” is included as a part of the end condition of the time saving state, the case where the number of times of change of the second special symbol becomes one is The game state is also shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (when the second special symbol change of the first rotation during the time-saving game ends).

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 214 to 219. FIG. 214 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. More specifically, an initialization process (see S7102 in FIG. 243) executed after the end of the boot process by the boot program (see S7101 in FIG. 243) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 219) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and generates one of the frames of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S7103 and S7104 in FIG. 243).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 shows a power-on state displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first, and supplies the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (“O” and “X” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display control unit 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control unit 110, which is the change start instruction command, the display control unit 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 215, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 215 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and if it is “special symbol loss”, FIG. 215 (c) Is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident at 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 215 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 216, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 216 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 216 (b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the “sand beach stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage”.

  As shown in FIG. 216, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets a position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy stage which is the initial stage has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “Sandy Beach Stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “Sandy Beach Stage” that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 216 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 216 (a) to (b)). ), And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 216 (a) and (b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 214) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 214, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is determined in advance.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of place, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A to D. In any case, the stop symbol indicating the big hit is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol, the more chances for the ball to pass through the second entrance 67, so that the chance for the ordinary symbol to be drawn is increased and the opportunity to hit the ordinary symbol is increased. Become. Therefore, since the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a jackpot of a normal symbol increases, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the lottery of a special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time reduction period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance. When the ball entrance 640 becomes easy to enter, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the held special symbol lottery results in a special symbol jackpot, the player can make a special symbol lottery in the held special symbol lottery. Can be recognized, so that the player can surely have the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the backs A and B is to be displayed by the back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A and B as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 217) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, An image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 218). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 218).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 218, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 219) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 218, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , In the main processing (see FIG. 243) executed by the MPU 231 (see S7105 in FIG. 243). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. This is set to off (see S7305 in FIG. 244 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S7301 in FIG. 244 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S7308 in FIG. 244 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 244 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 244 (b) of S7309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 245 to 252) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 253 to 255) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7651 in FIG. 256A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 256 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 257) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 219) described below, which describes the contents of an image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 frame by frame. A drawing list described later (see FIG. 219) that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 219) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 244 (b) )), A pointer update process (see S7555 in FIG. 255) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 219), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 244 (b) Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7357 in FIG. 253). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S7102 in FIG. 243) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 257) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether or not the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8163 in FIG. 257). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S8164 in FIG. 257). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7752 in FIG. 258).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S7752 in FIG. 258).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S111). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S112). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S113). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized. When the value reaches (999, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, respectively), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S114). After that, a start winning process is executed in accordance with a win (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S115). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S116). A gate passage process is performed (S117). The details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 227 and 228. After the execution of the through gate passage process, a V entrance passage process is executed when the ball enters the V winning device 650 (S118). After that, a V passing process is executed in accordance with the winning of the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 (S119). Details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S120), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S121), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the special symbol change process (S114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S114). The special symbol change process (S114) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and displays the change of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S211). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S211: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S211: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S212), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the mode is not changing (S212: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S218).

  If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S218: Yes), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S219). Next, a special symbol change start process for starting the change display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S220), and this process ends. The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the process of S212, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is not fluctuating (S212: No), the value of the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db. Is acquired (S213). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is larger than 0 (S214). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is 0 (S214: No), the process proceeds to S218.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is not 0 (S214: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is subtracted (S215). A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is set (S216). After the special figure 1 reserved ball count command is set by the processing of S216, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da is shifted (S217). After that, the process of S220 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  In the process of S212, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S212: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S221). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S221: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S221, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S221: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is set (S222). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S220) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da. More specifically, whether a special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The big hit types (big hits A to D) are determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. When the small hit is made, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Furthermore, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are formed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the combination of the LEDs to be turned on is changed to identify each big hit type (big hit A to D). It is configured to display as possible. When the lottery result is other than the big hit (small hit or miss), the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be turned on in the same display mode. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S222 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. Is a special symbol jackpot (S223). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S223: Yes), a special winning opening opening scenario is set based on the jackpot type (S224), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S225). Next, the big hit start flag 203dd and the big hit flag 203de are set to ON (S226), the time saving total counter 203dcd and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203dj are set to 0 (S227), and the process proceeds to S228. In the process of S228, a stop command is set (S228), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S223, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S223: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S229).

  In the process of S229, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S229: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S230), and then a time saving number update process is executed (S231). ), The process of S228 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S229, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S229: No), the small hit start setting process (S230) is skipped and the time saving number update process is executed (S231). . Next, the process of S228 is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, when the small symbol is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, the small hitting start setting process (S230) is executed and then the time saving update process (S231) is executed. Is not executed, the time-saving state will end. Therefore, when the type of the small hit that has been won when the small hit is won is identified, and when the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is performed in a game in which the ball does not enter the V winning device 650, Since the time-saving state ends after the small hit game ends, an illegal game can be prevented from being played.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the special symbol change start process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S220). This special symbol change start process (S220) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 221) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and is executed in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery of "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not), and the first symbol display device is displayed. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hits stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203da. Each value of the type counter C5 is obtained (S311). Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S312). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entry into the first entrance 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1 (see FIG. 206 (b)) Is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the second random symbol stored in the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the value of the first random number counter C1 And the special symbol 2 random number table 202da2 (refer to FIG. 206 (c)) to compare the random number value with the random number value to determine whether a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S313). If the lottery result is a jackpot (S313: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S314). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S311 is compared with the random number stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202db1 or the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202db2. Of the four special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 207 (b) or (c)).

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random numbers may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a large jackpot. May be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player By doing so, it is possible to give expectations to the jackpot.

  Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the big hit type is set (S315). In the process of S315, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to D). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to D) are set as the stop types.

  Thereafter, a jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S316), and the process proceeds to S323. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S316, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the obtained special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202dd1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202dd2. Then, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined (FIG. 209 (b) or FIG. 210).

  In the process of S323, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S316 is set (S323). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S315 is set (S324). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are included in an external output process (S1411) of a main process (see FIG. 232) to be described later. It is transmitted to 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S324 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol changing process (see FIG. 221).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S313: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S317). If the lottery result is a small hit (S317: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S318). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S311 is compared with the random number stored in the small hit type selection table 202de, and the three types of special symbol small hits (small hits) are compared. A to C) are determined as to the small hit type (see FIG. 208B).

  Next, the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the small hit type is set (S319). Thereafter, a small hit change pattern is determined based on the value of the change type counter CS1 (S320). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S316, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202dd1, or the time reduction variation pattern table The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202dd2 (FIG. 209 (b) or FIG. 210). Next, the processing of S323 and S324 described above is executed, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 221).

  In the processing of S323 and S324 in this case, the command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (see S320) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit and the stop type (see S319). Is set.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S317: No), a display mode at the time of disconnection corresponding to the special symbol is set (S321). Thereafter, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S322). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S316, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202dd1, or the time reduction variation pattern table The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202dd2 (FIG. 209 (b) or FIG. 210). Next, the processes of S313 and S314 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 221).

  Next, the small hit start setting process (S230) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S230). The small hit start setting process (S230) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 221) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and includes a small hit type (small hits A to C). Is a process for setting the start of the small hit game based on the.

  Here, when the small hitting game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 has the specific area (V). By passing the prize switch 650e3), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

  That is, the gaming state in which the small hitting game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hitting game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the likelihood is high.

  In the small hit start setting process (S230), first, an open scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S421). After that, the big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passing big hit type storage area 203dh (S422).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S423), and the small hit start flag 203df and the small hit flag 203dg are set on (S424). After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the time saving update process (S231) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing the time saving number updating process (S231). This time saving number update process (S231) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 221) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), updates the time saving number, and changes the game state to the normal state. This is a process for setting to.

  In the time saving number updating process (S231), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the total time saving counter 203dc is greater than 0 (S521). When it is determined that the value of the total hours counter dc is not a number greater than 0 (S521: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the total hours reduction counter 203dc is a number larger than 0 (S521: Yes), the value of the total hours reduction counter 203dc is subtracted by 1 (S522). It is determined whether the map is a special map 2 (S523). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special map 2 (S523: Yes), the value of the time reduction medium time special 2 counter 203dj is decremented by 1 (S524), and the process proceeds to S525. On the other hand, in the process of S523, when it is determined that the current variation is not the special figure 2 (the special figure 1) (S523: No), the process of S524 is skipped and the process proceeds to S525.

  In the processing of S525, a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction medium time counter (the time reduction total time counter 203dc and the time reduction medium time count 2 counter 203dj) changed by the calculation is set (S525). The command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1441) of the main processing (see FIG. 232) described later. It is transmitted to 113.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction medium time special 2 counter 203dj is 0 (S526). If it is determined that the value of the time reduction medium time special time 2 counter 203dj is not 0 (S526: No), then, It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203dc is 0 (S527). In the process of S527, when it is determined that the value of the total hours counter 203dc is not 0 (S527: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S526 that the value of the time reduction medium time special 2 counter 203dj is 0 (S526: Yes), or it is determined in the processing of S527 that the value of the time reduction medium time total counter 203dc is 0. In this case (S527: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S528), and this processing ends.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S115) will be described. First, the start winning process (S115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S115). This start winning process (S115) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 220), and it is determined whether or not there is a win (start win) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a start win. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 225, S115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (start winning) (S641). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S641: Yes), the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203db (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is obtained (S641: Yes). S642). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S643).

  Then, whether or not there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S641: No), or even if there is a winning in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is not changed. If it is not less than 4 (S643: No), the process proceeds to S647. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the first entrance 64 (S641: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is less than 4 (S643: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203db is incremented by 1 (S644). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db changed by the calculation is set (S645).

  The set number-of-spheres command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1441) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223db.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S645, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small collision type counter C5 updated in S113 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Are stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area) of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203da of the RAM 203 (S646). In the process of S646, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, in the process of S647, a prefetch process is executed (S647). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226, a description will be given of the prefetching process (S647), which is one of the start winning processes (see S115 in FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S647).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 226, S647), it is first determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S711). If the result of the determination is that there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 (S711: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 (S711: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202da1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202db1, and the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (normal fluctuation pattern) The lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance based on the table 202d1 or the variation pattern table for time reduction 202dd2) (S712).

  Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S712 is set (S713), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the ordinary symbol variation process (S116) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S116). This normal symbol change process (S116) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), and the second symbol change display performed on the second symbol display device and the electric power attached to the second ball entrance 640 are provided. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 227, S116), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a winning of an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S821). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S821: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not a hit of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S821: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S822). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S822: No), it is determined whether a second random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S823), and if it is not stored (S823: No). Then, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S823: Yes), the stored value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired (S824).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S824 and the random number table 202c for the normal symbol (second), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is obtained (S825). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202dc. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if the value is in the range of "239", the normal symbol is out of the pattern. (See FIG. 208A).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S825 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S826), and if it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S826: Yes), the winning is determined. The display mode of the hour is set (S827), and the process shifts to S829. In the process of S827, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S826, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S826: No), the display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S828). In the process of S828, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the processing shifts to S829.

  When the processing of S827 or S828 is completed, it is determined in the processing of S829 whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S829), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S829: Yes). Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S830), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time-saving state of the ordinary symbol (S829: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S831), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S822, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S822: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S832). Note that the fluctuation time here is a time set beforehand by the processing of S830 or S831 before the fluctuation display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the S832 process, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S832: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S832, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S832: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S833). In the process of S833, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the process of S827, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S828, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S833, when the second symbol display update process (see S1418) of the main process (see FIG. 232) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S827 or S828.

  Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 227, S116) is changed to the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S834). If the result of the current lottery is out of the ordinary symbol (S834: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S834: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state (S835).

  In the processing of S835, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S835: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of times of release is set to one (S836), and the process proceeds to S837. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S835: Yes), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is set to two times. Is set (S837), and the routine goes to the process of S838. Thus, except for the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, and Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the processing of S838, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S838), and the processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S838, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1416) of the main process (see FIG. 232) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S836 or S837 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S117) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage processing (S117). This through gate passage processing (S117) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 220), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and store it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 228, S117), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S921). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S921: Yes), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S922). If the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S922: Yes), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S922, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is not changing (S922: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S923). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S923: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. If it is not during the special symbol big hit (S923: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S113 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S924). After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 229, the V entrance passage process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S118) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

  In the V entrance passage process (S118), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1041). In the process of S1041, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is not on (S1041: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1041, when it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S1041: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is being opened (S1042).

  In the process of S1042, when it is determined that the opening period of the V winning opening 650a is being performed (S1042: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1043), and this process ends. The V entry passage command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1411) of the main processing (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. Thereby, an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entry into the V winning device 650 can be executed (see FIG. 197).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the opening period of the V winning opening 650a (S1042: No), the error command is issued because the ball has entered the V winning device 650 despite not being a small hit game. It is set (S1044). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set (S1045), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the V passing process (S119) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S119). The V passing process (S119) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

  In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203dk is on (S1141). In the processing of S1141, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203dk is on (S1141: Yes), the processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1141 that the V passing flag 203dk is not on (S1141: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passing (S1142). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the processing of S1142, when it is determined that there is no V passing (S1142: No), this processing ends as it is.

  In the processing of S1142, when it is determined that there is V passing (S1142: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passing effective period is in progress (S1143). If it is determined that the vehicle is in the V-pass effective period (S1143: Yes), the V-pass jackpot type value stored in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203dh is acquired (S1144), and the acquired V-pass jackpot type is acquired. Is set to ON (S1145). Then, a V passing command is set (S1146).

  Next, the V passing flag 203dk is set to ON (S1147). After that, the total number of time reduction counters 203dc and the number of time reduction special counters 203dj are set to 0 (S1148), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1143 that the vehicle is not in the V-pass valid period (S1143: No), an error command is set (S1149), and this processing ends. When the game ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when the V validity period is not in progress, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1415, an error is output and an illegal action can be detected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 231, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1311). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1312). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1313).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 203) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1314). If it is turned on (S1314: Yes), the process proceeds to S1325. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1314: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1315), and if not, it is not stored (S1315: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the process also proceeds to S1325 in this case.

  If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1315: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S1316). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1317: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S1315 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1425 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1315, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1325). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1326, S1327).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1326, S1327) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1326, S1327) is also performed when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the initialization processing of the RAM (S1326, S1327), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1326), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1327). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1320.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1314: No), power-off occurrence information is stored (S1315: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1315: Yes), S1317: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1318). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1319), and the process proceeds to S1320. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1320, the effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the values of the time reduction medium time counters (hour time reduction total counter 203dc and time reduction medium time special counter 203dj) are read (S1321), and a status command based on the read values is set (S1322). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned off (S1323). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1324), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing the main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1411 to S1418 is executed as a periodic process of a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process of S1421 and S1422 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 232), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220), output data such as a command stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1411). Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S111 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220). Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 pending ball number command set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 221) and the start winning process (see FIG. 225) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 233) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1412). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1413). A jackpot control process for opening or closing the winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is executed (S1414). In the jackpot control process, the winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state is opened, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable). The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650). It is determined whether a predetermined number of balls have won the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1414) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 232), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

  Next, when the special symbol is in the small winning state, the execution of various effects according to the small winning and the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening of the V winning device 650). The small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1415). In the small hit control process, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable opening) is opened. The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650). It is determined whether a predetermined number of balls have won the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1415) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 232), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 220).

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1416). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S837 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 227). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S835 or the processing of S836 in the normal symbol variation processing are ended.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1417). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S316, S320 or S322 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 222), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. It starts in the devices 37a, 37b. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is a red LED until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S316, S320 or S322 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 222) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37a and 37b is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is set to the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S315, S319 or S321 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 222). A stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1418). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S830 or the process of S831 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 227), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S833 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 227), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S827 or the process of S828 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 227). I do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1419). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1419: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 sends a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1420). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1420: Yes), the process proceeds to S1411 and repeats the above-described processes from S1411.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1420: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1421, S1422).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1421). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1412 (S1422).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1411 to S1418 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1419, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1419: Yes), the power is turned off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 43 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1423 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1423), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to another control device (a peripheral control device such as the payout control device 111 or the sound lamp control device 113). (S1424). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1425), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1426), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  The processing of S1419 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1411 to S1418, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1421 and S1422 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1411. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1411 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is not initialized in the initialization process (S1311). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1411. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1414) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1414). The jackpot control process (S1414) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 232). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects corresponding to the jackpot and corresponding actions are performed. This is a process for opening or closing a winning opening (a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or a V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 233, S1414), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1521). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203dd is set to ON by the processing of S226 in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 221), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1521, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1521: Yes), an opening command is set (S1522). Then, the jackpot start flag 203dd is set to off (S1523), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1521 (S1521: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1524). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1524, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1524: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1524 that the special symbol is being hit (S1524: Yes), the process of S1525 is executed. In the process of S1525, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1525). If it is determined in the processing of S1525 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1525: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a or V of the first variable winning device 65) is determined based on the opening scenario table 202df. The V winning port 650a of the winning device 650 is opened (S1526), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1527). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S1411) of the main process (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201 in the audio lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the big hit has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1525 (S1525: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is set. It is determined whether the closing condition has been satisfied (S1528). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1528, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1528: Yes), the corresponding winning is achieved. The mouth (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S1529), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1528: No), the ending effect starts. It is determined whether it is the timing (S1530). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed, and the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined.

  In the process of S1530, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1530: Yes), the ending command is set (S1531), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1411) of the main processing (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1530 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1530: No), it is determined in the process of S1530 whether the ending effect is the end timing (S1532). In the process of S1532, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1532: No), the process ends.

  In the processing of S1532, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1532: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the big hit C (S1533). In the process of S1533, if it is determined that it is not the big hit C (4R time savings no big hit) (S1533: No), 100 is set to the time saving medium time total counter 203dc and 1 is set to the time saving medium time special counter 203dj (S1534). The process moves to S1535. On the other hand, in the process of S1533, when it is determined that the hit has been the big hit C (4R time-saving no-big hit) (S1533: Yes), the process of S1534 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1535.

  In the processing of S1535, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S1535). Then, the big hit end is set (S1536), the big hit flag 203de is turned off (S1537), and this processing ends.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1415) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1415). This small hit control process (S1415) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 232), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit and response This is a process for opening or closing the winning opening (the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the small hit control process (FIG. 234, S1415), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1541). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203df has been set to ON by the processing of S424 of the small hit start setting processing (see FIG. 223), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1541, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1541: Yes), an opening command is set (S1542). Then, the small hit start flag 203df is set to off (S1543), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1541, when the small hit of the special symbol is not started (S1541: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a small hit (S1544). During the special symbol small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol small hit (including a special symbol small hit game), and During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol small hit game. In the processing of S1544, if it is not during the small win of the special symbol (S1544: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1544 that the small symbol is being hit (S1544: Yes), the processing of S1545 is executed. In the process of S1545, it is determined whether it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1545). In the processing of S1545, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1545: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202df (Step S1545). S1546), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1545, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing (S1545: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1547). Specifically, when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game ends, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the V winning device 650, the closing condition is satisfied. Is determined.

  In the processing of S1547, when it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1547: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S1548), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1547: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1549). If it is determined in the processing of S1549 that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1549: Yes), the ending command is set (S1550), and the processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1411) of the main processing (see FIG. 232) executed by the MPU 201 in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1549 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1549: No), it is determined in the process of S1551 whether or not it is the ending effect end timing (S1551). In the processing of S1551, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1551: No), the validity period monitoring processing (S1558) is executed, and this processing ends. The validity period monitoring process (S1558) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1551 that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1551: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203di is set to ON (S1552), and it is determined that the V flag 203di is set to ON. If this has been done (S1552: Yes), an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203di is set (S1553), the jackpot start flag 203dd and the jackpot medium flag 203de are set on (S1554), and the V flag is set. 203di is set to off (S1555), the V passing flag 203dk is set to off (S1556), the small hitting flag 203dg is set to off (S1557), and the process ends.

  Next, the effective period monitoring process (S1558), which is one of the small hit control processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing the validity period monitoring process (S1558). The validity period monitoring process (S1558) is executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 234). This is a process for setting.

  In the valid period monitoring process (FIG. 235, S1558), first, it is determined whether the value of the V valid period counter 203dm provided in the RAM 203 is larger than 0 (S1561). That is, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress. When it is determined that the value of the V valid period counter 203dm is larger than 0 (S1561: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the V valid period is during the valid period, 1 is subtracted from the value of the V valid period counter 203dm ( S1562). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the V valid period counter 203dm, which has been subtracted by the processing of S1562, is 0 (S1563). That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the V valid period. If it is determined that the value of the V valid period counter 203dm is 0 (S1563: Yes), a V valid end command is set (S1564), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1561 that the value of the V valid period counter 203dm is 0 (S1561: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the V valid period (S1565). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the V valid period (s1565: Yes), a counter value corresponding to the V valid period counter 203dm is set (S1566), and a V valid period start command is set (S1567). The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1565 that it is not the start timing of the V valid period (S1565: No), the present processing is terminated as it is.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Eighth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 236 to FIG. 241, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 236, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current startup processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (S2178 in FIG. 237). It is determined whether or not the process has been started during the execution of (S2061). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 237, upon receiving the power-off command from main controller 110 (S2175: Yes in FIG. 237), audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2178. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2062 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power-off processing in S2178 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2066. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2063: Yes), the process proceeds to S2064 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2063: No), the flow shifts to S2068.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063: Yes), and the flow shifts to S2064. On the other hand, this start-up process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2063: No), and the flow shifts to S2068.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S2062: Yes), the start-up processing this time is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1516, the sound lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S2064 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S2064, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2064). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S2066). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2065: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2067), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S2068, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2068). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S2178 (see S2177 in FIG. 237). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S2178 is executed, the process starting at S2068 with the power-off flag turned on is the instantaneous start-up process. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S2178 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S2068: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S2069), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2070), and then the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S2071), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason that the process of step S2068 is performed with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of step S2068 is performed via steps S2064 to S2066. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 has been reset only due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2068: No), the process skips S2069, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, shifts the process to S2070, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2070), and sets the interrupt permission. Then (S2071), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process in S2069 is skipped is that, when the process proceeds from S2064 to S2068 via the process in S2066, all the storage areas in the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S2064. If the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing the main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or the current processing of S2161 was executed (S2161). If not (S2161: No), the process shifts to S2173 without performing the processes of S2162 to S2172. In the processing of S2161, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed. The processing in S2162 to S2172 is mainly related to the display (production), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S2173, and the variable display setting process of S2174 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2173 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of the command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the process of S2174 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2161 (S2161: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S2163 to S2172 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2162). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S2168 described below (S2163), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S2164). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2165 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2165, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2166). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2167). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors input of whether or not frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter, referred to as frame buttons 22) operated by the player to enhance the effect of the production are monitored. This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of No. 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2168), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2169). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S2169, a liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2170). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2168 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2169 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2170), various counter update processes (S2171) are executed. The various counter updating process is a process for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223de provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every millisecond in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, the value of a plurality of counters is referred to. In such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the values of all the counters are updated by one every time the various counter updating process (S2171) is executed, that is, if the updating method of each counter is unified, the updating of each counter is performed. Since the condition is synchronized and a random effect cannot be given to the set presentation mode, the updated values of the counters are not synchronized.

  After finishing the various counter updating process (S2171), next, the effect updating process (S2172) is executed. The effect update processing (S2172) is for performing processing for changing the contents of the effect currently being executed (variable display that has been set already) during the effect execution. Details of the effect update processing (S2172) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the effect update process (S2172), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2173). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the processing shifts to S2174. In the process of S2174, a variable display setting process is executed (S2174). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process (S2174) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2175). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2175 (S2175: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2177), and the power-off processing is executed (S2178). After the power-off processing is performed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2179), and then the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2175 (S2175: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2176), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2176: No), the process returns to S2161 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2176: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination processing (S2173) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2173). This command determination processing (S2173) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the score effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 238, S2173), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2271). When the variation pattern command is received (S2271: Yes), the variation start flag 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2272), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2273). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 241) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2271: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2274). Then, when the stop type command is received (S2274: Yes), the stop symbol processing (S2275) is executed, and the process returns to the main processing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 239, the stop symbol processing (S2275) which is one of the command determination processing (S2173) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop symbol processing (S2275). The extracted stop type is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 241) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  In the stop symbol processing (S2275), first, a stop type selection flag 223dd provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2321). Next, it is determined whether the stop type command received this time is the stop type command corresponding to either the small hit A or the small hit B (S2322). If it is determined that the received command is the stop type command corresponding to the small hit A or the small hit B (S2322: Yes), the stop type including the V winning confirmation symbol (in this embodiment, the 777 hit symbol) Are determined and set by lottery (S2323), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2322 that the received stop type command is not the stop type command corresponding to the small hit A or the small hit B (S2322: No), the received stop type command becomes the small hit C. It is determined whether the command is a corresponding stop type command (S2324). When it is determined that the received stop type command is the stop type command corresponding to the small hit C (S2324: Yes), the stop type of the hit symbol other than the V winning fixed symbol (that is, the hit symbol except for the 777 hit symbol). Symbol) is determined by lottery (S2325). After that, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the received stop type command is not the stop type command corresponding to the small hit C (S2324: No), it is determined whether the received stop type command is the stop type command corresponding to the big hit. (S2326). When it is determined that the received command is not the stop type command corresponding to the jackpot (S2326: No), the stop type of the off symbol corresponding to the variation type is set (S2327), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is the stop type command corresponding to the big hit (S2326: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit type is the big hit B (S2328).

  If it is determined that it is not the jackpot B (S2328: No), the winning symbol is determined by lottery, the corresponding stop type is set (S2329), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2328 that the hit is the big hit B (S2328: Yes), a stop type other than the V winning finalized symbol is set (S2330), and this process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 238, the description will be continued. On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received in the process of S2204 (S2274: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2276). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2276: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db of the main control device 110 ( The number of times N1) of the variable display in the special symbol is extracted is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2277). In the process of S2277, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223db is set. After the end of the process in S2277, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223db of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S2277 by the main control device 110. The value can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223db of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203db of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the starting prize is won. At the time of detection or at the time of drawing a special symbol, the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223db of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected to match the value of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 203db of the main control device 110. it can. When the process of S2278 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223db is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S2276, if the pending ball number command has not been received (S2276: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2278), and the hit-related command is determined. If it is determined that it has been received (S2278: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2279), and this process ends. The hit-related processing (S2279) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game that is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

  Here, the content of the hit-related processing (S2279) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing. When the hit-related processing (S2279) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit start command has been received (S2421). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S2421: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2422), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2162) of the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2421: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2423). In the process of S2423, when it is determined that the round number command has been received (S2423: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S2424), and the process ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the RAM 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side determines the current round based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the display round number command Good.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2423 that the round number command has not been received (S2423: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received next (S2425). In the process of S2425, if it is determined that the big hit end command has been received (S2425: Yes), the big hit end command for display is set (S2426), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2425, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2425: No), it is determined whether a small hit start command has been received (S2427).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2427 that the small hit start command has been received (S2427: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S2427), and this processing ends.

  In the process of S2427, when it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2427: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S2429). If it is determined in the process of S2429 that the small hit end command has been received (S2429: Yes), a display small hit end command is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the small hit game (S2430). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2429 that the small hit end command has not been received (S2429: No), it is determined whether or not a V entrance passage command has been received (S2431). In the process of S2431, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2431: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2432), and this process ends. When it is determined in the process of S2431 that the V entrance passage command has not been received (S2431: No), it is determined whether the V entrance command has been received next (S2433).

  In the process of S2433, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2433: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on a ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2433: Yes). (S2434), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2433 that the V-pass command has not been received (S2433: No), it is next determined whether or not a V-valid end command has been received (S2435). If it is determined that the V validity end command has been received in the processing of S2435 (S2435; Yes), it is determined whether or not V has passed (S2436). That is, it is determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 has detected a ball. If it is determined that V has passed (S2436: Yes), a display V end command is set (S2437), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2436 that the signal does not pass through V (S2436: No), a display non-V valid end command is set (S2438), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V validity end command has not been received (S2435: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to FIG. 238, the description will be continued. In the process of S2278, if it is determined that a hit-related command has not been received (S2278: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S2280). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2280: Yes), the stop display of the third symbol is set (S2281), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2280: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2282), and this processing ends.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2174) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting processing (S2174). The variable display setting process (S2174) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 237) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2511). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223dc is not on (that is, it is off) (S2511: No), it is in a state where the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2516. I do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change start flag 223dc is on (S2511: Yes), the change start flag 223dc is set to off (S2512), and then the change is performed in the command determination process (see FIG. 238) in S2273. The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2513).

  Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the score effect mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S2514). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing in S2514 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223da is shifted (S2515), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2516.

  After executing the processing of S2511 or the processing of S2515, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223dd is on (S2516). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223dd is not on (that is, it is off) (S2516: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so that this process is not performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223dd is on (S2516: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223dd is set to off (S2517), and the stop type extracted in the stop symbol processing (see FIG. 239). Is acquired (S2518), a stop type command for display is set based on the stop type extracted in the process of S2518 (S2519), and this process ends.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame worth of processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S7001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S7001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S7001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S7101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S7102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S7101.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S7102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S7102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data of the remaining control programs which have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S7103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S7104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S7001 in FIG. 242). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S7002 in FIG. 242) (S7105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S7001) in this manner, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 242, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S7101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S7101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S7102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S7103 to S7105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S7101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the leading part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S7101. After repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S7102, the processing of S7103 to S7105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S7103 to S7105 without performing the processes of S7101 and S7102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, the initialization process is performed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S7002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S7003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S7003, then the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S7004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S7004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S7005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 256A) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S7652 in FIG. 256A).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. In the meantime, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 244 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S7308 in FIG. 244 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S7309 in FIG. 244 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. In the case where the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when a display change pattern command is received, a power-on change image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the change effect period to perform a simple change effect. be able to. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S7005, interrupt permission is set (S7006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S7006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 244 (a), a command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 244 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S7201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 244 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 219) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 244 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S7301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (see FIG. 215) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S7302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S7303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S7302), the contents of the command from the sound ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S7303), an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S7302) and the like. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 253 to 255.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S7304). In this task processing, the image is formed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S7303) or the simple display setting processing (S7309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S7305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 is also provided with a scoring A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S7306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S7305) determined in the task processing (S7304). The drawing list shown in FIG. 219 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S7307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S7307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hits A to D, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out, complete out, chance ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S7301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 215) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S7308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S7309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, the details of the above-described command determination processing (S7302), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 245, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S7401). If there is no unprocessed new command (S7401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S7401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S7303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S7402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S7403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S7404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S7404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S7405), and returns to the process of S7401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S7405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S7501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S7501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S7501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S7503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S7504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S7505), the variation pattern command ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S7504, the processing of the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S7501 is performed. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S7502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S7503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S7404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S7404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S7406). If there is a display variation type command (S7406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S7407), and the process returns to S7401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S7407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to stop type information (any one of a jackpot A, a jackpot B, a reach out of front and rear, a reach other than front and rear out, complete out, and a chance) indicated by the display stop type command. Is determined (S7601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 244 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is determined. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S7602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S7602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S7603), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S7602. In the above-described task processing (S7304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S7602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S7603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S7601 in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S7602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S7406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S7406: No), then it is determined whether there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S7408). If there is an image change command (S7408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S7409), and the process returns to S7401.

  Here, the details of the back image change command processing (S7409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 247 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S7653) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S7701). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A, B), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to ON (S7702), the back image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, upon detecting that the back image change flag set in the process of S7701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the back image determination flag set in the process of S7702. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified to display either the back surface A or the back surface B according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S7702 is used. The type of the back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S7408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S7408: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S7410). If it is (S7410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S7411), and the process returns to S7401.

  Here, the error command processing (S7411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 247 (b). FIG. 247 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S7801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set on (S7802), and the error command is set. The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7801, the type of error that occurred based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7802 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S7802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S7410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S7410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S7412). If (S7412: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S7413), and the process returns to S7401.

  Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S7413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing. The hit-related command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the hit-related command processing (S7413 in FIG. 248), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit start command (S7901). If it is determined in the process of S7901 that there is a display hit start command (S7901: Yes), a big hit start command process is executed (S7902), and the flow shifts to the process of S7903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S7902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command process (S7902). The jackpot start command process (S7902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 248) that there is a display jackpot start command. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command processing (S7902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8002). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S8003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S8004), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S8005). This processing ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S7901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S7901: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S7903. When the processing of S7901 or S7902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S7903). If it is determined in the processing of S7903 that there is a display round number command, round number command processing is executed (S7904), and the flow shifts to the processing of S7905.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S7904) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 249 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S7904). This round number command process (S7904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 248) that the display round number command has been received, and the number of rounds during the big hit game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect when the game is performed.

  In the round number command processing (S7904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S8103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8104), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8105), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S7903 that there is no display round number command (S7903: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S7905. When the processing of S7903 or S7904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S7905). If it is determined in the process of S7905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S7905: Yes), a jackpot end command process is executed (S7906), and the flow shifts to the process of S7907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S7906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 250 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S7906). The jackpot end command process (S7906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 248). This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S7906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8202), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table (S8203). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8204), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8205), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S7905 that there is no display jackpot end command (S7905: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S7907. When the processing of S7905 or S7906 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S7907). If it is determined in the process of S7907 that there is a small hit start command for display (S7907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S7908), and the flow shifts to the process of S7909.

  Here, the details of the small hit start command processing (S7908) will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit start command process (S7908) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 248) that the small hit start command has been received, and indicates the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S7908), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8302). Thereafter, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S8303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S8304), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S8305). Then, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S7907 that there is no small hit start command for display (S7907: No), the process shifts to the process of S7909. When the process of S7907 or S7908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S7909). If it is determined in the process of S7909 that there is a small hit end command (S7909: Yes), the small hit end command process is executed (S7910), and the flow shifts to the process of S7911.

  Here, the small hit end command processing (S7910) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The small hit end command process (S7910) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 248) that the small hit end command has been received, and indicates the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S7910), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S8403). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8404), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8405), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S7909 that there is no display small hit end command (S7909: No), the process shifts to the process of S7911. Upon completion of the process in S7909 or S7910, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S7911). In the process of S7911, if it is determined that there is a V entrance passage command (S7911: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S7912), and the process shifts to the process of S7913.

  Here, the details of the V entrance passage command processing (S7912) will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (b). The V entrance passage command process (S7912) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 248) that the V entrance passage command has been received. This is a process for displaying an effect indicating that a game ball has passed through the switch 650e3 on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S7912), first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S8503). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8504), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S8505), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S7911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S7911: No), the process proceeds to the process of S7913. Upon completion of the process in S7911 or S7912, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S7913). In the process of S7913, when it is determined that there is a V effect command (S7913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S7914), and the process shifts to S7915.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 252 (a), the details of the V effect command processing (S7914) will be described. The V effect command process (S7914) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 248) that a V effect command has been received, and the probability that a jackpot game is given is high. This is a process for displaying an effect that suggests that this is the case on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S7914), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8602), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S8603). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8604), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S8605), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 248, the description will be continued. In the process of S7913, when it is determined that there is no display V effect command (S7913: No), the process proceeds to S7915. When the processing in S7913 or S7914 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V valid end command (S7915). In the process of S7915, if it is determined that there is a V valid end command (S7915: Yes), a V valid end command process is executed (S7915), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7913, if it is determined that there is no display V valid end command (S7915: No), this process ends.

  Here, the details of the V validity end command process (S7916) will be described with reference to FIG. 252 (b). This V valid end command processing (S7916) is processing executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination processing (see FIG. 248) that a V valid end command has been received, and the V valid period ends. This is a process for displaying an effect indicating that the probability is high on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V validity end command processing (S7916), first, the V validity end data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S8702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V validity end data table (S8703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S8704), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S8705), and the process ends.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S7412 that there is no hit-related command (S7412: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S7414), and the process returns to S7401.

  In the processing of S7401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S7401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S7402 to S7414 again. Then, the processing of S7401 to S7414 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in the processing of S7401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S7309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying the power-on image (see FIG. 218), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type command is extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 246 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 246 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed. With respect to this command, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 246 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S7501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S7502, a process of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 253 to 255, details of the above-described display setting processing (S7303), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 253, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7351). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S7351: No), In the previously executed command determination processing, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the processing of S7352 to S7354 is skipped, and the flow proceeds to the processing of S7355. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S7351: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination process, and the new command flag is set to off (S7352). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S7353, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S7353). Then, if the error occurrence flag is ON (S7353: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7354).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7451).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S7451, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7452), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S7354) or in the process of S7353, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7353: No), the process proceeds to S7355.

  In S7355, a pointer update process is performed (S7355). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In the pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7551). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7551, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S7552). As a result, if it is End information (S7552: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7553). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S7553: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7554), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7555), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7553 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S7553: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( In step S7556, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7552, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7552: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 253, the description will be continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7356). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S7356 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7357), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7358). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7358: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7358: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S7359).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S7359: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S7360), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7361). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7362), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7363). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S7364), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7365), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol determination flag set by the process of S7365 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S7304), the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S7365 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7359, if the confirmed display flag is on (S7359: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S7366). If the demonstration display flag is off (S7366: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S7367), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7368). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7369). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7370), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S7371), and the process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S7366, if the demonstration display flag is on (S7366: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S7309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 244 (b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at power-on ends, the fluctuation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (FIG. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 256 and 257, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S7305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 256A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7651). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7651: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S7652), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S7651, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S7651: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7653), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S7652), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S7305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 256B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S7652).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S8051), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S8051: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S8052). In the process of S8052, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, when receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S8052 (S8052: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S8052: Yes), the process moves to S8053. Also, as a result of the process of S8051, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S8051: No), the process proceeds to S8053.

  In the processing of S8053, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S8053). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S8053: No), A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S8054), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S8053, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S8053: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S8055), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 244 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination processing (see S7308 in FIG. 244 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S7309 in FIG. 244 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 245 to 252) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 253 to 255) are executed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 257) (see S7651: No in FIG. 256 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S7653), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S7305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S7653).

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update processing (S7355) of the previously executed display setting processing (S7303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S8151). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S8152). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S8152: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S8153) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S8154), and the flow shifts to the processing of S8155.

  Also, in the process of S8152, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S8152: No), the processes of S8153 and S8154 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S8155. In the process of S8155, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S8155), and the transfer instruction is set. If it has been (S8155: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S8156).

  In the process of S8156, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S8156 (S8156: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S8156: Yes), the process proceeds to S8157. Also, as a result of the process of S8155, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S8155: No), the process proceeds to S8157.

  In the process of S8157, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S8157). If the transfer start flag is on (S8157: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag is set. Is turned off (S8158), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various kinds of information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S8153 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S8163. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S8157: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S8159). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S8159: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S8159: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S8160), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Among the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S8161). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S8162), and the flow shifts to the processing of S8163.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S8161, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back surface A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S8163, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8163). The determination in the process of S8163 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S8163 (S8163: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S8163, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S8163: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S8164). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S8164, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S8165), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 258, details of the above-described drawing process (S7306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S7304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information The drawing list shown in FIG. 219 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S7305), and the drawing list shown in FIG. 219 (S7751). That is, in the process of S7751, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of the various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S7304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in order of the sprites after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S7305), the leading address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S7752). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process in S7752, the drawing buffer flag 233k is updated (S7753). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 244 (b)) is executed, it is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

  In the first modification of the eighth embodiment described above, in the process of S2323 of the stop symbol process (FIG. 239, S2275) in the eighth embodiment, the reach symbol type is determined by lottery, and “7” of the third symbol is determined. The reach display mode of the symbol is also set. Further, one notice display mode including a school of fish in the cape of the character is determined and set to one notice display mode from a plurality of notice display modes (a plurality of notice modes having different patterns of the cloak are set). On the other hand, in the case of the small hit C, symbols other than the reach symbol of the seven symbols are determined by lottery. Furthermore, the notice display mode of the cloak pattern other than the fish school design and the rainbow color is determined by lottery. In addition, a stop display mode corresponding to a small hit is set as the stop display mode of the decorative symbol. Then, in addition to the process of S2434 of the hit-related process (S2279) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a display command for stopping and displaying the middle symbol with the same symbol as the reach symbol of the third symbol is inputted. Set. On the other hand, the display control device 114 changes the non-V valid display end command (output at S2438 in FIG. 240) based on the timing of receiving the non-V valid end command with a different design from the design displayed in the reach display. The process of displaying the middle symbol column of the symbol is executed.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit, one reach symbol is determined and set as the stop type by lottery from the reach symbols including the “7” symbol. Also, as the notice display form, one notice display form is determined from a plurality of notice display forms including a notice display form that informs that a time-saving game state such as a school of fish or a rainbow is set (when the V switch 650e3 passes). Is displayed. During the big hit game, the middle symbol row is stopped at the reach symbol at the timing when the V switch 650e3 passes through the first R. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the V switch 650e3 on the first R, the character "Resurrection" is displayed after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a miss symbol, indicating that the big hit game is executed. The notification mode is executed.

<Ninth embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 259 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 260 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 261 is a front lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 263 to 265 are schematic diagrams schematically showing the structure of a V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 266 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 259, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 259) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 260) having entrances 63, 64, 640, etc., into which a large number of nails and balls can enter, is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 267) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached. The contents of a number of entrances provided in the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 259), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 259), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 267) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 260) or changing the effect of the super reach effect. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. At the upper left of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 259), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 260) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing spheres that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface at the center thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 260, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled. , The periphery of which is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 259). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first opening 64, the second opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 259) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 259) surround the front and rear sides. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member connecting the rails on the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). (Area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 267) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 260) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to a tip portion of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 260) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined or higher momentum hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37a and 37b each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided on the upper right side (the upper right side in FIG. 260) of the game area in front view. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are used for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 267), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be properly used depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. . Specifically, when the ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a is activated. On the other hand, when the ball has won the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use LEDs to indicate in a lighting state whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, during a time saving operation, or during a normal operation, or to indicate in a lighting state whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is changing. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and a combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the winning of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 and the time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. 5R time-saving jackpots, 5R regular jackpots in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 5R and no time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot. In addition, in a part of the case where it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery, the privilege given to the player is smaller than the jackpot described above (for example, the V winning device 650 is opened only for one round). A privilege to make small hits is available. The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit (whether or not a small hit) as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but also indicate if the lottery is a big hit. A symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

  Here, “15R time-saving jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the time-saving state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “5R time-saving jackpot” means that the maximum number of rounds is after 5 rounds of jackpot. It is a jackpot that shifts to a time reduction state. The “5R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the normal state without shifting to the time saving state after the five rounds of jackpots.

  The “time saving state” is a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is the same as the normal state as an added value after the end of the jackpot, but the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second entrance 640, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the second symbol is shorter than in the normal state, and the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit. The operation mode of the electric accessory 640a to be operated in this case is set so that the period in which the ball easily enters the second entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. It should be noted that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which a ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and only a part of the above-described setting contents may be used, or the above-described contents may be used. In addition to the above, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning probability of the second symbol is set higher than in the normal state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the “time saving state” is a period (first period) until the number of times of change (total number of times of change) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the first predetermined number of times (100 times), Alternatively, the second special symbol is set so as to be set during a period (second period) until the number of times of change of the second special symbol reaches the second predetermined number (one time), and the first period or the above-described period is set. The end condition is satisfied when any of the second periods ends, and the gaming state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. In this way, a plurality of ending conditions for shifting the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state are prepared, and if any one of the plurality of ending conditions is satisfied, the time saving state is changed to the normal state. It is possible to set a plurality of timings at which the time-saving state ends by making the transition to, so that the player can play the game while being excited about how long the time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state continues. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of end conditions of the time saving state are set for the number of times of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). For example, the number of times of winning a small hit in a special symbol lottery or the number of times the V winning device 650 operates when a small hitting game is executed may be set to a predetermined number (for example, once). The arrival may be used as a termination condition. Also, only some of the above-mentioned many termination conditions may be used, or each of them may be appropriately combined.

  In the game area, a plurality of general prize holes 63 are provided in which ten balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses the winning (starting winning) at the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") for performing symbol variation display, and a second symbol triggered by passage of a ball to a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs that variably display. Further, a center frame 86 is provided in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 267), so that, for example, the left, middle, and right 3 Two symbol columns are displayed (see FIG. 268). Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols). These third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 267) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, whereas The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed.

  That is, the third symbol display device 81 variably displays the third symbol (corresponding to a period (dynamic display period) in which the first symbol is variably displayed (variable display) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b ( The third symbol is specially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in correspondence with the timing at which the first symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing the result of the special symbol lottery on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. It is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the symbol lottery result.

  It should be noted that the third symbol stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only needs to be in a display mode according to the result of the special symbol lottery. The display mode may be a display mode corresponding to the result (only the result), or a display mode corresponding to the details of the lottery result of the special symbol (for example, the type of the winning jackpot). In addition, when there are three types of lottery results (for example, a big hit, a small hit, and a miss) as the special symbol lottery results, the special symbol lottery results are the three types of lotteries described above as the third symbol display mode. A display mode indicating that the result is one of two specific types (for example, a big hit or a small hit) may be used.

  Further, instead of the display device used in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like, or a plurality of display devices may be provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67. Are displayed alternately for a predetermined time. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation display of the second symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is turned off. It is configured to be activated (projected) for a predetermined time. Although details will be described later, the ball can enter the second entrance 640 by changing the electric accessory 640a to the operating state.

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter in the time-saving state (the high-probability state of the ordinary figure) than in the normal state of the gaming state. Accordingly, during the time reduction state, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given many opportunities to activate the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the time saving state, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, during the time reduction state, the ball is awarded to the second entrance 640 in the time reduction state by using other methods, such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. If the state is easy, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the time reduction than during the normal time, the winning probability may be constant irrespective of the gaming state, or the electric winning for one hit may be achieved. The opening time and the number of times the object 640a is opened may be constant regardless of the game state.

  Further, in the case where the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is changed according to the set game state and the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a is changed, the variable display of the second symbol is started. The variable display time of the second symbol is determined according to the game state set at the timing of the second symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is stopped, and the timing at which the second symbol indicating the hit is displayed (the hit of the second symbol) The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be determined according to the game state set in the game, that is, at the timing of operating the electric accessory 640a. With such a configuration, for example, when the second symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time saving state is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a hit during the normal state, the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal state during the normal state is displayed. It can be operated in an operation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately associate the set gaming state with the operation pattern of the electric accessory to be executed.

  The relationship between the gaming state, the variation time of the second symbol, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a may be other than the above-described contents. For example, the change start timing of the second symbol and the operation of the electric accessory 640a If it is determined that the time reduction state is set as the gaming state at any one of the start timings, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is an operation pattern advantageous to the player (executed during the time reduction state). (Operation pattern) may be set.

  The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board 13 on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and flows down the right side of the game board among the balls fired on the game board. Part (most) of the sphere is configured to be able to pass. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. If so, a symbol "x" is displayed as a symbol for stopping the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed on the second symbol retaining lamp 84 described above. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are disposed symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display 37a, 37b and the third symbol. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four, but is set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). You may. Further, the number of the normal symbol start-up ports (through gates) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). In addition, the position where the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 267), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 260, the first ball entrance 64 is such that a game (so-called left-handed game) in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display device unit 80, the right entrance of the variable display device unit 80 is performed. A nail is planted on the game board 13 so that the ball can easily enter than a game in which the ball flows down (a so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which a ball is unlikely to enter the second entrance 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed in order to allow the ball to enter the first entrance 64. You.

  On the other hand, on the right side of the first entrance 64 in front view, a second entrance 640 into which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the second entrance 640, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 267), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37b.

  Each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, the first entry. The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the ball opening 64 may be set to three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second entrance port 640 may be set to five.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a switch (first entrance switch, second entrance switch) for detecting a ball serving as a special symbol lottery opportunity (big hit lottery opportunity) is provided in the entrance. Although it is configured to be able to acquire a prize ball while acquiring a lottery opportunity of a special symbol, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which a ball can pass is provided, and the area (gate) is provided. When a switch (detection means) for detecting a passing ball detects the passing of the ball, a special symbol lottery opportunity may be obtained. In this case, at least a part of the ball that has passed through the area (gate) that can be a chance to win a special symbol lottery can be entered, and when the ball is entered, a predetermined number (for example, five) of prize balls are paid out. It is good to provide a ball entrance. With this configuration, it is possible to make the number of times of winning a special symbol lottery opportunity and the number of times of winning a prize ball different, so that it is possible to provide various game characteristics.

  The second entrance 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a can be changed between a protruding state (permissible state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the near side (front side in the viewpoint of FIG. 260) and a retracted state (restricted state) retracted toward the game board 13 side. In a normal state (when the winning is not achieved at the second symbol), the electric accessory 640a is in the retracted state (restricted state), and the ball is difficult to enter the second entrance 640. It has become. On the other hand, when the symbol "O" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67, that is, When a winning is achieved in the two symbol lottery, the electric accessory 640a is in a protruding state (permissible state), so that the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  Here, the ball flow to the second entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area of the game board 13, and the game area is located on the left side (left-handed area) of the variable display device unit 80. Divided into the right side (right-handed area), the player can adjust the operation amount of the operation handle 51 to strike the destination of the shot ball into the right-handed area or the left-handed area. It is composed. Hereinafter, a game in which a player operates the operation handle 51 to shoot a ball to a left-hit area of the game area is referred to as a left-hit game, and a game in which a ball is shot to a right-hit area is referred to as a right-hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260, a second entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, and a lottery trigger for determining whether or not to operate the electric accessory 640a. A normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is provided in the right-handed area, and when the time reduction state is set as the gaming state, a right-handed game is performed.

  On the left side of the second entrance 640, a nail is implanted for inhibiting (suppressing) the ball fired by the left-handed game from entering the second entrance 640, and is left-handed. It is configured such that a ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during the game. With such a configuration, in a left-hitting game, a game is performed in which a ball enters the first entrance 64 to change the first special symbol, and in a right-hitting game, the second special symbol is changed. For this reason, a game in which a ball enters the second entrance 640 can be performed, and different game properties can be appropriately provided depending on the game method.

  Above the second entrance 640, a nail for regulating the flow of the ball fired by the right-handed game is planted. It is configured so that the ball does not enter the 2 entrance 640. Here, the configuration of the game board 13 near the second entrance 640 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 261, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes through the area where the electric accessory 640 a is provided, and is directed to a V winning device 650 described later. It is configured to flow down. The second entrance 640 is located 30 mm vertically below the ball discharge position 67 a of the through gate 67 and 70 mm leftward in the horizontal direction, so that a ball that has flowed down the through gate 67 directly downward can flow down. Area a (see FIG. 261).

  An electric accessory 640a is provided below the through gate 67. The electric accessory 640a has a guiding state (protruding state) in which a ball passing through the through gate 67 can be guided to the second entrance 640, and a non-guiding state in which the ball does not contact the ball passing through the through gate 67 (evacuation). State).

  As shown in FIG. 261, the electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the second entrance 640 side (the lower left side in the viewpoint of FIG. 261), and the electric accessory 640a is in the guiding state ( The ball that has passed through gate 67 during the period of protruding state) is received by the upper surface of electric accessory 640a, and then flows down toward second entrance 640. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 304, the present embodiment is configured so that the period during which the electric accessory 640a continuously operates in the gaming state is different.

  Specifically, the operating period of the electric accessory 640a is configured to be 2 seconds during the time reduction state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric accessory 640a is configured such that the falling period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 261 is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (in the present embodiment, 0.4 seconds). With such a configuration, even if a right-handed game is performed during the normal state, a normal symbol is won, and the ball flows down the upper surface of the operating electric accessory 640a, Since the operation of the electric accessory 640a ends before the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the second entrance 640, it is ensured that the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the normal state. Can be prevented.

  In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric accessory 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. In addition, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a in the guiding state (projecting state) can easily reach the second entrance 640 and the lottery of the second special symbol can be easily executed.

  In the present embodiment, the operation period of the electric accessory 640a during the time saving state is longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. A sufficiently long period (2 seconds) is set, and when the electric accessory 640a operates, the ball is surely made to enter the second entrance 640, but other than that, for example, The operating period of the electric accessory 640a in the state is a period (for example, 0) that is slightly longer than the period (0.4 seconds) in which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a and reaches the second entrance 640. .7 seconds). With this configuration, after the ball is passed through the through gate 67 during the time saving state, the launch of the ball is stopped, and after confirming that the electric accessory 640a has operated, the launch of the ball is started again ( Since the so-called stop hit) can be suppressed, the right-handed game can be continuously performed during the time saving state, and the operation of the game can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 260, the description will be continued. As described above with reference to FIG. 261, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 flows down to the second ball entrance 640 or the V prize device 650 according to the operation state of the electric accessory 640a. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described.

  The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which the ball is difficult to win. The opening / closing door 650f1 of the device 650 is operated to change to an open state in which a ball can be won at a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  In addition, although details will be described later, a part of the special symbol "big hit" (big hit D) is the same as the case where the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is won in the above-mentioned "small hit". It is configured to operate. This makes it difficult to determine whether the special symbol "big hit" or "small hit" has been won when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

  Here, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. First, as shown in FIG. 261, when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in the closed state in which the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is closed, the ball can flow down the upper surface thereof. The ball that has reached the V prize device 650 while the V prize device 650 is in the closed state flows down on the open / close door 650f1 toward the lower left side (see FIG. 261), and flows out toward the variable prize device 65. On the other hand, when the V prize device 650 is in the open state (ie, during the small hitting game), the ball wins inside the V prize device 650.

  In the present embodiment, the opening period of the V prize device 650 during the small hit game is configured to be 0.1 second × 12 times, and the V prize device 650 flows down on the opening / closing door 650f1 at the timing of opening. The ball that is present wins the V prize device 650. The ball that has won the V-prize device 650 is configured to flow down the first restricting member 651 or the second restricting member 652 while being aligned toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 264 (a)). I have. With this configuration, even if the ball flowing on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V-winning device 650 from any position of the opening / closing door 650f1, the ball is smoothly moved. Can flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the open / close door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously opened is set to 0.1 second. Another period may be set as long as the ball in which the ball is present can enter the V-prize device 650. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times of opening the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 in one small hitting game is set to 12, but any other number may be set.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in the small hitting game, a period from the time when the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is once opened to the time when the opening and closing is next opened (opening interval period) is 5 during the small hitting game. After the first and tenth opening operations, 5 seconds are set, and at other times, 0.5 seconds are set. This is to make it easier for the V prize device 650 to win a ball while the small hit game is being played. Specifically, when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected the ball at the time when the fifth opening operation is completed during the small hitting game, during the opening interval period after the fifth opening operation is completed. In addition, a game guidance display that prompts the player to emphasize right-handed games is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, even when the right-handed game is started by grasping the game guidance display displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the interval period between the opening times can be set so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650. Is set longer than usual. Similar control processing is also performed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball when the tenth opening operation during the small hitting game is completed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is not playing an appropriate game during the small hitting game (a player who is not playing a right-handed game) to execute an appropriate game. In this manner, during a specific game (small hitting game) in which a plurality of opening operations are performed, when a part of the opening interval period is set longer than the other, and it is determined that an appropriate game is not performed, By making it possible to display a game guidance display for prompting appropriate game contents, a player who is playing an incorrect game can play a game with peace of mind.

  In this embodiment, after the fifth and tenth opening operations during the small hitting game, a longer special opening interval period is set. By providing the timing for displaying the game guidance display to the player a plurality of times during one small hitting game as described above, it is possible to make the player more appropriately play the game. In the case where the timing for displaying the game guidance display is provided a plurality of times, the notification timing of at least the second transition may be set to a timing at which a player who normally plays the game cannot reach. That is, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, by performing a right-handed game continuously during the small hitting game, at least one ball is inserted in one opening operation of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Since it is configured to be able to play a ball, if a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed, the winning number (10 pieces) serving as a termination condition of the small hitting game during the tenth opening operation is set. Reaching, the small hit game will be terminated.

  That is, the opening interval period executed after the tenth opening operation during the small hitting game is a timing that cannot be reached when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed. Therefore, by setting the timing at which the game guidance display is displayed using this timing, an unnecessary long special opening interval period is provided to the player who is playing a normal game (continuous right-handed game). It is not executed, and the small hit game can be executed smoothly.

  In the case where the first special opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) in which the first special opening interval period is reached even when a normal game (continuous right-handed game) is performed as in the present embodiment. The timing at which the first special opening interval period starts (fifth opening operation end timing) or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the first special opening interval period started (fifth opening operation) It is determined whether or not the V switch 650e3 detects the ball at a timing when a period required for the ball that has entered the ball to be ejected from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and that the V switch 650e3 has detected the ball. When it is determined, a notification effect for notifying that is displayed during the first special opening interval, and the V switch 650e3 detects a ball. If the Most is determined, it may be configured to display the game information display as described above. As a result, the special opening interval period set during the small hit game can be used effectively according to the game content.

  Further, in the second special opening interval, the game guidance display may be displayed even when the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which the small hitting game ends without causing the V winning device 650 to win a predetermined number (10) of balls during the small hitting game.

  Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 262 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 262, the V winning device 650 is combined with the opening forming member 650b protruding from the front side of the game board 13 and the back side of the opening forming member 650b to form the V winning device 650. A base member 650c for screwing to the game board 13 and a plurality of LEDs arranged on the back side of the base member 650c to light the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 The disposed LED board 650d, the back cover body 650e that sandwiches the LED board 650d with the base member 650c, and the opening and closing of a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. An opening / closing unit 650f having an opening / closing door 650f1 and a flow path cover for forming a flow path in combination with the back side of the back cover body 650e. A switching member 650h that protrudes into a flow path formed by the body 650g, the back cover body 650e, and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball; and a link member 650i locked with the switching member 650h. A rear cover body 650j disposed on the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k fixed to the rear side of the rear cover body 650j and operating the link member 650i, and a rear face of the flow path solenoid 650k A fixing cover body 650m for covering from the side and fixing to the back cover body 650j with screws.

  FIG. 263 is a sectional view of the V winning device 650. FIG. 263 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and FIG. 263 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650 along Lb-Lb. As shown in FIG. 263 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10 so that a game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 263 (b). A bottom surface inclined downward and to the left is formed. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting a winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that has passed through the detection port 650a1 is guided to a distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 650e shown in FIG. 263 (b).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 263 (b), the opening of the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is an opening through which a game ball can enter by an opening / closing door 650f1 constituted by a shutter mechanism which can be moved in and out from the game board 13 side. The state is changed to a closed state where the ball cannot be entered (ball entry is difficult). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the open / close door 650f1, and the game ball is configured to be able to roll over the upper part of the open / close door. In the open state, the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to be retracted from the inside of the base member 650c (the interior of the game board 13) to be retracted from the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a.

  With this configuration, when the opening of the V winning device 650 is closed, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and moves toward the second ball entrance 640 side. It is configured to be guided, and also during a time-saving game (including during a certainty-changing game), it is possible to allow a game ball to enter the second entrance 640 while right-hitting, and immediately after the jackpot game It is possible to reduce the trouble of changing the game method to left-handed. Therefore, a game can be played more easily.

  In the open state, a surface orthogonal to the direction in which the game balls flow down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so that more game balls can efficiently win in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. . Therefore, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 263 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 263 (b). As shown in FIG. 263 (a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c such that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 650e.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 264, a configuration will be described in which game balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 650e1 and a special discharge channel 650e2 described later.

  FIG. 264 (a) is a rear view of the back cover body 650e showing a state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are distributed to the special discharge port 650e2. As shown in FIG. 264 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted, and a guiding piece 650h2 for guiding the game ball, and the flow path cover body 650g. Is rotatably supported from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 650h is rotated into the distribution flow path from the back side of the flow path cover 650g. It is configured so that it can be arranged as possible.

  As shown in FIG. 264 (a), the game ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 disposed diagonally below left and guided to the special discharge port 650e2. . The game ball that has passed through the special discharge port 650e2 is detected by a V switch 650e3 that is provided with a magnetic sensor provided in the special discharge port 650e2 and that can detect the passage of the game ball, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball. .

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the big hit game is set after the small hit game by passing the game ball through the above-described V switch 650e3 during the small hit game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big hit game. In addition, the switching member 650h is a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which a ball that has won the V prize device 650 during a small hit can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow that cannot pass through (difficult) the V switch 650e3. The path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) is for communicating with any one of the paths, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to ON, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. (See FIG. 264 (b)).

  In the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during a normal game, so that the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. It is composed. Then, when an unauthorized state is detected (for example, when a state in which the opening / closing door 650f1 is open despite the fact that the small hit has not been won) is set, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON and an illegal prize is won. It is configured to prevent (suppress) the passed ball from passing through the V switch 650e3. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 maintains the state for a long time, that is, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2. By providing the state in which the switching member 650h is maintained (see FIG. 264 (a)), the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  As described above, since the game state set after the small hit game is changed by the flow-down route of the game ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game, the interest of the player is improved even during the small hit game. be able to. The time required to pass from the opening of the V winning device 650 (specific winning opening) to the entrance of the special discharge opening 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is at least 1 second. It is configured. With such a configuration, even if the opening / closing door 650f1 is detected to be opened even though the small hit has not been won, even if the ball flowing route is switched by the switching member 650h, the ball can be reliably discharged. The situation of flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2 can be suppressed.

  At the end of the normal discharge channel 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 composed of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 have been ejected, based on the sum of the ejection confirmation switch 650e4 and the positive change switch 650e3. The end timing of the small hitting game (the condition for ending the small hitting game (when a predetermined number (10) of prizes are won in the V prize device 650 or when the opening scenario of the V prize device 650 ends) is satisfied) At the timing when the small hit ending period executed after the game has elapsed, if all the game balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are not discharged, it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, It may be configured to notify an abnormality or stop the game so that the big hit game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game progresses in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10 and a secondary abnormality occurs.

  As described above, the game ball that has won the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on the detected game ball, a prize ball (one ball winning in this embodiment) is given to the player as a privilege. 10 award balls) can be paid out. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to sort whether or not to pass the V switch 650e3, so that it is possible to sort whether or not the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed. Can be. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a special prize port (specific area) for giving a jackpot game separately from the V prize device 650, and the space of the game board 13 can be effectively used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 265, a description will be given of the structure of the lower surface of the ball flow of the opening / closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. FIG. 265 (a) is a schematic plan view of a state where the opening / closing door 650f1 closes the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 265 (a), the opening / closing door 650f1 of the present embodiment moves the ball reaching the upper surface of the V winning device 650 along the inclination of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 260). 650 is configured to flow down from the right upper surface 650y1 to the left upper surface 650y2 via the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1, and flow out toward the variable winning device 65.

  A first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc are provided on the upper surface of the opening / closing door 650f1 as delay members for delaying the flow of the ball. Is configured to have a flow-down period of 0.6 seconds. This falling period (0.6 seconds) is longer than the interval (closed period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened a plurality of times by the small hit game. It is configured to be long. With this configuration, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 is configured to reliably win when the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened by the small hit game.

  When the small hitting game is executed in the state shown in FIG. 265 (a) and the opening / closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 265 (b). FIG. 265 (b) is a schematic view of a state where the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 is open as viewed in plan. As shown in FIG. 265 (b), when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves so as to be evacuated inside the game board 13, and the ball flowing down the right upper surface 650y1 is placed in the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a. The specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a is opened so that the winning is possible. Further, the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 also wins a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a when the opening / closing door 650f1 is located at the retreat position.

  Further, no matter where the ball flowing down on the opening / closing door 650f1 wins the specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a, the V winning device 650 has a second ball for smoothing the ball flow after the winning. A first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 are provided (see FIG. 260), and a ball which has won a specific winning opening (V winning opening) 650a upstream of the upper surface of the open / close door 650f1 is the first regulating member 651, After being aligned in a row via the two regulating members 652, it is configured to flow down to the detection port 650a1, which is the passage width of one ball. By providing the first restricting member 651 and the second restricting member 652 in this manner, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided at a position below the first restricting member, the ball that vigorously wins from the opening / closing door 650f1 is directly detected by the detection port 650a1. Can be prevented from colliding with, so that the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1 can be prevented from breaking down. In addition, a flow path (a flow path flowing down on the first and second regulating members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls until the balls pass through the detection port 650a1 having a passage width of one ball is secured. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball is clogged in the V winning device 650 and hinders the game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the present embodiment operates in the privilege game (small hit game) given when the judgment result (special symbol lottery result) of the judgment means is a predetermined judgment result (small hit). The falling period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval period (0.5 seconds) between opening of the variable member (opening / closing door 650f1). With such a configuration, the ball flowing down on the variable member during the opening interval during the small hitting game (timing when the opening / closing door 650f1 is in the closed state) is reliably made to win the V prize device 650 at the next opening timing. be able to.

  In addition, a small number of balls (10 pieces) can be won during the small hitting game by merely causing the V prize device 650 to win only the ball flowing down on the variable member during the small hitting game. Since the number of open operations (12 times) in the winning game is set to be greater than the number of winning conditions for the small hit game (10), even if one open period (0.1 second) is set short. , A sufficient number of winnings can be secured. In addition, by setting a single open period to be long, it is possible to suppress occurrence of a situation in which an excessive number of balls are made to win the V prize device 650 during the small hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 266, on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102 or if the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 267). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 267). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 267 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs major processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of a display result on the second symbol display device. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / Os. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When an input is made, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37a, 37b, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the first frame button 22, the second frame button 23, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating a drive for presentation provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and outputs the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The audio lamp control device 113 also inputs from the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 (hereinafter, referred to as the frame button 22 when both the first frame button 22 and the second frame button 23 are shown). When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the display control device is configured to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the effect at the time of super reach. Instruct 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In addition, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, an accessory driving command is transmitted to the other device 228 in order to drive an unillustrated production accessory, and the operation corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is performed. A voice output command for outputting a voice to the voice output device 226 is set, and a lamp output command for causing the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content of the frame button 22 is set. May be configured.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls the display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 266). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 266) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 268 (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the present embodiment. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 15-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol columns of left, middle, and right are formed. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268 (a), the third symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a number 10 that imitates numbers from “0” to “9”. Each is composed of different types of main symbols. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned (for example, “777”), and the variable display is performed. Is configured to generate a jackpot after the game is over. In other words, the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a symbol for indicating the result of the lottery of the special symbol by the main control device 110.

  Specifically, in the main display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 for left, middle, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in ascending or descending numerical order, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with a periodicity to perform variable display.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the activated line with a combination of big hit symbols (in the ninth embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big hit video is displayed as a big hit.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol column, each symbol The number of symbols in a row can be changed as appropriate. The symbols variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are not limited to those described above. For example, a symbol that combines an image of a figure or a character with a numeral may be configured as the third symbol. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the area in which the third symbol is variably displayed is variable. For example, when a specific effect is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the variable display area of the third symbol is displayed. Or by moving the variable display area to a position (for example, a corner of the display screen) where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, so that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the third symbol is fluctuating. You may make it. Further, during the period in which the special symbol is changing, the change of the third symbol may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) and may be changed again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol and the display mode of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the second special symbol are the same (to the extent that the player is difficult to identify). ), But the display style and the display area of the third symbol may be changed so as to correspond to the type of the special symbol that is changing.

  Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 268 (b). As shown in FIG. 268 (b), a small display area Dm2 is formed at the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. In the small display area Dm2, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is fired (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 277 (a)). That is, in the present embodiment, the small display area Dm2 is used as the guidance display area. With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp to which area of the game board the ball should be fired simply by visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

  A small display area Dm1 is formed at the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. The small display area Dm1 is configured to be able to easily display the variable display of the third symbol. Here, the case where the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm1 means that, for example, in the main display area Dm, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character performs an action or an effect in which the user presses the frame button 22 is executed. If you are. During the execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in the larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide an effect that is easier to understand. In addition, during the execution of the display effect, the variation display of the third symbol is simply displayed in the small display area Dm1, so that it is easy for the player that the variation display of the third symbol is continued. Can understand.

  Further, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 268 (b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed in the sub display area Ds. As described above, if a ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entered balls is suspended up to a maximum of four times. The same number of suspended symbols displayed as the number of suspended balls displayed on the sub display area Ds is displayed. In the ninth embodiment, since the maximum value of the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four and the reserved ball of the second special symbol cannot be reserved, the secondary display region Ds Displays a maximum of four reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in accordance with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of reserved balls is displayed by a number. Alternatively, the player may be visually notified of the magnitude of the number of reserved balls by changing the character mode in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above, the game result suggestion mode for suggesting a game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player and the contents of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm are described. In the sub display area Ds, the effect explanation mode for explaining, the frame button related display mode for displaying the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the operation result, and the hit related information display mode for displaying information about the big hit game are displayed. The main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds are set so that the ratio of the display area differs depending on the content displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to the departure, and there is a reserved ball, after the stop display for one second, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. . When there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in time.

  On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the departure of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second in a state where the reserved ball does not exist, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until a new ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game was not executed is displayed. In spite of the fact that the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), there is rarely a situation in which neither the first entrance 64 nor the second entrance 640 has an entrance. In many cases where the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all because the player has quit the game. caused by.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. I do. Thereby, the player who is trying to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on whether or not the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters one of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the new entrance The corresponding variable display of the third symbol is executed.

  The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and among the balls that have entered the first entrance port 64 and the second entrance port 640, the ball that has not been changed ( This is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of retained balls. As will be described in detail later, the sub-display area Ds is displayed in the first display area Ds1, the second display area Ds2 for displaying game contents and effect contents to the player, and the reserved ball display area. The pending symbol is shifted, and is divided into an active area Ds3 which is displayed as an active pending symbol Dsa corresponding to the variation currently being executed (see FIG. 271 (a)).

  When the display of the pending symbol displayed in the sub-display area Ds is completed and the next variation starts, the reserved symbol corresponding to the next variation (see the front view of FIG. 271 (b)). , The reserved symbol Dsb) displayed on the leftmost side is deleted, and the remaining reserved symbols (Dsc to Dse) are shifted leftward and displayed. Then, the deleted pending symbol Dsb is displayed as the pending symbol Dsa in the active display area Ds3. This allows the player to be notified of the pending symbol corresponding to the variable display that is being executed, so that, for example, the display mode of the reserved symbol can be changed to display a special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol. In the case of performing an effect that increases the degree of expectation that the lottery is a big hit (so-called pre-reading effect), the player easily recognizes that the variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol whose display mode has been changed by the pre-reading effect is being executed. Can be recognized.

  In the present embodiment, only up to four balls can be held up to the first entrance 64, but the upper limit of the number of held balls is not limited to four, and three or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 or more times (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be configured such that the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 can be held up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, or the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 and the second entry. The upper limit of the number of reserved balls for entering the ball entrance 640 may be made different, and the upper limit of the number of retained balls for entering the first entrance 64 is entered to the second entrance 640. May be larger than the upper limit of the number of reserved balls with respect to, or may be smaller. Also, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, a color or lighting pattern may be displayed. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the maximum number of which is reserved, and displaying the number of reserved balls according to the number of the reserved lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, the effect contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Symbol) is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the third symbol, the variable display is performed in common with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not simultaneously displayed in a variable manner. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, as an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a special symbol lottery, a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations can be set. This continuous production is performed when a prize information command for indicating various counter values (lottery results) acquired when the ball enters the first entrance hole 64 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. The lottery result of the special symbol variation corresponding to the command is displayed in the period until the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation is executed (variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation executed before the target special symbol variation) This is an effect for suggesting to the player using the period during which the game is executed.

  In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect for the player is provided. Can be provided to enhance the production effect. In addition, since it is possible to execute a continuous effect without highlighting a lottery result of a special symbol (for example, a miss) at each variation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player's willingness to play is reduced. it can.

  In the present embodiment, a score effect is executed as the continuous effect described above. This score effect is an effect for giving a score for changing predetermined stage information (gauge amount) to different stage information (gauge amount) (score giving effect), and when the stage information becomes specific stage information. (In the case where the gauge amount reaches 6 and the charge amount is accumulated), a specific effect (charge effect) that can be executed is an effect that can be executed.

  And, in the score effect which is executed as a continuous effect as a whole, the lottery information is variable and the more the amount of charge is accumulated, the higher the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol to be the target of the score effect is a big hit is higher. It is configured to be.

  In this way, by executing the score giving effect such that the stage information is gradually changed during the period in which the score effect is being executed (a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods), the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning to the player is increased. It is possible to visually notify, and it is possible to suppress getting tired of the game at an early stage, and to enhance the effect of the production.

  In the present embodiment, during the above-described score effect, the final score effect to be executed during the period in which the target special symbol change is being executed, and the special symbol change other than the target special symbol change (that is, the target symbol change) And a pre-scoring effect performed during the period in which the special symbol change is executed before the special symbol change. In each score effect, the executed stage information (gauge amount) is different from the different stage information (gauge amount). (A gauge amount) can be executed a plurality of times. The scoring effect is set to be executable a predetermined number of times (1 to 4 times) corresponding to one special symbol fluctuation period, and further, a score is awarded in one scoring effect. The number of suggested effects that suggest that the score is given, the number of assigned effects that are actually given points in the suggested effects (or the number of effects where no score is given (gase effects)), and the number of suggested effects that are given in one given effect. And the number of points to be scored.

  By using the score effect configured as described above, it is possible to execute various effects during the score effect, and the player can quickly grasp the lottery result of the special symbol to be the target of the score effect. Thus, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the scoring effects at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, a score is displayed (given) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol change display as a score giving effect, and the displayed (given) score is a predetermined amount (for example, 6). A specific effect (charge effect) is configured to be executed when accumulated. Thereby, by grasping the score displayed on the third symbol, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the execution timing of the specific effect can be predicted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 269, the flow of the score-giving effect and the specific effect performed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 269 (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the effect when the player operates the frame button 22 when the operation score imparting effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed as the score imparting effect. FIG. 269 (b) is a timing chart showing a flow of the effect when the operation score effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is executed as the notice effect and the player does not operate the frame button 22. It is. FIGS. 269 (a) and (b) show an example in which the score giving effect and the specific effect are executed in one special symbol change in order to explain the flow of the score giving effect and the specific effect. However, the point giving effect and the specific effect can be executed even if the special symbol change is performed a plurality of times.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (a), as an effect mode of the effect executed during one change display, a score and a score giving effect (GP effect) for giving a score are three times, and the player presses the frame button 22. One operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) in which a score is given when operated, and a specific effect (charge effect) executed when a predetermined amount (six) of points are accumulated are executed twice. The effect mode to be performed is set as a variable display.

  When the change of the special symbol is started, the first scoring effect (GP effect) is started after a predetermined period, and the score (P) “2” is displayed (given) as the effect result. As a result, when the first point-giving effect (GP effect) is completed, the stage information of the display mode indicating the gauge amount “2” is displayed. Next, an operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) is executed, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) in the effect, so that a score (P) “3” is obtained as an effect result. Displayed (given). Thus, at the time when the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) is completed, the gauge amount is variably displayed from “2” to “5”.

  After that, the second scoring effect (GP effect) is started, and the score (P) “1” is displayed (given), whereby the gauge amount is variably displayed from “5” to “6”. In the present embodiment, when the gauge amount reaches “6”, the charge amount is accumulated “1” and the gauge amount is variably displayed to the initial value “0”. Then, when the charge amount becomes “1”, the first specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

  Here, the effect content to be executed as the specific effect includes a suggestion effect indicating a lottery result of a special symbol to be targeted for the current score effect, and a special image given to the player only when a specific condition is satisfied. And videos. When the first specific effect is completed, a third scoring effect (GP effect) is executed with the gauge amount “0” and the charge amount “1” being displayed, and the score (P) “5” is displayed (attached). ), The gauge amount is variably displayed from “0” to “5”.

  Thereafter, the fourth scoring effect (GP effect) is executed, and the score (P) “1” is displayed (given), whereby the gauge amount is variably displayed from “5” to “6”, and the charge is performed. The amount is variably displayed from “1” to “2”. Then, the second specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

  Note that the second specific effect is a predetermined effect (for example, a jackpot) set at a predetermined timing as a variable effect corresponding to a special symbol change period set when the current special symbol change is started. The effect that informs that the effect of rapidly increasing the degree of expectation) is executed. Specifically, immediately before the predetermined effect is executed, an effect that prompts the player to operate an operation means (frame button 22) operable as a second specific effect is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the predetermined effect has been executed based on the operation of the operation means (the frame button 22), so that the player can actively participate in the game. be able to.

  According to the example described above with reference to FIG. 269 (a), the second specific effect is performed at a predetermined timing (timing immediately before the predetermined effect is executed) because the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) is successful. However, when the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) fails, the score cannot be obtained in the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect), and at a predetermined timing. There was a problem that the second specific effect could not be executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, based on the effect result of the operation score imparting effect (operation GP effect), the specific effect is executed thereafter so as to be executed at a timing immediately before the predetermined effect is executed. It is configured to be able to execute a process of changing (correcting) the effect mode of the score giving effect.

  Next, referring to FIG. 269 (b), in the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) executed during the score effect, an effect when the player does not perform a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. Will be described. As shown in FIG. 269 (b), when the operation score giving effect (operation GP effect) fails and the score (P) cannot be obtained, the correction is performed without executing the first specific effect (charge effect). The subsequent score giving effect (changed GP effect) is executed, and the score (P) “10” is displayed (given) in total, so that the charge amount “2” is obtained in the same manner as in FIG. 269 (a) described above. In this state, a second specific effect (charge effect) is executed.

  With this configuration, the specific effect is executed at a predetermined timing even when an effect (operation score giving effect) that varies the score given based on the operation result of the player on the operation means in the score effect is used. The effect can be enhanced.

  Next, a display mode of the score that is given (displayed) during the score giving effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271 (a). FIG. 270 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the number of times of reaching the gauge amount “6” (the number of accumulated charge amounts) in the present embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 270 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the gauge amount to be performed, and FIG. 270 (c) shows the degree of expectation of the first reach mode in the reach effect performed in the present embodiment in correspondence with the charge amount and the gauge amount. FIG. 270 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the reach effect of the second reach mode in the reach effect executed in the present embodiment in association with the charge amount and the gauge amount. 270 (e) to (g) show the flow of the display mode of the stage information (gauge amount and charge amount) when a score is given in the score giving effect in the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. Further, FIG. 271 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a score giving effect is executed in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 270 (a) and (b), in the present embodiment, the gauge amount is accumulated up to “6”, and when the gauge amount reaches “6”, the charge amount is added by “1” (accumulation). The charge amount is set so that "3" is added (stored) at the maximum. That is, it is configured so that the step information can be divided into 18 steps as a whole.

  Then, when the score giving effect is executed and the score (P) is displayed (given) on the third symbol display device 81, the gauge amount or the charge amount is made to correspond to the displayed (given) number of the score (P). Are variably displayed so that is added. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of points to be given in the point effect in the variable display is set based on the result of the lottery of the special symbol. In other words, the result of the lottery of the special symbol is divided into 18 levels of expectation, so that it can be suggested to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, at least a first reach mode and a second reach mode are provided as a variable display (reach display) for indicating whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a win. Is set so that the jackpot expectation degree differs according to the charge amount and the gauge amount described above. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 270 (c), the first reach mode is set so as to increase the jackpot expectation in accordance with the number of points given in stages (ie, 18 stages). As shown in FIG. 270 (d), the second reach mode is set so as to increase the jackpot expectation only in response to the gauge amount (ie, six levels).

  With this configuration, of the stage information displayed during the scoring effect, the stage that is most advantageous to the player can be varied depending on the content of the variable display to be executed (the type of the reach mode to be executed). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot until the end (until the reach display is executed).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 271 (a), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 displayed during the score giving effect will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the score giving effect is executed, the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the main display area Dm. The storage gauge Dg is for visually displaying the assigned score, and includes a six-stage gauge amount (gauge 1 display region Dg1 to gauge display region Dg6) and a charge display for indicating a three-stage charge amount. And a region Dg7.

  The storage gauge Dg notifies the player of the current score storage amount (gauge amount and charge amount) by changing the display mode each time a score is given as a score giving effect. Here, the flow for changing the display mode of the storage gauge Dg will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 270 (e) to (g).

  First, in the case where the gauge amount and the charge amount are both “0”, when the score (P) “1” is displayed (given) by the score giving effect, the display mode of the gauge 1 display area Dg1 is changed ( In FIG. 270 (e), the display mode is changed to a display mode indicating that the gauge amount is “1” and the charge amount is “0” at present. When the given score (P) is accumulated up to “11”, the display mode of the gauge 1 display area Dg1 to the gauge 5 display area Dg5 is changed (black) as shown in FIG. In addition, the current charge amount “1” is displayed in the charge display area Dg7, and the display mode is changed to indicate that the current charge amount is “1” and the gauge is “5”.

  Then, when the score is further accumulated by “1” from the state of FIG. 270 (f), the display mode is temporarily changed so that the gauge value indicates “6” as shown in FIG. 270 (g). Thereafter, the value of "2" is displayed in the charge display area Dg7, and the gauge 1 display area Dg1 to the gauge display area Dg6 are variably displayed in a display mode (initial display mode) indicating that no score is given. This makes it possible to visually notify that the gauge has reached the predetermined amount (6) and that the charge amount has been added by one.

  Next, with reference to Drawing 271-Drawing 276, the contents of an effect displayed on 3rd symbol display device 81 during a score effect are explained. First, FIG. 271 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a screen during execution of a score giving effect in a state where a holding symbol indicating winning information to be scored is displayed in the first holding symbol Dsb. is there. As shown in FIG. 271 (a), the place where the prize information as the target of the score effect is displayed (first reserved symbol Dsb) indicates which reserved symbol the prize information as the target of the score effect is. Is displayed as a target reserved symbol mode (a display mode formed by "black circles" indicating that winning information is present and "three points" indicating that the target is to be scored). I have. This makes it possible to grasp the period in which the score effect is continuously executed for the player (the number of special symbol changes in which the score effect is continued), and thus the effect state of the score effect (executed during the score effect). Out of the plurality of scored effects, the result of the current scored effect can be predicted based on the effect of the scored effect already executed (given score) and the remaining period of the scored effect.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which the winning information to be scored is notified by changing the display mode of the reserved symbol. However, other configurations may be used. The number of special symbol fluctuations that are continuously executed, that is, the number of special symbol fluctuations until the special symbol fluctuation corresponding to the winning information to be scored (or A count display indicating the number of special symbol changes including the corresponding special symbol change) is displayed on the display screen, and is displayed at a timing at which a new special symbol change is started (or a timing at which the special symbol change ends). The display of the number of times may be subtracted, or the time during which the score effect is continuously executed may be specifically displayed. Further, it may be determined whether or not a period during which the score effect is continuously executed is longer than a predetermined period, and a display mode corresponding to the determination result may be displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration is used in which the player can grasp the period during which the score effect is continuously executed. However, it is configured such that the player is not made aware of the period during which the score effect is continuously executed. May be. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the score effect will continue, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game while always pounding during the period in which the score effect is being executed.

  During the execution of the scoring effect, the storage gauge Dg is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display content (score) displayed in the effect display area Da1 of the scoring effect performed in the main display area Dm The display mode of each display area is changed in accordance with the effect effect of the applied effect). In addition, during the scoring effect period, a period in which the scoring effect is not executed, or a display mode having a higher display priority than the scoring effect (for example, to notify a specific effect corresponding to the charge amount or an abnormality of the pachinko machine 10) During this period, the storage status display area DK is displayed instead of the storage gauge Dg, and the current storage status (score acquisition status) is simply displayed. Thus, while notifying the player that the score is being produced, the other contents can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

  Note that the storage status display area DK may be configured to be constantly displayed during the period in which the specific effect is being executed. You may comprise so that it may display only during the period when the storage gauge Dg is not displayed. In the case of using the former configuration, the storage status display area DK is continuously displayed during the execution of the score effect, so that it is easy for the player to know that the storage status display area DK indicates the content of the effect of the score effect. Can be grasped. Also, when the latter configuration is used, the area for indicating the production status of the score effect (score giving status up to the present time) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced, and the third symbol display can be performed. The display screen of the device 81 can be effectively used for other effect displays.

  In FIG. 271 (a), an effect in which the score (P) “2” is given is displayed as a score giving effect, and the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed to a display mode corresponding to the given score (P). The display for making the variable (the arrow for reflecting the display content of the effect display area Da1 on the storage gauge Dg) is executed. Further, a value corresponding to the result of the score giving effect is added to the storage status display area DK. Thereafter, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed in accordance with the display content displayed in the effect display area Da1. Specifically, the display mode of the charge 1 display area Da1 and the charge 2 display area Da2 is changed in response to the score (P) “2” being given, and the storage indicating that the charge amount is “2” The display mode of the gauge Dg is changed (see FIG. 271 (b)).

  As described above, since the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed after displaying the result of the score giving effect executed during the score effect in the effect display area Da1, the score (P) given is given. In order to grasp as quickly as possible, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the scoring effect to be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed after the result of the score imparting effect is displayed in the effect display area Da1, but other structures may be used. A part of the effect result of the score giving effect (for example, a part of the score (P) to be given as a result of whether or not the score is given) is stored so as to notify the player during the execution of the score giving effect. The display mode of the gauge Dg may be changed, or the display mode of the storage gauge Dg may be changed so as to notify the player of the range of the score (P) that can be given in the running score giving effect. May be. Thereby, it is possible to predict the effect result of the current scoring effect based on the effect content of the scoring effect being executed and the variable state of the display mode of the storage gauge Dg. Can be.

  In this case, as a configuration for changing the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, for example, a display mode different from the first display mode (in FIG. 271 (b), a black display mode) indicating that the score (P) is given. (For example, a display mode in which a corresponding display area blinks or a display mode in a color different from black) may be changed. Thereby, it is possible to easily inform the player that the display mode of the current storage gauge Dg is an intermediate stage in the state where the score giving effect is being executed.

  In addition, in the case of using a configuration in which the display mode of the storage gauge Dg is changed to the intermediate stage display mode in order to suggest the production result of the score provision effect during the execution of the score provision effect, an operation operable by the player The content of the display mode in the middle stage may be changed in response to the operation content of the means (frame button 22). In this case, when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22), it is preferable that the effect of the score-giving effect being executed is displayed in a display mode for displaying in detail. Thereby, the player who wants to quickly grasp the effect of the score giving effect can be operated positively by the operation means (frame button 22), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 271 (a), when the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information targeted for the score effect displayed on the reserved symbol Dsb is started, the display contents shown in FIG. 271 (b) are executed. Is done. FIG. 271 (b) shows a scoring effect in a case where a variable display (hereinafter, referred to as target variable display) corresponding to winning information (hereinafter, referred to as target winning information) as a target of the score effect is executed. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example. As shown in FIG. 271 (b), when the suspended symbol indicating the target winning information is transferred to the digested symbol (executing symbol) Dsa, that is, when the target variable display is executed, the digested symbol (executing symbol) is executed. ) A scoring effect using Dsa is executed by enlarging the small area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds.

  Here, the digestion symbol (executing symbol) Dsa is changed into a plurality of rendering symbols, rotated and displayed, and the effect of the score-giving rendering effect is displayed to the player in the rendering pattern of the rendering symbol stopped and displayed in the roulette rendering display area Ds4. The effect to be notified is executed.

  Further, the score giving effect executed in the small area Ds3 is set so as to be stopped and displayed by the player operating the operation means (frame button 22), and the effect of operating the operation means (frame button 22) is displayed. Is displayed to the player using the comment display in the main display area Dm and the button display mode Da2 imitating the frame button 22. When the player operates the frame button 22 in this state, as shown in FIG. 272 (a), the rotation display of the effect symbol is stopped, and the result of the score imparting effect in the roulette effect display area Ds4 (FIG. 272 (a)) In this case, a score (P) of four points is displayed. Then, the display mode of the storage gauge Dg and the storage status display area DK is changed to indicate that four points have been given, and the fact that the charge amount has become “1” is notified.

  In the present embodiment, in the operation score providing effect for displaying the effect result by operating the frame button 22, if the frame button 22 is not operated, no score is provided. This makes it possible to vary the state of scoring based on whether the player operates the frame button 22 or not. Therefore, the player can be actively participated in the production.

  When the charge amount becomes “1” by the score giving effect shown in FIG. 272 (a), a specific effect is executed as shown in FIG. 272 (b). FIG. 272 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a score effect. When the specific acquisition effect is executed, a display mode for operating the frame button 23 (see FIG. 259) is displayed in the main display area Dm as shown in FIG. 272 (b), and the charge acquired in the small area Ds2. A comment indicating that the specific effect using is executed is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 273 (a) and FIG. 273 (b), the content of the score giving effect during the score effect in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 273 (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a production mode of a score giving effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 273 (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is the schematic diagram which showed another example of the effect aspect of a score provision effect.

  According to the score giving effect shown in FIG. 273 (a), it is configured to display the effect of the score giving effect using the display mode of the third symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. ing. Specifically, a display mode (character “P”) indicating that a score (P) is given as an effect result of the current score giving effect, and a score (P) given in the current score giving effect An effect result display mode Da2 composed of a score display mode Da3 (a value of “1”) indicating the number is displayed.

  In FIG. 273 (a), a pattern in which the score (P) “1” is given as an effect result of the score giving effect is shown as an example. For example, when the score (P) is not given as the effect result of the score giving effect. Is the display mode of the effect result display mode Da2, in which the score (P) is replaced with a display mode (the letter “P”) indicating that the score (P) is given as the effect result of the current score-giving effect. After displaying a display mode (for example, a character of “?”) Indicating that no score is given, or displaying a character of “P”, a display mode in which the score display mode Da3 is set to (“0”) is displayed. You.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the effect result display mode Da2 is also used when notifying the player of the effect contents other than the effect result of the score giving effect to the player. Then, as the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the number of executions of the degree-of-expectation effect for improving the degree of expectation of the jackpot (for example, the number of pseudo fluctuations in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped and then changed again, It is also used when informing in advance of the number of times the character of “chance” is displayed during the variable display. In this case, specifically, as the effect result display mode Da2, a display mode in which a character of “chance” and a value indicating the number of executions are combined is displayed.

  With this configuration, when the display of the effect result display mode Da2 is started, the player is notified of whether the display mode displays the effect result of the score giving effect or other effect contents. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it is a thing or not, and it is possible to watch the presentation contents.

  The above-described effect result display mode Da2 is stopped and displayed at the timing when any of the third symbols (three third symbols) during the variable display is stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The effect result display mode Da2 is stopped and displayed in place of the three symbols. In the effect result display mode Da2, a part of the effect result display mode Da2 (a display (for example, the character “P”) indicating an effect to be displayed for the current effect result display) is displayed at the time of the stop display, and thereafter, The display control is performed so that the score display mode Da3 is displayed. This makes it possible to sequentially notify the player of what effect the present effect result display mode Da2 is in a display mode for which effect, and to keep the player gazing at the content of the effect. be able to.

  The display order of the effect result display mode Da2 is not limited to the above-described content. For example, the score display mode Da3 (a value indicating the acquired number) is displayed first, and then the display mode indicating the target effect. May be displayed. In addition, a plurality of display modes (characters of “P”) indicating that a score (P) is provided as an effect result of the current score providing performance are prepared, and a value displayed in the score display mode Da3 is a predetermined value. It may be configured to determine whether the value is larger than a value (for example, 3) and display a display mode corresponding to the determination result from among a plurality of display modes.

  In addition, a display mode (character “P”) indicating that a score (P) is provided as a result of the current score providing performance is displayed, and during the period in which the score display mode Da3 is not displayed, By grasping the type of the display mode displayed to indicate that the score (P) is provided as the production result of the score provision effect, it is possible to predict the value displayed as the score display mode Da3, The effect can be enjoyed. In this case, as the plurality of display modes, for example, a display mode in which the color of the displayed “P” is different may be used. This makes it possible to display a display mode that is easy for the player to understand without preparing a plurality of image data of the effect result display mode Da2.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 273 (b), the content of a score giving effect different from the score giving effect described with reference to FIG. 273 (a) will be described. The score giving effect shown in FIG. 273 (b) is an effect executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and includes three rotating displays formed in a cube. The effect is displayed by rotating the bodies (Ds5 to Ds7) and combining the display surfaces (the surfaces on which the player can visually recognize the entire surface) of the rotating display bodies that are stopped and displayed.

  Specifically, the first rotating display body Ds5 displayed on the leftmost side of the display screen can display at least a display mode for indicating that the score (P) is given as the result of the current score giving effect. And the third rotating display body Ds7 displayed on the rightmost side of the display screen is a display mode (“3” in FIG. 273 (b)) for indicating the number of points given in the current point giving effect. ) Is formed so as to be at least displayable, and the second rotating display body Ds6 displayed at the center of the display screen is a display mode (FIG. 9) for indicating that the effect result display mode Da2 corresponding to the current score giving effect has been established. 273 (b), "X") is formed so as to be at least displayable. Then, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), one effect result display mode Da2 is displayed by combining the display modes of the respective display surfaces of the first rotary display body Ds5 to the third rotary display body Ds7.

  273 (b), in the same manner as in FIG. 273 (a) described above, a display mode indicating an effect result other than the score imparting effect may be displayed, and each rotation display may be performed. A plurality of stop sequences of the body may be set. As a result, the display mode displayed on each of the rotating display elements that are being rotated is displayed from the time when each of the rotating display elements is displayed (rotated) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the time when the display is stopped. It is possible to play a game while visually confirming and predicting which combination will be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case where the effect result display mode Da2 is displayed by combining the display modes displayed on the display surfaces of the respective rotary display bodies, for example, one character can be displayed on the display surface of each rotary display body, You may be comprised so that the lottery result of a special symbol may be suggested (reported) by the combination of the character displayed on the display surface of each rotary display.

  Further, any one of the rotary display bodies may be stopped once and then rotated again, or the rotary display which is normally rotated from top to bottom may be rotated in the opposite direction. In addition, when a specific condition is satisfied, for example, when a lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to be subjected to the scoring effect or a special symbol corresponding to the winning information to be scored is a big hit, the vertical rotation display , The display may be rotated left and right, and a display surface that is not normally stopped and displayed (two surfaces in the case of a cube) may be configured to be able to be stopped and displayed.

  As described above, with reference to FIG. 271 and FIG. 273, a plurality of patterns of the production mode of the score giving effect have been described. However, the production mode of the score giving effect is not limited to this, and the presentation result display mode Da2 can be finally displayed. Anything is fine. For example, the display mode of the effect result display mode Da2 is displayed in a transparent state, the transparency of the transmitted effect result display mode Da2 is gradually reduced, and the final effect result display mode (not transmitted) When the display is stopped in the display mode), the corresponding score (P) may be given. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to grasp in advance the score to be given when the final effect result display mode is stopped and displayed, and thus the score that evolves when the final effect result display mode is stopped and displayed. The game can be performed while the effect is specifically predicted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of an example of the specific effect executed when the charge amount is accumulated will be described. FIG. 274 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating a display screen during a period in which a specific effect is being performed, and FIG. 274 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating a display screen at a timing when the specific effect ends. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 274 (a), in this example, as a specific effect, a countdown display Dg10 for counting down the time until some effect is executed is executed. The countdown display Dg10 executes an effect for operating the player's frame button 23 as the specific effect (first specific effect), for example, as described with reference to FIG. 272 (b). Is displayed by operating the frame button 23 during the effect period.

  Then, after a plurality of scoring effects, a countdown display is made corresponding to the timing at which the charge amount becomes “1” and the gauge amount “6” (that is, the charge amount becomes “2” and the gauge amount becomes “0” immediately after). The remaining period indicated by Dg10 becomes “0”, and a display mode for operating the frame button 23 is displayed as the second specific effect.

  As described above, by performing an effect indicating the execution timing of the second specific effect as an effect corresponding to the first specific effect, it is possible to execute the second specific effect during the current fluctuation display. The player can be predicted.

  Next, among the reach effects executed in the present embodiment, the effect contents of the second reach mode (mission reach) will be described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 276. FIG. 275 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen when the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, and FIG. 275 (b) is a second reach mode. FIG. 276 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen during a preemptive strike executed first in (mission reach), and FIG. 276 (a) illustrates a display screen at the end of the second reach mode (mission reach). FIG. 276 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen showing the effect of the second reach mode (mission reach).

  When the second reach mode (mission reach) is executed, first, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the variable display of the third symbol is reduced and displayed in the variable display area Dm1, and the mission display is displayed in the main display area Dm. The character of “defeat 100 enemies” is displayed as the content of the mission, and the value “100” is displayed as the remaining number of enemies in the effect display area Da1. Then, a display mode indicating the gauge amount used during the mission reach is displayed in the storage gauge Dg and the storage status display area DK.

  In the second reach mode (mission reach) of the present embodiment, a preemptive attack effect in which the content of the mission is varied in advance using the accumulated gauge amount, and the player operates the operation means (frame button 22). And the main production to achieve the mission in the second reach mode is started, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning is varied according to the magnitude of the gauge amount when the second reach mode is started. .

  According to the example shown in FIG. 275 (a), since the gauge amount is accumulated “5” at the time when the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, as shown in FIG. During the offensive effect, an effect is performed in which the number of people “50” corresponding to the gauge amount “5” is subtracted from the mission content “100”. In the present embodiment, the number of persons who multiplied the gauge amount at the start by 10 in the first-reach attack effect of the second reach mode (mission reach) is subtracted from the number of persons in the mission content. , The number of people to be subtracted in the first strike effect increases (the number of defeats in the main effect can be reduced). In this way, by changing the production mode of the first strike effect in accordance with the gauge amount, it is possible to vary the expectation of the jackpot winning according to the gauge amount when the second reach mode is started. are doing.

  When the first strike effect of the second reach mode (mission reach) configured as described above is started, the value displayed in the effect display area Da1 is reduced to “50” as shown in FIG. 275 (b). The mission content displayed in the main display area Dm is also variably displayed from "defeat 100 enemies" to "defeat 50 enemies". Also, in the second display area Ds2, a character "Super Chance" indicating the degree of expectation of the current mission reach is displayed.

  Then, when the main production in the second reach mode (mission reach) is started, as shown in FIG. 276 (a), the storage gauge Dg is a display mode in which the gauge amount used in the first strike performance is deleted. Is displayed, and an image imitating a button for causing the player to repeatedly hit the frame button 22 is displayed, and the character “button continuous hit” is displayed in the second display area Ds2. In the effect display area Da1, “1” is displayed as a value required until the mission reaches the mission in the mission reach.

  After that, if the button is continuously hit and the value displayed in the effect display area Da1 becomes "0", the mission has been achieved, so a message "congratulations" is displayed in the small area Ds2, and the fluctuation display is performed. A third symbol combination (7.7.7) indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed in the area Dm1.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10 in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 266 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 has an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit to instruct the sub-control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81 are set. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, a counter and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. These counters and the like are used for special symbol lottery, ordinary symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and display setting on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform such operations.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and a special symbol big hit type are selected. , A stop type selection counter C3 used to select an outage stop type in a special symbol, and a small hit type counter C5 used to select a small hit type of a special symbol. And a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern. The second random number counter C4 is used for the normal symbol lottery, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value each time the counter is updated.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 297), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main processing (see FIG. 310). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the entry to the first entrance 64 composed of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas). Are the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of entering the first entrance 64. Are respectively stored.

  Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied, various values stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area, A special symbol change based on the stored various values is started. Although the present embodiment does not have a configuration in which the ball entering the second entrance 640 is held and stored, and a configuration in which the ball having passed through the through gate 67 is held and stored is not provided. Also, as a predetermined number (for example, four) of reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas), a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area may be provided.

  Subsequently, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 999). It returns to the structure. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 310).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is, for example, updated periodically (once every timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 or the special symbol reserved ball execution area. Then, the value of the random number which is a special symbol jackpot is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is set to the first random number table. When it matches the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined that the jackpot is a special symbol.

  The first random number table 202a has two types of special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for the first special symbol and special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for the second special symbol. Although the number of random numbers is the same, the number of small random numbers is set differently (see FIG. 280). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that are small hits different, the degree of expectation for giving a bonus (big hit or small hit) to the player is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol. Can be different. The special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 280 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content specified in the first random number table 202a, and FIG. 280 (b) is a diagram showing the content specified in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1. FIG. 280 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2. In the first random number table 202a, a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a big hit and a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a small hit are set in the first special symbol or the second special symbol lottery. It is a table.

  Specifically, when performing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 280 (b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, “0 to 4” among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the jackpot determination value, and the other values are other than the jackpot (ie, Out). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of “0 to 4”, it is determined that the big hit.

  When the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 280 (c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, “0 to 4” among the values of the random number counter C1 is defined as the big hit determination value, and “5 to 997” is the small hit determination value. And “998,999” is defined as the other (ie, outlier) determination value. Then, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the value of the first random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of “0 to 4”, it is determined to be a big hit, and the value is determined to be one of “5 to 997”. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol hits, and adds one by one in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interruption process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. Further, in a state in which a lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than during the change of the special symbol, the big hit game, and the small hit game), the ball is the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing of entering the ball.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number determined to be a big hit or a small hit of the special symbol, In other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be out of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is out.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number that is a special symbol big hit, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the displayed stop symbol is that at the time of the special symbol big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. In the first random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random numbers which are the big hits of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 4" are as described above. Are stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 of the first random number table 202a. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the total number of random numbers is 1,000 and the total number of random number values to be a jackpot is 5, the probability of a special symbol to be a jackpot is “1/200”.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the present embodiment, using the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2, the first hit type selection table 202b is referred to to determine the big hit type when the big hit is won. Here, the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 281 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the first hit type selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 281 (a), in the present embodiment, when drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1), the special figure 1 big hit type used when determining the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2. It has a selection table 202b1 and a special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used when determining the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the second special symbol (special figure 2). . Thereby, the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu 1 and the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the drawing of Toku-zu 2 are made different, or each of a plurality of types of jackpots is selected. To provide the player with different game characteristics between the game using the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special figure 2). Can improve the interest of the game.

  Next, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 used at the time of the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be described with reference to FIG. 281 (b). FIG. 281 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1. As shown in FIG. 281 (b), in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is any one of “0 to 9”, the big hit type is “big hit A”, and any of “10 to 49” The jackpot type in the case of a hit is "big hit B", and the hit type in the case of any of "50 to 99" is "big hit C".

  “Big hit A” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds as a big hit game, and the game state after the big hit is set to a time saving state (one time saving time). Since the number of rounds is large and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the “big hit A” is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random numbers) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 10 random numbers for which "big hit A" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit A" is selected is 10%.

  “Big hit B” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game, and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to the time reduction state (one time reduction). Although the number of rounds is smaller than the "big hit A" described above, the "big hit B" is a big hit type that is advantageous to the player because the gaming state after the big hit is set to a time saving state advantageous to the player. Of the 100 counter values (random number values) that the first hit type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random numbers for which "big hit B" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit B" is selected is 40%.

  “Big hit C” is a big hit type in which the number of rounds is 5 as a big hit game and the game state after the end of the big hit is set to a normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the big hit, the “big hit C” is a big hit type that is disadvantageous for the player. Of the 100 counter values (random values) that can be taken by the first hit type counter C2, there are 50 random values for which the "big hit C" is selected. In this case, the rate at which "big hit C" is selected is 50%.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot game of 15 rounds is selected at a rate of 10% of the case where the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1). 5 rounds of jackpot games are selected at the rate of%. In addition, a jackpot in which the game state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state at a rate of 50% is selected.

  Next, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2 used at the time of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be described with reference to FIG. 281 (c). FIG. 281 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2. As shown in FIG. 281 (c), in the first hit type counter C2, if the random value is any one of “0 to 99”, the big hit type is “big hit A”. That is, in the case of winning the big hit in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the "big hit A" which is most advantageous to the player as the big hit type is always selected.

  In the present embodiment, three types of jackpots are used. However, the number of types is not limited thereto, and one type may be used, or four or more types may be provided. In addition, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first hit type counter C2, different big hit types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, in the case of a big hit in the second special symbol, by setting a big hit type in which the number of rounds is executed more, the hit in the second special symbol is more given to the player. Can be expected. Therefore, the winning in the high-probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game in the high-probability state can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that he wants to shift to the high probability state, and to play the game for a longer time.

  In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected in the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are the same, and the first hit type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is set. You may comprise so that only a range may differ. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first hit type counter C2 aiming at a specific counter value from being executed in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The small hit type counter C5 determines a small hit type and determines a display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a small hit, and has a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 0). 99), the values are sequentially added one by one, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), the value returns to 0. The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is set at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64. When the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a and a lottery (change) of a special symbol can be executed (that is, in a state other than a change of the special symbol and a big hit game or a small hit game), the ball enters the first entrance 64. Alternatively, the ball is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640.

  The value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 282) for determining the type of the small hit to be executed is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Is set.

  Here, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the small hit type selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 282, the small hit type selection table 202e specifies that three types of small hits A to C are selected as the small hit types of the second special symbol according to the value of the small hit type counter C5. ing. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of “0 to 19”, the small hit type is “small hit A (15R when V passing, one time big hit)”. , "20-89", the small hit type is "small hit B (5R short passage one time big hit when passing V)", and the small hit type is "90-99". The hit type is "small hit C (5R short pass without V when passing V)".

  Here, in each of the small hit types (small hit A to small hit C), when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the small hit game, the game is executed after the small hit game ends. The type of the jackpot game is set. In the case of the small hit A, a big hit is set in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state after the small hit A is executed. (A period from the time when the change of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the time when the change of the second special symbol is executed once and the stop symbol is displayed) is set. Further, in the case of the small hit B, a big hit is set in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state after the small hit B is executed. One time-saving game (period from the time when the change of the special symbol is performed 100 times or the time when the change of the second special symbol is executed once to stop display) is set. In the case of the small hit C, 5R time-saving no-big-hit is set, and after the small hit C is executed, the big hit in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed. The state is not set, and the normal state is set.

  As described above, the content of the big hit game executed after the small hit game ends and the game state set after the big hit game can be varied depending on the selected small hit type. Specifically, the small hit A is most advantageous to the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit game is set. The small hit B is set as a small hit, and the small hit B has a smaller number of rounds executed in the big hit game (5R) and is set to be disadvantageous than the small hit A described above, but the time reduction state is set after the big hit game. You. The small hit C is set as the most disadvantageous small hit for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is small (5R) and the time saving state is not set after the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, as the end condition of the time saving state, the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one (first end condition) or the number of times of change of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is A total of 100 times (second end condition) are set. With this configuration, the jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is one or more, and when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, the first special symbol (special figure 1) Even if the change of ()) is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the above-described second end condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. (Special symbol) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one in order within a range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short-time out, long-time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. The determination of the display mode is, specifically, the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. You. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 310) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern table 202d (see FIG. 283 (a)) storing a random value for determining one symbol variation time from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is provided in.

  Here, the contents of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 283 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 283 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d includes a normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used when a normal state is set as a game state, and a fluctuation pattern table 202d1 used when a time reduction state is set. A time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 is defined. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the data table used to select the variation pattern according to the game state is different, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the game state is different. be able to.

  FIG. 283 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1 provided in the fluctuation pattern table 202d. As shown in FIG. 283 (b), in the normal variation pattern table 202d1, a symbol type, a lottery result, and a value range of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with the variation pattern.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 283 (b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "missing", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139". Is defined in association with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation time of 20 seconds is defined in a range of “140 to 149”, and is varied in a range of “150 to 179”. Various types of normal reach having a time of 40 seconds are defined in association with each other, a super reach a having a variation time of 80 seconds is defined in a range of “180 to 187”, and a variation time of 100 seconds is defined in a range of “188 to 194”. A super reach b of second is defined in association with the super reach c of 120 seconds in the range of “195 to 198”.

  In addition, the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the lottery result is "big hit", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29". A super reach a with a variation time of 80 seconds is associated with a range of “30 to 79”, and a super reach b with a variation time of 100 seconds is associated with a range of “80 to 129”. A super reach c having a variation time of 120 seconds is defined in association with a range of “130 to 189”, and various special reach types having a variation time of 140 seconds are defined in association with a range of “190 to 198”. ing.

  Next, when the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is “missing”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the variation time is in the entire range. If a long departure of 180 seconds is specified and the lottery result is “big hit or small hit”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, that is, the fluctuation time is 180 seconds in the entire range. Long off is specified.

  In this manner, one of the fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation time of 7 seconds to 180 seconds is set in accordance with the result of the special symbol lottery, and a command indicating this fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. By doing so, a fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation time is executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when a right-handed game is executed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball is not inserted into the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, the game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, that is, the game for executing the lottery of the first special symbol is performed. The case where the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the normal state configured as described above is a case where the player illegally enters the ball into the second entrance 640, and thus the normal state is performed. In the variation of the second special symbol in, a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the second special symbol is randomly selected in a short period of time. If it is determined that the lottery (change) of the second special symbol has been executed during the normal state, the lottery of the second special symbol is illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the result of the lottery is displayed. The fact that (fluctuation) has been executed may be notified to the outside. In addition, when the lottery (change) of the second special symbol is executed fraudulently, the lottery (variation) result of the second special symbol is forcibly set as the result of the lottery (change) of the illegally executed second special symbol. It may be configured to create and display.

  As shown in FIG. 283 (b), the variation pattern (variation time) selected in the normal variation pattern table 202d1 is 7 seconds when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the lottery result is out of order (the selection rate is 7 seconds). About 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 15%), 20 seconds (selection rate is about 5%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 4%), 100 seconds (selection rate is about 3.5%) , 120 seconds (selection rate is about 2%) in that order. If the lottery result is a big hit, 120 seconds (selection rate is about 30%), 80 seconds (selection rate is about 25%), 100 seconds (selection rate is about 25%), 40 seconds (selection rate is about 25%) 15%) and 140 seconds (selection ratio is about 5%) in that order.

  As described above, the lottery result of the special symbol and the variation pattern (variation time) to be selected are related, and the ratio of the variation time (variation pattern) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and the special The ratio of the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) selected when the symbol lottery result is out of order can be configured to indicate the jackpot expectation degree when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player predict whether or not a big hit has been won based on the selected change time (change pattern).

  In this embodiment, the same variation pattern table is used irrespective of the type of the winning jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type indicates a jackpot (eg, jackpot A) that is advantageous to the player. A configuration in which different variation pattern tables are used depending on whether the type is the jackpot type or the jackpot type indicating other jackpots (jackpot B and jackpot C). In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern table used when the jackpot type indicating the other big hits is won is shorter than the fluctuation pattern table used when the big hit type indicating the big hit (the big hit A) is won. It is preferable that the time fluctuation pattern is configured to be easily selected. This makes it possible to expect a game result that is more advantageous to the player as the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern to be executed is longer, so that the player is interested in the fluctuation time of the special symbol. be able to.

  In addition, a fluctuation pattern table used when a large hit type indicating a normal jackpot is won is easier to select a fluctuation pattern with a longer fluctuation time than a fluctuation pattern table used when a big hit type indicating a probable big hit is won. It is also possible to provide a game result that is surprising to the player when a jackpot is won with a short fluctuation time, even if a short fluctuation time is selected. You can have expectations to the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2 provided in the variation pattern table 202d will be described. FIG. 284 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2. As shown in FIG. 284, the variation pattern table 202d2 for time reduction defines a symbol type, a lottery result, and a value range of a variation type counter CS1 in association with a variation pattern.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 284, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the lottery result is “out”, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”. That is, when the fluctuation time is set to be ultra-short of 0.5 seconds in the entire range and the lottery result is “big hit”, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 198”, An ultrashort deviation of 0.5 seconds is specified in the range. When the symbol type is the second special symbol (special figure 2) and the lottery result is "out of range", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 198", that is, the variation time is 0 in the entire range. .5 seconds is specified, and if the lottery result is "small hit", a short / small hit of 1 second is specified, and if the lottery result is "big hit", the change type counter CS1 is set. The range of "0 to 149" defines a small and large jackpot with a variation time of 1 second, and the range of "150 to 198" defines a medium and large jackpot with a variation time of 30 seconds.

  Returning to FIG. 278, the description will be continued. The second random number counter C4 is configured as, for example, a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and it is detected that the ball has passed the normal starting port (through gate) 67. And stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number which is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the second random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to the second random number table 202c. Is determined to be a normal symbol (second symbol) when the value matches the random number value which is set as a hit. The second random number table 202c is used for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the symbol is in the normal state) and a high probability (normal symbol) in which the probability of hitting the symbol is higher than the low probability. ), And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the two types is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of winning is changed between a low probability of a normal symbol and a high probability of a normal symbol.

  When the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, when the ball passes through the ordinary starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variation of the ordinary symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 30 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning has occurred, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 has been completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened for“ 0.2 seconds × 1 time ”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the ordinary symbol hits. The opening time and the number of times may be arbitrarily set. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability, there are 200 random numbers which are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 200 out of a total of 240 random number values, so that the probability of a special symbol to be a big hit is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol and the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is obtained and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The display is executed for 3 seconds. If the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is achieved, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), The symbol of “」 ”is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened“ 2 seconds × 2 times ”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the time of the variable display becomes very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period is very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. The ROM 202 stores a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit based on the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value). In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second entrance 640 is opened only for “2 seconds × 2 times” when a normal symbol is hit. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "1 second x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 297). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 310).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs a jackpot lottery and a display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 278, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 includes, in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 278, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power supply, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by the main process (see FIG. 310), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 309). It should be noted that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 308) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 279 (b), the RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b, a time saving medium total counter 203c, a big hit start flag 203d, a big hit flag 203e, It has a hit start flag 203f, a small hitting flag 203g, a V passing big hit type storage area 203h, a V flag 203i, a time reduction middle special 2 counter 203j, a V passing flag 203k, and a memory area 203z.

  As shown in FIG. 278, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired based on the fact that the ball has entered is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start prize), each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, C5, and CS1 is acquired, and the acquired data is divided into four values. Among the vacant areas of the reserved areas (the first reserved area to the fourth reserved area), the areas are stored in ascending order of the area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the first special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are executed. It is shifted (moved) to an area, and a determination such as a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

  Then, when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area) into the reserved area having the smaller area number (the reserved first area to the reserved third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have the function of holding the second special symbol, each of the counters C1 to C3 at the timing when the ball enters the second entrance 640 (start winning). , C5, and CS1 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area as it is.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not have a function of holding a normal symbol (second symbol), the value of the second random number counter C4 is set at the timing when the ball passes the normal starting port 67. Is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area as it is.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is a variable display (first symbol) of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). This is a counter that counts the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display performed by the three symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value becomes 4 One is added (see S604 in FIG. 302). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is decremented by one each time a new special symbol change display is executed (see S207 in FIG. 298).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N of the variable display in the special symbol is retained) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by a special figure 1 reserved ball number command (S208 in FIG. 298, FIG. See S605). The special figure 1 reserved ball count command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b is changed.

  Each time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is changed, the sound lamp control device 113 changes the variation retained in the main control device 110 by the special figure 1 reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. It is possible to obtain the value of the number of retained balls displayed. As a result, the number of change display reserved balls managed by the special symbol 1 reservation ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise or the like. Even if the number deviates, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball count command.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and displays the reserved ball number for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number every time the reserved ball number changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball count symbol (reserved symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball count notified by the display reserved ball count command.

  The time reduction total counter 203c is a counter for adding up the change times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time reduction state and counting up to 100 times. In this case, the time reduction counter 203c is set to 0, which is the initial value, when the jackpot is won (see S217 in FIG. 298), and is set to 100 at the end of the jackpot (see S1514 in FIG. 311). Then, each time the change of the special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S502 in FIG. 301). The value of the total hours reduction counter 203c is referred to when it is determined whether or not the end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been reduced to 0 (S507 in FIG. 301). : Yes), the normal state is set as the game state (S508 in FIG. 301).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. The time-saving state is configured to end when any one of the conditions that the number of times the symbol changes reaches one (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the first end condition is satisfied is determined. In order to judge the time, the total counter 203c during time reduction is used. It should be noted that the value of the total time counter 203c is notified to the sound ramp control device 113 by a remaining time reduction command (see S505 in FIG. 301). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the value of the total time reduction counter 203c is changed.

  Each time the value of the total time reduction counter 203c is changed, the sound ramp control device 113 uses the remaining time reduction command transmitted from the main control device 110 to output the remaining fluctuation count until the first end condition of the time reduction state is satisfied. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of remaining working hours managed by the gaming state storage area 223i of the sound ramp control device 113 is shifted from the actual remaining variation number counted by the total saving time counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it has, the shift can be corrected by the remaining time reduction command received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned total number of time reduction counters 203c, that is, the first time reduction state, The information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is not transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time-saving state is shifted to the normal state by satisfying the second time-saving state second ending condition. The situation in which the second end condition is satisfied in a state where the number of remaining fluctuations until the condition is satisfied is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the time-saving state ends is suppressed.

  The jackpot start flag 203d is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the fluctuation of the special symbol for which the lottery result is determined to be a big hit stops, the big hit start flag 203d is set to ON (S216 in FIG. 298). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203d is ON and it is determined that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to OFF (S1503 in FIG. 311). The jackpot start flag 203d is set to OFF in an initial state, and is configured to be backed up and to retain a state immediately before the power is turned off when a power loss or the like occurs.

  The big hit flag 203e is a flag indicating that a big hit game is being played. It is set to ON at the timing when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (S216 in FIG. 298). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (when it is determined that the game of the number of rounds corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), the game is set to off (S1517 in FIG. 311). The big hit flag 203e is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to:

  The small hit start flag 203f is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 300). It is determined that the small hitting flag 203f is on, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hitting game, it is set to off (S1603 in FIG. 312). The small hit start flag 203f is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up to be maintained. It is configured to be.

  The small hitting flag 203g is a flag indicating that a small hitting game is being performed. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit is stopped (S404 in FIG. 300). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is set to OFF (S1620 in FIG. 312). The small hitting flag 203g is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. It is configured to be.

  The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores data for determining the jackpot type set when the ball that has won the V prize device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 when the small hitting game is being executed. This is a storage area to be stored. The V passing jackpot type storage area 203h stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type when the change of the special symbol whose determination result is the small hit stops (FIG. 300). S402). When the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203h. 203i is set to ON. At the end of the small hit game, the data value stored in the V passing big hit type storage area 203h is cleared. The V-passage jackpot type storage area 203h is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as a RAM clear state. When a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up. It is comprised so that it may be hold | maintained.

  The V flag 203i corresponds to the type of the small hit game being executed when the ball flows down the special discharge channel 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during the small hit game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3. The flag corresponding to the hit jackpot type is set to ON. At the end of the small hitting game, it is determined whether or not the V flag 203i is on (S1615 in FIG. 312), and if it is determined that the V flag 203i is on (S1615 in FIG. 312: Yes), it is set to on. The type of the jackpot to be executed is determined from the flag being set, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set (S1616 in FIG. 312). This V flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in an initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power failure or the like is backed up and held. It is configured as follows.

  The time saving medium special 2 counter 203j is a counter for counting the number of times the second special symbol changes executed during the time saving state up to one time. The time saving medium / low special 2 counter 203j is set to 0 which is an initial value when a big hit is won (see S217 in FIG. 298), and is set to 1 at the end of the big hit (see S1514 in FIG. 311). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S504 in FIG. 301). The value of the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203j is referred to when it is determined whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. When it is determined that the counter value has been reduced to 0 (see FIG. 301). S506: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S508 in FIG. 301).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the total number of changes of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time reduction state reaches 100 (first termination condition), or the second special symbol during the time reduction state. The time-saving state is configured to end when one of the conditions that the number of times the symbol changes reaches one (second end condition) is satisfied, and whether the second end condition is satisfied is satisfied. In order to judge the time, the special counter 2 j in the time reduction period 203 j is used. It should be noted that the value of the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203j is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a remaining time saving number command (see S505 in FIG. 301). The remaining time reduction command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound ramp control device 113 each time the value of the total time reduction counter 203c is changed.

  Note that the sound ramp control device 113 manages the number of remaining time reductions based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction medium time 2 counter 203j, that is, (2) Information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is satisfied is transmitted to the display control device 114. This is because, when a normal game is being played, the time saving state is shifted to the normal state when the second end condition of the time saving state is satisfied. This is for displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the time saving state ends on the third symbol display device 81 to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  The V passage flag 203k is a flag used to determine a state in which the V flag 203i is set to ON during the small hitting game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203i is set to ON. Is done. In the present embodiment, most of the balls that have won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game flow down the special discharge channel 650e2, and correspond to the ball that first wins the special discharge channel 650e2. It is set to ON in the V passage process (see FIG. 307) (S1107 in FIG. 307).

  Then, in the V passage process (see FIG. 307), it is determined whether the V passage flag 203k is set to ON (S1101 in FIG. 307), and when it is determined that the V passage flag 203k is set to ON (S1101: Yes in FIG. 307). ) And V passage processing (refer to FIG. 307) are configured to skip the processing of S1102 to S1108. Thus, even if the V switch 650e3 detects a plurality of balls during one small hitting game, only the V passage process corresponding to the ball detected first is executed. Therefore, the processing executed during the small hit game can be simplified, and the V-pass command is transmitted to the voice ramp control device 113 a plurality of times, so that the V-pass management on the voice ramp control device 113 side is complicated. Can be suppressed.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, and the like are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 has a ROM 202 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data. The ROM 202 has at least the first random number table 202a and the first random number table 202a. In addition to the type selection table 202b, the second random number table 202c, the variation pattern table 202d, and the small hit type selection table 202e, an open scenario table 202f is stored.

  Here, the contents of the release scenario table 202f will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 285 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the release scenario table 202f. The open scenario table 202f indicates a prize device (variable prize device 65) in which a ball can enter in a bonus game (big hit game, small hit game) executed when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a small hit. , V winning device 650) is defined according to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) according to the winning type (open scenario).

  As described above, the prize device (variable prize device 65, V prize device 650) and the opening operation content (open scenario) that are opened according to the winning result (big hit or small hit) and the hit type (big hit type, small hit type). ) Makes it possible to set the benefit game in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big hit or a small hit, it is possible for the player to enjoy the type of hit that has been won. it can.

  In the opening scenario table 202f, a start interval period during the hit game (a period from the start of the hit game to the opening of the first prize device) corresponding to the winning type (big hit type, small hit type) is displayed in the open scenario table 202f. Opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of the winning device to be opened, the number of seconds of one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (round number)), and the interval period between rounds (between round games) And the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change) )) And are defined respectively.

  Specifically, the winning type corresponding to the big hit A is "2 seconds" as the start interval period, and "variable winning device 65" is "15 rounds" and one round as the opening operation mode of the winning device. An opening operation mode in which a game is continuously opened for "29 seconds" is defined as "1 second" as an interval period between rounds and "4 seconds" as an end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpot of jackpot A, the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and the jackpot game in which many prize balls are paid out to the player. . Further, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, the jackpot A is a jackpot in which the time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game, is set. It is a jackpot.

  Next, corresponding to the hit types B and C, "2 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and "variable prize device 65" is set as "5 rounds" as the opening operation mode of the prize device as one round game. In the opening operation mode in which “continuously 29 seconds” is opened, “1 second” is defined as the interval period between rounds, and “4 seconds” is defined as the end interval period. Therefore, when the jackpot type wins the jackpots B and C, the jackpot game in which the variable prize device 65 is opened for five rounds is executed, and the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A to the player is executed. This is a jackpot game where about 1/3 of the prize balls are paid out. In addition, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, a time-saving state that is a gaming state advantageous to the player after the jackpot game is set, and in the case of the jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game is finished. Because of the configuration, the jackpot B is a jackpot in which a privilege which is more disadvantageous than the jackpot A and more advantageous than the jackpot C is given.

  In response to the hit type of the big hit D, "1 second" is started as the start interval period, "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device, and "variable winning device 65" is opened. Is released in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round game, the first round is released "12 times with an interval of 0.5 seconds between opening the opening of 0.1 seconds" and 2nd opening. In the fifteenth round, the opening operation mode of “continuously opening for 29 seconds” is “10 seconds” after the first round as an inter-round interval period, and “1 second” in other cases, and “4 seconds” as the end interval period. Is stipulated.

  In other words, although details will be described later, the start interval period of the jackpot D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game contents (opening / closing operation mode) of the first round, and the inter-round interval after the end of the first lined) The content specified in (period) is configured to be the same as the content specified in the small hit game described later. With this configuration, it is determined whether the hit game being executed this time is a big hit game or a small hit game until the timing when the first round ends (if the small hit game is, the small hit game ends). It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp). As a result, it is possible to provide an unexpected hit game to a player who has recognized that the small hit game has been executed by winning the small hit.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot D is a jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and is set so that the lottery of the second special symbol almost wins the small jackpot. (See FIG. 280 (c)). Therefore, the time saving state is set as the gaming state, and during a period in which the change of the second special symbol is mainly performed, the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and then a certain win game is started. In this case, in order to execute the winning game started from the same opening operation, whether the player has won the jackpot or the small jackpot, which of the jackpot (small jackpot or small jackpot) has been won by the player? Can be difficult to grasp.

  In addition, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than the case of winning a small hit, and after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot D is completed. The time saving state is set to be given. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot is not provided with a disadvantage that is more disadvantageous than when the player wins the small hit, so that a surprising game (the jackpot game corresponding to the big hit D) is performed by the player. Since the game can be made more advantageous, the player can be more excited.

  It should be noted that in the case where the big hit D is won and the case where various small hits are won, the same effect mode is executed as the variable display (variable effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and In order to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b showing the result of the special symbol lottery, the special symbol stop display timing and the special symbol lottery display are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display timing of the third symbol is made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol is synchronized with the stop display timing of the third symbol, but the display of the third symbol is not displayed during the stop display timing or the period before and after the stop display timing. In order to make it harder for the player to identify than in periods other than the above, the display mode and the display area are changed, and the third symbol display is performed at the special symbol stop display timing. May or switch on the main display of the symbol for demonstration that is displayed in the area Dm third effect for normal symbol made to correspond to the variable display of normal symbol from symbol of location 81.

  In addition, a prize device (V prize device 650) that opens when a win game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are disposed separately, and a special symbol stop display timing (any one of the win symbols) is displayed. At the timing of notifying the player of the winning), the third symbol display device 81 performs an effect display for causing the player to pay attention to the V-prize device 650, or the first symbol display device 37a, It is preferable that the display area of 37b be smaller than the display area of the third symbol display device 81 so that the first symbol is less visible than the third symbol. This makes it difficult for the first symbol display device 37a, 37b to determine whether the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit or a small hit by the stop display mode. Can be expected to win.

  Returning to FIG. 285, the description will be continued. The contents defined in accordance with the hit types corresponding to the small hits A to C include a small hit game (a round game) and a small hit game by the V switch 650e3 detecting a ball during the small hit game. An opening scenario of a jackpot game (2 to 15 round games) which is continuously executed after the end is also defined. Thereby, the small hit game content of the winning small hit type can be reliably associated with the big hit game content that can be executed after the small hit game ends, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

  Specifically, for the small hit A, the start interval period “1 second” is set as the small hit game, and the opening operation mode of the winning device “V winning device 650” is set to “1 round”. Round games "0.1 seconds open 12 times", open interval period "0.5 seconds after the end of the 5th and 10th open (interval 1 between open), 5th and 10th open end Later, 5 seconds (interval 2 between opening) "is defined.

  Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game is over, the “variable prize device 65” is opened in the “2nd to 15th rounds”, and one round game “continuously open for 29 seconds” is executed during the round interval period. After the end of the first round, “10 seconds” is set, otherwise “1 second” is specified, a start interval is “2 seconds”, and an end interval period is “8 seconds”.

  For the small hits B and C, the start interval period “1 second” and the opening operation mode of the winning device “V winning device 650” “1 round” open once for the small hit game. Round game "0.1 second release 12 times", interval time between opening "0.5 seconds after opening of 5th and 10th opening (interval 1 between opening), after 5th and 10th opening of opening 5 seconds (opening interval 2). "

  Then, as a big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game ends, the “variable winning device 65” is opened in the “2nd to 5th rounds”, and one round game “continuously open for 29 seconds” is executed during the round interval period. After the end of the first round, “10 seconds” is set, otherwise “1 second” is specified, a start interval is “2 seconds”, and an end interval period is “8 seconds”.

  That is, the big hit game that can be executed after the small hit game corresponding to the small hits B and C is set so that the number of round games is smaller than that of the big hit game corresponding to the small hit A described above. In addition, when the small hit type is the small hit B, a time-saving state that is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the end of the corresponding big hit game is set, and in the case of the small hit C, after the corresponding big hit game ends. Since it is configured so that the time saving state is not set, the small hit B is smaller than the small hit A and is a small hit in which a privilege more advantageous than the small hit C is given.

  Returning to FIG. 267, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower edge of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front opening drive, a V opening solenoid for opening and closing the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650, and a switching member 650h provided in the V winning device 650 are driven. 209a including a flow path solenoid 209a for driving an electric accessory (other solenoid 209z) and the like, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. I do.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply unit 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 328) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so as to have a launching strength of the ball according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when a command to launch the ball is issued by the main control device 110. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation handle 51 is turned off (not operated) on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off. The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, turns on and off lights in a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as the display) and the announcement effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 or the frame button 23, and changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22; The sound output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents at the time of super reach, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls display of an error command including the type of the error. Transmit to device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  As shown in FIG. 288 (a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 has a variation pattern selection table 222a, a first score effect selection table 222b, a second score effect selection table 222c, a total score selection table 222d, A score selection table 222e, and various data and programs required for controlling the game are stored.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation pattern of each variation pattern type (outside, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set in a variation value selection counter value (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed change pattern based on the change pattern type indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the pass / fail determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. Accordingly, the sound lamp control device 113 can select various kinds of change modes while strictly observing rough information such as the change time and the type of the change pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode or the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired early.

  The first score effect selection table 222b is a selection table for selecting whether or not to execute the score effect, which is the continuous effect described above, and for selecting an effect mode of the score effect to be executed. In FIG. 315, when it is determined that the prize information command is received from the main control device 110 (S2209 in FIG. 315: Yes), it is referred to in the prize information related processing (see FIG. 316) (see FIG. 316). S2306). When it is determined in the process of S2306 that a score effect is to be executed, the above-described score effect is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 286, the contents of the first score effect selection table 222b will be described. FIG. 286 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first score effect selection table 222b. The first score effect selection table 222b is a data table used for determining an effect mode of the score effect, and includes a variation type included in the winning information command, the number of balls to be held in a special symbol (first special symbol), An effect mode of the score effect executed corresponding to the value of the effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined.

  Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 falls within the range of “0 to 14” and “score effect C” Is defined, and "no score effect" is defined in the range of "15 to 99". When the number of retained balls is 4, “score effect A” is defined in a range of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 of “0 to 39”, and “score effect A” is defined in a range of “40 to 49”. "C" is defined, and "no score effect" is defined in the range of "50 to 99".

  When the variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is in the range of “0 to 9”. "Score effect A" is defined, "Score effect B" is defined in the range of "10-39", "Score effect C" is defined in the range of "40-49", and "50-99" "No scoring effect" is specified for the range. When the number of retained balls is 4, “score effect A” is defined in a range of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 of “0 to 19”, and “score effect A” is defined in a range of “20 to 39”. "B", "Score effect C" is defined in the range of "40 to 59", and "No score effect" is defined in the range of "60 to 99".

  When the variation type is per normal reach, when the number of retained balls is 2 to 4, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined as "score effect A" in a range of "0 to 9", and " "Score effect B" is defined in the range of "10 to 24", and "Score effect C" is defined in the range of "25 to 80".

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of the super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the above variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c). The production mode of the score production is defined at the same ratio as in a certain case. On the other hand, when the number of retained balls is 4, “score effect A” is defined in the range of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 of “0 to 4”, and “score effect B” in the range of “5 to 39”. , "Score effect C" is specified in the range of "40 to 59", and "no score effect" is specified in the range of "60 to 99".

  When the variation type is out of the normal reach, when the number of retained balls is 2 to 4, the value of the effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined as “score effect A” in a range of “0 to 4”, and “5 to 99”. "Score effect B" is defined in the range of "".

  As described above, in the first score effect selection table 222b in the present embodiment, score effects A to C are defined as the effect modes of the score effects. Here, when the score effect A is selected, a score effect with a smaller number of points (total score points) given during one score effect is executed. Next, an effect mode in which a large number of scores are easily set as the number of points (total assigned points) given during one score effect in the order of the score effect B and the score effect C is executed.

  In this way, in accordance with the lottery result of the target special symbol and the number of retained balls, in addition to the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect, the degree of the score given during the specific effect is set in advance, and the score is obtained. For the result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information to be directed, the score given during the score effect is biased and the effect of the score effect is reduced, that is, during the score effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the expected degree of jackpot is almost lost when the total number of assigned points is small.

  Furthermore, the selection ratio of the effect form to be executed as a score effect is defined in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, the variation pattern of the special symbol corresponding to the target winning information, and the result of determining whether the special symbol is correct. For example, if the variation type is Super Reach and the number of reserved balls is 4, the rate at which the score effect A with which the total awarded score is low and easy to be set is selected is out of the special symbol hit / fail judgment result It is stipulated that the winning case is about four times higher than the winning case (see FIG. 286). As described above, it is stipulated that, as a whole, the larger the number of points awarded during the score effect (the total number of awarded points), the higher the jackpot expectation, but in some cases (the target prize). In the case where the variation type of the special symbol corresponding to the information is "Super Reach" and the number of reserved balls is 4, the lesser the number of points awarded during the scoring effect, the higher the expectation of big hits. It is possible to provide a surprising performance as a performance.

  The second score effect selection table 222c is a data table referred to for selecting whether or not to execute a score effect and for selecting an effect mode of the score effect to be executed, like the first score effect selection table 222b described above. is there. The second score effect selection table 222c is different from the above-described first score effect selection table 222b, and uses a reserved ball acquired at the time when the score effect is completed (a newly acquired ball during the score effect). This is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the score effect again.

  Here, the contents of the second score effect selection table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). FIG. 290 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second score effect selection table 222c. The second score effect selection table 222c indicates a stop command process (FIG. 315) executed when a stop command is received from the main controller 110 (S2214: Yes in FIG. 315) in a command determination process (see FIG. 315) described later. 319), it is determined that the scoring effect has been completed (S2601: Yes in FIG. 319), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls at that time is 2 or more (S2604: Yes in FIG. 319). (S2607 in FIG. 319).

  The contents defined in the second score effect selection table 222c will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 290 (a). The variation type is per special reach or super reach, and the number of reserved balls is In the case of 2, 3, the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1 is defined as "score effect C" in the range of "0 to 29", and "no score effect" in the range of "30 to 99". Is done. When the number of retained balls is four, “score effect C” is defined in the range of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 of “0 to 49”, and “score effect C” is defined in the range of “50 to 99”. None "is specified.

  Then, when the variation type is per normal reach, when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, “score effect C” is defined in the range of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 of “0 to 9”. , "No score effect" is defined in the range of "10 to 99".

  On the other hand, when the variation type can be out of the super reach (super reach a to super reach c), when the number of reserved balls is two or three, the value of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 is “0 to 9”. "Score effect C" is defined in the range "", and "no score effect" is defined in the range "10 to 99". When the number of retained balls is 4, “score effect C” is defined in a range of the obtained effect lottery counter 223f1 of “0 to 4”, and “score effect C” is defined in a range of “5 to 99”. None "is specified.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not to execute a score effect, and when selecting the effect mode (score effect A to score effect C) of the score effect to be executed (score effect determination) A data table in which different selection contents are defined depending on the situation is used. Specifically, the score effect determination (the second score effect selection table 222c) at the time when the score effect is completed is more than the score effect determination (the determination referring to the first score effect selection table 222b) when the winning information command is received. Is determined such that the score effect is less likely to be executed and the jackpot expectation degree when the score effect is executed is higher.

  With this configuration, when the score effect is continuously executed, the player's expectation of the jackpot can be increased, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to make the player continue to play a game for acquiring a new pending ball while the score effect is being performed while expecting the score effect to be continuously performed. The operation of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the score effect is completed, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the score effect by using the second score effect selection table 222c. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the score effect using the second score effect selection table 222c for the reserved ball acquired after the end of the jackpot. . Thereby, in the case where the score effect is executed after the end of the jackpot, it is possible to cause the player to increase the expectation for the next jackpot at a timing immediately after the end of the jackpot.

  Further, in the present embodiment, two types of data tables are used when determining whether or not to execute a score effect, but three or more types may be used. In this case, when the score effect is executed three times in a row, the result of the third score effect, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information targeted for the third score effect is a big hit. It is better to define the contents of the third score effect selection table. In addition, in the case of setting the score effect continuously, the effect content of the second score effect is determined based on the effect contents (the selected effect mode and the total number of assigned scores) set in the first score effect. It may be configured to be selected, or may be configured to carry over and display at least a part of the score given in the first score effect as it is in the second score effect.

  The total awarded score selection table 222d is a data table that is referred to when setting a total score to be awarded to a player during the current score effect when executing a score effect, and includes a prize information-related process (FIG. 316). Alternatively, in the stop command process (see FIG. 319), when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes in FIG. 316, or S2608: Yes in FIG. 319), the total awarded score setting process (FIG. 319) 317) is referred to when setting the total awarded score (S2402 in FIG. 317). The total awarded score set here is stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o, and is used when setting each effect mode of a plurality of variable displays executed during the score effect.

  Here, the contents of the total awarded score selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 290 (b). FIG. 290 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the total awarded score selection table 222d. As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the total awarded score that can be awarded during one score effect is configured to be “18”, and the variation type included in the winning information command and the special symbol (the first symbol) are set. The total score to be given is defined in accordance with the number of retained balls of the special symbol and the set effect type (the effect type of the score effect set in the effect type flag 223n).

  Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the total awarded score “18” is defined for the score effect C, and the number of reserved balls is In the case of 4, the total awarded score “4” is defined for the score effect A, and the total awarded score “18” is defined for the score effect C. By defining the total awarded score in this way, it is possible to award a score corresponding to the frequency of occurrence of the awarded score during the execution of the score effect, and it is possible to provide the player with an unnatural feeling. In addition, in the total awarded score selection table 222d, a portion indicated by "-" is a portion that is not selected when referring to the first score effect selection table 222b and the second score effect selection table 222c.

  Next, when the variation type is per super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the total awarded score “5 to 11” for the score effect A is obtained. The range is defined as the range of the total awarded score “6 to 14” for the score effect B, and the range of the total awarded score “11 to 18” for the score effect C. In some cases, the range of the total awarded score “5 to 11” for the score effect A, the total awarded score “12” for the score effect B, and the total awarded score “12 to 15” for the score effect C Are defined respectively. Here, for a portion where a predetermined range is defined as the total awarded score, one of the effect counters 223f is configured to be selected according to a value obtained from a score distribution effect counter (not shown). I have. Thereby, since the total score given in the score effect set under the same condition (the variation type and the number of reserved balls are the same) can be made different, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when the variation type is the super reach, the provision is made such that a lower score is easily given as the total score given during the score effect as compared with the case where the variation type is per special reach. This is for associating the jackpot expectation of the variation type and the value of the total score to be given with the jackpot expectation. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the effect while predicting whether or not the player has won a jackpot based on the type of variation to be executed and the total score to be given.

  If the variation type is per normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the total awarded score “6” for the scored effect A and the total awarded score “12” for the scored effect B are scored A total score “18” is defined for C. As described above, in the normal reach having a low jackpot expectation as a variation type, the total awarded score “18” is selectable in order to provide a surprising effect to the player.

  On the other hand, when the variation type is out of super reach (super reach a to super reach c) and the number of reserved balls is two or three, the total awarded score “5 to 11” for the score effect A is obtained. In the case where the range is defined as a total of "6 to 14" for the score effect B and the total score "12" for the score effect C, and the number of reserved balls is 4, The range of the total awarded score “5 to 11” for the score effect A, the total awarded score “12” for the score effect B, and the range of the total awarded score “12 to 15” for the score effect C are Each is specified. When the variation type is out of normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, the total score “1 to 15” is defined for the score effect A.

  As described above, when the variation type is Super Reach, the total awarded score in the same range except for a part is selected depending on whether the special symbol lottery result is a big hit or a loss. It is configured so that: With this configuration, the effect (variable display corresponding to the variation type and the score given during the score effect) performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 corresponds to the current variable display. It is possible to suppress whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot or not in advance.

  When the variation type is Super Reach and the score effect C is set, and the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the maximum value of the total awarded score “18” is included in the selection range. (Selectable range "11-18"), and if the special symbol lottery result is out of range, the maximum value of the total awarded score "18" is not included in the selection range (selection). Possible range "12 to 15"). With this configuration, the score “18” is awarded only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. Therefore, when the super reach is set as the variation type, the score is awarded during the score effect. Can be played while watching that the player reaches "18".

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the larger the score given during the score effect is set, the higher the expectation of the jackpot is set, so as to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player. A configuration may be used. For example, when the score given during the score effect is a predetermined value other than the maximum value (for example, “7”), the jackpot expectation may be increased or the score effect may be increased. May be configured to increase the jackpot expectation when the given score is small (for example, in the range of “1” to “3”) despite the execution of “.” In this way, by giving the relationship between the assigned score and the jackpot expectation degree to a rule, only the player who has played the pachinko machine 10 for a long time can accurately predict the jackpot expectation degree.

  The awarded score selection table 222e is a data table for selecting a score to be awarded (displayed) as a awarded award in each variation display during the execution of the award effect, and is performed in an effect setting process (see FIG. 321) described later. When it is determined that the value of the change number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2801 in FIG. 321: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the score effect is currently being executed, the score giving effect setting process (FIG. 322) (See S2905 in FIG. 322).

  In the awarded score selection table 222e, the number of scores that can be displayed at the present time, that is, the total awarded score that has been selected with reference to the total awarded score selection table 222d and stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o, is already displayed. Score, that is, the value obtained by subtracting the count value of the awarded score counter 223p, the value of the effect variation counter 223m, that is, the remaining number of special symbol variations in which the score effect is continuously executed, and the value of the effect counter 223f. Among them, the display score is defined in association with the value of the display score effect counter (not shown), and the given score is selected according to the situation when the score giving effect setting process (see FIG. 322) is executed. You.

  Next, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 288 (b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, SW effective time storage area 223g, fluctuation time counter 223h, game state storage area 223i, production inhibition flag 223j, production inhibition release flag 223k, production fluctuation counter 223m, production type flag 223n, total awarded score storage area 223o, awarded score counter 223p, an operation score execution flag 223q, an operated flag 223r, and at least another memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the result of the lottery of the reserved ball before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110. ) Is a counter for counting up to four times the number of retained balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable effect held in the main controller 110. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the retained ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b causes the reserved ball of the first special symbol to be counted. It is designed to manage numbers.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main control device 110, When the number of reserved balls is decremented, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  When receiving the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, the sound ramp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203b of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2208 in FIG. 315). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203b.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b, and also stores the special symbol 1 reserved ball count after the storage. In order to notify the value of the counter 223 b to the display control device 114, a display pending ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball count command, the reserved ball count value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball count corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113, is used. Image drawing is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball count symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of the reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

  The information included in the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main controller may be the actual reserved ball count, that is, information indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball count counter 203a, or the special symbol reserved ball count counter. Information indicating that the value of 203a has been added by 1 or subtracted by 1 may be used. When information indicating that the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a has been added or subtracted by 1 is transmitted as the reserved ball number command, the information is included in the reserved ball number command received by the voice lamp control device 113. It is sufficient to provide a calculating means for calculating and managing the current number of reserved balls based on the information.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 315), and turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 320). When the variation start flag 223d is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S2102 in FIG. 314) of the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221. Inside, it is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 315), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2708 in FIG. 320). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The effect counter 223f is a counter used for score effects and various lotteries. Although not shown, the effect counter 223f is incremented by one every time the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. It is updated every time. In the present embodiment, an effect lottery counter 223f1 used when determining at least whether or not a score effect is executed as the effect counter 223f, and a score distribution effect counter used when selecting a total score to be given during the score effect. (Not shown) and an award used when selecting a score to be displayed in one variation display (total of scores awarded in a plurality of score awarding effects executed in one variation display) A score effect counter (not shown) is provided, and each counter is configured to be updated within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) without synchronization.

  The SW valid time storage area 223g is a storage area in which the frame button 22 or a period in which the frame button 23 is determined to be valid is stored. In the present embodiment, when the variation pattern selected by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern (SW variation pattern) for performing an effect capable of operating the frame button 22 or the frame button 23, the variation pattern is selected. The specified operation validity period is set. Although the detailed description is omitted, the SW valid time storage area 223g stores the fluctuations executed in the effect update processing (S2112 in FIG. 314) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 314) of the sound ramp control device 113. It is determined whether or not the pattern has reached the operation validity period. If it is determined that the pattern has reached the operation validity period, the elapsed period of the operation validity period is counted, and the counted period is the operation validity set in the SW valid time storage area 223g. It is configured to determine whether the period has elapsed. Also, the operation valid period is terminated when it is determined that the player has operated the frame button 22 or the frame button 23 during the operation valid period.

  The fluctuating time counter 223h is a counter for measuring the fluctuating time of the fluctuating pattern being executed, and the effect updating processing (S2112 in FIG. 314) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 314) of the sound ramp control device 113. ), The counter value is updated. By referring to the counter value of the fluctuation time counter 223h, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern can be grasped.

  The game state storage area 223i is an area for storing a game state corresponding to the state command when a state command related to the game state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game state) stored in the game state storage area 223i, the sound game controller 113 can identify the current game state. In the present embodiment, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores data in the gaming state storage area 223i when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off because the data is deleted when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The information indicating the current game state is also deleted. However, in the present embodiment, since the state command is set in the startup processing of the main control device (see FIG. 309) executed after the power is turned on (S1312 in FIG. 309), the game state storage area 223i immediately after the power is restored. Is stored with information indicating the game state set before the power was turned off. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the audio lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

  The effect prohibition flag 223j is a flag for prohibiting a new score effect from being set in a state where a score effect is set, and is set to ON when a score effect is set. The effect prohibition flag 223j is used when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed in the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 316) or the stop command processing (see FIG. 319) (S2307: Yes in FIG. 316, S2608 in FIG. 319: Yes), it is set to ON (S2313 in FIG. 316, S2614 in FIG. 319). Then, it is referred to in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 316) (S2304 in FIG. 316), and when it is determined that it is set to ON (S2304 in FIG. 316: Yes), the processing for setting the score effect is performed. It is configured to skip. Thereafter, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 319), when it is determined that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601: Yes in FIG. 319), that is, when it is determined that the score effect has been completed, It is set to off (S2602 in FIG. 319).

  With such a configuration, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and receives a new winning information command during a scoring effect performed using a plurality of variations of the special symbol, a new winning information command is received. It is possible to prevent the setting of a high scoring effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that a new score effect is started during the execution of the score effect and an incomprehensible effect is provided to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described control is employed because a configuration in which a plurality of score effects cannot be performed in an overlapping manner is used.However, for example, a plurality of regions for performing the score effects are provided, and a plurality of the score effects are provided. When there is a configuration that can be repeatedly executed, a score effect may be set until the number of score effects that can be executed repeatedly is reached.

  Specifically, when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 316) (S2307 in FIG. 316: Yes), or when it is determined to execute a score effect in the stop command process (see FIG. 319). (S2608 in FIG. 319: Yes), the value of the effect set number counter for counting the set number of score effects (the number of score effects already executed) is incremented by one. Then, in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 316) and the stop command processing (see FIG. 319), before determining whether to set a new score effect, the current value of the effect setting number counter is set to the upper limit value (overlapping value). Value corresponding to the number of points that can execute the score effect), and if the determination result is not the upper limit value, perform a process of setting a new score effect, and if it is the upper limit value, Skips the process of setting a new score effect. Then, in the stop command processing (see FIG. 319), when it is determined that one scoring effect has been completed, the value of the effect setting number counter may be decremented by one.

  The effect prohibition cancel flag 223k is a flag for canceling the period in which the setting of a new score effect is prohibited, and is used in a change display setting process (see FIG. 320) for setting a change display corresponding to a special symbol change. In the effect setting process to be executed (see FIG. 321), when it is determined that the value of the effect change number counter is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S2801 in FIG. 321), that is, the change display set this time is scored. This is the final fluctuation of the effect, and when the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2804 in FIG. 321: Yes), it is set to ON (S2806 in FIG. 321). Then, it is referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 319), and when it is determined in the stop command process that the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601: Yes in FIG. 319), the effect prohibition flag 223j is included. Set to off.

  The effect change number counter 223m counts the number of times the special symbol is changed during the score effect, and is updated to a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls when the score effect is set. Then, the value is referred to in the effect setting process (S2704 in FIG. 321), and when it is determined that the value of the effect change number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2801 in FIG. 321: Yes), the scoring effect effect setting executed In the process (see FIG. 322), the value of the counter is decremented by 1 (S2908 in FIG. 322).

  The effect type flag 223n is a flag indicating the effect type of the score effect, and is assigned a storage area of, for example, 3 bits. The first bit corresponds to the score effect A, the second bit corresponds to the score effect B, and the third bit respectively corresponds to the score effect C, indicating that the score effect corresponding to the ON (1) bit is set. If all the bits are off (0), it means that no score effect is set.

  The total awarded score storage area 223o is an area for temporarily storing the upper limit value of the scores awarded during the score effect, and is executed when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S2307 in FIG. 316: Yes). The total award score set in the total award score setting process (see FIG. 317) is stored.

  The awarded score counter 223p is a counter for measuring the number of awarded (displayed) during the score effect, and is a value corresponding to the number of awarded scores set in the score award effect setting process (see FIG. 322). Is added. Also, an operation score effect in which a score is given (displayed) when the player operates the frame button 22 as a score giving effect is set, and when the frame button 22 is not operated during the operation score effect, The value corresponding to the score not given (displayed) is subtracted.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 further includes a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 315) of the sound ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination process performs The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, displays the variation (variation) of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Direction) and a notice effect. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt processing. Note that, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 308).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 266) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 286 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a game flow of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 286, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, during the normal game state (during the normal state), the left hitting game is performed, and the special 1 game aiming at the first entrance 64 is executed. Is done. Here, when the big hit of the first special symbol is won, the game state shifts to a different game state after the big hit is finished depending on the big hit type won.

  Specifically, if the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is the jackpot C (50% of the whole), the normal state is set again after the jackpot ends, and if the jackpot type is the jackpot A or the jackpot B, the jackpot ends. It is configured to shift to a time-saving game state (time-saving state) which is a game state more advantageous to the player than the normal state later.

  In the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second entrance 640 and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed. If a big hit is won, the normal gaming state is always set after the big hit is completed. are doing. This is because, as described above with reference to FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not allow the ball to enter the second entrance 640 (even if the right-handed game is performed during the normal gaming state). In such a configuration, the act of executing the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state is regarded as an illegal act, and a countermeasure for preventing a player who has committed the illegal act from performing an advantageous game is performed. It is. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the time saving state, it is configured such that the lottery (game) of the second special symbol can be performed more advantageously by the player than the lottery of the first special symbol. Therefore, there is a possibility that a lottery of the second special symbol may be performed by performing wrongdoing. Therefore, by taking the above-described countermeasures, it is possible to suppress the random selection of the second special symbol from being performed.

  When the time-saving game state (time-saving state) is set as the game state, the ball can be easily entered into the second entrance 640 by the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640. As a result, a right-handed game is performed, and a special 2 game aiming at the second entrance 640 is executed.

  Here, when a small hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, the V prize device 650 is opened as a small hit game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V prize device 650 detects a ball, thereby obtaining a big hit. The game is started. Here, the game state changes to a different game state after the end of the big hit depending on the winning type of the winning. More specifically, if the winning type of the small hit is the small hit A or the small hit B (90% of the total), the time saving state is set again after the end of the big hit, and the small hit type is the small hit C. In some cases, it is configured to shift to the normal game state after the end of the big hit.

  In other words, once shifting to the time saving game state, the time saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot with a probability of about 90%, so that it is easy to continue the gaming state advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can. In addition, when the big hit is won by the lottery of the second special symbol during the time saving game state, the time saving game state is always set after the end of the big hit. In addition, even when a big hit is won by lottery of the first special symbol during the time saving game state, the time saving game state is always set after the end of the big hit.

  For example, in the normal game state in which the left-handed game is performed, a jackpot is won in a state where the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is the upper limit, and the time-saving game state is set after the end of the jackpot, During the state, a lottery of the first special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball of the special figure 1 may be executed. In this way, when the winning ball is won according to the reserved ball of the special figure 1 (winning is a normal gaming state, but the timing at which the lottery is actually executed is a time-saving gaming state), the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. If a configuration that can be used is used, there is a problem in that the player who has moved to the time-saving gaming state with difficulty has a feeling of dissatisfaction. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the first special symbol jackpot is won during the time saving state, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since “the number of times of change of the second special symbol is one” is included as a part of the end condition of the time saving state, the case where the number of times of change of the second special symbol becomes one is The game state is also shifted from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (when the second special symbol change of the first rotation during the time-saving game ends).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 287, a flow during the small hit game of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. 287 (a) to 287 (f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various components during the small hit game. As shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to (f), when the small hit game is executed by the control process of the main control device 110, the small control game effect is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by the display control device 114. Is executed. Then, when t1 (1 second) elapses after the small hitting game is started, the V winning opening solenoid is driven according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 285). In addition, the flow path solenoid 650k is always set to OFF, and the ball that has won the V prize device 650 flows down to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The ball flowing down the special discharge channel 650e2 is detected by the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3, and the V switch 650e3 is activated for 17 seconds (V effective period t5) 1 second after the small hitting game is started. By detecting the ball, the big hit game is executed after the small hit game, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) elapses after the big hit game is started, the first round game is started and the specific winning opening 65 is opened. Be released.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to cause the V prize device 650 to win a ball during a small hitting game by simply executing a right-handed game normally, and to cause the V switch 650e3 to detect the ball. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if the time-saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to end after one lottery of the second special symbol is performed, the game can be performed without any inconvenience. Can be done. In addition, since the time saving state is configured to end when the lottery of the second special symbol is performed once, for example, the type of the small hit won in the lottery of the second special symbol is identified, and the player is identified. In the case of winning a small hit (for example, a small hit of the small hit type C) which is disadvantageous to the game, a game aiming at a lottery of the next second special symbol is prevented without causing the V winning device 650 to win a ball. can do.

<Electrical Configuration of Display Control Device in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 291 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model having a different special lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to perform a system reset from the power supply unit 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231 a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. Instead, the character data is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a that can be increased in capacity with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is reduced particularly when random access is performed. For example, in a case where data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages is read, high-speed reading of data on the second and subsequent pages is possible, but an address is specified for reading data of the first page. It takes a long time from when the data is output. In addition, when data that is not continuous is read, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporarily storing various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at a high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240. The image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. The data is transferred to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in the present pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a is read. And outputs it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, and a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes the data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Executes the conversion of the data address.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error is corrected based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, the bad data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b, and access to the bad data block is avoided. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b operates for one page including data corresponding to the specified address (for example, 2 kilobytes). Is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. I do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one bank of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Accordingly, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or specifies the data from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the response in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 first stores the program after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. After the system reset is released, the MPU 231 first executes the boot program. Thus, the display control device 114 can be set to a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, in a range of the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set in accordance with the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and specifies the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” has been designated on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds one to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR-type ROM 234d. , Read the instruction code at the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c and output it to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released from the NOR type ROM 234d are included in the boot program. Is stored for the following reason. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a requires a large amount of time from when an address is specified to when data is output in reading data of the first page, which is unique to the NAND flash memory. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great amount of time is required from the reading thereof to the setting in the buffer RAM 234c. Spend a lot of time waiting to receive the code. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions of the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. When the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program is stored in a program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, one page capacity of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, and sets the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the setting, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 moves the instruction pointer 231a into the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined area of the program storage area 233a. The address is set.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, so that a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 include the remaining boot programs in the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The program is programmed so as to include the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Execute the remaining boot program included in the control program.

  In the remaining boot programs, all of the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization processing (see S4002 in FIG. 328) executed after the end of the boot processing by the boot program (see S4001 in FIG. 328) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading a control program from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and for the remaining boot programs, Even when the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one of a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs this one-frame image drawing process and one-frame image display process for one frame of image display time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. In parallel.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of the image for the next one frame, and executes the processing of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower read speed than other ROMs (such as a mask ROM and an EEPROM). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after turning on the power. It is configured to be. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thereby, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data to be used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. The time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 are resident. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to perform drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of, and the time required for reading out the image data can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, since the image data is also stored in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating to which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and the beginning of the transfer destination (the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a in accordance with the various information of the transfer instruction. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction to the storage source end address is transferred.

  As a result, image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing. In addition, it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

  Further, the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237. It is possible to easily determine a period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and to simplify the processing.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The power-on main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. 235e, an error message image area 235f, and at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d.

  The power-on main image area 235a stores a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on to when all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. An area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image that displays the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 in a fluctuation effect when performed.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 328).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 292 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a first and uses the power-on main image shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (“O” and “X” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81).

  At this time, when the display control device 114 receives the display change pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command from the main control device 110, which is the command command to start the change, the display control device 114 proceeds to FIG. As shown in FIG. 292, on the display screen of the main image at power-on, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol “○” is located at the lower right position toward the screen, and as shown in FIG. At the same position as the symbol, a power-on variation image of an “X” symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed during the variation period. Then, based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are used for the lottery performed by the main control device 110. The result is judged, and when it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 292 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the fluctuation effect is stopped, and when it is “special symbol loss”, FIG. 292 (c) Is displayed for a certain period of time after the fluctuation effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the main image to be drawn at power-on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall can check the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. In addition, the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the remaining images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are displayed. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped. Can be.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and the use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed for the character ROM 234 can prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected at the first entrance ball 64, the power-on fluctuation image area The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 292 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237. Thus, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  Also, at the stage when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. If a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main time image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 291, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 293 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each of the back images. FIG. 293 (b) shows a back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage" and a back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage".

  As shown in FIG. 293, as the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, an image that is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image such that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

  The images prepared on each of the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the back images are continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and are images between the position c and the position d. Is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81, and then an image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed with a proper connection.

  When the change of the back type is determined and the stage is changed to the “sand beach stage” or the “deep sea stage”, the MPU 231 sets a position between the first position a and the position a ′ of the corresponding back image as the initial position of the display area. Then, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as time passes, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the region reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display region is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 293 (a), the back surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the positions a to d are the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the initial stage “Sandy Beach Stage” is displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the “Sandy Beach Stage” that is frequently displayed is displayed. By making them all resident in the back image area 235c, the number of times of data access to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 293 (b), the back surface B corresponding to the “deep sea stage” has only a part of the back surface, that is, only the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b is resident. It is stored in the back image area 235c of the video RAM 235.

  Here, in order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a very large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from position a to position a '(or the range from FIG. 293 (a) to (b)). ) And the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 293 (a) and (b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, if the stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the change, the character ROM 234 may be stored on the back of the resident video RAM 235. Using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can, also, it is possible to display while changing the scrolling display or color over time. In addition, since only the image data corresponding to the image in the partial range is stored for the back surface B, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  After the image at the initial position is displayed, the rear surface B scrolls the range from position a to position b from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during the operation. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from the position a to the position b using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  On the rear surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 291) of the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be displayed reliably.

  On the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to the image corresponding to the image between the position b ′ and the position b. Data is stored redundantly. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scroll-displayed with a smooth connection to the third symbol display device 81. ing.

  Further, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so as to display the image between the position c and the position d as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236, The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a 'is displayed as a display area on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. I do. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c so as to flow in the leftward direction.

  Returning to FIG. 291, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”, which are the third symbols, are resident. Thus, when performing a fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read out image data from the character ROM 234 every time. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, A fluctuating effect can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first entrance 64, the variable effect starts immediately on the third symbol display device 81, although the variable effect has been started on the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 but instead stores the corresponding image data in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the resident image data, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the character pattern can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of the vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Also, when the occurrence of another error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, when receiving the error command, display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error, from the viewpoint of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player from the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 determines the error message in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in each of the sub-areas is determined in advance.

  The MPU 231 transfers the image data necessary for drawing the subsequent image data among the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236. Then, it instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data specified by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thus, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and thus can reduce the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing the image for one frame into the frame buffer. While the image is being developed, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame that has been previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Then, by transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 simultaneously develops the image of one frame drawn in one frame buffer while developing the image. The image for one frame that has been developed first is read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are different from each other. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234 and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Be composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and stored image data determination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads out the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 , It is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table that describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in a second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from character ROM 234 to work RAM 233, and stored in data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114. Using 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a fluctuation effect, a round effect A display data table corresponding to an ending effect and a demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of place, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is the jackpot A to D. In any case, the stop symbol indicating the big hit is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in the variable effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  By notifying the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol. The longer the time-saving period of the ordinary symbol, the more chances for the ball to pass through the second entrance 67, so that the chance for the ordinary symbol to be drawn is increased and the opportunity to hit the ordinary symbol is increased. Become. Therefore, since the chance of opening a motorized accessory as a jackpot of a normal symbol increases, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and the lottery of a special symbol is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time reduction period of the displayed normal symbol is, the stronger the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit, which can be given to the player, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game. it can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

  In addition, the first entrance 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball enters, so that the electric accessory is usually opened as a jackpot of a symbol, and the ball enters the second entrance. When the ball entrance 640 becomes easy to enter, the number of prize balls increases. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which the number of balls is difficult to reduce, or the state in which the number of balls is not reduced, even when playing a game. It is possible to obtain a sense of period in which a special symbol jackpot can be obtained in a state where there is no special symbol. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Also, in the ending effect, by notifying that one of the lottery results of the held special symbol lottery results in a special symbol jackpot, the player can make a special symbol lottery in the held special symbol lottery. Can be recognized, so that the player can surely have the expectation that the special symbol will be a big hit. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can be continuously motivated to participate in the game.

  Note that, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning prize is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of one variable effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person related to the hall can recognize that the game is not performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variable effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 294 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (in the present embodiment, 20 milliseconds) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is defined as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  In the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucency, and the like are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, for drawing a sprite on the third symbol display device 81 is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying a sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 at which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying an enlargement factor for a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. When the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed with being enlarged from a standard size. When the enlargement ratio is smaller than 100%, the sprite is displayed with a smaller size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite is displayed. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for specifying a color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), And one light image For each sprite, drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined. Note that one or more pieces of information on effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type is to display either back A or B corresponding to the stage (one of “sand beach stage” or “deep sea stage”) selected by the player, or a back different from back A or B. Information for specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, in the case of specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back type also includes information for specifying which back image is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the backs A and B is to be displayed by the back type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the backs A and B as a drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are specified. May be defined as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from when the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81).

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and drawing of an image based on the display data table according to the rear type (or the third symbol display device 81). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. This is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be the information indicating the elapsed time, but may be the information indicating the address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Describes symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers given to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, offset information from the stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is described. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Provide information. Thus, the variable effect can be stopped at a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd symbol is given a unique number, a change symbol in the immediately preceding change effect and a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are displayed in the 3rd symbol. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing with the numbers attached to the symbols and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  In the symbol offset information, the predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed. It is set to be the time displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the stop effect of the variable effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the number of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made aware of the interruption of the continuity of the number. be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the head address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 294) of the display data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, every time the rendering process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the rendering content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is issued. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thus, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

  Here, when a program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as in a conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. A large load is applied to the processing of starting and executing a complicated and enormous program, which may limit the processing capability of the display control device 114 and limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each of the rendering modes, a display data table buffer corresponding to the rendering mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display content cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. As described above, the display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and the drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the winning start.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 295 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effects defined in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thus, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and is transfer data information of image data of a sprite to be transferred at a time indicated by the address (hereinafter, referred to as “transfer target image data”). (Corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 295). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (address “0002H” in FIG. 295 corresponds).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 where the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  Note that, as in the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in the head address “0000H” of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 295, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 296) described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite at which the transfer is to be started at that time is obtained, and the transfer list is created in the drawing list in which the transfer data information is created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 295, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, since null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the transfer data table is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110 or the like. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236. Thus, the transfer start timing can be instructed, so that even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c determines whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 292 (a) to (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. Is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 328) executed by the MPU 231 (see S4005 in FIG. 328). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image other than the power-on image. It is set to off (see S4305 in FIG. 330 (b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 330 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S4308 in FIG. 330 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 330 (b)) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 330 (b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 331 to 339) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 340 to 342) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S6301 in FIG. 343 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 343 (b)) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 344) for transferring image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. Then, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, increments the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 296) described below, which describes the contents of the image drawing instruction for, is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one and, based on the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, sends an image to the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 296) described below that describes the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e stores a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. The data is stored in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f to the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. If this is the case (that is, if no Null data is described), the transfer data information is stored in a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 296) describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw a predetermined sprite in accordance with the display data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is to be specified. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 at the same time that the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. ), A pointer update process (see S6005 in FIG. 342) is performed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, (See FIG. 296), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is obtained. Add the information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, various effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite based on the transfer data table is displayed before the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing of the image can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g stores an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. 237 is an area for storing a drawing list instructed by 237.

  Here, the drawing list will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 296 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ..., effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number design 1, reserved ball number design 2, ..., error) For each sprite such as a pattern, detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored. The image controller 237 obtains image data of the sprite from a memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to a scaling process according to a magnification ratio, a rotation process according to a rotation angle, and a translucent process according to a translucent value. Subject to alpha blending information, perform synthesis processing with other sprites, perform color tone correction processing according to color information, and perform filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information. Then, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the rendered image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the rendering target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, Based on an image and a warning image notifying that an error has occurred, detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, in the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and the address of the data of the sprite (display object) correspond to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the content of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Also, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and obtains detailed drawing information for each sprite. (Detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And the effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) , Characters (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  Further, when the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transmits the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes the transfer data information, the image controller 237 reads the image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. Each time the display setting process is performed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6007 in FIG. 340). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processings to be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j indicates that, for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is any.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by an initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 328) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 344) executed by the MPU 231. Will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprite to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprite is set to “off”.

  The MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233j when transferring image data of a sprite for which image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite of the transfer target sprite. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6513 in FIG. 344). If the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6514 in FIG. 344). The image controller 237 causes the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, since the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). If the rendering target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6602 in FIG. 345).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the rendered image information which has already been developed from a frame buffer different from the rendering target buffer in parallel with the rendering process, and sends the read image information to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated at the same time that the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done by Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and the display processing of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is executed (see S6602 of FIG. 345).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. You.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. You. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image of one frame.

<Control Process Executed by Main Control Device 110 in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process started upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer started periodically (at an interval of 2 ms in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, first, a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process will be described, and then a start process will be described. And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 297 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of the various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined to store the detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches a maximum value (999 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in a corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches a maximum value (239 in this embodiment), the value is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are each incremented by one, and their counter values are maximized. When the value reaches (999, 99, 239, 99 in this embodiment, respectively), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). Thereafter, a start winning process is executed in accordance with the winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64 (S105). The details of the special symbol change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). A gate passing process is performed (S107). The details of the ordinary symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 304 and 305. After the execution of the through gate passage process, a V entrance passage process associated with the ball entry into the V winning device 650 is executed (S108). Thereafter, a V-pass process is executed in accordance with the winning of the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 (S109). Details of the V entrance passage process and the V passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

  Next, a firing control process is executed (S110), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a and, on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of firing. When the launch of the ball is on, main controller 110 instructs launch control device 112 to launch the ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 298, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 298 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change processing (S104). The special symbol change process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and the special symbol (first symbol) change display and the third symbol performed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed on the display device 81.

  In this special symbol change process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including a special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the symbol jackpot game is included. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not during the special symbol jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is changing (S202), and the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are displayed. If the mode is not changing (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S203).

  When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second entrance 640 (S203: Yes), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5. Each value is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S204). Next, a special symbol change start process for starting the change display on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S210), and this process ends. The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S203 that the game ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S203: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S205). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S206). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S206: No), this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S206: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S207) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S208). After the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S208, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S209). After that, the processing of S210 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S202: Yes), whether the variation time of the variable display executed on the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it is (S211). The variation time of the variation display performed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuating time has not elapsed (S211: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S211, if the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display being executed has elapsed (S211: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is set (S212). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol change start process (S210) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol change start processing is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, whether a special symbol is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1. The big hit types (big hits A to D) are determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs, a blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. When the small hit is made, the red LED is turned on, and when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Furthermore, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are formed of a plurality of LEDs, and when the lottery result is a big hit, the combination of the LEDs to be turned on is changed to identify each big hit type (big hit A to D). It is configured to display as possible. When the lottery result is other than the big hit (small hit or miss), the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b may be turned on in the same display mode. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S212 is completed, when the variation display being executed on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is started, the special symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process. Is a special symbol jackpot (S213). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S213: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S214), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S215). Next, the big hit start flag 203d and the big hit flag 203e are set to ON (S216), the time saving medium total counter 203c and the time saving medium special 2 counter 203j are set to 0 (S217), and the process proceeds to S218. In the processing of S218, a stop command is set (S218), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S213: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S219).

  In the process of S219, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S219: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S220), and then a time saving number update process is executed (S221). ), The process of S218 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S219, when it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S219: No), the small hit start setting process (S220) is skipped and the time saving number update process is executed (S221). . Next, the process of S218 is performed, and this process ends.

  As described above, when a small hit is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, the time saving update process (S221) is executed after the small hit start setting process (S220) is executed. Is not executed, the time-saving state will end. Therefore, when the type of the small hit that has been won when the small hit is won is identified, and when the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player is performed in a game in which the ball does not enter the V winning device 650, Since the time-saving state ends after the small hit game ends, an illegal game can be prevented from being played.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 299, the special symbol change start process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 299 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S210). The special symbol change start process (S210) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 299) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297). Based on the values of the various counters stored in the area, a lottery of "special symbol big hit", "special symbol small hit" or "special symbol departure" is performed (whether or not) and the first symbol display device 37a. , 37b and the third symbol display device 81 to determine an effect pattern of the variable effect (variable effect pattern).

  In the special symbol change start process, first, the first random number counter C1, first hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. Each value of the counter C5 is obtained (S301). Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S302). Specifically, in the case of the lottery of the first special symbol based on the entry into the first entrance 64, the value of the first random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 280 (b)) Is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the second random symbol stored in the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 640, the value of the first random number counter C1 And the random number stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 280 (c)) to determine whether a big hit or a small hit.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot (S303). If the lottery result is a jackpot (S303: Yes), a jackpot type is acquired based on the jackpot type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S304). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1 or the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202b2. Of the four special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to D), it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 281 (b) or (c)).

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different random numbers may be used. With such a configuration, the random number value determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, so that the bias of the big hit can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a large jackpot. May be set differently. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player By doing so, it is possible to give expectations to the jackpot.

  Then, the display mode at the time of the big hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the big hit type is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined big hit type (big hits A to D). In order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type on the third symbol display device 81, the big hit types (big hits A to D) are set as the stop types.

  After that, a big hit change pattern is determined based on the value of the change type counter CS1 (S306), and the process proceeds to S313. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the processing of S306, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third time until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the big hit symbol is set. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the obtained special symbol type, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 are compared with the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. Thus, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined (FIG. 283 (b) or FIG. 284).

  In the process of S313, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S306 is set (S313). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the process of S305 is set (S314). The variation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and are included in an external output process (S1401) of a main process (see FIG. 310) described later. It is transmitted to 113. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S314 ends, the process returns to the special symbol change processing (see FIG. 298).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a big hit (S303: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S307). If the lottery result is a small hit (S307: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the acquired special symbol type (S308). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small hit type selection table 202e, and the three types of special symbol small hits (small hits) are compared. It is determined what the small hit type is among A to C) (see FIG. 282).

  Next, the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the special symbol type and the small hit type is set (S309). Thereafter, a small hit change pattern is determined based on the value of the change type counter CS1 (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the small hit symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 283 (b) or FIG. 284). Next, the processes of S313 and S314 described above are performed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 298).

  In the processing of S313 and S314 in this case, the command corresponding to the variation pattern (see S310) set when the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit and the stop type (see S309). Is set.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode at the time of a loss corresponding to the special symbol is set (S311). Thereafter, a variation pattern at the time of departure is determined based on the number of reserved balls (S312). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the acquired special symbol type, the lottery result, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the normal variation pattern table 202d1 or the time reduction variation pattern table The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with 202d2 (FIG. 283 (b) or FIG. 284). Next, the processes of S313 and S314 described above are performed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 298).

  Next, the small hit start setting process (S220) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 300 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S220). The small hit start setting process (S220) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 298) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and is a small hit type (small hits A to C). Is a process for setting the start of the small hit game based on the.

  Here, when the small hitting game is started, the pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state in which the ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the V winning device 650 has the specific area (V). By passing the prize switch 650e3), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game ends.

  That is, the gaming state in which the small hitting game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hitting game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where the likelihood is high.

  In the small hit start setting process (S220), first, an open scenario corresponding to the small hit type is set (S401). Thereafter, a big hit type corresponding to the small hit type is set in the V passing big hit type storage area 203h (S402). More specifically, based on the small hit type and the small hit type selection table 202e, the V passing big hit types (big hits A to D) are determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that the big hit is A or D (15 rounds, one time hit). If the small hit type is B, the big hit B (5 rounds, one time hit) ), And if the small hit type is C, it is determined to be a big hit C (five rounds time-saving no-big hit) (see FIG. 282).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S403), and the small hit start flag 203f and the small hit flag 203g are set to ON (S404). After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 301, a description will be given of the time saving update process (S221) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 301 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S221). This time saving number update process (S221) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 298) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), updates the time saving number, and changes the gaming state to the normal state. This is a process for setting to.

  In the time saving number update process (S221), first, it is determined whether or not (S501). If it is determined that this is not the case (S501: No), the present process is terminated.

  If it is determined (S501: Yes), the value of the time reduction total counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S502), and it is determined whether or not the current variation is the special figure 2 (S503). When it is determined that the current fluctuation is the special map 2 (S503: Yes), the value of the special time counter 2 during the time reduction is decremented by 1 (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. On the other hand, in the process of S503, when it is determined that the current fluctuation is not the special figure 2 (the special figure 1) (S503: No), the process of S504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S505, a remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the time reduction medium time counter (the time reduction total time counter 203c and the time reduction medium time special 2 counter 203j) changed by the calculation is set (S505). The command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 310) described later. It is transmitted to 113.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203j is 0 (S506), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203j is not 0 (S506: No), next, It is determined whether the value of the sum counter 203c is 0 (S507). In the processing of S507, when it is determined that the value of the total number of hours reduction counter 203c is not 0 (S506: No), the processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S506, when it is determined that the value of the time reduction medium time special counter 203j is 0 (S506: Yes), or in the processing of S507, it is determined that the value of the time reduction medium time total counter 203c is 0. In this case (S507: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S508), and the process ends.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 302 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first entrance 64, and when there is a starting win. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 302, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning) (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is held) is acquired (S602). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S603).

  Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a prize in the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203b is 4 If not less than (S603: No), the process proceeds to S607. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203b is incremented by 1 (S604). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b changed by the calculation is set (S605).

  The set number-of-balls command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in an external output process (S1401) of a main process (see FIG. 310) described later executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the reserved ball number command, the sound ramp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the pending ball number command in the processing of S605, the first random number counter C1, first collision type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, small collision type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above. Are stored in the first area of the empty reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, in the process of S607, a pre-read process is executed (S607). After that, this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 303, the prefetching process (S607), which is one of the startup winning processes (see S105 in FIG. 302) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S607).

  In this prefetching process (FIG. 303, S607), first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 (S701). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning in the first entrance 64 (S701: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, the special figure 1 big hit type selection table 202b1, and the variation pattern table 202d (normal variation pattern table 202d) The lottery result, the jackpot type, and the variation pattern are acquired in advance based on the variation pattern table 202d1 or the variation pattern table for time saving 202d2) (S702).

  Next, the winning information command including the jackpot determination result, the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of S702 is set (S703), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 304, the ordinary symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 304 is a flowchart showing the ordinary symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), and the variation of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device and the electric power attached to the second entrance 640 are provided. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory.

  In the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 304, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the present is hitting an ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S801). As the hit during the normal symbol (the second symbol), the display indicating the hit on the second symbol display device and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are performed. In the middle of being included. If the result of the determination is that a normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S801: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not a hit of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) (S801: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802). If the display mode is not fluctuating (S802: No), it is determined whether or not a second random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S803), and if not, (S803: No). Then, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the second random number counter is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S803: Yes), the stored value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired (S804).

  Then, based on the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the processing of S804 and the normal symbol (second) random number table 202c, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol has been won is obtained (S805). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of “0 to 4,205 to 239”, It is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (see FIG. 280 (d)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S805 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S806), and if it is determined that the lottery result is the hit of the ordinary symbol (S806: Yes), the winning is determined. The display mode at the time is set (S807), and the process proceeds to S809. In the processing of S807, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol "O" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S806, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the ordinary pattern (S806: No), a display mode at the time of the out of pattern is set (S808). In the processing of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, a setting is made so that a symbol “x” is lit and displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of departure is completed, the process proceeds to S809.

  When the processing of S807 or S808 ends, in the processing of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S809), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state (S809: Yes). Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time-saving state (S809: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). Here, the fluctuation time is a time set beforehand in the second symbol display device by the processing of S810 or the processing of S811 before the fluctuation display is started.

  If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the S812 process (S812: No), the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the processing of S813, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is a hit, and if the display mode is set by the processing of S807, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device). ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery of the ordinary symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S808, the “X” symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, when the second symbol display update process (see S1408) of the main process (see FIG. 310) is next executed, the variable display on the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S807 or S808, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lit) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variation display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (the current lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation process (FIG. 304, S106) is the ordinary symbol. Is determined (S814). If the result of the current lottery is out of the ordinary symbol (S814: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S814: Yes), it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S815).

  In the processing of S815, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and The number of times of release is set to one (S816), and the process proceeds to S817. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-saving state (S815: Yes), the opening period of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times of opening is twice. Is set (S817), and the process proceeds to S818. Thus, except for the special symbol jackpot, in the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation display time is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", compared to the normal state of the normal symbol, and Since the release period of the second winning opening 640 is very long, that is, “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times”, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640.

  In the processing of S818, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S818), and this processing ends. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S818, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1406) of the main process (see FIG. 310) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S816 or S817 are completed.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 305 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interruption processing (see FIG. 297), and it is determined whether or not a ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, the process is to acquire the value indicated by the second random number counter C4 and store it in the execution area.

  In the through gate passage process (FIG. 305, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed the ordinary symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902). If the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is not fluctuating (S902: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a special symbol jackpot (S903). If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is in a big hit (S903: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is not during the special symbol big hit (S903: No), the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area (S904). After that, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 306, the V entrance passage processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 306 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

  In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S1001). In the process of S1001, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S1001: No), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1001 that the ball passing sensor is on (S1001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V winning opening 650a is being opened (S1002).

  In the process of S1002, when it is determined that the opening period of the V winning opening 650a is being performed (S1002: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S1003), and this process ends. The V-entrance passage command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used as a voice in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the V entrance passage command, the sound lamp control device 113 counts the balls that have passed the V entrance and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114. As a result, an effect during the small hit game based on the ball entry into the V winning device 650 can be executed (see FIG. 286).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not during the opening period of the V winning opening 650a (S1003: No), it means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 despite the fact that it is not a small hit game, so that an error command is issued. It is set (S1004). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set (S1004), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the V passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing the V passage processing (S109). The V passing process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

  In the V passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the V passage flag 203k is on (S1101). In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203k is on (S1101: Yes), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the V passing flag 203k is not on (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not there is V passing (S1102). That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S1102, when it is determined that there is no V passing (S1102: No), this process ends as it is.

  In the process of S1102, when it is determined that there is V passing (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V passing effective period is in progress (S1103). If it is determined that it is during the V pass effective period (S1103: Yes), the V pass jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203h is acquired (S1104), and the acquired V pass jackpot type is acquired. Is set to ON (S1105). Then, a V passing command is set (S1106).

  Next, the V passing flag 203k is set to ON (S1107). After that, the total number of time reduction counters 203c and the number of time reduction special counters 203j are set to 0 (S1108), and the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1103 that the vehicle is not in the V-pass valid period (S1103: No), an error command is set (S1109), and this processing ends. When the game ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when the V validity period is not in progress, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an error is output and an illegal action can be found.

  FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process (S1201). I do.

  Note that the above-described NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner by the payout and departure control device 111, and the power-off information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 309, a description will be given of a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on. FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This start-up process is started by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1301). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (one second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait until the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) are in an operable state. (S1302). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1303).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 266) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1304). If it is turned on (S1304: Yes), the process proceeds to S1315. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), it is further determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305). If it is not stored (S1305: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown may not have been completed normally, the processing also shifts to S1315 in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1305: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1306). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1307: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed-up data has been destroyed, and the process also shifts to S1315 in such a case. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1415 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1315, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1315). Upon receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game balls. After transmitting the pay-out initialization command, main controller 110 executes an initialization process of RAM 203 (S1316, S1317).

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is pressed at the time of execution of the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S1316, S1317) is executed. Similarly, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1316, S1317) is executed also when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S1316, S1317), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1316), and thereafter, the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1317). After the execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1310.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S1304: No), power-off information is stored (S1305: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1304: No), S1307: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1308). Next, a payout return command at the time of power restoration for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power cutoff is transmitted (S1309), and the process proceeds to S1310. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 enters a state in which the payout control of the game balls can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1310, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the values of the time reduction medium time counters (time reduction medium time totaling counter 203c and time reduction medium time special 2 counter 203j) are read (S1311), and a status command based on the read values is set (S1312). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is turned off (S1313). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1314), and the process proceeds to the main processing described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline, each of the processes in S1401 to S1408 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter updating process in S1411 and S1412 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 310), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is output to the sub side. An external output process to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1401). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297) is determined. Send a prize ball command. Further, the special figure 1 pending ball number command set in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 298) and the start winning process (see FIG. 302) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 311) are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1402). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, and is cleared to zero when the counter value reaches a maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the updating of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1403). A jackpot control process is performed to open or close the winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S1404). In the jackpot control process, the winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) corresponding to each round of the jackpot state is opened, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable). The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650). It is determined whether a predetermined number of balls have won the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1404) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 310), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

  Next, when the special symbol is in the small winning state, execution of various effects according to the small winning and the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening of the V winning device 650). The small hit control process for opening or closing 650a) is executed (S1405). In the small hit control process, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and the corresponding winning opening (first variable opening) is opened. The maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 has elapsed, or the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650). It is determined whether a predetermined number of balls have won the V winning opening 650a). Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1405) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 310), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 297).

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is executed (S1406). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started when the start of the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is set by the process of S817 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 304). The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S815 or the process of S816 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1407). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S306, S310 or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 299), the variation display according to the variation pattern is performed by the first symbol display. It starts in the devices 37a, 37b. In the present embodiment, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the LED of the first symbol display device 37a, 37b is a red LED until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation is started. Is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. Is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds. However, if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by one each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S306, S310, or S312 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 299) ends, the first symbol display device is activated. The variable display executed in 37a, 37b is terminated, and the stopped symbol (first symbol) is set to the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S305, S309, or S311 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 299). A stop display (lighting display) is performed on the symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1408). In the second symbol display updating process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S809 or the process of S810 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 304), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second symbol display device, a variable display in which the symbol “O” and the symbol “X” as the second symbol are alternately turned on is performed. In the second symbol display updating process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S812 of the ordinary symbol variation process (see FIG. 304), the variation executed in the second symbol display device is performed. The display is terminated, and the stopped symbol (the second symbol) is stopped (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the process of S806 or the process of S807 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 304). I do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1409). If power-off occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1409: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs a power failure signal. SG1 is not output, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1410). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1410: Yes), the process proceeds to S1401, and the above-described processes after S1401 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1410: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1411, S1412).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1411). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1402 (S1412).

  Here, since the execution time of each processing of S1401 to S1408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4), and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In addition, in the process of S1409, if the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1409: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 308 has been executed, the processing at S1413 and thereafter upon power-off is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1413), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been turned off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1414). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1415), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1416), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area of the RAM 203 to be backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1409 is performed when a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1401 to S1408 ends, or when one cycle of the processing of S1411 and S1412 performed within the remaining time ends. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control device 110, the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The processing can be started from the processing of S1401. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1401 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not stored, the stack pointer is not reset in the initialization process (S1301). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1401. Therefore, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1404) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1404). The jackpot control process (S1404) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 310). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and corresponding operations are performed. This is a process for opening or closing a winning opening (a specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or a V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the jackpot control process (FIG. 311, S1404), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S1501). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203d is set to ON by the process of S216 of the special symbol change process (see FIG. 298), it is determined that the special symbol big hit is started. In the process of S1501, when a special symbol big hit is started (S1501: Yes), an opening command is set (S1502). Then, the jackpot start flag 203d is set to off (S1503), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot has not been started in the processing of S1501 (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1504). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the big hit game. In the processing of S1504, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S1504: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1504 that the special symbol is being hit (S1504: Yes), the process of S1505 is executed. In the processing of S1505, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1505). If it is determined in the processing of S1505 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1505: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V) based on the opening scenario table 202f. The V winning port 650a of the winning device 650 is opened (S1506), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1507). After setting the number-of-rounds command, the process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When receiving the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated number of rounds is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continuous big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the big hit has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1505, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1505: No), the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is set. It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S1508). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650), or When a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1508, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1508: Yes), the corresponding winning is achieved. The mouth (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1508: No), the ending effect starts. It is determined whether it is the timing (S1510). The start timing of the ending effect is the start timing of the ending effect when the opening / closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round is completed, and the standby time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), which is the ball throwing time, has elapsed. Is determined.

  In the process of S1510, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1510: Yes), the ending command is set (S1511), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1510 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1510: No), it is determined whether the ending effect is the end timing in the process of S1510 (S1512). In the process of S1512, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1512: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S1512, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1512: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was the big hit C (S1513). In the process of S1513, when it is determined that it is not the big hit C (5R time savings no big hit) (S1513: No), 100 is set to the time saving medium time total counter 203c and 1 is set to the time saving medium time special 2 counter 203j (S1514). The process moves to the process of S1515. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1513 that the hit has been the big hit C (5R short time no big hit) (S1513: Yes), the processing of S1514 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S1515.

  In the processing of S1515, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S1515). Then, the end of the big hit is set (S1516), the big hit flag 203e is turned off (S1517), and this processing ends.

  Next, the small hit control process (S1405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 312 is a flowchart showing the small hit control process (S1405). The small hit control process (S1405) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 310), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol small hit state, execution of various effects according to the small hit and This is a process for opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650).

  In the small hit control process (FIG. 312, S1405), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1601). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203f is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 300) in step S404, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the processing of S1601, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1601: Yes), an opening command is set (S1602). Then, the small hit start flag 203f is set to off (S1603), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if the special symbol small hit is not started (S1601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol is a small hit (S1604). During the special symbol small hit, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol small hit (including a special symbol small hit game), and During the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol small hit game. In the processing of S1604, if it is not during the small win of the special symbol (S1604: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1604 that a small symbol is being hit (S1604: Yes), the processing of S1605 is executed. In the process of S1605, it is determined whether or not it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1605). In the processing of S1605, when it is determined that it is the V winning opening opening timing (S1605: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202f (step S1605: Yes). In S1606, it is determined whether this time is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1607).

  In the processing of S1607, if it is determined that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1607: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the V flag 203i is set on (S1608). If it is determined that there is no (off) (S1608: No), an instruction command for notifying the outside that no V prize has been won even though a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the small hitting game. Is set (S1609), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1607 that this time is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S1607: No), or if it is determined that the V flag 203i is set to ON in the processing of S1608 (S1608) : Yes), this process ends as it is. The instruction command set in the process of S1609 is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1401) of the main process (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the instruction command, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display instruction command to the display control device 114. When the display instruction command is received by the display control device 114, the guide highlighting for emphasizing the guide display for the right-handed game in the third symbol display device 81 is executed until the V switch 650e3 detects the ball. .

  On the other hand, if it is not the V winning opening opening timing in the process of S1605 (S1605: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1610). Specifically, when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small hit game ends, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, a total of 10 balls) are won in the V winning device 650, the closing condition is satisfied. Is determined.

  In the process of S1610, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S1610: Yes), the corresponding winning opening (V winning of the V winning device 650) is determined. The mouth 650a) is closed (S1611), and this process ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the corresponding winning opening (the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S1610: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1612). In the process of S1612, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1612: Yes), the ending command is set (S1613), and the process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S1401) of the main processing (see FIG. 310) executed by the MPU 201, in the sound ramp control. It is transmitted to the device 113. When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits an ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1612 that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1612: No), it is determined in the process of S1614 whether the ending effect is the end timing (S1614). In the process of S1614, when it is determined that the timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (S1614: No), the process ends.

  In the process of S1614, when it is determined that the ending effect is the end timing (S1614: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 223i is set to ON (S1615), and when it is determined that the V flag 223i is set to ON. (S1615: Yes), sets an open scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 223i, sets the jackpot start flag 203d and the jackpot medium flag 203e on (S1617), and sets the V flag 223i off. Then, the V passing flag 203k is set to off (S1619), the small hitting flag 203g is set to off (S1620), and the process ends.

<Control Process Executed by Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in Ninth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 313 to 327, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a start-up process started when the power is turned on, and a main process executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 313, a start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing the start-up processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S2061). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current start-up processing is caused by an instantaneous voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (S2118 in FIG. 314). It is determined whether or not the process is started during the execution of (S2061). As described later with reference to FIG. 314, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (S2115 in FIG. 314: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process in S2118. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S2062 is being performed can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S2062: No), this startup processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure, and the power-off processing in S2118 is performed. It is started after the execution of the process is completed, or started only by resetting the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2063).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, the data is not destroyed in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data is destroyed in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  If the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the storage in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off. ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the flow shifts to S1404. On the other hand, this startup process is started after a momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed, or is reset only to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so that the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the flow shifts to S1408.

  If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), this startup processing is performed after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power-off processing in S1516, the audio lamp control device 113 Of the MPU 221 has been reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being performed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, since control cannot be continued, the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and read out for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "55h", "0AAh", and "00h" after "0FFh". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written to the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1406). By confirming the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality of the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound may be output by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. It may be.

  In the processing of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process is performed in S1516 (see S1515 in FIG. 338). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1516 is executed, the process starting at S1408 with the power-off flag turned on is that the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after the occurrence of the power failure and in a state where the execution of the power-off process in S1516 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound ramp control device 113 (S1409), and after the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), the interruption is performed. The permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of step S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of steps S1404 to S1406 is executed and the process of S1408 is started. This is the case where the processing has been reached or the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 has been reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like and started. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1410), and interruption permission is set. Then (S1411), and shifts to the main processing.

  It should be noted that the reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S1404 to the process of S1408 via the process of S1406, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404. When the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, thereby saving the sound lamp control device 113. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of the main processing or the current processing of S2101 (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes in S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is determined mainly in S2102 to S2112, which are processes related to display (effect), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S2113, and the variable display setting process of S2114 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of a command transmitted from main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, a command received by the command determination processing can be prevented. Based on the above, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay.

  If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and thereafter, the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification processing is to provide notification that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be In addition, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without performing notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S2105, a customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, a held number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 has not been played by the player for a predetermined period of time, a setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors input of whether or not frame buttons 22 and 23 (hereinafter, referred to as frame buttons 22) operated by the player to enhance the effect of the production are monitored. This is a process for setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of No. 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114. The details of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process is completed, a lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S2109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management processing, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing in S2109 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S2110), various counter update processes (S2111) are executed. The various counter updating process is a process for updating the values of a plurality of counters of the effect counter 223f provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter is updated every millisecond in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. Here, a method of updating a plurality of counters included in the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set, the value of a plurality of counters is referred to. In such a configuration, for example, a configuration in which the values of all the counters are updated by one every time the various counter updating process (S2111) is executed, that is, if the updating method of each counter is unified, the updating of each counter is performed. Since the condition is synchronized and it becomes impossible to give a random effect to the effect mode to be set, the updated values of the counters are not synchronized.

  After finishing the various counter updating process (S2111), next, the effect updating process (S2112) is executed. The effect update process (S2112) is for performing a process for changing the content of the effect currently being executed (variable display that is already set) during the effect execution. Details of the effect update processing (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the effect update process (S2112), a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, a variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute the variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process (S2114) is completed, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2117), and the power-off processing is executed (S2118). After the execution of the power-off processing, the power-off processing-in-progress flag is turned off (S2119), and thereafter, the processing is in an infinite loop. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information of the occurrence of the power interruption is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the processing of S2115 (S2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2116: No), the process returns to S2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S2116: Yes), the processing is executed in an infinite loop to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main processing is not executed, and thereafter the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, the player can call a clerk of the hall or the like and request a repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM breakdown.

  Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . In addition, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, the start of the score effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

  In the command determination processing (FIG. 315, S2113), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and analyzed. It is determined whether a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When the variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2202), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2203). Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a later-described variation display setting process (see FIG. 320) is executed. It is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is next determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2204). If the stop type command is received (S2204: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2205), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 320) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), then it is determined whether or not a pending ball count command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2207). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2207: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main controller 110 (special) The number of times N1) of the variable display in the symbol is retained is extracted and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2208). In the process of S2208, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. After the end of the process in S2208, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the special figure 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning) or when a special symbol is drawn. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is set to the special value of the main control device 110 by the process of S2208. It can be adjusted to the value of the symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning is detected. During the lottery of the special symbol or the special symbol, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. When the process of S2208 is executed, a display reserved ball count command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223b is set. As a result, the display control device 114 displays the number-of-reserved-balls symbol corresponding to the number of retained balls on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S2207, when the command of the number of pending balls has not been received (S2207: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2209: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2210), and the winning information related processing is executed (S2211). ).

  Here, the content of the winning information-related processing (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information-related processing (S2211). This winning information related processing (S2211) is for determining whether or not to execute a score effect based on the winning information (variation type) included in the winning information command received this time and the current game situation. Is performed.

  When the prize information-related processing (S2211) is executed, first, the information of the received prize information command is stored in the corresponding prize information storage area 223a (S2301), and the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b is read (S2301). S2302). Then, it is determined whether the value read in the process of S2302 is 2 or more (S2303). When it is determined that the value is 2 or more (S2303: Yes), the effect inhibition flag 223j is set to ON. Is determined (S2304). In the process of S2304, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2305, and whether or not to execute the score effect is performed. Is determined.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2303 described above, if it is determined that the read counter value is less than 2 (S2303: No), or if it is determined that the effect inhibition flag 223j is set to ON in the process of S2304 ( (S2304: Yes) skips the process of determining whether or not to execute a score effect, and proceeds to the process of S2314 described later.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the winning information-related processing (S2211), a score effect can be executed only when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is a predetermined number (two) or more. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the score effect over a predetermined number (two or more) of variable displays, and thus it is possible to enhance the effect.

  In addition, when the effect inhibition flag 223j is set to ON, that is, when a score effect is already being executed, a new score effect is configured not to be set. Up to the player.

  Next, a process for setting a score effect (S2305 to S2313) will be described. In the process of S2305, the first score effect selection table 222b is read (S2305). Next, by using the variation type included in the winning information command received this time, the current number of pending balls, and the value of the acquired effect lottery counter 223f1, the first effect effect selection table 222b is referred to, and the execution of the score effect is executed. The presence / absence of the score effect is determined (S2306), and it is determined whether or not to execute the score effect (S2307).

  In the process of S2307, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S2307: Yes), the effect type flag 223n is updated according to the effect type (score effect A to C) selected in the process of S2306 (S2308). A total awarded score setting process for setting a score to be awarded in the current score effect is executed (S2309). Here, the content of the total awarded score setting process (S2309) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the contents of the total awarded score setting process (S2309).

  When the total awarded score setting process is executed, first, the total awarded score selection table 222d is read (S2401), and the variation type included in the prize information command received this time, the current number of pending balls, and the effect type flag 223n Using the effect types (score effects A to C) indicated by and the value of the obtained score distribution effect counter (not shown), an award score is selected with reference to the total award score selection table 222d (S2402). ). Then, the selected awarded score is stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o (S2403), and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of scores (upper limit) to be given in the current score effect is determined in advance, and each variable display executed during the score effect is displayed. When setting, the number of points to be displayed is determined so that the total number of determined points is the upper limit, and the effect contents of each variable display are set. With this configuration, only the final display mode of the score effect (the final display score) is determined in advance, and the score displayed in each variable display can be set for each variable display. An effect mode executed during the effect can be made more diverse.

  The method of setting the number of scores displayed during the score effect is not limited to the above-described content. For example, when it is determined that the score effect is to be performed, the total number of points to be given in the current score effect ( The upper limit value) and the number of points to be displayed in each of the variable displays executed during the point presentation may be determined in advance. Similarly to the above-described embodiment, only the total number (upper limit value) of the scores to be given in the current score effect is determined in advance, and among a plurality of variable displays executed during the score effect, other than the last variable display. In the variable display, the number of points to be given is determined irrespective of the total number of set points (upper limit value), and when the last variable display is set, the total number of displayed points is determined by the predetermined total number of points ( The upper limit may be increased or decreased.

  Returning to FIG. When the continuous notice giving score setting process (S2309) is completed, the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b is read (S2310), the read counter value is set as the value of the effect variation counter 223m (S2311), and the current reading is performed. The notice target information is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the winning information command (S2312), the effect prohibition flag 223j is turned on (S2313), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2303, when it is determined that the read counter value (the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b) is less than 2 (S2303), the effect inhibition flag 223j is set to ON in the process of S2304. If it is determined that there is no score effect (S2304: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the score effect is not to be executed (S2307: No), the process proceeds to S2314, which is included in the winning information command received this time. It is determined whether the variation type is the super reach or more (super reach or special reach) (S2314).

  In the process of S2314, when it is determined that it is the super reach or more (S2314: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S2310, the processes of S2310 to S2313 are executed, and the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not equal to or higher than the super reach (S2314: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the process of S2314 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the limiting condition (the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the setting status of the effect prohibition flag 223j) for restricting the setting of the score effect is provided. Further, even when the restriction condition is not satisfied, the result of referring to the first score effect selection table 222b may result in the determination that the score effect is not to be executed. In such a case, if the variation type included in the received prize information command is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (80 seconds or more), the prize information corresponding to the long variation in which the score effect is not executed is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area. Will be stored.

  In such a state, when the next prize information command is received and the score effect is set based on the prize information included in the received prize information command, a predetermined effect is performed during the execution of the set score effect. There is a problem that the fluctuation display is performed for a period or more (80 seconds or more), and the score effect is prolonged. In addition, for example, when the winning information for which no score effect is set includes a variation type per super reach a, a large hit occurs during the execution of the score effect, and the effect of the score effect is reduced. There was a problem of letting them do.

  With respect to such a problem, in the present embodiment, even if the prize information does not set a scoring effect, the value of the effect change number counter 223m is changed when a predetermined condition (the change type is super reach or more) is satisfied. The processing is performed to set the effect prohibition flag 223j to ON, and while the prize information satisfying the predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or more) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Is configured so that no scoring effect is newly set. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of the score effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation type is a normal reach, that is, a large hit with a short variation time, the setting of the score effect is not prohibited. With this configuration, a jackpot can be generated while the score effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to the player.

  Returning to FIG. 315, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2209, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2209: No), it is next determined whether or not a winning-related command has been received (S2212), and it has been determined that a winning-related command has been received. If it is determined (S2212: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2213), and this process ends. The hit-related processing (S2213) is for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the big hit game or the small hit game which is executed when the big hit or the small hit is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. The processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 when a big hit or a small hit is won is executed.

  Here, the content of the hit-related processing (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the content of the hit-related processing. When the hit-related processing (S2213) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit start command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S2501: Yes), a display jackpot start command is set (S2502), and this processing ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When receiving the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 displays an effect indicating the start of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2501: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that the round number command has been received (S2503: Yes), the display round number command is set based on the round number (S2504), and this processing ends. In the present embodiment, since the information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main control device 110 as the number of rounds command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, when the main control device 110 is configured to transmit information indicating that a new round has been started as a round update command, the audio ramp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the RAM 113, a round number accumulation counter for accumulating the number of received round update commands is provided, and the sound lamp control device 113 side determines the current round based on the value of the round number accumulation counter. Calculate the number and configure the display round number command Good.

  In the process of S2503, when it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2503: No), it is determined whether a jackpot end command has been received next (S2505). In the process of S2505, when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2505: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S2506), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2505, when it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received (S2505: No), it is determined whether a small hit start command has been received (S2507).

  In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S2507: Yes), a small hit start command for display is set based on the small hit type (S2507), and this process ends.

  In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S2507: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S2509). If it is determined in the processing of S2509 that the small hit end command has been received (S2509: Yes), a small hit end command for display is set to execute an effect indicating the end of the small hit game (S2510). This processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2509, when it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2509: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2511). If it is determined in the processing of S2511 that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2511: Yes), the display V entrance passage command is set (S2512), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of S2511 that a V-entrance passage command has not been received (S2511: No), it is determined whether a V-pass command has been received next (S2513).

  In the process of S2513, when it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2513: Yes), a display V effect command for indicating an effect based on a ball entry to the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is set (S2513: Yes). S2514), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2513 that a V-pass command has not been received (S2513: No), it is next determined whether or not an instruction command has been received (S2515). If it is determined in the processing of S2515 that the instruction command has been received (S2515; Yes), the display instruction command is set (S2516), and this processing ends. If it is determined that the instruction command has not been received (S2515: No), the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, a small hitting game in which the opening / closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened 12 times during the small hitting game is executed, and the V switch 650e3 is opened at the fifth or tenth opening timing. Is configured to output an instruction command when no ball is detected (see S1609 in FIG. 312). If it is determined that the instruction command has been received, the third symbol display device 81 displays an enhanced guidance display mode (see FIG. 277 (a)) that emphasizes and guides the V winning device 650 to win a ball. Set a display instruction command to cause the display.

  Then, when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball in a state where the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed, as shown in FIG. 277 (b), display achievement for displaying the achievement display mode for congratulating the player. Set the command. That is, in the present embodiment, if the small hitting game is executed and the opening operation of the V winning device 650 is executed, the ball is surely won by the right winning game to the V winning device 650 by performing the right-handed game. Also, the ball that has won the V prize device 650 during the small hit game flows down to the special discharge channel 650e2 provided with the V switch 650e3. In spite of this configuration, if the V switch 650e3 determines that the ball has not been detected at the fifth opening timing of the opening / closing door 650f1, the third symbol is displayed when the small hitting game is started. The left-handed game is executed without noticing the right-handed guidance display in the guidance display area Dm2 (see FIG. 268 (b)) of the display device 81. Alternatively, the game may be stopped.

  In such a case, by changing the display for guiding right-handing displayed in the guidance display area Dm2 to a more emphasized display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform a right-handed game. Further, as a timing for displaying the emphasized guidance display mode (see FIG. 277 (a)), when a right-handed game is performed after the emphasized guidance display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the right-handed game is performed. The timing at which the shot ball reaches the V winning device 650 during the small hit game is set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player who has executed the right-handed game in accordance with the display of the emphasized guidance display mode cannot make the ball flow down to the special discharge channel 650e2 during the small hit game.

  Returning to FIG. 315, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S2212 that no hit-related command has been received (S2212: No), it is next determined whether a stop command has been received (S2214). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2214: Yes), a stop command process is executed (S2215), a stop display of the third symbol is set (S2216), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S2214: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S2217), and this processing ends.

  Here, the contents of the stop command processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command processing. This stop command process is to execute various processes at the stop timing of the special symbol when a stop command is received from the main control device 110. When the score effect is to be ended, a process for determining whether or not to execute a new score effect is executed.

  When the stop command processing (S2215) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2601). When it is determined in the processing of S2601 that the score effect is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2601: No), that is, the score effect is not being executed at the present time, or it is not the final variation of the score effect. In this case, the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect prohibition cancel flag 223k is set to ON (S2601: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223j and the effect prohibition cancel flag 223k are set to OFF (S2602), and then the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value of the ball counter 223b is read (S2603), and it is determined whether the read counter value is 2 or more (S2604). In the processing of S2604, when it is determined that the counter value is 2 or more (S2604: Yes), the winning information is read from the winning information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter of 2 or more (S2605). Then, the second score effect selection table 222c is read (S2606), and it is determined whether or not the score effect corresponding to the target variation type can be executed (S2607).

  Then, the determination result of S2607 is determined (S2608), and when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S2608: Yes), the effect type flag 223n is updated according to the effect type to be executed (score effects A to C) ( S2609), and executes the same total awarded score setting processing (S2610 (S2309)) as the above-described winning information related processing (FIG. 316). Here, description of the details of the total awarded score setting process (see FIG. 317) is omitted.

  After finishing the total awarded score setting process (S2610 (S2309)), the value of the target special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is read out (S2611), and the read out counter value is set as the value of the effect fluctuation counter 223m. Then, the effect target information is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the target winning command (S2613), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2604, when it is determined that the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is less than 2 (S2604: No), in the process of S2608, it is determined that the score effect is not to be executed (S2608). : No), the flow shifts to the process of S2615, and it is determined whether or not the winning information including the fluctuation type equal to or higher than the super reach is stored (S2615). If it is determined in the processing of S2615 that there is winning information including a fluctuation type equal to or greater than the super reach (S2615), the processing of S2611 to S2614 described above is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information including the fluctuation type equal to or higher than the super reach is not stored (S2615: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S2114). The variable display setting process (S2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2701). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2701: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to S2707. I do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the change start flag 223d is on (S2701: Yes), the change start flag 223d is set to off (S2702), and then, in the process of S2203 of the command determination process (see FIG. 315), The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S2703).

  Then, an effect setting process for setting an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the obtained fluctuation pattern type (S2704), and thereafter, a display change for notifying the display control device 114 is performed. A pattern command is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type and the score effect mode set in the effect setting process, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2705). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the variable effect is started. When the processing in S2705 is completed, the data in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2706), and the flow shifts to the processing in S2707.

  Here, the contents of the effect setting process (S2704) executed in the process of S2704 will be described with reference to FIGS. 321 and 322. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process (S2704), and FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) executed in the effect setting process (S2704). is there. This effect setting process (S2704) is the present variable display setting process (see FIG. 316) when a score effect is set in the winning information-related process (see S2211 in FIG. 316) or the stop command process (see S2215 in FIG. 319). This is a process for setting the score effect (given score) of the fluctuation pattern set in S2114 of 320).

  When the effect setting process (S2704) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect change number counter 223m is larger than 0, that is, whether the score effect is being executed (S2801). If it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect type is set to the score effect in the effect type flag 223n (S2802). In the process of S2802, when it is determined that the effect type is set (S2802: Yes), a score giving effect setting process is executed (S2803), and this process ends. The contents of the score giving effect setting process (S2803) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the processing of S2802, when it is determined that the effect type is not set in the effect type flag 223n (S2802: No), that is, in the winning information related process (S2211 in FIG. 316), a new score effect is set without setting a score effect. If a period for prohibiting the setting of a scoring effect is provided (S2314: if the process of Yes is executed), the score providing effect setting process (S2803) is skipped, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation counter 223m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S2801: No), a fluctuation pattern in a mode not accompanied by a score effect is determined (S2804). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2805). If it is determined in the process of S2805 that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2805: Yes), that is, if it is the timing to set the variable display after the score effect is completed, the effect prohibition release flag 223k is set to ON (S2806), the value of the awarded score counter 223p is cleared (S2087), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to off (S2805: No), the processing of S2806 and S2807 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the contents of the score-giving effect setting process (S2803) executed in the effect setting process (S2704 in FIG. 321) will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score giving effect setting process. In the score giving effect setting process (S2803), the score effect is executed with the maximum score set when the score effect is determined to be performed as the upper limit, for the score given to each variable display during the score effect. A process to be set according to the number of remaining fluctuations is performed.

  When the score giving effect setting process (S2803) is executed, first, the value of the giving score counter 223p, that is, the number of scores already given (displayed) in the current score effect is read (S2901), and then the total giving is performed. The value stored in the score storage area 223o, that is, the total number of points to be given in the current score effect is read (S2902). Then, the difference between the value of the total score storage area 223o and the value of the score counter 223p is calculated (S2903), and the remaining score that can be given in the current score effect is calculated.

  After finishing the processing of S2903, it is next determined whether the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2904), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 (S2904: No), that is, the current variation is scored. If it is determined that the final variation is not the final variation, the assigned score selection table 222e is calculated using the calculated difference and the value of the effect variation counter 223m so that all remaining scores are not provided (displayed) in the current variation display. , A score to be given in the current variation display is selected (S2905), and a variation pattern with a score effect corresponding to the selected score (given score) is determined (S2906).

  Then, the awarded score selected this time is added to the value of the awarded score counter 223p (S2907), the value of the effect variation counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S2908), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2904, when it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2904: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the current variation display is the final variation of the score effect, the process proceeds to S2903. In order to display all the differences calculated in the processing, a variation pattern accompanied by a score effect in a mode corresponding to the calculated difference is determined (S2909), and the value corresponding to the calculated difference is added to the value of the assigned score counter (S2909). S2910).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern determined this time includes an operation score effect in which a score is displayed by operating the frame button 22 by the player (S2911), and it is determined that the operation score effect is included. In this case (S2911: Yes), the operation score execution flag 223q is set to ON (S2912), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation score effect is not included in the process of S2911, the process of S2912 is skipped and the present process ends.

  By using the score providing effect setting process (S2803) configured as described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, only the total score to be given during the current score effect is obtained and the prize information targeted for the score effect is obtained. By simply setting in advance, various score effects can be executed for each of the variable displays executed until the variable display corresponding to the target winning information is executed. Further, even if various scores are given (displayed) by the variable display performed until the variable display corresponding to the target prize information is performed, the change corresponding to the target prize information is performed. In the display (variation display that is the final variation of the score effect), the difference obtained by subtracting the score already displayed (given) from the total score given in the score effect of the crying can be displayed. The result of the score effect can be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the lottery result of the winning information, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 314) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing (S2107), processing for displaying an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 at each timing on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In addition, when the operation score effect is set in the score effect, the assigned score monitoring process is performed when the score to be assigned (displayed) based on the operation content of the frame button 22 is changed. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the total number of points to be given in the current score effect is determined, and each time the variable display during the score effect is performed, the display is performed. An effect (score effect) corresponding to each variable display is executed while determining a score to be performed. Then, when the operation score effect is selected as the score effect, the score that can be given in the operation score effect, that is, the score that is given when the frame button 22 is appropriately operated when the operation score effect is executed. Is set as the score to be displayed in the current fluctuation display, so that the number of remaining scores that can be displayed during the score effect is managed.

  Therefore, when the player participates in the operation score effect and obtains a score, there is no inconsistency between the management content of the remaining score and the score actually displayed (acquired by the player). On the other hand, if the player does not participate in the operation score effect, a contradiction occurs between the management content of the remaining score and the score actually displayed (acquired by the player). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the player has appropriately operated the frame button 22 during the operation score effect, and the score to be displayed is determined based on the determination result. Is configured to execute a process of correcting the management content of the remaining score based on.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3001). If it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S301: No), This processing ends. If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3001: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the current timing (the timing at which the frame button 22 was pressed) is during the scoring operation effect period (S3002). Here, the determination is performed based on the variable time information that is constantly managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 314).

  In the process of S3002, if it is determined that the current time is during the scoring operation effect period, the operated flag 223r is set to ON (S3003), and a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S3004). The process ends. Here, when the operated flag 223r is not set to ON, in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 314), the process of changing the effect of the effect of the variable display being executed is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3002 that the current time is not the scoring operation effect period (S3002: No), the frame is determined based on the time information managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 314). It is determined whether the timing at which the button 22 was operated is any of the operation valid periods for validating the operation of the frame button 22 (S3005). If it is determined that the operation period is valid (S3005: Yes), the determination is made. A display press command corresponding to the performed operation valid period is set (S3004), and when it is determined that the operation is not the operation valid period (S3006: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

  Next, the contents of the effect update processing (S2112) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 314) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process (S2112). In the effect update process (S2112), in the operation score effect performed during the score effect, the content of the variation pattern that has already been set is changed based on whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22. The processing is executed.

  When the effect update processing (S2112) is executed, first. It is determined whether or not the operation score execution flag 223q is set to ON (S3101), and if it is determined that the operation score execution flag 223q is not set to ON (S3101: No), the present process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the operation has been turned on (S3101: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is the end timing of the operation score effect (S3102). Here, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the end timing of the operation score effect based on the time information managed in the liquid crystal effect execution management process (see S2110 in FIG. 314).

  In the process of S3102, if it is determined that the timing is not the end timing (S3102: No), the present process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that the timing is the end timing (S3102: Yes), the operation completion flag 223r is set. It is determined whether it is on (S3103), and if it is not on (it is off) (S3103: No), the process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined on, (S3103: Yes) That is, when it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been operated despite reaching the end timing of the operation score effect, the score given in the operation score effect is extracted (S3104), The score is subtracted from the value of the assigned score counter 223p (S3105), and it is determined whether or not the current value of the effect variation counter 223m is 0. S3106).

  In the processing of S3106, when it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation counter 223m is not 0 (S3106: No), that is, when it is determined that the present is not the final fluctuation of the score effect, the present processing is terminated as it is. . In this case, when the next variation display is set, the score effect is set based on the value of the awarded score counter 223p subtracted in the process of S3105, so that whether or not the frame button 22 is operated in the operation score effect is determined. The remaining score effects can be executed in correspondence.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3106, when it is determined that the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 0 (S3106: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the score effect is in the final variation of the score effect, the process is being executed. In order to correct the score given during the remaining period of the variable display, effect correction processing is executed (S3107), and this processing ends.

  Here, the contents of the effect correction process (S3107) executed in the effect update process (S2112 in FIG. 324) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect correction processing (S3107). In the effect correction process (S3107), when there is no operation on the frame button 22 for the operation score effect, a score that is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (not given to the player) is executed later. In this case, a correction process for finally giving the result to the player is performed by changing the effect mode.

  In the present embodiment, the score to be given in the remaining score effects is determined in advance on the assumption that the player operates the frame button 22 in the operation score effect and a score is given. With this configuration, when the frame button 22 is appropriately operated during the operation score effect, the predetermined score effect is executed as it is. Therefore, it is not necessary to set or change the contents of the effect during the execution of the score effect, and the processing load can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, since the player tends to operate the frame button 22 during the operation score effect, the display mode of the preset score effect is displayed (given) during the operation score effect. Although it is configured as a premise and configured to reduce the chance of changing the effect mode during the variable display, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode of the preset score effect is displayed during the operation score effect. May be set on the premise that they are not added. In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the operation score effect is being executed without being noticed by the player.

  Further, without setting the effect mode after the operation score effect in advance, it may be configured to set the effect mode based on the effect result of the operation score effect after the end of the operation score effect, or during the operation score effect. The operation result as to whether or not the player has operated the frame button 22 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, a period from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, or when the same player plays the game). Storage means for storing a period (a period during which identification information for identifying an individual is input), and a method of setting the effect mode is changed based on the operation result stored in the storage means. You may comprise.

  When the effect correction processing (S3107) is executed, first, the difference between the value of the awarded score counter 223p after subtraction and the value stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o is calculated (S3201), and the remaining effects Calculate the points to be awarded in the period. Next, it is determined whether the period in which the operation score effect is executed is the first notice period (see FIG. 269) (S3202).

  If it is determined in the process of S3202 that the current time is the first notice period (S3202: Yes), the effect corresponding to the calculated difference is set as the rewrite effect of the second notice period (S3203), and the corresponding rewrite effect is set. A rewrite effect command for display to be performed is set (S3204), and other execution management processing is executed (S3205), and this processing ends. With this configuration, when a score giving effect in which the operation score effect is executed during the first notice period is set, the operation score effect is executed during the second notice period set after the first notice period. By changing the effect mode of the effect performed in the certain score giving effect, it is possible to add the score that is not displayed (given) during the operation score effect.

  Thereby, a score equivalent to a score set in advance during the notice period (scores displayed in the first notice period and the second notice period) can be displayed during the notice period, so that the player If the user operates the frame button 22 in the operation score effect, the reach effect can be executed while expecting that more points can be obtained, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  Here, as the rewriting effect during the second notice period, there is an effect in which only the number of points to be awarded using the same effect mode is varied, and an effect in which the effect mode to be executed is varied. What is necessary is just to set suitably according to the score which was not displayed by the effect (the difference score calculated in the process of S3201), or the length of the 2nd notice period.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3202, when it is determined that the present time is not the second notice period (S3202: No), the present mode is not the notice period in the variable display, but the effect mode during the reach period in which the reach effect is executed is varied. Is performed (S3206), and this process ends.

  Next, the contents of the reach mode correction processing (S3206) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reach mode correction processing (S3206). In the reach mode correction process (S3206), a process for setting the reach mode to be executed based on the lottery result of the variable display and the current gauge amount is performed.

  When the reach mode correction process (S3206) is executed, first, the current gauge amount is calculated based on the value of the total awarded score storage area 223o (S3301). Is determined (S3302). If it is determined that the fluctuation is a hit (S3302: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gauge amount is less than 3 (S3303), and if it is less than 3 (S3303: Yes), The first reach effect is set as a rewrite mode with a score effect in which the gauge amount is 5 as the first reach period mode (S3304), and the mission reach is set as a rewrite reach mode in the second reach period (S3305). Then, various display rewriting effect commands are set (S3306), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3303, if it is determined that the current gauge amount is not less than 3 (it is 3 or more) (S3303: No), it is determined whether the current gauge amount is 1 or more (S3307). If it is determined that it is 1 or more (S3307: Yes), a rewrite first reach effect of a mode involving a score effect with a gauge amount of 6 is set as the first reach period mode (S3308), and the process of S3306 is performed. Move to. In the process of S3307, if it is determined that it is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S3307: No), a special reach effect corresponding to the reach period obtained by adding the first reach period and the second reach period is set ( S3309), the process proceeds to S3306, and this process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3302 that the current fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation (a deviation fluctuation), a deviation correction processing (S3310) is executed, and this processing ends. The out-of-office correction process (S3310) is a process for setting a reach effect for preventing the player from having useless expectation of a jackpot when the winning result is out of order. A process for correcting the gauge amount to be performed and the effect mode of the reach effect is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 327, the details of the deviation correction processing (S3310) will be described. FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing the content of the deviation correction processing (S3310). When the deviation correction processing (S3310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gauge amount is less than 3 (S3401), and if it is less than 3 (S3401: Yes), this processing is performed as it is. To end. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 3 or more, the first reach period is set as a rewrite first reach effect of a mode involving a score giving effect in which the gauge amount is in the range of 0 to 2 as the mode of the first reach period (S3402). As the reach mode of the second reach period, the mission reach is set (S3403), various rewrite effect commands for display are set (S3404), and the process ends.

<Control processing executed by display control device in first control processing example>
Next, each control performed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interruption processing that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a one-frame worth of processing performed by the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process or a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command or detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed simultaneously, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thus, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main processing is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the power is supplied to the display control device 114 from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” by the hardware configuration, and , An address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is “0000H”, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting the execution of the processing corresponding to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a great deal of time is required from the reading to the setting to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time required to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first to be processed by the MPU 231 of the boot program after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM can operate at high speed. Since the memory is a memory from which data can be read, when the address “0000H” is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after specifying the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, a boot process executed by a boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is configured to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start

  Here, the boot process (S4001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S4001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine but stored in the third symbol display device 81. The image data to be displayed is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of components in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure rate due to the increase in the number of components can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is particularly low when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even when a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by the DRAM. The processing of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, after the system reset is released, the second program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. Of the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches the instruction, but reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a high-speed read operation is performed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute a process for the instruction.

  After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S4102, the instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not yet transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. The data is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 328). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization processing to be performed (see S4002 in FIG. 328) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot processing ends.

  By executing the boot process (S4001) in this manner, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The data is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. And execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high readout speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR-type ROM 234d having a very small capacity. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. Can be.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 329, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although the configuration is not limited to this, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S4102. It may be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and furthermore, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is changed to the instruction pointer. 231a may be executed. Then, the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  The boot program transferred by the process of S4101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the beginning. A process for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently transfers the part to the program storage area 233a. The processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S4101. After repeating a plurality of times including the process of S4102 and S4102, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. By using the boot program, the data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released from the boot program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started more quickly.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and an initial value is set for each flag. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after performing the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, first, an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thus, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information of the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main power of the resident video RAM 235 by the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving the transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. You may write it. The MPU 231 reads out the information in the register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects that the image controller 237 has written the transfer end information, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You may do so.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S4003, then the power-on fluctuation image Is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to the image data is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S4004). The transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). And the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller responds to this transfer instruction and transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  Upon completion of the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b based on the transmission instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S4004, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S4005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 343 (a)) described later, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to perform the transfer is executed (see S6302 in FIG. 343 (a)).

  Also, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It is kept on until it ends. Thereby, in the meantime, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 330 (b)), the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown) which are the power-on images are drawn in a simple manner. Command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 330B) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 330B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third video RAM 235. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall operates at the time of turning on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Accordingly, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some sort of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power-on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying that the operation has not stopped.

  Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 can be started without any problem by turning on the power. Can be immediately confirmed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on, the power-on main image is displayed in the third symbol. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball in the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the main controller 110 issues a voice lamp control instruction to start a variable effect. In the case where the change pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when a display change pattern command is received, a power-on change image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the change effect period to perform a simple change effect. be able to. Therefore, even when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple variable effect.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, so that the transfer takes a long time, and therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed at the time of power-on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing in S4005, interruption permission is set (S4006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interruption permission is set by the processing of S4006, the command interruption processing and the V interruption processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interruption signal.

  Next, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 330A is a flowchart showing the command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interruption process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are read out by a command determination processing or a simple command determination processing of a V interrupt processing described later, and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 330 (b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 330 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 296) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of the V interrupt processing is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal generated every 20 milliseconds in the image controller 237 when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed, and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the image drawing processing or the display processing is not completed, so that a new image drawing is started during the image drawing, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in accordance with a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then, details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 330 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S4302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S4303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S4302), the contents of the command from the audio ramp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the display data table for demonstration or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds during which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main controller 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variable effect and the type of stop selected by the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 are quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302) and the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. Specify the contents of In addition, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with a processing situation or the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is executed (S4304). In this task process, the image is formed based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S4303) or the simple display setting process (S4309). The type of sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 is also provided with a scoring A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S4306). In this drawing processing, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting processing (S4305) are used. 296 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, an update process of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hits A to D, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and rear out, reach out, complete out, chance ) Is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 34) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed. Move on to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 331 to 339, details of the above-described command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 331 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 331, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S4401: No), The command determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S4402). The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S4403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S4405), and returns to the process of S4401.

  Here, the variation pattern command processing (S4405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 (a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read. It is set in the buffer 233d (S4501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the fluctuation in the main controller 110 is always made at least several seconds apart, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, part of the command changes due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is incorrectly displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is provided. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, and there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, in practice, the fluctuation display data table longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is finished, the main control device 110 Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the fluctuations of the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S4503), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S4504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S4505), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S4504, the processing of the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501 is performed. , Extract the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, specify the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, execute the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S4502. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the variable ROM display data table, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 from the normal video R. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect specified in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S4503, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S4406). If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S4407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 332 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of jackpot A, jackpot B, reach out of front and rear, reach other than front and back out, reach out completely, out of chance) indicated by the stop type command for display Is determined (S4601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 330 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is determined. The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S4602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S4603), terminates the stop type command processing, and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S4603, and the specified stop is determined. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information obtained by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, but before the drawing is performed on the third symbol display device 81, the normal ROM is read from the character ROM 234. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness of drawing in the third symbol display device 81.

  Since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the change at least several seconds apart, the main control device 110 does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise or the like, and another command is erroneously stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of step S4601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the stop type is assumed to be completely out of order and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to complete departure is set by the processing of S4602.

  If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if it is actually "missing the special symbol". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, and the player misunderstands that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol big hit", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete departure as in the present embodiment, in fact, if the “special symbol jackpot” is reached, the stop of the complete departure is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Even if a symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "special symbol jackpot", so that the player can be pleased.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S4406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S4406: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among unprocessed commands (S4408). If there is an image change command (S4408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S4409), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 333 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command process executes a process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear image change command processing, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S4701). . Then, among the rear image determination flags provided for each of the rear image types (back A, B), the rear image determination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear image The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S4702), the back image change command process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting processing, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set in the processing of S4701 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image determination flag set in the processing of S4702. . When the specified rear image type is the rear surface B or the rear surface C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  In the task processing, if it is specified that either the back A or B is to be displayed according to the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S4702 is used. The type of the rear image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) which stores the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is specified. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for less than 20 milliseconds, the player does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds. In this case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the effects of noise or the like, and another command erroneously changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S4702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, one arbitrary back image change command may be extracted, and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S4408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S4410). If it is (S4410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S4411), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the error command processing (S4411) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 333 (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process executes a process corresponding to the error command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S4802). The process ends, and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S4801, the type of error generated from the error determination flag set in the process of S4802 is determined, and the corresponding error type is determined. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S4802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a person related to the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence state of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S4410: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4412). If it is (S4412: Yes), the hit related command processing is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 334 is a flowchart showing the hit-related command processing. The hit-related command process executes a process corresponding to the display opening command, the display round number command, and the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the hit-related command processing (FIG. 334, S4413), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display big hit start command (S4901). If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is a display hit start command (S4901: Yes), a big hit start command process is executed (S4902), and the flow shifts to the process of S4903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S4902) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing (S4902). The jackpot start command process (S4902) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 334) that there is a jackpot start command for display. This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command process (S4902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5001). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the jackpot start display data table (S5003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5004), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5005). This processing ends.

    Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S4901: No), the process shifts to the process of S4903. When the processing of S4901 or S4902 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command (S4903). If it is determined in step S4903 that there is a display round number command, round number command processing is executed (S4904), and the flow advances to step S4905.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S4904) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 335 (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing (S4904). This round number command process (S4904) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit-related command process (FIG. 334) that the round number command for display has been received, and the number of rounds in the big hit game is updated. This is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the effect when the game is performed.

  In the round number command processing (S4904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5102), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the round number display data table (S5103). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5104), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5105), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4903 that there is no display round number command (S4903: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S4905. When the processing of S4903 or S4904 is completed, it is determined whether or not a display jackpot end command has been received (S4905). If it is determined in the processing of S4905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S4905: Yes), the jackpot end command processing is executed (S4906), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing (S4906) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 336 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot end command processing (S4906). The jackpot end command process (S4906) is a process executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (FIG. 334). This is a process for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S4906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5201). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5202), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table (S5203). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5204), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5205), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4905 that there is no display jackpot end command (S4905: No), the flow shifts to the processing of S4907. Upon completion of the processing in S4905 or S4906, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit start command for display (S4907). In the process of S4907, if it is determined that there is a small hit start command for display (S4907: Yes), the small hit start command process is executed (S4908), and the flow shifts to the process of S4909.

  Here, the small hit start command processing (S4908) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 336 (b). This small hit start command process (S4908) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 334) that the small hit start command has been received, and indicates the start of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit start command processing (S4908), first, a small hit start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5301). Next, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5302). Thereafter, the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table (S5303), the pointer 233f is initialized (S5304), and the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S5305). Then, the present process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. In the process of S4907, if it is determined that there is no small hit start command for display (S4907: No), the process proceeds to S4909. When the processing of S4907 or S4908 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit end command (S4909). If it is determined in the processing of S4909 that there is a small hit end command (S4909: Yes), the small hit end command processing is executed (S4910), and the flow shifts to the processing of S4911.

  Here, the details of the small hit end command processing (S4910) will be described with reference to FIG. The small hit end command process (S4910) is a process executed when it is determined in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 334) that the small hit end command has been received, and indicates the end of the small hit game. This is a process for displaying the effect to be performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hit end command processing (S4910), first, a small hit end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5401). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5402), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table (S5403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5404), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5405), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S4909 that there is no display small hit end command (S4909: No), the process shifts to the processing of S4911. When the processing of S4909 or S4910 is completed, it is determined whether or not there is a display V entrance passage command (S4911). If it is determined in the process of S4911 that there is a V entrance passage command (S4911: Yes), the V entrance passage command process is executed (S4912), and the flow shifts to the process of S4913.

  Here, the details of the V entrance pass command processing (S4912) will be described with reference to FIG. The V entrance passage command processing (S4912) is executed when it is determined in the hit-related command determination processing (see FIG. 334) that the V entrance passage command has been received. This is a process for displaying an effect indicating that a game ball has passed through the switch 650e3 on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V entrance passage command processing (S4912), first, a V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5501). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5502), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V entrance passage display data table (S5503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5504), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S5505), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 334, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S4911 that there is no display V entrance passage command (S4911: No), the flow shifts to step S4913. After the processing of S4911 or S4912, it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command (S4913). In the process of S4913, when it is determined that there is a V effect command (S4913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S4914), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4913 that there is no display V effect command (S4913: No), this process ends.

  Here, the details of the V effect command processing (S4914) will be described with reference to FIG. The V effect command process (S4914) is a process executed when it is determined that the V effect command has been received in the hit-related command determination process (see FIG. 334), and the probability that a jackpot game is given is high. This is a process for displaying an effect that suggests that this is the case on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the V effect command processing (S4914), first, a V effect display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5601). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5602), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the V effect display data table (S5603). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5604), the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5605), and the process ends.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S4412: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is a pressing command corresponding to the pressing of the frame button 22 among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a press command (S4414: Yes), press command processing is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the press command process (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 339 (a) is a flowchart showing the press command processing. The press command process executes a process corresponding to the press command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the press command processing (S4415), first, a press display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the pressed display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 331, the description will be continued. In the processing of S4414, when it is determined that there is no pressed command (S4414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a rewriting effect-related command among the unprocessed commands (S4416). If there is (S4416: Yes), rewrite effect-related command processing is executed (S4417), and the process returns to S4401.

  Here, the details of the rewrite effect-related command processing (S4417) will be described with reference to FIG. 339 (b). FIG. 339 (a) is a flowchart showing the rewriting effect-related command processing. This rewriting effect-related command process executes a process corresponding to the rewriting effect-related command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rewrite effect-related command processing (S4415), first, a rewrite effect-related display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S5702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the pressed display data table (S5703). Thereafter, the pointer 233f is initialized (S5704), the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), and the process ends.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the process of S4416, when it is determined that there is no rewriting effect-related command (S4416: No), a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S4418), and the process returns to S4401.

  In the processing of S4401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes) ), And execute the processing of S4402 to S4418 again. Until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, the processing of S4401 to S4418 is repeatedly executed. If it is determined in the processing of S4401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is performed. The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, a command necessary for displaying the power-on image (see FIG. 34), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display variation pattern command, from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type commands are extracted, and a variation pattern command process (see FIG. 332 (a)) and a stop type command process (see FIG. 332 (b)) corresponding to the respective commands are executed. With respect to this command, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 332 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S4501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S4502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, details of the above-described display setting processing (S4303), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 340, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6001). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S6001: No), In the previously executed command determination process, it is determined that the new command has not been processed, and the process of S6002 to S6004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the new command flag is set to off (S6002), and then S6003 to S6004. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S6003, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6003). If the error occurrence flag is on (S6003: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S6004).

  Here, the warning image setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all error determinations for which ON is set are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6101).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S6101, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6004) or in the process of S6003, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6003: No), the process proceeds to S6005.

  In S6005, a pointer update process is performed (S6005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to be set.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6201). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in principle such that it is incremented by one each time the V interrupt processing is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the value stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6201, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S6202). As a result, if it is End information (S6202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a display data table for demonstration (S6203), and if it is a display data table for demonstration (S6203: Yes), the display data table is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6205), and the process ends. Then, the process returns to the display setting process. Thus, in the display setting process, the drawing content can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6206), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Accordingly, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address immediately before the End information is described. Is always developed, so that the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6202, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6202: No), the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 340, the description will be continued. After the pointer updating process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer updating process is developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S6006 together with the previously expanded warning image and the like, and the display coordinate position for each sprite is specified. Various parameters required for drawing, such as a magnification, a magnification, and a rotation angle, are determined.

  Next, the value of the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6007), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6008). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6008: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the confirmed display flag is on. (S6009).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is OFF (S6009: No), the effect of the confirmed display has not yet been performed, and it is the timing to perform the effect of the confirmed display. First, the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S6010), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6011). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time in the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6013). Then, after setting the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the ON state (S6014), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6015), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

  Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the confirmed display data table, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Compared with the case where the display contents are changed by activating another program as in the related art, the program is not complicated and bloated, so that no great load is applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previously stopped symbol discrimination flag set in the process of S6015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. In the variable display data table, the change based on the data table is not changed. Until a predetermined time elapses from the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S4304), a stop symbol of the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set in S6015 until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and A third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stopped symbol. Thereby, the variable effect is started from the stop symbol in the preceding variable effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S6009, if the confirmed display flag is on (S6009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S6016). If the demonstration display flag is off (S6016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect, so the demonstration display data table is displayed in the display data table. The contents are set in the buffer 233d (S6017), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6018). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6020), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S6021), and the present process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. , The content of the drawing can be set.

  In the process of S6016, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S6016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect ends, and this means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process ends as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are performed by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process so that the demonstration effect is started again. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 330B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image at power-on ends, the fluctuation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time (FIG. (Not shown) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 343 and FIG. 344, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 343 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), since all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting is performed. The processing is executed (S6302), the transfer setting processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 343 (b).

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S6301, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6301: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. The data has been transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6303), the transfer setting process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6302), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 343 (b). FIG. 343 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6302).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S6401). If the transfer instruction has been transmitted (S6401: Yes) ) Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S6402). In the process of S6402, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6402 (S6402: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6402: Yes), the process proceeds to S6403. Also, as a result of the process of S6401, if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6401: No), the process proceeds to S6403.

  In the process of S6403, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6403). If there is an untransferred resident target image data (S6403: No), the process proceeds to S6403. A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the resident target image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6404), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer data described in the drawing list. The resident object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the transfer is performed here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the read image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores the image data in the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Then, the data is transferred to the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the processing in S6403, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S6403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6405), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. Thus, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 330 (b)), the command is not used in the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 330 (b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 330 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 331 to 339) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 340 to 342) are performed, the drawing of the image in the normal state is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 344) (see S6301: No in FIG. 343 (a)).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all the resident operations to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 during power-on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. Can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. After the display is determined by, for example, the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed at an arbitrary timing by the player can be performed. In addition, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, a normal image transfer setting process (S6303), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting processing (S6303).

  In the normal image transfer setting process, first, the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e is updated with the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6005) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303). The information described at the indicated address is obtained (S6501). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6502). If the obtained information is the transfer data information (S6502: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data is determined from the transfer data information. (The storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S6503) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6504), and the flow shifts to the processing of S6505.

  Also, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S6502: No), the process of S6503 and S6504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6505. In the process of S6505, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S6505), and the transfer instruction is set. If the transfer has been completed (S6505: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S6506).

  In the process of S6506, after setting a transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237 and receiving a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S6506 (S6506: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S6506: Yes), the process proceeds to S6507. Also, as a result of the processing in S6505, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer processing is completed (S6505: No), the processing shifts to S6507.

  In the process of S6507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (S6507). If the transfer start flag is ON (S6507: Yes), there is image data to be transferred. Is turned off (S6508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S6503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the flow shifts to the processing of S6513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on, but is off (S6507: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6509). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6509: No), there is no image data to start transferring, and the normal image transfer setting process ends as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S6510), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the determination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image determination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6511). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state, and the transfer destination (normal) The start address of the video RAM 236) is obtained (S6512), and the process moves to S6513.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is stored. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S6511, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process ends.

  In the process of S6513, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513). The determination in the process of S6513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite set as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video data. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “off”, it is determined that the image data of the transfer target sprite is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Then, as a result of the processing in S6513, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S6513, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6513: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6514). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing processing includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing in S6514, the stored image data determination flag 233j is updated (S6515), and the normal transfer setting processing ends. As described above, the storage image data determination flag 233j is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and by setting the storage state of the image storage area 236a that is the same as the one sprite. This is performed by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the rear image is changed. , Image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio ramp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is set to the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting processing, and sends the image data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be.

  Here, by the time the drawing of a predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the predetermined data is specified in accordance with the display data table. When rendering a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for rendering the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 345, details of the above-described drawing processing (S4306), which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing this drawing processing.

  In the drawing processing, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S4304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information A drawing list shown in FIG. 296 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S4305) (S6601). That is, in the process of S6601, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S4304). The parameters required for the sprite determined in the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite to be arranged from the rearmost side to the front side in the image of one frame, and the sprites after the rearrangement are arranged in order of the sprites after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as detailed drawing information (detailed information). If a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 where transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, so that the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S6602). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged at the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged at the frontmost side.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the last address (storage source last address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) is extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address is sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  Note that the image controller 237 reads out image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer indicated by the drawing target buffer information, and stores the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image rendered on one frame buffer is developed, so that the rendering process and the display process can be performed simultaneously and in parallel. Can be.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6602, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated (S6603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to “1” when the value is “0” and by setting it to “0” when it is “1”. Done. Accordingly, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 330 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are performed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 ms after the completion of the drawing process of the image of one frame, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the minute is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed every 20 milliseconds by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c. By alternately designating, one frame of image display processing can be performed continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while one frame of image rendering processing is performed.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment of the present pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the tenth embodiment, the content set in advance when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed is changed from the ninth embodiment. In the above-described ninth embodiment, when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed, the total number of points (total score points) to be awarded during the score effect is set in advance, and in each variable display executed during the score effect. When setting a score effect, the total number of points to be given is determined as an upper limit, and a score effect corresponding to the determined score is executed. In the tenth embodiment, the score effect is executed. Then, when it is determined, the difference is that the number of charge effects to be executed in the current score effect is set.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment described above, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed in the winning information-related processing, the score effect is executed from the next variable display to be executed. In the embodiment, if the timing determined to execute the score effect in the winning information-related processing satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, if the change display during the change is high-speed change), the score effect is also performed for the change. The difference is that the setting is possible (see FIG. 346). The other configuration is the same, and the other configuration is omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Tenth Embodiment>
The tenth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The other points are the same as in the ninth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 347 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347 (a), in the tenth embodiment, the ninth embodiment described above is different in that a score effect scenario selection table 222aa, a specific effect execution selection table 222ab, and an execution timing selection table 222ac are added. This is different from the embodiment.

  The score effect scenario selection table 222aa is a data table that is referred to when determining a score effect scenario in which the number of times the specific effect is executed in the score effect is specified, and is a winning information related process 2 (S2211 in FIG. 351). (Refer to S2351 in FIG. 352). In the score effect scenario selection table 222aa, the change type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, the number of times of the special symbol that can execute the score effect (the number of consecutive effects), and the effect counter 223f. A plurality of score effect scenarios (scenarios A to C) are defined in correspondence with the value of the first effect counter provided.

  Specifically, when the variation type is per special reach or per super reach and the number of continuous productions is two, scenario A is defined in a range of the first production counter in a range of “0 to 9”, and No scoring production scenarios are defined for other ranges. Scenario A defined here is a scenario corresponding to a score effect in which the specific effect is executed twice. When the value of the acquired first effect counter is in a range where the score effect scenario is not defined, the score effect is not set.

  In the score effect scenario selection table 222aa, a scenario is defined such that more specific effects are more likely to be executed in a variation type having a higher expectation degree of a special symbol than in a variation type having a lower jackpot expectation degree. As a result, the greater the number of specific effects performed during the point effect, the higher the jackpot expectation can be. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the content of the effect performed during the score effect.

  Furthermore, it is configured such that the score effect is more easily executed as the number of continuous effects that can be executed for the score effect is larger. This makes it possible to prevent the score effect from ending in a short period (for example, a period of two special symbol changes), and to execute a score effect for a long period (for example, a period of four special symbols). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the score effect. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the special symbol change that is currently changing can also be included in the execution range of the score effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be set longer.

  The specific effect execution selection table 222ab is a data table for selecting whether or not to execute the specific effect in the variable display (excluding the final variable display) executed during the score effect, and the number of times the specific effect is executed. This is referred to when a new variable display is started during the period in which the score effect is being executed. In the specific effect execution selection table 222ab, the change type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, the number of changes in the number of special symbols capable of executing the score effect (the number of continuous changes), The number of times (one execution, two executions) of the specific effect to be executed in the current fluctuation is defined in correspondence with the remaining number of specific effects to be executed during the current score effect and the value of the second effect counter. Have been.

  Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach, and the number of remaining special design variations in which the score effect is continuously set is one and the number of remaining specific effects is two, the value of the second effect counter is Is defined in the range of “0 to 49”, the execution number of the specific effect is “one time”, and in other ranges, the specific effect is not executed. When the variation type is normal reach and the number of remaining special symbol variations in which the score effect is continuously set is one and the number of remaining specific effects is three, the value of the second effect counter is set to “0”. The number of executions of the specific effect is "one" in the range of "-69", and the number of executions of the specific effect is "two" in the range of "70-79".

  The execution timing selection table 222ac is a data table for selecting a timing at which a specific effect is to be executed in a variable display determined to execute a specific effect among the variable displays executed during the score effect. Here, the contents specified in the execution timing selection table 222ac will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 350 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the execution timing selection table 222ac.

  As shown in FIG. 350, the execution timing selection table 222ac is associated with the fluctuation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 and the value (0 to 99) of the third effect counter. The execution timing of the specific effect is defined. Specifically, when the variation type is normal reach, the value of the third effect counter is set in the range of “0 to 19”, and “after the first notice period” as the execution timing of the specific effect is set in the range of “20 to 49”. "After the second notice period", "reaching" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "special effect is not executed" in the other range ("90 to 99"). Is specified.

  In the case where the variation type is out of order, “after the first notice period” is defined as the execution timing of the specific effect within the range of the value of the third effect counter from “0 to 19”, and the other range (“20 to 99”) )) Defines "do not execute a specific effect". Further, when the variation type is short, “special effect is not executed” is defined regardless of the value of the third effect counter.

  That is, as described with reference to FIG. 349, when the variation type corresponding to the current variation display is short, the specific effect is not executed, so the specific effect is not displayed in the execution timing selection table 222ac. The configuration is such that there is no execution timing. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, as shown in FIG. 349, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (two) specific effects may be executed in one variable display. In this case, the execution timing of one specific effect is selected with reference to the execution timing selection table 222ac, and the execution timing at which the execution timing of another specific effect comes next to the execution timing of the one specific effect is selected. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the execution timing of the specific effect executed a plurality of times can be reliably changed. Also, when the execution timing of one specific effect selected with reference to the execution timing selection table 222ac is reaching, that is, when there is no next execution timing in the variable display, the variable display is started. The execution timing that arrives first after the execution is selected.

  In addition, the method of selecting the execution timing of the specific effect that is executed a plurality of times is not limited to the above-described method. The configuration may be such that an execution timing is selected by the user, or a specific effect of an effect mode different from the usual one may be executed as two specific effects at one execution timing. Furthermore, when the execution timing is selected so that a plurality of specific effects are executed at the same execution timing, in a special special period (period that cannot be selected with reference to the execution timing selection table 222ac). You may comprise so that a specific effect may be performed.

  FIG. 347 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347 (b), the tenth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that an effect variable flag 223ab and a specific effect number counter 223ac are added.

  The effect variable flag 223ab is a flag for indicating whether or not a part of the variable display being executed is changed to a point effect effect mode. Set to ON when it is determined to be variable. By setting the effect variable flag 223ab to ON, the effect variable process (S3152 in FIG. 358) is executed in the effect update process 2 (S2112 in FIG. 357), and a part of the variable display being executed is scored. A display rewriting effect command for rewriting is set.

  The specific effect number counter 223ac is a data area for storing a value of the specific effect number executed in the executed score effect, and is a score effect scenario executed in the winning information related process 2 (S2211 in FIG. 351). The value of the number of specific effects set in the setting process (S2351 in FIG. 352) is stored (S2360 in FIG. 352). The value stored in the specific effect counter 223ac is decremented by 1 each time the specific effect is executed during the score effect (S3411 in FIG. 354).

<Regarding the control processing in the tenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 351 to 358, control processing contents of the sound lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. The tenth embodiment is different from the ninth embodiment in that the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 316) is replaced with the winning information-related processing 2 (see FIG. 351), and the effect setting processing (see FIG. 321). Is changed to the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353), and the effect update process (see FIG. 324) is changed to the effect update process 2 (see FIG. 357). Are identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the winning information related processing 2 (S2211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related processing 2 (S2211). The prize information related processing 2 is different from the prize information related processing of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 316) in that a process for setting a score effect is different. When the winning information-related processing 2 (S2211) is executed, the processing from S2301 to S2304 is executed in the same manner as the winning information-related processing (see FIG. 316), and thereafter, the score effect scenario setting processing (S2351) is executed. This processing ends.

  Next, the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score effect scenario setting process (S2351). In the score effect scenario setting process (S2351), a process of determining whether or not to execute a score effect for the winning information command received this time, and a special symbol variation range in which the score effect is continuously executed, that is, And determining whether or not to execute a score effect from the running special symbol variation.

  When the score effect scenario setting process (S2351) is executed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter) 223b is set to the value of the effect variation counter 223m (S2352). Then, it is determined whether or not the variation type of the special symbol variation currently being executed is short (S2353). If it is determined that the variation is not short (S2353: No), the variation currently being executed is a high speed variation. It is determined whether there is (S2354). If it is determined in the process of S2354 that the speed is fluctuating (S2354: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the effect fluctuation counter 223m (S2355), and the effect variable flag 223ab is set to ON (S2356).

  In other words, it is determined whether or not a rewriting condition that allows rewriting of the fluctuation display corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed to the content of the scoring effect is satisfied. If the rewriting condition is satisfied (the fluctuation during execution is short) In the case of a variation type other than the deviation and a high-speed variation), a process of determining that the variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation currently being executed can be rewritten into the content of the point effect is executed. In this way, by configuring the currently displayed variable display to be used for the score effect only when the above-described rewriting condition is satisfied, the period for executing the score effect can be set longer, It is possible to suppress a situation in which the effect contents of the fluctuation display during execution are suddenly switched and the player is confused.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2353, when it is determined that the variation type of the special symbol variation being executed is short (S2353: Yes), or when it is determined that the variation being executed is other than the high-speed variation. (S2354: No), the process of S2355 and S2356 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2357. As described above, when it is determined in the processing of S2353 and S2354 that the above-described rewriting condition is not satisfied, the fluctuation display of the special symbol fluctuation currently being executed cannot be used for the scoring effect, and the effect fluctuation counter The process of adding the value of 223m is skipped.

  In the process of S2357, the score rendering scenario selection table 222aa is read (S2357), and the score rendering scenario corresponding to the current winning information is determined using the score rendering scenario selection table 222aa (S2358), and then the determination result of S2358 It is determined whether or not a score effect is to be executed based on (S2359). In other words, it is determined whether or not a range in which scenarios A to C, which are scoring effect scenarios, are not defined when the scoring effect scenario selection table 222aa is referred to in the process of S2358. If it is determined in the process of S2359 that the score effect is to be executed (S2359: Yes), the value of the specific effect number corresponding to the determined score effect scenario is set in the specific effect number counter 223ac (S2360), and the prize read this time is performed. The effect target information is set in the winning information storage area 223a corresponding to the command (S2361), the effect prohibition flag 223j is set to ON (S2362), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2359 that the score effect is not to be executed (S2359: No), the effect variable flag 223ab is set to off (S2363), and the current fluctuation type is equal to or greater than super reach (super reach or Special reach) is determined (S2364).

  In the process of S2364, when it is determined that it is equal to or higher than the super reach (S2364: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described process of S2361, the processes of S2361 to S2362 are executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not equal to or greater than the super reach (S2364: No), the value of the effect variation number counter 223m is cleared (S2365), and this processing ends.

  Here, the processing executed in S2364 is the same as the processing in S2314 executed in the prize information-related processing (see FIG. 316) of the ninth embodiment described above, and therefore detailed description is omitted but simplified. Give an explanation. In the present embodiment, as described above, the limiting condition (the number of retained balls of the first special symbol and the setting status of the effect prohibition flag 223j) for restricting the setting of the score effect is provided. Further, even when the restriction condition is not satisfied, the result of referring to the score effect scenario selection table 222aa may result in the determination that the score effect is not executed. In such a case, if the fluctuation type included in the received prize information command is equal to or longer than a predetermined period (for example, 80 seconds or longer), the prize information corresponding to the long fluctuation in which the score effect is not executed is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball. It will be stored in the area.

  In such a state, when the next prize information command is received and the score effect is set based on the prize information included in the received prize information command, a predetermined effect is performed during the execution of the set score effect. There is a problem that the fluctuation display is performed for a period or more (80 seconds or more), and the score effect is prolonged. In addition, for example, when the winning information for which no score effect is set includes a variation type per super reach a, a large hit occurs during the execution of the score effect, and the effect of the score effect is reduced. There was a problem of letting them do.

  With respect to such a problem, in the present embodiment, even if the prize information does not set a scoring effect, the value of the effect change number counter 223m is changed when a predetermined condition (the change type is super reach or more) is satisfied. The processing is performed to set the effect prohibition flag 223j to ON, and while the prize information satisfying the predetermined condition (variation type is super reach or more) is stored in the prize information storage area 223a. Is configured so that no scoring effect is newly set. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the effect of the score effect.

  In the present embodiment, when the variation type is a normal reach, that is, a large hit with a short variation time, the setting of the score effect is not prohibited. With this configuration, a jackpot can be generated while the score effect is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to the player.

  Next, the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2704) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 2 (S2704). In the effect setting process 2 (S2704), in addition to the effect setting process of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 321), a process for setting the final score effect to be executed in response to the final variation of the score effect is performed. They differ in that they are added.

  When the effect setting process 2 (S2704) is started, first, the process of S2851 is executed in the same manner as S2801 of the effect setting process of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 321), and the value of the effect variation counter is set to 0. If it is determined that it is not larger than 0 (S2851: No), the same processes of S2854 to S2807 of the effect setting process of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 321) described above are executed. Execute and end this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2851 that the value of the effect variation counter is greater than 0 (S2851: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the effect variation counter 223m is 1 (S2852). If it is not 1, that is, if it is determined that the current variation is not the final variation of the score effect (S2852: No), the pre-score effect effect setting process (S2853) is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the effect fluctuation counter 223m is 1 in the process of S2852 (S2852: Yes), the final score effect setting process (S2854) is executed, and this process ends.

  As described above, in the tenth embodiment, the effect performed during the score effect is set for the pre-score effect set for the change other than the final change of the score effect and for the final change of the score effect. It is configured to set each effect mode separately from the final score effect. This makes it possible to unify the final result of the score production in the final score production even if the degree of freedom of the production mode for the pre-scoring production is increased, and it is possible to expand the production width of the score production. The effect can be enhanced.

  Next, the content of the pre-scoring effect setting process (S2853) executed in the effect setting process 2 (S2704 in FIG. 353) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-scoring effect setting process (S2853). In the pre-score effect setting process (S2853), a process of determining an effect mode of a pre-score effect set for a change in a score effect other than the final effect is executed.

  When the pre-score effect setting process (S2853) is executed, first, the number of executions of the specific effect in the current fluctuation (the fluctuation) is determined using the specific effect execution selection table 222ab (S3401). The value of 223p is read (S3402). Then, the current assigned score is subtracted from the gauge upper limit score (6 points) to calculate a difference score (S3403).

  Next, it is determined whether or not to execute the specific effect based on the current fluctuation based on the determination result of S3401 described above (S3404). If it is determined that the specific effect is not to be performed (S3404: No), The score given by the fluctuation is set from a range smaller than the difference score (S3405). That is, a score to be given is set in a state where a limit is applied so that a score of an amount that reaches the gauge upper limit score is not given even though the specific effect is not executed. Here, a process of selecting a score based on the obtained value of an effect counter (effect counter for point-in-time score) (not shown) in a range of scores obtained by subtracting 1 from the difference score from 0 is executed.

  Next, a variation pattern accompanied by a score giving effect in a mode corresponding to the set score is determined (S3406), and a value corresponding to the set score is added to the value of the giving score counter 223p (S3407). The value of 223m is subtracted by 1 (S3408), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3404, when it is determined that the specific effect is to be executed due to the current fluctuation (S3404: Yes), the specific effect execution timing is set based on the execution timing selection table 222ac (S3409), and the specific effect execution timing is set. As a point-giving effect executed up to this time, a variation pattern accompanied by a point-giving effect in a mode corresponding to the calculated difference score is determined (S3410), and the value of the specific effect counter 223ac is updated (S3411).

  Then, the value corresponding to the set score is added to the value of the awarded score counter 223p (S3412), and is the same as the processes of S2911 and S2912 of the score award effect setting process (see FIG. 322) of the ninth embodiment described above. The processing of S3413 and S3414 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the contents of the final score effect setting process (S2854) executed in the effect setting process 2 (S2704 in FIG. 353) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the content of the final score effect setting process (S2854). In the final score effect setting process (S2854), a process of determining an effect mode of the final score effect set for the final variation among the score effects is executed.

  When the final score effect setting process (S2854) is executed, first, a final specific effect timing corresponding to the current variation type is set (S3501). Here, in the tenth embodiment, each variation type (normal reach, super reach, special reach (refer to FIG. 348)) that can be the final variation of the specific effect is a predetermined type in which the specific effect (final specific effect) can be executed in advance. A timing (for example, a timing at which a reach is reached, a timing immediately before the final symbol stops, a timing at which the reach effect is switched to a different reach effect, and the like) is provided, and the process of S3501 is performed at the present time. A process of setting the timing of the final specific effect set for the variation type is executed. In addition, the timing of the final specific effect may be different for each variation type, and only a plurality of timings at which the final specific effect can be executed are provided for the variation type included in the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, The audio lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute a process of selecting and determining the timing of executing the final specific effect from the plurality of timings described above.

  Next, the value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is read, the remaining specific effect number is calculated (S3502), it is determined whether the calculated remaining specific effect number is 1 (S3503), and the remaining specific effect is performed in the process of S3503. When it is determined that the number of times is not 1 (2 or 3) (S3503: No), the value of the awarded score counter 223p is read out (S3504), and based on the read out value of the awarded score counter 223p, A score (sufficient score) required to execute the remaining specific effect number is calculated (S3505). For example, if the value of the current awarded score counter is 4 and the number of remaining specific effects is 3, one of them is used as the final specific effect, so that it corresponds to the remaining number of remaining specific effects of 2. Then, one score is calculated from the range of 8 to 13 as the assigned score. In other words, if the score given in the final score production this time is less than 8 points, the gauge upper limit amount cannot be reached twice, and if it is more than 13 points, the gauge upper limit amount will be reached 3 times. Therefore, it is no longer the point assignment corresponding to the number of remaining specific effects. Therefore, one score is calculated as a sufficient score from the range (allowable range) of “8 to 13”. In addition, when calculating one score as a sufficient score from the above-mentioned allowable range, for example, it corresponds to the production mode of the current score production (the number of production fluctuations and the contents of the pre-score production) and the final score production. The selection may be made using a data table defined in association with a special symbol variation lottery result (judgment determination, variation type) or an acquired value of a dedicated counter of the effect counter 223f. With such a configuration, for example, it is possible to define so that a higher score in the allowable range is selected as the expectation degree of the jackpot is higher or as the effect of the score effect is higher.

  Next, the execution timing of the specific effect is set based on the execution timing selection table 222ac (S3506), and the value of the assigned score counter 223p is updated corresponding to the value of the sufficient score calculated in the process of S3505 (S3507), The value of the specific effect counter 223ac is updated (S3508), and the process proceeds to a final specific effect setting process (S3509).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3503 that it is 1 (S3503: Yes), it is a case where only the above-mentioned final specific effect is executed in the final score effect, so that the processes of S3504 to S3508 are skipped and the process of S3509 is performed. Move to. Here, the contents of the final specific effect setting process (S3509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing the content of the final specific effect setting process (S3509). In the final specific effect setting process (S3509), a score giving effect for giving a score in accordance with the execution timing of the final specific effect set in advance to the variation pattern corresponding to each variation type is set.

  When the final specific effect setting process (S3509) is executed, first, the value of the awarded score counter 223p is read (S3601), and the score to be awarded by the final specific effect execution timing is calculated (S3602). Next, a score-giving effect corresponding to the calculated score is set as a score-giving effect corresponding to the final specific effect execution timing (S3603).

  Then, the value of the awarded score counter 223p is updated in accordance with the calculated score value (S3604), the value of the specific effect number counter 223ac is updated (S3605), and the process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 355, the description will be continued. After finishing the process of S3509, it is determined whether or not the operation pattern effect is included in the variation pattern determined this time (S3510). If it is included (S3510: Yes), the operation score execution flag is set to ON. Then, the value of the effect variation number counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S3512), and this processing ends. Note that the detailed contents of the above-described processing of S3510 and S3511 are the same as the processing of S2911 and S2912 of the above-described score provision effect setting processing (S2803 in FIG. 322) of the ninth embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted. .

  Next, the contents of the effect update processing 2 (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 2 (S2112). The effect update process 2 (S2112) in the tenth embodiment adds a process when the effect variable flag 223ab is set to ON to the effect update process (see FIG. 324) in the ninth embodiment. The differences are the same, and the others are the same. The same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect update process 2 (S2112) is executed, first, the same processes of S3101 to S3107 as the effect update process (see FIG. 324) in the ninth embodiment described above are executed. After finishing the process of S3107, it is next determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ab is on (S3151). If it is on (S3151: Yes), the effect variable process (S3152) described later is executed. The effect variable flag 223ab is set to off (S3153), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect variable flag 223ab is off in the processing of S3151, the processing of S3152 and S3153 is skipped, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 358, the content of the effect variable process (S3152) executed in the effect update process 2 (S2112 in FIG. 357) will be described. FIG. 358 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect variable processing (S3152). In the effect variable process, a process of rewriting a part of the effect mode of the variable display during the change to the score effect is executed.

  When the effect variable processing (S3152) is executed, first, one point is set as the score to be given in the changing effect (S3161), and then the assigned score counter 223p is set to a value corresponding to the set score (one point). Is updated (S3162). Then, the value of the effect fluctuation number counter 223m is subtracted by 1, a rewrite effect command for display is set (S3164), and the process ends.

  As described above, in the case where the currently-displayed variable display is added to the range of the score effect, an effect in which one point is given in the active variable display is executed. Thereby, it is possible to immediately notify the player that the score effect has been executed. Further, since the number of points to be given is set to be small (one point), it is possible to reduce the influence on the processing for each variation of the specific effect executed later.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when a running variation display is added to the range of the score rendering, a score giving performance in which one point is given in the running variation display is executed. The score to be awarded is not limited to this, and may be set, for example, randomly from a range (1 to 5 points) in which the specific effect is not executed. However, if the point to be given is set to a range where 0 points can be selected, it will not be possible to promptly notify the player that the score effect has been executed, so that at least one point is provided. good. Further, the score to be awarded may be changed based on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the winning information to be the target of the current point production. As a result, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning continuously during the period in which the score effect is executed. Further, in the case where a running display is added to the range of the score effect, a rewrite effect that only informs that the score effect is to be executed is executed instead of giving a score in the running change display. May be configured. This simplifies the process during the scoring effect because it is not necessary to change the process of the scoring effect during the subsequent scoring effect according to whether or not to add the active display to the range of the scoring effect. Can be.

<First operation effect example of operation score effect in each embodiment>
Next, another example of the operation score effect in each embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In each of the above-described embodiments, the score to be given is variable according to the operation mode (the presence or absence of an operation) of the frame button 22 for the operation score effect performed during the score effect. On the other hand, in the first operation effect example, the first announcement effect in which the display mode is set according to the operation mode of the frame button 22 (presence or absence of operation) as the announcement effect, and the first announcement effect are executed in a predetermined period And a second notice effect.

  Conventional gaming machines have been configured such that a plurality of preview effects indicating the jackpot winning expectation are independently displayed during a single fluctuation display in order to enhance the interest of the game. In such a gaming machine, since various announcement effects can be provided to the player, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game and enhance the interest of the game. However, the effect mode (display content) of a plurality of announcement effects, Depending on the execution timing, an unnecessary announcement effect may be displayed or an announcement effect that may confuse the player may be displayed, and there has been a problem that the interest in the game is not sufficiently improved.

  Further, among the announcement effects, there are those in which the player operates the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) to notify the display contents of the announcement effect to the player (hereinafter, referred to as an operation announcement effect). In a gaming machine using such a notice effect, the timing of operation of the operation means (frame button 22) switches the execution time of another notice effect (the timing of displaying the display contents of the notice effect). On the other hand, there was a possibility that the notice effect would be useless. In addition, if a period during which only the operation announcement effect is executed is provided so that the execution timing of the operation announcement effect is not interchanged with the execution timing of another announcement effect, many times within the limited effect period (variable display period) However, there is a problem that it is difficult to execute the notice effect of the above, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the first operation effect example, the first notice effect and the second notice effect are produced according to the operation mode of the frame button 22 for the first notice effect (the presence or absence of an operation) and the operation timing. (Display content) is configured to be variable. With this configuration, even if the operation means is operated at any timing with respect to the operation announcement effect (the first announcement effect), the announcement effect is executed in an effect mode corresponding to the operation timing. Can be increased.

<Production contents in the first operation production example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 359 to FIG. 363, description will be given of the effect contents in the present modification. FIG. 359 (a) is a timing chart showing the display timings of the first preview effect and the second preview effect, and FIG. 359 (b) is a preview display of each preview effect at the operation timing of the first preview effect. It is a figure showing the contents.

  As shown in FIG. 359 (a), in the present example of the operation effect, a composite notice effect in which the first notice effect and the second notice effect are displayed in an overlapping manner can be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 360 (a), the first announcement effect is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the second announcement effect is performed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. A notice effect is performed. FIG. 360 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the composite announcement effect is started.

  In the first notice effect, a frame button operable range is set from 2 seconds to 10 seconds after the operation guide display Db1 for guiding operation of the frame button 22 is displayed, and the remaining period of the frame button operable period is set. Is successively displayed in the main display area Dm. In the frame button operable period, the first 2 seconds are set as the first period, the next 5 seconds are set as the second period, and the last 3 seconds are set as the third period. It is determined which period (the first period to the third period) the timing at which the user has operated 22 corresponds, and based on the result of the determination, the advance display contents of the composite advance effect can be changed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 359 (b), when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the first period, the score addition expectation degree is notified (suggested) as the notice display content of the first notice effect. ) Is displayed, and the score to be obtained as the notice display content of the second notice effect is notified. In other words, when the frame button 22 is operated in the first period, the first notice effect is performed earlier than the notice display, so that the player is given the score notice effect step by step in the order of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. It is configured to notify.

  Next, when it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the second period, the score to be obtained as the notice display content of the first notice effect is notified, and the score addition expectation degree is set as the notice display content of the second notice effect. The content to be notified (suggested) is displayed (see FIG. 360 (b)). In other words, when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period, the second preview production performs the preliminary display before the first preview production, so that the second preliminary production and the first preliminary production are given the scoring production in this order. It is configured to notify the player stepwise.

  When it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is in the third period, the content that emphasizes the advance display content of the second advance effect is displayed as the advance display content of the first advance effect (see FIG. 363 (b)). ). In other words, the third period is a timing at which the second notice effect is not displayed in the small area Ds2 after the effect period of the second notice effect has elapsed, and thus the effect of the present duplicate notice effect is notified to the player. For this reason, the highlighting (De5) in which the preview display content (the letter “P”) of the second preview effect is combined is displayed.

  When it is determined that the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the third period, a notification other than the display content related to the score provision, for example, a notification directly suggesting a lottery result of the special symbol is executed. Is also good.

  On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is not operated during the first notice effect (within the frame button operable range), only the notice display corresponding to the second notice effect is executed, and the notice display corresponding to the first notice effect is performed. Is configured not to execute. In this case, the score is not displayed on the display screen.

  Note that, in the present modified example, an example in which the above-described composite announcement effect is executed is described, but the first announcement effect and the second announcement effect described above are executed at different timings. It is also configured. Further, the standby state of the second notice effect (the treasure box in FIG. 360 (a) is closed) is continued for a long time (for example, 30 seconds), and a plurality of operation effects and the third notice effect performed during that time are performed. The notice display timing of the second notice effect may be changed according to the result.

  Next, display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the above-described overlap flag is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 360 to 363. FIG. 360 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the execution of the duplicate notice effect. As shown in FIG. 360 (a), when the duplicate announcement effect is executed. As the first announcement effect, an operation guide display Db1 for guiding operation of the frame button 22 and a time gauge Db2 indicating the remaining period of the frame button operable period are successively displayed in the main display area Dm. Then, the treasure box Dc1 is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds as an advance notification display for notifying the player that the advance display of the second advance effect is performed as the second advance effect.

  If the frame button 22 is not operated after the first period (2 seconds) set at the beginning of the frame button operable period has elapsed, the display screen shown in FIG. 360 (b) is displayed. FIG. 360 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second period when the frame button 22 is not operated during the first period in the duplicate announcement effect. . As shown in FIG. 360 (b). Since the frame button 22 is not operated, the operation guide display Db1 and the time gauge Db2 are continuously displayed in the main display area Dm. The time gauge Db2 is displayed in a form indicating that the remaining period is shorter than that in FIG. 359 (a) described above. Then, a score is given to the second notice display De1 as a P addition expectation degree notification indicating that a score is given as a notice display of the second notice effect performed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. Is displayed.

  Here, in addition to the character “P” shown in the figure, the character “P?” Indicating that there is a possibility that a score may be given, It is configured such that the character “super P” indicating that the score is to be given and that the score to be given is large is displayed. Accordingly, even when only the P-giving expectation degree notification is displayed, it is possible for the player to predict the effect of the duplicate announcement effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, in this operation effect example, various notification modes are shown using different characters as the notification mode of the P provision expectation degree notification. Other configurations may be used. For example, it may be configured to change the color and size of the letter “P” and perform the P provision expectation notification with a different meaning.

  FIG. 361 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a display example when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the overlap notice effect (see FIG. 360 (a)). As shown in FIG. 361 (a), a score is given to the first preview display De2 as a P-given expectation degree notification indicating that a score is given to the main display area Dm as a preview display of the first preview production. Is displayed. Then, the character "What is the contents of the treasure box" is displayed, indicating that the second notice effect is to be executed next.

  FIG. 361 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display example when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the overlap notice effect (see FIG. 360 (a)). As shown in FIG. 361 (b), a large score is given to the first advance display De2 as a P-given expectation degree notification indicating that a score is given to the main display area Dm as an advance notice of the first advance effect. Is displayed. Then, the character "Expect the contents of the treasure box" is displayed, which indicates that the effect result of the second notice effect is an effect result (a large number of scores) advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 362 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen when the second period is reached in a state where the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the overlap notice effect (see FIG. 361 (b)). is there. As shown in FIG. 362 (a), in the state where the character “Super P” is displayed in the first advance display De2 of the first advance effect in the main display area Dm, the small area Ds2 in the sub-display area Ds is displayed. The character "7" indicating the score of seven points is displayed on the second notice display De3. When the seven characters are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated in accordance with the score given (displayed).

  Note that, instead of the second preview display De3 of the second preview effect shown in FIG. 362 (a), a second preview display De3 shown in FIG. 362 (b) may be displayed. FIG. 362 (b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display screen when the second period is reached in a state where the frame button 22 is operated during the first period of the overlapping notice effect (see FIG. 361 (b)). It is. In another example shown in FIG. 362 (b), the letter "V" indicating that the jackpot is won is displayed as the second preview display De3 of the second preview effect, and the letter "Congratulations" is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed. In this way, in the duplicate notice effect performed during the score effect, in addition to the notice effect giving the score, by using the notice display that directly informs the lottery result of the target special symbol, unexpected effects can be achieved. This can be executed, and even if the score given during the scoring effect is small, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the jackpot.

  FIG. 363 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period of the duplicate notice effect. When the frame button 22 is operated in the state of FIG. 360 (b), as shown in FIG. 363 (a), the character "P" is displayed in the second preview display De1 in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds. In this state, the character “3” indicating three points is displayed in the first advance display De4 in the main display area Dm. When the three characters are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated in accordance with the assigned (displayed) score.

  FIG. 363 (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a display screen when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period of the overlap announcement effect. When the frame button 22 is operated during the third period, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the second preview display is completed in the small area Ds2 of the sub display area Ds, and the first display is displayed in the main display area Dm. The letter “P” indicating that a score is to be given to the first preview display De5 of the preview production (the content displayed in the second preview production in this duplicate preliminary production) and “3” indicating three points The combined character is displayed. When the three characters are displayed, the display of the storage status display area DK is updated in accordance with the assigned (displayed) score.

  As described above, in the first operation effect example, the content (effect mode) to be displayed in each advance effect to be displayed in the duplicate advance effect is changed according to the display timing of each advance display. Until the last notice effect is executed for the player, the notice effect can be made interesting.

  In the first operation effect example, a configuration is used in which the player only visually recognizes the remaining period as the time gauge Db indicating the frame button operable period. In order to notify the player of the period (the first period to the third period), the display mode of the time gauge Db2 may be configured to be variable, for example, “blue” during the first period, It is preferable to change the color to "yellow" during the second period and to "blue" during the third period. Thus, it is possible to cause the player to intentionally perform a game for aiming at the specific period, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the effect.

<Regarding the control processing in the first operation effect example>
Next, control contents in the first operation effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 364 and 365. In the first operation effect example, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see FIG. 323) are changed to the frame button input monitor and effect process 3 (see FIG. 364) for each of the above-described embodiments. Is different.

  Here, the contents of the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process 3 (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S2107), when the frame button 22 is pressed during the scoring operation effect period, each of the preview effects is different from the above-described frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 323). The difference is that a notice mode setting process (see S3051) for setting the mode is performed, and otherwise the same process is performed. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 3 (S2107) is executed, the same processing as S3001 to S3003 as the above-described frame button input monitoring and effect processing (see FIG. 323) is executed, and thereafter, the notice mode setting processing (S3051) is executed. When the notice mode setting processing (S3051) is completed, the same processing as S3004 as the above-described frame button input monitoring / production processing (see FIG. 323) is executed, and this processing ends. Also, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that it is not during the scoring operation effect period (S3002: No), the same process of S3005 as the above-described frame button input monitoring and effect process (see FIG. 323) is executed. To end.

  Next, the contents of the notice mode setting process (S3051) executed in the frame button input monitoring and effect process 3 (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 365. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notice mode setting process (S3051). In the preview mode setting process (S3051), a process of setting the first preview mode and the second preview mode in accordance with the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed is executed.

  When the notice mode setting process (S3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the timing of pressing the frame button 22 is during the first period (see FIG. 359) (S3052). Here, when a scoring operation effect period (frame button operable period) for setting whether to depress the frame button 22 effectively is set, the elapsed time is measured by a time counter (not shown). Then, it is configured to determine whether the timing is one of the first period, the second period, and the third period based on the value of the time counter at the timing when it is determined that the frame button 22 is pressed.

  In the process of S3052, if it is determined that the pressing timing is the first period (S3052: Yes), then the score giving expectation degree notification mode is set as the first preview display mode (S3053), and the second preview display is performed. An awarded point notification mode is set as the mode (S3054). Then, a display advance notice command corresponding to the set mode is set (S3055), and the process ends. That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 359 (b), when the operation timing of the frame button 22 is the first period, a score is given in the first announcement effect executed (displayed) first. 361 is displayed (see FIG. 361 (a)), and then a display mode showing the score given at the timing when the second notice effect is executed is displayed (see FIG. 362 (b)). . In this way, a plurality of announcement effects can be executed for one effect that gives a score, and the effect result of the target effect is gradually suggested and notified according to the execution timing of each announcement effect. The player can play the game while making the player predict the effect result or expecting the effect result to be advantageous to the player.

  In the first operation effect example, a display mode indicating that a score is given to the advance notice effect to be executed is displayed, and the score to be given to the notice effect to be executed later is given. It is configured to display a display mode indicating, but is not limited to this, for example, for a notice effect that is performed first, a display mode that indicates the number of points that can be awarded is displayed, and is executed later. A display mode indicating whether or not a score is given to a notice effect may be displayed. By configuring in this way, by grasping the number of points that can be given displayed in the previously performed notice effect, it is possible to make the player predict the progress of the effect when the points are actually given. The announcement effect can be executed while giving the player a sense of expectation.

  Returning to FIG. 365, the description will be continued. In the processing of S3052, when it is determined that the pressing timing is not the first period (S3052: No), it is next determined whether the pressing timing is the second period (S3056), and when it is the second period, (S3056: Yes), the awarded score notification mode is set as the first notice display mode (S3057), and the process of S3055 described above is executed, followed by terminating the present process.

  In other words, when the pressing timing is the second period, the second announcement effect is already informed in the previously set score giving expectation degree notification mode (see FIG. 360 (b)). As the display mode of the one announcement effect, an awarded score notification mode indicating the number of awarded points is set and displayed (see FIG. 363 (a)).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3056 that the press timing is not in the second period (S3056; No), the press timing is in the third period, so that the first preview display mode corresponds to the content of the second preview display. The effect mode (see FIG. 363 (b)) is set, and the process of S3055 described above is executed, followed by terminating the present process. That is, when the pressing timing is the third period, that is, when the timing is after the end of the second notice effect, even if the awarded score notification mode (display mode indicating only the number of awarded scores) is displayed, Since the display mode of the second announcement effect (the display mode indicating that the score is given (see FIG. 360 (b))) has already disappeared, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the target of the value.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 363 (b), the game is configured to display a display mode in which a display mode indicating that points are awarded and a display mode indicating the number of points to be awarded are displayed. An effect that is easy for the user to understand can be executed. If the frame button 22 is not pressed within the frame button operable period, the notice mode setting process (S3051 in FIG. 365) is not executed, so that the display mode in the first notice effect is not set, and the entire notice effect is interrupted. An odd production will be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the frame button 22, which has an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 366 to 376. In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment described above, when the given score reaches a predetermined amount (for example, 6) during any variation display of the score effect, the specific effect is executed. Was. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the specific effect is executed only during the final change of the score effect, that is, only during the change display corresponding to the winning information command which has been determined to execute the score effect. In the variable display in which the score effect is executed so far, the difference is that the stock effect for securing the number of times the specific effect is executed is executed.

  With this configuration, the score effect can be enjoyed to the end, and it is not necessary to perform the setting for executing the specific effect in the variation display other than the final variation, so that the variation display setting process is easily performed. be able to.

<About the scoring effect in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 366 and FIG. 367, a description will be given of a score effect performed in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 366 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen during a score effect (before final change). According to FIG. 366 (a), an effect similar to the score effect in each of the above-described embodiments is executed, and a stock display area Db2 for stock display of the acquired charge amount is formed in the main display area.

  The stock display area Db2 has an acquired charge amount display area Db2a for indicating the currently acquired charge amount, and a maximum charge amount display area D2b2 that can be acquired in the current score effect. In a), “3” is displayed in the maximum charge amount display area D2b2, and “0” is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a.

  In the storage status display area DK, only the numerical value indicating the value of the gauge is displayed, and a “charging zone” is displayed above the main display area Dm as the score effect display mode Db1 indicating that the score effect is currently being produced. Is displayed. In this FIG. 366 (a), in order to notify the player of the reserved symbol corresponding to the final change of the score effect, the display mode of the second reserved symbol Dsc is displayed in a display mode that can be distinguished from other reserved symbols. I have.

  Then, when the score given in the score effect reaches the predetermined amount (6), “1” is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a of the stock display area Db2 as shown in FIG. 366 (b). . When the change before the final change of the score effect is stopped, as shown in FIG. 367, a comment “End of charge zone” is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the specific effect is executed in the small area Ds2 with the next change. A pre-command will be displayed to indicate that it will be done.

  In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the final variation of the score effect of the present embodiment, it is configured such that the score giving effect of giving a score can be executed in the same manner as in the above-described embodiments. Then, the specific effect is executed in the final fluctuation by the total number of times of the charge amount acquired before the final fluctuation (until the state shown in FIG. 367 is reached) and the charge amount acquired in the final fluctuation. Make up.

  By configuring in this way, even if the amount of charge (the number of stocks) obtained before reaching the final change of the score effect is small, it is expected that a large amount of charge will be obtained in the final change. Can be. In addition, depending on the jackpot lottery result corresponding to the final change and the amount of charge (the number of stocks) obtained before reaching the final change of the score effect, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach effect executed in the final change is changed. With this configuration, even when the acquired charge amount is small, the degree of expectation can be increased to a jackpot depending on the reach effect of the final fluctuation. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the score effect to the end.

  In the case where the above-described configuration is used, a configuration in which the reach effect executed in the final variation is notified (suggested) to the player in advance may be adopted. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected gameplay such that he or she does not want to acquire an unnecessarily large amount of charge during the point presentation.

<Electrical Configuration in Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The eleventh embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the ninth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 368 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb, the frequency selection table 222bc, the execution timing selection table 222bd, and the ROM 222 (see FIG. 288 (a)) in the tenth embodiment. A win display score selection table 222be and a departure display score selection table 222bf are added. The other configuration is the same as that of the tenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal fluctuation pattern selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting a fluctuation pattern other than the final fluctuation of the score effect, and its content is the same as the fluctuation pattern table 222a of the ninth embodiment described above. Detailed description is omitted.

  The specific change pattern selection table 222bb is a data table for selecting a change pattern in the final change of the score effect, and includes a change type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 and a change in the current score effect. Various fluctuation patterns are defined corresponding to the set number of specific effects (specific number of times) and the amount of charge already acquired.

  Here, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 369 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb. In the specific variation pattern selection table 222b, as a variation pattern of the final variation of the score effect, a rendering mode in which the set specific rendering number can be executed, and a charge amount that must be acquired in the final variation, that is, the specific rendering number It is defined that a variation pattern capable of setting a score giving effect mode for obtaining a value obtained by subtracting the value of the notified number counter 223bb from the above is selected.

  With reference to FIG. 369, selection of the variation pattern of the final variation of the score effect will be described. In the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (FIG. 369), the variation pattern type (variation type notified by the variation pattern command) determined by the main control device 110 is determined based on the number-of-times selection table 222bc described later. Each specific variation pattern (the variation pattern of the final variation of the continuous announcement effect) corresponding to the current value of the notified number-of-times counter 223bb according to the specific effect number (number information (number data) stored in the number storage area 223ba). Are set respectively.

  When the point effect is executed, the variation patterns (normal reach, super reach a to c (hit and miss), special reach (hit only) set in the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb are set. (Variation pattern)) is selected only. In other variation patterns, a score effect is not executed. Therefore, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb includes other variation patterns (normal reach). Is not set.

  Next, a specific variation pattern selection method will be described. The value (corresponding to the number of specific effects) stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba in S3553 in the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854: see FIG. 376) executed by the MPU 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 described below, The specific variation pattern is selected from the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb (FIG. 369) based on the variation pattern type notified by the counter 223bb and the variation pattern command.

  As shown in FIG. 369, when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is per normal reach, the variation mode is configured in the same variation mode as the per normal reach set in the variation pattern selection table 222a. Of the specific fluctuation pattern (selected when the notified number counter 223bb is 0) and the fluctuation mode per normal reach executed once during the fluctuation of the charge amount stock effect (hereinafter referred to as the stock effect) (see FIG. 3). As for the variation mode, a specific variation pattern of Normal A, which is the same as the variation mode per normal reach set in the variation pattern selection table 222a, is set.

  When the variation pattern type is the super reach a, a specific variation pattern of SPA1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SPA2 in which the stock effect is executed once, and SPA3 in which the stock effect is executed twice is set. I have. The specific variation patterns of SPA1 to SPA3 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is a variation pattern of super reach a selected at normal time ( A variation mode similar to that of the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is set.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 369, in the case of the super reach a, the specific variation pattern of the SPA1 is a value of the specific effect number (the value of the number storage area 223ba) and the value of the notified number counter 223bb (the number of stored times). The value is set so that the value is selected when the value of the area 223ba and the value of the notified number counter 223bb are any of (0, 0), (1, 1), and (2, 2). Similarly, the specific variation pattern of SPA2 is selected when it is any of (1, 0) and (2, 1), and the variation pattern of SPA3 is selected when it is (2, 0). Is set to

  When the variation pattern type is the super reach b, SPB1 in which no stock effect is executed, SPB2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SPB3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and stock effect are executed three times. A specific variation pattern of SPB4 is set. The specific variation patterns of SPB1 to SPB4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is the variation pattern of the super reach b selected at normal time ( A variation mode similar to that of the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is set.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 369, in the case of the super reach b, the specific variation pattern of the SPB1 includes the values of the specific effect number (the value of the number storage area 223ba) and the notified number counter 223bb (the number storage number). It is set to be selected when the value of the area 223ba and the value of the notified number counter 223bb are any of (0, 0), (1, 1), (2, 2), and (3, 3). ing. Similarly, the specific variation pattern of SPB2 is selected when it is any of (1, 0), (2, 1), and (3, 2), and the variation pattern of SPB3 is (2, 0), (2). (3, 1), and the variation pattern of SPB4 is set to be selected when it is (3, 0).

  When the variation pattern type is the super reach c, the SPC1 in which the stock effect is not executed, the SPC2 in which the stock effect is executed once, the SPC3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and the stock effect are executed three times. A specific variation pattern of the SPC 4 is set. The specific variation patterns of SPB1 to SPB4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is the variation pattern of super reach c (normally selected). A variation mode similar to that of the normal variation pattern selection table 222ba is set. The values of the set number of specific effects (the value of the number-of-times storage area 223ba) and the value of the notified number counter 223bb are the same as in the case of the super reach b, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In the case of the special reach variation pattern type, SSP1 in which the stock effect is not executed, SSP2 in which the stock effect is executed once, SSP3 in which the stock effect is executed twice, and SSP4 in which the stock effect is executed three times. Is set. Note that the specific variation patterns of SSP1 to SSP4 differ only in the number of times the stock effect is executed (including 0 times), and the main variation mode is a variation pattern of the special reach (normal A variation pattern similar to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection table 222ba) is set. The values of the set number of specific effects (the value of the number-of-times storage area 223ba) and the notified number counter 223bb are the same as those in the case of the super reach B, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As is clear from FIG. 369, the upper limit of the number of times the specific effect is executed is configured to be different depending on the type of the super reach, and the type of the super reach executed by the displayed upper limit number of the stock effect is changed. It is possible to make it easy to predict, and to increase the flavor of the player for the stock effect, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The number-of-times selection table 222bc is a data table for selecting the number of times of the specific effect to be executed in the final variation of the current score effect when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, and is transmitted from the main control device 110. The value of the specific effect number is defined in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the variation type included in the winning information command, the current number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation lottery counter 223bc.

  Here, the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222bc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 370 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-times selection table 222bc. The number-of-times selection table 222bc is referred to in the process of S2371 in the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351: see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, which will be described later, and the specific effect number (stock effect is executed). The number of times (that is, the number of specific effects executed in the final change) is determined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 375, in the number-of-times selection table 222bc, the holding ball is set for each of the variation pattern types (normal reach, super reach A to C (hit and miss, special reach (only hit)). , The determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is set.

  When the variation pattern type per normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, when the number of reserved balls is two, when the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc is “0 to 9”, The number of specific effects 0 is selected. When the number of reserved balls is three or four, as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 4”, and the specific effect is 1 for “5 to 9”. Is set. When a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, a specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

  When the variation pattern type of the super reach a is notified by the variation pattern command, and when the number of reserved balls is two, 0 is set as the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc with respect to “0-9”. One specific effect number is set for "10-29", and two specific effect numbers are set for "30-39". When the number of retained balls is three, as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 29” and the specific effect is 2 for “30 to 39”. ing. When the number of reserved balls is four, as the determination values of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 19”, the specific effect is 1 for “20 to 29”, and “30”. Two specific effects are set for “-49”. As described above, in the case of the super reach a, the maximum number of times of the specific effect can be selected two times, which is set to be smaller than the super reach b to c and the special reach described later. In addition, as the number of reserved balls increases, the probability of selecting a value with a higher number of specific effects is set higher. Thus, the number of the specific effects tends to increase as the number of the reserved balls increases, so that the player's willingness to accumulate the reserved balls can be increased. When a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, a specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

  When the variation pattern type of the super reach b is notified by the variation pattern command, and when the number of reserved balls is two, the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc is "0" for "0-9". The number of specific productions for "10-35", the number of specific productions for "36-39", the number of specific productions for "36-39", and the number of specific productions for "40-49" Each is set. When the number of reserved balls is three, as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 5”, the specific effect is 1 for “6 to 24”, and “25”. Two specific effects are set for “-39”, and three specific effects are set for “40-59”. When the number of reserved balls is four, as the determination values of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 19”, the specific effect is 1 for “20 to 29”, and “30”. Two specific effects are set for “-39”, and three specific effects are set for “40-69”. As described above, in the case of the super reach b, the probability that the value with the larger number of specific effects is selected is set higher as the number of reserved balls is larger. Thus, the number of the specific effects tends to increase as the number of the reserved balls increases, so that the player's willingness to accumulate the reserved balls can be increased. When a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, a specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

  When the variation pattern type of the super reach c is notified by the variation pattern command, and when the number of reserved balls is two, the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc is 0 for “0-9” as the determination value. The number of specific productions for "10-35", the number of specific productions for "36-39", the number of specific productions for "36-39", and the number of specific productions for "40-49" Each is set. When the number of reserved balls is three, as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 5”, the specific effect is 1 for “6 to 24”, and “25”. Two specific effects are set for “-39”, and three specific effects are set for “40-49”. When the number of reserved balls is four, as the determination values of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 19”, the specific effect is 1 for “20 to 29”, and “30”. Two specific effects are set for “-39”, and three specific effects are set for “40-69”. As described above, in the case of the super reach b, the probability that the value with the larger number of specific effects is selected is set higher as the number of reserved balls is larger. Thus, the number of the specific effects tends to increase as the number of the reserved balls increases, so that the player's willingness to accumulate the reserved balls can be increased. When a value other than the set determination value is the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, a specific effect (score effect) is not executed.

  When the variation pattern type of the special reach is notified by the variation pattern command, and when the number of reserved balls is two, three times for the determination value of the variation lottery counter 223bc with respect to “0 to 14”. The number of specific effects has been set. When the number of reserved balls is three, as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 39” and the specific effect is 1 for “40 to 49”. ing. When the number of reserved balls is four, as the determination value of the variable lottery counter 223bc, the specific effect number is 0 for “0 to 39” and the specific effect is 3 for “40 to 49”. ing. In the case of the special reach as described above, when the number of the reserved balls is two more than the other fluctuation patterns, only the maximum of three specific production times can be selected. Is notified three times, it can be expected that a special reach that is highly likely to be selected in the case of a jackpot will be executed in the final fluctuation.

  The execution timing selection table 222bd is a data table for selecting various effect data (preliminary data) for executing the specific effect in the final fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern type selected by the specific fluctuation pattern selection table 222bb, This is for selecting the timing of executing the specific effect based on the specific number of times set in the variation pattern type (see FIG. 371). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern set by the sound lamp control device 113 is formed by a plurality of blocks. Specifically, if the variation type is the super reach a (variation time is 80 seconds), the first notice period (20 seconds), the second notice period (20 seconds), and the first reach period (20 seconds) , A second reach period (20 seconds), and four blocks.

  The effect data is set so that the specific effect can be executed at the boundary between the blocks, and the specific effect is executed in the period selected by the execution timing selection table 222bd among the plurality of specific effect executable periods. Effect data corresponding to the variation pattern selected to be performed. Note that the timing for executing the specific effect is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be set as appropriate. Also, the number and timing of executing the specific effect may be determined first, and a variation pattern corresponding to the determined content may be selected.

  Here, the content of the specific effect set in each variation pattern will be described. For example, in the specific effect executed after the end of the first notice period, an operation guide display for operating the frame button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 23 is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). Thus, the specific effect in which the screen is switched to the notice effect performed during the second notice period is executed. When this specific effect is executed, a suggestion comment indicating an effect mode of the notice effect performed during the second notice period is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This suggestion comment is configured such that a different display mode is set according to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol of the change is valid.

  Accordingly, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to predict the result of the determination as to whether or not the change is appropriate, and thus the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. The effect form of the specific effect in the period is not limited to this. For example, the specific effect in the period may be used as a stock effect.

  Further, as a specific effect performed after the end of the second notice period, an operation guide display for operating the frame button 23 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button 23 is operated within a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). By doing so, a specific effect indicating that the second notice period is repeatedly executed or a specific effect indicating that the reach effect is executed is executed. As a specific effect performed during the reach period, a display for operating the frame button 23 is executed in the same manner as in each of the specific effects described above. A suggestive comment is displayed.

  The effect data that can be executed in each block is configured so as to be set according to the number of points to be awarded in the fluctuation, and the stock effect must be performed in a period before the timing at which the specific effect is executed. It is configured to be executed. Thereby, the specific effect can be appropriately executed according to the number of times of charging, and the player does not feel uncomfortable.

  The winning display score selection table 222be is a data table for selecting a score to be given in each variation display during the score effect, and is referred to when the final change in the score effect wins the big hit. (See FIG. 372).

  The total awarded score (specified effect count is determined by the specific effect count determined by the number selection table 222bc by the processing of S2374 in the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351: see FIG. 374) performed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later) Is calculated, and the calculated value is stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o. The remaining score that can be obtained is calculated (determined) from the value stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o and the value of the awarded score counter 223p in which the value of the currently obtained score is stored. A score is selected from the hit display score selection table 222be based on the remaining change count including the final change. In FIG. 372, the value of the score that can be obtained is set for each of the remaining score (the value indicated by the displayable remaining score) and the number of remaining fluctuations. Specifically, when the remaining score is “18” and the number of remaining fluctuations is two, a value in the range of “0 to 1” is set, and the effect counter obtained from the value in the range is set. The selection is made based on the value of 223f. In this manner, the range of the score shown in FIG. 372 is selected based on the remaining score and the number of remaining fluctuations, and a value of 1 is selected from the selected value range by the value of the effect counter 223f. Have been. With this configuration, a score can be selected more randomly, and a freshness can be given to the score effect.

  The departure display score selection table 222bf is a data table for selecting a score to be given in each variation display during the score effect, and is referred to when the final change of the score effect is out of order ( See FIG. 373). Note that the hit display score selection table 222be already described above is the same as the score selection method, and only the set score ranges are different, so that detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 372 to FIG. 373, when the lottery result is a big hit, the probability that a high score is selected is set to be high, and when a high score is selected in the score effect, the player It is configured to set a high degree of expectation to be a big hit in the final fluctuation.

  In this way, by varying the score given during the score effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the final change of the score effect, the period from the start of the score effect to the execution of the final change Also, it is possible to interest the progress of the production.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 368 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, a count storage area 223ba and a notified count counter 223bb are added to the above-described tenth embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the tenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The number-of-times storage area 223ba is an area for storing the score effect number of times selected in the number-of-times selection table 222bc. The value stored here is referred to when setting a variation pattern corresponding to each variation display of the score effect. Further, it is also referred to when displaying as the value of the maximum charge amount display area Db2b of the stock display area Db2 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. The value displayed in the maximum charge amount display area D2b2 may be a value stored in the count storage area 223ba or a maximum value that can be stored in the count storage area 223ba.

  For example, if the value stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba is used, the big hit expectation may be varied according to which variation in the score effect the charge amount is obtained. As a result, the jackpot expectation can be expressed in a complicated manner, and the effect can be enhanced. In addition, when the maximum value (3 in the present embodiment) that can be stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba is used, it is unclear whether or not it is possible to obtain in the current score effect to display the maximum value. In addition, it is possible to relatively determine the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the current score effect, and to provide a player with a fun of predicting. Note that the above two values may be displayed together in the stock display area Db2.

  The informed number counter 223bb is a counter for storing the number of stocks already informed during the scoring effect, and is displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a of the stock display area Db2 of the third symbol display device 81. The same value as the value is measured. The value of this counter is referred to when setting the effect of the fluctuation display with respect to the remaining fluctuation of the score effect.

  The variable lottery counter 223bc is a loop counter whose value is periodically updated similarly to the above-described effect counter 223f, and the value is obtained when the specific effect number is selected using the number selection table 222bc. .

<Regarding the control processing in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a control process in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The eleventh embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that, when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed, the number of executions of the specific effect to be executed in the final variation of the score effect is set ( See FIG. 374). Then, in the variable display setting process during the score effect, a score to be displayed is determined, and when the accumulated value of the determined score reaches a predetermined amount (when the value exceeds the orbital value), an effect of stocking the charge amount is performed. The difference is in the setting (see FIG. 375). Further, the point effect is different in that a specific effect is not set for a change other than the final change in the score effect (see FIG. 375). Finally, for the variation pattern set in the final variation of the score effect, a process of setting a variation pattern based on the number of times of acquiring the charge amount and the number of times of performing the specific effect, and executing the specific effect. The difference is that a timing setting process is provided (see FIG. 376).

  First, the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351). When the score effect scenario setting process 2 (S2351) is executed, the same processes of S2352 to S2356 as the above-described score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) are executed. When the process of S2356 is completed, the number selection table 222bc Is read (S2371), and the number of specific effects corresponding to the current winning information is determined using the number selection table 222bc (S2372). The number-of-times selection table 222bc referred to here includes, as described with reference to FIG. 370, the type of change included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110, the current number of reserved balls, and the variable lottery. The value of the specific effect number is defined in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the value of the counter.

  Here, when the variation type is normal reach and the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, a score effect in which the number of specific effects is 0 or 1 is selected. Alternatively, a pattern in which no score effect is executed is selected. For example, if the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc is in the range of “0 to 4”, a score effect in which the number of specific effects is 0 is selected. The score effect in which the number of times of the specific effect is 0 is a score effect in which the score given during the score effect does not reach a predetermined number (6 points) and the specific effect is not executed. In this way, by configuring the score effect in which the specific effect is never executed, the expectation degree of the specific effect executed during the score effect decreases while increasing the chance of the score effect being executed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the variation type is per normal reach, it is defined that the maximum value of the number of specific effects that can be selected is one. This is because the effect period of the final score effect in which the specific effect is executed is 30 seconds, which is shorter than other fluctuation types (super reach, special reach). In this way, by defining the number of specific productions to be performed in advance corresponding to the production period of the final score production in which the specific production is performed, it is possible to prevent the production that gives the player a sense of incongruity from being performed. it can.

  Further, the number-of-times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment specifies that the larger the number of reserved balls (the longer the target period of the score effect), the more easily a specific effect is executed. With this, it is possible to make the player think that the number of points to be awarded in the scoring effect is increased according to the length of the period in which the pre-scoring effect is executed. It is possible to actively play a game in order to continue a large number of states.

  In addition, the number-of-times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment specifies that a specific effect number is to be selected for a variation type other than the normal reach, regardless of the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is correct. Thereby, the production result of the final score effect (the lottery result of the special symbol corresponding to the final score effect) is given to the player in advance by the score given during the score production (the number of stocks acquired during the preliminary score production). It can be suppressed from being detected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, it is defined that the number of specific effects is selected regardless of the result of determination as to whether or not the specific effect is to be selected. May be specified. In this case, for example, it is preferable that the number of specific effects selected in the case where the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number (for example, three) is made different depending on the result of determination as to whether the ball is correct. Specifically, in the case where the variation type is Super Reach B and the number of reserved balls is three, if the result of the hit determination is a hit, three times can be set as the specific effect number. It is preferable that the number of specific effects is not set to three.

  With this configuration, it is possible to predict the effect result of the current score effect by grasping the number of reserved balls when the score effect is executed and the number of times the specific effect is executed. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the number-of-times selection table 222bc of the present embodiment indicates that the variation type is the special reach having the highest jackpot expectation degree, and that the number of specific renderings is three when the number of reserved balls is two. It is configured to be executable only. When the number of reserved balls is two, the ratio of the number of specific effects being three is configured so that the variation type of special reach is the highest. This makes it possible to increase the jackpot expectation when a score effect that is surprising to the player is performed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4 in the special reach which is the fluctuation type with the highest jackpot expectation, the score effect in which the number of specific effects is 0 becomes easier to be selected than in the other fluctuation types. It is composed. As a result, even if the number of specific productions is 0, it is possible to give a big hit to the jackpot depending on the content of the final score production, so that the player can watch the score production without getting tired. Can be.

  Returning to FIG. 374, the description will be continued. After the process of S2372, it is determined whether or not to execute a score effect (S2359). If it is determined that the score effect is to be performed (S2359: Yes), that is, in the process of S2372, the specific effect number 0 in the number selection table 222bc is 0. When the value of the variable lottery counter 223bc that defines up to three times is acquired, the value of the determined specific effect number is set in the number storage area 223ba (S2373), and the value corresponding to the determined specific effect number is set. In the range, the total awarded score is determined and stored in the total awarded score storage area 223o (S2374).

  Here, the range corresponding to the determined value of the number of specific productions is, for example, when the value of the determined score production number is 0, the range of the total awarded score is “0 to 5”. If the number of “6 to 11” is two, “12 to 17” is determined as the range of the total awarded score, and if the number of times is “3”, “18” is determined as the range of the total awarded score. Then, the value of the predetermined lottery counter of the effect counter 223f is obtained from the range of the total awarded score corresponding to the determined number of times of the specific effect, and one score is determined as the total awarded score of the current scored effect. . When the processing of S2374 ends, the same processing as S2361 to S2363, which is the same as the above-described specific effect scenario setting processing (see FIG. 352), is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 375, the content of the pre-scoring effect setting process 2 executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 375 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of the preliminary score effect setting process 2. The pre-score effect setting process 2 (S2853) is different from the pre-score effect setting process (see FIG. 354) in that the content for determining the score to be given in the current variation is changed, and The difference is that the content of processing executed according to the score is changed.

  When the pre-scoring effect setting process 2 (S2853) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current scoring effect is a scoring effect whose winning / fault determination result is a hit (S3451). Then, when it is determined that it is a winning score effect (S3451: Yes), the display score in the variation is determined using the hit display score selection table 222be (S3452), and the process shifts to S3454. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3451 that the score effect is not a winning score effect (missing) (S3451: No), the display score in the variation is determined using the missing display score selection table 222bf (S3453). ), And proceeds to the process of S3454.

  Here, the contents defined in the hit score selection table 222be and the departure display score selection table 222bf described above with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373 will be described. The range of the points that can be awarded in the current variation is defined corresponding to the number of points that can be awarded in the current point production, and is obtained from a dedicated counter (not shown) of the effect counter 223f. One value (score) is selected from the range of points that can be awarded according to the set value (a loop counter that is periodically updated similarly to the effect counter 223f).

  In addition, a part of the range of points that can be given is configured to overlap in the hit score selection table 222be and the out-of-display score selection table 222bf. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the current score effect is a score effect corresponding to the winning based on the score given in one change display. On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations is 3 and the number of remaining displayable points is 13, only when the current point production is a score production corresponding to the winning, the display is performed. Seven points can be selected as points. In addition, it is configured such that the player cannot grasp the number of points that can be displayed (total awarded points) and the remaining points that can be displayed in the current point presentation.

  With such a configuration, only the player who has grasped in detail the rule that the score is given can grasp whether or not the current score production is a score production corresponding to the winning. Therefore, satisfaction can be provided to a player who has continuously played a game for a long period of time.

  In the process of S3454, the value of the assigned score counter 223p is read (S3454), the current display score and the value of the assigned score counter 223p are added (S3455), and the added value is the upper limit value (circular value (6 points)). ) Is determined (S3456). In the process of S3456, when it is determined that the circulation value has been exceeded (S3456: Yes), the number of times the circulation value has been exceeded is set in the notified number counter 223bb (S3457), and the flow shifts to the process of S3458.

  As the number of times set in the processing of S3457, for example, when the current awarded score is 4 points and the current display score is 5 points, the added score is 9 points, and the round value is set. Since the state once exceeded (charge 1: gauge 3), a value of 1 is added to the value of the notified number counter 223bb as the number of times the orbit has exceeded the circulation value. In the process of S3457, a value of at most 3 is added to the value of the notified number counter 223bb.

  In the process of S3458, a variation pattern accompanied by a score giving effect in a mode corresponding to the determined score is determined (S3458), and the value stored in the count storage area 223ba is made to correspond to the value added to the notified count counter 223bb. Is updated (S3459). As a result, the number of times of the specific effect that has not yet been reported to the number-of-times storage area 223ba can be grasped. Next, the processing of S3461 to S3463, which is the same as the processing of S3412 to S3414 of the pre-scoring effect setting processing (see FIG. 354) of the tenth embodiment described above, is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the content of the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854). This final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) is different from the final score effect setting process of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 355) in that the process of selecting a variation pattern is different.

  When the final score effect setting process 2 (S2854) is executed, first, the value stored in the number-of-times storage area 223ba (the number of specific effects executed in the current score effect) is read (S3551), and then the notification has been completed. The value of the number counter 223bb is read (S3552). Then, a variation pattern is selected using the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb based on the value of the number-of-times storage area 223ba and the value of the notified number-of-times counter 223bb (S3553).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 369, the specific variation pattern selection table 222bb includes the number of times the specific effect is executed (the number displayed in the maximum charge amount display area Db2b) and the specific information already notified in the preliminary score effect. A different variation pattern is selected in accordance with the number of effects (the number displayed in the acquired charge amount display area Db2a).

  Specifically, for each variation type, an effect mode in which the variation pattern 1 does not acquire the charge amount in the final score effect is set, and in the variation pattern 2, an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired once in the final score effect. However, the variation pattern 3 defines an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired twice in the final score effect, and the fluctuation pattern 4 defines an effect mode in which the charge amount is acquired three times in the final score effect.

  In this way, by changing the variation pattern selected in accordance with the number of times to be charged in the final score effect, the effect mode executed in the final score effect can be set without a sense of incongruity for the player. Note that the plurality of specified variation patterns 1 to 4 are of the same variation type, so that the variation periods executed are the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an effect mode of the scoring effect performed during the final score effect is set in accordance with each variation pattern.

  When the process of S3553 is completed, the timing for executing the specific effect on the variation pattern selected in the process of S3552 is set as a winning (S3554) using the execution timing selection table 222bd, and the final score effect setting described above is performed. The processing of S3555 and S3556, which is the same as the processing of S3510 and S3511 of the processing (see FIG. 355), is executed, and this processing ends.

  With such a configuration, the variation for executing the specific effect can be limited to the final variation (final score effect). Therefore, when performing the score effect, a variation display other than the final variation (during advance score effect). It is no longer necessary to prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns for. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the score effect.

  Further, a variety of variation patterns can be set for the variation display of the final variation (final score effect), and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the variation pattern can be set according to the number of times the specific effect is executed, the specific effect can be executed without discomfort, and the specific effect is set at a timing at which the variation pattern greatly develops. The effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, by notifying the number of times the specific effect is executed in advance, the fluctuation pattern executed in the final change and the number of times the specific effect is executed can allow the player to predict the jackpot expectation degree, The interest of the game can be improved.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a control process in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the twelfth embodiment, when it is determined that a score effect is to be performed, the pre-variation period of the score effect (from the special symbol change in which the score effect is started, the score effect is executed). One of a plurality of awarding scenarios having different awarding patterns as the awarding pattern of the points to be awarded during the special symbol change (final change) corresponding to the winning information determined to be different. Is set, and the timing of giving points is managed using the set giving scenario.

  Then, the effect mode of the effect display (final score effect) performed during the final fluctuation period of the score effect (the period in which the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the score effect is executed) The difference is that the selection is made based on the set grant scenario.

  Further, the present embodiment is different in that the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning indicated by the effect mode selected as the final score effect is made different according to the set giving scenario.

<Electrical Configuration in Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The twelfth embodiment is different from the tenth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the audio ramp control device 113 are changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the tenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 377 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, a scoring scenario selection table 222ca, a scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb, and a scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 347 (a)) in the tenth embodiment. are doing. The other configuration is the same as that of the tenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The scoring scenario selection table 222ca is a data table for selecting whether or not to execute a score effect, and selecting a score assignment pattern other than the final variation of the score effect (pre-score effect period), and transmitted from the main control device 110. In accordance with the variation type included in the received winning information command, the number of executions of the specific effect set in the current consecutive announcement effect, and the value of the second effect counter of the effect counter 223f, various assignment patterns (assignment). Scenario).

  Here, the scoring scenario selection table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scoring scenario selection table 222ca. In the scoring scenario selection table 222ca, three types of scoring patterns (giving scenarios) are defined as scoring patterns for scoring to be provided in the pre-scoring effect period of the score effect.

  Specifically, when the awarding scenario 1 is selected, during the pre-scoring effect period, it is easy to set a score awarding effect for evenly giving the total awarded score to be given during the current score effect. If the awarding scenario 2 is selected, the score awarding effect is likely to be biased in the first half of the advance scoring effect period, and if the awarding scenario 3 is selected, the awarding effect is provided in the latter half of the advance scoring effect. The score effect is set so that the score-giving effect is likely to be biased.

  The score rendering scenario selection table 222ca (see FIG. 378) is read out in S7007 of the score rendering scenario setting process 3 (S2351) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 described later, and the selected score rendering scenario (scenario) The corresponding scoring scenarios (giving scenarios 1 to 3) are selected according to the value of the specific effect number set in the type of A to C: FIG. 348) and the value of the second effect counter.

  Specifically, when the variation pattern type (notified by the winning information command) selected in the final variation is the special reach (hit) and the super reach A to C (hit), the number of times of the specific effect is one. When the production scenario (scenario A) is selected, the value of the second production counter is “0-39”, the provision scenario 1 is “40-89”, the provision scenario 1 is “90-99”. Is assigned to scenario 1 and the scoring effect scenario (scenario B) in which the number of specific effects is 2 is selected, the value of the second effect counter is set to “0 to 39”. In addition, the assignment scenario 2 is set, the assignment scenario 1 is set for “40 to 89”, and the assignment scenario 3 is set for “90 to 99”. If the value of the second effect counter is “0-39”, the assigned scenario 2 is assigned, the assigned scenario 1 is assigned to “40-89”, and the assigned scenario 3 is assigned to “90-99”. In the same manner, the type of the assignment scenario is assigned to each variation type as shown in FIG. 378.

  In this manner, by configuring the timing of giving the score to be given during the score rendering based on the predetermined giving scenario, the production mode of the score giving performance executed during the score rendering is intentionally set. Can be different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the total number of points to be awarded in the current score effect at an early stage, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  The scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb is a table for selecting a variation pattern to be executed during the pre-scoring effect period, out of the score effects, and includes a variation included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110. Various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the type, the remaining variation number of the score effect, and the type of the assignment scenario (assignment scenarios 1 to 3) set in the current score effect.

  Here, the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb. In the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb, variation patterns 1 to 3 having different scoring frequencies are defined for each variation pattern that can be executed during the pre-scoring effect period of the specific effect.

  In each of the variation patterns, variation pattern types corresponding to variation patterns 1 to 3 are set. Specifically, if the variation type is a short deviation, a short deviation 1 (corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1), a short deviation 2 (corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 2), and a short deviation 3 (corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 3) are respectively set. ing. Similarly, FIG. 379 shows that the numbers added to the end of the names of the respective fluctuation types correspond to the numbers of the types of the fluctuation patterns 1 to 3, respectively.

  Of the variation patterns 1 to 3 defined corresponding to each variation type, variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which a score giving effect capable of giving the most points is executed, and variation pattern 3 is given the most. This is a variation pattern in which the number of obtained points is reduced, and a variation in which the number of points to which the variation pattern 2 can be given falls between the variation pattern 1 and the variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern in which a score giving effect is executed.

  Specifically, when the variation type is short (7 seconds) and the giving scenario 1 is set, “short deviation 2” is selected regardless of the number of remaining fluctuations in the score effect. Similarly, as shown in the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb in FIG. 379, the assigned scenario is set according to the variation type specified by the variation pattern command, and the remaining number of variations up to the final variation is set. Thus, a variation pattern dedicated to the continuous announcement effect is selected.

  The scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (see FIG. 380) is a table for selecting a variation pattern to be executed during the final score production period (final variation in the continuous announcement production) out of the score productions, and Various variation patterns are defined corresponding to the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the device 110, the result of the winning / wrong determination, and the type of the grant scenario set in the current scoring effect.

  Here, the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc. In the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc, variation patterns 1 to 3 are defined for each variation type executed as the final score effect of the specific effect. Note that, similarly to the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb (see FIG. 379) described above, the variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which a scoring effect that can be given the most points is executed. The variation pattern in which the variation pattern 3 is the variation pattern in which the number of points to which the variation pattern 2 can be awarded is the least, and the score in which the variation pattern 2 can be awarded is between the variation pattern 1 and the variation pattern 3 described above. It is.

  Specifically, when the change pattern command of the normal reach to be hit is notified, and when the set giving scenario is the giving scenario 1, not only the value of the changing effect counter but also the normal 1 A fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1 among the normal reach to be won) is selected. In the case where the assignment scenario 2 is set, for the value “0-79” of the variable effect counter, the normal 2 (variable pattern corresponding to the variable pattern 2 out of the normal reach), the variable effect counter The normal 1 (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1 among the normal reach that can be won) is selected for each of the values “80 to 99”. When the giving scenario 3 is set, the value of the variable effect counter “0 to 79” is set to normal 3 (variable pattern corresponding to the variable pattern 3 among the normal reach that can be won) and the variable effect counter The normal 1 (a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern 1 among the normal reach that can be won) is selected for each of the values “80 to 99”.

  Even when the variation type of the out-of-normal reach is notified by the variation pattern command, the variation type to be executed is determined based on the assignment scenario set as shown in FIG. 380 and the acquired value of the variation effect counter. Selected. Super indicates the variation type of super reach, and Super 1 indicates that the variation type corresponding to variation pattern 1 in the super reach variation pattern is selected. Similarly, the number shown at the end of the type name indicates the number of the variation pattern type. Also, the special indicates that it is a special reach, and the end of the type name indicates the number of the variation pattern type.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 368 (b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the present embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, an additional scenario storage area 223ca is added to the tenth embodiment described above. The other configuration is the same as that of the tenth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The awarded scenario storage area 223ca is an area for temporarily storing the awarded scenario selected using the score awarding scenario selection table 222ca. The giving scenario stored here is referred to when setting a variation pattern corresponding to each variation display of the score effect.

  When it is determined in the score effect scenario setting process 3 (see FIG. 381) to execute a score effect (S7005 in FIG. 381), the selected scenario is stored in the assigned scenario storage area 223ca (S7005 in FIG. 381) (FIG. 381). S7008 in FIG. 381). Then, the stored giving scenario is referred to in the case of selecting a variation pattern using the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb in the pre-scoring effect setting process 3 (S2853 in FIG. 382) (see S7103 in FIG. 382). In the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854 in FIG. 383), the process is referred to when selecting a variation pattern using the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (see S7206 in FIG. 383).

<Regarding the control processing in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, a control process according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the twelfth embodiment, for each of the above-described embodiments, when it is determined that a score effect is to be executed, a score giving pattern (giving scenario) to be given during the score effect is selected (see FIG. 381), and the selection is made. Based on the provided scenario, a variation pattern of each variation display during the pre-scoring effect period of the score effect is selected (see FIG. 382), and a variation pattern of the variation display in the final score effect of the score effect is selected (FIG. 383). Reference).

  First, the contents of the score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) executed in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This score effect scenario setting process 3 (S2351) is different from the score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) of the tenth embodiment in that a process for executing a score effect for a currently displayed variable display is performed. This is different from the deleted point in that a process of setting an awarding scenario when it is determined that a score effect is to be performed is added. Other contents are the same, and detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

  When the score rendering scenario setting process 3 (S2351) is executed, first, the process of S7001 is performed which is the same as S2352 of the above-described tenth embodiment, and then the same process as that of S2357 and S2358 of the above-described tenth embodiment is performed. The processing of S7002 and S7003 is executed. After finishing the process of S7003, the value of the specific effect number corresponding to the selected score effect scenario is stored in the number storage area 223ba (S7004).

  After the processing of S7004 is completed, it is determined whether or not to execute the score effect (S7005). If it is determined that the score effect is not to be executed (S7005: No), the score effect scenario of the above-described tenth embodiment is performed. The same processing of S7014 and S7022 as the processing of S2364 and S2365 of the setting processing (see FIG. 352) is executed, the effect inhibition flag 223j is set to ON (S7010), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7005, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed (S7005; Yes), the scoring scenario selection table 222ca is read (S7006), and the awarding scenario corresponding to the current winning information is stored in the scoring scenario selection table. A selection is made using 222ca (S7007). Next, the selected assigned scenarios (assigned scenarios 1 to 3) are stored in the assigned scenario storage area 223ca (S7008), and the same S7009 as S2361 of the score effect scenario setting process (see FIG. 352) of the tenth embodiment described above. Is executed, the above-described processing of S7010 is executed, and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the content of the preliminary score effect setting process 3 (S2853) will be described. FIG. 382 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary score effect setting process 3 (S2853). The pre-score effect setting process 3 (S2853) executes a process for setting a variation pattern of each variable display during the pre-score effect in the present embodiment, and performs the pre-score effect in the eleventh embodiment described above. For the setting process 2 (see FIG. 375), the process of setting the variation pattern during the pre-scoring effect is set, and the variation pattern is set based on the assignment scenario set in the score effect scenario setting process 3 (see FIG. 381). The difference is that the process is changed to

  When the pre-score effect production setting process 3 (S2853) is executed, first, the application scenario stored in the application scenario storage area 223ca is read (S7101), and then the value of the effect variation counter 223m is read (S7102). . Then, the current variation pattern is selected using the scenario variation pattern 1 selection table 222cb (S7103), and the assigned score corresponding to the selected variation pattern is determined (S7104).

  After the processing of S7104 is completed, the value corresponding to the determined score is added to the value of the assigned score counter 223p (S7105), and is the same as S3456 to S3458 of the above-mentioned advance score effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 375). The processing from S7106 to S7108 is executed, the value of the effect variation counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S7109), and this processing ends.

  Next, the content of the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 383 is a flowchart showing the content of the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854). The final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) executes a process for setting a variation pattern of the final score effect in the present embodiment. When the final score effect setting process 3 (S2854) is executed, first, the value of the notified number counter 223bb is read (S7201), and the value stored in the number storage area 223ba is read (S7202). Then, the value read in S7201 is subtracted from the value read in S7202, and it is determined whether a difference exists (S7203).

  If it is determined in the process of S7203 that there is a difference (the number of the set specific production times that has not been notified yet) (S7203: Yes), the value of the assigned score counter 223p is read (S7204), and the difference value is corresponded. The difference providing score to be calculated is calculated (S7205). That is, for the currently awarded score, the number of awarded scores required to notify all of the preset number of specific effects is calculated.

  After the process of S7205 is completed, the current variation pattern is selected using the scenario variation pattern 2 selection table 222cc (S7206). Next, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a hit variation (S7207). If it is determined that the variation is a hit variation, an effect mode corresponding to the awarded score calculated in the process of S7205 is set (S7208). The process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S7207, if it is determined that the current variation is not a hit variation (S7207: No), the effect giving score is calculated within a range not reaching the next lap value (upper limit) (S7209), and the difference is calculated. The awarded score and the effect awarded score are summed up (S7210), the process of S7208 described above is executed, and this process ends. In other words, in the present embodiment, as the final score effect, when the current fluctuation is not a hit fluctuation, the processes (S7209 and S7210) for aggressively giving a score within a range where the number of specific effects does not increase are executed. It is configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the number of specific effects performed during the final score effect will increase.

<About the first production example showing the production mode of the variable display in each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 384 to FIG. 388, an effect mode set by the variable display in each of the above-described embodiments will be described in detail. As described above, each variable display executed when the score effect is executed is configured such that a plurality of score giving effects can be executed during the variable display, and the total giving effect set as the score effect is set. Various scoring effects are set based on scores, scenarios, and the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 384 (a), a description will be given of a period configuration of each variation pattern corresponding to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 384 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a period configuration of each variation pattern corresponding to the variation type of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 384 (a), each variation pattern includes a notice period (first notice period, second notice period) before the reach mode is displayed, and a reach period (first reach period) in which the reach mode is displayed. , A second reach period, and a special reach period).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 384 (b), a description will be given of an effect mode that can be executed during a notice period (pre-reach period) in each variation pattern. FIG. 384 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect mode that can be executed during the notice period (pre-reach period).

  As shown in FIG. 384 (b), it is defined that four types of effect modes (advice A to notice D) can be executed during the notice period, and a score is given for each effect form. The number of productions (number of suggestions for giving P) that indicate whether or not, the number of times that a score can be given (number of P displays), the range of the number of points that can be acquired for one P display (the number of acquired Ps) / Display), and whether or not the effect is to operate the frame button 22 (whether or not there is an operation).

  Specifically, the notice A is an effect in which the number of times of P provision is twice, the number of times of P display is 0 to 2, the number of acquired Ps / display is 1 to 2, the operation of the frame button 22 is unnecessary, and the notice B Is an effect in which the number of P suggestions is 5 times, the number of P displays is 1 to 5 times, the number of acquired Ps / display is 1, and the operation of the frame button 22 is not required. , The number of P display times is one, the number of acquired P / display is 1 to 8, and the operation of the frame button 22 is not required. This is an effect in which the number of P / display is 0 to 18, and the operation of the frame button 22 is required.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 385, an effect mode that can be executed during the reach period in each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 385 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the effect mode that can be executed during the reach period.

  As shown in FIG. 385, it is defined that five types of production modes (reach A to reach E) can be executed during the reach period, and it is suggested whether or not a score is given for each production mode. The number of productions (number of suggestions for giving P), the number of times that a score can be given (number of times of P display), the range of the number of points that can be acquired for one P display (number of acquired Ps / display), Whether or not the effect is to operate the frame button 22 (whether or not there is an operation), the degree of expectation, and the period during which the effect can be executed are defined.

  Specifically, when the production mode is reach A, the number of suggestions for giving P (points) is “2”, the number of P displays is “0 to 2”, and the number of acquired Ps / display is “1 to 6”. ", No operation announcement effect (presence or absence of operation) is selected (no operation announcement effect is set). In addition, as an explanation of the reach A, it is possible to obtain a high score (point) as the degree of expectation of giving P, but there is a possibility that the point may be zero. The degree of expectation of the jackpot is “low”, which is set low. The executable period in which the effect mode of reach A is executed is set to the first reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)). As for the reach B, as shown in FIG. 385, similarly to the effect mode of the reach A, the configuration is such that the content of each score giving effect is selected. As shown in FIG. 385, the effect mode of reach B is an effect mode in which at least one point (point) can be obtained. However, obtaining a high score is set more difficult than the effect mode of reach A. I have.

  The reach effect C has a middle degree of expectation of hitting, and can be executed in the first reach period and the second reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)). The reach effect D has a high degree of expectation of hit. , Can be executed during the first reach period and the second reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)), and the reach effect E has a very high degree of expectation per hit, and has a special reach period (see FIG. 384 (a)). Is set to be executable.

<Electrical configuration in the first production example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the first effect example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 386 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first effect example. In the first effect example, the final pattern for selecting the variation pattern corresponding to the final score effect executed in the final variation of the score effect is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a in the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113. The difference is that a variation pattern selection table 222da is added. Other configurations are the same as those in the twelfth embodiment described above, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the contents specified in the final variation pattern selection table 222da in the first effect example will be described with reference to FIG. 387. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the final variation pattern selection table 222da. In the final variation pattern selection table 222da, the variation type included in the winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 as the variation pattern of the final variation in the score effect (the variation pattern in which the final score effect is executed) In accordance with the result and the remaining number of points (difference) to be awarded in the current point production, the production mode (score provision production) set in each period of the variation pattern is defined.

  More specifically, when the variation type is normal reach, the result of the determination is a hit, and the difference value is 1, the variation pattern to be selected is a variation pattern to be selected during the first advance notice period. ) Is not set, “notice B (given score 1 (1P))” is set as the score giving effect in the second notice period, the effect mode of “reach B” is defined in the first reach period, and the second reach During the period, a variation pattern in which the effect mode is not selected is selected.

  Similarly, if the difference is 2 to 5, no notice effect (score giving effect) is set in the first notice period, and “notice A” is set as the score imparting effect in the second notice period, An effect mode of “reach C” is defined in the reach period, and a variation pattern in which an effect mode is not selected in the second reach period is selected. If the difference is 6, “advance notice D” is set as the scoring effect in the first notice period, “notice A” is set as the scoring effect in the second notice period, and “reach” is set in the first reach period. The effect mode of "D" is defined, and a variation pattern in which no effect mode is selected in the second reach period is selected. Similarly, when the result of the determination is incorrect, the notice type or the effect mode is selected corresponding to each period as shown in FIG. 387. The super indicates a fluctuation pattern of the super reach, and corresponds to each period (correspondence, departure) of the pass / fail judgment result similarly to the normal reach. The final variation pattern selection table 222da is set so that the notice type or the effect mode is selected.

  The special indicates a variation pattern of the special reach, and a special reach (an effect mode that is not set for another variation pattern) is set over the first reach period and the second reach period.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device 113 in First Production Example>
In the first effect example, a final score effect setting process 4 is executed in place of the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 383) executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment described above. Is different. Here, the content of the final score effect setting process 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 388 is a flowchart showing the content of final score effect setting processing 4. In the final score effect setting process 4 (S2854), the process content for selecting a variation pattern using a difference-giving score is different from the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 383) described above. Are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 388, when the final score effect setting process 4 (S2854) is executed, the same processes of S7201 to S7205 as the final score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 383) described above are executed. Then, when the process of S7205 is completed, the final variation pattern is selected using the final variation pattern selection table 222da (S7251), and this process ends.

<About the second production example>
The following effects may be used for the above-described embodiments. For example, in the above-described eleventh embodiment, a configuration in which the number of specific effects executed in the final variation of the score effect is notified to the player in advance is used. A configuration that can notify the player of the execution timing of the effect in advance may be used. Here, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 395, a description will be given of a second effect example in which the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect can be notified to the player in advance.

  In the second effect example, the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect is a final effect. It is configured to execute a notification effect (countdown effect) capable of notifying the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed by the fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the player to predict in advance the effect content to be executed in the final score effect of the score effect, so that the player can perform a game having a sense of expectation. it can.

  In addition, the present pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a long fluctuation time can be easily selected when a special jackpot is won. Therefore, depending on the length of the period notified in the countdown effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the current point effect is executed in response to the special symbol which is won in the jackpot.

  First, with reference to FIG. 389, the contents of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second effect example will be described. FIG. 389 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the countdown effect is executed in the last pre-change, and FIG. 389 (b) is a schematic diagram. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen of a countdown effect at the time when the final fluctuation is started.

  As shown in FIG. 389 (a), when the countdown effect is executed in the last change, the timing at which the specific effect is executed in the next change (final change of the score effect) is changed to the first countdown display area Dg10a and the It is displayed in the 2 countdown display area Dg10b.

  Here, in the second effect example, as the countdown effect described above, a plurality of execution timings of the specific effect executed in the final variation of the score effect can be displayed, and the score effect is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. The execution timing of the specific effect that is executed earlier in the final variation is displayed, and the execution timing of the specific effect that is executed later in the final variation of the score effect is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 389 (a), “15 seconds” is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a, and the characters “under preparation” are displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b. Here, a method of setting display contents displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a and the second countdown display area Dg10b as a countdown effect will be briefly described.

  In the variation pattern corresponding to the final score effect executed in the final variation of the score effect of the second effect example, a period in which a specific effect can be set at a point where a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the variation. (For example, the first notice period end timing (see FIG. 384 (a))).

  Furthermore, when the countdown effect is started based on the fluctuation time counted by the fluctuation time counter 223h and the fluctuation pattern set by the fluctuation display setting process, the remaining fluctuation time of the last pre-change can be measured (determined). Means are provided. Then, a value (time) obtained by adding the remaining fluctuation time of the last previous effect and the predetermined period from the start of the fluctuation of the final fluctuation is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. With such a configuration, even when the execution timing of the countdown effect (the timing for determining to execute the countdown effect) is made different, it is possible to accurately notify the player of the timing at which the specific effect is executed.

  When time elapses from the state shown in FIG. 389 (a) and the final change is executed, “10 seconds” is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a as shown in FIG. “30 seconds” is displayed in the 2 countdown display area Dg10b. This makes it possible to notify the player of at least the number of specific effects performed during the final change and the timing at which each specific effect is executed, so that the player can grasp the timing at which the specific effect is executed. The final scoring effect can be executed in the state where the player is in the state of being scored.

  Here, as the effect contents which can be executed as the specific effect, there are effects in which a score is given to change the display mode of the storage gauge Dg, and effects in which the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot is increased, so that the effect is notified by a countdown effect. Depending on whether the given timing (the execution timing of the specific effect) is, for example, a timing at which it is difficult to give a score (a timing at which the score giving effect is not executed), the specific effect to be the target of the countdown effect is determined. Can be predicted by the player. Therefore, the score effect can be enjoyed to the end while the player predicts the result of the current score effect in advance.

  In the second effect example, a countdown effect for notifying the execution timing is used for a plurality (two) of specific effects. However, the number of the specific effects for which the execution timing is notified is not limited to this. One or three or more may be used. Further, in the second effect example, the period until the specific effect is executed is displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a, but “in preparation” is also displayed in the first countdown display area Dg10a. Is also good.

  In addition, in the second effect example, although the countdown effect based on the actual time measurement is used to notify the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final change, the specific effect executed in the final change is used. Any configuration may be used as long as the execution timing can be suggested to the player. For example, the times until a plurality of specific effects are executed may be calculated, and the calculated times may be summed up and displayed. With such a configuration, it is not possible to accurately grasp the timing at which each specific effect is executed, but since the total time can be grasped by the player, during the final fluctuation (final score effect) Each time a specific effect is executed, the timing and the number of times the remaining specific effects are executed can be predicted. In this case, it is preferable that the number of specific effects performed during the final change (final score effect) is not notified to the player.

  In addition, the above-described countdown effect in which the variable display mode is variably displayed so that the period until the specific effect is executed is short (for example, within 2 seconds) or long (for example, 30 seconds). May be used instead of. Further, during the pre-final change, “preparing” is displayed in the second countdown display area Dg10b (see FIG. 389 (a)), and when the final change is executed, the character “preparing” is displayed as a jackpot winning. The display mode (for example, “chance”) that increases the degree of expectation may be changed. With this configuration, a surprising effect can be provided to a player who is supposed to be notified of the timing at which the specific effect is executed. Note that, in this case, it is preferable that the display mode is changed to a display mode that shows contents more advantageous to the player than various effects that can be executed as the score giving effect. Thereby, even if the specific effect recognized as being executed is not executed, it is possible to suppress the player from being dissatisfied.

  As described above, by executing the countdown effect of the second example, it is possible to predict the jackpot expectation while grasping the progress of the countdown effect and the progress of the score effect. Can be increased.

  In addition, when the countdown display mode is not displayed for all the specific effects, but some of the countdown display modes are displayed as “under preparation”, the countdown display mode is set in correspondence with the execution timing of each specific effect. It is preferable to display such that the player can grasp only the execution order of each specific effect. Thereby, it is possible to predict at which timing a specific effect corresponding to the countdown display mode displayed as “under preparation” is executed based on the countdown display mode corresponding to another specific effect.

  Furthermore, the period displayed in the countdown display area may be configured to be variable when the final variation of the score effect is executed (when the final score effect is executed). Thereby, a surprising effect can be provided to the player. In this case, it is preferable that the period displayed in the countdown display mode be long. In the pachinko machine 10 in the second production example, since the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased as the fluctuation time becomes longer, the period displayed in the countdown display area may be changed so as to be longer. Thus, the jackpot expectation can be increased.

  When changing the countdown display mode displayed in the countdown display area, it is preferable to provide a determination means for determining whether or not to change the countdown display mode in accordance with the operation of the operation means (frame button 22) by the player.

  In the second effect example, in order to execute the above-described countdown display, in the change display immediately before the final change of the score effect (last change display), it is determined whether or not to execute the countdown display. Is executed, and when it is determined that the countdown display is to be executed, the remaining period of the change (pre-final change) is calculated, and a predetermined period of the final change (for example, 10 seconds), that is, the final change is A process is performed to display a total period obtained by adding a period that has elapsed for any variation type in the countdown display area.

  Then, when executing the final variation of the score effect (final score effect), it is determined whether or not the countdown effect is being executed. If it is determined that the countdown effect is being executed, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the change (for example, 10 It is preferable to configure so that one specific effect is executed after (seconds). With this configuration, a countdown effect can be easily performed.

  Further, in the above-described eleventh embodiment, all periods of the variation pattern corresponding to the final variation of the score effect are set as the period in which the score effect can be executed. The first predetermined period (for example, the first 10 seconds) may be set so that the specific effect is not executed, and may be set as a pseudo specific effect period for a countdown effect. With this configuration, in the case of executing the countdown effect in the last change before the specific effect, in addition to the remaining period of the change, the timing of 1 from the range of the first 10 seconds of the change time of the final change is set. Even if the total period is selected and set, there is no problem in setting the fluctuation pattern of the final fluctuation. Therefore, a specific effect can be easily set.

  When a new charge is acquired during the final change of the score effect (the given score reaches a predetermined amount), the specific effect may be executed immediately, or the specific effect may be performed within the change. The period until the execution may be displayed as a countdown. Also, a plurality of countdown displays may be executed at the timing when one specific effect is executed. That is, when the specific effect is executed after 10 seconds, a plurality of countdown displays may be displayed in different display modes indicating after 10 seconds. In this case, for example, the count speed of each countdown display may be made different, so that the player is made aware of the same timing as the timing at which the specific effect is executed approaches. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to gaze at the display mode of the plurality of countdown displays, and it is possible to enhance the effect.

  Furthermore, the above-described countdown effect is used as an effect indicating the execution timing of a specific effect performed during the final change of the score effect, but may be used for other purposes. When a big hit is won, a predetermined timing during the big hit game executed after the final change may be indicated by a countdown display. With this configuration, it is possible to set a countdown display mode longer than the variation time of the final variation of the score effect.

<Electrical configuration in the second production example>
Next, an electrical configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second effect example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 390 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second effect example, and FIG. 390 (b) is a schematic diagram in the second effect example. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing contents defined in a RAM of the audio ramp control device 113. The second effect example is different from the above embodiments in that a first countdown flag 223ea and a second countdown flag 223eb are added.

  The first countdown flag 223ea is a flag for indicating that the countdown effect is to be executed, and the score given by the score giving effect executed during the last-minute change is the lap value (the storage gauge Dg becomes MAX). When the value exceeds the value (S7106 in FIG. 392: Yes), it is set to ON in the countdown setting process to be executed (see S7151 in FIG. 393) (see S7304 in FIG. 393). Then, it is referred to in the final score effect setting process 5 (see S2854 in FIG. 394) for setting the final score effect executed during the final change (S7271 in FIG. 394), and it is determined that the setting is on. (S7271 in FIG. 394; Yes), the countdown effect is set in the executed countdown effect setting process (S7272 in FIG. 395), and then turned off (see S7402 in FIG. 395).

  The second countdown flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that a condition for displaying the second countdown display area Dg10b as a countdown effect has been established, and is provided by a score awarding effect executed during the last change. If the score exceeds the orbital value (the value at which the storage gauge Dg becomes MAX) (S7106 in FIG. 392: Yes), the second countdown effect is executed in the countdown setting process (see S7151 in FIG. 393). When it is determined (S7305 in FIG. 393: Yes), it is set to ON (see S7307 in FIG. 393). Here, the determination in S7305 is executed by determining whether or not the round value has been exceeded twice in the process in S7106 of the final score effect rendering setting process (see S2872 in FIG. 392). Then, in the final score effect setting process 5 (see S2854 in FIG. 394) for setting the final score effect executed during the final change, the countdown effect setting process (S7272 in FIG. 395) is referred to ( If it is determined that it is set to ON (S7405 in FIG. 395) (S7405 in FIG. 395: Yes), the second countdown effect is set (S7407 in FIG. 395), and then set to OFF (FIG. 395). See S7402).

<Regarding control processing of voice lamp control device 113 in second production example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 391 to FIG. 395, the content of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second effect example will be described. In the second effect example, as described above, the final score effect is executed in the final change of the score effect, and the execution timing of the specific effect executed during the final score effect is notified to the player during the execution of the final pre-change. A process for executing a countdown effect is performed.

  First, the contents of the effect setting process 5 (S2704) in the second effect example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect setting processing 5 (S2704). This effect setting process 5 (S2704) is different from the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353) in the tenth embodiment described above in that a special effect is provided in the last pre-change, which is the change just before the final change in the score effect. The difference is that the setting process is executed, and the other elements are the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect setting process 5 (S2704) is executed, the same processes of S2851 and S2852 as in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 353) described above are executed, and in the process of S2851, the value of the effect variation counter 223m is set to 0 or less. If it is determined that it is not too large (S2851: No), the same processing of S2855 to S2858 as the above-described effect setting processing 2 (see FIG. 353) is executed, and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect variation counter is 1 (S2852: Yes), the final score effect setting process 5 is executed (S2873), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2852 that the value of the effect variation counter is not 1 (S2852: No), then it is determined whether the value of the effect variation counter is 2 (S2871), and the effect variation is determined. When it is determined that the value of the number-of-times counter is 2, the final pre-scoring effect setting processing is executed (S2872), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2871 that the value of the effect variation counter is not 2 (S2871: No), the preliminary score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 382) is performed in the same manner as in the twelfth embodiment described above. The process is executed (S2853), and this process ends. With this configuration, as a process for setting the effect content of each change during the score effect, a process of setting the final score effect corresponding to the final change, and a process of setting the final front effect corresponding to the last change before And a process of setting a pre-scoring effect corresponding to other fluctuations can be executed differently.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the contents of the final previous score effect setting process (S2872) executed in the effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 391) will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the contents of the final pre-scoring effect setting process (S2872). In the final pre-scoring effect setting process (S2872), a countdown setting process for executing the above-described countdown effect is executed. Other processes are the same as the above-described pre-score effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 382), and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the final previous score effect setting process (S2872) is executed, the same processes of S7101 to S7109 as the above-described pre-score effect effect setting process 3 (see FIG. 382) are executed. In this process, after performing the process of S7108, a countdown process is performed (S7151), and when the process of S7151 is completed, the process proceeds to the above-described process of S7107. That is, in the present effect example, a process for executing a countdown effect when the lap value (upper limit value of the gauge) is exceeded in the last pre-variation.

  In this effect example, since it is configured to execute the countdown effect only in the last change before, for example, when performing the change of the special symbol, when performing the special symbol change start process by the main control device 110 Even if the variation pattern (variation time) selected according to the value of the special symbol holding ball counter is changed, a countdown effect can be executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 393, the content of the countdown setting process (S7151) executed in the final previous score effect setting process (see FIG. 392) will be described. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of the countdown setting process (S7151). In the countdown setting process, a countdown period corresponding to the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the final score effect is set, and a display command for displaying the countdown effect is set.

  When the countdown setting process (S7151) is executed, first, the remaining period from the countdown start timing, that is, the remaining remaining fluctuation period is calculated from the timing at which the countdown setting process is executed in the last pre-change (S7301), and the calculation is performed. 10 seconds are added to the remaining period thus set (S7302). In this effect example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 395, when a countdown effect is executed, a specific effect (pseudo-specific effect) 10 seconds after the start of the final fluctuation (after the end of the first notice period). ) Is executed. Therefore, by adding 10 seconds to the remaining period in the process of S7302, it is possible to set the execution timing of the specific effect in the final variation that is the next variation.

  After the process of S7302 is completed, a display first countdown command corresponding to the added seconds is set (S7303), and the first countdown flag 223ea is set to ON (S7304). Then, it is determined whether or not the second countdown effect is to be executed (S7305). If it is determined that the second countdown effect is to be executed (S7305: Yes), a display second countdown command indicating “under preparation” is set. (S7306), the second countdown flag 223eb is set to ON (S7307), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S7305 that the second countdown effect is not to be executed (S7305: No), the processing of S7306 and S7307 is skipped, and this processing ends. Here, the processing content of S7305 will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 389, in the present effect example, when the round value is exceeded by the score given in the last change before, the player is notified of the execution timing of the specific effect executed in the last change. It is configured to execute a countdown effect for performing. Further, when a large number of points are given in the last change, as a result, when the number of rounds exceeds two times, the execution timing of a plurality of (two times) specific effects executed in the last change is determined as a countdown effect. It is configured to execute a countdown effect for notifying the user.

  Then, in the process of S7405, a final before-change effect in which a large number of points are given in the last-last change is set, and the process is executed by determining whether or not the round value has been exceeded twice in the before-last change. . Specifically, this determination method is determined based on the value of the notified number counter 223bb updated in the final score effect rendering setting process (see FIG. 392).

<About the second operation effect example of the operation score effect in each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 396 to 402, another example of the operation effect performed in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first operation effect example described above with reference to FIG. 359 to FIG. 365, the effect mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect set in an overlapping manner is changed according to the execution timing of each notice effect. Was configured as follows. In addition, the first announcement effect is an operation effect that is executed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22, and the validity period of the operation effect (the predetermined operation on the frame button 22) is the second operation effect. By setting so as to overlap with the notice effect, the effect mode executed in each notice effect is changed according to the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

  More specifically, the first period before the validity period of the operation effect (the predetermined operation on the frame button 22) is performed before the second notice effect is executed, the second period during the second notice effect period, Is divided into a third period after the second notice period, a period in which the player operates the frame button 22 corresponds to which period, and an effect mode of each notice effect is determined based on the discrimination result. Was configured to be variable.

  On the other hand, in the second operation effect example, a plurality of notice effects are configured to be independently set, and the effect mode (notice content) of each independently set notice effect is determined. A configuration is used in which the execution timing of each announcement effect is adjusted based on the determination result. With this configuration, when a plurality of preview effects are executed for one effect target (for example, a score-giving effect), the content of the effect of the advance effect that is executed first is changed to the content of the effect of the advance effect that is executed later. It is possible to solve the problem that, when the content has a higher degree of reliability than the effect content, the meaning of the notice effect to be executed later is lost and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  Also, compared to the above-described first operation effect example, it is not necessary to change the effect mode. Therefore, when a plurality of advance effects perform an advance effect using different display modes, each advance effect is variable. Since it is not necessary to provide a display mode of the contents to be performed, the amount of data for executing the announcement effect can be reduced.

  Furthermore, in the second operation effect example, at least one of a plurality of preview effects set independently is an operation effect executed when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22. In addition, when the timings are set at overlapping timings, the execution timing of each announcement effect is made different based on the timing at which a predetermined operation is performed on the frame button 22. Thereby, even if the notice effect in which the execution timing of the notice effect is changed by the operation of the player is used, each notice effect can be executed in an appropriate order.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 396 (a), the contents of the effect of the second operation effect example will be described. FIG. 396 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a flow of an effect in an example where a plurality of notice effects are overlapped. According to the example shown in FIG. 396 (a), the first announcement effect executed based on the predetermined operation on the frame button 22 and the second announcement effect overlap. Specifically, the first announcement effect is displayed in the above-described operation effect executed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 360 (a), and the second announcement effect is displayed in the small area Ds2 in FIG. 360 (a). An effect similar to a notice effect using a treasure box is executed.

  In the first announcement effect, a 10-second frame button operable range (operation effective period) is set after a 2-second notification period (a period for notifying a player that the effect of operating the frame button 22 is executed). After that, an announcement effect display period of 8 seconds is set, so that the announcement effect is configured as a total of 20 seconds. Here, when the player operates the frame button 22 within the frame button operable range for 10 seconds, the first announcement effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 396 (a), the second preview effect notifies the player of the period during which the 5-second preview effect is performed (the second preview effect period) and that the second preview effect is to be performed. The second advance notice period is divided into a second advance notice period 1 (10 seconds) and a second advance notice period 2 (8 seconds). Make up. When the second advance notice effect is executed alone, the advance notice effect is executed for 5 seconds at the timing when the second advance notice period (18 seconds in total) has elapsed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 396 (b), the relationship between the operation timing of the frame button 22, which is the operation means, the execution timing of the first announcement effect, and the execution timing of the second announcement effect will be described. FIG. 138 (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the operation timing of the frame button and the notice display timing. As shown in FIG. 396 (b), in the present second operation effect example, when the first advance effect and the second advance effect are set to overlap as shown in FIG. If the first notice display timing of the effect is different from the first notice display timing, that is, if the player operates the frame button 22 within the frame button operable range of the first notice effect, the first notice display timing is different from the second notice display timing. I'm making it.

  Specifically, if the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is “first period”, “after the first period” is set as the first advance display timing, and “second advance notice” is set as the second advance display timing. After period 1 "is set. If the timing at which the frame button 22 was operated is “second period”, “immediately after” is set as the first notice display timing, and “same as the first notice display” is set as the second notice display timing. Is done. Note that executing the second advance display at the same timing as the first advance display timing is a concept including a slight error that the player cannot recognize, and the range in which the player can recognize the same display is displayed. Is fine.

  If the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is “third period”, “immediately after operation” is set as the first notice display timing, and “after the second notice period 2” is set as the second notice display timing. Is set. When the frame button is not operated within the frame button operable range (10 seconds) of the first advance notice effect, the first advance notice display is not executed, and the second advance notice period is set as the second advance notice period. "After 2" is set.

  As described above, when the frame button 22 is operated during the first period in the frame button operable range, the advance notice display of the first advance effect is executed after the advance notice display of the first advance effect is executed. . Also, when the frame button 22 is operated during the second period, the notice display of the first notice effect and the notice display of the second notice effect have the same timing (including an error of a degree that the player recognizes that the notice is displayed in the same manner). ). Furthermore, when the frame button 22 is operated during the third period, the advance notice display of the second advance effect is already executed (the advance display of the second advance effect is displayed at the time after the second advance notice period 2 has elapsed). Therefore, the notice display of the first notice effect is executed after the notice display of the second notice effect is executed.

  With this configuration, when a plurality of preview effects are duplicated, the execution timing of each of the plurality of preview effects set in duplicate based on the timing at which the preview display of one of the preview effects is performed is set. Therefore, a plurality of notice effects can be executed in an appropriate order.

  In addition, when the above-described second announcement effect is executed alone, an advance notice period of 18 seconds (a period in which the treasure box of FIG. 361 (a) is displayed) passes after an advance notice display of the second announcement effect ( 362 (a) is set in advance so as to be executed. However, as shown in FIG. 396 (a), when the operation announcement effect (the first announcement effect) is executed in duplicate, When the frame button 22 is operated during the first period or the second period in the operable range of the frame button of the operation advance announcement effect (first advance effect), the advance notice of the second advance effect is issued during the second advance notice period. The display (see FIG. 362 (a)) can be executed.

  Furthermore, during the second advance notice period 1 of the second advance notice period that notifies in advance that the second advance effect is to be executed, the advance notice display of the second advance effect is performed regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Is not executed, it is possible to reliably secure a period for informing in advance that the second announcement effect is to be executed.

<Electrical configuration of second operation effect example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 397, an electrical configuration in the second operation effect example will be described. The second operation effect example is different from the ninth embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Other configurations are the same as those in the ninth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 397 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. In the second operation effect example, a first comment advance selection table 222ea and a second comment advance selection table 222eb are added to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 288 (a)) in the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the ninth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first comment preview selection table 222ea is a data table for selecting the production mode (preliminary content, execution timing) of the first comment preview, which is the preview production (first preview production) used in the second operation production example. In addition, a plurality of presentation modes are defined corresponding to the value of a first comment lottery counter (not shown) of the presentation counter 223f. The first comment preview selection table 222ea is referred to when the effect mode of the first comment preview is selected in the comment preview setting process (see FIG. 399) (S7501 in FIG. 399).

  The second comment preview selection table 222eb is a data table for selecting the presentation mode (preview content, execution timing) of the second comment preview, which is the preview presentation (second preview presentation) used in the second operation presentation example. In addition, a plurality of presentation modes are defined corresponding to the value of a second comment lottery counter (not shown) of the presentation counter 223f. The second comment preview selection table 222eb is referred to when selecting the effect mode of the second comment preview in the comment preview setting process (see FIG. 399) (S7502 in FIG. 399).

  The above-mentioned first comment notice selection table 222ea and second comment notice selection table 222eb are configured by different data tables, respectively, and are configured such that the effect mode is selected independently.

  FIG. 397 (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. In the second operation effect example, a first comment flag 223ea and a notice duplication flag 223eb are added to the RAM 223 (see FIG. 288 (a)) in the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those in the ninth embodiment, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The first comment flag 223ea is a flag for determining that the first comment notice is to be executed, and indicates that the first comment notice is executed by being set to ON. The first comment flag 223ea is set to ON when it is determined that the first comment notice is to be executed (S7503 in FIG. 399: Yes) in the comment notice setting process (see S2951 in FIG. 399) described later (FIG. 399). S7504), is referred to in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (see FIG. 400) (see S3051 in FIG. 400), and is turned off after the display notice command is set in the notice mode setting processing 6 (see FIG. 401). This is set (see S3077 in FIG. 401).

  The notice duplication flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that the first comment notice and the second comment notice have been set in an overlapped period, and is turned on to set the first comment notice and the second comment notice. Indicate that they have been set for the same period. This notice overlap flag 223eb is set to ON (S7509 in FIG. 399: Yes) when it is determined that there is an overlap period in the comment notice setting process (see S2951 in FIG. 399) described later (S7509), and the frame button is set. It is referred to in the input monitoring / production process 6 (see FIG. 400) (see S3052 in FIG. 400), and is set to off after setting the display advance command in the notice mode setting process 6 (see FIG. 401) (FIG. 401). S3077).

<Regarding control processing of second operation effect example>
Next, a control process in the second operation effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second operation effect example, a process for setting a comment notice is executed when a comment notice is included in the fluctuation pattern executed during the score effect.

  First, with reference to FIG. 398, the content of the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) will be described. FIG. 398 is a flowchart showing the content of the score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803). This score giving effect setting process 6 (S2803) is different from the score giving effect setting process of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 323) in that a process related to comment notice is added instead of the operation score effect. Otherwise, it is the same. The same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  When the score providing effect setting process 6 (S2803) is executed, first, the same processes as S2901 to S2910 as the above-described score providing effect setting process (see FIG. 323) are performed, and after the process of S2910 is completed, Then, a comment notice setting process is executed (S2951), the process of S2908 described above is executed, and this process ends.

  Here, the content of the comment notice setting process (S2951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 399 is a flowchart showing the contents of the comment notice setting process (S2951). In the comment advance setting process (S2951), a process for setting whether or not to execute a comment advance in the variation pattern determined this time and a process of setting the effect mode (advance content, execution timing) of the comment advance to be executed are described. Be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 399, when the comment notice setting process (S2951) is executed, first, the first comment notice is selected using the first comment notice selection table 222ea (S7501), and then the second comment notice is selected. The second comment notice is selected using the table 222eb (S7502). Then, it is determined whether the execution of the first comment notice has been selected in the processing of S7501 (S7503), and if it is determined that the first comment notice is to be executed (S7503: Yes), the first comment flag 223ea is turned on. It is set (S7504). Next, it is determined whether execution of the second comment notice has been selected in the processing of S7502 (S7504), and if it is determined that the second comment notice is to be executed (S7505: Yes), The contents of the notice selected as the one comment notice and the contents of the notice selected as the second comment notice are determined (S7506).

  Then, a first comment notice execution period and a second comment notice execution period are set based on the determination contents of S7506 (S7507), and then the first comment notice execution period and the second comment notice execution set this time are set. It is determined whether there is a period that overlaps with the period (S7508). If it is determined in the process of S7508 that there is an overlap period (S7508: Yes), the notice overlap flag 223eb is set to ON (S7509), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no overlap period in the process of S7508 (S7508: No), the process of S7509 is skipped and the present process ends. Here, if it is determined in the process of S7508 that there is no overlap period, each comment preview is executed based on the first comment advance execution period and the second comment advance execution period set in the process of S7507. .

  Next, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S2107) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 314) of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / production process 6 (S2107). In the frame button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S2107), processing for displaying an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 at each timing on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing 6 (S2107) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the press of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3001). If it is determined that the press of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3001: No), This processing ends as it is. If it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3001: Yes), it is determined whether the first comment flag is on (S3051). If it is determined that the first comment flag is on (S3051: Yes), the operated flag is set to on (S3003), and it is determined whether the notice duplication flag is on (3052). If it is determined that the notice duplication flag is ON (3052: Yes), the notice mode setting processing 6 is executed (S3053). This notice mode setting process 6 (S3053) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the processing of S3053 is performed, the processing of S3004 is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3052 that the notice duplicate flag is OFF (S3052: No), the processing of S3004 is executed. In the processing of S3004, a display press command corresponding to the button press is set (S3004). On the other hand, in the process of S3051, when it is determined that the first comment flag is off (S3051: No), it is determined whether or not another operation period is being performed. If it is determined that it is another operation period, the process of S3004 is executed. After performing the process of S3004, the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3005, if it is determined that the current time is outside the other operation period (S3005: No), the process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 401, a notice that is one of the button input monitoring and effect processing 6 (S2107) executed in the main process (see FIG. 314) of voice lamp control device 113 in the second operation effect example. The contents of the mode setting process 6 (S3051) will be described. FIG. 400 is a flowchart showing the notice mode setting process 6 (S3051). In the notice mode setting process 6 (S3051), a process of setting various effects based on the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed is executed.

  When the notice mode setting process 6 (S3051) is executed, first, it is determined whether the pressing timing is the first period (S3053). If the pressing timing is the first period (S3053: Yes), the execution period of the first comment notice is set after the first period (S3071). The execution period of the second comment advance notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 1 (S3072). After that, the process of S3055 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3053 that the pressing timing is outside the first period (S3053: No), it is determined whether the pressing timing is within the second period (S3056). If it is determined that the pressing timing is within the second period (S3056: Yes), execution of the first comment notice is set (S3073). The execution of the second comment notice is set (S3074). After that, the process of S3055 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3056 that the press timing is outside the second period (S3056: No), execution of the first comment notice is set (S3075). Thereafter, the execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second prior notice period 2 (S3076).

  In the process of S3055, a display advance notice command corresponding to the set mode is set (S3055). After that, the first comment flag and the notice duplication flag are set to off (S3077), and then this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 402, the content of the effect update process 6 (S2112) in the second operation effect example will be described. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the contents of effect update processing 6 (S2112). In the effect update process 6 (S2112), a process for setting an execution period of a notice effect performed when the frame button 22 is not operated during the execution period of the first notice effect is executed.

  When the effect update process 6 (S2112) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the first comment flag 223ea is set on (S3171). If it is determined that the first comment flag 223ea is set on (S3171: Yes). Then, it is determined whether the second period has elapsed (S3172). Here, whether or not the third period has been determined is determined using the time measured by the variable time counter 223h included in the RAM of the sound ramp control device 113.

  In the process of S3172, when it is determined that the second period has elapsed (S3172: Yes), it is determined whether the operated flag 223r is on (S3173), and it is determined that the operated flag 223r is not on. If it has been done (S3173: No), it is next determined whether or not the notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S3174).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3171 that the first comment flag 223ea is not on (S3171: No), the process of S3172 has not passed the second period, that is, the present is the first notice production period. When it is determined that the operation is in progress (S3172: No), in the process of S3173, when it is determined that the operated flag 223r is set to ON (S3173: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3174, when it is determined that the notice duplication flag 223eb is set to ON (S3174: Yes), the execution period of the second comment notice is set after the end of the second advance notice period 2 (S3175), and the notice is given. The duplication flag 223eb is set to off (S3176), the first comment flag is set to off (S3177), and the process ends. That is, when the first comment notice and the second comment notice are set to overlap as described above with reference to FIG. 396 (a), the operation of the frame button 22 with respect to the first comment notice as an operation effect is performed. Is operated for a predetermined period (until the second period elapses), the execution period of the second comment notice is set.

  As described above, in the ninth embodiment, as an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a special symbol lottery, a continuous effect executed across a plurality of special symbol variations can be set. It is composed. In this way, by suggesting the lottery result of the target special symbol using the fluctuation period of the special symbol executed before the target special symbol, a longer-term effect for the player is provided. Can be provided to enhance the production effect. In addition, since it is possible to execute a continuous effect without highlighting a lottery result of a special symbol (for example, a miss) at each variation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player's willingness to play is reduced. it can.

  Furthermore, an effect (score giving effect) for giving a score for changing predetermined stage information (gauge amount) to different stage information (gauge amount), and a case where the stage information becomes specific stage information (gauge amount) Reaches 6 and a specific effect (charge effect) that can be executed when the charge amount is accumulated) and a score effect that can be executed. And, in the score effect which is executed as a continuous effect as a whole, the lottery information is variable and the more the amount of charge is accumulated, the higher the expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol to be the target of the score effect is a big hit is higher. It is configured to be.

  In this way, by executing the score giving effect such that the stage information is gradually changed during the period in which the score effect is being executed (a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods), the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning to the player is increased. It is possible to visually notify, and it is possible to suppress getting tired of the game at an early stage, and to enhance the effect of the production.

  In addition, in the above-described ninth embodiment, as a score giving effect, a score is displayed (given) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the special symbol variation display, and the displayed (given) score is displayed. When a fixed amount (for example, 6) is accumulated, a specific effect (charge effect) is executed. Thereby, by grasping the score displayed on the third symbol, the presence / absence of execution of the specific effect and the execution timing of the specific effect can be predicted, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the above-described ninth embodiment, as a method of giving a score to be given during the score effect, a total score is set when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, and each time a variable display is executed during the score effect. , And is configured to set the assigned score so as not to exceed the total assigned score. This makes it possible to smoothly set the effect mode during the point effect.

  Further, in the above-described tenth embodiment, as a method of giving a score to be given during the score effect, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, the number of times of the specific effect to be executed during the score effect is set in advance. It is configured to set the total score corresponding to the set number of specific effects. Thereby, since the total score can be set within a range in which the number of times the specific effect is executed is the same, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In the eleventh embodiment described above, the specific effect is configured to be executed only during the final change of the score effect, that is, only during the change display corresponding to the winning information command which has been determined to execute the score effect. In the variable display in which the score effect is executed, a stock effect for securing the number of times the specific effect is executed is executed.

  With this configuration, the score effect can be enjoyed to the end, and it is not necessary to perform the setting for executing the specific effect in the variation display other than the final variation, so that the variation display setting process is easily performed. be able to.

  In addition to the configuration of the above-described eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the score effect is to be executed, it is determined that the score effect is to be executed based on the pre-variation period of the score effect (special symbol change in which the score effect is started). As an awarding pattern of the points awarded during the special symbol change (final change) corresponding to the winning information), one awarding scenario from a plurality of awarding scenarios having different awarding patterns is set and set. Is configured to manage the timing of awarding the score using the given awarding scenario, and a final variation period of the score effect (a period in which the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information determined that the score effect is executed). The effect mode of the effect display (final score effect) executed during the process is selected based on the set giving scenario.

  This makes it possible to intentionally make the production mode of the score giving effect executed during the score giving effect different. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the total number of points to be awarded in the current score effect at an early stage, and to enhance the effect of the effect.

  Further, the present embodiment is different in that the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning indicated by the effect mode selected as the final score effect is made different according to the set giving scenario.

  With this configuration, the jackpot expectation can be varied depending on the contents of the process of the score effect (score providing process) and the change display (final score effect) executed in the final change. It is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation until the end of the score production.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the score effect is configured to be executed by using a plurality of variations of the special symbol. However, the score effect performed in each of the above-described embodiments is performed within one variation of the special symbol. May be executed. In this case, for example, one change pattern of the special symbol is divided into a plurality of blocks, and a setting means for setting the plurality of blocks into a first half block and a second half block is provided. It is preferable to execute a score effect and to execute a final score effect in a period set in the latter half block. With this configuration, the presentation mode of the second half block can be set based on the presentation mode of the first half block of one special symbol, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, the technical concept described in each of the above-described embodiments may be combined with a configuration in which a score effect is executed within one special symbol change.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration for setting a plurality of scenarios is provided. However, an effect for suggesting (notifying) the set scenario to the player may be provided. This allows the player to grasp the various scenarios set during the score effect, so that it is possible to provide a pleasure of inferring the result of the score effect.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration is used in which the gauge amount (step information) is varied when a score is given in the score giving effect. In addition, for example, no score is given in the score giving effect. When an effect (gassing effect) is executed (for example, a score-giving effect in which 0 points are displayed), a measuring means for measuring the number of gassing effects is provided, and the number of times measured by the measuring means is a predetermined number ( For example, a variable means for changing the gauge amount (stage information) when the number of times reaches 5) may be provided. Thereby, even if the gassing effect is executed in the score giving effect, the possibility of changing the gauge amount (stage information) can be provided, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when it is determined that a score (for example, one point) is to be given in the score giving effect, a means for determining whether a predetermined condition (for example, an operation on the operation means (frame button 22)) is established is provided. An effect switching means may be provided for switching between a normal score giving effect and an effect using gaseous information based on whether the condition is satisfied.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the score (total score) to be given in the current continuous announcement effect and the number of specific effects to be executed (total number of specific effects) are determined. It is configured to determine the effect mode of each variable display executed during the continuous announcement effect according to the determined content. Then, as an effect mode of each variable display, the upper limit is set to the total score or the total number of specific effects described above, and the number of remaining fluctuations to be executed during the continuous announcement effect and whether the winning information to be subjected to the current consecutive announcement effect is determined. Based on the determination result, the score to be awarded and the number of specific effects are determined by lottery from a plurality of ranges.

  With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately set the effect mode of each variable display performed during the continuous announcement effect with respect to the continuous announcement effect, and to set various effect modes. . However, since the score is randomly set for each variable display unit executed during the continuous preview production, the score is intentionally set so as to have relevance (story) throughout the continuous preview production. There was a problem that it could not be given.

  In order to solve the above-described problem, for example, when it is determined that the continuous announcement effect is to be executed, the result of determining whether or not the winning information is the target of the continuous announcement effect, or the number of variable display times executed during the continuous announcement effect ( Scenarios are set so that the scoring pattern in the entire continuous announcement production period has relevance (story) according to the number of special symbols) and the type of fluctuation included in the winning information that is the target of the continuous announcement production. May be.

  As a scenario set here, specifically, a scenario in which a large number of total scores are given in the first half of the continuous announcement production (scenario A), and a scenario in which a large number of scores are given in the second half of the continuous announcement production (scenario B) A scenario (Scenario C) in which the total score is evenly provided during the continuous announcement performance, a scenario (Scenario D) in which the total score is randomly provided during the continuous announcement performance, and the like may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to give relevance (story) to the score given during the continuous announcement effect. Therefore, the effect can be enhanced.

  In the case where the above-described scenario (score giving scenario) is provided, it is preferable that an effect mode corresponding to the set score giving scenario is set. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the continuous announcement effect.

  In the above-described example, the scenario is set for the scoring pattern in the entire period of the continuous announcement effect. However, as another configuration, when setting the effect mode of each variable display during the continuous announcement effect. Alternatively, a scenario may be set so as to give relevance (story) to the score given in the variable display period, and a variable display effect corresponding to the scenario may be executed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the third symbol display for displaying the result of the lottery of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations are used. For example, of the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol and the display means for displaying the slave symbol, which are emphasized and displayed to the player. Further, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used as the configuration of the display unit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player, and a left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. The left-handed game aiming at is executed, but the target area of the game board 13 may be made different depending on the game state. May execute a right-handed game. Further, a game in a different game state may be executed while aiming at the same area.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame buttons 22 and 23 for determining that the operation unit has been operated by the player performing a pressing operation are used as the operation unit that can be operated by the player. The lever may be used to determine that the player has operated by tilting the player left or right or back and forth, or that the player has operated by touching or approaching the lever. It is also possible to use a touch sensor-type operation unit that can be distinguished, a wireless operation unit that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiments, the description has been given using the pachinko machine (simultaneous variation type) in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are simultaneously changed. However, the present invention may be applied to other types of gaming machines. Good. As other types of gaming machines, for example, a gaming machine of a type in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the order in which they have won the starting opening, or a change in one special symbol changes the other special symbol There are gaming machines of the type which are executed prior to the fluctuation of the game machine.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Each of the above embodiments may be configured by combining all or a part thereof.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Characteristic A group> (two-time loop configuration)
A state setting means capable of at least setting a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and granting an advantage advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. A first privilege game to be executed and a privilege game execution means for executing at least a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, wherein the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, Setting the second advantageous state after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous game is set to the first advantageous game. Setting the first advantageous state after execution of the bonus game Gaming machine A1, characterized in that the at it.

  At least a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, at least a first privilege game for giving a benefit advantageous to the player and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game has been executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. Thereby, even after the first privilege game is executed in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set, so that the state advantageous to the player can be continuously set. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is configured to execute the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, A gaming machine A2 for setting the specific state after execution of a third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. Thus, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuation of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that gambling of the game becomes too high.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the first advantageous state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the first advantageous state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the second advantageous state, so that the advantage given to the player is excessive. Has the effect of being able to suppress that

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the bonus game executing means is improved so that the privilege game is easily executed. A gaming machine A4 characterized by having means.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the first advantageous state or the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means, the privilege game is improved by the privilege game executing means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect the bonus game to be executed.

  In one of the gaming machines A1 and A4, a starting condition determining unit that can determine whether a first starting condition and a second starting condition different from the first starting condition are satisfied, and the starting condition determining unit. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the determination that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, wherein the privilege game execution means includes a specific lottery performed by the lottery means. A gaming machine A5 for executing the privilege game based on a determination that a result has been established.

  According to the gaming machine A5, the following effect is exhibited in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1 or A4. That is, the establishment of the first start condition and the second start condition different from the first start condition are each determined by the start condition determining means. The lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the first condition or the second start condition is satisfied by the start condition judging means. The privilege game is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the determination by the lottery means that the specific lottery result is established. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, when the advantageous state is not set by the setting unit, the gaming machine A5 includes a regulating unit that regulates establishment of the second starting condition.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3 or A4, if the setting means does not set the advantageous state, the establishment of the second starting condition is regulated by the regulating means. There is an effect that the disadvantageous state can be easily set.

  In any one of the gaming machines A3 to A5, first identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the first start condition and a second identification information indicating a lottery result of the lottery means based on establishment of the second start condition. (2) dynamic display means for dynamically displaying each of the identification information on the display means, the dynamic display means being capable of simultaneously dynamically displaying the first identification information and the second identification information. A gaming machine A6, which is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines A3 to A5. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the first start condition and the second identification information indicating the lottery result of the lottery means based on the establishment of the second start condition are respectively displayed by the dynamic display means. Dynamically displayed on the means. The first identification information and the second identification information are dynamically displayed simultaneously by the dynamic display means. Thereby, the dynamic display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be efficiently executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine A7, wherein the gaming machine A5 or A6 has releasing means for releasing the regulation by the regulating means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the regulation by the regulating means is released by the releasing means based on the setting of the specific advantageous state by the setting means. There is an effect that a game can be played while expecting that a specific advantageous state is set.

  A privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to a player, and an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Setting means, and control means for facilitating the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means based on the setting of the advantageous state by the setting means, even when the bonus game is executed next. A gaming machine A8 characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine A8, a privilege game which is advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game executing means. When the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means, an advantageous state in which the privilege game is easily executed by the privilege game executing means is set by the setting means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the control means by the setting means even when the bonus game is executed next. It can be set to continue over the straddle. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

<Feature B group> (Advantageous and disadvantageous switching, preventing disadvantageous side)
A first lottery game based on having a first entrance where game balls can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and having entered the first entrance. A lottery game executing means for executing and executing a second lottery game based on having entered the second entrance, and a second lottery game which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game. Switching means for switching, based on a predetermined opportunity, a state 1 and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game, and a lottery game disadvantaged to the player switched by the switching means A gaming machine B1 comprising: a suppression unit that suppresses execution of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the first lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the ball entering the first entrance. In addition, the second lottery game is executed by the lottery game execution means based on the fact that the ball has entered the second entrance that is different from the first entrance. A switching unit switches between a first state in which the second lottery game is more disadvantageous to the player than the first lottery game and a second state in which the second lottery game is more advantageous than the first lottery game based on a predetermined opportunity. Can be The execution of the lottery game disadvantageous to the player switched by the switching means is suppressed by the suppression means. Accordingly, the execution of the disadvantageous lottery game is suppressed by the suppression means, so that the player can easily execute the advantageous lottery game. Therefore, there is an effect that a disadvantage that significantly disadvantages the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, first identification information indicating a lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on a display unit, and second identification information indicating a lottery result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on a display unit. Dynamic display means, and dynamic display period determining means for respectively determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, The dynamic period determining means is configured such that a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched disadvantageously by the switching means is longer than a dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched advantageously. A gaming machine B2 for facilitating determination of a dynamic display period.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. Further, the second identification information indicating the result of the lottery of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display unit is determined by the dynamic display period determination unit. The dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched disadvantageously by the switching means is dynamically determined to be longer than the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the lottery game switched to advantage. The determination is facilitated by the means. Thereby, execution of the game switched disadvantageously can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine a game that is set to be advantageous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, there is a launching means capable of launching a game ball to the game area, and an adjusting means for adjusting the firing force of the game ball fired by the launching means based on the operation of the player, The first entrance and the second entrance are arranged at a position where a game ball fired by the firing means can enter the state in which the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. A gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1 or B2. That is, the game ball is fired by the firing means in the game area. The firing force of the game ball fired by the firing means is adjusted by the adjusting means based on the operation of the player. The first ball entrance and the second ball entrance are arranged at positions where game balls fired from the firing means can enter the state in which the player performs the same operation on the adjusting means. This allows the player to execute a lottery game that is advantageous to the player without changing the operation of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be made easier.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, the game machine has a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player, When the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game than in the first lottery game, the privilege giving means is set to have a higher rate of giving a benefit that is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 to B3. That is, when the lottery result of the first lottery game or the second lottery game is a specific lottery result, a privilege is provided to the player by the privilege provision means. When a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery game rather than in the first lottery game, the grant ratio of the benefit that is advantageous to the player is set higher. Thereby, when the game in the second lottery game is set to be advantageous to the player, it is possible to set a more advantageous state to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine B4, when the specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, the privilege granting unit may select one of the first privilege and a second privilege more advantageous than the first privilege as the privilege. A gaming machine B5 for providing one of them, wherein the switching means switches to the second state based on the second privilege being provided by the privilege providing means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B4. That is, when a specific lottery result is obtained in the first lottery game, either one of the first privilege and the second privilege that is more advantageous than the first privilege is given by the privilege granting means. Based on the fact that the second privilege has been granted by the privilege granting means, the switching means switches to the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be changed.

  In the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the second lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine B6, characterized in that the rate at which the set benefit set to be more likely to result in a specific lottery result is set higher than the benefit for the first lottery game.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B4 or B5, the privilege given to the second lottery game by the privilege granting means includes the first lottery game or the first lottery game until a specific condition is satisfied. The second lottery game is executed because the rate at which the setting privilege set such that the second lottery game is likely to be the specific lottery result is set higher than the privilege for the first lottery game. This has the effect of increasing the player's expectations.

  In the gaming machine B6, the bonus provided to the second lottery game by the bonus granting means is configured so that at least the set bonus is provided. B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, at least the set benefit is configured to be provided to the benefit provided to the second lottery game by the benefit providing means. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that the second lottery game will be executed can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B7, a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first ball inlet are connected to the first flow path. The gaming machine B8, which is disposed in each of the second flow paths, and wherein the second entrance is disposed in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect provided by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the first entrance is disposed in the first flow path and the second flow path, and the second entrance is provided in the second entrance. Since they are arranged in two channels, there is an effect that a state in which only the first lottery game is executed can be set.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed, the suppression means reports information indicating that a disadvantageous lottery game is being executed. A gaming machine B9 characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the suppressing means indicates that when a lottery game disadvantageous to the player is executed, the disadvantageous lottery game is executed. Since the notification information is notified, there is an effect that the player can play the game more easily.

  The gaming machine B10 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, wherein the lottery game execution means is configured to be able to execute the first lottery game and the second lottery game simultaneously.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are simultaneously executed by the lottery game execution means, so that the game can be played efficiently. There is an effect that can be.

<Feature C group> (Electric tube configuration)
The first lottery is executed based on the first entrance where game balls can enter, the second entrance different from the first entrance, and the fact that the first entrance has been entered. And a lottery means for executing a second lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on that the game ball has entered the second ball entrance, Variable means that can be changed between a first state that regulates the entering ball and a second state that facilitates the entering of the ball more than the first state, determining means that performs a determination based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the determination A variable control means for changing the variable means from the first state to the second state when a specific determination result is determined by the means; and Regulating means for regulating entry and regulating the execution of the second lottery. Tricks machine C1.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the ball having entered the first ball entrance. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entrance, a second lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery is executed by the lottery means. The first variable state is changed by the variable means between a first state in which the ball enters the first ball entrance and a second state in which the first state is easier than the first state. When a specific determination result is determined by the determination unit that performs the determination based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the variable unit is changed from the first state to the second state by the variable control unit. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the regulation unit regulates the entry into the second entrance or the execution of the second lottery. Thereby, the state advantageous to the player and the state disadvantageous to the player can be set by the restricting means. Therefore, it is possible to give a change of interest to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance, and when the variable means enters the second state, the variable means enters the second entrance by the variable means. The regulating means is disposed so as to prevent the flowing of the game ball flowing down the flowing channel, and the regulating means sets the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, whereby the second incoming ball is set. A gaming machine C2 for restricting a ball from entering the mouth.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1. That is, the second entrance is disposed below the first entrance. When the variable means is in the second state, the variable means is arranged to prevent the game balls flowing down the flow path entering the second ball entrance from flowing down. By setting the variable means to be easily changed to the second state by the variable control means, the ball entering the second entrance is regulated by the regulating means. Thereby, it is possible to regulate the entry to the second entrance with a simple configuration. Therefore, there is an effect that the configuration of the gaming machine can be suppressed from becoming complicated.

  The gaming machine C1 or C2 has a first flow path through which a game ball can flow, and a second flow path different from the first flow path, and the first entrance is provided with the first flow path. And the second flow path, wherein the variable means is disposed at the first entrance provided in the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first entrance is disposed in the first channel and the second channel, respectively. Since the variable means is disposed at the first ball entrance arranged in the second flow path, there is an effect that the game balls flowing down the second flow path can be easily made to enter the first ball entrance.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a result of the lottery by the first lottery and second identification information by the second lottery, and the dynamic display thereof Means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the dynamic display period of the second identification information dynamically displayed on the means, wherein the control means controls the dynamic of the second identification information. A gaming machine C4 wherein the execution of the second lottery is restricted by making it easy for the dynamic display period determining means to determine a long dynamic display period as a target display period.

  According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3. That is, the first identification information indicating the lottery result by the first lottery and the second identification information by the second lottery are dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information dynamically displayed on the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. Since the long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period for the second identification information is easily determined by the dynamic display period determination unit, the execution of the second lottery is restricted by the restriction unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the execution can be restricted to the second lottery with an easy configuration.

<Feature D group> (Continuous up configuration)
A first entrance into which a game ball can enter, a second entrance different from the first entrance, and a first entrance based on a game ball entering the first entrance. A lottery means for executing a lottery and performing a second lottery which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery based on that the game ball has entered the second entrance; Dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information indicating a lottery result on a display means, and dynamically displaying second identification information indicating a lottery result of the second lottery on a display means; A dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information to be executed by the dynamic display means; A dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is easily determined as the dynamic display period. Setting means capable of setting a state and a short state in which a dynamic display period shorter than the long state is easily determined, and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped in a specific stop display mode When displayed, a privilege granting means for granting a benefit that is advantageous to the player to the player, and a lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery as a privilege granted to the player by the privilege granting means. A privilege determining means for determining at least one of a first privilege and a second privilege having a smaller number of privileges than the first privilege based on the first and second identification information. When one is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode different from the specific stop display mode. Stop display And a setting means for making it easier for the privilege determining means to determine the second privilege in the first lottery when the long state is set by the setting means. Gaming machine D1.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the first lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first entrance. A second lottery, which is more advantageous to the player than the first lottery, is executed by the lottery means based on the game ball having entered the second entrance. First identification information indicating a lottery result of the first lottery is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. The second identification information indicating the lottery result of the second lottery is dynamically displayed on the display by the dynamic display. The dynamic display period of the first identification information and the second identification information executed by the dynamic display means is determined by the dynamic display period determination means. A long state in which a dynamic display period longer than the dynamic display period of the first identification information is likely to be determined by the dynamic display period determining means as a dynamic display period of the second identification information, and a dynamic state shorter than the long state. The short state in which the display period is easily determined is set by the setting unit. When the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided to the player by the privilege providing means. Based on the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery, at least the first privilege and the second privilege with less privilege than the first privilege are provided as the privilege to be given to the player by the privilege granting means. Either is determined by the privilege determining means. If either one of the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, and the other identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display is changed to a specific stop display mode. A stop display mode different from the above is stopped and displayed by the stop display means. When the long state is set by the setting unit, the second bonus is easily set by the setting unit by the privilege determination unit in the first lottery. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect the execution of the second privilege with few privileges. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be further improved.

  The gaming machine D1 has a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states based on predetermined conditions, and the setting means has a specific game state set by the game state setting means. The gaming machine D2, characterized in that the second privilege is easily determined by the privilege determining means in the first lottery.

  According to the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1. That is, one game state from a plurality of game states is set by the game state setting means based on a predetermined condition. On condition that a specific game state is set by the game state setting means, the second benefit is easily determined by the setting means in the first lottery by the privilege determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be more expected to determine the second privilege when a specific game state is set.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, setting means for setting an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily granted by the privilege granting means, and setting of the advantageous state by the setting means. The gaming machine D3, further comprising: a control unit that makes it easier for the setting unit to set the advantageous state even when the privilege is next given based on the fact that the bonus has been given.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means, the setting state sets an advantageous state in which the privilege is easily given by the privilege giving means. Based on the fact that the advantageous state has been set by the setting means, the advantageous state can be easily set by the setting means even when the next privilege is given by the control means. There is an effect that the setting can be easily made and the interest of the game can be further improved.

<Feature E group> (low probability change rate of non-priority is set low)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine E1 wherein at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine E1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1, a launching means capable of firing a game ball based on an operation of a player, a first ballistic means capable of entering a game ball fired from the firing means, and a first ballistic means thereof A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a ball entry assisting means for allowing game balls to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means First discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on that a game ball has entered the ball, and second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. And first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination unit are simultaneously dynamic. Display means capable of being displayed, the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result, or When the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed, a privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means to play a game. A game state in which one of a first state which is set so as to allow the game and a second state which is set so as not to allow a game ball to enter the second ball entry means to play a game. Setting means, and when the first state is set by the game state setting means and when the second state is set, when the specific second determination result is obtained, the determining means A gaming machine E2 having a ratio varying means for varying a ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E1, an advantageous pattern is set when the first state is set by the gaming state setting means and when the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set to be low, the game is made to enter the second ball entry means in the second state. There is an effect that even if cheating is performed, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability in the second state to be lower than that in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine E1 or E2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when an illegal operation is performed in the second state.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, a first flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means, and A gaming machine E4, comprising: a second flow path through which game balls can easily enter the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the ball entry rate of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is changed by the flow path, so that the game balls flow down. There is an effect that the game can be changed by the flowing channel, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means may be placed in the second variable ball-in means. Guidance means for guiding to the variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and the period is shorter than the predetermined period. The gaming machine E5, wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to enter the second variable ball entry means. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Feature F group> (Advantageous and disadvantageous symbols can be changed during the opening period)
A first variable means that can be changed between an open state in which the game balls can pass and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game balls to pass than the open state, and a first variable means disposed downstream of the first variable means; A second variable ball-in means capable of entering a game ball having passed through one variable means, a specific area in which a game ball having entered the second variable ball-in means can enter, and a game ball in the specific area A privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the passing, and the first variable means and the second variable ball entry as a privilege game advantageous to the player based on establishment of a specific condition. A variable control means for varying the means with a predetermined variable pattern, and a determination means for determining the variable pattern varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable means is determined by the determination means. The variable pattern includes the When the variable means is in the open state, it is possible that the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means can enter the specific area, and that the game ball can enter the specific area rather than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine F1 wherein at least a difficult disadvantageous pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable means and the second variable ball-in means, so that the player can be interested in the variable pattern. There is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entering means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and the first entering means A second ball entry means, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered into the second ball entry means. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the ball, first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit that performs the second determination. Display means capable of simultaneously and dynamically displaying the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the determination, and displaying the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result. When the second identification information indicating the second identification information is displayed on the display unit, A privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game, and a game state setting for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition when the privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. Means, and ratio setting means for variably setting a ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set and a ratio at which the disadvantageous pattern is set, in accordance with the game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine F2, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the ratio at which the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set is changed in accordance with the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means. There is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved by varying the degree of expectation for the privilege given to the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, a first probability is determined as a probability that the first determination unit or the second determination unit determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and the first probability is determined based on the first probability. A probability setting means for setting at least a high second probability, and the privilege provided by the privilege providing means is such that the second probability is set by at least the probability setting means. Gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area. By having an interest in whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that a problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are set so that at least the period from the start of the privilege game to the opening of the first variable means is different. A gaming machine F4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the player can determine the start of the bonus game at the timing when the first variable means is opened, so that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be determined. Can be hardly recognized by the player, and even if the pattern is disadvantageous, it is possible to expect the player to enter a specific area.

  In the gaming machine F4, the gaming machine F4 has guiding means for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first variable entering means to the second variable entering means for a predetermined period or more, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable entering means has A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the gaming machine F5 is at least set so that the second variable ball-in means is changed from the open state to the closed state within the predetermined period from the opening state.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F4, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably suppress the passing of gaming balls to a specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Feature G group> (Advantageous and disadvantageous symbols can be changed in the interval period)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine G1, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern have at least a period from the time when the first variable pitching means changes to the closed state to the time when the second variable pitching means changes to the open state. A gaming machine G2 that is set differently.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1, there is an effect that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means is inserted in the second variable ball-in means. Guiding means for guiding to the means for a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is such that the second variable entering means is changed to the closed state after the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state, and the second variable A gaming machine G3 wherein the ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G1 or G2, there is an effect that it is possible to make it more difficult to cause the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and a A second ball entry means different from the one ball entry means, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and the second ball entry means A second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on that the game ball has entered the first discriminator; first identification information indicating a first discrimination result of the first discrimination by the first discriminating means; Means for dynamically displaying simultaneously the second identification information indicating the second determination result of the second determination by the means; and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the specific identification information. When the second identification information indicating the second determination result is displayed on the display unit A bonus game execution means for executing the privilege game, a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the bonus game execution means, and the game A gaming machine G4 comprising: ratio variable setting means for variably setting the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern in accordance with the gaming state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in accordance with the gaming state. Accordingly, there is an effect that the degree of expectation that the game ball enters the specific area can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result is higher than the first probability. There is a probability setting means capable of setting one of two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine G5, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area. By making the player interested in whether or not the game ball can be passed through, it is possible to suppress a problem of getting tired of the game.

<Characteristic H group> (New zero attacker)
A condition judging means for judging the satisfaction of the specific condition, and an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition judging means. A first variable ball-in means which is variable to the first variable ball-in means, a second variable ball-in means arranged in parallel with the first variable ball-in means, and a game in the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means Privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the ball having entered the ball, and the first variable ballistic means and the second variable ballistic means based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. Privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the ball entry means are varied in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied in the open state; the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means Between the first variable ball entry means is closed If the on purpose made, the gaming machine and wherein the time-to-game ball reaches the second variable ball entrance means those having a guide means for more than a predetermined period H1.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance to be opened as a bonus game is performed, and the flow path of the gaming ball is not formed by using two variable winning devices, so that further gaming is performed. It was demanded that the entertainment be improved. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine H1, even when the first variable ball-in means is in the closed state, the period until reaching the second variable ball-in means by the guiding means is set to be equal to or longer than the predetermined period. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball flows down without entering the second variable ball-in means before the ball-in means is opened, and the interest of the game is lowered.

  In the gaming machine H1, the effect execution means includes: an open effect indicating that the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means is in the open state when the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means is in the open state; When the ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are each in the closed state, the closed variable effect has at least a closed performance indicating that it is in the closed state, and the closed performance is within the predetermined period. A game machine H2, which is executed by the game machine H2.

  According to the gaming machine H2, it is possible to use a predetermined period to notify the player of the closed state in the closing effect, so that an effect that can be easily understood by the player can be provided.

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, when one of the privilege games is executed by the privilege game execution means, the order in which the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are respectively changed to the open state. A gaming machine H3 comprising: an open pattern determining means for determining the set open pattern from a plurality of open patterns.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H1 or H2, since it is determined from a plurality of open patterns, there is an effect that the open pattern can be randomized and the game can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine H3, in the opening pattern determined by the opening pattern determining means, a timing for changing the first variable ball-entering means or the second variable ball-inserting means from the closed state to the open state is set in advance. A gaming machine H4 characterized by being used.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine H3, the timing of changing from the closed state to the open state is set in advance in the open pattern, so that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable input means are set according to the open pattern. There is an effect that the number of game balls entering the ball means can be stabilized, and the profit given to the player can be set based on the design value.

<Characteristic I group> (two loops only during the predetermined period after the jackpot)
State setting means capable of at least setting a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state, and granting a privilege advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition. In a gaming machine having at least a first privilege game and a privilege game executing means for executing at least a second privilege game different from the first privilege game, the state setting means sets the first advantageous state. In the state where the first privilege game is executed, the first advantageous state is set even after the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, The second advantage state is set after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed while the second advantage state is set, the first privilege is set. After the execution of the game, the first advantageous state is set, and Setting a second advantageous state when a specific condition is satisfied without the first privilege game or the second privilege game being executed by the privilege game execution means after the first advantageous state is set; A gaming machine I1 characterized by the following.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a special symbol jackpot lottery is performed, and based on the result of the lottery, the probability of a jackpot is determined. There are games that provide high-probability games with high probabilities. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a high-probability game is continued until a jackpot is won twice (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-57583). In such a gaming machine, once the high-probability game is started, the player is promised to win the jackpot twice while continuing the high-probability game. However, there is a problem that they get tired of playing games. The gaming machine I1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the tiredness of a player.

  According to the gaming machine I1, at least the first advantageous state advantageous to the player and the second advantageous state different from the first advantageous state are set by the state setting means. Based on the fulfillment of the predetermined condition, at least a first privilege game for giving a benefit advantageous to the player and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game are executed by the privilege game execution means. When the first privilege game is executed in the state where the first advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means even after the first privilege game is executed, and the second privilege is set. When the game has been executed, the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the second privilege game. When the first privilege game is executed in a state where the second advantageous state is set, the first advantageous state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the first privilege game. After the first advantageous state is set, if the specific condition is satisfied without executing the first privilege game or the second privilege game by the privilege game execution means, the first advantageous state is changed to the second advantageous state. Set. Accordingly, if the first privilege game is executed before the specific condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state, the second advantageous state is set thereafter, so that the state advantageous to the player is continuously set. be able to. Therefore, the advantageous state can be continued until a plurality of privilege games are executed, and there is an effect that the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1, the privilege game executing means is capable of executing a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game, and the state setting means is configured to execute the first advantageous state. It is possible to set a specific state that is more disadvantageous to the player than any of the second advantageous state, and when the third privilege game is executed while the second advantageous state is set. The gaming machine I2, wherein the specific state is set after the execution of the third privilege game.

  According to the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1. That is, a third privilege game different from the first privilege game and the second privilege game is executed by the privilege game executing means. A specific state which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set by the state setting means. When the third privilege game is executed in the state where the second advantageous state is set, the specific state is set by the state setting means after the execution of the third privilege game. Thus, in the second advantageous state, a specific gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player when the third gaming state is executed is set, so that the continuation of the advantageous state can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that gambling of the game becomes too high.

  The gaming machine I1 or I2 has a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the fulfillment of the discriminating condition, and when the discrimination result by the discriminating means is a specific discriminating result, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine I3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition, and the determination is performed when the determination result by the determination unit is a specific determination result. Is satisfied, the player can play the game with an interest in the determination result by the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I4, the specific condition is satisfied when the determination condition is satisfied a predetermined number of times. The game is played while expecting that the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

  A probability setting means for setting at least one of a first probability determined as the specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability higher than the first probability in one of the gaming machines I3 and I4. The gaming machine I5, wherein the first advantage state and the second advantage state are such that the second probability is set by the probability setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I3 or I4. That is, the probability setting means sets at least one of a first probability that is determined as a specific determination result by the determination means and a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The first advantageous state and the second advantageous state are states in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means. Thereby, in both the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, it is possible to increase the possibility that the determination result by the determination means becomes a specific determination result in a short time. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic J group> (Structure of winning distribution to attacker)
A condition judging means for judging the satisfaction of the specific condition, and an open state in which the game ball can enter the ball from a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, based on the satisfaction of the specific condition by the condition judging means. The first variable ball-in means, the second variable ball-in means disposed downstream of the first variable ball-in means, and the first variable ball-in means or the second variable ball-in means. A privilege granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to the player based on the game ball being entered, and the first variable ball entry means and the second variable entering means based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied. A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game in which the variable ball entry means is varied in a predetermined order until the open condition is satisfied until a predetermined condition is satisfied; the first variable ball entry means; Distribute at least game balls to the downstream side of ball means First allocating means, and the game balls distributed by the first allocating means to the downstream side of the first variable ball-in means to the second variable ball-in means and the downstream side of the second variable ball-in means. A gaming machine J1 having at least a second sorting means for sorting.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, a jackpot lottery of a special symbol is performed, and if the result of the lottery is a jackpot, the game is performed. There is a game which provides a jackpot game in which a game ball is put into a special winning opening provided on a board. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which two large winning ports are provided on a gaming board surface (for example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, there was a problem that a game ball that did not enter one of the special winning openings did not enter the other special winning opening, and the flow of the game balls on the gaming board was poor. . The gaming machine J1 has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of gaming balls that makes a player expect.

  According to the gaming machine J1, the condition determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, based on the determination that the specific ball is satisfied, opens the game ball from a closed state where it is difficult to enter the game ball. The first variable ball entry means is changed to a state. A second variable ball entry means is disposed downstream of the first variable ball entry means. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first variable ball entry unit or the second variable ball entry unit, a privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted by the privilege granting unit. Based on the determination that the specific condition is satisfied, the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are opened by the privilege game execution means in a predetermined order until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Perform a variable bonus game. The first distributing means distributes at least game balls to the first variable ball-in means and the downstream side of the first variable ball-in means, and distributes the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball-in means by the second variable ball-in means. The distribution means distributes at least to the second variable pitching means and the downstream side of the second variable pitching means. As a result, it is possible to allow the game balls distributed to the downstream side of the first variable ball entry means to enter the second variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing a ball flow of gaming balls that gives a player expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine J1, the first distributing means and the second distributing means include a rotating part rotatable in a first direction and a second direction opposite to the first direction, and a rotating part thereof. And a regulating means for regulating a rotation range of the game machine at a predetermined angle.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1, the first distribution means and the second distribution means are moved by the rotating portion in the first direction and the second direction opposite to the first direction. Since it is rotatable and the restricting means restricts the range of rotation of the rotating portion at a predetermined angle, it is possible to execute an appropriate distribution operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

  In the gaming machine J2, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are configured to be alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by a flowing game ball. Gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J2, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit are configured so that the first and second directions are alternately rotated in the first direction and the second direction by the flowing game balls. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more appropriate distribution operation.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the first variable ball-in means is in a closed state, a guiding means for guiding a game ball to the second variable ball-in means, and the guiding ball is used to guide the game ball to the second variable ball-in means. When the vehicle is guided to the two variable ball-in means, when the second variable ball-in means is in the closed state, the vehicle has a guiding path for guiding the guided game ball to the second sorting means. A gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine J1 or the gaming machine J2. That is, when the first variable ball entry means is in the closed state, the guiding ball guides the game ball to the second variable ball entry means. When the game ball is guided to the second variable ball-in means by the guiding means, and when the second variable ball-in means is in the closed state, the guided game ball is guided to the second sorting means. And a taxiway. Thereby, the rotation state of the second distribution unit can be changed. Therefore, the distribution of the game balls by the distribution member can be complicated, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic K group> (Regulation rate of one symbol at normal time is regulated by variation method other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine K1 wherein at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first entering means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and a first entering means thereof A second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a ball entry assisting means for allowing game balls to enter the second ball entry means more easily than the first ball entry means, and the first ball entry means First discriminating means for performing a first discrimination based on that a game ball has entered the ball, and second discriminating means for performing a second discrimination based on a game ball having entered the second ball-in means. And first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit and second identification information indicating a second determination result of the second determination by the second determination unit are displayed, respectively. Display means, and one of the first identification information and the second identification information is determined in advance. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the priority order, and the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result. When displayed, a privilege game execution means for executing the privilege game, a first state set to allow the second ball entry means to enter a game ball and play a game, (2) a game state setting means for setting one of a second state which is set so as not to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means and play a game, and the first state being set by the game state setting means. A ratio changing unit that changes a ratio at which the advantageous pattern is set by the determination unit when the specific second determination result is obtained when the setting is performed and when the second state is set; Characterized by having Game machine K2 to.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1, an advantageous pattern is set when the first state is set by the game state setting means and when the second state is set. Since the ratio is changed by the ratio changing means, when the second state is set, for example, if the ratio of the advantageous pattern is set to be low, the game is made to enter the second ball entry means in the second state. There is an effect that even if cheating is performed, the damage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, the ratio varying means sets the ratio of the second probability in the second state to be lower than that in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is an effect that damage can be reduced even when an illegal operation is performed in the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, a first flow path through which a game ball can easily enter the first ball entry means rather than the second ball entry means, and A game machine K4, comprising: a second flow path through which game balls can easily enter the second ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the ball entry rate of the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is changed by the flow path, so that the game balls flow down. There is an effect that the game can be changed by the flowing channel, and the interest of the player can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means is inserted in the second variable ball-in means. Guidance means for guiding to the variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and the period is shorter than the predetermined period. A gaming machine K5 wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, in the disadvantageous pattern, it can be performed with easy control so that it is difficult to make the second variable ball-entering means enter the ball. This has the effect of reducing the control load.

<Characteristic L group> (variation of the probability of variation by opening and interval with a configuration other than simultaneous variation)
A first variable ball-in means capable of being changed between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter more easily than the open state; and a downstream side of the first variable ball-in means. Based on the second variable ball entry means, a specific area in which game balls that have entered the second variable ball entry means can enter, and a game ball having passed through the specific area. And a first variable ball-in means and a second variable ball-in means as a privilege game that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific condition. Variable control means for varying the variable pattern, and a determining means for determining the variable pattern to be varied by the variable control means from a plurality of different variable patterns, the variable pattern determined by the determining means, 1 When the variable ball entry means is in the closed state In such a case, a game ball that has not entered the first variable ball entry means can enter the specific area, and a disadvantage that it is more difficult to enter the specific area than the advantageous pattern. A gaming machine L1 wherein at least a pattern is set.

  Here, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters the starting port provided on the game board surface, the success or failure of the game is drawn by lottery. In some cases, advantageous privilege games are executed. In such a configuration, there has been proposed a gaming machine that provides a plurality of types of privilege games by controlling opening and closing of two entrances as privilege games. (For example, JP-A-2003-265765). In such a gaming machine, only the control for switching the entrance opening to be opened as a privilege game is performed, and there is a demand for further improving the interest of the game. Further, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine having a more interesting game.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the privilege given to the player can be changed by the variable pattern of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, so that the player is interested in the variable pattern. This has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine L1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball based on a player's operation, a first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball fired from the launching means, and a first ball entry means. A second ball entry means, a first discrimination means for performing a first discrimination based on a game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and a game ball entered into the second ball entry means. A second determination unit that performs a second determination based on the ball, first identification information indicating a first determination result of the first determination by the first determination unit, and a second determination unit that performs the second determination. Display means capable of displaying second identification information indicating a second determination result of the determination, and one of the first identification information and the second identification information in a predetermined priority order Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying on the display means based on the specific first determination A bonus game execution means for executing the bonus game when the first identification information indicating the result or the second identification information indicating the specific second determination result is displayed on the display means; A game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of different game states when the privilege game is executed by the means; and the advantage pattern corresponding to the game state set by the game state setting means. A game machine L2 comprising: a ratio variable setting means for variably setting a ratio between the disadvantage pattern and the disadvantage pattern.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the ratio between the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern is variably set in accordance with the gaming state. There is an effect that the degree of expectation of the ball entering can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L1 or L2, a first probability that the first determination means or the second determination means determines the specific first determination result or the specific second determination result, and a first probability higher than the first probability. There is a probability setting means capable of setting one of two probabilities, and the privilege given by the privilege giving means is such that at least the second probability is set by the probability setting means. A gaming machine L3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1 or L2, the second probability is set by passing through the specific area, so that the game ball is stored in the specific area even while the privilege game is being executed. By having an interest in whether or not the game can be passed, there is an effect that a problem of getting tired of the game can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern are such that the first variable ball entry means varies the closed state and then the second variable ball entry means varies the open state. The game machine L4 is set so that at least the period until is different.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines L1 to L3, there is an effect that the advantageous pattern and the disadvantageous pattern can be set with easy control.

  In any of the gaming machines L1 to L4, between the first variable ball-in means and the second variable ball-in means, a game ball which has not entered the first variable ball-in means is inserted in the second variable ball-in means. Guidance means for guiding to the variable ball entry means over a predetermined period or more is arranged, and the disadvantage pattern is that the first variable ball entry means is changed to the closed state and the period is shorter than the predetermined period. A gaming machine L5 wherein the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state and then to the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines L1 to L4, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably make it difficult for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area in a disadvantageous pattern.

<Characteristic M group> (Control to vary vibration intensity in conjunction with audio output)
A player touches a gaming machine having an effect executing means for executing an effect, and a privilege granting means for imparting a privilege that is advantageous to the player when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. A movable part capable of moving the contact part, movable control means for controlling the movable means based on movable data, and a plurality of movable data used by the movable control means. Is stored; storage means; determination means for determining production information of the performance executed by the performance execution means; and the movable data set by the storage means based on the performance information determined by the determination means. A gaming machine M1 comprising:

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with display means such as a liquid crystal display capable of displaying effects. In such a conventional gaming machine, the display device executes an entertaining effect to improve the interest of the player. Further, some conventional gaming machines can execute a vibration effect accompanied by a vibration operation as a kind of entertainment effect. In such a conventional gaming machine, a realistic effect can be realized by generating vibrations according to the effect displayed on the display means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-195692).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the improvement of a sense of reality is still insufficient.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine M1, the contact portion that the player can touch is moved by the movable means. The movable means is movably controlled by the movable control means based on the movable data, and a plurality of movable data used by the movable control means are stored in the storage means. The effect information of the effect executed by the effect executing means is determined by the determining means. The movable data is set from the storage means by the setting means based on the presentation information determined by the determination means.

  Thereby, the movement control of the movable means can be made different depending on the effect performed by the effect executing means, and thus there is an effect that the movable means can be suitably moved.

  The gaming machine M2 of the gaming machine M1, wherein the determining means determines information of audio data reproduced in the effect as the effect information.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M1, the information of the audio data to be reproduced in the effect is determined as the effect information by the determining means. The movable control of the movable means can be made different.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the movable means can be suitably moved.

  In the gaming machine M2, the movable data is composed of information on drive voltage data for supplying a predetermined voltage value to the movable means, and the determining means converts the information of the audio data to be reproduced into the drive voltage. The gaming machine M3, which converts the data into identification information corresponding to information about data and makes a determination, and wherein the setting means sets the corresponding movable data based on the identification information.

  According to the gaming machine M3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M2. That is, the movable data includes information on drive voltage data for supplying a predetermined voltage value to the movable means. The information of the audio data to be reproduced is converted by the determining means into identification information corresponding to the information on the drive voltage data and determined. The corresponding movable data is set by the setting means based on the identification information.

  This makes it possible to vary the voltage supplied to the movable means according to the sound, so that the movable means can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine M2 or M3, when a plurality of audio data are reproduced in parallel by the audio reproducing means for reproducing one or a plurality of audio data, the plurality of audio data are synthesized. Voice synthesis means, and voice output means for outputting a voice based on the synthesized voice data synthesized by the voice synthesis means, wherein the determination means determines information of the synthesized voice data as the effect information. A gaming machine M4, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine M4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine M2 or M3. One or a plurality of audio data is reproduced by the audio reproducing means. When a plurality of sound data are reproduced in parallel by the sound reproducing means, the plurality of sound data are synthesized by the sound synthesizing means. A voice is output by the voice output means based on the synthesized voice data synthesized by the voice synthesis means. The information of the synthesized voice data is determined as effect information by the determination means.

  Thus, even when a plurality of voices are output in parallel, it is possible to set the movable data to be set in the movable means according to the synthesized voice data after the synthesis. Therefore, there is an effect that the movable means can be suitably controlled.

  In the gaming machine M4, when the reproduction of the new audio data is started, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the audio reproduction means synthesizes the new audio data with the new audio data to thereby make it possible for each of the audio reproduction means to synthesize the new audio data. A gaming machine M5 characterized in that reproduction processing for canceling cancel data is executed in parallel.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M4, when starting reproduction of new audio data, if predetermined conditions are satisfied, new audio data is combined with the new audio data. As a result, the reproduction process with the canceling data that cancels each other is performed in parallel by the audio reproducing unit, so that the new audio data is output as audio from the audio output unit while the predetermined condition is satisfied. This has the effect of suppressing

  In the gaming machine M5, the cancellation data is data having a waveform having a phase opposite to that of the new voice data.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5, since the cancellation data is composed of data having a waveform in phase opposite to that of the new audio data, it is possible to completely cancel the new audio data. effective.

  In the gaming machine M5 or M6, the sound reproducing unit newly starts a second type of effect different from the first type in a state in which the effect of the first type is being executed by the effect executing unit. In this case, the game machine M7 is configured to execute a reproduction process of the sound data corresponding to the second type of effect and the cancellation data in parallel.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine M5 or M6, in the state where the first type of effect is being executed by the effect executing means, an effect of the second type different from the first type is produced. When newly started, the audio data corresponding to the second type of effect and the canceling data are reproduced in parallel by the audio reproducing means. Output of the sound corresponding to the second type of effect can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the sound corresponding to the first type of effect from being difficult to hear due to other sounds.

<Characteristic N group> (The operation content is suggested in the form of vibration)
Effect execution means for executing an effect, operation means having an operation section operable by a player, signal output means capable of outputting a signal by operating the operation section of the operation means, and signal output means thereof And a signal discriminating means for discriminating the signal output by the signal discriminating means, based on a result of the specific discrimination determined by the signal discriminating means, so that the content of the effect executed by the effect executing means is changed. In a gaming machine having variable effect setting means for setting, a contact portion that can be touched by a player, a movable means capable of moving the contact portion, and the movable means based on movable data. And a data setting unit that sets the movable data that is movably controlled by the movable control unit, wherein the signal output unit is configured to output the signal based on a first operation. And outputting a first signal based on a second operation different from the first operation, and outputting at least a second signal different from the first signal based on a second operation different from the first operation. The data setting means sets the specific movable data indicating the operation of the operation unit which is the specific determination result based on the satisfaction of a specific condition. A gaming machine N1.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include in their configuration operating means operable by the player, such as push buttons. In such a conventional gaming machine, as a kind of an entertaining effect, a predetermined notification is performed based on an operation on an operation means to improve the interest of the player. In addition, some conventional gaming machines can execute a vibration effect that suggests the operation timing of the operation unit by vibrating the operation unit. Thereby, it was configured to be able to provide an effect that was easier for the player to understand (for example, JP-A-2014-128557).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, the mode of the vibration effect is poor, and there is still room for improvement in the interest of the player.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the contact portion that the player can touch is moved by the movable means. The movable means is controlled by the movable control means based on the movable data. The movable data controlled by the movable control means is set by the data setting means. Based on the first operation, a first signal is output as a signal by the signal output means. On the other hand, a second signal different from the first signal is output by the signal output means based on a second operation different from the first operation. The type of the signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Specific movable data indicating an operation of the operation unit that becomes a specific determination result based on establishment of a specific condition is set by the data setting unit.

  Thereby, the movement of the movable means can be made different in accordance with the operation of the operation unit which results in the specific determination result, so that the player can play the game paying attention to the movement of the movable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine N2 in the gaming machine N1, wherein the movable means vibrates the contact portion as the movable operation of the contact portion.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N1, the movable means is moved so that the contact portion vibrates as the movable operation of the contact portion. There is an effect that a player who thinks that the contact portion can be positively touched.

  In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the specific vibration data is provided with a plurality of movable data including at least first specific data for moving the first position by a movable operation different from other positions in the contact portion. The data setting means sets the first specific data as the specific movable data when the operation of the operation unit that is the specific determination result is the first operation. A gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1 or N2. That is, among the contact portions, a plurality of movable data including at least first specific data for operating the first position with a movable operation different from other positions is provided as specific vibration data. When the operation of the operation unit that results in the specific determination is the first operation, the data setting unit sets the first specific data as the specific movable data.

  Thus, by paying attention to the movable operation of the first position, there is an effect that the player can easily understand whether the first operation is an operation that results in a specific determination result.

  In the gaming machine N3, the specific vibration data includes at least the first specific data and the second specific data for moving a second position different from the first position by a movable operation different from other positions. A plurality of movable data including the first movable operation data as the specific movable data when the operation of the operation unit that is the specific determination result is the first operation. A step of setting specific data, and setting the second specific data as the specific movable data when the operation of the operation unit that results in the specific determination is the second operation. Machine N4.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N3, the specific vibration data includes the first specific data and the second position different from the first position is moved by a different moving operation from the other positions. And at least the second specific data. When the operation of the operation unit that is the specific determination result is the first operation, the first specific data is set by the data setting unit, while the operation of the operation unit that is the specific determination result is the second operation. In this case, the second specific data is set by the data setting unit.

  Thereby, by paying attention to the movable operation between the first position and the second position, the player can determine whether the operation of the operation unit that is the specific determination result is the first operation or the second operation. There is an effect that it can be easily understood.

  In the gaming machine N3 or N4, a rotatable rotating member is provided, and the movable means is a rotating motor that rotates the rotating member around a predetermined position different from the center of gravity of the rotating member as a rotation axis. The gaming machine N5, wherein the movable control means controls the rotation operation of the rotary motor at a rotation speed corresponding to the movable data.

  According to the gaming machine N5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N3 or N4. That is, the movable means is constituted by a rotation motor for rotating the rotatable rotation member about a predetermined position different from the position of the center of gravity as a rotation axis. At a rotation speed corresponding to the movable data, the rotation operation of the rotation motor is controlled by the movable control means.

  Accordingly, during the rotation of the rotating member, the centrifugal force acts strongly in the direction from the rotation axis to the position of the center of gravity, and as a result, the direction in which the centrifugal force acts changes according to the rotation, so that vibration can be generated. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who wants to know an operation that is a specific determination result from the vibration operation can be positively touched with the contact portion.

  In the gaming machine N5, the first specific data sets the rotation speed before and after the rotation member passes through a position closest to the first position to a rotation speed different from the rotation speed when passing through another position. A gaming machine N6, which is data for setting.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N5, the first specific data indicates the rotation speed before and after the rotating member passes through the position closest to the first position, and the rotation speed when passing through another position. Since the data is configured with data for setting a speed different from the rotation speed of the first position, the centrifugal force acting on the rotating member before and after the first position can be made different from the centrifugal force at other positions. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand whether the first operation is an operation having a specific determination result only by comparing the magnitude of the vibration at the first position with another position.

  In the gaming machine N6, the first specific data sets the rotation speed before and after the rotating member passes the position closest to the first position to the first speed, and sets the rotation speed when passing the other position. A gaming machine N7, which is data for setting a rotation speed to a second speed lower than the first speed.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine N6, the first specific data sets the rotation speed before and after the rotating member passes through the position closest to the first position to the first speed, Since it is configured with data for setting the rotation speed when passing through another position to a second speed lower than the first speed, the rotation member is provided before and after the position closest to the first position. The acting centrifugal force can be increased compared to other positions. Therefore, since the vibration at the first position can be made larger than the other positions, the operation that can easily obtain a specific determination result can be easily performed by simply confirming whether or not the vibration at the first position is large. There is an effect that the player can understand whether or not there is.

  In the gaming machine N3 or N4, the movable means is constituted by a plurality of movable members including at least a first movable member for moving the first position, and the first specific data is the first movable member. A gaming machine N8 comprising data for moving a member by a different movable operation from other movable members.

  According to the gaming machine N8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N3 or N4. The movable means is composed of a plurality of movable members including at least a first movable member for moving the first position. The first specific data is constituted by data for moving the first movable member by a different movable operation from the other movable members.

  Thus, the effect that the player can easily understand whether or not the operation that results in the specific determination result is the first operation only by comparing the movable operation of the first position with the other positions. is there.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N8, the effect execution means selects a part of options from a plurality of options including at least a first option and a second option different from the first option. The first operation is an operation corresponding to selecting the first option, and the second operation is selecting the second option. A gaming machine N9, which is an operation corresponding to the above.

  According to the gaming machine N9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines N1 to N8. An option effect that suggests selecting some options from among a plurality of options including at least a first option and a second option different from the first option is executed by the effect executing means. The first operation is set as an operation corresponding to selecting the first option, and the second operation is set as an operation corresponding to selecting the second option.

  This can give the player the pleasure of selecting an option, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine N9, the option effect includes a first option effect that can be determined to be the specific determination result by the signal determination unit, and a second option effect that is not determined to be the specific determination result by the signal determination unit. A gaming machine N10 including at least an option effect, wherein the data setting means can set the specific movable data only during execution of the first option effect.

  According to the gaming machine N10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N9. That is, the option effect includes at least a first option effect that can be determined to be a specific determination result by the signal determination unit, and a second option effect that is not determined to be the specific determination result by the signal determination unit. I have. Only during execution of the first option effect, specific movable data can be set by the data setting means.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can play a game by paying attention to whether or not specific movable data is set.

  In the gaming machine N11, discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by the discriminating means. A plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, as a game state after the end of the special game executed by the special game execution means. Game state setting means for setting one of the game states from the middle, wherein the effect execution means is configured to execute the second game state when the first game state is set rather than when the second game state is set. A gaming machine N12 characterized in that a ratio of executing an option effect is increased.

  According to the gaming machine N12, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N11. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the result of the specific judgment by the judgment means. As the game state after the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means is completed, one of a plurality of game modes including at least a first game state and a second game state more advantageous to the player than the first game state is set. Is set by the game state setting means. The rate at which the second option effect is executed by the effect execution means when the first game state is set is higher than when the second game state is set.

  This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to whether it is the first option effect or the second option effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Character O group> (Control to change the button push sound according to the condition at the time of pressing)
A plurality of operating means operable by a player, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the operation when the operating means is operated, and a plurality of the specific effects executed by the specific effect executing means. Specific effect determination means determined from a different specific effect, a first state in which the first specific effect is determined by the specific effect determiner, and a second state in which a second specific effect different from the first specific effect is determined And a state setting means capable of setting one state from among a plurality of states including at least the following.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include in their configuration operating means operable by the player, such as push buttons. In such a conventional gaming machine, as a kind of entertainment effect, the effect of prompting the operation of the operation means is performed to improve the interest. Further, among conventional gaming machines, there are also known gaming machines that notify a jackpot lottery result by an effect executed based on an operation on an operation means. In such a conventional gaming machine, every time the operating means is operated during the execution of the entertainment effect, it is determined whether to execute a hit suggestion effect indicating a big hit or a normal effect different from the hit suggestion effect. There is something to do. Thereby, it was configured such that the player could actively operate the operation means in anticipation of the hit effect being executed during the execution of the entertainment effect (for example, JP-A-2014-184177).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the player continuously operates the operation means, it may not be possible to appropriately execute the normal effect and the hit suggestion effect. Therefore, it may not be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine O1, when the operating means operable by the player is operated, the specific effect based on the operation is executed by the specific effect executing means. The specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means is determined from the plurality of different specific effects by the specific effect determining means. One state is selected from a plurality of states including a first state in which the first specific effect is determined by the specific effect determination means and a second state in which a second specific effect different from the first specific effect is determined. It is set by the state setting means.

  Thereby, the specific effect executed when the operating means is operated can be made different depending on the state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O1, the state setting means sets one of the plurality of states based on information that is changed by operating the operation means. Machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, one of a plurality of states is set by the state setting unit based on information that is changed by operating the operation unit. The specific effect can be changed according to the operation of the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, there is provided a validity period setting means for setting a validity period for validating an operation on the operation means, and the specific effect execution means is provided when the operation means is operated during the validity period. Executing the specific effect, wherein the state setting means sets one of the plurality of states each time a predetermined setting condition is satisfied during one validity period. A gaming machine O3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine O3, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines O1 and O2. That is, the valid period for which the operation on the operation unit is valid is set by the valid period setting unit. When the operating means is operated during the valid period, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means. Each time a predetermined setting condition is satisfied during one validity period, one state is set from a plurality of states by the state setting means.

  Accordingly, different specific effects can be executed during one effective period, and thus variations of the specific effect in one effective period can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the game machine further includes an interval determination unit that determines an interval at which the player operates the operation unit, and the state setting unit determines that the interval determined by the interval determination unit is a predetermined interval. The gaming machine O4, wherein the first state is set when the interval is shorter than the predetermined interval, and the second state is set when the interval is longer than the specific interval.

  According to the gaming machine O4, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3. That is, the interval at which the player operates the operation unit is determined by the interval determination unit. When the interval determined by the interval determining unit is shorter than a predetermined specific interval, the first state is set by the state setting unit. When the interval is longer than the specific interval, the second state is set by the state setting unit. Is done.

  Thereby, the specific effect to be executed can be made different according to the operation interval of the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player performing the operation from being monotonous.

  In the gaming machine O4, the first specific effect is an effect in which the effect period is shorter than the second specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O4, since the first specific effect is configured with an effect period shorter than the second specific effect, if the operation interval is shorter than the specific interval, The first specific effect having a short effect period can be executed, and if it is longer than the specific interval, the second specific effect having a longer effect period than the first specific effect can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a specific effect of the effect period according to the operation interval of the player can be executed.

  In the gaming machine O5, the specific effect includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode during one effect period, and the first specific effect includes: A gaming machine O6, wherein a period from the end of the first effect mode to the start of the second effect mode is shorter than that of the second specific effect.

  According to the gaming machine O6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O5. That is, the specific effect includes at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode during one effect period. The period from the end of the first effect mode to the start of the second effect mode is configured so that the first specific effect is shorter than the second specific effect.

  Thus, there is an effect that the effect period can be changed simply by changing the interval between the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O6, a sound output unit capable of outputting a sound is provided, and the specific effect execution unit outputs a sound effect based on the operation of the operation unit as the specific effect. A game machine O7 characterized in that the game machine O7 outputs the information.

  According to the gaming machine O7, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines O1 to O6. That is, the sound output means can output sound. As the specific effect, the sound effect based on the operation of the operation means is controlled by the specific effect execution means to be output by the sound output means.

  Thus, the sound output by the sound output means can be made different as the specific effect, so that the sound can be diversified. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In one of the gaming machines O1 to O7, a validity period setting means for setting a validity period for validating an operation on the operation means, and the operation means is operated during one validity period set by the validity period setting means. Counting means for counting the number of times counted, number-of-times discriminating means for judging whether or not the number counted by the counting means has reached a predetermined number of times, and discriminating that the predetermined number of times has been reached by the number-of-times judging means A gaming machine O8, comprising: special effect executing means for executing a special effect different from the specific effect based on the performed.

  According to the gaming machine O8, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines O1 to O7. That is, the valid period for which the operation on the operation unit is valid is set by the valid period setting unit. The number of times the operating means has been operated in one validity period set by the validity period setting means is counted by the counting means. Whether the number counted by the counting means has reached a predetermined specific number is determined by the number determining means. A special effect different from the specific effect is executed by the special effect executing means based on the fact that the number of times has been determined by the number-of-times determining means.

  As a result, there is an effect that a player who wants to execute the special effect can operate the operation unit of the operation unit until the number of times reaches a specific number in the valid period.

  In the gaming machine O8, a plurality of different times are defined as the predetermined specific times, and the number determining means is changed by operating an operating means among the plurality of different times. A gaming machine O9 characterized in that the number of times corresponding to the information is used for discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine O9, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O8. That is, a plurality of different times are defined as the predetermined specific times. Among the plurality of different times, the number corresponding to the information that is changed by operating the operation unit is used for the determination by the number determination unit.

  Thereby, the specific number of times can be made different according to the operation of the player, so that the specific number of times can be optimized according to the content of the operation of each player.

  In the gaming machine O9, an interval determination unit that determines an interval at which the player operates the operation unit is provided, and the number-of-times determination unit corresponds to an interval determined by the interval determination unit among the plurality of different times. A gaming machine O10 characterized by using the number of times 1 for discrimination.

  According to the gaming machine O10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O9. That is, the interval at which the player operates the operation unit is determined by the interval determination unit. Of the plurality of different times, one number corresponding to the interval determined by the interval determining means is used for the determination by the number determining means.

  This makes it possible to vary the number of operations until the special effect is executed in accordance with the interval at which the player operates the operation means, so that the execution frequency of the special effect varies depending on the operation interval of the player. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine O10, the plurality of different times includes at least a first number and a second number greater than the first number, and the number determining means is determined by the interval determining means. The gaming machine O11, wherein if the interval is longer than a specific interval, the first number is used for determination, and if the interval is shorter than the specific interval, the second number is used for determination.

  According to the gaming machine O11, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O10. That is, the first number and the second number greater than the first number are defined as a plurality of different numbers. If the interval determined by the interval determining means is longer than the specific interval, the first number is used for the determination by the number determining means. On the other hand, if shorter than the specific interval, the second number is used for the determination.

  Thus, there is an effect that the number of times can be changed according to the operation interval of the player.

<Characteristic P group> (Control to output rising when sound effect is output at short intervals)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and a determination result by the determination means, A gaming machine P1 comprising: a type determining unit configured to determine a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include in their configuration operating means operable by the player, such as push buttons. In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect of promoting the operation of the operating means is performed as a kind of an entertaining effect, thereby improving the interest. Further, among conventional gaming machines, there are also known gaming machines that notify a jackpot lottery result by an effect executed based on an operation on an operation means. In such a conventional gaming machine, every time the operating means is operated during the execution of the entertainment effect, it is determined whether to execute a hit suggestion effect indicating a big hit or a normal effect different from the hit suggestion effect. There is something to do. Thereby, it was configured such that the player could actively operate the operation means in anticipation of the hit effect being executed during the execution of the entertainment effect (for example, JP-A-2014-184177).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the player continuously operates the operation means, it may not be possible to appropriately execute the normal effect and the hit suggestion effect. Therefore, it may not be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine P1, a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, A type determining unit that determines a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit based on the determination result.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine P1 has a sound output unit capable of outputting sound, and the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution unit includes at least a sound effect for outputting a specific sound from the sound output unit. The gaming machine P2, wherein the specific sound is included in the sound form for a predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine P2, since an auditory effect can be performed in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P1, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P2, the audio output means is configured to output a plurality of different sounds at the same time, and the audio output means has a plurality of output units for simultaneously outputting the plurality of different sounds. Output control means, wherein, when the specific condition is satisfied, the audio output control means outputs the specific audio to an output unit different from the output unit set immediately before the plurality of output units. A game machine P3 for setting audio information corresponding to the game machine P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P2, since the audio information is set to an output unit different from the output unit set immediately before by the audio control unit, the specific condition is continuously set for a short period of time. Even when the condition is satisfied, the effect that the voice mode output based on the previous satisfaction of the specific condition can be suppressed from being interrupted because the voice mode based on the satisfaction of the current specific condition is output. is there.

  In any of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the specific effect includes at least a first effect mode and a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, and the type determining means includes A game machine P4 for determining the type of the second effect mode based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine P4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines P1 to P3. That is, the specific effect is configured to include at least the first effect mode and the second effect mode different from the first effect mode. The type of the second effect mode is determined by the type determination unit based on the determination result by the determination unit.

  Thus, there is an effect that the mode of the specific effect can be changed by changing only the second effect mode.

  In the gaming machine P4, operation means operable by the player, validity period setting means for setting a validity period for validating an operation on the operation means, and a validity period set by the validity period setting means. And a first state in which the first type is determined as the type of the second effect mode based on the determination result of the determination by the specific determination unit, and a first state different from the first type. A gaming machine P5 comprising: state setting means capable of setting one state from a plurality of states including a second state in which two types are determined.

  According to the gaming machine P5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P4. That is, the validity period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the validity period setting means, and the specific determination is performed by the specific determination means during the validity period set by the validity period setting means. A first state in which the first type is determined as the type of the second effect mode based on a determination result of the determination by the specific determination unit, and a second state in which a second type different from the first type is determined. One of a plurality of states is set by the state setting means.

  Thereby, the type of the second effect mode can be changed according to the result of the specific determination by the specific determination unit, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine P6, wherein in the gaming machine P5, the specific determination by the specific determination unit is performed a plurality of times during one valid period.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine P5, the specific determination by the specific determining means is performed a plurality of times in one validity period. The type of the two effect modes can be switched. Therefore, when the player operates the operation means, the player can pay attention to the type of the second effect mode in the specific effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P5 or P6, the specific determination by the specific determination unit is to determine an operation interval of the player with respect to the operation unit.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P5 or P6, the specific determination by the specific determining means is the determination of the operation interval of the player with respect to the operation means. There is an effect that the type of the two effect modes can be changed.

<Feature Q group> (Process sound effect data and reverberation sound data separately)
A specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a determination means for performing a predetermined determination based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and a determination result by the determination means, A gaming machine Q1 comprising: a type determination unit that determines a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect execution unit.

  Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, include in their configuration operating means operable by the player, such as push buttons. In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect of promoting the operation of the operating means is performed as a kind of an entertaining effect, thereby improving the interest. Further, among conventional gaming machines, there are also known gaming machines that notify a jackpot lottery result by an effect executed based on an operation on an operation means. In such a conventional gaming machine, every time the operating means is operated during the execution of the entertainment effect, it is determined whether to execute a hit suggestion effect indicating a big hit or a normal effect different from the hit suggestion effect. There is something to do. Thereby, it was configured such that the player could actively operate the operation means in anticipation of the hit effect being executed during the execution of the entertainment effect (for example, JP-A-2014-184177).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, when the player continuously operates the operation means, it may not be possible to appropriately execute the normal effect and the hit suggestion effect. Therefore, it may not be possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition, a determining means for executing a predetermined determination based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, and a determining means A type determining unit that determines a type of the specific effect executed by the specific effect executing unit based on the determination result.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, audio output means capable of outputting audio, and audio control means capable of causing the audio output means to output synthesized audio obtained by synthesizing a plurality of audio data, wherein the specific effect is: The audio output means includes an audio effect for outputting an audio mode, and includes an audio data determinator for determining audio data for synthesizing and generating audio data corresponding to the audio effect. Gaming machine Q2 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q1, the audio mode output in the specific effect is generated by synthesizing the audio data determined by the audio data determining means. Also has an effect that various voice modes can be generated.

  The gaming machine Q3, wherein the audio data determining means determines at least at least one basic audio data and at least one reverberant audio data corresponding to the basic audio data.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q2, by combining the reverberant sound data with the base sound data, there is an effect that the base sound data can be changed to a different sound mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the game machine includes an operation unit operable by a player and a voice output unit capable of outputting a voice, and the specific effect execution unit operates the operation unit as the specific effect. A game machine Q4 for causing the sound output means to output a sound effect based on the sound output means.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3. That is, a sound is output by the sound output means. As the specific effect, the specific effect execution unit is controlled so that a sound effect based on the operation of the operation unit is output by the sound output unit.

  Thereby, since the sound effects can be made different, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q4, the specific effect determination means is configured to be able to output at least the first sound effect and the second sound effect whose output period is shorter than the first sound effect to the sound output means. Gaming machine Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine Q4, the first sound effect is composed of a sound effect whose output period is longer than the second sound effect, so that the sound effects can be diversified. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5, the game device includes an operation unit that can be operated by the player, and a valid period setting unit that sets a valid period for validating the operation of the operation unit. The gaming machine Q6, wherein during the one validity period set by the validity period setting means, the specific effect is executed each time an operation of the operation means is detected.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q5. The validity period for validating the operation of the operation means is set by the validity period setting means. Each time an operation of the operation means is detected during one validity period set by the validity period setting means, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means.

  This allows the player to operate the operating means a plurality of times, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine Q6, the gaming machine Q6 includes time counting means for counting an elapsed time from a previous operation performed on the operation means during one of the validity periods, and the specific effect determination means is controlled by the time counting means. A gaming machine that determines the first specific effect when the elapsed time is shorter than a predetermined time, and determines the second specific effect when the elapsed time is longer than the specific time. Q7.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q6. During the one validity period, the elapsed time from the previous operation performed on the operation means is counted by the timing means. When the elapsed time measured by the timer is shorter than a predetermined specific time, the first specific effect is determined by the specific effect determiner, while when the elapsed time is longer than the specific time, the second specific effect is determined. You.

  Thereby, the specific effect can be changed according to the interval at which the player operates the operation means, and thus there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

<Feature R group> (Process sound effect data and reverberation sound data separately)
A sound output unit capable of outputting a sound, a sound effect execution unit for executing a sound effect for outputting a sound mode from the sound output unit, and one or a plurality of sound data constituting sound data corresponding to the sound effect are determined. Voice data determination means, and voice control means capable of causing the voice output means to output a synthesized voice obtained by synthesizing the plurality of voice data, when a plurality of voice data are determined by the voice data determination means. , A gaming machine R1.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a sound output device such as a speaker in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect of outputting a sound such as a predetermined music or a sound effect from an audio output device is performed as a kind of entertainment effect, thereby improving the interest. Also, in some conventional gaming machines, even in the same type of production, the production mode is diversified by making the output sound different depending on the production result (for example, JP-A-2014-184177). Gazette).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since different audio data is output for each effect mode, there is a problem in that the capacity of stored audio data increases with diversification of the audio mode. Was.

  According to the gaming machine R1, sound is output by the sound output means. The sound effect for outputting the sound mode from the sound output means is executed by the sound effect execution means. One or a plurality of audio data constituting the audio data corresponding to the audio effect is determined by the audio data determination means. When a plurality of voice data are determined by the voice data determining means, the voice control means controls the voice output means such that a synthesized voice obtained by combining the plurality of voice data is output.

  Thus, as the voice mode output in the voice effect, the voice mode is generated by synthesizing the voice data determined by the voice data determining unit, so that various voice modes can be generated even with a small amount of voice data. effective.

  In the gaming machine R1, the audio data determining means includes audio data for outputting an audio of a first component constituting the audio mode output in the audio production, and a second component different from the first component. A gaming machine R2 configured to be able to determine at least audio data for outputting audio.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine R1, in addition to the sound data for outputting the sound of the first component constituting the sound mode output in the sound effect, a second component different from the first component is output. Since the voice data for outputting the component voice is configured to be at least determinable by the voice data determining means, the number of the first component voice data and the second It is sufficient to prepare audio data for the sum of the number of component audio data. When audio data is prepared in the form of synthesized audio data in which the first component and the second component are combined, it is necessary to prepare audio data by the product of the number of first components and the number of second components. Therefore, there is an effect that the number of audio data can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R2, the audio data of the first component is composed of basic audio data for outputting a basic audio in the audio mode, and the audio data of the second component corresponds to the basic audio. A gaming machine R3 comprising reverberation sound data for outputting a reverberation sound.

  According to the gaming machine R3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R2. That is, the audio data of the first component is composed of basic audio data for outputting the basic audio in the audio mode. On the other hand, the audio data of the second component is composed of reverberant audio data for outputting a reverberant sound corresponding to the base audio.

  Thus, by combining the reverberation sound data with the basic sound data, there is an effect that the base sound data can be changed to a different sound mode.

  In the gaming machine R2, the audio data of the first component is composed of basic audio data for outputting a basic audio in the audio mode, and the audio data of the second component corresponds to the basic audio. A gaming machine R4 comprising reverberation sound data for outputting a reverberation sound.

  According to the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R2. That is, the audio data of the first component is composed of basic audio data for outputting the basic audio in the audio mode. On the other hand, the audio data of the second component is composed of reverberant audio data for outputting an echo corresponding to the underlying audio.

  Thus, by combining the reverberation sound data with the basic sound data, there is an effect that the base sound data can be changed to a different sound mode.

  In any of the gaming machines R1 to R4, a plurality of receiving units for receiving each of the plurality of audio data determined by the audio data determining unit, and the plurality of audio data received by the plurality of receiving units Synthesized voice data generating means for generating synthesized voice data, wherein the voice control means outputs the synthesized voice to the voice output means based on the synthesized voice data generated by the synthesized voice data generating means. A gaming machine R5, characterized in that it is a game machine R5.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R4, a receiving unit is provided for receiving each of the plurality of audio data determined by the audio data determining means. Synthesized voice data generated by synthesizing a plurality of voice data received by the plurality of receiving units is generated by the synthesized voice data generating means. The voice output unit is controlled by the voice control unit so as to output a synthesized voice based on the synthesized voice data generated by the synthesized voice data generation unit.

  Thus, there is no need to directly input a plurality of audio data to the audio output unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the input of the audio output unit can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine R5, the audio data determination means may include an audio data for outputting an audio of a first component constituting the audio mode output in the audio production, and a second component different from the first component. Audio data for outputting audio is configured to be at least determinable, and the plurality of receiving units are configured to be able to receive different components constituting audio data, respectively. Gaming machine R6 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine R6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine R5. That is, at least the audio data for outputting the audio of the first component and the audio data for outputting the audio of the second component different from the first component are included in the audio effect. Determined by data determination means. The different components constituting the audio data are received by the plurality of receiving units.

  Thus, the receivable audio data component is determined for each receiving unit, so that the same component may always be output to the same receiving unit regardless of the timing of outputting the audio data. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing for outputting the audio data can be simplified.

<Characteristic S group> (Preliminary notification of the degree of advantage when punctured)
A gaming machine provided with variable ball entry means that is changed to a ball entry state in which game balls can be entered, at least until the second condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the first condition; A first game state is set based on the specific area where the game ball that has entered the means can enter the ball and the specific area where the game ball has entered, and based on the fact that the specific area has not entered the specific area. Game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state, and one of a plurality of game state types as the second game state type set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine S1 comprising: determining means for determining a game state type; and effect executing means for executing an effect based on the game state type determined by the determining means.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines can vary the number of prize balls that can be obtained at the start of the hit, depending on the type of gate through which the player has passed the game ball before the start of the hit. is there. That is, the first gate where the winning of the prize ball can be started on average, the second gate where the winning of a small amount of the prize ball and the second gate where the large amount of the prize ball can be obtained are started. There is a gate provided with a gate. In such a conventional gaming machine, the player can select one of the first gate and the second gate, thereby selecting a hit that suits the taste of each player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, only the winning prize balls that can be won per hit can be made different, and there is no room for a player to select gaming properties during a normal game. That is, there is a risk that the normal game will be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine S1, the first game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area where the game ball entered the variable ball entry means can enter the ball. . On the other hand, a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means based on the fact that the game ball has not entered the specific area. As the second game state type set by the game state setting means, one game state type is determined by the determination means from among a plurality of game state types. An effect based on the game state type determined by the determining means is executed by the effect executing means.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute an effect based on the game state type of the second game state set by the game state setting means, and from the effect, the game set when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. There is an effect that the state type can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine S1, the effect executing means is capable of executing an effect based on the gaming state type before the first condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine S2, the effect based on the game state type is executed by the effect execution means before the first condition is satisfied, so that the variable ball entry means can enter the ball with respect to the player. Before the game, the type of the second game state set when the game ball does not enter the specific area can be predicted. Therefore, according to the predicted type of the second game state, the first game state is set by entering the game ball into the specific area, or the second game state is set without entering the specific area. This has the effect of allowing the player to select one.

  In the gaming machine S1 or S2, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on establishment of a discriminating condition, and a privilege for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. And a game execution means, wherein the first condition is established based on the result of the specific determination being made by the determination means, and the gaming state setting means is configured to execute one of the privilege games. When the game ball enters the specific area during execution of the special game, the first game state is set as a game state after the bonus game is completed, and the specific area is A game machine S3 for setting the second game state as a game state after the end of the privilege game when the game ball does not enter the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine S3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed based on a specific determination result obtained by the determination means. The first condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit. When a game ball enters the specific area during execution of the first privilege game, the first game state is set by the game state setting means as a game state after the privilege game is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the one privilege game, the second game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the privilege game is completed.

  Thereby, the game state after the privilege game is completed can be made different depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during execution of the privilege game. A game can be played by paying attention to whether or not a game ball enters. Therefore, there is an effect that the game during the execution of the privilege game can be prevented from being monotonous.

  In any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the plurality of gaming state types include at least a first type and a second type more advantageous to the player than the first type. Gaming machine S4.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the plurality of gaming state types include a first type and a second type that is more advantageous to the player than the first type. Since it is at least included, it is possible to predict from the effect whether the second game state set when the game ball does not enter the specific area is the first type or the second type. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play a game in expectation of the performance corresponding to the second type.

  In any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, based on a specific condition being satisfied in a state where the second gaming state is set, the game machine shifts to a third gaming state more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming machine S5 comprising special state setting means for setting a special state that is easy to shift to, and wherein the game state types are different from each other in the ease with which the specific condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines S1 to S4, the following effects are achieved. That is, based on the specific condition being satisfied in the state where the second game state is set, the special state which is easier to shift to the third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is a special state setting means. Is set by The game state types are configured such that the specific conditions are easily satisfied.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the game can be performed in expectation that the effect corresponding to the game state type in which the specific condition is easily satisfied will be executed.

  In the gaming machine S5, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and a privilege game execution for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means. Means, and wherein the specific condition is defined by the number of consecutive out-of-range determination results different from the specific determination result.

  According to the gaming machine S6, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S5. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. A privilege game advantageous to the player is executed by the privilege game execution means based on the specific result of the determination by the determination means. The specific condition is defined by the number of consecutive out-of-range determination results different from the specific determination result.

  As a result, the possibility of transition to the special state increases as the result of the separation determination increases, so that in the second game state, a novel gaming property of performing a game with the expectation that the separation determination result is continuous is realized. There is an effect that can be.

<Characteristic T group> (Continuously output sound effects on multiple channels)
Voice data output means for outputting voice data, voice sounding means for generating voice based on the voice data output by the voice data output means, and execution of voice production in which a specific voice is output from the voice voice generating means Voice effect execution means for setting the sound effect, wherein the type of voice effect executed by the voice effect execution means includes a plurality of voice data corresponding to the specific voice during a predetermined period by the voice data output means. A gaming machine T1 characterized by including at least a plurality of modes output repeatedly.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines include a sound output device such as a speaker in the configuration. In such a conventional gaming machine, an effect of outputting a sound such as a predetermined music or a sound effect from an audio output device is performed as a kind of entertainment effect, thereby improving the interest. Also, in some conventional gaming machines, even in the same type of production, the production mode is diversified by making the output sound different depending on the production result (for example, JP-A-2014-184177). Gazette).

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, since different audio data is output for each effect mode, there is a problem in that the capacity of stored audio data increases with diversification of the audio mode. Was.

  According to the gaming machine T1, a sound is generated based on the sound data output by the sound data output means. Execution of a sound effect in which a specific sound is output from the sound sounding device is set by the sound effect execution device. The type of sound effect performed by the sound generating means includes at least a plurality of modes in which sound data corresponding to a specific sound is output by the sound data output means a plurality of times during a predetermined period.

  Thereby, since an auditory effect can be performed, there is an effect that the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, in a plurality of aspects, since the sound effect can be executed using only the sound data corresponding to the specific sound, there is an effect that the sound data can be reduced.

  The gaming machine T1 includes a plurality of output units capable of outputting audio data, and the audio data output unit is configured to output one of the plurality of output units when the plurality of aspects of the audio effect are being performed. The audio data corresponding to the specific audio is output to the output unit different from the output unit that previously output the audio data, and the audio pronunciation unit is output to the plurality of output units. A gaming machine T2 for producing a sound based on sound data.

  According to the gaming machine T2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T1. That is, a plurality of output units capable of outputting audio data are provided. In the case where a plurality of audio effects are being performed, a specific audio is output by the audio data output unit to an output unit different from the output unit that previously output the audio data among the plurality of output units. Is output. Voice is generated by the voice generating means based on the voice data output to the plurality of output units.

  Accordingly, even when a specific sound is continuously output in a short time in a plurality of modes, the specific sound based on the previously output audio data is generated because the specific sound based on the currently output audio data is generated. There is an effect that interruption can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine T2, the audio data output unit may be configured to output the next audio data before the output of the audio data whose output started immediately before is finished, in the case where the audio effects of the plurality of modes are being executed. A gaming machine T3 for starting to output data.

  According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine T2, when a plurality of modes of sound effects are being executed, the sound is output before the end of the output of the sound data whose output started immediately before is finished. Since the output of the next audio data is started by the data output means, the sound organs of the audio generated based on the audio data output continuously can be overlapped. Therefore, there is an effect that the expression of the voice effect can be diversified.

  In the gaming machine T2 or T3, a receiving unit that receives the audio data output to the plurality of output units, and a synthesizing unit that can generate synthesized audio data obtained by synthesizing the audio data received by the receiving unit. The gaming machine T4, characterized in that the voice generating means generates a voice based on the synthesized voice data generated by the synthesizing means.

  According to the gaming machine T4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T2 or T3. That is, a receiving unit that receives audio data output to a plurality of output units is provided. Synthesized voice data generated by synthesizing the voice data received by the receiving unit is generated by the synthesizing unit. A voice is generated by the voice generating unit based on the synthesized voice data generated by the synthesizing unit.

  Thus, since the sounding means only needs to sound the sound based on the synthesized speech data alone, there is an effect that the input to the sounding means can be simplified.

  In any of the gaming machines T2 to T4, the specific sound is a sound in which the amplitude of an acoustic waveform is maximized after a specific period has elapsed from the start of sounding. The means, when the plurality of aspects of the sound effect are being executed, output sound data corresponding to the specific sound at least at intervals shorter than the specific period. .

  According to the gaming machine T5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machines T2 to T4. That is, a sound having the maximum amplitude of the acoustic waveform is output after a specific period has elapsed since the sounding of the specific sound was started. In the case where a plurality of voice effects are being performed, voice data corresponding to a specific voice is output by the voice data output unit at least at intervals shorter than the specific period.

  Thus, the specific sound is continuously output at intervals shorter than the specific period, so that the audio of the portion where the amplitude of the acoustic waveform is maximum can be output at intervals shorter than the specific period. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of rendering can be further enhanced.

  In any of the gaming machines T1 to T5, a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the satisfaction of a discriminating condition, and executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when a discrimination result by the discriminating means indicates a specific discrimination result. A bonus game execution means, and a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating the determination result by the determination means, wherein the voice effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect. In an aspect, the gaming machine T6 is characterized in that the degree of expectation of the specific determination result is a type of voice effect higher than other types of voice effects.

  According to the gaming machine T6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines T1 to T6. That is, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. When a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed by the bonus game execution unit. A suggestion effect indicating the determination result by the determination unit is executed by the suggestion effect execution unit. The sound effect is executed during execution of the suggestion effect. The plurality of aspects are set to a type of sound effect in which the degree of expectation as a specific determination result is higher than other sound effect types.

  This makes it possible to suggest the degree of expectation to be a specific determination result by the voice effect, so that it is possible to concentrate on the player by the voice effect.

<Characteristic U group> (change of playability with V passing / non-passing)
Based on the establishment of the first condition, at least in a period until the second condition is satisfied, in a gaming machine having a variable ball entry means that is changed to a ball entry state in which game balls can enter, the first game state And a second game state that is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a ratio that is set to be more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state and that the state is shifted to the second game state. A game state setting means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a third game state set higher than the first game state; A specified area through which the game ball can pass, and a rate at which the first game state is set by the game state setting means when the game ball passes through the specified area, the second game state, and the third area. Set the game state higher than the set percentage, When the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the rate at which the third game state is set by the game state setting means is higher than the rate at which the first game state and the second game state are set. A gaming machine U1 comprising: a ratio setting unit that sets the ratio higher.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. Some of such gaming machines can vary the number of prize balls that can be obtained at the start of the hit, depending on the type of gate through which the player has passed the game ball before the start of the hit. is there. That is, the first gate where the winning of the prize ball can be started on average, the second gate where the winning of a small amount of the prize ball and the second gate where the large amount of the prize ball can be obtained are started. There is a gate provided with a gate. In such a conventional gaming machine, by allowing the player to select one of the first gate and the second gate, it is possible to select the area that suits the taste of each player.

  However, in such a conventional gaming machine, only the winning prize balls that can be obtained per hit can be made different, and there is no room for the player to select a gaming property during a normal game. That is, there is a risk that the normal game will be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine U1, the first gaming state, the second gaming state that is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the player are set to be more disadvantageous than the first gaming state, Further, one gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state in which the ratio of shifting to the second gaming state is set higher than the first gaming state. You. When the game ball has passed through a specific area through which the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means can pass, the ratio of the first game state set by the game state setting means to the second game state and the third game state The state is set by the ratio setting means so as to be higher than the set ratio. On the other hand, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the rate at which the third game state is set by the game state setting means is higher than the rate at which the first game state and the second game state are set. Is set by the ratio setting means as described above.

  Thereby, depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state setting means can switch between the setting ratio of the first game state and the setting ratio of the third game state. it can. Therefore, for a player who wants to shift to the first game state, it is possible to cause the player to play a game so that the game ball passes through the specific area, while shifting to the third game state, A player who wants to shift to the advantageous second game state can play a game so that the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Therefore, since the player can select a game state that matches the taste of each player, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine U1, the gaming machine has a probability setting means for setting the probability of the first condition to be higher when the game ball passes through the specific area until the changing condition is satisfied. U2.

  According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U1, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the probability setting means sets the probability that the first condition is satisfied until the change condition is satisfied. Is done.

  Thereby, there is an effect that the player can feel the merit of passing through the specific area. In other words, when a game ball is passed through a specific area, the ratio of setting the first gaming state in which the player's advantage is low is set high, but the probability that the first condition is satisfied is set high. The appeal of passing to the area can be felt. Thereby, it is possible to select whether or not to pass a game ball to a specific area by a player who desires high gambling and a stable-oriented player who desires low gambling, thereby satisfying various players. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the gaming state setting means compares the other gaming state to the second gaming state based on a specific condition being satisfied in a state where the third gaming state is set. A gaming machine U3 for setting a fourth gaming state in which the game is easily shifted.

  According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine U1 or U2, based on the specific condition being satisfied in the state where the third gaming state is set, the game state is changed to the second gaming state and to another gaming state. The fourth game state which is relatively easy to shift is set by the game state setting means. Therefore, by setting the third game state, it is possible to make the player expect the fourth game state to be set, and it is possible to increase the attractiveness of not passing through the specific area.

  In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U3, the first condition determining means for determining whether the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition determining means determining that the first condition is satisfied. And a variable pattern determining means for determining one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns as a variable pattern of the variable ball entry means, wherein the variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means includes a game ball. At least a first variable pattern that makes it easy to enter a region and a second variable pattern that makes it harder for a game ball to enter the specific region than the first variable pattern are set. Gaming machine U4.

  According to the gaming machine U4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines U1 to U3. Whether the first condition is satisfied is determined by the first determining means, and when the first condition is satisfied by the first condition determining means, one variable pattern is changed from a plurality of variable patterns as a variable pattern of the variable ball-in means. It is determined by the pattern determining means. The variable pattern determined by the variable pattern determining means includes a first variable pattern in which a game ball easily enters a specific area and a second variable pattern in which a game ball does not easily enter a specific area than the first variable pattern. The pattern is set at least.

  Thereby, the frequency of entering the specific area can be varied by the variable pattern determined when the first condition is satisfied, so that the set gaming state can be controlled.

  In the gaming machine U4, the gaming state setting means shifts to the second gaming state in comparison with other gaming states based on a specific condition being satisfied in a state where the third gaming state is set. The third game state is set when the first variable pattern is determined rather than when the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means. The gaming machine U5, wherein when the state is set, the specific condition is easily set.

  According to the gaming machine U5, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U4. That is, based on the specific condition being satisfied in the state where the third game state is set, the fourth game state that is easier to shift to the second game state than the other game states is set by the game state setting means. Is set. The specific condition is more likely to be satisfied when the third game state is set when the first variable pattern is determined than when the second variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern determination means.

  Thus, when the first variable pattern that allows the game ball to easily enter the specific area is set, the player can feel the merit of not dare to pass through the specific area.

  In the gaming machine U3 or U5, the specific condition is satisfied when the first condition determining means determines that the first condition is not satisfied a predetermined number of times. .

  According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine U3 or U5, when the first condition determining means determines that the first condition is not satisfied a predetermined number of times, the specific condition is satisfied. When one condition is not satisfied, the degree of expectation of the player for the third game state can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the game characteristics can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic V group> (Big hit where puncturing is more advantageous)
Discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on satisfaction of a discriminating condition; privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game advantageous to a player based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the discriminating means; The game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed when the game ball enters the specific area in the specific area where the game ball can enter during the execution of the game and the special area in one of the privilege games. Game state setting means for setting a first game state, and setting a second game state different from the first game state when a game ball does not enter the specific area in one of the privilege games; A type determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of privilege games including at least a first privilege game as a type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means; and executing the first privilege game. During said The degree of advantage of the first game state, which is set based on the fact that the game ball has entered the fixed area, is determined to be that the game ball did not enter the specific area during execution of the first privilege game. A gaming machine V1 comprising: an advantage degree setting unit that sets the degree of advantage of the second game state to be equal to or less than the degree of advantage set based on the second game state.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when a result of a lottery performed based on winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening is a winning. In such a gaming machine, as a state after the winning state is completed, one of a normal state in which the winning is drawn with a normal probability and a probable state in which the winning is drawn with a higher probability than the normal probability are set. Something is possible. In addition, as a method of determining the post-hit state, when a game ball enters a specific area during a hit, a probable change state is set as the post-hit state, and the game ball enters a specific area during the hit. It is known that a normal state is set as a hit state when a ball is not hit.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probable change state is more advantageous than the normal state, and the player is discouraged when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the hit. There was a risk of causing this.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine V1, the discrimination is executed based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, and based on the specific discrimination result obtained by the discrimination by the discrimination means, the bonus game execution means is advantageous to the player. A bonus game is executed. A specific area is provided in which a game ball can enter during execution of a bonus game. When the game ball enters the specific area in the first privilege game, the first game state is set by the game state setting means as the game state after the execution of the privilege game is completed. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the specific area in one privilege game, a second game state different from the first game state is set by the game state setting means. As the type of privilege game executed by the privilege game executing means, one type is determined by the type determining means from a plurality of types of privilege games including at least the first privilege game. The degree of advantage of the first game state, which is set based on the game ball entering the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game, is determined by the advantage degree setting means during the execution of the first privilege game. It is set to be equal to or less than the degree of advantage of the second game state which is set based on the fact that the game ball has not entered.

  Thereby, at least in the case of the first privilege game, the advantage degree is higher when the game ball does not enter the specific area than when the game ball enters the specific area. Even if the game ball does not enter, there is an effect that discouragement of the player can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine V1, the first gaming state is such that the probability of the specific determination result in the determination by the determining means is set to a first probability, and the second gaming state is determined by the determining means. The game machine V2, wherein the probability of the specific determination result is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  According to the gaming machine V2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V1. That is, in the first game state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination unit is set as the first probability. In the second game state, the probability that a specific determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means is set to a second probability lower than the first probability.

  Thereby, even though the first gaming state has a higher probability of being a specific determination result, the first privilege game is executed, and when the second gaming state is set, the first bonus game is performed more than the first gaming state. Since the degree of advantage is increased, a novel game property can be realized in which a game can be played in the expectation that the probability of a specific determination result becomes low.

  In the gaming machine V1 or V2, the gaming state setting means determines whether the first condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set, or the second condition in the state where the second gaming state is set. Is established, a third game state which is more disadvantageous than any of the first game state and the second game state is set, and the advantage degree setting means sets the first game state. The gaming machine V3, wherein the setting is such that the second condition when the second gaming state is set is more difficult to be satisfied than the first condition when the second gaming state is set.

  According to the gaming machine V3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1 or V2. That is, when the first condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, and when the second condition is satisfied when the second game state is set, the first game is set by the game state setting means. A third game state which is more disadvantageous than any of the state and the second game state is set. The degree of advantage is set by the advantage setting means such that the second condition when the second game state is set is more difficult to be satisfied than the first condition when the first game state is set.

  Accordingly, when the game ball does not enter the specific area during execution of the first privilege game, the second condition is hard to be satisfied, and the disadvantageous third game state is hard to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the game ball does not enter the specific area.

  In the gaming machine V3, the first condition and the second condition are defined by the number of consecutive out-of-range determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination unit. The gaming machine V4, wherein the setting means sets a larger number of consecutive times of the deviation determination result in the second condition than in the first condition.

  According to the gaming machine V4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine V3. That is, the first condition and the second condition are defined by the number of consecutive out-of-range determination results different from the specific determination result in the determination by the determination unit. The advantage degree setting means sets a greater number of consecutive times of the departure determination result in the second condition than in the first condition.

  Thereby, in the second game state set when the game ball does not enter the specific area during the execution of the first privilege game, the state is shifted from the first game state until the transition to the third game state. Can be discriminated by the discriminating means a large number of times, so that the possibility of a specific discrimination result can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines V3 and V4, the advantage degree setting means may set the second condition to be smaller than an expected value of the specific determination result within the number of determinations by the determination means set as the first condition. The first condition and the second condition are set so that an expected value which is the specific determination result becomes higher within the number of times of determination by the determination unit set as above. Gaming machine V5.

  According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect provided by either the gaming machine V3 or V4, the second condition is set to be smaller than the expected value that will result in a specific determination within the number of determinations made by the determination means set as the first condition. The first condition and the second condition are set by the degree-of-advantage setting means so that the expected value which is a specific judgment result becomes higher within the number of judgments made by the judgment means set as “1”. When the game is executed, the expected value that is a specific determination result before the game ball transitions to the third game state is higher when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can make a selection not to pass through the specific area.

  In any one of the gaming machines V3 to V5, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball, an open position at which the game ball can easily enter the ball entry means, and a game ball entered as compared to the open position. A variable means that can be changed to a closed position that is difficult to ball, and a variable control means that controls a variable operation of the variable means, wherein the determination means determines that a game ball has entered the ball entry means. The third game state is a state in which the variable means is less likely to be changed to the open position by the variable control means as compared with the second game state. Gaming machine V6.

  According to the gaming machine V6, the following effects are achieved in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines V3 to V5. That is, the variable means changes between an open position where the game ball easily enters the ball entry means and a closed position where the game ball is unlikely to enter the ball compared to the open position. The variable operation of the variable means is controlled by the variable control means. A determination is performed by the determination unit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry unit. The third game state is configured such that the variable means is easily changed to the open position by the variable control means as compared with the second game state.

  Accordingly, in the second game state, the variable means is more easily changed to the open position than in the third game state, so that there is an effect that the determination by the determination means can be performed efficiently.

<Characteristic AA group>
Determining means capable of performing the determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific game. Special game type determining means for determining the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means; and type information on the type of the special game executed by the special game executing means is specified by the identification information. And a suggestion means for suggesting when the determination result is displayed.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known in which a lottery is performed in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and a variable effect or a hit effect according to the result of the lottery is displayed on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among these types of pachinko machines, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can improve amusement of a game by setting a plurality of winning types and making the effect different according to the winning type (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2010-057541).

  In this kind of pachinko machine and the like, it has been required to further improve the interest in the game.

  This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, since the type information on the type of the special game is suggested when the specific determination result is displayed by the identification information, it is executed not only when the determination result is obtained but also when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific game. The type of the special game to be performed can be recognized in advance, and the motivation for the satisfaction of the specific condition can be varied, so that the effect of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AA1, variable ball-entering means capable of changing between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter game balls than the open state, and ball entry into the variable ball-in means A specific area through which the game ball can pass, wherein the specific game execution means changes the variable ball-in means from the closed state to the open state as the specific game, The game machine AA2, wherein the condition is satisfied based on a game ball passing through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AA1, when the specific game is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, thereby improving the interest of the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the suggestion means adds the type information to the identification information and causes the identification information to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the type information is added to the identification information by the suggestion means and displayed, so that the player can easily recognize the type information. is there.

  In the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the type information is displayed when the specific game is being executed, and is continuously displayed even when a game ball does not pass through the specific area. Gaming machine AA4.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, the type information is displayed even when the specific game is being executed, and is continuously displayed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area. , It can be suggested what kind of special game was executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4 has a specific game type determining means for determining a type of a specific game executed by the specific game executing means, and the special game type determining means is executed by the specific game executing means. A gaming machine AA5, wherein the type of the special game is determined in accordance with the type of the specific game to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, the type of the special game is determined according to the type of the specific game, so that the awareness of the specific game can be raised. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature AB group>
Determining means capable of performing the determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means, and when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means Special game execution means capable of executing a special game based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the specific game. And a special game type determining means for determining a type of the special game executed by the special game executing means, and a type relating to the type of the special game executed when the specific condition is satisfied by the special game executing means. A game machine AB1 having information indicating means for indicating information before the specific game is started.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known in which a lottery is performed in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and a variable effect or a hit effect according to the result of the lottery is displayed on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among these types of pachinko machines, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can improve amusement of a game by setting a plurality of winning types and making the effect different according to the winning type (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2010-057541).

  In this kind of pachinko machine and the like, it has been required to further improve the interest in the game.

  This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, since the type of the special game is suggested before the start of the specific game, there is an effect that the expectation for the special game can be raised before the specific condition is satisfied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine AB1 has dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information, and dynamic display period means for determining a dynamic display period for the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. The identification information is first identification information dynamically displayed corresponding to the dynamic display period, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed at least until the specific condition is satisfied when the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AB2 characterized by comprising two pieces of identification information.

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1, the second identification information is dynamically displayed until the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, even when the specific condition is satisfied and the special game is executed, the special game is executed. There is an effect that the execution of the game can be determined by the second identification information.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, a variable ball-in means capable of changing between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the open state; A specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and the specific game execution means, as the specific game, varies the variable ball input means from the closed state to the open state, The gaming machine AB3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied based on a game ball passing through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, when the specific game is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, and to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, the second identification information is constituted by a plurality of symbol columns, and when the specific determination result is obtained, one of the symbol columns is selected from the plurality of symbol columns. The dynamic display period elapses in a reach display mode in which the symbol sequence excluding is displayed in a stop display or a temporary stop display in a manner capable of indicating that the symbol sequence is the specific determination result and the one symbol column is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AB4, which is dynamically displayed for a period after the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB3, the second identification information is displayed in the reach display mode after the elapse of the dynamic display period. There is an effect that it is possible to easily notify that the special game is started by being stopped and displayed in a mode for indicating that the special game is started.

<Characteristic AC group>
Determining means capable of executing the determination, display means for displaying identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determining means, and identification for indicating the first determination result as the determination result on the display means When the information is displayed, the first specific game can be executed, and when the identification information for indicating the second determination result different from the first determination result is displayed, the second specific game is performed. An execution of the second specific game, after the execution of the first specific game, based on a specific condition being satisfied during the execution of the first specific game. And a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, wherein the specific effect execution means executes the second specific game. During the execution period, If the serial specified condition is satisfied even gaming machine AC1, characterized in that it is intended to perform the specific effect.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine has been known in which a lottery is performed in accordance with a prize of a game ball to a starting port, and a variable effect or a hit effect according to the result of the lottery is displayed on a liquid crystal screen. In such an effect, various patterns of effects such as an effect for giving the player a sense of expectation and an effect for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . Among these types of pachinko machines, there has been proposed a gaming machine that can improve amusement of a game by setting a plurality of winning types and making the effect different according to the winning type (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-163873). 2010-057541).

  In this kind of pachinko machine and the like, it has been required to further improve the interest in the game.

  This technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has an object to provide a gaming machine with improved interest in gaming.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution period of the second specific game, the specific effect is executed, the second specific game passes through the first specific game, and the second specific game is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to make the user feel as if the game is being executed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AC1, first variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which it is more difficult to enter game balls than the open state; A specific area through which game balls entering the means can pass, wherein the specific game execution means changes the variable ball input means from the closed state to the open state as the first specific game. The gaming machine AC2, wherein the specific condition is satisfied based on a game ball passing through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC1, when the first specific game is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area, and to enjoy the game. There is an effect that can be improved.

  The gaming machine AC2 has a second variable pitching means different from the first variable pitching means, and the second specific game is executed by displaying the identification information for indicating the second determination result. If the predetermined variable condition is satisfied after the first variable ball input means is changed to the open state, the second variable ball input means is changed to the open state. The gaming machine AC3, wherein, when the second specific game is executed by satisfying the specific condition, the second variable ball entry means is changed to the open state.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine AC2, the second specific game executed through the first specific game is also executed in the second specific game executed when the second determination result is determined. There is an effect that can be made to think.

  In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the second identification information indicates a determination result different from the specific determination result based on the fact that the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution period of the first specific game. A gaming machine AC4 that is stopped and displayed in a manner for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, there is an effect that the player can easily be notified that the specific condition is not satisfied and the second specific game is not executed.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M7, N1 to N12, O1 to O11, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R6, S1 to S6, T1 to T6, U1 to U6, V1 to V6, AA1 to AA5, AB1 to AB4, AC1 to The gaming machine Z1 according to any one of AC4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in response to operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided in an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operating port), there is a case where the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M7, N1 to N12, O1 to O11, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R6, S1 to S6, T1 to T6, U1 to U6, V1 to V6, AA1 to AA5, AB1 to AB4, AC1 to The gaming machine Z2 according to any one of AC4, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is as follows. The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C4, D1 to D3, E1 to E5, F1 to F5, G1 to G5, H1 to H4, I1 to I5, J1 to J4, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M7, N1 to N12, O1 to O11, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R6, S1 to S6, T1 to T6, U1 to U6, V1 to V6, AA1 to AA5, AB1 to AB4, AC1 to The gaming machine Z3 according to any one of AC4, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Others>
Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, so that a big hit game advantageous to the player is given. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with a sound output device such as a speaker, and not only a visual effect but also an auditory effect can be performed to achieve the effect of the effect. By diversifying, interest was improved (for example, Patent Document 1: JP-A-2003-325886).
However, there is a demand for further improvement in interest.
The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 operates an effect executing means for executing an effect, an operating means having an operating section operable by a player, and an operating section of the operating means. A signal output means capable of outputting a signal, a signal discrimination means for discriminating the signal output by the signal output means, and the effect based on a specific discrimination result obtained by discrimination by the signal discrimination means. Effect variable setting means for setting the content of the effect executed by the execution means to be variable, wherein a contact portion that can be touched by a player, and the contact portion can be moved. A movable means, a movable control means for controlling the movable means based on movable data, and a data setting means for setting the movable data controlled by the movable control means, The signal output means is configured to output a first signal as the signal based on a first operation and to output at least a second signal different from the first signal based on a second operation different from the first operation. The signal discriminating means is capable of discriminating a type of the signal output by the signal output means, and the data setting means is configured to determine the operation result of the specific discrimination based on satisfaction of a specific condition. The above-mentioned specific movable data which suggests the operation of is set.
The gaming machine according to the second technical concept is the gaming machine according to the first technical concept, wherein the movable unit vibrates the contact unit as a movable operation of the contact unit.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the specific movable data moves the first position of the contact portion by a different moving operation from other positions. A plurality of movable data including at least first specific data for the operation unit, wherein the data setting unit performs the first operation when the operation of the operation unit that is the specific determination result is the first operation. The first specific data is set as specific movable data.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, further comprising a rotatable rotating member, and the movable means sets the rotating member at a predetermined position different from the center of gravity of the rotating member. The rotation control means controls the rotation of the rotation motor at a rotation speed corresponding to the movable data.
The gaming machine according to the technical concept 5 is the gaming machine according to the technical concept 4, wherein the first specific data indicates a rotational speed before and after the rotating member passes a position closest to the first position, This is data for setting a rotation speed different from the rotation speed when passing through another position.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the contact portion that can be touched by the player is moved by the movable means. The movable means is controlled by the movable control means based on the movable data. The movable data controlled by the movable control means is set by the data setting means. Based on the first operation, a first signal is output as a signal by the signal output means. On the other hand, a second signal different from the first signal is output by the signal output means based on a second operation different from the first operation. The type of the signal output by the signal output means is determined by the signal determination means. Specific movable data indicating an operation of the operation unit that becomes a specific determination result based on establishment of a specific condition is set by the data setting unit.
Thereby, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the movable means moves so that the contact portion vibrates as the movable operation of the contact portion. Thus, there is an effect that a player who wants to know an operation that results in a specific determination result can positively touch the contact portion.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are exerted. That is, among the contact portions, a plurality of movable data including at least first specific data for moving the first position by a movable operation different from other positions is provided as specific movable data. When the operation of the operation unit that results in the specific determination is the first operation, the data setting unit sets the first specific data as the specific movable data.
Thus, by paying attention to the movable operation of the first position, there is an effect that the player can easily understand whether the first operation is an operation that results in a specific determination result.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effects can be obtained. That is, the movable means is constituted by a rotation motor for rotating the rotatable rotation member about a predetermined position different from the position of the center of gravity as a rotation axis. At a rotation speed corresponding to the movable data, the rotation operation of the rotation motor is controlled by the movable control means.
As a result, during the rotation of the rotating member, the centrifugal force acts strongly in the direction from the rotation axis to the position of the center of gravity. it can.
Therefore, there is an effect that a player who wants to know an operation that is a specific determination result from the vibration operation can be positively touched with the contact portion.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, the first specific data is obtained before and after the rotating member passes through the position closest to the first position. Since the rotation speed is constituted by data for setting the rotation speed to a speed different from the rotation speed when passing through another position, the centrifugal force acting on the rotating member before and after the first position is changed to another position. The size can be different from the centrifugal force at.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to easily understand whether the first operation is an operation having a specific determination result only by comparing the magnitude of the vibration at the first position with another position.

10. Pachinko machines (game machines)
310 Swinging operation member (operating means, accessible part )
380 Vibration motor (movable means)
382 Eccentric member (rotating member)
385 Tilt sensor (signal output means)
S3103 signal discriminating means S3105 effect variable setting means S3408 data setting means , movable control means
S3504 to S3506 movable control means

Claims (1)

Effect execution means for executing an effect,
An operation means configured to be operable by a player, the operation means being variable to a plurality of operation positions including at least a first operation position and a second operation position different from the first operation position ;
Based on the fact that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means while the effect is being executed by the effect executing means, the effect mode of the effect being executed by the effect executing means is determined in advance. Effect variable setting means that is set to be changed to one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes including at least the specified effect mode ,
And the accessible part which the player can touch,
A rotating member capable of rotating operation,
A movable means capable of moving the tangible part by rotating the rotating member with a predetermined position at least different from the position of the center of gravity of the rotating member as a rotation axis ;
Movable control means for movably controlling the movable means so that the rotating member rotates at a rotational speed corresponding to predetermined movable data;
As the movable data, one movable data is set from among a plurality of movable data including at least first movable data capable of moving the first position in the touchable portion by a different movable operation from other positions. Data setting means ,
The effect variable setting means changes the effect state of the effect to one of the plurality of effect modes based on the operation means being changed to one of the plurality of operation positions. It is configured so that it can be set,
The data setting unit is configured to execute the first movable data based on a determination that execution of the type of effect that can be changed to the specific effect mode is determined by changing the operation unit to the first operation position. It is configured to be able to set,
The first position is configured to include a position including at least an intersection of a straight line corresponding to a variable direction when the operation unit is changed toward the first operation position and the touchable portion. A gaming machine characterized by: